OF THE
[ Ai
No
Division
Range / ~r~s2.
Shelf^. .:. : L
Received tLz&t J^fS^- l
z-13.
H PRESENTED TO THE
g. Library of the University of California, s
|4^^£Sl^; ■&,
\ (£cA. fldr A. S>. 1873, J
O/
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2007 with funding from
Microsoft Corporation
http://www.archive.org/details/compendiousgrammOOcrosrich
COMPENDIOUS GREEK GRAMMAR.
COMPENDIOUS GRAMMAR
OF THE
'Com L &n di&uLZ
GREEK LANGUAGE.
By ALPHEUS CEOSBT,
PROFESSOR EMERITUS OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE IN DARTMOUTH COLLEGE.
wooLWOETHrsejgBESBE^^ company,
51, 53, & 55 JOHN STREET, NEW YORK,
HI STATE STREET, CHICAGO.
1871.
7f3
" The Language of the Greeks was truly like themselves, it was con-
formable to their transcendent and universal Genius The Greek
Tongue, from its propriety and universality, is made for all that is great, and
all that is beautiful, in every Subject, and under every Form of writing." —
Harris's Hermes, Bk. III., Ch. 6.
11 Greek, — the shrine of the" genius of the old world; as universal as our
race, as individual as ourselves ; of infinite flexibility, of indefatigable strength,
with the complication and the distinctness of Nature herself; to which nothing
was vulgar, from which nothing was excluded ; speaking to the ear like Italian,
speaking to the mind like English ; with words like pictures, with words like
the gossamer film of the summer; at once the variety and picturesqueness of
Homer, the gloom and the intensity of jEschylus ; not compressed to the closest
by Thucydides, not fathomed to the bottom by Plato, not sounding with all
its thunders, nor lit up with all its ardors even under the Promethean touch
of Demosthenes! " — Coleridge's Study of the Greek Classic Poets.
Vignette: Temple of Theseus at Athens.
''Athens, the eye of Greece." — Milton.
9f3
Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1871,
BY ALPHEUS CROSBY,
in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington.
University Press: Welch, Bigelow, & Co.,
Cambridge.
PREFACE.
The motto on the title-page, from old Theognis if not the older
Cleobulus, indicates the principle on which this treatise has been
prepared. There has been throughout an earnest effort to carry
nothing to excess, neither insertion nor omission, but to write that
" Middle " Grammar which, it might be hoped, the old moralist
would approve, if he were at my side. The Tables, that mnemonic
associations may not be disturbed, are throughout the same as in
the larger grammar upon which this is based ; and so little of prac-
tical precept has been omitted from the text of the latter, that many
might regard this condensed edition as still large enough for the ob-
ject stated in the original preface to the fuller work : " to supply
what was believed to be a desideratum in the list of Greek text-
books ; viz., a grammar which should be portable and simple enough
to be put into the hands of the beginner, and which should yet be
sufficiently scientific and complete to accompany him through his
whole course." Even slight variations of phraseology have been
avoided, with few and unimportant exceptions ; and the division
here made into sections and their parts, and the references to these,
apply throughout to the fuller edition ; so that the two editions might
even be used together in the same class without inconvenience.
They are really one and the same work, unum et idem ; except that
the screw of compression, which had been before so severely applied,
has here received a few more turns.
It must be confessed, however, that the arguments in favor of a
short grammar have far less strength for the Greek than for the
Latin. The study of the latter language is usually commenced at an
earlier age, and when the learner is wholly new to philological ac-
quisition ; and it is also commenced by many who contemplate only a
brief course of classical study, and who therefore find in a brief gram-
mar, supplemented here and there by an able teacher, a supply of
their wants. , On the other hand, most of our students, in beginning
the study of Greek, have in view a college course ; and they begin it
with the experience and mental strength derived from the acquisi-
tion of the Latin. They know already how to use a grammar as,
what it mainly should be, a book of constant reference; and are
more troubled by not finding in it what they seek, than by the pres-
ence there of much that is not immediately needed, — with which,
COMP. GR. /* _ —
^10
PREFACE.
however, as lying before the eye, they are gaming without effort
some acquaintance in anticipation of future wants. At least they
will better know, — a large part of knowledge, — where tojind what
they want.
It may be added that the Greek, from the much greater fulness
of its forms and variety of its constructions, cannot be as adequately
treated as the Latin, except in a larger volume. Mr. Marsh, in his
able Lectures on the English Language, thus distinguishes : " The
grammar of the Greek language is much more flexible, more tolerant
of aberration, less rigid in its requirements, than the Latin. The
precision, which the regularity of Latin syntax gives to a period,
the Greek more completely and clearly accomplishes by the nicety
with which individual words are defined in meaning ; and while the
Latin trains us to be good grammarians, the Greek elevates us to
the highest dignity of manhood by making us acute and powerful
thinkers." The greater need of explanation which results from this
fulness and freedom, calls for additional space ; for, as Professor Cur-
tius has well remarked, " Memory can neither accurately grasp the
great variety of Greek forms nor retain them, unless it be supported
by an analyzing and combining intelligence, which furnishes, as it
were, the hooks and cement to strengthen that whieh has been learned,
and permanently impress it upon the mind."
In respect to form, the present treatise should not be judged as an
independent work, but as a condensed edition of a larger work, from
the form of which it was deemed important to depart as little as pos-
sible. Thus, some references to authors, which are there fully made,
are here given partially in preference to omitting them altogether.
For fuller illustration and explanation on many points, will the reader
pardon, once for all, a reference to the larger grammar ? And will
he permit the statement of principles and acknowledgments in its
preface to be here understood without repetition, — the rather for a
reason which will appear in the next paragraph ?
The occurrence of some spaces in printing the Revised Grammar
presented a temptation to adorn it with a few extracts. In the pres-
ent form of printing, these spaces do not occur ; and, from a reluc-
tance to part with these gems, room has been found for them here,
— where, indeed, they seem to be placed even more appropriately,
as a fit introduction to the book. In their original position, they be-
long to sections 796, 171, 724, and 799. The last of these passages
is selected the rather because its author is Professor of Modern Lan-
guages, not of Greek, and is especially eminent as a Sanskrit scholar ;
as that in § 800, with a quotation above, because they occur in Lec-
tures, not on the Greek, but on the English Language, and by one
who has gained such distinction, both in public life, and by his
PREFACE. 5
scholarship in other than classic fields. The teacher of Greek, whose
judgment might be suspected of partiality, would not perhaps ven-
ture upon the strength of expression employed by the statesman-
scholar.
A. C.
"The reasons why we spend so long a time in acquiring a mastery
over the Greek Language are manifold. We do so partly because
it is one of the most delicate and perfect instruments for the expres-
sion of thought which was ever elaborated by the mind of man, and be-
cause it is therefore admirably adapted, both by its points of resemblance
to our own and other modern languages, and by its points of difference
from them, to give us the idea, or fundamental conception, of all Gram-
mar ; i. e. of those laws which regulate the use of the forms by which we
express our thoughts.
"Again, Greek is the key to one of the most astonishing and splendid
regions of literature which are open for the intellect to explore, — a
literature which enshrines works not only of imperishable interest, but
also of imperishable importance, both directly and historically, for the
development of human thought. It is the language in which the New
Testament was first written ; and into which the Old Testament was first
translated. It was the language spoken by the greatest poets, the greatest
orators, the greatest historians, the profoundest philosophers, the world
has ever seen. It was the language of the most ancient, the most elo-
quent, and in some respects the most important of the Christian fathers.
It contains the record of institutions and conceptions which lie at the base
of modern civilization ; and at the same time it contains the record, and
presents the spectacle, of precisely those virtues in which modern civiliza-
tion is most deficient.
" Nor is it an end only ; it is also a means. Even for those who never
succeed in reaping all the advantages which it places within their reach,
it has been found to be, in various nations and ages during many hundred
years, one of the very best instruments for the exercise and training
of the mind. It may have been studied irrationally, pedantically, and
too exclusively ; but though it is desirable that much should be super-
added, yet with Latin it will probably ever continue to be — what the
great German poet Goethe breathed a wish that it always should be —
the basis of all higher culture." — Earrar's Greek Syntax.
Inflection. — " Greek presents the most perfect specimen of
an inflectional, or synthetic language. A language which gets rid of in-
flections as far as possible, and substitutes separate words for each part
of the conception, is called an analytic language ; and next to the Chi-
nese, which has never attained to synthesis at all, few languages are more
analytic than the English. A synthetic language will express in one word
what requires many words for its expression in an analytic language :
e. g. ir€<j)i\^o-onai, / shall have been loved, Ich werde geliebt worden sein :
4>X €to j abierat, il s'en etait alle.
" The advantage of synthetic language lies in its compactness, precision,
and beauty of form ; analytic languages are clumsier, but they possibly
admit of greater accuracy of expression, and are less liable to misconcep-
tion. If they are inferior instruments for the imagination, they better
O PREFACE.
serve the purposes of reason. Splendid efflorescence is followed by ripe
fruit. The tendency of all languages, at least in historic times, is from
synthesis to analysis, e. g. from case-inflections to the use of prepositions,
and from tense-inflections to the use of auxiliaries. This tendency may
be seen by comparing any modern language with its ancestor, e. g. Italian
with Latin, Modern with Ancient Greek, Bengali with Sanskrit, Persian
with Zend, German with Gothic, or English with Anglo-Saxon.
" It is most important to observe that no inflection is arbitrary. Among
all the richly multitudinous forms assumed by the Greek and Latin verbs,
there is not one which does not follow some definite and ascertainable law.
Parsing loses its difficulty and repulsiveness, when it is once understood
that there is a definite recurrence of the same forms in the same meaning,
and that the distorted shape assumed by some words is not due to arbi-
trary license, but to regular and well understood laws of phonetic corrup-
tion." — Do. (from § 7 - 14 of Pt. I. ).
Prosodial Distinctions. — " Both accent and quantity have,
and must have some play in all languages. So long as speech is dic-
tated by thought and feeling, will men mark the more pregnant words
and syllables with a superior tension of the voice. And so long as con-
sonants remain solid, will it take a longer time to get over two of them in
pronunciation than over one. In Greek, both accent and quantity were
powerfully developed, so that whereas accent, the intellectual element,
overbore quantity in prose, in verse on the other hand quantity, the
musical element, overbore accent." — Clyde's Greek Syntax.
The Greek Problem. " What the inhabitants of the small city of
Athens achieved in philosophy, in poetry, in art, in science, in poli-
tics, is known to all of us ; and our admiration for them increases ten-
fold if, by a study of other literatures, such as the literatures of India,
Persia, and China, we are enabled to compare their achievements with
those of other nations of antiquity. The rudiments of almost everything,
with the exception of religion, we, the people of Europe, the heirs to a
fortune accumulated during twenty or thirty centuries of intellectual toil,
owe to the Greeks ; and, strange as it may sound, but few, I think, would
gainsay it, that to the present day the achievements of these our distant
ancestors and earliest masters, the songs of Homer, the dialogues of Plato,
the speeches of Demosthenes, and the statues of Phidias, stand, if not un-
rivalled, at least unsurpassed by anything that has been achieved by their
descendants and pupils.
"How the Greeks came to be what they were, and how, alone of all
other nations, they opened almost every mine of thought that has since
been worked by mankind ; how they invented and perfected almost every
style of poetry and prose which has since been cultivated by the greatest
minds of our race ; how they laid the lasting foundation of the principal
arts and sciences, and in some of them achieved triumphs never since
equalled, is a problem which neither historian nor philosopher has as yet
been able to solve. Like their own goddess Athene, the people of Athens
seem to spring full-armed into the arena of history ; and we look in vain
to Egypt, Syria, or India for more than a few of the seeds that burst into
such marvellous growth on the soil of Attica." — Lectures on the Science
of Language, by Max Muller, Professor of Modern European Languages
in the University of Oxford ; Second Series.
PREFACE TO THE TABLES.
The following tables have been prepared as part of a Greek Gram-
mar. They are likewise published separately, for the greater con-
venience and economy in their use. The advantages of a tabular
arrangement are too obvious to require remark; nor is it less obvi-
ous, that tables are consulted and compared with greater ease when
printed together, than when scattered throughout a volume.
The principles upon which the Tables of Paradigms have been
constructed are the following : —
I. To avoid needless repetition. There is a certain ellipsis in gram-
matical tables, as well as in discourse, which relieves not only the
material instruments of the mind, but the mind itself, and which as-
sists alike the understanding and the memory. When the student
has learned that, in the neuter gender, the nominative, accusative,
and vocative are always the same, why, in each neuter paradigm that
he studies, must his eye and mind be taxed with the examination of
nine forms instead of three ? why, in his daily exercises in declen-
sion, must his tongue triple its labor, and more than triple the weari-
ness of the teacher's ear ?
II. To represent the language according to its actual use, and not
according to the theories or fancies of the Alexandrine and Byzantine
grammarians. For a single example, where not a few might be
cited, the second future active and middle, which, except as a eu-
phonic form of the first future, is purely imaginary, has been wholly
rejected.
III. To distinguish between regular and irregular usage. What
student, from the common paradigms, does not receive the impres-
sion, sometimes never corrected, that the second perfect and pluper-
fect, the second aorist and future, and the third future belong as reg-
ularly to the Greek verb, as the first tenses bearing the same name ;
when, in point of fact, the Attic dialect, even including poetic usage,
presents only about fifty verbs which have the second perfect or
pluperfect ; eighty, which have the second aorist active ; fifty, which
have the second aorist or future passive; forty, which have the
second aorist middle; and thirty which have the third future? The
gleanings of all the other dialects will not double these numbers.
From the common paradigms, what student would hesitate, in
writing Greek, to employ the form in -fie8ov, little suspecting that it
is only a variety of the first person dual, so exceedingly rare, that
the learned Elmsley (perhaps too hastily) pronounced it a mere in-
8 PREFACE.
vention of the Alexandrine grammarians ? The teacher who meets
with it in his recitation-room may almost call his class, as the crier
called the Roman people upon the celebration of the secular games,
" to gaze upon that which they had never seen before, and would
never see again." And yet, in the single paradigm of tvttt<o, as I
learned it in my boyhood, this "needless Alexandrine"
" Which, like a wounded snake, drags its slow length along,"
occurs no fewer than twenty-six times, — almost nine times as often
as in the whole range of the Greek classics.
To some there may appear to be an impiety in attacking the ven-
erable shade of rvnTco, but alas ! it is little more than a shade, and,
with all my early and long cherished attachment to it, I am forced,
after examination, to exclaim, in the language of Electra,
s AvtI (pc\Tdrr)s
Mopcpijs, <riro86v re /ecu (TKikv avuxfrehrj,
and to ask why, in an age which professes such devotion to truth, a
false representation of an irregular verb should be still set forth as
the paradigm of regular conjugation, and made the Procrustes' bed to
which all other verbs must be stretched or pruned.*
With respect to the manner in which these tables should be used,
so much depends upon the age and attainments of the student, that
no directions could be given which might not require to be greatly
modified in particular cases. I would, however, recommend,
1. That the paradigms should not be learned en masse, but gradu-
ally, in connection with the study of the principles and rules of the
grammar, and with other exercises.
2. That some of the paradigms should rather be used for reference,
than formally committed to memory. It will be seen at once, that
some of them have been inserted merely for the sake of exhibiting
differences of accent, or individual peculiarities. *
3. That, in learning and consulting the paradigms, the student
should constantly compare them with each other, with the tables of
terminations, and with the rules of the grammar.
4. That the humble volume should not be dismissed from service,
till the paradigms are impressed upon the tablets of the memory as
legibly as upon the printed page, — till they have become so familiar
to the student, that whenever he has occasion to repeat them, li the
* In this edition, the example which takes the place of t^ittm is Xtfw, hap-
pily chosen by the sagacious Kriiger as convenient and economical of time
(zeitsparend), — a verb which presents, to the eye, the prefixes, stem, and affixes,
with entire distinctness and regularity throughout. A method of pronuncia-
tion now becoming common in our country renders the use of fiovkeiuu as a
verb of constant repetition less desirable than formerly, while it removes an
objection to the use of Xtfw. This paradigm, as well as some others, has been
the rather substituted as pi-esenting a closer analogy to the Latin.
PREFACE. 9
words," in the expressive language of Milton, "like so many nimble
and airy servitors, shall trip about him at command, and in well-
ordered files, as he would wish, fall aptly into their own places."
Hanover, August 10, 1841. A. C.
During the period that has passed since the preceding was writ-
ten, such great changes have taken place in the grammars used in
our schools and colleges, that some passages above seem almost to
require historic notes, and the earnestness of argument in others
may appear to students of the present generation like a Quixotic
joust with windmills. It seems difficult to believe that it is only
since that time that the use of tvttt<o as a paradigm, and the tedious
superfluities in -/xedov, have been dropped in our American grammars
(not yet in all) ; and it is certainly much harder to understand, with
all allowances for conservative force, why the latter are still so com-
monly retained in the grammars prepared for German and English
students. But time and labor are accounted of less value in the Old
World than in the New.
The Tables are printed, in the present edition, more compactly
than they have hitherto been, and with a distinction of type to assist
in the analysis of forms, which has also been made more minute. For
illustration and explanation, many Latin analogies and many refer-
ences to the text of the Grammar have been introduced, while other
examples have been proposed for further practice. A minute Cata-
logue of Verbs, with many references to authors, has been brought
within moderate compass, with the help of some abbreviations; while
the tenses commonly cited in parsing are so distinguished by larger
type, that the eye of the student will catch them at once.
It was believed that a few pages could not be better occupied than
by a very brief statement of some of the chief principles, definitions,
and figures of Syntax, and of a convenient System of Sentential
Analysis. As these belong to General Grammar, rather than to that
of any particular language, it seemed best, for economy of space and
greater clearness, to present the few examples which only could find
room, in our own language chiefly.
Full compensation, however, is made to the Greek in § 80, which
has been condensed from Dr. Clyde's Appendix to his valuable trea-
tise on Greek Syntax, with slight additions in brackets, and refer-
ences to parallel parts of the present grammar. We are truly his
debtors for presenting to us so concisely the received principles of
Greek Grammar, in language such as an ancient grammarian, writing
of course after the most classic period, might himself have used.
*** The volume of Tables contains pp. 1, 2, 7-10, 13-120.
1*
CONTENTS.
TABLES.
I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND
ORTHOEPY.
1. Alphabet § 1
2. Comparison of Alphabets . 2
3. Ligatures 3
4. Vocal Elements .... 4
5. Words classified according to
Accent 5
6. Figures affecting Letters and
Sounds 6
7. Contraction of Vowels . ' . 7
8. Consonant Changes ... 8
II. ETYMOLOGY.
A. Declension.
I. Cases classified 10
II. Affixes of Declension . . . 11
in. Elements of the Affixes . . 12
IV. Affixes analyzed and com-
pared with the Latin . . 13
v. Greek and Latin Paradigms
compared, \6pa, vairrjs, &c. 14
VI. Nouns of Declension I., ded,
fiovtra, $1?}, fivd, ra/xias, &c. 15
vii. Nouns of Declension II.,
Xop6s, vovs, ve&s, &bv, &c. . 16
viii. Nouns of Declension III.
A. Mute,7ity,0p*£,e\7ris,K\efs,
X&tw, <xG>na, <pG>s, icipas, &c. 17
B. Liquid, 6-qp, pis, avrjp, &c. 18
C . Pure, ids, ols, iroXis, iinrefo,
■f)X&, vavs, yivos, &<rrv, &c. 19
ix. Dialectic Forms of Declension 20
X. Irregular and Dialectic De-
clension, Zetfs, vl6s, S6pv, &c. 21
xi. Adjectives of Two Termina-
tions, AdtKos, <ra<f>-qs, &c. . 22
xii. Adjectives of Three Termi-
nations, /aw/jos, t)8ijs, &c. . 23
xiii. Numerals, ds,86o,Tpeis,kc. 25
xiv. Active Participles, XiW,&c 26
xv. Substantive Pronouns . . 27
xvi. Adjective Pronouns, 6, &c. 28
B. Comparison . . 29
C. Conjugation.
i. Distinctions classified ... 30
ii. Formation of the Tenses. . § 31
in. Analysis of the Verb . . 32
IV. Translation of wa^u) ... 34
v. Subjective Affixes analyzed
and compared .... 35
vi. Objective Affixes analyzed
and compai*ed . . . . 36
vii. General Paradigm, Xi5w . 37
2\nroi>, iriiroida, irpi^rju . 38
Viii. Classes of Verbs.
a. Mute, rpijSw, T&avw, &c. . 39
B. Liquid, dyy^Ww, (palvw . 40
c. Double-Consonant ... 41
D. Pure. i. Contract, Ttp.Gj,
<pi\£), 8rj\u>, drjpw, ir\£u), &c. 42
Latin Analogies ... 43
ii. Barytones in -«, 66b), &c. 44
iii. Verbs in -fii, fontfu,
Tldrjpu, 8i8o)/M, deiKvvfu,
t-qiXL, dpi,' elfii, (prjpi, &c. 45
E. Preteritives, otda, ^,ucu, &c. 46
ix. Relation of Tenses and Stem-
forms 47
x. Dialectic Forms .... 48
xi. Classes & Notation of Stems 49
xii. Catalogue of Verbs ... 50
D. Numerals . . 52
E. Pronominal Correlatives 53
F. Table of Derivation 54
G. Significant Elements 55
III. SYNTAX.
A. General Principles ... 56
B. Figures of Syntax .... 67
C. Forms of Analysis and Parsing 72
D. Chief Rules of Syntax . . 76
IV.
PROSODY AND PRO-
NUNCIATION.
A. Table of Feet ..... 77
B. Metrical Description and
Analysis ...... 78
C. Methods of Pronunciation . 79
Greek Appendix . . 80
CONTENTS.
It
Introduction. — Dialects § 81
BOOK I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY.
c. Apostrophe, or Elision . 127
Dialectic Variations . . .130
Ch. 4. Consonants . . . .137
Old Semivowels 138
Euphonic Changes,
A. In Formation of Words 147
B. In Connection of "Words 161
c. Special Rules . . . .165
Dialectic Variations . . .167
Ch. 1. Characters . . . . § 90
History of Orthography . . 97
Ch. 2. Figures 99
Ch. 3. Vowels 106
Syllabication Ill
i. Precession 113
ii. Union of Syllables . . .117
A. Contraction . . . .118
B. Crasis 124
BOOK II. ETYMOLOGY.
Divisions and Definitions . . 172
Ch. 1. Principles of Declen-
sion 173
A. Gender 174
b. Number, c. Case . . . 178
D. Methods and General Rules 180
e. History of Declension . .186
Ch. 2. Declension of Nouns.
i. First Declension . . . .194
Dialectic Forms . . . .197
II. Second Declension . . .199
Dialectic Forms . . . .201
in. Third Declension . . . 202
a. Mutes 203
B. Liquids 208
c. Pures 212
Dialectic Forms . . . .221
iv. Irregular Nouns . . . 223
Ch. 3. Adjectives .... 229
Ch. 4. Numerals .... 239
Ch. 5. Pronouns.
i. Substantive 243
ii. Adjective 249
Ch. 6. Comparison .... 256
I. Of Adjectives,
a. By -rcpos, -TaTos . . 257
b. By -fo>v, -ottos . . . 260
c. Irregular 262
ii. Of Adverbs 263
History of Comparison . . 264
Ch. 7. Principles of Conju-
gation 265
A. Voice 266
B. Tense 267
c. Mode 269
D. Number and Person . . 270
e. History of Conjugation . 271
Ch. 8. Prefixes of Conjuga-
tion.
i. Augment 277
ii. Reduplication .... 280
in. In Composition . . . 282
Dialectic Use 284
Ch. 9. Affixes of Conjuga-
tion.
I. Classification and Analysis 285
A. Tense-Signs . . . .288
B. Connecting Vowels . . 290
c. Flexible Endings. . . 295
II. Union with the Stem.
A. Consonant Changes . . 304
b. Vowel Changes . . . 309
c. -MI Form 313
D. Complete Tenses . . .317
Dialectic Forms 321
Ch. 10. Stem of the Verb . 336
I. Prime Stems 340
ii. Euphonic Stems . . . 341
in. Emphatic Stems . . . 346
iv. Adopted Stems .... 358
Ch. 11. Formation of Words 359
1. Of Simple Words . . .362
A. Nouns 363
B. Adjectives 373
c. Pronouns 377
d. Verbs 378
E. Adverbs 380
ii. Of Compound Words . . 383
BOOK III.. SYNTAX.
General Remarks 391
Ch. 1. The Substantive.
I. Agreement 393
II. Use of Cases 397
12
CONTEXTS.
A. Nominative . . . . § 400
B. Genitive 403
I. Of Departure . . . 404
1. Separation. . . . 405
2. Distinction . . . 406
II. Of Cause 410
A. 1. Origin .... 411
2. Material ... 412
3. Supply .... 414
4. Partitive . . . 415
b. 1. Motive, &c. . . 428
2. Price, Value, &c. 431
3. Sensible and Men-
tal Object . . 432
4. Time and Place . 433
c. Active . . ' . . . 434
D. Constituent . . . 435
1. Property . . . 440
2. Relation ... 441
C. Dative Objective ... 448
i. Of Approach .... 449
1. Nearness .... 450
2. Likeness .... 451
II. Of Influence . . . 452
D. Dative Residual . . . 465
I. Instrumental and Modal 466
II. Temporal and Local . 469
E. Accusative 470
i. Of Direct Object, &c. . 472
Double Accusative . . 480
li. Of Specification . . 481
in. Of Extent .... 482
iv. Adverbial . . . . 483
F. Vocative 484
Remarks on the Cases . . 485
III. Use of Numbers, Gen-
ders, and Persons . 488
Rules of Agreement . . 492
Ch. 2. Adjective and Pro-
noun.
i. Agreement .... 504
ii. On the Adjective . . 506
in. Use of Degrees ... § 510
iv. Use of the Article.
A. Broad Use .... 516
b. Article Proper . . . 520
V. On the Pronoun . . . 535
A. Personal, &c. ... 536
B. Avt6s 540
c. Demonstrative . . . 542
p. Indefinite 548
e. Relative 549
F. Complementary and In-
terrogative .... 563
G. "AWos and "Erepos . . 567
Ch. 3. The Verb.
I. Agreement 568
II. Use of the Voices . . 575
a. Active 577
b. Middle 578
C. Passive 586
III. Use of the Tenses . . 590
A. Definite and Indefinite 591
b. Complete 599
c. Interchange .... 602
IV. Use of the Modes.
A. Intellective .... 613
Use of &»'. . . . 618
i. Final Clauses . . . 624
ii. Conditional . . . 631
in. Relative & Temporal 640
iv. Complementary . . 643
v. Interchange . . . 649
b. Volitive ..... 655
c. Incorporated. . . . 657
i. Infinitive .... 663
Ii. Participle .... 673
in. Verbal in -t£os . . 682
Ch. 4. The Particle ... 684
A. The Adverb .... 685
B. The Preposition ... 688
c. The Conjunction . . 700
Observations .... 703
Ch. 5. Arrangement. . . 718
BOOK IV. PROSODY.
Ch. 1. Quantity and
sification . .
I. Natural Quantity
II. Local Quantity
III. Versification .
A. Dactylic Verse
B. Anapaestic Verse
c Iambic Verse .
d. Trochaic Verse
e. Other Metres
Ver
725
726
734
740
747
751
755
760
764
Ch. 2. Accent . . .
I. General Laws . .
II. In Vowel Changes
III. In Inflection . .
IV. In Construction.
A. Grave Accent .
B. Anastrophe . .
c. Proclitics . . .
d. Enclitics . . .
V. In Formation . .
766
770
772
775
784
785
786
787
789
GREEK TABLES
OETHOGEAPHY AND OETHOEPY.
1. The Alphabet.
(§ 90 - 92.)
Order.
I.
Forms.
Large. Small.
A a
Roman
Letters.
a
Names.
*AX$a Alpha
Numeral
Power.
1
II.
B
ft 6
b
BrJTa
Beta
2
III.
r
7, f
g>n
TdfjLfxa
Gamma
3
IV.
A
8
d
AeAra
Delta
4
V.
E
€
S
*E \^l\6v
Epsilon
5
VI.
Z
c
z
Zrjra
Zeta
7
VII.
H
V
e
*Hra
Eta
8
VIII.
•e
o, &
th
Gqra
Theta
9
IX.
i
i
i
'itora
Iota
10
X.
K
K, X
c
Kcnrna
Kappa
20
XI.
A
X
1
Adfipda
Lambda
30
XII.
M
/*
m
MO
Mu
40
XIII.
N
V
n
NO
Nu
50
XIV.
37
\
X
sr
Xi
60
XV.
o
5
*0 lUKpoV
Omicron
70
XVI.
n
7T, tS
P
m
Pi
80
XVII.
p
P>Q
r
C P<5
Bho
100
XVIII.
2, C a, s
s
Siyfxa
Sigma
200
XIX.
T
T,l
t
TaO
Tail
300
XX.
Y
V
y
*Y ^rAo'j;
Upsilon
400
XXI.
$
<£
P h
$r
Phi
500
XXII.
X
X
ch
xr
Chi
600
XXIII.
¥
#
ps
¥i
Psi
700
XXIV.
a
CO
o
il /xeya
Omega
800
F, F, r
f
Bav
Van
6
EPI-
SEMA.
Q
q
sh
KoTnra
2av
Koppa
San
90
900
14
TABLES.
§2.
2. Comparison of Alphabets.
Hebrew.
K Aleph A
3 Beth B
i Gimel T
n Daleth A
n He E
1 Vav F
T Zayin
n Hheth
13 tfet
» Yodh
3 Kaph
S LamedhA
D Mem M
1 Nun N
Greek.
a Alpha
P Beta
•y Gamma
8 Delta
€ E psilon
F Vau
I Zeta
t] Eta
9 Theta
i Iota
k Kappa
X Lambda
p Mu
v Nu
(97, 98.)
Latin.
A a
B b
G
D
E
F
Z
II
I, J i,j
C,Kc,k
L 1
M m
N n
Hebrew.
D Samekh
V Ayin
3Pe
y Tsadhe
p Qoph
"1 Resh
\U Shin
nTav
Greek.
2 <r Sigma
O o micron
IlirPi
m xi
9 <j Koppa
Rho
PP
T T
Y v
Latin.
San,Sampi
Tau 1
U psilon
U,V,u, v,
Y y
* <j>Phi
XX Chi
¥>|/Psi
il m mega
3. Ligatures.
(90. 2.)
OS/
D
00
at
airo
av
yap
77
yev
yp
h
Bia
»
€K
€V
ft
&
eiri
€V
7)V
teal
XX
fiev
o?
ov
irept
pa
pi
po
S 1
sr
tut
T
t
a Oat
<7<r
*x
rat
Tav
T^y
T97?
TO
TOV
TCOV
VV
VTTO
§5.
ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY.
15
4. Vocal Elements.
I. Vowels, Simple and Compound (106-110).
Orders.
Simple Vowels, \ _ or '
( Long,
Class I. II. III. IV.
A E U
Sounds. Sounds. Sounds. Sounds
1. a o e v
2. a o) rj v
V.
I
Sounds.
X
I
Diphthongs in t. T ^ '
( Improper,
3. at
4. a
04 «
VI
VI
Diphthongs in v, \ _ ^ '
( Improper,
5. av
6. av
OV €V
(ov rjv
II. Consonants (137, 138).
Orders.
r 1. Smooth Mutes
Class 1
LabiaL
IT
. Class II. Class III.
. Palatals. Linguals.
k r
MUTES. ] 2. Middle Mutes,
7
d
( 3. Rough Mutes,
<P
X
e
r 4. Double Consonants, yjr
i
t
SEMI- )5. Spirants,
VOWELS. 1 6 . Nasals,
* 7. Fluents,
F
I
y
a-
v \ Liquids.
X p )
- Simple Consonants.
Consonants (Second Arrangement).
! Labial, or ir Mutes, it, p, <|>,
Guttural, or k Mutes, k, y, X,
Dental, or t Mutes, t, 8, 0,
( Liquids, X, ft, v, p, 7 nasal,
Semivowels, j SiMlants ( Pure, <r,
I ' u . , 1 t , I Double, or Compound Con-
( Mixed, fcfeLJ sonan ^
III. Breathings (93)/
Rough Breathing, or Aspirate (').
Smooth, or Soft Breathing (').
5. Words Classified according to Accent.
Proclitic :
6, ov, iv, o)ff.
Orthotone :
os, &pa, irvp '
Enclitic :
vr)cros ns.
Oxytone :
av, Ibe, CLKor).
Barytone :
va>, a£ia, Ave •
Perispome :
ov, 6pS>, avtio.
Paroxytone :
\va>, raplas.
Proparoxytone :
Xdtos, iXvere.
Properispome :
o-vkov, ripare.
1G
ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY.
§6.
6. Figures affecting Letters and Sounds (99 s).
5. Uniting :
Sykeresis,
Contraction,
Crasis,
1. Adding :
Prothesis,
Epenthesis,
Paragoge,
Extension.
6. Resolving :
DliERESIS.
2. Subtracting:
{Initial) Aph^eresis,
(Medial) Syncope,
(Final) Apocope,
Apostrophe.
7. Shortening :
. Systole.
3. Transposing:
Metathesis.
4. Exchanging :
Antithesis.
Assimilation.
8. Lengthening:
Diastole.
Synizesis.
i. Attenuating :
Precession.
7. Contraction of Vowels (115 s).
In the columns in § 7 and 8, the first of the vowels or consonants affected hy the change
is placed at the left, and the second at the top, hoth in common type. The result of the
change is in full-face type, in a line with the first and beneath tbe second. The paren-
theses enclose regular changes in the union of the stem and affixes of verbs. The labial,
palatal, or lingual mute with which v final combines as a, is represented by I or p. Some
changes are placed below the columns, and some special cases are enclosed in brackets.
») <P
a
at
a
e
€1
V
I?
01
ou
a
av
co
at
¥
(«
1
Tl
at
a
9/
[Dor.
CO
€Cl>
d
ecp
CO
ceo
a]
d
€1
ai
61
Tl (•
[Augm,
€1
i
*i
Tl
[Ion.
Oil
€U
CO
01
ov-
«1
n
Tl
*i
Tl
CO
Co
ai
(ov
01
CO
01
ov
Ob
ov
d
VI
ov
*1
tp
CO
ov
Tl
co
CO
I
I
1
v(p)
at
av
9
€1
€V
*l
*]
n
1)V
01
ov
*
cov
r
I
CO) CO
V V v wi v
te & eta a, ote & oia ot, ova co & ov, v'C v. In Augment, eav tjv & av, <?ev
«v & tjv, eo co, ceo Ico. In Affixes (13), ao ov & a, ae at, oe oi & co, oicp.
8. Euphonic Changes of Consonants (141 s).
0,
y fi-
TiP,
7,
ff
K
/* tr0
T PT
nal
d <t>,t
36*
i
T, A0 (*
♦
|X|X d>0
ITT (par)
la
p8 [ucp]
[«r, tl
", 7, X (6
X
7H- X9
kt \ar)
pa
7 8
[•cxi
o-tr, I
r, 5, e j <°"
K
era cr9
[t8]
err 8ar)
la
V
cr, crt
?> crcr
((ve
Y K
ua v6)
air
IV
iJ as
K
o-p.
va
Kf
YY
j crtr
1*
t>\ XX, pp pp & v8p, j/^cr v<r, v$ I, (\<r Xc, /act p-e, pa- pc, /a/aj* pa, 771* "flO
p,\ PX, Atp Pp, p<7 pp, cr<r TT, ad £, ¥p p, Fcr vcr, XI XX.
§10. ETYMOLOGY. — DECLENSION. 17
II. ETYMOLOGY.
9. Notes. 1. To avoid needless repetition, alike burdensome to
teacher and pupil, and to accustom the student early to the application
of rule, the tables of paradigms have been constructed with the following
ellipses, which will be at once supplied from general rules :
a. In the paradigms of declension, except the first, the Voc. sing, is
omitted whenever it has the same form with the Nom., and the following
cases are omitted throughout (see 181) :
a. The Voc. plur., because it is always the same with the Nom.
p. The Bat. dual, because it is always the same with the Gen.
y. The Ace. and Foe. dual, as always the same with the Nom.
8. The Ace. and Voc. neut., in all the numbers, as always the same
with the Nom.
b. In the paradigms of adjectives, and of words similarly inflected,
the Neuter is omitted in the Gen. and Bat. of all the numbers, and in the
JVom. dual ; because in these cases it never differs from the Masculine.
c. In the paradigms of conjugation, the 1st Pers. dual is omitted
throughout, as having the same form with the 1st Pers. plur., and the 3d
Pers. dual is omitted whenever it has the same form with the 2d Pers.
dual, that is, in the primary tenses of the Indicative, and in the Subjunc-
tive (299 c). For the form in -//.edov, whose empty shade has been so
multiplied by grammarians, and forced to stand, for idle show, in the
rank and file of numbers and persons, see 299 b.
2. Varieties of inflection have been illustrated by some tables of still
briefer form ; where it seemed undesirable to cumber the page and weary
the eye by the multiplication of needless details (17 s, 26, 39 s). In the
shorter paradigms of verbs, the dual has been commonly omitted, because
so little used, and so readily supplied from the general rule in 299 c.
3. The regular formation of the tenses is exhibited in the table (31),
which may be thus read : " The tense is formed from the stem by
affixing ," or, "by prefixing and affixing (or, in the nude
form, )." In the application of this table, the forms of the stem
must be distinguished, if it has more than a single form (336).
4. A star ( * ) in the tables shows that an element or form is wanting.
Brackets [ ] are chiefly used to enclose what is unusual or doubtful, or
may be omitted. For the common mode of representing euphonic change
by the aid of parentheses, see 118 e. In this mode, Latin Italics have
the same office as Greek full-face letters (and also, in § 42, common Greek
letters, until a hyphen separates). For the use of the signs j, ||, ^, see 27;
of ', !, and superior figures, 36 g, 37 r ; of (v, 162 a.
A. TABLES OF DECLENSION.
10. i. Cases Classified (397 s).
Subjective. Objective. Residual.
( Nominative. Accusative. Vocative.
Direct.. < Subject. Direct Object. Compellative.
( Who. Whereinto. Address.
{Genitive. Dative. Dative (Ablative).
Origin, &c. Indirect Object. Accompaniment.
Whence (from, of). Whither (to, for). Where (at, in, with, by).
18
DECLENSION. AFFIXES.
§ 11.
U. ii. Affixes of the Three Declensions.
Dec. I.
Dec.
n.
Dec. III.
Masc. Fem.
M. F. Neut.
M. F.
Neut.
Sing.
Nona.
a?, ^7?
a, v
0? | OV
9
1 *
Gen.
ov
a? ? V?
OV
0?
Dat.
?> V
<i>
1
Ace.
av, 7)v
OV
v, a
*
Voc.
a, 7)
€ | OV
#
#
Plur.
Nom.
at,
01, | a
€?
1 «
Gen.
wv
cov
G>V
Dat.
ats
ots
<rl(y
Ace.
a?
OV?
a
a?
a
Voc.
at
01
a
€S
a
Dual
Nom.
a
G)
€
Gen.
aiv
01V
OLV
Dat.
aw
01V
01V
Ace.
a
to
€
Voc.
a
0.
>
€
12. in. Elements of the Affixes.
In the column of Flexible Endings, the figures denote the Declensions ;
the small full-face letters are signs of relation or case, and the full-face
capitals are signs of number ; while those to which G. is attached also in-
dicate gender. See 186 - 189.
Con
necting V<
jwels.
Flexible Endings.
Dec. 1.
Dec. II.
Dec.ITI.
Sing. Nom.
a(i,)
O
*
s. Fern. 1, *. Neut. 2, v G. ; 3, *
Gen.
a(tl)
*
(o0) os. 2 and Masc. 1, 0.
Dat.
«(1)
*
X.
Ace.
■w
O
*
v, a. Neut. 3, *.
Voc.
a(n)
0(€)
*
*
Plur. Nom.
a
•
#
Es. land 2, E. Neut. "AG.
Gen.
a
° i
*
oN.
Dat.
a
fc
*
(E2i). 3, JX. 1 and 2, iS.
Ace.
a
*
*
(vS) aS. Neut. "A G.
Du. N. A.V.
a
*
E.
G. D.
a
O
*
iN. 3, 01N.
§14.
AFFIXES AND PARADIGMS COMPARED.
19
13. iv. Affixes Analyzed and Compared with the Latin.
The Affixes, printed in full-face type or italics, are preceded by their
analyses in common type. Hyphens separate the Connecting Vowels from
the Flexible Endings.
Dec. I.
E
ec. II.
De
c. Ill
Masc.
Fem
M. F.
Neut
M. F.
Neut.
S.N.
<x-
s £s,t]S 1 <*-* a,
T
O-S OS
1 o-v ov
S
*
a-*
a
o-s us
| o-m um
s
*
G.
a-
ov
[ a-os as
tis
0-0
ov ~
OS
a-i
ce [af, a&
]
o-i
i [lus]
is
D.
a-i
a > U
O-l
V n
t
a-i
ce
o-i
6 [i]
i
Ab. a-e
a
o-e
*r*i
A.
0.-V
av, ijv
o-v
ov
v,&
*
a-m
am
o-m
Um
em [im]
*
V.
a-*
a, tj
0-* €
1 0-J> ov
*r=N
.]
*
a-*
a
0-* 2
1 o-m itm
= N.
*
P.N.
a-e
at
o-e oi
I *-a a
es
1
a
a-e
ce
o-e i
| *-a a
es
1
a [ia\
G.
a-cjv
CUV
O-WV
0>V
(OV
a-um driim [um]
o-um orum[ilm]
#ra
[iiim]
D.
a-is
ais
o-ts
01S
<rt(v"
a-is
w [afr&s]
o-is
is [obits']
ibus[is]
A.
a-j's
as
O-J'S ovs
| *-a d
v$ as
1
a
a-ms as
o-ms os
1 *-a a
ems es [is]
1
a [let]
D.N.
a-e
a
o-e
CD
€
G.
a-iv
aiv
O-IV
oiv
OIV
14. v. Greek and Latin Paradigms compared.
FIRST DECLENSION. — FEMININE.
Sing. Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Yoc.
Plur. Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Yoc.
Dual Nom.
Gen.
\6pas,
Xfya,
\tipav,
\tipa,
Xi;pai,
Xuptov,
\6pai%
Xi/pds,
Xvpai,
Xtfpa,
Xtfpaiv,
lym,
a ??/re (Subject).
of a lyre,
from a lyre,
to or for a lyre,
with or by a lyre,
a lyre (Object).
lyre.
lyres (Subject).
of lyres,
from lyres,
to or for lyres,
with or by lyres,
lyres (Object).
lyres.
lyra; duce, two lyres (Subject).
lyrdrum duarum, of two lyres, &c.
Gen.
lyra;,
Abl.
lyra,
Dat.
lyra;,
Abl.
lyra,
lyram,
lyra,
lyra;,
Gen.
lyrdrum,
Abl.
lym,
Dat.
lym,
Abl.
lym,
lyras,
lyra;,
20
GREEK AND LATIN DECLENSION COMPARED.
§14.
Sine.
Plur.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
N.V.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Du. N. A.V.
G. D.
DEC. I. MASC.
Sailor.
va6Ti)s nanto
vavrov nautce
vaunt] nautoe
Abl. nauta.
vavTi\v nautom
PCLVTO.
vavTOX
vavTwv
vavraxs
vavT&s
vaira.
vavraiv
nauta
naute
nautdrum
nautis
nautas
DEC. II. MASC.
Wile.
56\os dolus
doXov dolt
56\<a dolo
dolo
56\ov dolum
36Xe dole
56\oi doli
d6\<av dolorum
56\ois dolis
56Aot>s dolos
56X&)
86Xoiv
DEC. III. M. F.
Swine.
<rOs sfis
au6<$ snis
cv'i sm
sue
cvv sucm
(TV SUS
(70€S SllCS
crvoav sxium
avtri suibus
cuas sues
<ri?€
cri^oiv
S. N. A.V. Sajpov
Gen. Sci/oov
Dat. 5c6/)w
DEC. II. NEUT.
Gift.
DEC. III. NEUT.
Tear.
donum
dom
dono
Abl. dono
P. N. A.V. SQp&
Gen. bdiptav
Dat. 5w/)ois
dona
donorum
donis
Fire. Throat,
ir dp guttur
Trvp6s gutturis
irvpl gutturt
gutture
guttura
guttunm
guttur ib us
daxpu
8&Kpuos
daupv'i
MKpva
8a.Kpij<av
DEC. IV. N.
Knee.
genii
gen(ms)iis
gen(m")u.
gen(ue)u
genua
genuwm
genu&us
D. N. A.V. 5<l)p<a S&Kpvz
G. D. ddbpoiv daicpijoiv
For <rva$ was also used the contract form avs ; for suibus, the syncopated
and for genubus (genuibus), by a syncope of the u, genibus. See 225 f.
15. vi. Nouns op the First Declension.
a.
FEMININE.
The goddess,
to
muse,
table,
song,
mina.
Lat
dea
musca
miisa
mensa
ode
mina
a
K
9,
Sea
fivia
fiovaa
rpdire^d
<»Si7
fxva
a.
TTJS
Seas
fjLvlds
[xovarjs
rpane^rjs
codrjs
pivds
D.
T§
Sea
fivta
fxovarj
Tpmrtlu,
epSJ)
p.va
A.
TJ]V
Sedv
fivlau
fxovaav
rpdne^dv
co8tjp
p.vdu
p.
N.
al
Seat
ixvlai
fiovo-ai
rpdire^ai
(o8al
p.vai
G.
t£>v
6eu>v
fxvimv
fiovo-au
rpane^au
0)5(01/
pvwv
D.
tols
deals
fXVLCllS
fxovaais
rpane^ais
<o8als
p-vals
A.
TO.S
Seas
fivias
fiovaas
Tpane^as
adds
fivds
i).
N.
TO.
Sea
fivia
p-ovaa
rpane^a
o)5a
p.va
a.
raiv
Seaiv
fiviaiu
fiovaaiv
rpane^aiv
(ddalv
pvdiv
§ 15. c. Dec. I. 180 b, 194 s : Gender 176 ; t?, 6, 173 b ; a , a, or v,
in Sing., 194 s ; TroLvra 194. 2 ; p,v(aa)a, 'Ep/m(eas)i]S, 196, 120 e ; Poppa,
Twfipvov and -d, 198. 1, 93d. Accent : deds 775 a, ixvias 111 b, pviuv 777 a,
Tpawe'frs 770 a, 'ArpetScu 771c, 'Epp.(eas)i\<$ 112. — Other Examples, cKid
shadow, oUia house, 66pa door, &pa hora, hour, p,o7pa portion, yXQcrcra or
yXuTTa (169 a) tongue, 86%a opinion, Xeaiva lioness, ti/jl^ honor, n6pr) maiden,
cv :<(ia)r\ fig-tree ; vetivias young man, KptT-rjs judge, IHpavs Persian.
§16.
NOUNS OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSION.
21
The steward,
Lat.
S. N. 6
quaestor
rapids
Gr. tov rapiov
D. rco rapia
A. TOV
V. co
rapiav
rapid
P. 1ST. ol raptcu
Gr. rav rapicov
D. rots rapiais
A. rovs rapids
D. N. rco rapid
Gr. rolv rapiaiv
b.
poet,
poeta
7roiT)rrjs
noirjTOv
7TOlT]Tfj
noirjTTJv
noirjra
TTOirjrai
TTOLr)TCOV
7ToiT)rais
Troirjrds
TTOl7)TCl
iroiryraiv
MASCULINE.
son ofAtreus,
Atrides
'ArpeiSrjs
'Arpeidov
'Arpeidy
'Arpeiftrjv
'Arpeidrj
'Arpe'idai
> Arpeibcov
'Arpeidais
'Arpeidas
*Arpeioa
'Arpeidaiv
Mercury,
Hermes
< Epp(eds )fjs
'Epp(eov )ov
'Eppie'q. )y
f Epp(edv )rjv
'Epp(4a )?}
Epp(eai )ai
f Epp{ecov)cov
'Epp^a^ais
'Epp(eds )as
'Epp(ed )a
'Epp(eaiv)a2v
north wind.
boreas
j3o(peds)ppas
fio{peov)ppd
/3o(pea )ppa
fio(pedv)ppdv
/3o(p<fd )ppd
Gobryas.
N. Tcoppvds
Gr. Tcofipvov,
Tcoftpva
D. Tcoj3pva
A. Tcoftpvdv
V. Tcofipva
16. vii. Nouns of the Second Declension.
a. MASCULINE AND FEMININE.
The choir,
Lat. chorus
island,
insula
angel,
angelus
S. N.
6 x°P°s
r) vrjcros
6 ayyeXos
Gr.
Xopov
vrjaov
dyyeXov
D.
A.
V.
x°pf
Xopov
X ope
vrjirco
vrjaov
vrjcre
dyyeXco
ayyeXov
ayyeXe
P.N.
X opoi
VTJO'Ol
ayyeXoi
a.
Xopcov
vfjacov
dyyeXcov
D.
Xopols
vqaois
dyyeXois
A.
Xopovs
vrjaovs
dyyeXovs
D.N.
a.
Xopolv
V7)0~CO
vrproiv
dyyeXco
dyyeXoiv
mens
6 voos, vovs
voov, vox)
voco, v£>
voov, vovv
voe, vov
vooi, vol
VOCOV, VCOV
VOOLS Vols
voovs, vovs
v6a>, vco
VQOIV, VOLV
temple.
fanum
6 Vd6s :
vaov
vaco,
vaov
vecos
veco
veco
vecov,
[vedi
vaoi,
veco
I
vecov
vaois, vecos
vaovs, vecos
vaco, veco
vaolv, vecov
The
Lat.
S. N. r6
Gr. rov
D. rco
P. N. to:
Gr. TCOV
D. Tols
D.N. rco
Gr. rolv
egg,
ovum
chov
COOV
coco
cha
coco
co oilv
cave,
antrum
avrpov
avrpov
avrpco
avrpa
tivrpcov
civrpois
avrpco
livrpotv
b. NEUTER.
apple,
malum
prjXov
pr)Xov
prfXco
prjXd
prjXcov
prjXois
prjXco
prjXoiv
part,
membrum
poptov
popiov
popico
poptct
popicov
popiois
popico
popioiv
OS
oareov, ocrrovv
OCTT€OV, OCJTOV
dare co, ocrrco
oared, oara
oarecov, oarcov
oareocs, 6aro7s
ocrre'co, oorco
oarreoiv, oarolv
§ 16. c. Dec. II. 199s: Gender 176 ; v(oos)ov$, 6<rr(dov)ovv, 121, 120 e,
772 ; p(a6s)ec6s 120 e, i, 772 d ; A. veib 199. 3 ; cbbv 140. — 0. E. 6 \6yos
word, i] 6d6s way, 6 OTjpos people, 6 ravpos taurus, bull, 6, ij dvOpcovos homo,
man, 6 6e6s (182 c) deus, god, 6 ttXoOs voyage, 6 Xecos people, 6 Xayus Jiarc,
ij ecos dawn ; irrepov wing, p68ov rosa, rose, ctvkov Jig, fpycwov tool.
22
THIRD DECLENSION. MUTES.
§17.
17.
A.
a. LABIAL.
6, vulture.
S. N. yvf
Gr. yxJTTOS
D. yvnl
A. yxhra
P. N. yinre s
G: yvnSiv
D. yv\jfl
A. yinras
D.N. yC^e
Gr. yvnoiv
i), vein.
S. N. </>X*>
a. Qktpos
D. <£Xe/3i'
A. (pXefia
P. D. <£Xe>/a
v. Nouns of the Third Declension.
MUTE. — a. Masculine and Feminine.
b. palatal.
6,t], goat, i), hair.
ati 0pl$
aiyos
alyi
atya
aiyes
aly&u
al£l
aiyas
aiye
alyoiv
6, raven. 6, lynx.
Kopa£ Xvy£
KopaKos Xvyieos
KopaKi Xvy<l
icopaica Xvy/ca
Kopagi Xvy£i
rpixos
TPW
rpl X a
rpl X es
TplX<0V
e P &
rpl X as
rpl X e^
Tpi^OlV
i), hope.
eXnts
iXmdos
iXwUk
iXntda
eXnldes
eXnldcou
€\7Tt<Tl
iXTrtdas
tkiritoe
e\7rl8oiv
i), strife.
Zpis
eploo?
epidi
(fpida, epw
cpiai
C. LINGUAL.
6, tooth.
68ovs
odavros
oSovti
obovra
68oUT€9
obovratv
obovai
odovras
ooovre
OOOVTOIV
V, key.
kKcis clavis
Kkeidos
icXeidl
icXelda, kXcIv
/cXer8ey[<Xety]
nXeidcov
nXaal
icXeldas, aXels
/cXftSe
K.Xei8o7v
i], helmet.
KOpVS
KOpvdoS
KOpvdt
KOpvda, Kopvv
Kopvai
6, foot.
7TOV?
7TOOOS
TToBl
7r6ba
b,7], child. 6,
S. N. 7rat?
G. 7rai86s
D. iraiftl
A. nalda
V. nal
d. lingual (continued).
sovereign, t), wife. 6, lion.
8apap
ddpapros
bdpapTi
bdpapra
aval-
avaKTOS
avaKTL
avaicra
avd
Xeatv
Xeovros
Xeovn
Xeovra
Xeov
6, giant.
yiyas
yiyavros
yiyavri
yiyavra
yiyav
t), Opus.
'Ottovs
'Onovvros
'07TOVVTI
'Ojroiivra
P. D. natal avai-i &dp.apai Xeovai ylydat
to, body.
S. N. acopd
Gr. aeopdros
D. acopan
P. N. acopara
Gr. aaopdroiv
D. aoapaai
D. N. aebpare
Gr. atopdruiv
rb, light,
(poos
(pcoros
(pcori
cpa>Ta
(pCOTCOV
(pCdO-l
(pare
(pooroiv
Neuter. -
rb, liver.
r]Trdp
t)Tvd.TOS
rJ7rari
i)TTara
riTrdroav
ijnaai
rjnaTf
rjTrdroiv
LINGUAL.
rb, horn.
Kepds
Keparos,
Kepari,
Kepdra,
Kepdroav
KepdoL
Kepdre,
Keparoiv,
corau
icepdos, Kepcos
Kepa'i, Kepa
Kepaa, Kepa
Kepdoov, K€p(0V
Kepae, Kepd
Kepdoiv, Kepav
rb,ear.
ovs
tiros'
biTL
Qtra
COTOiV
coal .
aire
&TQIV
§ 17. f. Dec. III. 202 s : Gender 177. Mutes : 7«J(ts)+, ^(ks)€,
lyn(cs)^, £\wi(ds)s, 151 ; yv{7rp)ira, K\e?(8p)v, 160 e, 204 a ; (6)rpix6s 159 b ;
68(outs)o{>5 den(ts)s, 6b(ovTcn)ovax, yiy{afTs)as gig(ants)as, \4(om-s)av
le(ons)o, ddpa(prs)p, 153, 156, 205 ; 7r(o5s)ovs pe(ds)s 214 a; &v(aKT)a, rrai,
§19.
LIQUIDS. PURE.
23
(a. Not syncopated.) 18. B. LIQUID.
6, beast
S. K %> fera
G. #>7pos
D. %u
A. ^pa
P.N j$pcc
G. 6rjpa>v
D. 6r)p<rL
A. 6rjpas
P. N. %*
Gr. 6-qpoiv
T),nose.
pis
plvos
p'Tvi
piva
piv
pivt?
p'lvSav
plcri
plvas
pive
plvoiv
i], hand.
X €l P ,
X*<-pos
X eipi
X^pa
X^paiv
X €p<rl
Xcipas
X elpe
X^polv
o, man.
dvfjp vir
dvepos, dvbpos
dvepi, dvbpi
dpepa, avdpa
avep
dvtpes, av8p€9
dvipav, dvbpeov
dvbpdai
dvepas, avbpas
dvepe, avhp*
dvepoiv, dvbpolv
(b. Syncopated.)
6,7), dog. b,T),lamb.
kv<ov (dpvos)
dpvos
dpvl
apva
KVVOS
KVVl
Kvva
KVOV
KW€t apv*$
kvvwv dpvwv
Kvai dpvdai
Kvvas apvas
Kvv* apvc
Kvvoiv dpvolv
b, orator.
Lat. orator
S. N. pt)T<ap
G. prjropos
D. prjTopi
A. prjTopa
V. pfjTop
6, harbor.
portus
XtpTjV
Xipevos
Ai/ieVi
Xipei/a
6, deity.
cUemon
balpow
8aipovos
daipovi
baipova
balpov
6, pozan.
prean
iraiav
iraxavos
iraidvi
7raidva
6, father.
pater
rrarrip
7rarepos, 7rarp6i
7rarepi, tiarpi
narepa
ndrcp
P. D. prjropot Ai/ieo~i baipoai 7Tauio~i irarpdcn
19. C. PURE. — a. Masculine and Feminine.
6, weevil.
S. N. K is f
Gr. kT6$
D. Kli
A. KtP
V.
P. N. kU
G. kiSv
D.
A.
D.N.
G.
Kiai
KUZS
KLOIV
6,t], sheep.
oh ovis
oios
ou
OLP
Ol€S [ois]
olwv
olai
olas, ots
*
oie
oloiv
6, hero,
ijpas herds
rjpcoos
fjpcoi [rjpa]
fjpeaa, fjpco
fjpoocs
fjpaxov
fjpoxri
rjpaas, rjpan
fjptoe
T}p<OOlP
o, ij, ox.
fiovs bos
fioos bovis
/3oi bovi
fiovv
/3o0
fioes
poav bourn
fiovo-l
(36 as, (iovs
/3oe
/Soou>
6, fish.
iX^vs
tX^vos
Ix&tX
IxOvif
l x 6v
iX&v€S [IxQvs]
lx&vaiv
lx8$o~i
iX&vas, ix^vs
Ix&ve [lx&>]
IxBvoiv
7), echo.
r)x<*> echo
r}x(oos)ovs
Tjxioi )oi
rj X (oa )»
rj X ol
204 b; cru!p,(aT)a, 0(wr)<5s, ^7r(ar)ap, 160. Contraction 207: K\ets 122,
'Oir(6€is)ov<s 118 d, 121 b, icepq. 119, Kipa, Ktpws, {olas) ods, tiros, 120 a, b, c.
Accent : yvTrbs 778 a, <t>6rwv 778 b. — O. E. 6 7/)ity, -virbs, gryps, -yphis,
GKIFFIN, *Apa\f/, -afios, Arab, t) <f>a\ay£, -ayyos, phalanx, -angis, df)s,
Otjtos, hired man, 7) XapTrds, -d5os, torch, LAMP, 7) xdpis, -t-ros, grace, i) vd^,
-kt6s, nox, -ctis, night, 6 dpdKtav, -ovtos, draco, dragon, 6 ipds, -dvros,
thong ; rb TrolTj/ma, -aros, poema, -atis, poem, to fipap, -aros, day, rb rtpas,
-cltos, prodigy, rb tibwp, tibaros, water.
§ 18. c. Liquids 208 s : 67)(ps)p, Xi^ew^v, jH(vs)s, 153, 156, 208 ;
\ipto-i, d-qpo-i, 154, 157 ; x 6 / 00 '^ 224 f ; avep 208 f ; Kv[o]vbs canis, ira.T[e]pl
24
THIRD DECLENSION. PURES.
§19.
b. Masculine and Feminine (continued).
S. N. 17 ndXts city 6 7tt)xvs cubit 6 irnrevs knight rj pavs ship
Gr. noXeos 7rr)x ea >* miretas veoas
D. noXe'i, 7r6Xei "^VX^ ^X 64 iTrnei, Irnrel vnt
A. noXip 7rrjx vv inned vavv
V. TrdXt 7T7Jx v trnrev (ypav)
P. N. iroXees, ndXeis 7rr)x €€S > irr)X €CS twees, Inlets, -rjs vrjes
Gr. iro\ea>p Trrjx €u>v l 7r VX^ )V 'l *T7retov peeop
D. 7ro\eac 7rf}x €(rc imrevcn paver I
A. TTuXeas, noXeis 7rrjx eas ) irr)X ecs hnreds, imrels paiis
D. N". noXee, ttoXt]
Gr. TTokeoLP
TrrjxeoiP
nnree
lirireow
peolv
S. K. Soncparns Socrates 'HpaKXerjs,
Gr. Saacpareos, 'ScoKpdrovs 'Hpa/cXe'eos 1 ,
D. 2a>/cparei', Sco/cpdrei 'HpajcAeVt,
A. Soo/cpaVea, 2a)/cpdr^, -7p 'Hpa/cXeea,
V. Sco/cpares 'HpdfcXeey,
'HpaxAJ}? Hercules
'Hpa/cXeovs
'HpaxXeei, 'HpcwcXet
'HpaxXe'a, 'HpaicX^
'HpaKXeis ["HpcucAes]
c. Ketjter.
S. N. to yepas honor
G.
D.
P.N.
Gr.
D.
D.K
Gr.
yepaos,
yepa'i
yepcas
yepat
yepaa, yepa
yepdcop, yepoop
yepacri
yepae, yepa
yepdoip, yepav
to yepos
yepeos,
yepe'i,
yepea
yepecop
yepecri
race genus
yepovs generis
yepei generi
yepq genere
yep&p generum
generibus
to acTTv town
aareos, acrrecos
aorei', aarev
acrrea, oxttt)
drrTeatP
aareari
ye pee yepn
yepeoLP, yepolp
acrTee
QO-TeOLP
pat[e]ri, &p[e]va, 210 ; dvdpos 146 ; &p(ep<ri)v6*ri 145 a. — O. E. 6 <pd)p,
-capls, fu(rs)r, thief, 0, r\ 'df)p, -ipos, aer, air, rj pryrrjp, -rpos, mater, -tris,
mother, 7? d/c-r/s, hpos, ray, 6 Trotp.f)v, -eVos, shepherd, 6 firjv, /j.t]p6s, mensis,
MONTH, 6 alibv, -&vos, sevum, age, 6 dXs, dXos, sa(ls)Z, salt ; rb vitcrap,
-apos, nectar, rb (reap) 'dap r)p ver, spring.
§ 19. d. Pures 212 s : ids, i x 0vs, 217 c ; dv 216 b, 202 a ; (d*Fts ovis)
Si's oh 21, 140 b; [/?ofs, /SoFos "bo vis] /3ovs, fio6s, 214, 217 a, b; i7T7r(eFs)€v$,
v(aFs)avs navis, ttyjxvs, dorv 213a, 215b, 216, 217b; tt6Xi? 213b, 217 g;
Zwkp&ttjs 213 a, 217 e ; yhos 215 b, 217 d ; f)x(os)<a 214 b ; V. foot, fiov,
215 c, 217 b, d; fiovai, vavo-i, 216 d ; rrjt 222 f ; Sw/cpdr^ 216 c. Con-
traction 7, 118 s : ijp({), 7r6Xet, ytpai, 119 ; yepa, affTT), yipcos, ijpec, 120 a,
b, c ; 'Hpa/cX^a 120 f ; vedbs 120 i, 222 f; irbXeis, yivovs, tjxovs eclius, oh,
tX^O, tto\t), 'nnrrjs, 121 ; A. oh, §ov<s, woXeis, raOs, 122 ; iroXeus, iinrid, -as,
220; Trrjx&v 220 f ; 'HpaxX^s 219 c. — O. E. 6 dibs, 6w6s, jackal, 6 pvs,
pvbs, mils, nmris, mouse ; ij &pkvs, -uos, net, 7} 'It6, lovs, Io, Ius, 7} rd^is,
-ew5, rank, 6 ire'XeKvs, -ews, ax, 6 f3acriXeijs king, 6 Ei)^^??s, -ovs, 6 Ilept-
kX(47is)tjs • rb icpeas caro, flesh, rb v£(pos nubes, cloud, rb re^os wall.
§20.
DIALECTS.
25
20. ix. Dialectic Forms op Declension.
a. First Declension (197 s).
S. N. ds, Ion. tjs ■ Tap.ir)S, popdrjs.
i)S, Dor. as ' vavrds, 'ArpeiSds.
Old, a • l-mrbTa, fi^TieTa.
a, Ion. T] • Xvprj, oIkltj. [arj.
a, Ion. tj • Ep. dXrjdeir), kv'ms-
tj, Dor. a- 'a ySct, repot, yd.
G. ov, Old, do • 'ArpelSdo, Bope'do.
Ion. cco,co ' 'ATpeLdeiOyBopeo}.
Dor. a • 'Arpetdd, 'Epp.a.
as, Ion. tjs * Xtpr/s, yeverjs.
Tjs, Dor. as ' rt/ias, ,uotfcrds.
Ep. tj0c(v ' Alvvpi-qdtv.
D. a, Ion. xi ' Tapilri, Xijpy.
tj, Dor. a • vaOrq., rq. w8q..
Ep. Tj4>t(v ' fjcpi (3lr]<pu'.
av,
TJV,
Ion.T]v,€u(raasc.) ; Xi/p/p,
['ApiO-ra7o/)r / y, -ea.
Dor. dv • vatirdv, rcixdv.
V. a, Ion. tj • rap-iT], veiqviirj.
u, Poet. tj • At'^r?? A]). Rh.
tj, Dor. d • 'Arpetdd, MevdX/ca.
Old, d • vvp.<pd, AiKa.
P. G. cov, Old, cuov • 'ArpetScrwj/. [wj\
Ion. e'eov ' 'ArpeiSe'uv, Xi>p^-
Dor. av • 'ATpet5ai>, Ovpav.
D. ais, Old, aio-i(v ' rater 1 dvpaiviv.
Ion.T|<ri(v,T)S ' d€r}<TL,7r^Tp7]S.
A. as, [Ion. €as(masc.) ; Seo-iroTeu s].
Dor. as ■ Mcupas, vt!>p.<pas.
^Eol. ais * rats rtp,ais.
b. Second Declension (201).
S. N, os, Laconic, op • iraXedp, 169 d.
G. ov, Ep. & Thes. oto • tolo Xoyoto.
Dor. co • t« X67W.
[Ion. ceo • Bdrrew, Kpoi'creco.]
Ep. O0€(v • olpdvoQev.
co (fr. aov), Ep. wo • LTerewo.
D. cp, Old, 01 • 'IcrdfiOL, to? Sd/moi.
Ep. 6<J)i(v • avrdcpi, £vy6(pw.
Ep. o0i - oipavddt, 'IXcodi.
S. D. cp, Boeot. v • aiirv, tv 8dp.v.
P. IS". 01, Boeot. v • naXif, "Op.rjpv.
[G. cov, Ion. e'eov • irvpiuv, SoucrcW.]
D. 01s, Old, otcri(v ■ roicn Xoyoiacv.
Bosot. vs * dXXiJs irpo&vvs.
A. ovs, Dor. cos, os • rebs X67WS, rtbs
Xvkos, irapdevos.
Mo\. 01s ' dvSpetois 7r^7rXoiS.
Dual oiv, Ep. oiiv • Erirot$', &fxouv.
c. Third Declension (221 s).
, G.aTOS,aos,Ion.€Os • nipeos, otfSeos.
cos, Ion. & Dor. cvs • dipevs.
C-COS, Ep. TJOS • jSaCTiX^OS, i7T7T^OS.
Ion. & Dor. c-os • (3a<nXe'os.
ccos, Poet, cos, T)OS' TrdXeos, -tjos.
Ion. & Dor. 10s • irSXios.
180s, Ion. & Dor. 10s ■ Ktiwpios.
Dor. itos • Qepuros.
ovs, Dor. & iEol. cos • dx&J, ai'Sws.
D.ci, Ep. fji • fSao-LXrfC, HrjXr/C.
Ion. el* • PacriXk, ]Ir)Xe"i.
a, Ion. & Dor. 1 • 7r6X7, cWd/u.
181, Ion. & Dor. I • Qerl, d7r<JXi".
v'i, Ep. vl • venvi, 61'^uT.
A. v, Poet, a • eiipi-a, ix06a.
oa, Ion. ovv • 'louv, Atjtow.
Dor. cov • "YLpwv, Aardju.
id, Ep. fja • ^aatXrjd, l-rnrTJa.
Ion. & Poet. cd ■ j3a<nXe'd.
Dor. & Poet, tj • /3acrtX^.
Y. cs, iEol. € • 2i6/cpare.
GR. TAB. 2
P.N. cis, Old Att. ijs • j3a<n\7)s.
Ep. f]€S • j9acrtX^es, t7r7T77es.
Ion. & Dor.ces ' fido-iXces.
as, Ion. & Dor. t€S * iroXces.
aa, Poet, ix'yepd, Kptd.
Ion. €a • yepea, repea.
G. cov, Ion. ecov • xw^wv, dv8peuv.
[Dor. dv • aiydv, kvvolv f\
e'eov, Ep. ■ijcov ' fiao-LXr}(j}v.
ccov, Ion. & Dor. £cov • woXicou.
D. tri(v, Old, €cri(v ■ x e ^P e(ri '
Poet. crcrt(v ■ e'lreao-i.
«rcri(v • Trodeao-Lu.
€crt(v, Ep. €CtcJk(v ' 8xecr<piv.
Ion. icri(v • irbXicn.
evori(v, Ep.i]€<rcri(v ■ dpL<Jri\Q(Tcn.
A. 6*ds, Ep. T]ds ' /3ao-iX?^a s. [ay.
Ion. & Dor. cos ■ (3aaiXe-
Comm. cis ' (3a<riXe7s.
cis, Ion. & Dor. tas ■ ttoXicls.
Dualotv, Ep. oi'iv •* iro8oi'Cv.
26
S. N
G
D
A
V
NOUNS.
§21.
21. x. Irregular and Dialectic Declension.
6, Jupiter. Dor. 6, Gliis. 6, (Edipus. Poet. & Ion.
, Zetfs, Zdv TXovs OiSlirovs [OlSlwos]
Aids, Ztjvos Zdvos TXou OiSirrodos, Oi8iTrovipoet.Ol8nr6ddo,-d,-eu}
Ad, Zrjvi Zavl TXou OlSLiroSi OlSnr68a, -rj
Ala, Zrjva Za.ua TXouv Oidiiroda, OlSiirow OLdnr68di>,-r}v
ZeO TXov Ot'5t7rou OiSuroSa, -77
P. N. [Ales, Zr>es]
G. Ot5i7r65a;j>', A. -as
S. N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
P.N.
G.
D.
A.
D.N.
G.
Attic. 6,son. Homeric.
vl6s vl6s
vlou, vlios vlov
vlq>, vlel vlcp,
vlbit vlbv
vie" vtt
vTos, vlios
vli, vU'C, vlel
via, vita
viol, vleis vies, vties, vleis
vldv, vUuv vlQv, vtetav
viols, vtto~L vlolai, vldai,
vlovs, vleis vlas, vUas
vld>, vUe
vldiv, vUoiv
T)or:\c.7],ship. Ionic.
vavs [vets] vqvs [Vt^us]
pd6s pt)6s, vebs
vat vrft
vavv \yav\ vr\a y via \yrjvv]
pStt vye$, vies
vaCiv vrjOiVy ve&v
yavalyvdefffft vrfval, vr\eao~i, vfaaot,
vaas vijas, vias \?au(pt.
S. N.
G.
D.
P.N.
G.
D.
D.N.
G.
S. N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
P.N.
G.
D.
A.
Attic. rb> spear. Homeric.
56pv Poet. 8bpv
Sbparos, 5op6s 8ovp6s (yoivaros)
Sbpari, 8opl, 56pei dovpl botipan
Sbpara,
8opar(j)v
8bpacri
Sbpare
Sopdroiv
8bprj Sovpa Sotipara
Soiipwv
Sotipeo-an, doijpao'L
Sovpe
to,- cave. Homeric. 6, stone,
o-ireos cnretos Xaas
atrelovs Xaos
cirqC Xai"
A. Xaav
(/cXea)
cireiwv Xdcov
airkaai, cir^ecro-i \deo~o~t
Xae
Homeric Paradigms.
6, Tcnight. 77, city.
lirireus irbXis
linrijos (TvSeos) ttoXios, tttoXios, ttoXcos, ttoXtjos
linrrj'C (Hy]XeC,-el) iroXi, irroXe'C, iroXei ? iroXrji
lirirrja (Tv8ed,-rj) iroXiv, tttoXlv (77-6X770, Hes.) 6'Cv
limed (p.dvTi A. 106)
t7T7r?jes, i7T7rets ? xoXtes, iroXrjes 8'1'es
iTTTTrjUV iroXliov 6'lWVi
6, 77, sheep.
8is
8'ios, olos
l-mrevai (dpio~rri- TroXiecrcri (iirdX^eaiv)
lirirrjas [eaai) iroXias, iroXls or iroXeis, woXrjas
olCjv
6teo~<n.,oleo~i,
6'is [6eco~(.
6, Ulysses. 6, Patroclus. 6, Mars.
S. N. '08u<r<rev's, '08vcre6s TLdrpoKXos (-TjsTheoc.) "Aprjs
G. 'O8vo~o-7}os,-eos,'05v(r7ios,'08v<revs TlarpoicXov, -010, -ijos "Aprjos, -eos
D. ('AxtXXet) '08varj'i TLarpbicXy m Apyfi,-e'i,-ei.
A. 'Odwarja, '08vo-ija 'OSiktt} TLdrpoicXov, -77a "Aprja, -t)v
V. 'OSv<ro~ev, 'Odvo~ev JldrpoKXe, -ees or -eiS "Apes E. 31.
§22.
ADJECTIVES.
27
22.
xi. Adjectives op
Two Terminations.
a. Of
the Second Declension.
6, i} (unjust) rb
6, i) (unfading)
rb f
S.N.
abiKOS i
ildlKOV
dyfjpaos
ayf)p<os
dyrjpaov,
dyrjpcov
G.
aSi/cou
dyrjpdov,
dyrjpco
D.
A.
aSi'/cw
aSi/coj/
dyrjpdco,
dyrjpaov,
dyrjpcp
dyrjpcov, i
ayrjpco
V.
aSi/ce
P.N.
cidiKOi
udiKa
dyrjpaot,
dyrjpcp
dytjpaa,
dyrjpco
G.
ddiKOiu
dyrjpdcov,
dyrjpcov
D.
dbiKOis
dyrjpdois,
dyrjpcos
A.
dSlKOUff
dyrjpdovs,
dyrjpcos
D.N.
aSi'/co)
dyrjpda),
dyrjpco
G.
aSwco«>
dyrjpdoiv,
dyrjpcov
b. Oi
1 the Third Declension.
6, i) (male) rb
o, i) (pleasing) to
6, 7] (two-footed) rb
S.N.
tipprju
appeu
evxdpis
evx a pi
bl7T0VS
b'nrovv
G.
dppevos
evxdplros
dl7To8oS
D.
appeui
evxdpiTi
blTTobl
A.
appeva
e&xdpiTa, evxapw
binoba, blnovv
V.
dppev
evxapt-
binov
P.N.
appeves
appeva
evxdpvres
evx&pvra
blirobes
binoba
G.
dppevcov
evxapiToav
bi7r6bcov
D.
appeal
evxdpicri
binooi
A.
appevas.
evxdpvras
biirobas
D.N.
appeve
evxdpire
b'nrobe
G.
appevoiv
evya/MTOCP
bnroboiv
6, 7), (evident) rb
6, r) (greater) rb
S. N.
(raqjrjs
i
vacpes
p.ei£cov
major p,el£ov
majus
G.
<ra(peos,
aacpovs
p.el£ovos
majoris
D.
aacpei,
(Taipei
p.et£ovi
majori
A.
cracpea,
<ra(prj
fieiCova,
peifa
V.
aa(pes
pei£ov
P.N.
aa(pees
carpels i
Ta(pea, <ra(pr}
pel£oves,
pel£ovs p.ei£ova, p.ei£<o
G.
aafpecov.
<ra(pa)v
p,ei£6vcov
D.
aacpeo-i
p.ei£ocn
A.
aacpeas,
cracpets
p.el£ovas, p.ei£ovs
D.N.
aacpee,
<Ta(prj
jiei£ove
G.
aacpeoiv,
a-atpolv
p.ei£6voiv
§ 22. c. Adj. of Two Term. 231 : ay-qpws 200, ay-npto 199. 3, 120 e ;
&pp(evs)i\v, peL£(ovs)<ov, 208a, 157 ; etfxapt(rs)s 204 ; 5t7r(o5s)ovs bipes, Utcovv.
214 a, 231 c, 204 a, 202 a, diirov 215 c ; aa<p7)s, craves, 213 c, 215 a, 217 d, e ,
cracpovs, cracpel, 219 a, 119, 121s ; pel fa 211. — 0. E. ijcrvxos quiet, ivSo^os
glorious, &v(oos)ovs, -(oov)ovv, senseless, t\(aos)e<os propitious, etiyeios fertile ;
evdaip(oys)cov fortunate, etfe\7ri(5s)s hopeful, oXtjOt^s, -is, true, vyirjs, -es
(120 f ), healthy, pe'nov minor, less, woXOwovs many-footed, polypus, polyp.
28
DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES.
§23.
23. xii. Adjectives of Three Terminations.
a. Of the Second and Fiest Declensions.
o (morus)
t) (foolish-
)rb
M. (ayados)
f. (good)
N.
S.N.
pcopos
papa
papov
bonus
bona
bonum
G-.
[XtopOV
papas
boni
bonae
D.
papa
papa
bono
borne, Ab.
-a
A.
papov
papav
bonum
bonam
V.
pape
bone
P.N.
papoi
papal
papa
boni
bonae
bona
a.
papav
papav
bonorum
bonarum
D.
papois
papais
bonis
bonis
A.
papovs
papas
bonos
bonas
D.N.
papa
papa
G.
papoiv
papaiv
d (sapiens) ij (wise) rb
S. N. <ro(j)6s crocprj crocpov
G. aro<pov <To<pTJs
D. (ro(jf)a> o~o(pfj
A. ao(pov <ro(f)7)v
V. ao(pe
P. N. <ro(poi ao(pai ao<pa
G. ao<pav cro(pav
D. <ro<poi$ aocpals
A. crocpovs aotpas
D. N. aocpd <ro(pa
Gr. trocpolv cro<pa7v
6 (simplex) rj (simple)
&tik(6os )ovs dir\(6rj )?}
a7r\(6ov )ov d7rX(oT]s)rjs
dn\(6a )a &tt\(6ij )rj
air\(6ov )ovv a.7r\(6rjv )rjv
rb
dn\(6ov)ovv
a7r\(6oL )ot a7r\ r 6ai )a7. a7rX(oa )a
difkioav )av dTr\(6av)av
d7r\(6oLs)o'is d7rX(oaty)ais
aTr\(6ovs)ovs d7r\(6ds )as
dnXioa )a a7rX(oa )a
a7rX (ooiv)oiv dnX (paiv) atv
6 (aureus,
golden)
S.N.
Xpvveos,
Xpvaovs
g.
Xpvaeov,
Xpvaov
D.
X/>uo-e<»,
XP vo ~<?
A.
Xpvveov,
Xpvo-ovv
P.N.
Xpvo-eoi,
Xpvo-o7
G.
Xpvaecov,
Xpvo-av
D.
Xpvaeois
Xpvo-ois
A.
Xpvaeovs,
Xpvcrovs
D.N.
Xpvo-fG),
Xpvo-d
G.
Xpvo-eoiv,
Xpvaoiv
i] rb
Xpvaea, XP V(T V XP^°" e0I/ > XP v<ro ^ v
Xpvaeas, xP v(r ^ s
Xpvaea, XP vcr fl
Xpvo-eav, xP v<r *} v
Xpv(T(ai, XP V(TC " XPv a€ <*> XP V(r **
Xpvaeav, xP vo ~ mv
Xpvaeais, XP V(TC " S
Xpvacas, XP V<T <* S
Xpvaed, ^pvrra
Xpvo-eaiv, xP varc " v
§23. c. Dec. I. and II. 232: pdtpav 777 h ; axXoDs, xP V(r °v*> 2()0 »
120 s, 772 c, 777 b. — 0. E. <f>L\t.os friendly, diKaios just, fiaicpos long, exOpoj
hostile, ddpbos dense, k<x\6s beautiful, peaos medius, middle, 8l7t\(6os)ovs
duplex, double, apyijpeos apyvpovs argenteus, of silver.
d. Dec. III. and I. 233 : /«?\as 208 ; iras, xapfeis 205 ; ^vs 213 c,
217 b ; peXcuva, ^5e?a, 233 a ; irda-a, xapietrcra, 233 b, 155, 156 ; peXacri,
§ 24. OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 29
b. Of the Third and First Declensions.
6 (niger)
i) (black)
rb
6 (omnis)
i) (all)
rb
S.N.
peXds
peXaiva
fxeXav
7TO.S
7iwa
irdv
G.
peXduos
peXaiurjs
•navros
7rd(rr)s
D.
peXavi
peXaivrj
TTCLVTl
7rdaT)
A
piXava
peXaivav
Ttavra
Trdaav
P.N.
peXaves
peXawai
fxeXava
iravTCs
naaai
Train
G.
peXavcov
peXaivoau
TTOVTCOV
navSiv
D.
fxeXaai
peXaivcus
Trao-i
ndo-acs
A.
peXavas
pcXaivas
Trdvras
ird(jd$
D.N.
peXave
peXaiva
7rdvTe
Trdcra
g.
peXdvoiv
ptXaivaw
TrdproLP
irdcraiv
6 (gratiosin) t) (agreeable) rb
6 (suavis
) i) (sweet) rb
S. N.
Xapieis
Xapieo-cra
Xapicv
f)8vs
f)8ela
ffii
G-.
XapUvTos
Xapiecnrrjs
r)8sos
f)8€lds
D.
XapUvTi
Xapieoro-f)
r)8ei, r]8e\
'. fj8eia
A.
Xapievra
Xapiecrcrav
i)8vv
f]8elau
V.
Xapitv
rj8v
P.N.
Xapicvres
XapUo-acu
XapUvra
i)8e€s, rjbels rjdelaL
tj8e
G.
XO-pUVTOiV
Xapi*<TO S)v
rj8ea>u
^Oft<5i/
D.
Xapiecri
Xapt-eaaais
f)8eai
7)8eicus
A.
XapUvras
Xapuaaas
fjdtas, r)8els rjdelas
D.N.
Xap'ievrc
Xapiecrcra
fjbee
f)8ela
G.
XapcevToiu
Xapuo-craiv
r)8eoiv
rj8€iaiv
24. Of the Three Declensions.
o (magnus'
) rj (great)
rb
S.N.
p-eyas
peyaXtj
fieya
G.
peydXov
peydXrjs
D.
peydXco
peydXrj
A.
peyav
p.eyaXr)v
Y.
peydXe
P.N.
peydXot
peydXat
peydX
G.
peydXcov
peydXav
D.
ptydXois
peydXais
A.
peydXovs
peydXds
D.N.
peydXco
peydXd
G.
fiiyaXcKV
peydXaiv
6 (multus) i) (much)
rb
7roXvs
noXXr)
TToXv
noXXov
7roXXrjs
7ToXX<0
ttoXXt}
TToXvV
7roXXr)v
multi,
many
7ToXXoi
noXXai
7toXXd
7ToXX(i)V
noXXcov
TToXXois
noXXals
noXXovs noXXas
yapieai, iracri, 154 s; ttcLv, irdurwv, Train, 729. 2, 778 b; t)M 219. —
0. E. T&\(avs)as wretched (M. Voc. rd\au), Tep(evs)7\v tener, tended,
avfjiTrds (<rvv, 7ras), -aaa, -av, all together, rt,u^ets honored, Trrepoeis winged
(207 c), €k(ovts)&v willing, j3paxvs brevis, short, yXuntis dulcis, sweet (168),
tvpm wide, 6i-6s sJiarp, (3pa5vs tardus, slow, tolxv* swift.
30
S.
N.
a.
D.
A.
o (mitis) ri (mild) rb
trpdos irpaeta
npdov irpatias
npaco Trpaeia
Trpaov npaeiav
AJ>JECTI\
r ES. NUMERALS.
§24.
to
P. of
al
ra
npaov
irpaoi,
7rpaus
npauai
irpaia
irpaeow
7rpaeia>v
, 1
7rpdois,
npaeai
7Tpaeiacs
iTpaeai
irpdovs,
wpaels
irpaelds
25. xiii. Declension of Numerals.
m. (unus) F. (one) N.
S. N. els pid eu
Gr. evos p-tas
D. ivi pia
A. tva p.idv
M. (nullus) F. (no one) n. u.,none.
ovdets ov8ep,ia ovdeu P. ovdeves
ovdevos ovdepias ovdevcov
ovdevi ovdepia ovdcai
ovbiva ovdefxiav ovdtvas
M. F. N., both. M.F.N., two. M. F. N.
D. N. A. ap<pa> ambo, -se, -o 8vo, 8va> duo duae duo
G-. D. dpcpolv amborum, &c. dvolv, late Gr. 8velv P. late D. 8vo~l
m.f. (three) N. M. f. n.
P. N, Tpeis rpi'a tres tria
Gr. Tptoii/ trium
D. Tptori tribus
A. rpels tres
M. F. (quatuor, four) N.
reVcrapey, reVrapes reaaapa, rerrapa
Tecradpcov, reTTapcov
Teaaapo-i, Terrapa-i
Teo~o~apas, rerrapas
§ 24. a. See 236 ; TroXtfs 213 c, 217 b ; Trpaeta 233 a, Trpoets 121.
g. Homeric Forms of iroXds.
S. K. 7T0Xl5s, TOvXfc
iroXXbs
17
7T0XXlJ
G. ToXios
7ToXX?}s
D. (TroXet? Jlscll.)
7T0XXy
7roXXf7
A. iroXtiv, irovXvv
iroXXtfj'
iroXXf)v, irovXtiv
Tb
iroXi, irovXrf, ToXXbv
P.N. iroXees, iroXets iroXXol iroXXai (iroXea Msch.) ToXXd
G. iroXeuv ttoXX&v iroXXdcou, rroXXeuv
D. 7roXe<rt, -ecro-i, -eecrcrt iroXXoicri. woXXfjcri
A. iroXias [iroXds '(] iroXXovs iroXXds
§ 25. a. Numerals 240 : (evs) eft 208 d, ^a 194 c, oiSeuds 973 b ; r/oe?s
218 ; rerrapes 169 a, rkaaapai 157 ; (oi)5e els) ouSeJs, /nySeis, no one, 128 a,
late M. and N. (otire els, nrjre els) ovdels, ovdev, firjdeis, fi-qOiv, 161 b.
b. Dialectic Forms : 1 : Masc. N. Ep. Zeis 135, Hes. Th. 145, Dor. ^s
131 d, Insc. Heracl. ; Fern. Ion. /jlLtj, -??$, ovSe/miy, 197 a, Hipp., Ep. (fr.
old fos) ffi, Iris, lij, l&r, A. 437, n. 173, A. 174, £. 435 ; also Neut. f$ Z.
422 ; PL Ion. ovSa/xoi, fnjSa/xoi, -at, -&, none, -Civ, -olcri, -aXci, -otfs, -d? (v. 1.
oi8a/xias 135 a, Hdt. 4. 114), Hdt. 1. 18, 143, &c. 2 : Ep. Du. doiib V. 236,
PL doioi, -al, -&, -oiat, -ots, -ois, -cts, M. 455, 464, A. 7, 8. 129, 526 ; Ion.
PI. 8vwp Hdt. 1. 94, 8vdi<n lb. 32. 3 : Dor. N. A. rpcs Insc, Poet. D.
rpioiai. Hippon. Fr. 8. 4 : Ion. Te<x<repes Hdt. 2. 30, 31, Dor. reropes or
Terropes, Theoc. 14. 16, Tim. 96 b, jEoI. and Ep. irlavpes e. 70 ; Poet, or
late D. Terpaai Hes. Fr. 47. 5.
§26.
PARTICIPLES.
31
26. xiv. Active Participles.
a. Present.
b. 2 Aorist, -|v< Form.
6 (solvens) 17 (loosing) rb
(clearing) 6 (having put) 7} rb
S.N.
Xvcop Xvovo-a Xvop
luens Gets 6clo~a 6ep
a.
Xvoptos Xvovo-rjs
luentis Bevros 6eio~r]$
D.
Xvoptl Xvovcrrj
luenti SevTi Beio-rj
A.
Xvovra Xvovcrap
luentem Bepra Beia-ap
P.N.
Xvoptcs Xvovaai Xvovra luentes, -ia Bcptcs fcicrai devra
a.
XvovruiV Xvovo~a>p
luentium 6evra>p Beicrwp
D.
Xvovai Xvovo~ais
luentibus Beiari Beio~ais
A.
Xvovras Xvovaas
luentes Bepras Beio-as
D.N.
Xvovt€ Xvovo~a
flePTe Beicra
G.
Xvovroiv Xvovaaw
Bivroip Beiaaip
c. Present Contracted.
d. Liquid Future.
6 (vivens) i] (living) rb
6 (dicturus) 17 (about to say) rb
S. N.
$(auv)(av £"(doi;)ai;ra £(dov)<av ipCiv epodaa 4povp
G.
f(do)avTOS £(aov)d>crr)s
ipovvTos ipoijcrvi
D.
£(do)<avTi £(ao6)<acrri
ipovvTi ipovcrn
A.
$(&o)aiVTa £(dov)Suxay
ipovura ipovcrav
P.N.
£(&o)(i»vTes f(dov)<o(rcu £(do)<avTa ipovvres ipovaai ipovvra
G.
t(a.b)&vT(tiv $(aov)(aaGjp
ipotivTiov ipovawv
D.
£(do)<ocri f(aotf)<&<rcus
ipovcn ipoficrai$
A.
f(do)(OPTas £(aov)d><rds
ipovvras epoOcrds
D.N.
£(do)<ai>T€ f(aoi5)(ocrd
ipovvre ipo6<rd
G.
^(ao)<avToiv f(aov)uxraiP
ipoijUTOLP ipofoair
e. 1 Aorist.
f. 2 Aorist.
6 (having loosed) 17 rb
6 (having left) y rb
S.N.
Xvads Xvadcra Xvvap Xi7raiP Xnrovcra Xi7roP
a.
XvaaPTos Xv(rao~T]s
XinOPTOS Xl7TOVO~T]S
P.N.
Xvaapres Xvowai Xvaapra Xittopt€<: Xurov<rai Xnropra
D.
Xvo~a.cn Xvo~ao~ais
Xnrovo~i Xnrovo~ais
g. 2 Aorist, -|u Form.
6 (halving given) i] rb
6 {having entered) rj rb
S.N.
dovs 8ov<ra dop
8v9 Svaa 8vp
a.
doPTOs 8ovo~qs
cjvptos 8vo~r]S
P.N.
Sovtcs dovaat hopra dvpres bva-ai bvma
D.
doiio-i dovaais
b)vai dixrais
h. Perfect.
i. Perfect Contracted.
6 (sciens) i] (knowing) rb
6 (stans) 77 (standing) rb
S. N.
elSas etSvia eldos
iaroas €(rra)cra coro)?, icrros
G.
ddoTos fldvias
tCTTGiTOS io~TG>CTT}S
P.N.
ciSorey eiSuuu elSora
eorcoTes' eoreocrai ecrrcora
D.
elbocri elctvlais
eorcocri icrTa>o-ais
§ 26. j. Participles 234. 1 : \6(opts)uv, \6<r(avT<i)as, dels, 60s, 205 ;
Sotfs 205 a ; et5(ors)»s 214 a ; Xvovaa, Xvaacra, 233 b ; eibvta, earQaa, e<rr6s,
233 c, a ; f(dwv)»v, $Gxra, {uvtos, c<TT(aws)<&s, e(rr(a6)»ros, 120 ; ip(4cov)o»v f
£p(eov)ov<Ta, ip(£op)ovv, 152, 121. — 0. E. Xvawv, Xvdds, XeXu/cws, 37.
32
PRONOUNS.
§27.
27. xv. Substantive Pronouns.
The forms marked with the sign j are enclitic when used withont emphasis. The shorter
forms, /aoO, ju.oi, /ue, are only so used. The initials affixed to dialectic forms denote,
M. .ffiolic, B. Boeotic, D. Doric, E. Epic, I. Ionic, 0. Old, P. Poetic. The plural nos
and vos are placed beside the dual for comparison.
1 Pers., I.
S. Nom. eyo) ego
Gen. ifiov, fiov\ mei
Dat. ifioi, fioi\ miTri
Ace. e'/ie, /xej me
P. Nom. rifxeh toe
Gen. rf/juov
Dat. f)jxiv
Ace. rjfiat
D. K A. vco nos
G. D. van/ nostrum
, Personal.
2 Pers., £< 7 ioi6.
arv tu
troO J tui
o-ot'j tibi
trej te
'vfiels you
'vficov
'vfxiv
'vfxas
<r<$>G> vos
<r(f)cpi/ vestrum
3 Pers., of him,
*
ovj
■?.
*l
crcfiav
o-<jncri(v j
cr^as- [neut,
[A. tn£coe]
her, it.
*
sui
sibi
. trrfiea]
e. Personal Pronouns : Analysis, 243, 246.
1. 2.
S. N. ft- «r-
G. p-, 1(1- tr-
D. |i.-, €|1- <T-
A. p.-, Ift- <r-
P. N. rjfi-
G.TJ,*-
A.%-
D. N. v-
G.v-
VJJ.-
VJJ.-
6p
vip-
er
3.
Conn.
Vow.
-
*-
-€-
'-
-€-
'-
-€-
trc[>-
-€-
o-<J>-
<r<j>-
<rtj>-
-€-
<r<f>-
-»-
crcp-
-CO-
Flexible
Ending.
-6S
-COV
-iv, -cri(v
-us[n.-u]
-6
-Xv
Dncontracted and Contract Forms.
ifi(io)ov
e//,(ei')oi
ifU
72/z(<?es)€is
<r(to)ov
cr(ei')oi
(tt)ot
I
u/t(c^es)€ts o"0(ees)6is
■fjix{4u>v)(av via(£wv)u>v o~<f>{£iav)iav
•^(eti^tv ^(eii^tv O"0£crt
■?j/i(^as)as u,u(eas)as <t<£ (eas)ds[-^aj
v(<2e)co <r0(a)e)a> acpal
v(Qfiv)£av cr<p(Q'Lu)wv cr0totv
f. Forms in Homer and Herodotus. Those following the sign |j are
not in Herodotus, and those in brackets are not in Homer. The sign -*•*
denotes synizesis in Homer.
S. N. iy6 Wiydv
G. ifi^o, efxev, fiev\ \\ ifieio,
i/xtdeu
D.ejxol, fioll
P. 1ST. [w^s] v^s II &fi/j,es
G. ri^iov || riixeiwv
D. yjuv || rjfx~v, ^(uv, &/j,lu(v
A. r)fj.£as } -tas \\fjfj.as,dfj,fie
G. \\vQiv
D. \\l>U>lV
A. \\vuL v6
o~v II rvvrj
a£o\ o~ev\ \\<re?o, <r£8ev,
reeio
croi, toL\ [| re'tv
ail
[v/J-6es] v/xeh \\ijjxjxes
v(x£iav || v/xeiwp
VfUV \\vfUVy $IX[u(l>, flfA/A
vfjiias, -^as ||#/^u.e
\\o~<f>G>'C, a<pd)
\\(T<pU)LV
||cr0uJ'tV, <T(f>(tiv
eC J llloj elo, Wev]- or
Feoj FcOj Fe?o, F^e^J
ol\ \\eoc- or Fotj Fcot
ej /u^jll e^ • or F<?J Fe^
[o-0eTs]
<j<p£uv\ \\<r<f>eio}V, <T(f>Cjv
<T(j>L(fi(v\JT(f>L(v\ \\<r<f>
<r<f>ias j -tas \ <T(f>£ \ \\ cr0€?-
as, o-0asj [n. (rcft^aj]
\\<r<pouv\
[\<x<p(>)£\<r<p(>)\
S *'•
b. Keflexive.
1 Pers.
S. G.
m. (of myself) f.
efiavrov ifxavTrjs
2 Pers. m. (of thyself) f.
aeavrov, o-avrov creavrrjs, cravrrjs
D.
e/xavTop ifiavrfj
creavrco, aavrco
creavry, cravrij
A.
efxavrov efiavrrjv
aeavrov, cravrov
creavrrjv, a avrrju
p. a
D.
A.
rjfx&p avrcov rjfxcov avrcov
r)u.lv avrols 17/xtv avrals
rj/xds avrovs rjjxds avras
vficov avrcov
vfxlv avrols
vfxds avrovs
Vfxcov avrcov
v/xlv avrals
v/JLas avrds
3 Pers. m., of himself.
S. G. eavrot), avTou
D. eatrra), avrco
A. iavrov, aiirov
f., ofJierself ,
eavrrjs, avrrjs
eavrfj, avrfj
eavrrjv, avrrjv
N., of itself.
eavro, avro
p. a.
eavrcov, avrcov
eavrcov, avrcov
D.
eavrols, avrols
eavrals, avrals
A.
eavrovs, avrovs
eavras, avras
eavra, avra
or P. G. o-(f)(dv avrcov, D. crcfilcriv avrols -als, A. acfids avrovs -as
c. Eeciprocal.
M. (of one another) F. N.
P. Gr. aXXjjXa)!' aXX^Xcop
D. dXkr)\ois dXXr)Xais
A. dXXrjXovs dXXrjXds aXXrjXd
M. N. F.
D. A. dXXrjXw aXX^Xa
Gr. aXXrjXoiv dXXr)Xaiv
d. Indefinite,
m. F. n., such a one.
S. 1ST. 6, r), ro 8elva
Gr. rov, rfjs delvos
D. too, rfj delvi
A. rov, rrjv, to del va
If.
p.
oi delves
rcov deivcov
*
tovs delvas
g. Additional Forms.
TV D., TOlJ tu, B.
reo, rev] reosj Teusj
reous, reov D.
rLv d. b.
re te, rO j rlv D.
vfxes D.
v/nfiiup M.
vfiiv, 5/xtJ/ D. P.
vjxk, v/uLfie D.
Feflepj M., eovs D. B.,
eelo E.
Fot j M., iv or Iv D., 5 B.
Fej iE., wj'I D. P.
<piv\ \plv\ D., &V0t A
^ej D., fierce .#:.
S. N. libv, lib B.
G. e/xeos, i/xevs, i/xovs, fxe-
64v\ D.
D. 4/xlv D., €fl6 B.
A.
P. N. 'dues D. [m.
G. 'd/xecov, -&v~D., a/x/xeuv
D. 7?/>ttV P., 'a/iiV D., &/x/xe-
A. 'd>e D. [<tl(vm.
D. N. fwe B.
h. Keflexive 244, 248 : New Ion. 1 Pers. i/xeiovrou, -r)s, -$, -rj, -6i>,
•Tfjv • 2 Pers. cretovrov, -77s, -$, 77-, -6v, -r)v ' 3 Pers. eiovrov, -77s, -y, -rj, -6v,
-r)v, -6, PI. -G>v, -eiov, -ol<n, -rjai, -06s, -as, -d • Hdt. Dor. 3 Pers. avravrov
or -w, -as, -V, -a, -oj/, -aj', -0, PI. -a?y, -ai', -015, -ais, -ovs or -ws, -as, -a.
iEol. YavrQ for aurou, Ale. 88 [74]. See 131 e, 130 c, 197 c, 246 d.
i. Reciprocal 244 : Dor. &\\d%(oi> 130 a, Theoc. 14. 46, aXXdXouri
Pind. P. 4. 397, fee Ep. Dual dXXrjXouv 201 b, K. 65.
GR. TAB. 2* : C
34
PRONOUNS.
§28.
28. xvi. Adjective Pronouns.
I. Definite.
a. Article.
b.
Relative.
c. Iterative.
S.N.
G.
M. (the)
6
TOV
F. N.
9 rd
•rijs
M.(qui) F.(who)
OS T) O
ov hs
n. M.(ipse)
avros
avrov
F. (very, same) n.
avrr) avTo
avTrjs
D.
A.
TOP
i
ov
%
avra
avrov
avTrj
aVTJ]V
P.N.
G.
D.
A.
oi
TCOV
TOIS
TOVS
at ra*
raiff
ray
ol
<ov
OLS
ovs
at a
T
(OV
T
ais
as
avroi
airav
avrols
avrovs
avrai avrd
aVTGiV
avrais
avras
D.N.
a.
TO)
Tolv
rd
&
T
OLV
rt-
a
T
aw
avTa>
avrolv
avrd
avralv
d
, Demonstrative.
S.N.
G.
D.
A.
M. (this) F.
obe hie rjde hsec
rovde rrjade
r<3Se TJjde
Tovde Trjvde
N.
rode hoc
M. (hie)
OVTOS
TOVTOV
tovtm ■
TOVTOV
F. (this) jr.
avrq tovto
TaVTTJS
TaVTT}
ravrrjv
P.N.
o18e hi
aide hae
TO&
hasc
OVTOl
avrai ravrd
G.
T<i)v8e
rwi/5e
TOVTCOV
TOVTOiV
D.
Tolade
raiorSe
TOVTOIS
ravrats
A.
Toixrde
TatrSe
TOVTOVS
ravrds
D.N.
TtoSe
rdde
TOVTCO
ravrd
G.
rolvde
TOlvbc
TOVTOIV
ravraiv
S. 1 P. epos meus, my 2 P. <r6s tuus,
P. rjfierepos our
3 P. off suus, Ms, her. Us
vperepos your o-(perepos their
§ 28. i. Adjective Pronouns 234. 4, 249 s. Those of Dec. 2 and 1
have in general the dialectic forms belonging to those declensions (20,
201, 197 s, 131 d) : as, Ep. rotb, avroto, touv ■ Old rdtov, avr&cov, roiai,
ral<xi, rotcrlde, avrolai • Ion. rrjac, rrjs, r-galSe, rjai, avrrj<n • Dor. r<3, atrrw,
ra>s, 'a, &, arts, ras, auras, rq.de, ratirav, rav, avrav • iEol. rot's, rat's.
j. Article 250 : 6, rd, 199 ; rd), tolv, 234 e. Dialectic Forms : Old
Norn. PI. roi A. 447, Hdt. 8. 68. 1, Theoc. 1. 80, Msch. Fere, 424, rat
T. 5, Pind. 0. 13. 25, Ar. Eq. 1329.
k. Relative 250 : 8 199. D. F. : Ep. Gen. 8ov a. 70, ftjs n. 208, § 135.
1. Iterative 251 : avrd 199. So decline &\\es alius, other, and taettos
ille, tlmt (iceivos p. I., B. 37, Hdt. 3. 74, ktjvos m., Sap. 2. 1, r^os i>.,
Theoc. 1. 4). D. F. : M. adreov, -iio* -4wv, -toiai, -4ov$, F. -<ty, -^?/s, -c'y,
-irjv, -itov, -e"y<Ti, -4as, New Ion.
§28.
ADJECTIVE.
II. Indefinite.
35
f. Simple Indefinite, g.
Interrogative.
h. Kelative Indefinite.
Lat.
aliquis.
, ullus
quis?
quicumque, quisquis
M.F
S.K.
. (any, some) n.
TIS Tl
m.f.(w?Ao?)n.
Ttff Tl
M. (whoever)
OCTTIS
F. N.
rjris O Tl
TJCTTIVOS
f/TlVl
g.
D.
TLV09,
TlVl,
rot)
rco
rli/os, roi)
tiw, r<5
OVTIVOS, OTOV
tpTlVl, OTCO
A.
riva
riVa
ovriva
rjvriva
P.K
rives
TLVOL,
•riVes rtVa
oSro'Cft-
airives arivdj
G.
TIVWV
[arret
TU»(0I>
covtivcov, orcop
a>vrivcov [arra
D.
rial
t'kti
oio~rio~i, orois
alanai
A.
riva?
rivas
ovanvas
aanvas
D.N.
rivi
rive
&TIVC
anve
G.
TlVolv
rivoiv
OLVTIVOIV
aivTivoiu
m. Demonstrative 252 : oStos, aVrrj, 252 b. Decline roidade, -aSe,
-6vde, and roiovros, -airy], -ovrov or -ovro (199 a), talis, stick, rocroade (232 a)
and tovoQtos tantus, so much, rrfKiKoaSe and tw'Kikovtos so old, rvvvovros
tantillus, so small. D. F. : for rwvde, roiffde, by a kind of double declen-
sion, Poet, rdvbewv Ale. 127 Bk., Ep. rolcdeai <p. 93, T0ia8ea<ri(v K. 462,
/3. 47 ; rovrty, rovriuv, 255 b ; rovroi, ravrai, 255 a.
S. K 681
G. TOvSi
D. TQbl
A. toi'SJ
Paragogic Declension (252 c) :
i)8i rodl ovroai avTTJi
rr/crdi rovrovi ravrrfa-L
T7)8L rovroi ravryi
T7)v8i TOVTOVl TCLVTTJUL
tovtL
tolvtI
P. N. ol8i al8i radl ovroii airraXL
G. ruvSi, &c. rovruvl, &c.
n. Possessive 252. D. F. : 1 Pers. PI. '&ft&t or'dp,6s o., Z. 414, iEsch.
Ch. 428, 'dp.e'repos d., Theoc. 2. 31, &/-i,uos, afi^erepos m., Ale. 103, 104 ;
Du.^ vwtrepos e., O. 39 : 2 Pers. S. tc6s d. e., y. 122, ^Esch. Pr. 162 ;
PL 'v/x6s o., a. 375, tf/i,uos jj. ; Du. atpwtrepos e., A. 216 : 3 Pers. S. 6s
p. i., T. 333, Hdt. 1. 205, Soph. Aj. 442, ids E. D., a. 409, Theoc. 17.
50, f6s jb. ; PL a<p6s o., A. 534.
o. Indefinite 253 s : ris 208 d, 5 n or #,ri 255 c ; roiai; Stokti, 253.
Forms of ris, rt's, and Arts = 8<xns, in Homer and Herodotus, marked
as in 27 f :
8 Tl \\8 TTl
s.
K
TIS
G.
reo, rev
D.
recp ||t#
A.
Ti^d
p,
. N.
rtj'es
G.
[reuv]
D.
[reoiai]
A.
Tivds
rivd
{{daaa
tIs tI
rev !|reo
[rev]
riva
\\8ns
8rev \\8rreo, 8rrev
Srecp
\\8riva
rives riva
rewv
[reotct]
[rivas]
8reu)V
oreoicri [f. -erjai]
\\8rivas
\\8riva
&<xcra
p. For Correlative Pronouns, see 53.
36 COMPARISON AND CONJUGATION.
29. B. ANALYSIS OF COMPARISON.
§29.
1. Old Greek and Latin Forms. 2. Common Greek Form. 3. Second
Greek Form. 4. Common Latin Form. 5. Common English Form.
Base.
Connect-
Degree-Sign.
Examples.
ive.
Comp.
Sup.
Comp.
Sup.
1. Root or
a
T
vearos
Pos. Stem.
(u)i
m
mintmus
2. Pos. Stem.
T€p
TO.T
(JLCLKpOTCpOS
jjiaKpoVaTOS
<l>
vewTcpos
veciraTOS
at
d>lX(UT€pOS
<J>iXcuTaTOS
aKpar^o-raTOs
XaXt'cTTaros
€S
aKpaTecrrepos
XaX^orepos
p.eXdvT€pos
IS
*
p.eXdvTaTOS
3. Root.
(1)1
OV
or
fjSiwv
^8t<TTOS
4. Pos. Stem.
i
or
•ssim
longior
longissimus
5. Positive.
e
r
St
longer
longest
C. TABLES OF CONJUGATION.
30. i. Distinctions Classified (265 s).
a. voices.
Subjective.
I act
(Simple Performance of
the act) :
ACTIVE.
Intransitive : Transitive :
£8pau,ov, giravcra,
cucurri, I stopped
I ran. another.
Relations.
1. Def-
inite.
2. Indef-
inite.
3. Corn-
Time. 1. Present.
by myself
(Both Performance and Recep
tion) :
MIDDLE, Reflexive
Objective.
I am acted upon
by another
(Simple Recep-
tion of the act):
PASSIVE.
directly : indirectly :
lirav<rdp.T]v, €iXd|x , nv,
/ stopped my- I took for my-
self , I ceased, self, I chose.
iirav8i]v,
I was stopped
by another.
b. TENSES.
I. Primary.
present.
Ypdcfxo scribo,
I am writing.
I write.
2. Future.
2" sliall be writing.
FUTURE.
-ypdvj/w scribam,
/ shall write.
FUTURE PERFECT.
plete. •yc'ypcufxi scripsi, ireiravcrop.ai desiero,
I have written. I shall have ceased.
11. Secondary.
3. Past.
IMPERFECT.
£ypa<}>ov scribebam,
I was writing.
AORIST.
2-ypcuJ/a scrips^
I wrote.
PLUPERFECT.
c-ycYpd^civ scripseram,
I lead written.
§32.
DISTINCTIONS AND ELEMENTS.
37
1. Decided, or Actual.
INDICATIVE,
■ypdcjxo scribo,
I am writing.
C. MODES.
I. DISTINCT.
A. Intellective.
2. Undecided, or Contingent,
a. Present Contingence,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
•ypd<j>a> scribam,
/3. Past Contingency
OPTATIVE.
-ypdcf>oip.L scriberem,
i" might write.
I may write.
B. VOLITIVK.
IMPERATIVE.
"Ypd<|>€ scribe,
Write.
n. INCORPORATED.
A. Substantive. B. Adjectire.
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
Ypd<|>6iv scribere, ^pdcfwov scribens,
To write. Writing.
31. ii. Formation of the Tenses.
Library
& Catlfofnta-
Prefixes.
Augm.
Tenses.
Affixes.
Active.
Middle.
Present,
ta,\u
o|xcu, u,cu
Imperfect,
ov, V
cu,t)v, p/nv
Future,
0*0)
cropcu
(
2 Future,
i
Aorist,
era
<rdp/nv
1
2 Aorist,
ov, V
<5rv, p.Tiv
i
Perfect,
Ka
jiat
2 Perfect,
a
Pluperfect,
K€IV
R v
2 Pluperfect,
€IV
Future Perfect,
[™]
<r
ou,a(,
0T)O-o[xac.
t|o-ou,cli
6tjv
TJV
Augm.
Augm.
Eedupl.
Eedupl.
Augm. Redupl.
Augm. Redupl.
Redupl.
32. in. Analysis of the Verb.
I. PREFIXES (277 s).
a. The Augment, prefixed to Secondary Tenses in the Indicative.
b. The Reduplication, prefixed to Complete Tenses in all the Modes.
II. THE STEM (344 s), including,
c. Preformatives, additions prefixed to the Root.
d. The Root, the primitive element of the Verb.
e. Letters inserted or changed in the Root.
f. Afformatives, additions affixed to the Root.
III. AFFIXES (285 s), including,
g. Tense-Signs.
<r(e), Future and Aorist, Active and
Middle ; Future Perfect.
k, Perfect and Pluperfect Active.
Qi(dv), Aorist Passive.
€(77), 2 Aorist Passive.
8ns, Future Passive.
tjs, 2 Future Passive.
*, Present and Imperfect ; Perfect
and Pluperfect Passive ; 2 Per-
fect and Pluperfect Active.
38
CONJUGATION.
ANALYSIS.
32.
h. Connecting
Indicative.
o,«, (w, ei), Pres. , Impf. , Fut. , Fut. Perf.
a(e), Aor. Act. and Mid. ; Perf. Act.
«(e), Pluperfect Active.
*, Aorist, Perfect, and Pluperfect
Passive ; -|u Form.
w > *](!?)> Subjunctive.
Optative.
i, General Sign ; -jit Form Middle.
Vowels (290 s).
it], Aorist Passive ; -fu Form Active.
01(0117), Pres., Fut., Perf., Fut. Perf.
cu(etct, eie), Aorist Act. and Mid.
Imperative, Infinitive, Participle.
«(o), Imv. ) Present, Future, Future
€(«), Inf. \ Perfect ; Perfect Ac-
o, Par. ) tive.
a(o), Aorist Active and Middle.
*, Perf. and Aor. Pass. ; -p. Form.
i. Flexible Endings (295 s).
A. Subjective.
Sing. 1 2
Pri. -£(/u,*) -s(<r0a)
Sec. -ji^/u,*) -s(<r0a)
Lat. -m(*) -s(sti)
3
-T(*)
-t
PI. 12 3
p n pn np
-fi€V -T€ -VT(i'o > t,acri)
-}t€V -T6 -VT(j/,ej/,0-a>)
•mils -tls -?i£(runt,re)
Du. 2 3
p n p n
-TOV -TOV
-TOV -TTJV
P
Imv. -9(flf,s,e,0
Z. -*(to)
pm
-T*>
-^0
pn npmn pm n
-T€ -VTft)V, -TWO'aV
-to -nto
p n pmn
-TOV -TWV
r r r r
Inf. -v,-vai,-i
L. -r*(se)
rd
Part, -vt-s (r-s)
-nt-s -tur-tis
B. Objective.
Sing. 12 3
py p v p v
Pri. -|«u -<rai(cu) -Tat
Sec. -|jlt|v -oro(o) -TO
Lat. -(mr)r -rfo(re) -ttir
Pl.l
p vn
-p.€0a
-ra#r
2 3
pvn np v
-<T0€ -VTai(arai)
-<T0€ -VTo(ctTo)
-mini -ntilr
Du. 2 3
pvn pv n
-CT0OV -CT0OV
-0-0 ov -o-0t]V
pv pvm
Imv. -<ro(o) -<r0«
L. -r£(tor) -tor
pvn pvmn pvm n
-o-0€ -o-0»v, -o-0(o<rdv
-mini -ntur
pvn pvmn
-O-0OV -<T0(i)V
v r
Inf. -o-Ocu
X. -n(i, ier, rier)
r v d
Part. -p.€v-os Verb, -t-o"
d
i -ri-os
j(sus) -nd-us
j. Add to the list, v paragogic in the 3d Person, after c or simple 1
(163) ; letters inserted between the stem and affix (as <r, rj, «, 307,
311) ; and also, in compound verbs, a preceding Preposition (390).
33. Notes, a. In 32 i, the elements of the Flexible Endings are
mostly marked, according to their force, with small letters placed above :
fi, <r, 0, t, with p, as signs of person (246, 271 b, c, e. 2) ; v, c, a, with n,
as signs of number (271 b, c, e) ; at, o, 0, o*0, tjv, €v, with v, as signs of
voice (271 e, 272 a, b) ; <a, with m, as a sign of mode (272 e) ; v and 1, with
r, as signs of relation (272 a, 12) ; t and ri, with d, as suffixes of derivation
(272 b) ; while letters unmarked are, for the most part, simply euphonic,
b. The translation in 34, applies, except in the Imperative, to the
1st Person singular, and must be varied for the other persons and num-
bers. It is read across thus : Pres. Ind. Act. I am stopping another, Mid.
I am stopping myself, &c. ; while the different forms of the Pres. and Impf.
maybe also rendered, I stop, I stopped, &c. Some words are printed in
Roman letters as explanatory or, in some combinations, inadmissible.
§35.
SUBJECTIVE AFFIXES.
41
and Compared with the Latin.
d. Aorist
Active.
Ind. S. 1
2
3
& P. 1
2
a
Ind. S.
I
o
Sub,
a
•a
T. 0. P.
<r-a
<r-a-s
<r-6
s-i
s-i-sti
s-i-t
<r-a-(A€V s-i-mus
<r-a-T6 s-i-stis
cr-a-v s-e-runt
<r-a-TOV
(T-d-TT]V
<r-a> s-eri-m
(t-tj-s s-eri-s
<r-Tl
s-eri-t
(T-0)-JJ.€V
0"-T|-T€
(T-W-O-t
I
QQ
D. 2 (T-7J-TOV
Opt. S. 1 <r-ai-[i,i s-isse-m
2 o--ai-s, <r-eia-s
3 or-ai, <r-€ie
P. 1 cr-at-jicv,
2 <r-ai-T€
3 o--ai-€v, <r-6ia-v
D. 2 a--ai-TOV
3 <r-aC-TTiv
Imp. S. 2 (<r-a-0)o-ov
3 <r-a-Ta>
P. 2 <r-a-T6
3 <r-d-Ta)(rav,
<r-d-VT«v
<r-a-Tov
<r-d-T0)v
o--a-i s-is-se
(a-a-vT-s)a-ds
(cr-a-j , cr-a)<rd<ra
(tr-a-pr) <rav
D. 2
3
Infin.
Part. N.
G.
cr-a-vr-os
o--do--T]S
e. Perf., Plitperf.,
2 Perfect. 2 Pluperfect,
t. c p.
K'-a v'-I
k'-o>s v'-i-sti
k'-€ v'-i-t
K'-a-ixcvv'-i-mus
K'-a-Te v'-i-stis
(/c < -a->'T)K < d(riv < -e-
K'-a-rov [runt
t. c. f. [era-m
K 4 -€l-V, K*-T] V*-
k'-€i-s v'-era-s
k'-€i v'-era-t
k'-ci-tc [crav
ic'-ei-o-av, k'-€
k'-ci-tov
K'-eC-Trjv
k'-w v'-eri-ni
k'-'q-S v'-eri-s
k'-x| v'-eri-t
k'-cd-jjlcv
K 4 -1]-T€
k'-w-o-l
k'-tj-tov
T. C. F.
k'-oi-ju v'-isse-m
k'-oi-s v'-isse-s
k'-oi v'-isse-t
K*-Ol-(JL€V
k'-oi-tc
k'-01-€V
k'-oi-tov
k'-oC-ttjv
k'-€-T6
K'-^-Taxrav,
k'-6-vto>v
K*-6-TOV
k'-^-twv
k'-I-vch v'-is-se
(k'-o-t -s)k'ws
(K'-o-cr-a)^^^
(k'-o-t) k'os
k'-o-t-os
K'-vC-as
f. Aorist Pass.,
2 Aorist Pass.
(0'e-^)eV
***
0'tJ-fWV
0'tl-T€
0'r]-o-av
0*1] -to v
0'^-TTJV
T. C. F.
6'w-p.ev
0'T]-T6
0'u-OT.
0'tj-TOV
(Pc-iri-fiWdriv
0'€£t]-|A€v, f €i-|i€v
Q l di\-Tt, 0'ei-Te
0'eiT]-<rav, 0'ci-cv
0'€IT]-TOV, 0'et-rov
0'ei^-T-qv, Q ( d-TX[V
(0«e-0)8«i|Tt
e^j-Tw
0VT€
0'^-Tftxrav,
0'^-vtwv
0*T]-TOV
0'tj-tcov
0'fj-vai
(0<e-pT-s)0'€Cs
(0'e-per-a)8'tfou
(Pe-pr)^
0'1-VT-OS
0W-T1S
42
CONJUGATION.
§36.
36. vi. Objective Affixes Analyzed
Ind.
Pres.,P«rf.
S. 1 |UU
2 <rai(<u)
3tcu
P. 1 |t€0a
2 o-0e
3 vrai
D. 2 o-0ov
Ind. S. 1
2
3
P. 1
2
3
D. 2
3
I
a
§
0&
Sub. S.
I
3
D. 2
Nude.
Aor.) Impf.,Plup
<ro(o)
TO
<T0€
VTO
<T0OV
<T0T]V
Opt. S. 1
2
3
I 2
8 3
m D. 2
Imv. S. 2 <ro(o)
3 <T0w
P. 2 <t06
3 <r0«<rav,
o-0wv
D. 2 o-0ov
3 <r0«v
Infill,
Part. N.
C.F.
l-O
l-TO
C-|i60a
t-o-0€
l-VTO
1-O-0OV
C-O-0TJV
F.
o-0ai
G.
jiev-os, jUv-os
|iev-ov, |«v-ov
|JL€V-OU
Present,
c. F.
o-fxai o-r
(e-ai)fl,€ie-ris, -re
e-Tai i-tur
b. Euphonic.
(2 Aorist.) Imperfect.
6~fi€9a
c-or0e
o-vTai
€-<T0OV
i-mur
i-mmi
u-ntur
O. F.
o-|jwjv e
(e-o)ov
fr-TO
6-p.60a
€-<T0€
O-VTO
C-O-0OV
*-<t0t)v
a)-}xai a-r
(i7-ett)fl a-ris,-re
tj-tch a-tur
<*>-p.€0a a-mur
r\-a-Qi a-mini
tt-VTat a-ntur
1J-O-0OV
0. F.
Ol-\i.t]V
Ol-O
Ol-TO
ere-r
ere-ris, -re
ere-tur
o£-fjL€0a ere-mur
ot-<r0€ ere-mini
oi-vto ere-ntur
OI-OT0OV
ot-arQr\v
(e-o)ov e-re
£-o-0a> i-tor
€-o-0€ i-mini
^-o-0w<rav, u-ntor
1-<T06>V
€-<T0OV
£-<T0«V
€-o-0cu (e-ri)i
(J-fMV-OS
0-|liv-T|
d-jxev-ov
o-jiiv-ou
0-(JL€V-T]S
CO VQ
36.
OBJECTIVE AFFIXES.
43
Ind.
Ind. S. 1
2
P. 1
2
3
D. 2
3
Sub. S. 1
2
P. 1
2
3
D. 2
& P.
Opt. S. 1 o--o£-(M]v
2 0--01-0
3 OT-Ol-TO
1 <r-o£-fj.€0a
2 <r-<H-(r8e
3 0--OI-VTO
aa D. 2 <r-oi-or0ov
3 cr-o£-<r0T]v
Imv. S. 2
3
P. 2
3
D. 2
3
Infin.
Part. N.
<r-€-<r0ai
«r-6-p,€V-os
0T-O-|l€V-Tl
<t-6-|jl€V-ov
<r-o-^v-ov
d. Aorist
Middle.
and Compared with the Latin.
c. Future Middle,
Future Perfect.
T. c. P.
S. 1 <r-o-|Jiai b-o-r
2 (<r-e-cu)<rn, <rei
3 <r-e-Tai
P. 1 cr-o-p&a
2 <r-€-<r0€
3 (T-o-vrat
D. 2 <r-€-<r0ov
T. C. F.
<r-a-|*T]V
(o--a-o)o-w
(T-a-TO
<r-d-(i.€0a
O"-a-(T0€
<r-a-VTO
<r-a-(r0ov
<r-d-o-0Tjv
cr-co-u,ai
((r-i7-at)<T|
<r-Tj-Tttt
<r-<o-|i€0a
O--T]-CT0€
cr-co-vTcu
c-T]-<r0ov
<r-a£-|ji.T|V
<r-ai-o
<r-ai-TO
cr-cu-fxeGa
<r-cu-<r0€
<r-at-VTO
<r-ai-<r0ov
<r-a£-<r0T]v
(<r-a-o)<rcu
o--d-<r0w
o--a-<r0€
<r-d-<r0a>crav,
<r-d-<T0a)v
<r-a-<r0ov
a--d-o-0«v
<r-a-<r0ai
(T-d-|JL€V-OS
(r-a-fieV-T]
<r-d-(i.€v-ov
<r-a-fUv-ov
ar-a-^v-tis
e. Fut. Pass.,
2 Fut. Pass.
T. C. F.
0^<r-o-fiat
0^<r-T),0^<r-€i
0*f|<r-€-Tai
0'T]<r-d-[i.€0a
0^<r-€-<r06
©'•^(r-o-VTat
0*T|a--€-o-0ov
0'T]<r-Ol-|AT]V
0'^cr-oi-o
©'•fjcr-ot-TO
0'T](r-o£-|A€0a
0'^o--ot-<r0c
0'^|<r-oi-VTO
0*TJ(T-Ol-(r0OV
< tio--oC-<t0t]v
O^cr-e-o-Oat
0'-qar-d-|JL6V-os
< T]<r-o-|iiv-'r]
0'il<r-d-u.ev-ov
0*T]<r-o-|i^v-ou
< Tl<r-O-|JL€V-T)S
o s 3 -* !-• fe § .
o >£,-
P=o
C5 b
0-1
s
h S I «
^ „T C5 ^ o "*» Sk c3
gfJS »• I- g
**" S^ co oo b^-O
rh 5^ S c<i „p_, co
sC-i it** 8
g "8 -g '. 4T E-Sk
* <x> J o ~<S «
■o> >
o — >— i -.
c3
»
to "5 x .
J- o
* £ M ° o .J
* g £§£b^ b
03 _ m. 9 a --3
.5 .2 is ,o 3 « t£ „
« O ^ .^ o O j»5
CO
CO g, r^2 -*3 ^Qi J^ b
S 1 8 ff i b g
«s S
a;
o
b §
ii
G^l
.^S j«S5b
fcC'd 2 S co 3 ^ s
u
CONJUGATION.
§37.
37. vii. General Paradigm of
(Stem \v- ; Pass, to be loosed ; Mid.
A. Definite Tenses.
1. Present, or Definite System : Base Xu-
ACTIVE.
passive and middle.
a
Present. t
>. Imperfect.
c. Present. d. Imperfect.
I am loosing. 1
was loosing.
lam loosed, &c. I was loosed, &c.
solvo
solvebam
solvor, &c. solvebar, &c.
Ind
S. 1 ' 2 \v<a Ixlo
Xuojjtat luor
2
Afois luw
3 Xi^t], 2 Xtfei lu£m,-re
3 2 Xu€i \uit
Xtferai lultur
P. 1
Xi5ou,€v luimus
XvdfjieOa luimur
i
2 2 Ai?€T€ luitis
2 Xfo<r0e lmmfow
3 2 \yovo-i < luw?i£
XtfovTcu luwn^wr
D. 2
2 \tf€TOV
2 Xtfc<r0ov
Ind
-3. 1
2 2Xi7ov lue-
iXvdjiTjv lue-
2
%\v6$[bam
iXtfov . [bar
&
r3
3
&U*
iXtfero
P. 1
iXi'-ojiev
€\r6p.e9a
a
2
4Xu€T€
4Xtf«r0€
o
o
a;
3
HXvov
tXtfoVTO
02
D. 2
IXtfcTOV
eXfocrOov
3
«X^ttiv
£\v£<rQr\v
Sub
. S. 1 2 Xtf« luam
Xi7wjxai luar
2
Xi/tjs luas
3 Xi>r| luarts,-re
3
3 Xirrj \\xat
Xi^rjTat lua£wr
P. 1
\vto\Ltv ludmus
Xi>wp,€0a luaraiM"
1
2
\vr\re \\xatis
Xi/Tjo-6€ luamini
3
Xtfoxri' luant
AtfovTai lx\a7itur
D. 2
\vr\rov
Xl/T](T0OV
Opt
S. 1
Xt/otfu lue'rem
XvoC[ir\v luerer
2
Xtfois lucres
Xtfoio luereris,-re
!
3
Xtfoi luere£
Xi^oito lueretar
P. 1
Xi5oi[j.€v hxeremus
Xno£(i€0a \ucremur
pi
2
Xi/oitc luereto
Xtfour0€ lueremfrii
o
9
3
Xtfoiev luere?i£
XiJoivto luere?i£wr
02
D. 2
XlfolTOV
Xt/Ol<T0OV
3
XVOITTJV
XfOl<T0T]V
Imv. S. 2
Xfa rue
Xtfov luere
3
XvcTO) luito
Xu6t0g> lu^or
P. 2 2 Xtf€T€ luifo
2 Xi;€<r0€ \\ximlni
3
XucTtoo-av,
* 2 Xuovto)V luwwfo
Xf6<r0ft)crav,
2 Xuco-0a>v luwwfor
D. 2 2 \i5eTov
2 X(y€(T0OV
Infu
3
l.
Xl>€T«V
Xtfeiv luere
2 Av€<T0ttV
Xtfeo-Oai lui
Pari
. ST.
Xi5<i)v,-ov<ra,-ov ! luerw
Xl dp.€VOS, -TJ, -ov
G.
Xi/ovTOS|-ov(rT
s lue^is
Xvojifrov, -TJS
§37.
GENERAL PARADIGM.
45
Conjugation : \va>, solvo, to loose.
to loose for one's self, redimo, to ransom.)
B. Simple Indefinite Tenses.
2, 3. Future and Aorist Systems : Base \vcr-.
e. Future.
1 shall loose.
solvam
Ind. 2 Xv<r«
2 Xu<T€lS
3 2 Xtf<r€l
P. 1 Xi5<rop.ev
2 X^<T€T€
3 2 Xi;orov<ri <
D. 2 Xi5o-€tov
Ind.
2
3
P. 1
2
3
D. 2
3
Sub.
2
3
P. 1
2
3
D. 2
Opt. \tf<roi|u
2 Xtf<rois
3 Xixroi
P. 1 Xl/0-Ol|i.€V
2 Xl5(TOlT€
3 Xtfcrottv
D. 2 Xi;<roiTOV
3 Xwrofrrnv
Imv.
3
P. 2
3
D. 2
3
ACTIVE.
f. Aorist.
I loosed.
solvi
luam
hies
hiet
hxemus
hxetis
\went
Iplayed.
'iXvcro. lusi
'4\v<ra<$ Insisti
ZXvo-e' hisit
eXuerafj-ev hislmus
ikva-are lusistis
'4\va-av hxserunt,
cXtfo-a/rov [-re
i\v<rarr\v
2 Xi/<ra> lusZrim
Xtfo-fls luseris
8 Xi5<rj| hiserit
Xiy<rctf}i€V
Xl5<TT|T€
XiJo-axri'
Xl5<TT]TOV
Xi5<rat(jLt lusi'sscm
Xtfaxus, Xtfcraas
8 Xi$<rai, Xtfo-cie*
Xi^o-aifJL€V
Xi5<raiT€
Xtfaraiev, Xtfcrciav
XtftraiTov
Xuo-afrrnv
2 X0<rov
Xuo-dTO)
Xi5<raT6
Xua-draxrav,
2 Xvo-dvTwv
Xi5<raTOv
XixraTwv
Inf. X&rciv [ 2 -ov! 3 ^<rai! lwsisse
Par. Xi/o-ttv,-ov<ra, Xi5<ras, -d<ra, -av !
G. Xu<rovTOs,-ov<rrjs Xi/a-ayros, -da*T]s
MIDDLE,
g. Future. h. Aorist.
J shall ransom. I ransomed.
redimam redemi
Xif<ro|iai lu«r
3 Xi5o-T|, a X«5<r6i hieris,-re
Xtfocrou
hietur
hxemur
\nemlnii
hientur \
^YER^
Xuo-o(X€0a
Xi/(reor0€
Xtfo-ovrai
X&rccrOov
iXtftrw
€Xi/<raTO
€Xi/o-dfi€0a
I\u<ra<r0€
iXuoravTO
€Xu<ra<r0ov
lXu<rdor0Tjv
Xu'crco|xat
8 Xu'<rrj
\v<ry\Tax
Xi;o-wjJL60a
Xu<TT]O-0€
XvVwvTai
AOVrjcrOov
Xu<ro£|J.T|v \v<ralpr\v
Xu<roio XuVcuo
Xuo-oito XvcraiTO
Xi'o-oip,£0a Xu<raip.c0a
Xi/'<roi<r0€ XuVaurOc
Xv'ctoivto Xu'craiVTO
Xi;'<rotcr0ov Xvcraio-0ov
Xu<ro£<r0Tjv Xi><rai<r0T]v
8 X0<rat
Xu<rd<r0a)
Xv'<ra<r0€
Xu<rd<r0<D(ra.v,
2 Xu<rdcr0G)v
Xvcra<r0ov
2 Xu<rd<r0«v
Xutre<r0ai Xv'o-ao-0at
Xu<ro|j.€VOS,-r|,-ov Xv<rd}i€yos,-i],-ov
Xi/o*o|iivov, -tjs Xu<ra|i€vov, -t»s
Librar
r
? f Calif t>i*il»-
46
CONJUGATION. GENERAL PARADIGM.
§37.
C. Complete Tenses.
4. Perfect System : Base XeXu/c-. 5. Perfect Passive System :
ACTIVE. PASSIVE AND
i. Perfect. j. Pluperfect.
J have loosed. I Itad loosed.
soM solveram
Ind. S. 1 XeXvka pejnili
1. Perfect. m. Pluperfect.
I have been Vd, §c. I had been Pd, Sfc.
solutus sum, &c. solutus eram, &c.
X^Xujiai
2 \i\vKaspcipulisti
\i\v<rai
8 2 XcXuk€' ^puli£
XeX^Tai
t
P. 1 XcXi-KttfJiev
\i\v\iiQa
i
2 XcX^KOLTg
2 X4Xi;o-0€
"frH
3 XcX^Kdtrt'
XeXuvTat
P-l
D. 2 XeXi/Karov
X&u<r0ov
Ind
S. 1 iXcXuKciv _pepul£-
eXcXifutjv
2 4X€Xt>K€i$ [ram
&iXu<ro
.
3 cXeXi'Kei
tkiXvro
|
P. 1 €X€Xt5K€l|WV
cXcXi/p.60a
T3
rt
2 IXcXi^Ktirc [K€<rav
IX^Xf<r0€
o
o
3 !XeXtfK€t<rav, IXeXtf-
IX^Xuvto
<u
D. 2 !XeX^K€iTov
«X^Xi'<r0ov
3 eXcXi/Kcfrrqv
«X€Xu<r0Tjy
Sub
. S. 1 X€Xi5k&> peipu\erim
XcXuulvos c5
2 XcXi/K-gs peipuleris
X«Xt Lie'vos $s
XcXi/p^vos fj
3 XeXi/ujj pe^vlerit
£
P. 1 XcXtficeouev
XeXi'ue'voi wjxev
o3
2 X6XlVKT|T€
XcXuaevoi •fjTC
XcXvulvoi mm?
*S
3 XcXi/K&xn*
£h
D. 2 XcXi/ktjtov
\i\v\Uv<a tJtov
Opt
S. 1 XcXtficoiui pe-pulissem
XeXuu&os €fr|V
2 XcXiJkois pe~pu\isses
Xe\i;p.€vos
€fy$
$
3 XcXiJkoi ^epulisse^
\i\v\Uvos
*,
P. 1 XcXiyicoiuev
\t\v\Uvoi
ci'T]|J.6V
PI
2 XeXivKOire
XcXvjJLe'voi
cl'lJTC
o
3 Xe\L'KOL€V
XeXi/u^voi
€ir\<rav
OQ
D. 2 XcX^koitov
XcXl/U€V<i>
ttr\rov
3 XcXukoCttjv
Xe\r|i«'vw
cWJTTJV
Imv. S. 2 2 X€'Xi/K€
X^Xutro
3 XeXuKCTco
XtX^o-00)
P. 2 XcXtficere
2 X&u<r0€
3 XcXuK^TOKrav,
XeXtfcrOaxrav,
X«Xi;k<Svt»v
2 X€Xi5<r0ti>v
D. 2 XcXtficerov
X£Xvcr0ov
3 XeXuK^Ttov
2 X«Xi;o-0g>v
Infii
i. XsXuic&ai ! pepvlisse
XcXtfo-Ocu !
Part
.IS. XcXukws! -via! -ds!
XcXvpivos
!-t],-ov!
G. XeXuKOTOs! -vtas
XeXi/aevov
,-qs
Ind. k. Future Perfect XcXvkws 2<rouai solvere-, I shall have loosed.
§37.
COMPLETE AND COMPOUND TENSES.
47
Bases XeXu- and XeXi7<r-.
6. Compound System : Bases \vde- and \v$rjo~-.
MIDDLE.
PASSIVE.
n. Future Perfect.
O. AORIST.
p. Future.
I shall have been loosed, §c
/ was loosed.
I shall be loosed.
solutus €ro, redemero
solutus sum
solvar
«♦-« «*< , CO
m > as ^
Ind. XcXu<rofJiai
Xv0^<rojjiai
a SR 3 co
2 XcXucttj, \ikv<r&.
Xu0V)<rr|, Xu0rj(rei
3 XcXtftrerai
Xf0^|<reTai
S ° d
P. 1 XeXua-ofwOa
\t'0T|O-dp.€0a
2 X€Xu<r€<r0€
XuO^o-ca-Oc
2S«^
3 \i\va-ovrai
Xu0^<rovTat
+3+» £ g*
D. 2 XeXua-€<r8ov
Xu0^jcreo-0ov
112 1
53 as 8 «
Ind.
i\vQr\v
2
3
i\vQr\s
P. 1
IXi/Oir]|xev
2 2 f1^
EH.Q ? rr 2
2
k\vQr\Tt
3
l\ijQi\arav
D. 2
^XJ0T]TOV
>o> <x> S? »
3
4XU0^TT]V
Sub.
Xu0a>
2
3
P. 1
XvOfjs
Xu0fj
Xi/0a>|iev
2
2 Xl/0t]T€
^2^1
3
XuOoxri'
"8 H -P
o" as S r? 3
D. 2
Xv0f]TOV
Opt. XeXuoroCfiTiv
Xu0€Ctjv
Xv0T](roC(JLTlV
£ 2{ g> Cn
2 XcX&roio
XvOcCtjs
Xu0^croio
sj-sj
3 XeXuo-otTO
Xu0€^
\vQ"f\<TOlTO
£«s flr ^
P. 1 XcXuo-oCju&a
Xf0€(T]|l€V, Xv0€l}l€V
Xl 0T]O-OLp.60a
2 XcXuo-oio-06
Xu06(t]T€, Xl»0€lT€
Xu0if|<ronr0€
3 XeXu'croivTO
Xl '0€LT]O-aV, Xu0€l€V
Xl»0^|O-OlVTO
D. 2 XeXv<ro«r0ov
Xl>0€fa]TOV, Xu0€lTOV Xu0^OPOl(T0OV
7 £ * 2
•■> o © a
>i«^ o
4 of £ §D
•§ 3 ^
g^co— _ g
§<D Eld
3 X€Xu<roC<r0T]V
Imv.
Xv0€i^Ti]v, XuOtfrrqv Xw0T]<ro£<r0T]v
Xv0T]Tl
3
XuO'/JTa)
P. 2
2 XU0TJT€
3
Xi»0^Taxrav,
2 \u0^VTft)V
•s-^-a „
D. 2
Xu'0T]TOV
3
XV0V|T«V
i— 1 T3 O
Inf. X€Xi;OT€O-0<H
XuOtjvcu !
Xv0-/j<r€O-0ai
Par. XeXi'<r<Jn€Vos > -'»],-ov
XuOcfe! -€i<ra! -Iv!
Xu0T]<rO(JL€VOS,-Tl,-OV
. OcO §
G. X€\i<ro|xevov, --qs
Xl»04vTOS !. -€l<Tt]S
Xf0Tl<rO(16VOV, -T]S
q. Verbals Xi/ros ! solutus, solubilis, loosed, loosable ; XiTrcos ! solvendus.
48
CONJUGATION.
SECOND TENSES.
38.
38. E - Second Tenses.
7. 2Aorist
System.
8. 2 Perfect Syst.
9. 2 Comp. Syst.
r. 2 Aor. Act. t
2 Aor. Middle.
u. 2 Perfect Active.
w. 2 Aorist Passive.
I/e£.
/ remained.
I trust, pret.
I was worn.
Ind.
2 ^/Vi7rov licpii €X"7t6jjit]v
iri-TroiOii. fldo
hfHj3r]v tritus sum
2
^Xl7T6S
iXLirov
ir€7roi#as
6r/3t'/3T]S
3
iXnrt'
IXlTTiTO
2 ir67roi0e'
Ir/H/Sn
p. 1
k\i7ro\iev
4Xi7rd|ie8a
ir€7rot^dn6V
|r/3t/3t]}JL€V
2
IXt7T€T€
kXiTreo-Qi
•jr€7roi^aTe
6rpi/3T]T€
3 HXlwov
IXlttovto
ir€7roi0dcri'
erpi/S rjcrav
d. 2
e\l7T€TOV
€Xi7r€<r8ov
7T€7rOt^dTOV
€T/31/3tJTOV
3
e\t7T€rqv
lXi7re<r0T]V
CTplj3^TT]V
Sub.
\£7Tft)
Xi7rw|xai
ire/roiOa
Tp(./3<a
2
XiV-gs
2 X t '7rx|
ir€7TOi0TJS
rpipris
3
2 Xl7T1]
Xt7TTlTat
ir€7roi0'g
TpiPii
p. 1
Xt7ra)jx€V
Xt7TW}A€9a
ir€7rot'0G>U€V
T/>l/3<Stt€V
2
Xt7TTJT6
Xl7TT]0-8€
1T€7rOl0T]T€
2 rpt/SfiT€
3
Xt7T(o<ri'
Xt7Tfc)VTai
trtiroidbxri*
rpi(3oia-i l
D. 2
Xt7TT)TOV
Xi7TTj<r8ov
ITCTOi^TJTOV
T/xjSfJTOV
Opt.
Xl7TOtfU
Xt7T0{|JLTlV
ir€7roi0oiui, -oCqv
TpLJ3dr\v
2
XiVois
Xl7TOtO
irt7rot'^ots, -oitjs
T/3t/3€lT]S
3
Xl7TOt
Xl7TOlTO
ir€7T<X0Ol, -OITJ
tpl(5*,Lt\
p. 1
X/7roi|J.€V
X(7roi|xe6a
irerroldoiptv
T/)t/3eti]p.ev, -€iu«v
2
Xl7TOlT€
Xt7TOL<r8e
ir€7TOl0OlT€
Tpij3dl)T€, -€IT€
3
Xl7TOl€V
Xt7TOlVTO
irtwoldoitv
Tpi/3€irj<rav, -€i€V
D. 2
Xl7TOlTOV
Xt7roi<r8ov
TrerroiOonov
T/)i/3e{TJTOV, -CITOV
3
Xl7TOlTT)V
Xt7roicr8r]V
Trt7roLdoCTt\v
77H/3€tT]TT)V, -61TTJV
Iinv.
X*7T€
XlTTOV !
2n-c'7TOi^€
rpt^Tj0t
3
Xi7reTO)
Xi7T€0-8a)
TT€7TCn0€Ttt
T/X/3l]Tft>
p. 2
Xi7T€T6
X(7T€tr8€
ir€7TOi#€T€
2 Tpi/3T|T€
3
Xi7T6T0)(rav, Xi7r€<r0o)«rav,
ire7rot^€Ta><rav,
T/3t/3'tfJTft><rav,
2 Xt7r0VT»v 2 Xi7r€or8u)V
iteiroid6vT<av
2 T/3£^£VTWV
D. 2
XllTiTOV
Xi7r€<r8ov
Trnrolderov
t/>£j3t]tov
3
Xi7T€TttV
2 Xt7T€(r6wv
imroiOiroiV
r/)ijSt]Ta)V
Inf.
Xi7T€lv!
Xi7r£<r8aw !
ir€7roi0€vai!
rpt/3r]vai !
Par.
Xl7TWV !
Xl7TOJI.£VOS
ire7roi^ws ! -via ! -ds !
77H/3e£s!-€i<ra!-€v!
Them
e X.€iir<i> (
3. Xi7T-, Xet7T-,
v. 2 Plup. Act.
x. 2 Fct. Pass.
347 h) linquo,
to ?eaw, 50 ; F.
€TT€7rOt0€lV
Tpi/frrj<ro[Jiai
Xetyco, 2 Pf. XeXoiTra, 1
iir&roidtis
r/)tpTi<roifiTjv
Xiirwv decl.
26 f : accent
€ir€7ro^ct
Tpt/3^<retr8at
780 b, 781 b, 782.
eTrc7rot^€i|i€V, &c.
t/si/Stjctoucvos
§ 38. y. The Second Tenses, which have no place in the regular con-
jugation, are here supplied from the verbs Xeiiru, weldw, and Tpij3u (39).
See 289, 303, 336 s. Pret. iriiroLda 268, 338 b, 312 b, 317 b, 318 ; ireiroi-
Qoi-qv 293 c.
§ 39. e. Mute Verbs 270 c : rplpu 347 g, Taaaw 349 i, 169 a, ireld.u
347 h, oplfa 349^3; Tpi'(/3-crw)\J/tt, lra(7-<ra)£a, 7r6rei(0-<ro)<ro, ircirei^-o-dai)-
<rOai, 151 ; 6/>t(<rc<;, ew)«5, 305 a ; TtTpi(Ji-Ka)ifra, TiTa(y-Ka)\a } <bpi{d-Keit>)-
39.
MUTE VERBS.
49
39. viii. Classes op Verbs. A. Mute.
Stem
Pres. A.
P.&M.
Impf. A,
P.&M.
Put. A.
Mid.
1 Aor. A.
Mid.
2 Aor. A.
Mid.
1 Pf. A.
1 PI. A.
2 Pf. A.
2 PI. A.
a. labial : rpi/3a>
rpi/3-, rpi{3- ; to rub.
rpifiat tero
rpi(3op.ai
€T(Jl(3oV
€Tpi(36fXT]V
Tptya
rpfyofiai
€Tpi\jsa
€Tpiyjrap.T]V
eXdfiov took
i\afiopjqv
T€TpX(pa trivi
£T€Tpt<p€lV
Ae'Aowra 38 r
e\€\o(.7T(lV
P£ P. Ind. Terpippai
2 Terpiyj/ai
3
P.l
2
3
Imv.
3
T€Tpi7TTai
rerplppeBa
T€Tpi(p6€
rerpcppevot etcrt'
TeTpiyjro
T€Tpi<p6a>
P. 2 T€Tpi(j)6€
3 T€Tpi(j)6a>(rav,
T€rpl(p6a>v
Inf. rerpicpdai !
Par. rerpipptvos !
PL P. Ind. fTeTpipprjv
2 €T€Tpiyj/0
3 €T€TpnTTO
P. 1 €T€Tpipp€0a
2 irirpKpOe
3 rerpip-pepoi rjcrav
Put. Pf. Tfrpi^ojuat
1 Aor. P. €Tpl(p6r)v
1 Fut. P. rpicpOrjaopxii
2 Aor. P. fTp'ifirjv oftener
2 Fut. P. Tpi(3f]<rop.ai
Verbals Tpmros, Tpnrrios
b. palatal: ravcra*
TC17-, racrcr- ; arrange.
Tcuraci), Tarroa
Ta.acrop.ai, ra.TTop.ai
€Taa-0~OV, CTO.TTOV
eraaaoprjv, cTarrofXTjv
rat-to
rat-opal
eral-a
era^dprjv
fjyayov led
qyayopyv
4tct&x€iv
7r6(f>€vya fugi
€7T€(p*vyeiV
riraypai
rera£ai
TCTUKTai
rcrdype&a
T€Tax0e
Terd^aTai
T€Ta£o
riTa\6e
T€Tax@(d(rav,
T€TO.)(6(CV
T€rd)(0at !
reraypevos !
ererdyprjv
€T€Ta£o
treraKro
ercrdypcBa
€Terax0e
trerdxaro
rcrdi-opai
cTaxfyv
rax@r)cropai
erayr]v rare
Tayrjaopat
tuktos, TaKTeos
c. lingual: ireldco
irid-, weed- ; persuade.
7T€ld<0
7T€ldop£Ll
eiteiOov
£7T€l36pr)V
ir€LO~<0
7Tficropxii
eTveiaa
€7T€i<rdpr]v
entdov poet.
€7Tl66pr}V
ns7T€iKa
neiroiQa 38
€7T€7roiS€lV
7reneLcrpxii
7Te7T€iO~aL
neireio-Tai
TrendapeBa
7T€7r€io-p€Voi elo-l*
7T€7reio~o
7T€7reiO-d<i>
Tteireia-Qe
7re7r€iaBa>crav,
7T€7r(lO-8(i)V
TTeireZcrBai !
7T€7t€lO-p.€V0S !
eireKtUrppp
eneneio-o
€7ren€io~TO
e7re7T€Lap,e6a
iTriiv€io~8e
7Tf7reio~pevoi rjcrav
"Xfkrjo-opai
€7rcio-6t]v
7reiadrjo-opat
edpddrjv r. or},
[slept
ITIO-TOS, 7T€L0-T€0S
K€iv, 149 ; rerpi^-yucu) n|«u, ^7re7ret(^-/x7;j')o-|XT]v, 148 ; T£r/?t(/3-TCu)irrai,
€T^Ta(y-To)KTO, 7ra(^-Teos)o-T€OS, £rpi(^-6T)v)^Qy\v, ra(y-6)\Qri<ropai, <hpi(d-0)-
<tQt)v, 147 ; T<?77>t(/3-cr0e)<|>0€, T€T&(y-a6u))x§(tiy 158 ; rerpippivoi (-cu, -a) fyrap,
rerayfiivoi (-at, -a) eial or rerdxarai, 300 b, c, 158 ; wpt-fyv, tipiKa, 277 c,
278 a, 280 a. Tenses supplied from other Verbs : ZXapov 351. 2 ; ■fjyayov,
GR. TAB. 3 J?
50
VERBS. MUTE, LIQUID.
§39.
Mute Verbs.
d. LINGUAL : 6/Hfa>
6pi5-, 6pi£- ; to bound.
Pres. A. 6pi£a> finio
P. & M. 6pi£opai
Impf. A. &pt£ov
P. & M. G>pi£6pr]v
1 Aor. A. btpXaa
Mid. topto-dprjv
2 Aor. A. ddovsaw
Mid. eldoprjv
1 Pf. A. &pX<a
1 PI. A. iapiKfiV
2 Pf. A. otSa46a
2 PI. A. 77S6H/
Perf. P. eopiapai
PI up. P. wpicrprjU
1 Aor. P. a>pia8r}v
1 Put. P. opiadrjcropMi
2 Aor. P.
2 Fut. P. [(TTfos
Verbals optoros, opt-
Fut. A. 6pi(ra>,
opua
Opt. oplo-oipi,
opiolpi
Inf. opicrew,
opulv
Par. Spiacov,
opieov
Fut. M. opi&opat,
opiovpai
Opt. opio-oiprjv,
opioiprjv
Inf. oplaeaOai,
optdoOai
Par. opiadpevos,
opiovpevos
40. B. Liquid Verbs.
a. oyyeXXta nuntio b. <paiVo> ostendo
a77eA-, d77eAX-; to announce, (pav-, (pcuv-; to shoio.
<paiva>
(paivopai
ecpaivov
€(paiv6pr)V
e'cprjva
e(pr]vdp,r)V
€(3ci\ov threw
efiaXoprjv
7re(payKa
CTrerpdyiceiv
Tretyrjva as mid.
€ne(pr)veiu
ire(pao-pat
€7re(pdo-pT)u
e<pdvdr)V
(pavdrjo-opai
e(pavr]u as mid.
(pavrjaopat
(pavros, (pavreos
Fut. Mid. Peif. Pass. & Mid.
dyyeXovpai J n ± Trecpaa-pai
(pdvovpac 2 7re(pavo~ai
(pavfj, <fmvel 3 Tr€(pavrai
(pavclrai P. 1 7T€(j)dcrpeda
(pavovpeda 2 iretyavOe [etVt
(pavelaOe 3 7re(pao~pevoi
(pavovvTai Imv. necpavao
3 ne(pdv0a}
P. 2 ire(pav6e, &C
dyyeXXo)
dyyeXXo/iai
jJ'yyeXXop
^yyeXXoyj.771/
j^yytiXa
^yyetXa/u?;!'
rjyyekov rarer
TjyyeXo'/xqi/
TjfyyeXKa
^yyf'X/ceti/
6'AcoXa perii
oXcoXeiy
rjyyiXpai
TjyyeXprjv
rjyyeXdnv
dyyeXdrjaopai
rjyyiXTju late
dyyeXrjcropai
dyyeXros, dyyeXreos
Fut. Act.
dyyeX<3
Ind. (pdvoi)
2 cpavcls
3 (pavel
P. 1 (pavovpev
2 (pavelre
3 (pavovcri 1.
Opt. (pcivo7pi,-oir)v (f)avoipr)i>
2 (pavois, -oirjs cpavolo
3 Cpavoi, -otrf
P. 1 (pavolpev
2 (pavolre
3 (pavolev
Inf. (pavelv
Par. cpav&v
(pavolro Inf. 7re(pdv0ai\
(pavoipeBa Par. ireipao-peuosl
<j>avol<T0e plup Pass & Mi(L
(havoivTo > j '
™ eTre<pa(TpT]u
(pavelo-Oat tnicpavao
cpavovpevos enecpavTO, &LC.
fir. #yw ago, Z<?ad, 284 e, g ; iricpevya, fr. (peOyw fugio,Jlee, 50 ; XeX?/<ro,uc«
sJiall have forgotten, fr. Xavdd^co 50 ; idpaOrfv 342. 3, 351. 2 ; eI5o^ 358.
— 0. E. yp&cpu write, Tpiiroi turn, k6tttu} cut, tOtttu strike, t\^koj plait,
Wxo/zcu receive, irpdavo} do, (pp&fa tell, wXdaaoj fashion, 50 ; ko;j.I£u, -law,
-id, K€Kop.LKa, -icficu, eKopi<yBy]v, KOp-iards, bring ; <rirev8io liasten.
§ 40. c. Liquid Verbs : dyyiXXco 349 1, ^acVw 347 h ; d77e(X-<xa;,
X^w)X«, ^avw, ^0(aJ'-(ra)i]va, iyyyeiXa, 152 ; 0aj/(^w)w, -(^ets)ets, -(eo)ov^ei',
-(^e)cire, -(^oi;)oiiat, -(^oi)oi,at, -(^wj/)(5v, 121, cf. <f>i\£u 42 ; (pavoiqv 293 b ;
■7re'0a(j'-/ca)'YKa 150 ; irixprjva 312 a ; 7r^0a(^-fia:)cr|iai 150 d ; irtcpav-crcu
§42.
DOUBLE-CONSONANT, PURE.
51
41. C. Double-Consonant Verbs.
a. 7refnr(i> mitto b. cmevdco libo c. av^co or av£dva> augeo
7re/i7r-; send.
cnreitd- ; pour. c
:#£-, av^av- ; increase.
Pres. A.
7r€fj.7ra> "PX 03
a Trevdeo
av£(o, ai£dva>
P. & M.
7rep.7rop.a1 lead
an evdo pat
av^oLiai, av^dvopac
Impf. A.
enepnov VPX 0V
eanevdov
rjvtjov, T)v£avov
P. & M.
enepnoprjv
eo~7rev86pr]V
T)V^6fXT]V, T]v£av6fXT]V
Put. A.
7rep.y\ra> ap£<o
cnrelaco
av£rjcra) p.eXXr)aa>
Mid.
nsfiyj/OLiai
cnreio-oLicu
al^qaofxai
Aor. A.
enep-yj/a rjp£a
eanetaa
■qv^rjo-a rj\J/r]o~a
Mid.
€nefx^/a.LiT]v
£o-neio-aLLT)v
7}l£;r]0-dLt,1]V
1 Pf. A.
7T€7roLi(pa rjpx a
ecnreiKa late
rjV^rjKa rjppr}Ka
1 PI. A.
e7re7r6pqbeiv
eaneiKeiv
Tjl^KUV
2 Pf. A.
XeXapna ulaze
•nkirov&a
oScoSa smell
2 PI. A.
iXeXdfxneiv
eireirovBeiv
oScoSetz/
Perf. P.
ireneppLai qpyfxai
eo~neio-p.ai
r)v£;r]Li.cu
Plup. P.
ene7rep.pr]v
€o~nei(rfj.r)v
T]lJJLir]U
Aor. P.
enepcpBrjv %px&ip
iaTvei(j6rjv
rjv^fjOrjv
Fut. P.
7r€Ltfp6r)(TOLl<U
(T7Teia6fj(TOLiai
ai^rjOfjaoLiai
Verbals
TTCLLTTTOS, TICLITTtIoS
0"7TetOT609
avt-rjros, av^rjT€Oi
Perfect Passive. (d. i\eyx w t° confute.) Pluperfect Passive.
Ind. 7T€n€fifiai iXrjXeypai
eTveTrepprjV
eXrp\eyp.r)v
2 1T€7]
■ep,\j/ai eXrjXey^ai
inej:ep,y\to
iXrjXeyi-o
3 7re7TfjLi7rrai £Xi]XeyKTaL
iireneiLTTTO
cXijXeyKTO
P. 1 •ncnkiip.tQa iXrjXeyLieBa eTT€7rep.Lie6a
eXrjXeypeBa
2 TrenepCpBe c'XrjXeyxBe
eneTrepfpBe
eXr/XeyxBe [aav
3 7r€7rcfXfiiuoi eicri iXrjXeyp.ii'Oi eioi nenepLpf vol rjo~av eXrjXeypevot fj-
Imv. 7Tf7Tf/x\^o iXrjXcy^o
Pf. P. Inf. Pf. P. Part.
2 7T€7refi(j)B(o eXrjXeyxda
» -ircne LL(p6ai\ 7re7rep.p.evos\
P. 3 7re7Tf/i<jf>#e, &C. eXfjXeyxBe.
, &C. £Xr)XeyxO>
at ! €Xr)Xeyp,evos !
42. D. Pure Verbs, i. Contract.
1. In -da>: TiLidco honoro 2. In -eo>: (piXeco amo 3. In -6a>: 8ijX6a> declaro
S. ri/xtt- ; to Jwnor. S. <fn\e- ; to love. S. 8y\o- ; to manifest.
156 b ; irtyaiv-aeeWe 158 ; 8\w\a, fr. 6Wv/nt destroy, 351. 4, 281 c ; ?pa-
\ov, fr. (SdXXw 50. — 0. E. aje'Wb) send, Kadalpw purify, 8tpu flay, crweipoj
sow, (pdeipoj destroy, ptaivco stain, reivu stretch, kKLvw bend, Kp\vw judge,
ttXvvu) wash, re/jo/io cut, j3dXXo> throw, p.evw remain, vtpnc distribute, 50.
§ 41. e. Double-Consonant Verbs: ireiropcpa 312c; Treire{p.Tc-
/u.ai)}j.ptai, e\r)\eyp.cu, 148 a ; cnr(ev8-croi)d<rb), ^<XTr(ev8-p., ei><TLi)e.i<r\i.ai, 151,
156, 148 ; ZcnreiKa 50 ; av^avio 351. 2 ; av^rjaw 311 a ; XeXafiira, treirovOa,
68uSa, fr. Xdfnru, irdax^ suffer, &£w, 50 ; LieWriau, ri^yaa, -fjpprjKa, fr.
llcWu) delay, ^\pui boil, ^pp<a go aviay, 311a, 50. — 0. E. k&/j,tttu) bend,
<r<plyyu bind, ripir ia please, /cXdfw clang, fibGnw feed, &xOop.ai be vexed.
52
CONJUGATION.
42.
DEFINITE
a.
Present Active.
I honor,
live,
Zouc,
run,
manifest.
Ind. TZ/i(aa))<5
GS
(^)iX(ea))o)
&'a>
8rj\(6a>)a
2 Ti/x(aeis)aff
C/7*
<^>iX(ceis , )eiS'
6eis
8rj\(6eis)o7s
3 rifi(aci)a
G
(jf>iX(tei)eI
*}
8rjk(6ei)oii
P. 1 Tlfx(do)<0-fi€V
£a)/iei>
<fiik(eo)ov-[iev
6eo/i€V
drjX(6o)ov-fM(V
2 rt/u,(ae)a-re
tf?™
0lX(€f)eT-T6
Belre
8rj\(6e)ov-Te
3 Ttjtx(aou)c5-crt'
^COOTl'
0tX(e'ou)o£'-(rt <
Oeovcri 1
8rj\(6ov)oi>-o~i i
Sub. njtx(aa))cS
g
(£hX(c&))cS
6ea>
S^X(dc«))c5
2 Tiii(ar)s)as
C»s
^)i\(er)s)fjs
derjs
S/;X(d77y)oTs
3 Tifi(dr))a
fit
i&Upfy
6*g
8/;X (07)01
P. 1 Tlfx(a.U))a-fl€V
ffi>/*«'
' <^tX(eco)a)-/i«'
Oecafxeu
8rj\(6o))a>-fi€v
2 TifM(dt])d-Te
t^e
(f)i\(€t])r)-T€
6er)T€
8rj\(6rj)a-T€
3 Ti/x(aoo)(3-(u'
£oW
(jf>tX(€<w)<»-oV
Oeaxri'
8rj\(6<e)a>-(ri l
Opt. Tifi(doi)a-ni,
~(OT]V
^)iX(e'oi)ot-/ii,
-oii)v
8rj\(6oi)oi-fxi, -oirjv
2 Ti/^aots^Giff,
-03T)S
^)iX(eoiy)oty,
-oirjs
8rj\(6oi)o7s, -oirjs
3 Tt/i.(aoi)<5,
-air)
^)iX(€ot)oI,
-oirj
8rj\(6oi)6i, -oirj
P. 1 Tifi(doi)co-[iev,-<pr)fi€V
<£iX(foi)oi-/xei'
, -oirjjiev
8r}X(6oi)ol-ixeu,-oir)ixep
2 rt/i(aot)w-T€,
-<pr)T€
<j[uX(€Ot)oi-Te,
-OlT)T€
8r)\(6ot)oi-T(, -OlT)T€
3 Ti/i(aoi)a>-ei'
(jf)tX(60i)or-ef
8rjK(6oc)ol-ev
Imv. Tip(ac)d
Cr}
<£i'X(ee)«
fci
8r)\(oe)ov
3 ri/i.(ae)a-r&)
(t)to>
(j)i\(ee)el-Ta>
Bc'lTbi
8rj\(oe)ov-T(0
P. 2 rt/x(ae)a-re
(i)™,
<£tX(ce)et-re
Scire,
8r)\(6e)ov-TC
3 rift(af)d-ra)o;aj/, &C
<j)i\(€€)ei.-Ta>(rav, &C.
8r)\(oe)ov-TOicrav,
rt/i(ad)&>-j/ra>j>
<^tX(fd)ou-j/rcoi'
8t)X(o6)ov-vtq)V
Inf. Ttfi(detv)dp
Cv v
^iX^'ei^etJ/
6e\v
8rfk(6eiv)ovv
Par. Ti/x(aa>v)&n/
C&v
cf)iX(eaiv)civ
6ia>v
8rjX(6cov)cov
Tt/i(dou)c5-(ra
cf)i\(eov)ov-(ra
8r)\(6ov)ov-o~a
Tt/x(aoi/)aii'
cf>ik(eov)ovv
8rjX(6ou)ovv
b
. Imperfect Active.
S. 1 CTlp(aov)a>v
c£cov
ecf)l\((ov)ovv
edeov
€8rfk(oov)ovv
2 €Ti[x(a.€s)as
Hi*
€(f)Ck(ccs)€lS
eOeis
c8r)\(o€s)ovs
3 €TifJL(a.€)a e£rj e<f)i\(ee)ei edei £8r)\(o()ov
P. 1 e , Ti{j.(do)o»-fX€V e^ajxtv €(f)t\(eo)ov-fiev iOeopev e8rj\(6o)oi>-jxev
2 eTin(de)d-T€ «C»7 T6 4 , <frik(ee)el-T€ edelre i8rj\(6e)ov-Te
3 €Tifi(aou)(OV c£oiV €<f)ik(cov)ovv edeov £8rj\(oov)ovv
§ 42. e. Contract Verbs 290b, 309, 120s, 7; ri,u(dw)<3, Tiu(&o)(OfX€v,
Ti,a(dov)acn, Ti/j.(doi)Cijj.i, 120 c ; Tt/j.(deis)ds, Ti/u(&€)a.T€, n/x(d?7s)as, Tt/i(d?7)d-
re, 120 a, 118 d ; 0iX(&«^<3<rt, 0tX(6>i/)ov, 0tX(^oi)oio, 121c; <pi\(eo)ov/ucu,
0t\(^et)ei, 0iX(^e)eircu, 121a, b ; 0tX(V#)fj, 0tX(^77)T|Tcu, 121 d ; 5-rj\(6a)u)<ov f
8r)\(oov)ov<ra, 5rj\(6ots)ois, 121 c ; 5i7\(6ets)ots, 5t7X(67?)oi, 123 a ; 5^X(oe)ov,
^5i7X(ooj/)ovv, 121b; 5r)\(6r])wr6e , 120 d; Tiji(6.€iv)dv, 8i]\(oeiv)o0v, 309 c ;
TifjL$r)v, (piXolris, 8tjXoIt] (in this second form of the Opt., the parts shown
above take the place of all that follows the parentheses in the first form),
293 b, c ; it^fo ft*v)i> ^( ae )l» 12 g ; 0&>, eels, 309 b ; tiamJctw, e V -
§42.
CONTRACT VERBS.
53
lMIO
c. Present Passive and Middle.
Ind.
2
3
p. 1
2
3
I am honored,
Tifi(do)6ct-fxai
rt/x(a>7)a
Tifi(cL€)a-rai
Tifx(ao)6)-fX€da
Ti/JL(d€)a.-cr6e
riyi{do)(o-vTaL
loved,
<£iX(fo)oO-/iai
$iX (07)77, <£iX(e«)ei
<jf>iX(ee)ei-Tat
cf}i\(€6)ov-fi€0a
0iX(ee)eZ-CT#e
^>tX(eo)oO-ivrat
Sub.
2
3
p. 1
2
3
rifi(aa>)a>-/zai
Tifi(drj)a.-raL
Tifi(aa>)<a-neda
Tifx(aT])a.-(rd€
Tifx(dco)a>-prat
<£iX(ea))a>-/ua4
#1X^77)77
^)tX(e?7)r}-rat
<5f>iX(ea>)d>-/u.e#a
0tX(e?7)^-o-^e
<jf)4X(eG))a>-i/rcH
Opt.
2
3
p. 1
2
3
Tin(aol)(&-fir)v
TtfJi(aoi)(p-o
TiJLl(aOl)<B-TO
Tifi(aoi)(p-fi€0a
Tifi(doi)&-ade
Tifx(doi)<p-VTO
(fn\(eol)ol-fir]p
<£tX(eoi)oi-o
(jfnX(eot)oi-ro
(f)i\((oi)oi-fi(6a
<j)iX(€oi)oi-(T0e
(f)t\(eoi)oi-VTO
Imv.
3
p. 2
3
Tt/i,(aou)<5
Ti/i(ae)a-cr#a)
Ti/i(ae)a-(T#e
Tin(ae)d-<r6axrav,
rifi(ae)d-(r8(ov
<f)ik(cov)ov
<jf)iX(ee)ei-o-#G>
^)tX(ee)fT-a-^e
<f)i\(ce)el-(r6<i>(rap,
(f)i\(€e)€L-a6(ov
Inf.
Tin(d€)a-<r9ai
<f)iX(ee)ei-a0ai
Par.
riji(ao)o)-fxevos
Tifi(ao)<a-fievov
<f>i\(eo)ov-fi(vos
<pik(€o)ov-fJLepr)
(f)i\(€o)ov-fi€vop
d. Imperfect Passive and Middi
s. 1
2
3
p. 1
2
3
€Ttfi(a6)a)-fXT]v
€Tip.(dov)a
£Ti/j.(de)a-TO
eTi/j.(ao)a>-/ze#a
eTt/i(ae)a-(r#e
iTi^,(do)a>-vTo
€cf)ik(e6)ov-ixT]u
e(f)i\(eov)ov
e^)tX(ee)ei-TO
e(£iX(eo)ou-/ue#a
f(jf)tX(ef)ei-o'^e
6^)lX(6o)oO-»VTO
manifested, &c.
hx]k{do)ov-\iai
dr)X(6rj)oi
8ijk(6f)ov-Tai
Brj\(o6)ov-fi€0a
8rjX(6e)oi>-a0€
drj\(6o)ov-vrai
$r)\(6<0)ai-ixai
8r)\(6i])ot
$r)\(6ri)a>-Tai
8rfX(ou>)d>-fie0a
8rj\(6r))(0-(T0€
trjX(6a))(o-VTai
dr)\(ooi)oi-fir}V
St]\(6oi)(h-o
drfk(6oi)oi-TO
dr)\(ooi)oi-fj.e0a
dr)\(6oi)ol-(T0€
dr]\(6oi)oi-PTO
dr)\(6ov)ov
drjX(oe)ov-a0a>
8r]\(6€)ov-<T0e
dr)\(oe)ov~<r0(0(Tav,
8TJX(oe)ov-a0a)v
8r}\(6€)ov-a0ai
$rj\(o6)ov-fievos
dr]k(oo)ov-fX€vr}
8rj\(o6)ov-fi€Pou
€8rj\(o6)ov-fiTjv
idr]K(6ov)ov
e8r)\(o€)ov-TO
idr]\(o6)ov-fie0a
£br)\(6f)ov-(T0€
edrj\(6o)oi/-vTO
pd<Th), i<f>l\T}ja, 8e8rj\ojK<t, 310 ; ir^Xeaa 310 c ; irXevaw 345 ; irXevaovp-ai
305 d ; rereXetr/iat, e-rrXevadrju, 307 a, b ; eX(d<ru)a f reX(^<rw)w, 305 b ; Tre-
irpdaopai fr. (irpa.-) TrnrpdcrKU) sell, 50 ; K€KXrj<Top.ai. fr. KaX^w, -&rw, CALL,
342. 2, 50 ; 8e8Si<rop.ai fr. 84w bind, 319 c, 309 b; accent 772.— 0. E.
itiKdoj conquer, oTrrdco roast ; 8i\pdoj thirst, rreivdw hunger, 120 g; ireipdu
try, edw permit, dvidu vex, aKpo6.op.ai hear, 310, 279 c; cnrdw draw, yeXdu
laugh, 310 c, e, 307 a ; eUriu ask, plato) hate, oUta inhabit, rry4op.ai lead,
pLip.iop.ai imitor, imitate; pht boil, al8top.ai respect, 310 c, 307 a, 309 b;
irXrjpow Jill, xP vcr0(a 0*W ; piy6a) shiver, 324 b ; dp6u plough, 310 c, 50.
54
GKEEK AND. LATIN CONTRACT VERBS.
§42.
f. Indefinite and Complete Tenses.
Fut. A.
Mid.
Aor. A.
Mid.
Perf. A.
Plup. A.
Perf. P.
Plup. P.
Fut. Pf.
Aor. P.
Fut. P.
Verbals
Tifj.T](ra> '
Tip.rjcrop.ai
eTiprjcra
€TlflT)(rdfXT)V
T€TlflT)Ka
€TeTlflT]KeCV
T€TlfXT]fW.l
€T€Tipr)pTjV
TeTtprjcropai
eTifirjdrjv
Tipr)6r)cropai
TlflTJTOS, TlfJLT]TeOS
(piXncra)
(piXrjcropai
eCpiXrjcra
e(f)tXr}o-dp.T]v
7T€Cf)l\T)Ka
€7T€(f)lXrjKeiU
TrecpiXrjpat.
€7T€(plXr}HT)V
necpiXrjaopai
i(piXr)6r]v
cpiXijdfjaopai
cpiXrjTos, (j)i\r]Teos
drjXdxray
drjXwcropai
edrjXaxra
edrjXaxrdprjp
dedfjXcoKa
e8edr)Xo)Keiu
8e8r)Xct)fxai
edfdrjXapqv
dedrjXdxropat
cdrjXwdrju
dr)Xa>6r)aopai
drjXcoTos, drjXcoTeos
g. OTHER EXAMPLES.
Pres. A.
P. &M.
Impf. A.
P.&M.
Fut. A.
Mid.
Aor. A.
Mid.
Perf. A.
Plup. A.
Perf. P.
Plup. P.
Fut. Pf.
Aor. P.
Fut. P.
Verbals
8r}p(d(o)(o hunt
Br)p(do)a>-paL
i6r)p(aov)oav
e0r)p(a6)<a-fAT)v
0r)pa<ra>
flrjpacropm
€$rjpdaa
edrjpdcrdprjv
TeOrjpaica
eTeBrjpciKCiv
redrjpdpai
€Tedr)pdp.r)P
7re7rpdaofuu
e6r)pd0r)V
OrjpdOqcropai
6rjpdr6s, Orjpareos
reX(fco)S> finish
TiX(eo)ov-pai
€TeX(€ov)ovv
€T€X(€0)OV-p.T)V
reXfVo), TeXa>
TfXecropai, reXovpai
eYe'Xecra
eTeXecrdpiyv
T€TeXeica
irereXeKav
rereXeapat
ereTeXeaprjv
K€KXrj(Topai
eTeXeadrjv
reXeaOrjcropai
reXea-Tos, TeXecrreos
7rXeca sail
€7rXeov
7rXevo-G) late
nXevcropai, nXevcrov-
e7rXevcra \jiat
7re7rXevKa
iireirXevKtiv
7r€7rXevapai
€7TC7rX(V(Tpr)V
de8r)aopai
inXeva6r)v late
rrXevadrjcropai late
7rX(V(TTeos
Att. ) eX(a<jcti,d(o)<o, iXds, iXa, iXwpev, &c; eXcopi or eXcpijv iXdv eXcoj/.
' reX(eVa),ea))e5, reXels, reXet, &C.; reXolpi ov reXoirjv reXelv riXcou.
Fut.
43. Analogies from Latin Contract Verbs.
1. In -(ao)o : ama-. 2. In -eo : mone-
Active Voice.
Ind. Pr. am(ao)o love
2 am(ais)ds
3 am (ait) at
p. 1 am(ai)dmus
2 am(ai)atis
3 am (aii ut) ant
Impf. am(ae)dbam
Sub. Pr. am(aam)m
Impf. am(ae)drem
moneo warn
mon(eis)es
mon(eit)^
mon(ei)emus
mon(ei)etis
mon(eimt)ent
mon(ee)ebam
moneam
mon(ee)erem
3. In -io : audi-.
audio Mar
aud(iis)Ss
aud(iit)?£
aud(ii)imus
audii)ttis
audiunt
audiebam
andiam
aud(ie)irein
§45.
BARYTONES IN -ft) AND -fit.
55
Imv. 8. 2
2,3
p. 2
3
Inf. Pr.
Par. Pr.
Ind. Pr.
2
3
p. 1
2
3
Impf.
Sub. Pr.
Impf.
Imv. s. 2
2, 3
p. 2
3
Inf. Pr.
am(ae)a
am(ai)ato
am(ai)ate
am(au)anto
am(ae)are
am(aens)a?ks
mon(ee)e
mon(ei)eto
mon(ei)ete
mon(eii)cnto
mon(ee)Sre
is mon(eens)cns
Passive Voice.
am (aor) or
am(ae)aris, -re
am(ai)atur
am(ai)amur
am(ai)amini
am(aii)antur
am(ae)abar
am(aar)cr
am(ae)arer
am(ae)dre
am(ai)dtor
am(ai)amini
am(ali)antor
am(ae)dri
moneor
mon(ee)eris -re,
mon(ei)etur
mon(ei)<?mur
mon(ei)emini
mon(eu)entur
mon(ee)ebar
monear
mon(ee)erer
mon(ee)ere
mon(ei)etor
mon(ei)emini
mon(eu)<mtor
mon(ee)eri
aud(ie)i
aud(ii)*to
aud(ii)ite
audiunto
aud(ie)ire
audiens
audior
aud(ie)ms, -re
aud(ii)£tur
aud(ii)wnur
aud(ii)imini
audiuntur
audiebar
audiar
aud(ie)irer
aud(ie)ire
aud(ii)Stor
aud(ii)mrini
audiuntor
aud(ie)ari
44. Pure Verbs, ii. Barytones in -©.
S. fiovXev-, to plan; cei-, shake; 6v-, 60-
Pres. A.
P. &M.
Impf. A.
P. & M.
Fut. A.
Mid.
Aor. A.
Mid.
Perf. A.
Plup.
Perf.
Plup.
Aor.
Fut.
Verbals
/SovXeuco
/SouXeuo/xai
€j3ov\*vov
e^ovXevofirjV
/3ouXei/cro/zai
efiovXevaa
eftovXevo-dfirjv
efteftovXevKtiv
/3e/3ouXeu/zai
eftovXevOrjv
j3ov\€vdr)o~ofx.ai
(3ov\evTos, -reos
(reia>
<reiofxai
eaeiov
creurco
fret'crofiai
eo~eio~a
€(Tei<rdnT]u
cecreiKa
ecrecreiiceiv
crecreio-fxai
ccreaeLO-finv
fo~elcrdr)v
aeia$T]aofxaL
aeta-Tos, -reos
sacrifice; kcli-
Bva> (~v)
Bvofiai
eBvov
€3v6fJiT)V
Bvaoa
Bvaofxai
eBvaa
eBvod/xijv
TtBvKa
erfBvKtut
reOvfiai
irv6r)v
Tv6t]cro[j.aL
Bvreos
, kcl-, &c, burn.
mUt, o. a. k&co
Kalofiat
enaiov, €<aov
eicai6fxr)v
Kavaa
KaiKTOfiai
eKavaa, P. e/cea
€Kavcrdixr]v
KtKaVKd
€K€KaVK€lV
K(Kav[j.ai
€K€KaVflT]U
iicavdrjv, inaqv
KavOrjO-ofxat
Kavros or -o~tos
45. Pure Verbs, hi. Verbs in -/a.
1. 10T77/UI (s. <rra-, la-rd-) statuo, to set up, station (Pf. and 2 Aor.,
to stand) ; 2. TtBrjfii. (Be-, rtBe-) pono, to put, place : 3. di8a>fjLi (8o-,
8ibo-) do, to give; 4. dflicvvfiL (deuc-, SeiKvv-) indico to point out, show.
§ 44. a. Barytone Verbs 309 a : pepotXev/mcu, aeaeiafiai, 307 b, d ;
66<r(t), TtOvKo. 310 d ; irtiOyv 159 d ; kcllco (s. *caF-, icav-, kcl-, kc-, kcl-, kcli-)
345, 341, 347 g, h. — 0. E. iratSeuw educate; Triareijoj trust; tLio poet.,
56
PURE VERBS.
§45.
DEFINITE
a. Present Active.
Ind. larrffte.
Tl&Jfll
SlddflL
fteiKWfti, -v<o
2 amjs
ridrjs
8t8a>s
8eiKiws
3 lorriarf
Ttdrjcrc'
8i8ooai c
BeiKviioi'
P. 1 ctrraixejr
ri6ep.ev
8i8ofi€v
8eiKVVfJi€V
2 to-rare
rtBere
8i80T€
8eiKWT€
3 iaracntr
rifleaoi',
rtflelot 1
8i86ao-t l ,
dtbovot?
beticvvai 1
Sub. larw
Tt6a>
818&
8eiKVV0H
2 ia-Tjis
rtOffs
8t8as
8etKVVT]S
3 l<7T7/
Tt£rj
8c8cp
SetKVVij
P. 1 io-Tcopev
Tifieofiej*
tiScofieu
8€lKVVOill€V
2 iOTjJre
T$dr)re
8i8a>Te
fklKVVT)T€
3 itrraxr^
TtOaat'
StSttCTt'
8eiKvtxoo-c l
Opt. ioracijv
rt6eirjv
8e8ot7}V [&c8w]ir]
feuciwotfii.
2 UTTatTfS
rtdeirjs
8180117s
8eiievuois
3 ivralrf
TtOetrj
818017}
8etKVV0l
P. 1 l(TTaiT][X€V,
-alfteu
Te6eirff*€V, ■
■ei/xev
8t8oLr)fjkev, -<
nfiev
(teiicvvoifiev
2 iorairyre.,
-aire
TtBeirjre, -eire
8e8oir)Te, -otre
8eiKVvoiTe
3 iaTaiiprav,
-aiev
Ti6(irfO , av > -
(lev
8i8oirjo-av,-ole]/
dutevvotev
Imv. tern;
3 lordx©
rWei
8i8ov
beUisv, -ve
Tt$€T(0
§k86ra»
8etKVVT(j}
P. 2 larare
TiOere
8l8oT€
8eiKVVT€
3 IcTTaTOHTaVy
TtBeTdorav,
►
8.i86T(&o~av y
&€LKVVTCOaaPt
taravroiV
TldeVTOiV
8t86vTG)P
8etKVVVT(OV
Inf. torawitl
rvBivaiX
8i86vai. !
SciKvvvai !
Par. tords!
riBeis !
8iJ8ovs !
8eiKvvsl -vatv
to-racra I
rtOelaral
8i8ovaal
8einirvo~a !
tOTOpI
Ti6ev\
Sidai'l
teuawvl
b. Imperfect Active.
Ind. LCTTTjV
ctIBttv
, eTtOovv
£8t8a>v, €oL8ow
eSetKiniv, eSeiKi/vov
2 Harris
fridrfs
, erifcts
(8i.da>s, d8i8ovs
f8eiKvvs, e8eiicvves
«
O IOTT7
€T10TJ,
rrt&t
e8i8(c
s e8l8ov
i8eiKin), f'SeiKvi/e'
P. 1 ta-rafxev
irlSefiev
€bldo/J.€V
tSeiievvpei'
2 to-rare
fTl0€T€
(8l8oT€
c8('iKwre
3 taraaav
eriOea
or
c&'Socrav
e8eiKWorai/, -vov
honor ; <ceXei/a> command, iraiw strike, 307 b ; /cXei'w skut, koXoiJw maim,
307 e, 50 ; daKptiw weep, KbrXtiu) (~v) hinder; kXoIui weep, 50.
§ 45. e. Verbs in -\ix 313 s : Stems, 80- 8180-, 6c- riGe-, 357. l r crra-
lora- 357. 3, 8tiK- 8«kw- 351. 3 ; stem-mark lengthened 314. Affixes
35 a, 36 a, g, 32 i, 295 s ; (Sara-/*) ftrni|u, fornjv, 296 ; (to-ra-r) %<rrr\oT. t
Wttj, 298 ; i<JT{a-vr, avai, aaaijaoT,, ridicurt 300 a, 156 ; deiKWfxt or Seucvijbt
315 a ; iar ^d-aj)«, £(rr(d-#s)fjs r ^ys, 5t5(6-^)«, 5<£y yv$, Ti$(^-w)«»jj.aL, 316 a ;
laraLriv, deiKvtioifu, 293, bidi^rjv, 5<pr)v, 316b, i<JTcu/xa>, Qeijxev, 293a ; &rr(a-e)i],
rld(e-e)o. t dts, 56s, arrjdi, 5G0t, 297 c ; Urr&vai, bvvai, 301 ; i<rr(a-VT-s)ds,
^ds, Tt^(e-»'T-£)££s, 7pous, 156, 26, iaraa-a, 5t5oi/(ra, 233 b j iSiSow, irideiSy
§45.
VERBS IN
-MI.
57
TENSES.
c
. Present Passive
and Middle.
Ind. lOTcifiai
TiBefiai
8i8ofidt
8eiKVVfXdi
2 IcrTacrai
Tt6e<rdi, Tidy
dldoo-ai
8eiKVV(Tdl
3 lOTdTCLl
TlBcTdl
didoTdl
8eiKVVTdl
P. 1 lO-rdficOa
TiBe/jifda
8i86peBa
SfiKvvfxeBa
2 laraaBe
TiBeaBe
didoo-Be
8€iKuv(rBe
3 laravrai
TtBeVTdl
8L8oVTdl
8eiKWVTdl
Sub. t0T<3jLUH
TtBSfidi
8i8a>fidt
8€lKUV(0[Xdl
2 t(7T t 7
TlBfj
8t8<o
8eiKVvrj
3 iarrJTai
TiBrJTdi
8i8a>Tdi
8eiKVVT)Tdl
P. 1 lo-rafifBa
TiBa>fieBa
8i8a>/x€Bd
8eiKvvoifi(Ba
2 iarrjo-de
TiBrjcrBe
8i8a>o-Be
8ciKiwr)aBe
3 loTWVTdl
TiBaivTdi
8i8a>vrdt
8eiKVVOiVTdl
Opt. ioTal/xiju
TtBdfxrjv,
TiBoifirjv
8l8oi/XT]P
SeiKWOl/JLTJI/
2 formo
TiBelo,
TiBoio
8i8o7o
8eiKvvoio
3 itrrarro
TiBeiro,
TlBdlTO
8i8oito
8eiKVVOlTO
P. 1 laralfieda
TiB(i[x(Bd,
TlBolfXfBi
1 8i8oifjLeBa
8eiKUvoifxeBd
2 l(TTai(rde
TiBelaBe,
TiBolaBc
8i8ola-Be
8eiKvvoi<rBe
3 iVrati/ro
TiBelvro
TlBoiVTO
8180IPTO
8flKUVOlVTO
Imv. lorao-o, iotco
TiBeao, tL
Oov
8l8o<TO, 8L8ov
beiKVVlTO
3 lOTa(T0G>
TiBc<rBa>
8i86a-Ba>
8cikvv<tB<d
P. 2 terra o-#e
TiBcaBe
8i8oaBe
8eiK.vvcrBe
3 iaTao-daxrav,
TlBfaBbXTdVy
8i86aBa>a'dV,
8eiKvvaB(oo-dV,
ioTdaOav
TtBeaBav
8i86(tBq)v
8eiKvvaB(jav
Inf. wrracr&u
TiBeaBdC
8i8o(rBdi
8eiKVvaBdi
Par. 'KTrd/ievos
TtBefievos
8l86fX€VOS
8(lKVVfl€VOS
Ivrafievr)
TlBffi.€VT)
8l8ofl€PT)
8eiKvvfitvr)
laTa/Mevov
TiBefievov
8l86(X€VOU
8eLKVt>fJ.€VOV
d.
Imperfect Passive and Middle.
Ind. lordfiijv
€TiBefirju
c8i86fi7jv
i8fiKVVfir]v
2 larraa-o, tarco
(TtBeaOy
CTlBoV
e'Si'Socro, f8i8ov
e8eiKW(To
3 lararo
(TlBeTO
e'81'Soro
€8ciKWTO
P. 1 iardficBa
CTiBefieBa
f8i86fieBa
f8eiKvvfxcBa.
2 la-raarBe
irlBeaBe
c8l8ocrB€
i8eiKvvaBe
3 lO-TdPTO
ctLBcvto
e8l8ovTO
i8eiKvvvro
315b ; foraaav 300 ; rideaat riBn (late, Pall. Ep. 79), 'iaraao Utw, £0(ecro)ov,
8(o<to)ov, 297 e, h ; Tidoifx-qv, doifj.rjv, 315 c ; accent 772 g, h, 780 a, 781,
782 b. — 0. E. irlfjLir\ri/xi pleo, Jill, Trifixprj/ni burn, 6vIvt}ixi benefit, dxPVf 11
lend ; &ya/xat admire, dOva/xai be able, Kpfyafiai hang, fiapva/nai poet., fight;
8ifr)/uLai Ep. & Ion., seek : 6vop.ai Ep., blame ; Ayvv/u break, {eOyvv/M jungo,
join, £d)vi>vfAi gird, &\\v/ju destroy, Spj/vpu swear, v/ryvvfu fasten. See 50.
2 Aor. (see also above) 313 b, 314 c, d : 2(3r)v, foprjv, tynav, (forms par-
tially given in 45 li), 28vv, Zdpav, 2 A. of fialvu go, afi&vvixi quench, yvyvtb-
ckw gnosco, know, dvvw enter, sink, didpavKW rim, 50 ; iirpid/j.r)v (s. irpia-)
as 2 A. of tivtoimi buy, 50 ; era. 297 d ; ordvruv, yvbvruv, 314 c ; ftfy/ca,
GR. TAB. 3*
58
PURE VERBS.
§45.
INDEFINITE AND
f. Fat A.
OT^tTW
#i7<ra>
Saxrco
8ei£a> .
Mid.
<TTt](rofiai
6r) (to fiat
bwaofxm dei^o/iai
1 Aor. A.
ecTTTjaa
f'QrjKa
306 b
edooKa
e8ei£a
Mid.
earqadfirjv
e07]KdfXT)V Ep.
edei^dfirjv
Perf. A.
€ JTTJKO. 46
TfdeiKa 310 b
8e8a><a
8e8ei^a
■iv e8e8ei)(€iv
Plup. A.
£(TTr)K€tV, el(TTT)K€lV
€T€B€lK€lV
ideftvKi
F. Pf. A.
(arrifa 319 b
h. Second Aorist
Ind. %<TTf)v
eprjv
(edrjKa
eaftrjv
(eSaxa
eyvatv
i'8vv sank .
2 €(TTT)S
t&IJS
Wrjicas
eafirrs
eBooicas eyvcos
e'8vs
3 €(TTT)
IpT,
eOrjKe')
co-fir}
eSa)Ke'
) eyva
edv
P. 1 ecrrrjixeu
edefiev
e'Sofiej
i
e'8vfiev
2 e(TTt]T€
eOere
e'Sore
e8vre
3 eorrjaav
Weaav
eSoaai/
e8vaav
Sub. ot<5
/3<3
6a>
Sa
yva
8voi
2 (TTfjS
fifis
0?/?
o\5y
yvas
8vns
3 otj;
fin
*!
S(0
yva>
8vrj
P. 1 arcdfiev
' (3d>fl€V
6<OyL€V
fio>/iei/
yva>fi.€V
8vO)fJL€V
2 OT^Tf
^re
6r)T€
doirc
yvarre
8vT)Te
3 o-Taxri'
/3(So-i'
eso-s
fiwcri'
yvatoS
8va>o-i l
Opt. crTalrjv
ftairjv
Belrrv
oW»;i> |
darjv]
8vr)v Ep.
2 <TTaii)s
fialrjs
Beirjs
8oirjs
8vrjs
3 aralrr
fiairj
Belrj
doir]
8vrj
P. 1 OTalrjfieu, o-rm/xei/
Seirjfiev, 6eip.ev
doirjfiev, dolpcv
8vr]fxev, 8vficv
2 (TTatT)T-€
, oraire,
OcirjTe,
delre
8oiT)T€.
, 8o7t€
8vr]T€, 8vTe
3 <TTO.ir)(TaV,CrTCU€l'
6eirraav,6eiev
doirjaav, 8oUv
8vr]0-av, 8vev
Imv. 0T77& [
ora]
6es
86s
yvcodi
8Mi
3 OTrjTCO
6eTG>
doTto
yVG)TG>
8l>T(0
p. 2 orqre
3 aTT]TCOO
0CT4
86re
yvarre
8ire
•ai/,
Qeroocav,
SoTOXT
av,
8vTa>o-av,
oravTcov
6evr<ov
dovrcov
8vVTO>V
Inf. arrival
firjvai
Belvai (
TJ3r}vai
8ovvai
yvavai
8vvai
Par. o-ras
fids
&k <
Tfieis
8ovs
yvovs
8vs
e"0ep.ev, deivai, tSuKa, tSofiev, Sovvai, 306 b, c, 314 d ; Urjv 316 c ; 8p(drji)qs
120 li ; irpiufiai, irpiaio, 783 b. — 0. E. ZtXtjv, £<pdr\v, Uttttjp, €VTdp.rjv,
2<jk\t)v, ed\ui> or ^Xw</, Iftttar, 2 A. of rXa- endure, <pddi>u) anticipate, irh-o-
fxai fly, <jk£\\w dry, d\L<rKop.ai be taken, /3i6a> vivo, live, 50.
§ 45. j. Select Homeric Forms of ttrn\\Li, ti0t]|xi, tr\\i.i, 8i8a>p.i, &c.
Active. Pres. Ind. s. 2 lets B. 880, 8i5o?s {tys, 8l8us, Bek.), 335 a, rU
O-qffOa, 8l8oicrda (didwcrda Bek.), 297 b; 3 ridel, let B. 752, 8i8o?, 335 a ;
P. 3 dtovai (diuffi Bek.) 335 a ; Sub. S. 3 iycri N. 234, § 328 b ; Imv. 'Lara.
335 a, SiSudi 335 d ; Inf. Up.ev A. 351, Itfievai N. 114, Tidrfpiemi, bidovvai,
333 c, 335 d : Impf. s. 1 lew (t> Bek.) i. 88, § 315 V; 3 UraaKe t. 574,
§ 332 g, Tldei (ri9 v Bek.) A. 441, § 284 a, 315 b ; P. 3 rldev a. 112, 'Lev M.
33 (v. 1. %vv-iov A. 273), ("didov, 330 b : Fut. Ind. s. 3 dv-eaei a. 265, § 310 d ;
P. 1 diduvopev (s. 8180-) v. 358 ; Inf. 'qcrepLev T. 361, Tja-ep-euai it. 377, d-qcre-
Hevat. M. 35, Swcre/x-emt 8. 7, § 333 d, 8i8uoei.v w. 314 : 1 Aor. arriaa 8. 582,
§45.
VERBS IN -MI.
59
COMPLETE TENSES.
g. Perf. P. earafiai 310 d
redeifiai
8e8op.ai
dedeiyfxat
Plup. P. eardpr)v
ere Bel fir) v
ede86p.r)v
ededelyfirjv
F.Pf.P.eoTJ7£o/iai319b
8c8ei£op.ai I.
Aor. P. earaBrju
ereBrjv 159 d
e86Brjv
e8ei\6r)v
Fut. P. ara6rj(rofxai
re^cro/xai
8oBr/aop.ai
8ei)(6r}aop.ai
Verbals armor, arareos Beros, Bereos 8oros, boreos oVtKToy, Betureos
Active.
i. Second Aorist Middle.
Ind.
2
3
p. 1
2
3
Sub.
2
3
p. 1
2
3
Opt.
2
3
p. 1
2
3
Imv.
3
p. 2
3
Inf.
Par.
ebpav ran
e8pas
e8pa
e8pap.eu
e8pare
e'8pacrav
opai
8pas
8pa
dpwp.€V
Spare
dpairjv
8 pair) p
dpatr]
8pair)p.ev, 8paip.ev
8pairjre, bpalre
8pairjaav, 8palep
8paBi
8pdr<o
Spare
8pdra>o~au,
dpdvrav
e7rpiap.r)u bought
eV/Jio)
eirpiaro
enpidfieBa
eirpiaa-Qe
eirpiavro
7rpi<0fxai
npip
npiijrai
7rpi(0p,eOa
7rplr)0~Be
irpleovrai
irpiaip.T)v
npiaio
irpLavro
irpiaip.e6a
TrpiaurOe
ivplaivro
irpiaao, 7rpia>
irpidvBot
irptaaBe
7rpido~6<j)0~aVi
Trpida-Boiv
itpiaa&ai
irpidpevos
eBefirjp
ebnprjv
eBov
e8ov
e'Bero
eboro
e'BefieBa
ebop,eBa
eBeaBe
eboaBe
eBevro
ebovro
Bcop-ai
ba>p.ai
n
8<o
Bfjrai
bcorai
Bd>p.eBa
bdi/jieBa
Br)o~Be
bataBe
Baivrai
8a>vrai
Beip,rjv, Boip.i)v
8oip,T)V
Belo, Boio,
bolo
Beiro &C.
boiro
BeipeBa
bolp.eBa
BelaBe
boio-Be
Beivro
bolvro
Bqv
bod
BeaBco
86o~B(*
Bea-Be
boaBe
BeaBaxrav,
boaBcoarav,
BeaBcov
buaBcov
BeaBai
86trBai
Be/xevos
86p.evos
SQko. 8. 649, § 284 a, &jko P. 708, § 135 : Perf. Ind. p. 2 Uryre 33.^d ;
Inf. eardfiev <f>. 261, eard/ievai N. 56, § 333 c ; Part, ecrraoros T. 79, earedra
N. 261, § 325 d : 2 Aor. Ind. s. 1 cryv A. 744, § 284a, 86<tkov, 3 anLffnev, 332 g ;
P. 3 iarav, ardv I. 193, t<f>vv, 330 b, taraaav M. 56, § 335 d, OUav B. 599,
«W 8. 681, Uaav A. 162, § 284 a, Sub. (322 a, c, 323 c, 324 c, 328 b) s. 1
fdeiw, deiu, etu A. 567, yvibu- 2 arifas, delns or Qr^, yvwys ^. 487 ; 3 crryy,
jSifa, j3e V IT. 94, 852, del-g or^y, 2y n. 590, dy or -rjy e. 471,yatv 0. 359,
Siby, dipcri, Swycriv- p. 1 (xriw/xeu, areiofiev, 0'co/nev, deio/u-ev, Swofiev- 3 <xttj-
wai or areloxTL, ddjucriv- D. 3 arrjerov ; Inf. arif/fxevai K. 55, 6e/nep, Ot/xevai,
€fj.€v A. 94, 86/j.ev, 86/j.evai, yv&fxevcu, 333 c. Middle. Pres. Imv. tarao-o,
Xarao Belt., K. 291, § 297 e ; Part, nd^evov 335 d : Impf. P. 3 rldcrro H.
475 : Fut. s. 2 dyaeai 5. 163, § 323 c : 1 Aor. 8. 3 dynaro K. 31, § 306 b:
2 Aor. Ind. s. 3 Oero T. 310, 'iro 8. 76, § 284 a ; d. 3 dkvdnv %• 141 ; Sub.
s. 1 deio/xai 323 c ; 2 ^i (v. 1. ddys) T. 403 ; Imv. 6ko k. 333, ^eu 323 c.
60
PURE VERBS. MI FORMS.
§45.
Verbs in -mi (continued).
ACTIVE VOICE.
k. 177/u
mitto
1. elfii sum
m. eifM eo, ire
S. e-, le- ;
to send.
S. i<r-, ,
£- ; to &e.
s. *r- ;
to go.
Present.
2 Aorist.
Present.
Present.
Ind. 177/u
2 tjjs
3 i^oV
r}KCLS
[els j] et
eVrt j'
sum
es
est
■9
eiui
rfi •»
Lets-J ec
eicrt
eo
is
it
P. 1 te/xet/
euxei/
eire
ea/xev \
siimus
Jeev
Imus
2 cere
e'ore j
estis
IT€
itis
3 met', iet<rt'
r. 2 teroj/
do-air (JjKav)
flTOV, 3 f Ittjv
ftcri f
iorov \
sunt
laai 1
ITOV
eunt
Sub. &
&
Z>
sim
IG>
earn
2 Ijjs
3 177
I 8
i
sis
sit
■f
eas
eat
P. 1 itofxev
2 irp-e
3 iwcrt'
S)fl€V
^re
&oV
S)fX€V
fe
&0V
simus
sitis
sint
icofiev
'lT)T€
lajoV
eamus
eatis
eant
D. 2 4777-01/
T/TOJ/
T^TOl/
ITjTOV
Opt. IflTJI/ [tot/nt]
&T)V
eu/v
essem
'lOlfJLL, toLTjV
2 letrjs 6iJis
3 Uirj elrj
P. 1 UirjjKv, ieifi€V elrjfxrjv, elfiev
2 leiijre, Wire clrjre, fire
3 Uirjcrav, lelev e 1770-aj/, eUv
D. 2 leiTJTGV, WlTOV €ILT)TOV, (ITOP
eins
€177/Xei/,
(ir;re,
f it? trav,
6177TOI/,
esses
ess'et
are
elrov
'lots
tot
totfxev
LOLT€
10 lev
IOITOV
ires
iret
3 leiriTTjp, Uittjv elrjTqv, *Ltt\v
ei7)r77i/,
€?TT]V
loirrjv
Imv. tee
es
ladi
es
Wi [el
?]I
3 ferea
ero)
60TO) [rj'
ra>] esto
ITO)
ito
P. 2 tere
ere
core
este
IT€
ite
3 Uraxrav,
eroxrai',
eoTcoo-ai', sunto
Xrcoaav, eunto
UvTCiV
eVrcov
earav, r. ovraxv
lovroii/, "irtov
D. 2 teror»
eroi/
<?(TTOV
ITOV
3 terow
ertoj/
ecrroov
"iTiOV
Inf. Uvai !
etrac
aval
esse
Uvai !
ire
Par. tfis !
Wicra ! tev !
etf
efcra, «/
&v [ens]
ouca, ov
Icovl
iovaa
iens
! I6v\
Imperfect.
Imperfect.
Imperfect.
Ind. 1771/, [tow] ten/
^ 1779, tei?
3 177, let
P. 1 te/xei/
2 iere
3 i€(rav
D. 2 IfTOI/
3 ikrqv
Fut. fjcra), fjo~oifii, S. 1
rjaeiv, rjcra>v 2
1 Aor. ^a (Ind. ^
only) 306 P ' *
Perf. efwa, elicevai, 3
et/catt 310 b J). 2
Plup. etKeti/ 3
[rjs\ TJada
rjv erat
77x6, 7^ ore
770-01/ erant
^roi/, t^otop
rjrqV) rja"rr}v
776ii/, 77a Tbam
rfeis, T)eio-6a
ijeiiiev, rjixev
1 -9
77 eire, 77 re
. jjeaau, fjarau
IJCITOV, fjTOV
' rjeiTTjU, T\TT)V
§45.
*IHMI, EIMI, EIMI, KEIMAI.
61
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE VOICES.
n.
Of lT)fJ.l.
0. i
Of dpi, to be. q. ndpai, to lie.
Present.
2 Aorist.
'.
Future.
Present.
Ind.
2
lepai
etprjv
ecropai
M -V
Kflpai
leaai
elcro
ecrrj, eaei
Kti&M
3
i€Tai
€LTO
[ecrerai] carat
Kelrai
p. 1
lepeOa
etpeOa
elade
ecropeda
Kcipeda
2
leade
eaeade
KdaOe
3
Uvrai
euro
eaovrai
Kelvrai
Sub.
Iwpat
copai
Kccopai
2
ly
Key
3
ifJTai
jjTat
Keqrai
p. 1
IwpcQa
cope da
KetopeOa
2
ifjade
lurii
Kerjade
2
lOOVTlU
hvrai
Kecovrai
Opt.
idprjv, ioiprjv
etprjp,
otprjp
iaoipqv
Keoiprjv
2
ido, ioio,
CIO,
oio
ecroio
Keoio
3
UlTO l
&c
*
€LTO,
oho
ecroiro
Keoiro
p. 1
idpeda
dpe$a,
oipcda
eaoipeOa
Kepipeda
2
IdcrOe
elaOe,
olo-Oe
eaoiaOe
Keoiade
3
idvro
dvro,
o'tVTO
Za-oivro
KCOLVTO
Imv.
?€(ro, tov
ol
K.d(TO
3
leaOco
ea-6a>
Kda6<o
p. 2
leade
cafc
ndaOe
3
UaOcoo-av,
<f(r6a)crav,
KdoBaxrav,
UaBcov
€(t6(OV
K€LO-d(t)V
Inf.
tccrdai
ecrdai
eaeadat
Keladai
Par.
lepevos
Imperfect.
epevos
icropevos
Keipevos
Imperfect.
Ind.
UflTjV
Fut. M
. rjcrofuu
■ P
. To
elai to go, some as-
(Keiprjv
2
3
teao, tov
tero
1A.M
Perf.
. TjKdfJLTJV
elpai
sign a Middle, te/xat to
hasten, Imperf. U/irjp.
(Kiicro
Zkcito
p. 1
2
3
D. 2
tcade
levro
tfcrdov
Plup.
Aor. P
Fut. P
Verb-
dprjv
. fl0T)V
. idqaopai
\ €TOS
Others write these tenses
with a rough breathing,
Upatf Ufi7]v, and refer
eicdpeda
€K€LVTO
Future.
3
titrOrjp
als
( ereo?
them to irjfii to send.
icdcropai
§ 45. r. Stems «- U- 357. 3, €<r- I- 345, 1-, <|>a-, 314 a, «€-, contr. «cei-,
342. 1: fr]ju, cf. Tldrjfju- (leao-i) Uteri, Att. ld<n, 122, 120 f ; toi/uu 315 c ;
'ieiu 315 b ; A. eXpev, e'i/XTju, eWrjv, 279 c ; ii\il, ctjii, 50 ; iari 298 a ; IoItjv
293 c ; tdi, el, 297 d, lovrwv 313 c, &nw, firwr, 300 e ; fjada, rjeia0a, 297 b ;
fy, yet', 163 b ; tifeiftpat 118 d, 121 d ; iaerai Ep., A. 211, iarai nude
(the only Att. form) 303 a ; dialectic forms 50 ; ty^pt, cf. i<ttt)/xi- tj>iL,
<f>Xls, 50 ; <f>adi, tyr/ada, 297 b, d ; (^e/^at) KCi^tai, cf. rldefiai- Kew/jxu, /ce-
oifxrjv, 315 c, 772 g. Hdt. has the uncontracted Keerai, ineero, Keecrdai, &c.
t. Forms marked with the sign j may be enclitic.
(3:
I
PURE VERBS. -
--MI FORM.
§45.
Verbs in -/
u: u.
(f)T]fxi
fari, to say (s.
♦*>
Pres. Ind.
Subj.
Opt.
Imv. Inf.
Impf.
S,
P
• 1 fywh W"
2 ^y, 077$-
3 (p-qcri^
. 1 (f)dfl€V\
2 (f>ciTe\
3 <jf>ao-ij'
(j)G>
(j>rjS
(f)5>fX€P
fare
(frcbai'
(fxilrjp
(f>alr]S
(j>alr),
&c.
(fraudi
(j>d0l\ or 0a&
0arG> Part,
r. in Att
0are 0as
(fidrwa-ap, (f)dpTa>p
€07?, e(f)T)<r0a
C(})*fi r)
€(f)dfJ.€P
e0are
€(f)a<rap
Put. (j)r)cra>, Aor. ecprjo-a. Mid. and Pass., little used in Att. : Pres.
Inf. (pda-Bai, Pt. <pa/x€Pos • Impf. e(j)dfir]p • Perf. Imv. nefydvQa)' Aor.
P. i<padr]P • Verb. 0aroy, (parios. — See 45 r, t, 50.
46. E. Preteritives.
a. ot§a novi, / ^now (s. 'i8-
S. 1
2
3
P. 1
2
3
2 Perf. Ind.
oida
oida?, oto-tfa
o'lddfiep, tcrfiep
otdare, tare
cuoa<ri', tcraat'
Subj.
eiSai
cldjjs
tibjj
eldco/jLep
eldrjre
eioaxri'
Opt.
eldeirjp
eldeirjs "kt6i
€106177, IOTCO
&c.
, etd-, ci&V-).
Imv.
2 Plup.
yheip, jfdr}
jf8ei?, flfys,
rf8ei(r0a, r/brjada
gtin', jj8r}
fldei/Aep, flo-pep
"5«re, wore
ioTctxrap r$8e(rap, fjcrap
Inf. eioVrat! Part, eldasl Fut. eicrofxaf less Att. Fut. d8r)o-a> and Aor
tlbrjo-a ' Verb, larios. — See 6pda> 50.
b. beboiKa or 8£8ia timeo, / am afraid (s. 8X-, 8ei-).
2 Perf. Ind. Subj.
Opt.
Imv.
Inf.
2 Plup.
S. 1 8e8Xa Seoi'o)
8e8i€ir}P
dedteVat!
e8e8UiP
2 8e8ias 8e8ir]s
8€8ieirjs
8&$b
Part.
e'ofSi'ft?
3 8e8ie l deb ly,
8e8ielr) f
Se8tro)
deSW !
e8e8iei
P. 1 oY6>ei/ &C.
&C.
e8e8ifxep
2 oV&re
8e8iT€
e'8e8iTe
3 Seoiao-i'
8e8iT(0(rap
€'8e8i<rap
1 Perf. 8e8oi K a, 1 Plup.
e'8e8oiK€iP,
Fut. da'cro/xai Ep. chiefly, Seto-a>
late, Aor. edeia-a. — See 6>i'8o> 50.
§46. e. Preteritives 268, 317 s: ot8a, S^Souca, Jfo-rnKa, 320 b;
(oid-<rda nude, 151) oltrfla, rj5ei<r6a, 297 b ; (%«» 9. 32, § 148) ta/iev,
(y8-/j.€i/) yafiev, dtdifiev, 'icraixev, 320 a; dediaai 156 a ; el8Q, ecrrw, elbeirjv
(so SeSteiT/^ ? as fr. base 5e5te-, PI. Phredr. 351 a), karai^v, (18-61) t<rBi,
eardvai, 320 c ; ecrribs 320 d ; rjdeiv, rjSij, 278 d, 291 c ; €<xttik€lv 280 a,
Att. also eiaTrjKeiv 279 c ; ^pou k<x9t]|j.cu (Kara, ^/>tcu) 280 a, 161 b (having
forms from both k- and 48-, or see 307 e) ; cf. Lat. sede-o, and see 141 ;
(778-Tcu) f/iTTai^aTo, 147; icadQfjun., ica6oifir)u, 317 c ; riixevos 780 c; iKadrjao,
Kadrjao, 282 b, 783 a, 771 c. — O. E. Tidi>r)Ka am dead, $'fir\Ka. stand, fit-
iiova am eager, dvuya command, 320 e, f.
§47.
PRETERITIVES. FORMS OF THE STEM.
63
S. 1
2
3
p. 1
2
3
c. rjfiai and Ka6t]\i.ai sedeo, / sit (s. 1
-, «-)•
Perfect Middle.
Indicative.
Subj.
Opt.
Imperative.
TJfjLO.1 KaOrjiiai
mdcofxai
KaOolfjirju
rjaai KaOrjcrai
KClOrj
KCldolo
rjcro KaQr)(ro
rjarai Kadrjrai
fjpeBa Kadrjfieda
rjade mOncrOe
Kadfjrai
KaOoiro
i}(rda) KaOrjadco,
Kadu>jxeda
KaOoifxeda
&C
Ka6rja6e
KaOoiade
$<r&
rjvrai KaBrjvrai
Ka6a>vrai
KClOoLVTO
rjaOcoaav, rjaOcov
Infin. rjaOai KaOrjadai
Part, rjfxevos
KadljfXeVOS
Pluperfect Middle.
S. 1 fjwv fKaBrifxrjv, Kadrjfirjv
2 r}ao enddrjao, KaOrjao
3 fjaro iKadrjTo, KadrjarOy
Kadfjro
Fut. Pf. Ka^o-o/xai late. — See Ifa 50
P. 1 rjfieda €Ka6r)fi.(da, KaOrjfjLeda
2 rjade eKadrjaOe, KaOr/ade
3 rjvro eKddrjvro, Kadrjvro
Indicative.
S. 1 eo-TTjica *
€(TTTjKaS *
&c. earafiev
Harare
earraai'
2
3
P. 1
2
3
d. eoT7)Ka sto, / stand (45 f).
First and Second Perfect.
Subjunctive. Opt. Imv.
earalrjv
e(TTr)K(0 eora>
earrjKTjs *
£(TTr)KT), *
earairjs
earairj,
&c
Infin.
€(TTT]Kevai\ 1.
i (Travail
Part.
earrjKwsl
Harare ear an I 26 i
eordrooaav, eardvrcov
earaBi
ecrrdrat
1 Pluperfect.
S. 1 earfjKeiv, eio-rqueiv P. earrjiceifiev
2 earrjKeis, elarrjiceis earrjiceire
3 earrjKei, elorrjKei ea-rrjKeaav, &G.
2 Pluperfect.
S. * P. earauev
* earare
earaaav
47. ix. Relation of the Tenses and Forms of the Stem.
3.
Domain of the Old Stem :
Second Aorist System :
Second Compound System :
Domain of the Middle Stem :
Perfect Passive System :
First Compound System :
Second Perfect System :
First Perfect System :
First Aorist System :
Future System :
Domain of the New Stem :
Present System :
x&e-
tXatiov
ilvyrjv
8utc-
Xt,8-
\e\i\a-fjiai
e\4\<r6rii/
"WXnflrr
eXevyfiai
eX,e<>x8r}v
8t]K-
949nyfuu
Ac/VTl WCC
e\r\<xa
XVjcrw
S48r]xci
idril-a
8rj£o/J,ai
XavBav-
\a.vdav(d
frevyvvfii
8aKV-
Solkvu
64 TABLES OF CONJUGATION. § 48.
,§. 3 s 3. b A b o b «g. t
O o -d, ^ P CJ 2 .2 so J° 2 - o-
S * ^2 I S J b b b <§. S
-Sboi t= o 3 b-S F* d.£ d o*d*d 3^
"*> 3 t- v a 3 s x ~r
3« 3 5 J"«i J 8 3 ■& 3* 8 ,£. • S £ .
Shi H i7*nii**tiii!'* r*
3. 3 § 3 3-o" a * i * 4 S * E ?■ § -I - £* * S S 3- a* a
** J I f I * I *2 »>* I f s£ I R<s-» £ I 1 1 1
I a H, irff Jt| § ikii^^i-.-.gf* I s 5 • s
3 3" .kS * J g S 3" b
dLP
tq Ph k5 <j fe 55 ^i-dbCQ iCQCQ
iH <M CO >-t <M
§4:7.
DIALECTIC FORMS.
65
s.
ACTIVE.
Pres. Ind.
2 Xves, Xi^s d. 326 a
XOeiada o. 297 b
3 Xtyat ? e. 328 b
XOrj D. 130 c
P. 1 Xiiofies d. 328 a
3 \6ovTt d. 328 a
Xvotat 2E. 328 c
Pres. Sub.
S. 1 Xi5u>A" E. 328 b
2 Xt*77<r0a e. 297 b
3 Xifytri e., -rt d. 328 b
P. 1 Xto/uep e. 326 d
X6ufjt.es D. 328 a
2 Xtfere E. 326 d
3 Xijwvti d. 328 a
Pres. Opt.
S. 2 Xvoiada E. 297 b
P. 3 Xvoiaau al. 330 a
Pres. Inf.
XCej/, Xi/?7J> d. 326 a
Xvi/xev e. D. 333 d
Xve'/j.epai E. 333 d
Pres. Part.
F. XioKTa M. 131 d
Xtfwa LAC. 334
Imperfect.
S. 1 Xvov o. 284 a
Xiueanov IT. 332
P. 3 iXtioaap al. 330 a
D. 2 Auefr^ a. 299 d
3 [f\Xterov E. 299 d
iXvtrdv d. 328 a
Fut. Ind.
\vo~w, -eh, -ei, &c. D. 325 b
1 Aor. Ind.
S. 1 Xv<xa o. 284 a
X&raovcoj' it. 332
Referred to Xvco as a
[e]Xv<rov E. 327 a
1 Aor. Part.
X6crats,-cuaa M. 131 d
Perf. Ind.
S. 1 XeXiko;,-77SD.326b
P. 3 XeXfaavri D. 328 a
XeXfaaai P. 328 c ■
XtXvKav AL. 330 a
Perf. Inf.
XeXtf/ceiv, -t/j/ d. .e. 326 b
Perf. Part.
XeXttcwv d. A 326 b
Plup. Ind.
S. 1 XeXikeal.,-770.291c
tXtXvKov E. 326 b
2 XeXiJKeas I., -97s 0.
291c [163 b
3 XeXtJicee(vl., -ei(v P.
2 Aor. Ind.
(XtXtirov, -es, -e E. 284 e
P. 3 eXiirav AL. 327 b
2 Aor. Inf.
Xure'eiv I. 323 d
Xi7T7> D. 326 a)
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE.
Pres. Ind.
S. 2 Xtfeeu I. 323 a
Xi/eo-cu HEL. 331 c
P. 1 Xvbixecda P. 299 a
Pres. Sub.
S. 2 XiStjcu I. 331 a
Xtfecu E. 326 d
3 Xterai E. 326 d
P. 1 Xv6fie<x6a E. 299 a
Pres. Opt.
P. 3 XvoLaro I. 329 a
Pres. Imv.
S. 2 Xtieo I., Xtfeu I. D. 323
Model.
Imperfect.
S. 1 Xvdfirjv 0. 284 a
iXvofidv D. 328 a
Xveai(6/j.7)v it. 332
2 [e]X^eol.,-evi.D.323
D. 3 [eiXdeadov E. 299 d
eXvtaddv D. 328 a
Fut. M. Ind.
Xvaevfiai,-fj,kc., D.325b
S. 2 Xtaecu 1. 323 a
Aor. M. Ind.
S. 1 Xvadfirjv o. 284 a
iXvadpuu d. 328 a
Xvcra<TK6/j.T]i> it. 332
2 |7]Xi5o-ao 1. 322 b
eXtad D. 322 e
Aor. M. Opt.
P. 3 XvcaldTo I. 329 a
Perf. Ind.
S. 2 XiXvat e. 331 b
P. 3 XeXi/arcu 1. 329 a
Perf. Opt.
P. 3 XeXvrro E. 317 C
Pluperfect.
P. 3 [i]XeXta.To I. 329 a
Aor. P. Ind.
P. 3 eXvdev p. 330 b
Aor. P. Sub.
S. 1 Xvdtu) I., -eiu) E.
323 a, c [323 c
2 Xvdelris or -7777s e.
3 Xu0et7jor-i777E.323c
P. 1 Xvetw/jLev 1.' 323 a
2 Xvdelere E. 323 C
3 Xvdtwo-i. 1. 323 a
Aor. P. Inf.
X607}v m., -rjtiev d. 333 b
Xvdi}iiev<u e. 333 b
2 Aor. M.
[<?]XiW, -o-o e. 313 b
c. Various Forms of Contract Verbs (321 s).
TJncontracted. Contracted. Variously Protracted.
bpdw, opta) I. bpQ bpbco, fievotvilxa, Pt. bpbwv A. 350
6p<£ei, opdrj opol bpdg., fievoivdg., Inf. avridav N. 215
bpdoi/ua bpfyii bpbyp.1, 7)j3(I)oiiJU, Mid. 2 cuYi6<yo u. 135
bpdovcra bpQaa bpbuiaa, vaierdoxxa, p,aip:d)u><ra 0. 542
bpdovres, -tomes I. bpwvres bpbwvres, bptuvres I., i}(3dbovTes k. 6
bpdecrdcu opacrdai bpdaadai. <j. 4, fivdacrdai a. 39
yeiKe'ca vcikG) vetKelu, Inf. rrXeieiv o. 34, Pt. veixelwv <r. 9
vet/c^r; j/et/c^ veiiceLri p. 189, veiKelyai A. 579, 0ei?7 Z. 507
Idpbovra idpovvra ISpdovra, vicvibovras, Fern. ISpibovaa
dpbovat dpovai. dpbuxri, Opt. oVcowej', Mid. drjibuvro
66 CONJUGATION. § 49.
49. xi. Classes and Notation of Stems.
I. PRIME STEMS (a; 340).
Roots, (a 1 ) giving rise, and (a 2 ) not
giving rise to Modified Stems.
Derived Stems, (a 3 ) giving rise, and
(a*) not giving rise to Mod. St.
II. MODIFIED STEMS. 1. EUPHONIC (341 s).
<*
By Precession : b 1 . Of a to c.
b 2 . Of € or o to t.
b 8 . Ofdtoc*,&c.
By Contraction.
By Syncope in the Theme.
" " in the 2 Aorist.
" " in Other Tenses.
By Metathesis in the Theme.
" " in the 2 Aorist.
c 7 . By Metathesis in Other Tenses.
c 8 . By Antithesis.
d 1 . To avoid Double Aspiration.
d 2 . From Use of both Sm.&R. Forms.
e 1 . By dropping a Consonant.
e 2 . By adding a Consonant.
f. 1 By dropping the Digamma.
f 2 . By changing the Digamma.
f 8 . By changing or dropping <r.
II. MODIFIED STEMS. 2. EMPHATIC (346 s).
A. By Lengthening a Short
Vowel.
;. To the cognate Long Vowel,
l. To a Diphthong.
B.
fcj.1
By Adding Syllables or
Letters.
BY ANNEXING OR INSERTING
CONSONANTS.
. The Conson. I ; uniting with,
A Palatal Mute
A Lingual Mute
A Labial Mute
A Lingual Mute
A Palatal Mute
A Double Palatal
A Labial Mute
X to form XX.
to form cror,
or TT.
to form |.
z. t:
Alone.
With a Vowel.
k. <tk : k 1 . Alone.
k 2 . With a Vowel.
k 3 . With preceding Conso-
nant dropped.
k 4 . With Transposition.
k 5 . With the k dropped.
k 6 . With preceding Vowel
lengthened.
k 7 . WithPrecess. of a Vowel.
n. v : n 1 . v annexed.
n 2 . With preceding V. lengthened.
n 8 . v inserted.
n 4 . av annexed.
n 6 . With V inserted.
n 6 . With uv lengthened.
n 7 . vv annexed.
n 8 . Becoming vw after a short V.
n 9 . A Lingual or Liquid dropped.
n 10 . ve annexed,
t. t : t 1 . Alone.
t 2 . With a Vowel,
q. : q 1 . Alone.
q 2 . With a Vowel.
q 3 . With preceding Vowel
lengthened,
o. Other Consonants : o 1 . Alone.
o 2 . With a Vowel.
II. BY ANNEXING VOWELS.
u. By annexing a.
u 2 . With change of an e to «.
v. By annexing €.
v 2 . With change of an 6 to o.
w. By annexing other Vowels.
III. BY PREFIXING SYLLABLES OR
LETTERS.
p. Various Preformatives.
r. Reduplication : r 1 . Proper.
r 2 . Attic.
r 8 . Improper.
IV. ADOPTED STEMS (x; 358).
§50.
ALPHABETIC LIST.
67
§ 50. xii. Catalogue of Verbs.
Notes, a. The following Catalogue contains the principal Irregular
Verbs, and some verbs which are not usually so termed ; while many
cognates are added (338 d). Whatever is enclosed in brackets will be
understood to be dialectic ; and to occur in the Epic (commonly in
Homer), unless specially ascribed to another dialect or another author.
The dialects are commonly denoted by initials, as in § 27 ; and the sign +
marks the rare occurrence of a word beyond the range noted (85 c, d).
Some of the less familiar forms are referred to passages where they occur.
b. The regular tense-systems in use, represented by their leading
forms, are arranged in the same order as in § 37 ; while the Future and
Perfect usually cited in parsing are printed in full-face type, and the sec-
ond tenses are introduced by name. The abbreviations chiefly used in
naming the tenses are "pr., ipf., f., ao. (la., 2a.), pf., pip., and 3f."
The voices and modes are denoted by italics : as, A., a., M., m., P., p.;
ind., sub., opt., irnv., inf., pt. The persons and numbers are marked
thus : Is., 1 p., Id., 2 s., &c. The abbreviation m. {M.), p. (P.), ao.,
or f., annexed to a form, shows that the corresponding middle, passive,
aorist, or future is also formed after the same analogy ; and the voices be-
longing to the aorist system are then indicated, if they are not the same
with those of the future system.
c. Stems are marked by hyphens affixed ; and the small letters placed
immediately after these, or after the themes, denote varieties of stems
according to the notation in § 49 and 340 - 358. A small c prefixed to a
word marks it as having been found only in composition : as, c rjv€Ka,
found in eir-yveKa. The abbreviations 1., r., po., cp., ct., and v. I., stand
for late, rare, poetic, compounded, contracted, and various reading. Less
important forms or marks are sometimes omitted. See § 51.
ao. ^. c ed£asLys.l00.5, f. c ed£ei Mat.
12.20. [Ao. opt. (naTFafcis, KctFFa£cus,
136, 142) Kav&tcus Hes. Op. 664.]
d-yca ago, lead, bring; dfjo>, m.
(sometimes as pass.), 9j^a r., 2 a. ij-ya-
yov m. 28 4 g ; •fjxa, later dy/joxa 31 2 d,
7jy,uai,ijx^v v ^ Cog. if/ to/mat, [dylviw. ]
[d8e- be sated; see do.]
d8« sing; do-opai, -aw r., rjaa-
770YACU, rjo-07]v : ct. fr. po. & 1. deC8w,
aelaa} m., rjeicra.
deipco & aeprdfa raise ; see atpoj.
de'£« increase ; see atf£w.
[drjfu & dco (d-, de- v) breathe, blow,
P. d-q/xai (314 b ; and t\ in some other
forms for the regular c) ; ao. &e<ra, ct.
d<m, breatlied in sleep, slept. Cog. dtu,
d'tadia. ]
alSeopai \,^o.at5o[xai, respect; alSe-
a-ofxeu ao. ; fjSecrpai, ydeo-drjv f. [Pr.
imv. alddo 323 e.]
alve co praise, usu. cp. w. twl, &c. ;
alvecrco c m [-rjaca], ao. • c *iv**n.- c-
fitti 310 d, rjrfdr]v c f.
cuV/£cj, -ofiat.]
£aoi- hurt, mislead ; m. 3 s. darcu
T. 91 ; ao. ddcra, ct. daa, m. ; ddadriv.
Aug. 'a- 279 f.]
[dPpOTctf;0|A€V, see dp-apTdvo).]
aYaWw (1, dya\-) adorn, M. glory;
d-yaXai, ijyrjXa ■ rjydXdrjv 1.
d7ap.au admire; [d-ydo-op-ai, 5.181,]
ao. ; usu., as mid., rjydadrjv, f. 1. Cog.
dydfa po., [dydofjiai, dyaio/xai,] ad-
mire, envy, <kc.
ayyiXKa (1, d77e\-), announce; see
40.
dYeipw (h, dyep-) collect; [a7€pov-
p,ai Or. Sib.,] ijye'.pa [m., 2 a. dyepo-
firjv, pt. sync. dypS/xevos] ; uYT|Y€pKa
1., -fiat 1. [pip. 3 p. dyrjytpaTo A. 211,
■ny^pdrjv, A. 57. Cog. dytpofiai, rrye-
pedo/ncu, v. I. Tjyepeofiai.]
&yvvp.i (n 7 , Fa7-, dy- f ) break, usu.
cp. w. /card • c d£«, tafa 279 b [%a, *.
392]; 2vf. c '4*ya[?rrYai.] am broken,
c&ry^cu 1., 2 a. idyrjv [Ep. d, or d ?].
It has some forms as if from e<ry- :
^v«Ka, ^ rjv 7]-
[Cog. atpnfn,
68
atvvpat
TABLES.
aflTTPV-
50.
[cd'vupai take, see af/w.]
aip€<i> take, M. choose ; alp{\<r<a to.,
ao. a. 1., to. r. ; fjpT)Ka, -pat [dpalprjKa,
-/tea, I.], 3 f . rfp-qaopat v., r)piQr\v f.
310 d. : (FaX- x, dX- f, eX- b, dXo- w,
a\i<TK- k 7 ) 2 a. elXcv to. 279 c, e, late
f. & ao. iXQ to., elXam.: as pass.,
dXio-Kopcu be taken, captured; dXw-
crop.ai, 2a. edXw k rjXwv (dXu>, -oirju,
-Qvat, -ovs) ; IdXcoica & -rjXama.
atpa> (h, dep-, sync, dp-) raise, M.
win; 'dpwTO., r)pa to. (dpw, 'dpatpt,
dpov, &c), 2 a. r)p6pifjv ('apupat, &c.)
po. ; ^pxa, -pat, -Bnvi. Po. & I. dUtpco
w. [atppw M. 171 a] ; 'dpw (ct. fr.
depG>) to. , f/etpa m. ; r)eppat [pip. dwpro
312 d], rjepd-qv. Cog. -dpvvpat, [atvv-
pat n 9 , rjepedopat, deprdfa.]
aUrBdvopai (n 4 , a'tad-), atodopatr.,
perceive; al<r0i]o-op.ai311a, 2a. r)odb-
pr\v ■ fj<r0T|p.<u, ri(xdr)6rjv k -dvdyv f. 1.
[dt<r0w & dtw breathe; see dr/pt.]
d£<r<rw i 1 , dVo-« c 1 , rush,po. +,M.;
dtgw, $■<«>, ao. a. [to. r. ; ytxdrjv.]
'dle> audio, hear, po. or 1. ; ipf/dow
279 f, rjtovl., [i-ir-froa I.]
[dx- or d\- acuo, sharpen, pf. jj£.
anaxp-fr os sharpened, 148 b, £. 12.]
[dKax^w (z, dx-, d/cax- r 2 ) afflict,
M. sorrow ; a.Ka.\i\cria 311 c, ao. r.,
usu. 2 a. t)ko.x ov m - 284 f.; d/cdx^ai
pret. (3 p. aKrixtdarai, pip. d/cax^aro
or -elaro M. 179, § 329 a, pt. aKax-q-
pevos ft. 550, or aKvx^P^os, E. 364).
Cog. dxopat, dxwpat, be grieved; Pt.
dx^wv, dxe»W, sorrowing.]
dxovu (h, &ko-) hear ; aKouVopcu,
-<rwl., fJKOvaa • [duovKa d.,] 2 pf. dicrj-
Koa, 2 pip. TjKTjKoeiv 281 d, ■fjnovapat 1.,
-adrjvL Cog. dupodopat, [aKovdfa.]
[dXaXxa) ware? ojf ; see dX^£a>.]
dAdopaiw;a?te?er,po. + [dX6a?322c];
[ c dXr)<ropai or -r\adpf]v, Hes. Sc. 409 ;
dXdX-qp.aH- pret. 284a,] rjXr)d-r}v. Po.
cog. dXrjreijio, aXa'tva, [rjXatvu), rjXd-
GKU, rfX0.OKCL^U}.]
dXSaivw (n 6 , dX8-) alo, nourish,
po. ; 1. f}X5r)va or -r/o-a, [2 a. rjXdavov.
Cog. dXS^ovcw alesco, grow.}
dXaduo (h, dXi<p-) anoint, M. ; dXei-
t|/» to., ao. ; c dX^Xwj>a or -ei<£a, dX?7-
Xtppat or -eip.pt.ai Th. 4. 68, r)Xel<p0r/i>L,
2 a. iiXl<pr)i> r.
dXa-w r. (k 6 , dXe/c-, dX*-c 8 ),&dX^w ?,
ward offyM. defend one's self, requite;
[dX€|^<ro), c dX<?£wr.,] to., ao., [2a.
dXaXnov 284 e,] 2 a. inf. dXnade'tv po.
r. 353a. [Cog. 1. dXdX/cw, -K-qcw.]
dXeuci) (f 2 , dXcF-, dXe- f 1 ) avert,
po. [J/. aXeOopai & aXtopai shun] ;
dXcvcro), ao. a., fffc r. [^Xet)a y u,7?j' &
-edp7]p 306 a]. Pr. itov. dXeu, by
apocope for dXeve, iEsch. Pr. 568 v. I.
Po. cog. dXvcrKO) (k 8 , dXu/c-), f. dXi/^w
TO.,ao. ; dXvcrKdfa,[dXvoKdi>w,dXe€iv(x).]
dXe'co grind; dX(&rw)ai r. 305b,
^Xeaa • dX^XcKapo. r., -eapai or-epai,
i)Xio-dT)v 1. Cog. dXr)6u: r. , [dX77rpe^w. ]
[dXOopai become healed, E. & I.;
c aX0r|(ropai, ao. 1. ; c ijXd^o-d-qv. Cog.
dXdaivo) & -icr/cw or -r)<ricb), cure; f.
dXdrjo-w 1.]
dXivSw roZZ ; see KvXlvdu.
dXio-Kopat be captured ; see aipiw.
[dXiTcUvw & -Tpaivw (n 6 , o, dXir-)
sin, F,. + , M«; dXirriaa r., 2 a. f/Xirov
m.; Y>f-pt- dXiTrjpevos guilty.]
dXXdo-<rw or -ttw (i 1 , dXXa7-)
change, M. barter ; dXXd|a> to., ao. ;
c ^XXaxa, -ay pat, -dx&yv c f., usu. in
Att. prose 2 a. r}XXdyrii> f.
dXXopai (1, dX-) salio 141, leap ;
dXovpcu, r]Xdp-T]v, comm. (exc. in Ind.)
2 a. rjX6pr)i> [2 s. d\<ro, 3 s. &Xto, pt.
aXpevos, 326 e, 167 c].
dXv(TK(«), -ko^oi), & -Kavo), see dXej;w.
dXv6> (0) be excited, po. + . [Cog.
dXdocra}, f. -^co, dXvoBa'tvu, aXvicrtto
(dXaXiJKTrjpai pret., 284a), dXv/crd^w,
Hdt. 9. 70.]
dXcpdvw (n 4 , dX<p-) find, po, ; [2 a.
r)X<pov, opt. 3 p. dXtpotp for -otev, 135,
u. 383 v. I.]
dpapTavci) (n 4 , apapr-) err, miss;
dpapTTjo-opai, -crw 1. + , ao. a. 1. + ,
2 a. r/paprov TjpdpTTjKa, -/«u, -^i' :
[2 a. (dppor- c 6 , b 8 , 167 c, dpfipor- or
dfipor- 146 b) f/pppoTov. Cog. 1 a.
sw&. 1 p. appordfrpev 326 d, K. 65.]
dppXiorKw k "' k c dppxdta cause mis-
carriage ; dp.pXw<ra) 1., ao., 2 a. c ^/t-
/3Xw»'l. ; ^ppXcoica, c -pat, -Bt\v.
[dpe'pSw & dp^ipci) (o, h, dpep-), de-
prive ; dpe'po-w, ao. a. + , to. 1. ;
Tjpipdrjv +.]
dp/n-XaKLCTKO) (k 2 , dp7rXaK-), miss,
err, po. ; 2 a. r/pirXanop, pt. dirXanibv
171, Eur. Ale. 241 ; r/pirXdKrjpat 311,
iEsch. Sup. 916.
[dp/irw- take breath; see irviu.]
§50.
ayLwa
VERBS.
fiaivco
G9
dptfvw avert, defend (cf. munio),
M. repel, requite; apiivum., ^p.vva
m., 2 a. Tj/iovadov 353 a.
dpfyiyvoto) doubt ; see yiyvuxTKu.
a|i<j>i<rPt]T€a> dispute ; see (Salvia.
dvcu'vopai (h, drac-) refuse; ao.
jprrprdfirpf.
av-SXCo-Kto & dv-dXoto (dXo-, k 7 )
expend; dvdXwcra), to. 1., dvrfkwaa ;
dvTJXcoKa, -yuat, -drjv L In the aug.,
a is often retained, esp. in the older
Att. : dvdXcacra, dvdX'aica, Th. 7. 83,
2. 64 ; & in comp. w. /card, the aug.
is rarely on the prep, dvd : Karvvd-
\<a<xa, Isoc. 201 b. See 279 f, 282 b.
For the simple verb, see aiptia.
dv8dv(i> (n 4 , Fa5-, ad- f) please, po.
& I. ; ipf. ijvdavov, edvdavov, & irjvda-
vov, 279 b, e ; dS^crw, 2 a. ^aSoi/ Hdt.
1. 151, etiabov 142, tt. 28 ; ctSnKa r.,
2 p. ed5a E. Cog. tj8o) q. v.
[dv£0- grow, akin to di^w • 2 pf.
c ijvoBa 31 2 b : dv-T)voBev rises, p. 270 ;
eir-ev-rjvode grows upon, /3. 219.]
dvotya> & -otyvupa o/?e/i ; see ofyw.
dvv(«) & also Att. dvvTO) t (ace. to
some, Att. d-), accomplish, M. ; dvvcroi
m. , ao. ; •Fjvvko, -a/mai, -adnv f. [Nude
pr. &WTO.1 1. ; ipf. ijvvro e. 243,"dfu / u.es
&"di>vTO Theoc.] Cog. dvia to., po.
dvu-yo) command, po. & I. ; dva>£w,
ao. ; 2 pf. dvto-ya pret. & unaugm.
[nude 1 p. &v(ayp.ev 320, Horn. Ap.
528], imv. &v<aye & dvuxdi 320 f.
[Cog. dvcayica H. 394 v. I.] ( See 326 c.
diravpdca, d7rou/)as, see eiravptia.
[dTrcuj>£o-K<» (k 2 , dTra<f>-) deceive;
dira<j>T|<r&) 311, ao. r., 2 a. rjira<pov + ,
m. See ct7rrw.]
direx9dvopai & dirlxSopcu, beJiat-
ed; see ^x^-
uirrft) (t, d<f>-, 147) fasten, kindle,
M. touch; &|/«TO.,ao. ; ^p.p.ai,^\<pQy]v,
c f. 1. [d/^cu & #0<V, Hdt. 1. 86, 19,
te<p0 w 279 b, N. 543. Cog. d<pdw or
d<£dw & d(f>d<rcru), handle, I. + , to. ;
f. c dep-qau, ao. rjiprjera k rjcpaaa : dira-
4>lgku q. v.]
dpdopcu pray, cwrse ; dpucropai
ao.; c ^pd}i.ai, c -dr)v 1. [Pr. m/. a.
dpvfievai 333 e, x- 322. Cog. ? pf. ^.
dpri/xivos oppressed, 2. 435.]
[dpapCo-Kw (k 2 r 2 , dp-) fit; %p<ra
m., 2 a. ijpapov + m. 284 e (nude
pt. as adj. dpfiepos) ;] 2 pf. dpdpa
[dp77pa] pret. intrans. po. +, [dprjpe-
ixou, tfpdrjv. ] Cog. dpfi6fa q. v. , dpr 6w
& dprUvca [dpreopai I.] prepare, and
dpeo-Kw(k, dp^-) please, M. ; dpe'erco
to., ao. ; dpTJpcica 1., -qpiaOvv.
dpio-Tdft) tlttte, with regular forms,
has in comedy 2 pf. nude 1 p. rjplcrTa-
p.evAr. Fr. 528, inf. rfpivrdvai, § 320 :
and in imitation, Stnrvew sup, has
8edel7rvap:ev, 8e8eiirvdvai lb. 243.
dpp.d£a> & Att. appoTTco (j 1 , i 2 ,
dppLod-) adjust, M. ; dpp.d<ra>, m.l., ao. ;
rjppoKa, -apai, -adrjv f. See dpaplcrKO).
dpvupai win ; see atpta.
dpdeo aro, plough ; a.p6<r<o, ao. ;
[dpr)pop.cu E. I., | i)pudr]v: [dpbuxnv
324 c, dpop,p.evau 333 e r .]
dpird£ci> j ia seize ; dpir dtrco and, oft-
ener dpirdcropau [dpird^w], ao. ; ijp-
iraKa, -c^at (-yp.ail.), -adrpii. [-x0W>
Hdt. 2. 90 + ], 2a. i]pwdyr,vL 1. [Nude
2 a. jttf. m. (d/37ra-) dpirdpievos 1.]
dprva), -vvo), -c'ofxai, see dpapiaKO).
apvoi & dpvTo) t, araw water, M. ;
dpvcrop.ai 1., ^pucra m. ; -qpidnv or
-vadnv 307 e. — &pX w ^^ see 4l.
ao-<ra) rush ; see dftrcra;.
atf£w [a^w e. I. +] & av|dvw (n 4 ,
dFe^-, ai)£-, def-, f 12 ) augeo, increase;
see 41. F.a^aj/iDinLxx. Cog. av%iw\.
aiJo) shout, po. ; di5<rto (i"), -ijiicra.
d<f>da> & d(pdo-cra) handle; see&irTo>.
dxcwv, dxevtov, dix vv H tat ' ftX ^ - 1
Je grieved ; see aKaxifa.
HxBopaibe vexed; dx9&ro|iai 311 d ;
^X^H-a-t 1., ijxOtvQwf-
[&(» satiate; "axr<a m., daa m. ; pr.
inf. "dpLevai 333 e r . Cog. sub. 1 p.
ewp-ev T. 402, ao. opt. 3 s. 'dS-qaeiev
a. 134, pf. pt. 'dSrjKOTes K. 399, as fr.
id- & d5^- become sated; dadopxn be
nauseated, I. D. +.] — See &rjpu.
B.
Paivto (n 6 , /3a-) vado, ao ; PrjcropaL
po. exc. in comp., \k$y](jdpvt)v, usu.
-o-o/iT?!/ 327 a,] 2 a. e^rju 45 h, e, 322 c
(imv. prjdi, c /3d, 297 c, d) ; pepntca
(2 pf. mcZ. 3 p. /3e/3ddcrt B. 134, ct.
/3e/3acri Eur. Tro. 835, § 156, sub. ep.-
/3ej3<Scrt PL Phsedr. 252 e, inf. pefidvai
Eur. Heracl. 610, pt. jSe^dwv, Hes. Sc.
307, ct. /3e/3c6s, PI. Tim. 63 c, 2 pip.
3 p. ptfaaav P. 286, § 320 e), c ^a-
70
ff
TABLES.
yrjpc
§50.
fxai or -cur/xai r., c ipd0Tjvr., c -dcr6r]v
or -dvOrjvl. As trans., cawse to gro, f.
c /3r?<ra>, ao. e/3??<ra. Cog. c /3da; r.,
pdaKto po., [jSijSdcu, piprjpu, pifiaadw,]
/3i/3d^w rasfe #0 305 b. Cp. d/*0t-
a-^rp-eu) dispute; f. -??cra> w., ao. r/p.-
<pi<Tprp-r](ra & 7)[A<pe<r(3r)TT)(ra ; -rp-r/OTji'
(so ipf. -rjTovv, 282 b).
pdXXo (1, /SaX-, /3\a- c 6 7 ) throw, M. ;
paXco m. (j3a\\ir)cru} 311 a, Ar. Vesp.
222), [ c /8XiJ<ro/*ai, T. 335,] 2 a. e^a-
Xov m. [^/3Xt7»/, wi. e[3\7)/Ar,v, opt. 2 s.
/SX^o or /3Xe?o b 1 , N. 288]; pcpXT]Ka,
-jwu [pep6\riiuu 114 a, 311,' I. 9], 3 f .
(3e[3\7)0-o/j.ai, epXrjdTjv f.
pdiTTO) (t, ficup-) dip, M. ; pdij/com.,
ao. ; pipap-fiai, efia<pdr)v, usu. 2 a. e/3d-
$77?, f. 1.
pao-rd^o) carry, po. orl. ; Pa<rTd<r<i>,
&c, later, /3a<rrd£w, &c, 349 d.
[p€ppw8ois (ea£), see /3ij8pu>cr/cco.j
[Pcofiai, fido/Mi, live; see /3i6w.]
ptpd^w, [PiPcUtf, -t]|Ai, -do-6a),] see
P<xlvoj.
PiPpcGo-KCi) (r 1 k 6 , ppo-, cf. voro)
cat, mostly dial, or 1. ; Ppa><rop.cu 1.,
c ep P u}<ra L, [2 a. *j8pcw 313 b]; pe-
Pp<oKa (jpd. /Sqfyxis 320 d, Soph. xVnt.
1022), pippwp.a.1, [3 f. -<ropcu,] e/3pc6-
fli^, f. 1. Cog. (3pud(o 1., [2 pf. op£.
Peppwdois A. 35, or pr. fr. /3e/3pa>0-.]
Pidco fo've, Jf. ; & Pi<6<rKop.ai k 6
revive, usu. cp. w. dvd- piwo-op.cu,
-aw 1., ao., oftener 2 ao. ipiuv 313 b
(ojt^. /3t«J>J7»'316b) ; Pepfaica, -p.cu, -fl^
f. 1. [Cog. pto/xai (peio/iai. 134 a) or
pioiuu, also as fut. 305 f, O. 194, X.
431, Horn. Ap. 528.] See #tu.
pXd-irTO) (t, BKap-) hurt; pXd\|/«
m., ao. a., m. 1.; pipXa<f>a, -a.p-p.ai,
3 f. -dxpofxai, kp\dcpd7)v, & 2 a. e/3Xd-
/V f. [Cog. pXdpw r., T. 82.]
pXaordvio & r. pXa<rr£a> (n 4 , v,
pXacr-) sprout, bud; fi\a<rri\<r<a, ao.,
comm. 2 a. epXaarov ; PepXdcmjKa
& IpXdo-THKa 280 c.
pX<TTo (i 2 , jSXtr- for yueXtr- 146 b)
take lioney from tlie hive ; £/3X«ra.
pXwo-Ka)'(k 6 , 146b, fxo\-) go, po.;
|aoXov}j.cu, 2 a. ep.oXov + ; p.ep.pXcoKa.
podo> boo, shout, M.; pot|<rop,ai,
-<rwl.,ao. a., w. 1. ; PePanKal., -/tail.,
i(3or}dr)i>l.: [e. & I. c pLbaop.ai, e/3a;cra
m., ptpu/Mi, ipib<Tdr)p, 131 f.]
Poa-Kco/eed, if. (cf. pasco, vescor);
PocTK-fto-ft) 311 a, m. 1., ao. 1. ; tpocicfi-
' „, f. 1.
povXop.ai [(36\o/xai\ volo, WILL,
wish (2 s. povXei 297 f) ; PovXVjcrop.ai ;
pePovXripai, e(3ov\ri07]i/ k 7](5ov\r t dr)v
279 a, f. 1. : [2 pf. irpo-pepovXa prefer,
A. 113.] Cog. fiovXetiu) plan, 44.
[Ppa\- resound ; 2 a. £j3pa%e 337 a,
E. 863.]
pp€X<o (b, fipa-x-) we -t >' Pp€^o> 1.,
ao.; PePpeyp.cn, e(3pe'xdv v > l ess Att.
ippdx-rjv, f. 1.
[Ppoy- swallow ; e"ppo^a ; c p«'Ppoxa,
c epp6x0r]v 1., G ePpbxW-~\
PpvydojAcu (u, Ppvx-) roar, 355 u ;
PP' u X 1 1 " P' at very 1., ao. ; 2 pf. Pe-
ppv\a pret., eppvxrfirp.
Pvvc'o) n 10 , r. ptu), stop up, M. ; c p*i-
o-<d, ao. a., w. 1. ; ptpva/xai^epvodyv.
Cog. /3tVw & j8(5^"w r.
-yap-e'co ( v, ya/ui- ) marry (of the man),
M. marry (of the woman); "yajJLoim.
152, 1. yapufjcru) m., eyrjfxam., later
eydfiTjaa • yiyd\i.r\Ka, -p,ai, eyajx-qdriv
f. 1. : [f. m. yap.e'aceTaL Will provide
a wife, I. 394 v. I.]
"ydvv|xai. 1. ydwvfiat, rejoice ; [ya-
vv<r<ro\iai 171, S. 504; ■yeydvv|xai
Anact. 35.] Cog. yapoio brighten,
\yavdu) shine.']
■y€*yova, yeyddre, yeydtceiv, "yetvo-
(Jiai, yevvdta, see yiyvo/xaL.
yiy(av4<a [-w^w] & yeyotvicKbi (v,
k 2 , yeyuv- r) shotit ; y(.y<i>vr\(r<i> ao. ;
"y€7»va pret. (s2*&. yey&via, imv. yi-
ywve 318).
■yeXdto laugh; 7eXd<rop,at, -(ra> 1.,
ao. a. ; c Y^Xao-ftai 1., iyeXda-dTju, f.l.
[Cog. 7eXotdw.]
[^€v- = (&, according to some, iEol.
for) IX- (see aipioj), in 2 a. m. 3 s.
-yc'vTO took, S. 476. See also 7^0-
p.ai.]
•yeuco cause to taste, M. gusto, taste;
y&itroi m., ao. ; yty evfiai, eyei<jBr\v
307 e. [Nude pr. 1 p. yei^xeda Theoc.
14. 51.]
[yi]0&tf (v, yrjdio m. 1.) gaudeo, re-
joice + ; yr\Q-f\<r<a, ao. ;] ■yc'yrjGa pret.
yt]pd<D & oftener "yripdcrKa) k \ grow
old, M. ; 7T}pd<rw & -do-ofiai, ao. n-.,
2 a. iyfipdv po. or 1., 313 b (w/. 7:7-
§50.
yrjpaco
VERBS.
SYo
71
pavat. or -dvai Msch. Ch. 908); yiyf\-
paxa, c eyypddyv 1.
•ytyvouai (r 1 c' 2 , 7a-, 7ej>- n 1 b 1 ),
or I. & later yho/xai, become; "ytvrj-
<rouai, 2 a. eycvopirjv [nude 3 s. fyevro
326 e, yirro Hes. Th. 199] ; 2 pf. -ye-
■yova [yeyddre, i'oryeyare, 320, 134 s,
Horn. 13atr. 143, yeydd<ri A. 41, pip.
3 d. ^K-yeydrrjp k. 138, inf. yey dp.ev
333 e, E. 248, pt. 7e7aws, I. 456],
pt. po. 7e7u>s 320 d, Soph. Aj. 472,
^■yevrjuai, lyerifiip i. d. orl., f. r.
[Pf. inf. yeydicetp d. 326 b.] Cog.
[ c 7e7<xo / ucu326e, yebo/jLaiX. i77v.l.,]
ao. eyet.vdp.nv begat, po. + ; yevvdw
beget. Cf. gigno, gnascor.
yiyv<acrK(a (k 6 r, 7^0-), or I. & later
yivuxTKio, guosco, know, °M. 1. ; -yvw-
<roaai, ao. ttt. 1. [dv-eyvucra persuad-
ed, Hdt. ], 2 a. !7J/aw, 45 h, e (m. op*.
3 s. (Tvy-yvdiro iEsch. Sup. 216) ;
^yvcoxa, -<rp.ai, -adrjv f. Cog. yvcopi-
fa>, -icrw, -to), iyvwpuca, make known;
dp.<piyvoeio, -rjcro}, doubt, aug. r\p.<pi.y-
k vfKpey- 282 b.
■y\v<J>co sculpo, carve; "y\v\|/ei> 1.,
ao. a., m. 1. ; y£y\vp.p.au & £y\vp.p.ai
280c, ey\v<pdT}v\.kv., 2 a. ^yXityi^l.
Cf. glubo. Cog. y\d(f>a).
■yoctw (u, 70-) bewail, M., po. +
(in Att. only pr. & ipf. m., & pr. p.);
■yoTJo-ouai, -au) 1., ao. 1., 2 a. Zyoov Z.
500 ; eyo^Byv 1.
-ypdcjxo scribo, grave, write, M. ;
■ypdtj/ft) »t., ao. ; "ye-ypcKpa (yeypd(f>7)Ka
1. + ?), y^ypap.p.at {Zypap-p-at. 1., 280 c),
3 f . yeypd\J/ofiai, c iypd(pdyv 1., 2 a.
eypdcpwv f.
8a-, teac/i, Zearyi ; see SiSda-KO).
Saivvai (n 9 , 8cut-) feast, entertain,
po. +, J/, fopfc Satj^ro, -tfaro, 316 c];
oaio-w, m. 1., ao. ; eSaladyv.
Scuoaai (h, 8a-) divido, divide,
ch. po. (pr. & f. ), P.; Sda-ouai ao. ;
8e'8ao-uai, A. 125 [SiSatpac, a. 23],
eddadyv 1. Cog. SoLTeofwi po. I. [ao.
inf. Sartaadat 306, Hes. Op. 765],
Saivvp.i q. v., 8aifa, -ti-w, rend, po.
8aiw (h, 5aF-, 8a-) kindle, po. +,
M. ; [2 a. edaop-yv, T. 316 ; 2 pf. ScSrja
Wasc, pret., T. 18,] StSavpai, Sim.
Am. 30.
SaKVto (n 1 , 5a*c-, Stjk- g) fo'fe, 47 ;
8^£ouai, -^u ]., ao. r., 2 a. c8aKov ;
SeS-qxa 1., SeSvyp-ai, idr/xOyvf., 2 a.
eddicyv 1. Cog. baicvdfa po.
8aad£co (z, 5a^,-) domo, *«»?£, «w&-
dwe, po. + , if. ; 8audo-« [9?/,. , Sa^tw
305 b, A. 61], ao. ; SeSdaaKa 1., -apuai
1. [8e8p,np<aL c 7 , B. 878, 3 f. 8e8p.rjao-
pui, Horn. Ap. 543, | iSaudaOyv 6. 231,
Mem. 4.1. 3,65^077^0., A. 99, oftener
2 a. eSdp.yv po., T. 94. Po. cog. Sa-
wdw 1., 8ap.a\lfa, 8ap.vdu>, Sdp-vypu
(M. 8dp.vap.at.).
c 8ap9dv« (n 4 , Sapd-) sleep, usu. cp.
w. /card • 2 a. c eSapdov, po. e8padov c 6 ,
T. 143 ; c 868dp9 n Ka 311, 2 a. c <f5d/>
#171/, c e8pddyv r. or 1.
SaTc'oaai divide, po. ; see Saiopxii.
[diaro appeared ; see 5oa-.]
[8et8a)+ & 8tw (5i-, 5et5- o h)/car,
8'iop.ai + frighten ; Seicroaai, + !, -ao
].,] e8ei<ra pret. 8c8ouca& 2 pf. 8c'8ia
46 b [SeiSoLKa, SelSia, 134 a, 5e5okw
D., 326 b]. Cog. 8eip.ai.vu) fear, 8e-
Siaaopai [5et5i<rcrowat], r. 8e8iaKop:ai,
frighten, 5i't?ui clutsc (M. 8kpuai) po.,
& Siwku) q. v.
SeiKvvui & Scikvvci) (n 7 , 5et/c-) in-
dico, extend the Jiand to point out,
show [M. greet with extended hand];
&££<», &c, 45 [in Hdt., fr. deK-, c 8££w,
£8ezja 7)t., c 848eyp.ai, c ^8exdnv- Ep.
SeiStypiai 134a, pret., 77. 72]. Cog.
8exop.aL q. v., Se^oop-ai greet, [8e8i-
(TKopai & 8et.8L<fKop.ai greet, SetKavdcj
shoiv.~\
8€iirve&> s?^' •' see dpiardu}.
[h£\i.<a build, Horn. Merc. 87 ;] eSeiput
m.; [Se8p.np.aic 7 .] Cog. Sopju) 1.
Se'pKoaai b 1 ^^, po. o?- 1. ; 8ep|caaL
1., ao. 1., 2 a. eSpaKov c 6 , w. r. ; 8^-
SopKa pret., eSepxOqv [2 a. eSpdKrjv
Pind. N. 7. 4].
8^p<D (b 1 , dap-), less Att. 5e//ow or
daipu) h, ./fai/, c i/'. r. ; 8£pw, tdeipa'
8e"5ap/xai, eddpdyv r., 2 a. eddprjv, f, 1.
Sevouai w«7i< ; see 5e"a>.
8e\ouai receive ; Se'^oaai ao. ; 8^-
Se^uai, 3 f. 5e8e%op.ai, ed^V^ t !•
[Pr. 3 p. 8ix aTaL f° r 5^x[ J" rat 158,
M. 147, 2 a. eSeyfxyv, 326 e. Cog.
84xwfuu, StKopai 167, Hdt. 9. 91 ;]
see Se'iKvvpj..
8€<o, 6-tnrf, J/., 309 b; 8t|o-w ?7i.,
ao.; Se'StKa (r. -nxa 310 d), 8i8ep.ai,
72
TABLES.
em<
§50.
3 f. SedTf/ffofiai 319 c, Cyr. 4. 3. 18,
idedyvf. Cog. r. 5L8r)fii r 1 , v. 8. 24.
8€« (f *, 5er-) ?iccrf, want, M. need,
beg ; StTJcrw m. 311c, ao. a. [3 s.
e8r]<rev 2. 100] ; SeSe'uKa, -/«u, e'5e^-
^?7f, f. 1. [Ep. de^ofxai f 2 , -■qaojj.ai,
idev-rjaa, t. 540.] Impers. 5et d&ere is
need, Se??, ct. 5rj 309 b, 5eo£, Sety,
8£oi> • d€r)aei, i8tr}<re.
StjXoo), -«<rci>,&c., manifest; see 42.
8tj« shall find ; see 5i5dcrK«.
SiaiTaco regulate, M. ; 8iaiTTJ<rft>,
diriTrjaa & idiyTTjcra, SeSiTJTrjKa, &c,
282 c_.
8idi<ov€(o minister ; -i\<r<a, ididKS-
V7}<xa, SeSidKdvqKa (less Att. 5ti7/c6-
vrjaa, 8e8t7)Kovr)Ka), &C., 282 c.
8i8d<rK»(k 3 , 5a-, StSax-r 1 ©) doceo,
teach, M. ; 8k8d|a>r/z., no. [eStSaV/ojo-a
311, Horn. Cer. 144]; 8e8£8axa, -yp-cu,
eSiS&xOyv, f. 1. [Fr. 5a- disco, Zear;?,,
teach, ba-qaop-at. 311, 2 a. e'5ao»' & 5e"-
8aov 284 e ; 8eSd V Ka, 9. 134, 2 pf. 5e ; -
5aa, p. 519, deddrjpai Horn. Merc. 483,
2 a. i8dr]v + . Cog. 8e5doficu 326 c,
7T.316 ; 577W as fut., shall find, N.260.J
SiStjui bind; see 5e'o> &r/ia\
C 8i8pdo-K(o (r 1 k, 5pa-) run; c 8pd-
o-opiai, ao. a. 1., 2 a. c e8pdv 45 h ;
c 8€'8pdKa. Cog. Spdwerevio, bpaCKa-
fa ' edpanov, see rpixu. See 5/>dw.
8k8cop.i (r 1 , 5o-j do, #ire, 8w<ra>,
8l8coKa, &c. ; see 45.
[Si^p-ai seek, e. & I., 314 b ; Sijtf-
o-ouai ao. Cog. 5/fw M., po.]
8£np.i chase, M. flee, po. ; see 5ft 5w.
8ioiK€co manage, -i\<ru>, SiwicnKa,
-(Uat & r. 8e8iu)KT)p.ai, 282 b.
8iv|/da> ZAirsZ, -tjo-w, &c. (8i\f/(det)fn
120 g).
8£a> /car, flee ; see 5ei5a>.
SuGkci) pursue, M. ; 8i«£a> and oft-
ener SuG^opai, ao. a., 2 a. iSiii)Kadov
353 a; StBiwxa, -ypui 1., tSidbxQyv,
f. 1. See 5ei'5u>.
1 8oa-, 8«a- 114 b, appear ; ipf. nude
Searo f. 242 ; ao. m. dodaaaro JEJ. 23,
«<6. 5odcr(reTai 326 d, *. 339. Cog.
Sotd^a? or 5odfw, aVwfa, imagine, Ap.
Rh.]
8oK€a> (v, 5o/c-) seem, think; 8<S£«
ao. ; 5e5oxal., -yp-ai-, ^8l)x9r}v\.'. ch.po.
SoktjVw ao., 8t8oKT]Ka, -fiai, i8oKr)0r)v
[pf. m. ^. SedoKrjpiivos pret., ./focd M»
thought, intent, watching, O. 730.]
Cog. [poKeioi watch,'] doKip.dfa ex-
amine.
8ovirca> (e 1 , ySovire-y) sound heavi-
ly, ch. po. ; SovTci\<r(a, ao. [iydovTrrja-a,
A. 45], 2 a, c ttovjrov 1.; 2 pf. 8e'8ov-
■nu, i8ovT7)67]v 1.
Spdo-o-opcu i 1 , grasp, seize, A. 1. ;
8pdgop.cu 1., ao. j St'Spa-ypai (5e"5a/)£a4
c 7 , Eur. Tro. 745 v. 7.).
Spaa) ao ; Spdcrco ao. ; SeSpdKa,
-dp.at, r. -a.ap.at 307 e, idpdaOrjv. Cog.
[5/)aiJ/w,] dwo-didpd<rKW make off, mm
away.
Sp^iro) (b 1 , Spar-), po. 1. 5/3e7rrwt,
pluck, M.; 8pc'\|/op.at, po., ao. «. ??i.,
[2 a. e'SpaTrov Pind. P. 4. 231.]
Svvapai be able (2 s. dOvg. 297 li) ;
Swrja-opai [ao. +]; 8e8uvTjp,ai, e8v-
vr)Brjv, iii. 1. 35, f. 1., r)8vvrjdr)t> 279 a,
Cyr. 3. 1. 30, less Att. I8vvda07jv,
vii. 6. 20.
8vw [i> Hon!.] cause to enter, enter
(cf. in-duo), 8vv» n 1 , & less Att. 8u-
ojiai, enter (the causative sense be-
longs to the fut. & 1 ao. act, but not
to the 2 ao., & very rarely to the pf.
act., v. 8. 23); §v<r<a, 8u<ropai, ao.,
[m<rbp.-nv 327 a,] 2 a. e8vv 45 h ; 8^-
8vKa, c St8vpiai 310 d, c i8vd V v f., [2 a.
r. iSvvf Hipp. Cog. binrru, dive.]
E.
la- become sated, e&fiep ; see dw.
Ida) permit ; i&o-oi m., efdera 279c ;
eiaKa, -fxat, -drjv.
€7"yvd» pledge, M. ; lyyvrja-a), 977-
ytjT}<Ta or iveyijijcra • ■f|yyuTjKa or e-y -
■yeyuTjita, &c. ; 282 c.
eveCpa) (h, ^7ep-) roiwe, raise, J/.
rise/ ^epei), 9?i. 1., -fjyeipa, m. 1., 2 a.
ifiPQfx-qv c 3 ; ry^7«pKa 1., 2 pf. pret.
eypiipopa, am awake, 281 d [iyprftopOe
320 f ; in imitation, ind. 3 p. eyprj-
ybpddci K. 419, m/. m. eypirjyopdai
ioriyrryepOai, K. 67], iyfyyepfxai, yytp-
Qy\v, f. 1. Cog. Zypu po., eyprjyopeu}
& yp-qyoptw 1., [€7p777opdo;, 67^770-0-0;.]
^-yKO|xid^ci)jt?raise; -d<rcara., evenu-
p,Laaa, lyKtKajptaKa, 282 c.
^8a> ca< ; see eV0tw.
€^op.at seai OTie's seZ/*, sit ; see tfa>.
leiXw p & Qika, wish; --f\tro> 311b,
7)d£\r]<Ta & idiXrjcra • •fjOeX.TiKa & 1.
T€0€\T]Ka. 0Aw is rare & doubtful
§50.
We\c
VERBS.
elfii & eifxi
in Horn., Hes., & Pind.; & is in gen-
eral less common than e^Xu, exc. in
dramatic dialogue.
&il<o (z 2 , Fe0-, 46-) accustom, Mr,
€6i<r«, -i» 305 a, effliaa 279 c; eWiKa,
-o-fjuxi, -a-drjv, f. 1. Intrans. 2 pf. pret.
€t«0a [eu>da E. I.] 312 d, am wont,
[pr. pt. idwv I. 540.]
aSopxii seem, eldov saw ; see opdu.
€Ikci£<j> (z 2 , Fuc-, FetK- h, euc-) liken;
cIkcLo-o), c m., ei'/cacra & rjicacra 278 d ;
eiKCiKa 1., -(T/icu & y/cacr/xai, -^p f.
Intrans., 2 pf. pret. eoiica 312b, some-
times et/ca or y/ca [ol/ca r.], sec»i (nude
1 p. po. foiy/uv 148, Soph. Aj. 1239,
[3 d. tiKTovS. 27, pip. kiaT-qv A. 104,]
irreg. 3 p. et%dcn po. + , Ar. Av. 96,
see Zadcri under bpdu), pip. ew.veti'279d,
f. r. c^a> Ar. Nub. 1001, ipf. eke 2.
520 ? [Cog. taw, eto-Ku q. v.]
cI'kw (FetK-) yield; rffja> [ c m.], ao.,
2 a. eUadov 353 a.
a. Dialectic Forms of
Prea. Ind. 3 $ uffl E . r ,
1 i/M/xi M. ewuri D.
Pres. Opt.
S. 2 etrjcrdaV., eois
3 eot E. I. [e.
tt'ei'17, eftj ? E.
Pres. Imv.
S. 2 ecro, tcr<ro P.
P. 3 ebvTU D.
Pres. Inf.
e/xev, ejxevat E.
e/i / ttej' E. D.
iix/xevai E. iE.
^u.ei', elp,ev D.
ei/xevai D.?
"fifiev, tp.evai E.
T 1p.fJ.eva1 E.
t&jtfCHU E.
[cl\- (h, FaX-, d\-, eX- b 1 ) volvo,
roZZ up, press together, P. etXo/xai, E.
203 ; ZXaa 152 d, A. 413 ; eeXfxai O.
662, 2 a. ect\^, tf. 408.] Cog. erXXw
or e'iXXoj, iXXu), elX^oj or etXew [e'oXe'aj,
Pind. P. 4. 414], -770-w, eiXvoj po. 4- ,
-ifcra; [ao. j». eXvad-qv, ^ir. 393 ; deriv.
eiXvcpjiU), elXvcpdfa], eXicraio [eiXiaaoj
po. & I. +], -i£w (ei'Xifa 279 c), [t'Xe-
Atfw, 4&o, A. 530.] — €Kpa> 344.
elXov took ; see aipe'co.
€411 (eV-) fo, & ct|Jii (Z-, Lat. i-re)
#0. The Pres. of elpu has comm. in
the ind. (in Att. prose regularly), &
sometimes in the other modes, the
sense of the Fut. : elfit, [I am going]
I shall go. For the common forms
of these verbs, see 45 1, m, o, r. Their
chief dialectic forms appear below,
those preceded by t belonging to et/u
go, and the others to elpd be :
elfd to be, AND elpu to
S.
2 eljE.l.,eW£p.
tely, eta da E.
3 evrl D.
P.l eifiivV.l.
eip.hT>.,efx4w.
3 €d<nE.,ei>Tl,"-
ftcriF. [ovtl D.
Pres. Sub.
S. 1 ewE. I., efwE.
Tefw P.
2 itrjcrda E.
3 rj(n,ericri,€TjE.
iir)<T<. E.
P. 1 Cbfji.es D.
fio/xev E.
T ?Wjaes D.
fttfiev D., fvat P.
Pres. Part,
ecii', lover a, eov, G.
eovros E. I.
efcra, ecura, Gr. efo/-
tos, eVros D.
e'oicra ^E.
Imperfect.
S. 1 eaE. I., 9ia E.
t'ov, I77J/ ? E.
eiTKOV It. [e.
T^i'aE. I., ijiov
2 17s late, eas 1.
trjcrda E., e^s P.
3 ^ey, er?!', ^771/ E.
?!* D. , ecr/ce It.
T^t'e 1.
t?7e, fe, eZe?E.
P.l
2
3
D.3
00.
-35/xes- D.
frjo/Jiey E.
e'are I. [crap I.
eVcH/ P. I., ea-
ecrcrav P.
ecr/co^ It.
et'aro ? E.
^-rjl'crav E. I.
+ f(7a»', ^i'oj' E.
fJ'rr/j' E.
Fut. Ind.
ecrcrofjiai P.
ecrodfxac D.
eaaodfxai. D. E.
Tetcrctytcu E.
Aor. Ind.
T elcrdfiTju E.
T eeicrdfiVP E.
b. The comparison of a few cognate tongues will show more clearly that
the root of elul to be, was c<r-, and will also illustrate the forms of inflec-
tion. The Latin is placed first, as showing least change in the flexible
endings (271 d r ). The harsh forms esm, esmus, and esnl became, by trans-
position and change of vowel (cf. 116), sum, sumus, sunt. In the Greek,
the elements are first given (32 i), and then the results. For the relation
of the Sanskrit as- to the es- of the other languages, see 114 a. In the
plural, the a is dropped or transposed. See 271 d. In the Slavic, they
is to be pronounced as y. The Lithuanian, which shows the root entire
throughout, is placed last, as a language which yet lives to link the pres-
ent to the remote past.
gr. tab. 4
74
el/xl
TABLES.
dpi
§50.
Latin
Gothic.
Greek.
Sanskrit.
Old Slavic
Lithuan.
1
suva.
*m
la--[i.
ei/xi, M.efifju
asmi
jesmi
esmi
2
es
is
€(T-S
eh, T.eooi
asi
jesi
csi
3
est
ist
€<t-t
iarl
asti
jesti
esti
1
sumws
4cr-|A€v
e<J(Jiev, v.elfxe's
sums
jesmu
esme
2
estis
4(T-(ts)t€ eOTe"
stha
jeste
este
3
sunt
smd
4<t-vt
eiol, T>.evrl
santi
sunti
esti
c. In d\d to be, the <r of the root was retained in some forms (before t,
0, and fi ; 4 becoming t by precession in ftr8i, 114 d). (d) It was dropped
before o- of the Fut. (co-opai, cf. Lat. ero, 139), and between two vowels,
which were then contracted : Pr. 3 p. (ecrden) edoi E., el<ri, sub. (eVw) ew
E. I., &, opt. (eatTjv, cf. L. sim) etrjv • Ipf. 1 s. (augmented r/av, rjoa, cf.
273 r c, e, and L. cram, 139) fa e., tj (Old Att., Ar. Av. 1363), 3 s. (far,
fac, 273 r c, e) ^ev e. 163 b, fjv. (e) It was also dropped before vt, 4 com-
monly passing into the kindred 6 (cf. 114 b, c): Pr. 3 p. evri D., pt. (IVt-
L. ent-, 6vT-) wv, eWos D., imv. 3 p. (evrwv) 6vt«v. (f) It was contracted,
as € (142), with 4 or i] preceding : Pr. ind. (ecrfxi) ct|xi, (eVs) eis E. I., or
(both sigmas apparently taken up) el, {ea^v) eifxiv E. I., inf. (eamt) etvat
(in Lat. the r was assimilated, (es-re) esse), imv. (Iotw, cVtw, cf. 1 21 e)
1}tu) 1.; Ipf. 1 s. (170-1') 9)u, 2 s. (fas) 9js 1., pi. Tjiiev, fae (oftener than fare,
while in the dual farov and far-qv prevail), faav. See 139 s.
The dialectic or less Attic forms of el|x£ to be, are (g) forms uncon-
tracted or like those of verfe in -o> (315) : toffip B. 125, iovn Archim., ew
1. 18, eWi Hdt. 2. 39, eois I. 284, Jj^oi Hdt. 7. 6, eW B. 27, t'owa T. 159,
eji<ra Pind. P. 4. 471, eSca, edvra, Theoc. 2. 3, 76, (eWa, 156) eatra Tim.
Loc. 96 a, 17a /3. 313, ^ep M. 9 ; (h) variously protracted : eool (in imita-
tion of the other persons) A. 176, fier-eico *. 47, efyr* 328 b, B. 366, ei' v -
cQ* 297 b, Theog. 715, ftp 135, e-qada X. 435, e> M. 10, ijrp A. 808,
eauov 332, H. 153, tWe Hdt. 1. 196, eWo/xcu 171, A. 267 (eVercu 45 r,
A. 211), iaodfiaL 305 d, Th. 5. 77 ; (i) shortened or unaugmented : e/xev r.,
Call. Fr. 294, ea 329 d, t*oi> A. 762, iaav A. 267 ; (j) middle forms ; eao
or eWo A. 302, Sap. 1. 28, -rjfirjv r. or 1., Cyr. 6. 1. 9 v. I. (ij/ieda Mat. 23.
30), eiaro 329 a, v. 106 t;. Z. ; (k) infinitives (333): e>e;/ A. 299, t>/*erat
Sap. 2. 2, ^/io» or eZ^ej/ (v. I. 9)/xes or el^es ?) Th. 5. 77, Theoc. 14. 6, ctytcrat
or tfixevai Ar. Ach. 775 ? ; (1) various forms ; tfi/xi 171 a, Sap. 2. 15, els (or
eft Bek.) II. 515, Hdt. 7. 9, ely.h E. 873, et'^s, iD^es, V«, 328 a, Theoc.
15. 73, 9, 14. 29, 3 s. evri 169 c, Theoc. 1. 17, 3 p. brrl 328 a, Th. 5. 77,
ebvTU 328 d r , 2 s. ^5 1., 297 b, 3 s. (far) fa Theoc. 2. 90, eoerai 45 r.
m. In cI|xl to go, the root ' 1-, in the sing, of the Pres. and commonly in
the Impf. throughout, was lengthened to et- (314), which augmented be-
came g- (278 d): el/xi, eh, elai • (77V, cf. 273 r c, e) 97a (common in the Old
and Mid. Att., PL Apol. 22 a, and followed in the Ep. by fa M. 371),
rj[j.ev, fae, faav. The Impf., having thus a form resembling that of the
old Plup. (291 c), fell into the analogy of this tense in its subsequent
development, and has been often so named : -fjeiv, fats, &c. The shorter
forms of the plur. and dual were, however, more common, except perhaps
faav, which some deny to the Att, while others regard it as the true Att. form.
The dialectic forms of et[u to go, are (n) regular nude forms : elsHes.
Op. 206 (Att. el, as if in imitation of elfxi to be; elada 297, K. 450), {td<n,
156) Iffi Theog. 716 (v. 1. el<n), e^-ivat Ath. 580 c, taav V. 8, trip A. 347 :
(o) forms witJi r\ resolved : (ya) tfia Hdt. 1. 42, tfie A. 47, ijl'aav Hdt. 1.
43, tfiov 315, 1^/370 ; (p) with'X lengtJiened to el, as in the Pr. ind.: efw
Sophr. 2 [23], Kar-eiev ? Hes. Sc. 254, efcro/xat £. 8, etaaro A. 138, eeiGo.ro
O. 415 ; (oj as from U-: leirj T. 209, and also te/xai, Ufirjv, 45 p, if they
§50.
■IfXl
VERBS.
should be thus written ; (r) infinitives (333): t/xev A. 170, fypievcu T. 365,
eV-te/xerat x- 480 ; (t) various forms : trjada 297 b, K. 67, trj<n, lup.es 328 b, a,
to,ueu 326d, lev, jjoftar, 315, B. 872, X. 22.
ctirov said, 2 aor. ; see (pnni.
tipyia (h, Fepy-, epy-) shut out;
el'pfjei) m. , dpija ; 2 a. po. elpyaOov m .
353 a ; elpyp,cu, -x^V v • [e, I. ep^co k
ep-yvvp-i n 7 ; ep^op.ai, ep£a, 2 a. ep7a-
00^ TO.; tpypiai (epxara'., -to, 329a,
k. 283, P. 354) : also tep-yw, &c, B.
617. | Cog. Lat. arceo, urgeo ; and
ctp-yw & elp-yvvui (h, n 7 , Fepy-, epy-)
shut in ; eip|w, elp£a ; elpyp.ai, -x^V v '■
ch. Ion., c €p-yfc>, c ep^co, ep£cc, epxOnv.
The single verb Yepyu (or eFepyu p)
in Horn., seems to have become elpyu
k eipyw in the Att., with a distinc-
tion of sense, which, however, was
not always observed.
clpouai, elpcDTaco, ash; see ipwrdw.]
ctpvco draw; see eptiu.\
ci'po), elpew, say ; see 4>np.L']
ctpw (f 3 h, o-ep-) sero, join, knit
[ipf. orao. rjeipeK. 499] ; c elpa[ c i'pcra
152 d, Hipp.] ; c €TpKa, -itcu [e. eepp.at,
<r. 296, l.Cfp/ttull
etcra se£, placed, 1 a. ; see i'fw.
[4 l<TK(a k I'o-kw ( k 5 , see eUd fa ) fo'&en ;
pret. ^t7 / uai + , c Eur. Ale. 1063.]
€l'a>9a am umnl, pret. ; see edifa.
k.KK\r\a-ioX<a hold an assembly, -euro),
&c. ; aug. tjkkX-, e£e\-X-, &c, 282 c.
IXttvvco (n* 2 , eXa-) & r. i\d<a drive,
M. ; cXdo-ft), [eXaw 305 b, eX6w 322 c]
4X», eXa'cro/xai 1. , ijXaaa m. ; 4XrjXaKa,
-itai, -a>icu 1., [pip. 3 p. iXvXddaro
or -edaro 329 a, ??. 86,] -fjXddrjv, -adrju
c f. 1. [Cog. iXao-rpiu E. I. +.]
[fe'XSop.ai (FeX5-) & eeXdopai, desire.]
k\4y\a examine, confute; cXe-y^w
ao. ; £XrjXeyp.ai 41, c ifXeyp,air.,i)Xey-
X0r)v f.
^Xko> & 1. IXkv'w (w, reX/c-, cf. vel-
lico) pull, draw, M. ; ?X|w, less Att.
cXkvo-o), m. 1., e'iXKV(ra to. , ef X$a to. 1. ;
etXicuKa, -0-p.at., -ad-qv f., elXx^W f. 1.
[Cog. eXuiu), -rjircx) • eXKvardfa.]
4XXt]v££o> spea& Greek, -Lena, &c. ;
eXX7]vi<x6r}v or TjXXrjviadrjv 279 f.
IXiri^w (z 2 , fAtt-) Aope, if.; IX-
ir(i'cra?)Lc51., tfXiriaa • ^XiriKal., -oywu
1., -0-^/71/ : [gXira> grilfc /lope, J/. & 2 pf.
pret. goXira e. 379, hope, 2 pip. ^u>X-
*e» 279 d, 0. 96.]
4Xv9- come ; see tyxofiai.
4p.e'a> vomo, vomit; 4u(eVw)ci to.,
-rfpLecra [-qpL-qca 1] ', 4p.r|p.€Ka, -oyxcu 1.,
e/xe6V f. 1.
4p.iroXda> traffic; -Vj<ro>, &c; aug.
•)7,u.7r- or eveir-, 282 c.
evaCpw (h, erap-) &t7Z, po., 3L;
[iuTjpa 1., to. E. 59,] 2 a. ijvapov, Eur.
And. 1182. Cog.,
4vap£'£« kill, dispoil, po., 349 a ;
[4vapt£ja>, ?y?. 1.,] rjvdpL^a, TO. 1., [-iCa,
xVinic. 100]; c r]vdpujpxxi, c -aByjv.
eve'irw & IvveTro), & 1. 4vt<rira> (e^67r-,
ej'iTr- b 2 , evLo-ir- o), /c^, s^ca/j (cf. in-
quam), po., a. 1 ; [IvtxJ/w k evicrir-qo-c*
311, e. 98, ft/i^a 1.,] 2 a. evurirov [imv.
hio-iresv, 313 b, 7. 101.] Cog. [e«-
7ttw + , & iviaau) i 3 , chide, 2 n..evev1irov,
rjviiraTrov, 284 e ;] etTroi/, see ^^.ut.
[° 4v-t]vo0a f/ro?w or ^'c o?i ; see dveO-. ]
c ^vvi>p.t (n 7 , re-, e-), vestio, dothc f
[M.\ f. ^<ra> (gcro-w 171, 7T. 79) c to.,
ao. (^craa 5. 253, e^aaaro K. 23) ; pf.
elp.a.L + t. 72, & ecr/iat, w. 250 :] comm.
dp.<pi-6vvvp.t JA. ; CL ( at}>L€cra> e. 167,
Att. c dp.<piw305b, Ar. Eq. 891, dp.(pt-
e<ro/j.ou Cyr. 4. 3. 20, rj/uupieaa m. 282b,
Cyr. 1. 3. 17 ; rjpKpieo-fiat, -<jQr\v\, Cog.
[ G eivvpii E. I. ;] 1. dpxf>idfa, -do~oj ' ea6e-
in pf. rjadrjfiat.
IvoxXea) annoy, -ij<ra>, &c. ; aug.
•^I'wx-, v. I. rjvox- or ej/w^-j 282 b.
[eoXe'co press, trouble; see eiX-.]
4opTd£o> keep a feast, -d<ra>, &c. ;
aug. eojp- 279 d : [oprctfw I.]
4ir-av-op9dc«) »e/ upright, -<o<r<o, &c. ;
aug. tTTTjvup- 282 b.
[4Tr-avp€<o r. & 4ir-avpCcrK&> r. (v, k 2 ,
avp-) enjoy, M. ; 4iravp , q<rop.ai Z. 353,
iirrjvpdp.-qv I. +, oftener 2 a. eirnvpov,
p. 81,] eTrrjvpbjxrjv Eur. Hel. 469. Cog.
diravpdco to&e away, po., ao. dirvvpd-
fAVv't [pt. drroOpas 114, A. 356, 0.^01;-
pdp.evos, Hes. Sc. 173, f. d7rovprjaovcrLV
X. 489 v. Z.]
4iri-p.4Xop.ai & 4iri-p.eXeouai care
for ; see fiiXcj.
kir-C<rra\iaiiinderstand; see '1<ttt)p,i.
^ttci) (f 3 , tre-n--, o-7r- c 3 ) be after or
&ws^ ^^/i (act. scarce used exc. in
comp.), M. ^iropai sequor, follow;
ipf. el-Kov to. 279 c; c € # \|;fc), €\|rop.ai,
ao. to. ?, 2 a. c caxou (o-koi, o-ttoi;ju, &c),
TABLES.
evpio-Kco
50.
i<nr6fi7}v (atruffiai, &c.) & (by redupl. &
change of initial <r, <re<nr- ia-ir-, 284 e,
345) ch. po. eairSfiTjp (eairw/mi, &c. ),
[imv. <rwrio 323 c ; ao. p. irepi-€<p8r]v,
Hdt. 6. 15.] Cog. r. or 1. cVttw m.
epdw love, desire, M. po. epac/Acu k
oftener2pap.ai ; [lypaad/xvi' ;] {]paorpxu
1., -o6r\vi. Po. cog. epovrevct), Much..
Pr. 893, [eparifa, A. 551.]
€pYd£op.at «;or&; ep-ydcrop.ai, elpya-
adfj.-qv 279 c ; €i'p-ya<rp.ai, -cd-rjv f. See
£p-ya>, --yvvpa, fe'pvco, see eipyw, e'lpyo).
Hp8« & ^p8« (f, Fepy- k Fep5-, cf.
168, ipy-) WORK, do, po. k I. (Zpdw
Hdt. ), J/. ; 2p£a>, ?p£a [2p£a ?] ; [2 pf.
i!op-ya 312 b, pip. edpyeiv 279 d, 5. 693,
46pyea 284b, 291 c, Hdt. 1. 127.] Cog.
tpyafrfMai, ptfa, q. v.
epetSw prop, ch. po., M.; epciorcol.,
c m., ao. ; c ^p€Uca & 1. c epr)p€iKa, iprj-
peicrfiai k ■fjpeiap.ai [3 p. ip-qpibarai,
-a.ro, 329 a, 3 f. ipepdao/xai. ? Hipp.,]
IpeiKw (h, fyiK-) re?u?, break, C M.;
1jpei£a, m. I., 2 a. ffpiKov po. ; eprjpi.-
yp.ai, ypeLxOw I. Cog. pr/yvvpu. q. v.,
[cp<?x0 w > e - 83 -1
€p€i7rco (h, ^pt7r-) ^ArMy cfojni, r. in
Att. prose ; ep€u|/a>, ao. a. c m., 2 a.
ijpivov fell, E. 47, m. 1. ; [2 pf. c 4pij-
pura /iave fallen, S. 55,] iprjpipipuxt
k 1. ijp€LpLp.ai, i)pd<pQr\v, [2 a. i)piin}v
Pind. 0. 2. 76.] Cog. piTrrw <Arow.
lp€<r<roi>i 2 , row;, po. orl. ; [ao.^pecra.]
IpcvOoo & cpv0aiva> (h, n 6 , fyt>0-, cf.
rubeo & Germ, rblhen) make red,
redden, po. orl., M.; [IpcvVw ? 2.
329 17. 1., ao. lb., epid-qva 1., ao. ^j.
op2. c epevddrjv, Hipp. Cog. epvdpabw,
epvdpidw, -dcru.
iplto> (j, ^oi5-) rixor, contend, [M. + ] ;
cpLcra) 1., ao. a. m.; ^puca 1., [eprjpi-
<r/*at. Cog. epiSaivo), ao. epldyval.,
cpi8rj<ra(rdai or epiffioraadai &. 792 ;
eptS/iatVw.]
?pirw (f 3 , <T€pTr-) serpo, creep, po.
or 1. ; 5?p\J/a), eZpi/'a 1. 279 c. Cog. 4p-
•7tu£&> po. +, c -tiau, dpirvaa.
2ppa> go away, cf. erro, ruo ; eppt]-
o-ft> 311, ao. ; c 4jppnKa. [Cog. ? ao.
diro-epaa swept away, Z. 348.]
Ipvyydvw (n 5 , fyiT-) ructo, erugo,
belch, ERUCT, [M. k lp€i5-yop.cu I. &
E. + ; £p€v£op.ai i.,] ao. 1., 2 a. -fjpvyov.
tpOKco hold back, ch. po. & i., [M.;
cpv£o>,] ao. , [2 a. iipvuaKov 284 e. Cog.
ipvKdvw k epvuavdo), a. 199, /c. 429.]
€pvw & elpvo) (Fe/yu-) rfrattf, E. & I.,
M. r/raw to one's self, 'protect; ipvo-oi
1. (epvft) 305 f, X. 67) & c dpv<r<a 1.,
m., eipv<ra m. + ; etpvpuu k -vfffiat,
-jj<t6t)v ; see 279 c. [Nude pr. & ipf.
forms (326e) : act. inf. dpti/xevcu 333 c,
Hes. Op. 816 ; mid. fyvrai Ap. Rh.
2. 1208, dprjarai A. 239, Zpvao, -vto,
-vvto, X. 507, eipiiTO, -vvro, II. 542,
Zpvadai e. 484, eipvcrOai \p. 82 ; 7?gww.
^pwro Hes. Th. 301. Some regard
these mid. k pass, forms as pret. pf.
& plf.] See pvop.ai.
gpXopxu {epx-, i\vd- x, i\evd- h)
go, come; ipf. r)px6p.r)v scarcely in Att,
exc. in conip. ; cXevcrop-ai scarcely in
Att. prose, 2 a. ^Xdov c 3 (po. tfXvdov),
[d. tydou 168. 3, Theoc. 16. 9, Lac.
f)\aov 169d, Ar. Lys. 105 ; for^Xu^a, '
sync. 9j\6a, see 327 b] ; 2 pf. c'X-qX-uGa
[eiXrjXovda 134 a, nude 1 p. eiXrjXovd-
pLep 326 e, y. 81.] For the. pr. exc. in
the ind., the ipf., & the fut., the Att.
comm. used other verbs, esp. efyit.
€pa>Ttta> (o' 2 , c/9-) inquire, ask ; tpa>-
tt^o-o) & €pi'orop.ai 311, r)p&TT]<ja, 2 a.
m. 7]p6p.r]v [imv. 2pet.o 323 c, A. 611] ;
T|pwTT]Ka, -jucu, -drjv. [Ep. & I. etpo-
/xai A. 553 (also 2 s. Zpeai Hes. Cert. ),
-rjao/xat ' dpiordbj k -4io 322 a, Hdt.
4. 145 ■ eptw, H. 128 ; €pedvw + , Z.
145.]
€<r0fo>, & po. + foBa k '&», fi. 415,
Eur. Cyc. 245 (e?5-, ead- a 1 147, eadt-
w, 0a7- x) edo, eat ; f. ^8op.ai (1. <pd-
yop.ai, i5oup.cu '{ 305 a), 2 ao. ecpayov ;
6 '8i]8oKa312d, iv. 8. 20, [2pf. td v 8a,
P. 542, i8r]dop:ai, %• ^6,] c eSrjSeapjai,
7j8icr07]v. [Nude pr. inf. edpiemi 326 e,
333 c, N. 36.]
co-Tido) feast, entertain, M. ; Io-ti-
&tro> m. , daridaa 279 c, m. 1. ; €i<tt£-
dica, -pxu, -6t)v, f. 1.: [foriuM I.]
€v8a>, comm. KaO-cvSto, sleep; ipf.
7?65oj/, eSSoi', enddevSov, 278 d, 282 b;
€v8-r|<ra> 311, c ao. ; c ei»8T]Ka 1.
cti€p7£Ttft> benefit, -^<ra>, &c. ; aug.
euep- & cjJi7p- 283. 2.
eipCo-Kw (k 2 , evp-) find, M.\ efcptj-
<r» m. 311b, ao. a. 1., 2 a. d)pov or
ijCpov m. 278 d (evpdp.r)i> 327 b) ; eu-
pi]Ka, -Tj/xai, -^^^ f. 310 d.
§50.
€xB(0
VERBS.
] Vt}(TK(0
77
ixQa, exGaCpw, & l\QpaCv<a (o, n 6 ,
ix&-), hate, ch. po. ; ao. -fjxd-qpa, to.
L, tfxdpyva h M. or P. ^x^oyicat &
^X^atpo/iai 6c hateful or hated, f. e'x-
dapodfiaL, pf. 1. iJx&Vl ljLai ' comm. dir-
eX^dvouai n 4 ; -ex^ " ^ 011 311, 2 a.
-rjxdb/JLiiv ; -^X^IF 11 *
^ X w & i'o-xw (<^X-> ^X- f 3 , ^X- <*>
<rx- c 3 , o-xe- c 6 , lax- r 3 d) ^we, /&o/d
(have belonging rather to 2x w > ^£ w >
and AoM to r<rxw, (rx^w), J/.; ipf.
e^xo^ & Z(txov 278 s ; gj-w to, & <rxiicra)
9»., [ecx^cra r.,] 2 a. e<rx ot/ m - (^X^
<rxoLr)v & c <rxo?fJu 293 c, cx^s like 0es
314 d, c <rxf r., ^X e ^ v i ^X^"* m - ^X^"
fiai, &c. ), po. tax^dov, iEsch. Pr. 16
[ c to. Theoc], &rxnKa [pt.aw-oxuKws,
B. 218, as for -oxwxos 31 2d, cf. 281 c,
159], e<TXVP~ at [plf. 3 p. e7r-u>xctro
312 d, 329 a], i*X&7p I. or 1., f. 1.
Cp. ajiir-txu or afiir-iax^ 159 d (ipf.
to. fyjtreixbfW 282 b, PI. Phredo 87b);
di'-^x w (2 a. to. aveaxopW, oftener
7iv€(txom v 282 b, po. TiwxbfJt'W 136,
ft. 518). Cog. c lax^ofiai n 10 or c /<r-
X^ofiai v (see viricrxv^op^ai), [7a-x c * , ' a, >
/(TXaj/dw, P. 747, 572 ;] ox^ w foar.
&|/a>, less Att. €\j/4u), boil, cook;
tyi\<r(a m. 311, ao. ; •fj^/TjKa ? 1., -p.ai,
•07)V, f. 1.
z.
£d«, Zwe, see 42 a, (nude ipf. tfyv
r. Dem. 702. 2, later imv. ijjdi po. ) ;
£ij<ra> to., ao. a. ; ££r|Ka. The Att.
preferred fda> in the pr. & ipf., but
elsewhere /3i<5w q. v. Cog. po. or i.,
£u>w, Soph. El. 157, or r. fow.
£€VYVtipi (n 7 , ^7-, fciry- h, cf. jug-
um, jung-o) join, yoke, M.; t,iv£<a
to., ao. ; c ^cvxal., -yp.ai, -x^w, f- L,
2 a. e^ytjv ; 47. Cog. firyow, tvyiu.
£wvviip.i (n 8 , £0-) o/zVoJ, if.; £to<ro>
9».l.,ao.; IJoMcaL, -<rp.ai, -<r^i/307d.
H.
•fjSto (f g, Fa5-) please, M. delight
in; -fjo-ttl., ao. a. [m. t. 353]; TjadrjvL
Cog. di/Savw q. v. ; old^. as adj. (fcl5-
fievos 148) &ap.euos pleased, glad; rj8o-
v<o sweeten, rjdvva, tfdvcrfxcu 304 b, -ivdrjv,
[i\kaCv<a, f|Xd<rKG>, see dXdo/wu.]
^p.<u sit, pret.; see ?£"« & 46 c.
i\y.ilsay, fy I said; see (prjpl & 45 u.
[tip-uw boiv, sink ; i\\i.var<a, ao. + ; pf.
3 s. vir-efjLVTi/xvKe 281 d, X. 491.]
0.
0dXX» (1, 0aX-) &Zoo?/i, flourish;
0aXXi}o-« 1. 311, 1 a. c id V \a 1., 2 a.
edakov r. or 1. ; 2 pf. pret. T€0T)Xa [pt.
redaXvIa 325 e. Cog. 0a\<?w, daXedw,
drfktu, TrjXeddci).]
Odirrw (t, ^a0-) bury ; GdvJ/u ao. ;
redafxfjuxi, 3 f. Tedd^ofxac, [idd<p8r)v
I.,] 2 a. erd^ip f. d 1 . Cf. T^d V Tra.
SavfjLd^to xvonder, M. pr. 1.; 6av-
fxacroficH, less Att. -a-w, ao. a., m. 1.;
T€0av|xaKa, -cr/xcu, edavjudadrfu f. : [i.
Owvfidfa or dw/xdfa, 131 e. Cog.
da.vp.aiva}. ]
[Qe- pray for ; ao. to. 3 p. Qiaaavro
Pind. N. 5. 18, jttf. 6ecr<rdp.evos Hes.]
Geivo) (h, ^ej/-) fen do, strike, smile,
po.; 0€V<5, [e^etm, <f>. 491,] 2a. edevov.
# 0fi'X(i), loisA, will ; see idt\<a.
0€po> warm, ch. po., ^<4. r. & 1., J/.
0epo;j.cu • [0€po-opat 152 d, t. 507 ;
2 a. ^?. ^p W p. 23.] Cog. [dtyfjua,]
Oeppxtivw.
Qi<a (f 12 , ^er-) run, see 42 a; 0cv-
o-opai, -(Tw 1. & r. ; ao. & pf. sup-
plied by to^x w > & c -
0T]pdco /««i?!, -d<r<o, &c, see 42 g ;
oftener in Att. prose, 0r]pevoo, -cv<r», &c.
0tYydvw (n 5 , 6iy-) tango, touch
(in Att. prose r. & only 2 a., but
rather ti.irTopi.ai) ; 0i£op.ai or -£a>, 2 a.
ediyov, m. 1. ; 3 f. T€0L%op.ai ?, idixdrjv 1.
0Xi!3cog, press; 0X£\J/<o [to. p. 221],
ao. «. ; T€0Xt<j>a 1., -ip.p.ai, edXlcpdr^v,
later 2 a. <r0\1/V, f« L': [0Xt/3w I. D.
168. 2.]
OvVjo-Kco (k 6 , 6av-, dva- c 57 ) ^
(comm. cp. w. diro in prose, exc. in
the complete tenses, which are rarely
cp. ) ; Gavovpai (/car-flcu'ou/x.cupo. 1 36 d,
Eur. Med. 1386), 2 a. edavou ; T60vtiKa
(2 pf. pi. & du. reOvapev, -are, -dai,
-arov, iv.2.17, 1.19, X.52, opt.TeQvai-qv
S. 98, imv. rtdvadi X. 365, inf. rtdvd-
vai Th. 8. 92, po. re0j/(a-e)arai ? ^Esch.
Ag. 539, pt. redmus, Pind. N. 10.
139, ct. redvecbs 120 i & later redpdbs,
-Gxra, -ibsk-6s 233 a, r. 331, vii. 4. 19,
Hdt. 1. 112, [redvrjus or -etcis 325 d,
P. 161,] pip. 3 p. iridmo-av Hel. 6.
&Vt](
TABLES.
ipco
50.
4. 16), 3 f. Tedrftta k -ofMi. 319 b.
See KTeivo). Cog. da.va.rbw put to death,
da.va.T6.ia desire death, 378 d.
Qoivdia feast, po., M. ; -ctcropcH k
-TJcrouat, &c, 310 a.
0cpgiv, Odpvvucu, leap; see dpucKW.
0pdo-<r« disturb : see Tapdacrw.
0pava> 6rm/£ ; Bpaikra) ao. ; Ttdpav-
crfxai [reOpavfxai ?), eOpaucrdrjv, f. 1.
6piiTrTG> (t, 6pv<p-) crush, M. piit on
airs; Gp-ui|/o> 1., m., c ao. a.; riOpvp.-
pua.i, edp6<pdr)v, f. L, [2 a. c irpvcpTjv
d 1 , T. 363.] Cog. Tpv<pdu}.
0pwo-Kco (k 46 , dop-) leap, ch. po:;
c Bopovficu, 2 a. edopov. Cog. 66pvvp,ai.
[Qvui rush, rage ; c 0tf<rco ? 1., eflucra 1.
Cog. dew, dvveoo, dvtu.]
0va> (v) sacrifice, M. ; 0C<ra> m., ao. ;
W0vKa, -v/acii, irvdrjv, f. 1., 159; 44.
I.
IdXXto (1, taX-) se?io?, po. (or idXXw
d 2 ) ; c laXw, [ c !r]\a. ] Cog. aXXo/*aiq. v.
[id\(o shout, + ; pf. c L'ax a P^et. B.
316.] Po. cog. tax^w, laicxtv.
t8eiv, I8e'<r0ai, see, 2 a. ; see opdw.
ISpdco sudo, sweat (for ct. & pro-
longed forms, see 324);, l8poo<ra> ao. ;
I'SpwKctl., -p.ai 1. Cog., Tiro, Ar. Pax
85, [L i. Wptiw.]
I8pfju> (i7 e. ) sm£, set up, 31. ; ISptJcrto
m., ao.; I'Spvxa, -vpiai, -ijdrjv k -\jv6tjv
n 1 , T. 78, F. 1. Cog. fgfc q. v.
i'cpcu or t'epai hasten ; see 45 p.
l'fr> (j, aed-, <fc>-f 3 , t§-b 2 , cf. sedeo,
sido) seat, set, sit, ch. po. ordial.,
31. l'£opai & c^opcu sit ; c i£i]o-g> 1., ao.
1., 311 a ; f. m. eVopai 151 (e<p-i<T<re-
ada.i I. 455, eiaop-ail.), ao. efcra to.
279 c, B. 549, Eur. Ipli. T. 946 [pt.
c e'iaas, -dp.evos, Hdt. 3. 126, 1. 66] ;
t^rpca 1., rjuai e 1 , pret., see 46 c (2 s.
k&O-t, Acts 23. 3, cf. 331 b), t/ctcV ?
In Att. prose, coram. KoJbLXfii, 31.
-Crouch & -^£ouai ; Ka0i<r&>, -wo 305 a,
ii. 1. 4, m. 1., f. m. Ka0i£i}o-opai &
KG.0eSovuai 305 a [/cafleSTjtr o/xcu 1.), ao.
eK&dcaa k Kadiaa 282 b, m., iKadify-
era 1., [icadeio-a m. + ;] K€KcL0iKa 1.,
Ka0T|[A(u 46 c (comic or 1. imv. k&6ov
Ja. 2. 3), 3 f. Kad-f)ffop.aL, iKadecrdrjvl.,
f. ? Cog. l£dvw, idpvio q. v.
I'tjui (e-, '"e- r 8 ) smd [eh. in comp.
& many forms only so found), if.
hasten, desire ; pr. a. ind. 2 s. dc&-eis
Rev. 2. 20, 3 p. <n/j>-<oD(n Mat. 13. 13,
pt. ow-i&v Rom. 3. 11, [tmt>. £iV-£e, ?'??/.
avv-ielv, Theog. 1240, 565 ;] ipf. 1 s.
Heiv or c i> 315 b, 3 s. #-te 282 b,
Mk. 1. 34, 3 p. dcp-Leaav iv. 5. 30,
7j<pleaap Hel. 4. 6. 11 ; i\<r<a °m., ?JKa
c m. 306, 2 a. c eTpev c m., A. 642,
Hier. 7. 11 ; c etKa, ii. 3. 13, c elp.ai,
Th. 1. 6 [md 3 p. 1. d0-ewj>rcu D. ?
Lk. 5. 23, dv-ioovTai or -eovrai Hdt.
2. 165 v. £., ^. pLe-p.eT-ip.ivos 282 b,
167 a, Hdt. 6. 1], c €i'^, Eur. Ph.
1376, °f. Ven. 7. 11. See also 45 k,
n, r, j, 315. Some forms are made
as from shorter themes, t'w, fw.
iKveo(xai. (n 10 , i/c-), po. 'iKdvco n 6 ,
[w., & 'iku),] come, in prose usu. d0-
inveop.a.1 • i'|op.ai [t^a) E., Ar. Ach.
742], ao. a. 1. [tfyv 327 a], 2 a. m.
lKop.t]v ; tYp.au Cog. ^/cw 114 d, ixe-
re^a; supplicate'.
iXd.a-KOfj.ai (k, ''fXa-) propitiate [e.
i\dop.aik tXapat] ; IXdcropai ao. ; iXd-
crc?^, f. 1. Cog. i\€op.at po., iXeoopai,
[& as fr. l'X77/xt 6c propitious, pr. mv.
i'\ac?i 297 d, tX?jc?t 335 d r , pret. sub.
k opt. IXtjkw, Vk-qKOipn, (p. 365.]
OX« roZZ, [^7r-t\X^w,] see el\-.
[ipdcrcrtoi' 2 , lash; ao. tp.aaa, e. 380.]
tiriroTpocjS^ft) A;cej9 horses ; -i^o-w ao. ;
iiriroTpd<J>Tp<a or -TCTpdcprjKa 283 a.
l'7rrapat fly ; see iriropLai.
[I'o-dpi know, it. ; see opdw.
l'cm]pi (r 3 , ara-, cf. Lat. sto-re)
statuo, set up, station, M. sto, stand ;
o-TTJcr&> m., ao., 2 a. <e<jT-qv ; ?erTT]Ka
(1. pf. trans. 'eardKO. k 1 ao. earacra ;
so some explain 'ardaav M. 56), [2 pf.
I. tar tare -dai 335 c, pt. eareus 120 i,
Hdt. 2. 38,] c effTap.ai r., &c. See 45,
46. Cp. cir-tcrTap&i understand. (2 s.
iiriaTa 297 h, I. eirlareai 322 a, Hdt.
7. 135) ; liri-crrr^croucu ; iiiuaTrfiriv
282 b. Cog. iardvoj, 1. <jti)kw k earr]-
ku, Rom. 14. 4, [crTeO/acu 326 e.]
tcrxw, lcrxv£op.ai, hold; see e^w.
K.
Kadatpw (h, Kadap-) purify, M.\
Ka0ap<5 rri:, 4i<ddr)pa m., v. 7. 35, &
indddpa, (Ec. 18. 8, 152 c ; K€»cd0apKa
1., -pxu, iKaddpdr)i>, f. 1., 2 a. 1. ilea-
ddprjv ?
§50.
KaOt^ofxai
VERBS.
kKivc
79
KaGe'^oaai, Ka9r[p,ai, Ka9i£a>, see t'faj.
Ka0-6v8w sleep ; see evdu & 282 b.
Kaivvjiai (n 9 , ko.5-, icaid- h) arceZ,
po. ; Kexao-pai, Eur. El. 616 [jp^. «e-
Kadfxiuos D., 148 b, Pind. 0. 1. 42.]
Katvw (h, Kay-) &t#, in prose usu.
cp. w. Kara, i. 6. 2 ; Kavw, 2 a. ena-
vov ; 2 pf. r. Kexova or /ceVam, 114.
Cog. KTeivo).
KQ.iu> {h, AraF-, Kav- f 2 , yea- f *, *re- b)
burn, also Att. ku» g, 44, 309 b [k??w
H. 408 r. Z.J, M. ; Kaixru, in. r., enavaa
[ c m. Hdt. 8. 19, e/c^a m. or e/ceta A.
40, <p. 176,] j»«. po. K^as, jEsch. Ag.
849 ; c K€KavKO, -p.ai, eKaudrjy f. [2 a.
iadr)!/ E. I. +, /a. 13, f. 1.]
KoKiu) calo, call, M. ; KaXeo-u m.,
[/caAew, T. 383] Att. usu. Ka\» m.,
305 b, iKdXea-a m. ; kcxX^ko. c 4 , -/tcu
(ojp£. 317 c), 3 f. KeK\y]<ro(xaL, ii<Xr)dr)vf.
Cog. KiKK-qfricw po., [/CC1A77/U iE. 335 b,
irpo-KaXifofiai <r. 20 ;] /cA^retfw s«m-
mwi; kA&o, /cAg^w, celebrate.
KaXivSe'co roll; see ati/AIpSo;.
Kajivw (n, Aca/A-) labor ; Kap.ovp.ai,
2 a. ena/Mov [?«.] ; KCKp-qica c 7 , 308
[jrf. KCKfirjA* 325 d, Tli. 3. 59 ?].
KajiTTTw (t, Ka/jur-) bend, M. ; KctaiJ/w
ao. ; KeKamxai 148 a, 41, tKdpupdrjv, f. 1.
Cog. yvdiMTTTta po.
KttO) 6«r?i, not ct. ; see Kaiw.
KcSdvvvpi, KeSaco ; see <rKt5dvvvpu,
K€iuai (c 1 , Arec- ; but accented without
regard to the contraction, & deemed
by someapret.) lie (cf. quie-sco), see
45 q, r [2 s. Kard-Keiac 297 h, Horn.
Merc. 254, 3 s. k€<tk€to 332 d, 3 p.
Kearcu, -to 329 a, k£ovtcu (as fr. /ce-,
315) X. 510 ; sub. 3 s. ct. ktjtcu or
(Keerai 326 d) Keircu J). 554 ; old pr. as
fut. k4u, 17. 342, kcIu r. 340, § 305 f].
K6ipo> (h, icap-, Kep- b) shear, M.\
K€pd> vi., eiceipa m. [tKepcra in. 152 d,
N. 546]; c K€Kapica 1., -puti, [1 a. pt.
Kepdels, Pind. P. 4. 146,] 2 a. endpriv
1. or 1.
KCKaSijo-w, K€Ka8cav, see x^fa-
KeKaSrjo-opai, see ktjSw vex.
«e Aopai command, po. + , ch. e. ;
KeXrjcropai ao. 311 b, 2 a. k€kX6/xt]u or
eK6K\6firjv 284 e. Cog. [xeicXofiat 1.,]
KeXevu, -edaca, 307 b.
K€VT6W (v, KCVT-) prick ; K€VT^JO-<0
ao. [m/- 5^o-ai 156 b, *. 337] ; &c.
K€pdvvvp.i (n 8 , Kepa-) mix; Kcpdarw
1., in. 1., ao., [tV-p^tra E. 1., 77. 164];
KCKepaKa 1., KeKpdfiai c 4 & 1. Kentpa-
Cjxai, eKpddrjvf., Th. 6. 5, & eKepdadr)^
v. 4. 29 : [/cepdw E. +, ntpaie 322 c,]
po., I., or 1. Kipviu & Kipvr)p.L n 3 , b.
KspSatvw (n 6 , Kep8-) gam; KepSa-
va>, eKepMva 152 c, [1. or 1. nepd-qcru)
m., ao. a., 311 ;] KCKcpSqica (1. -aica
or -ay kol), -7jp.ai 1., taepSdvOyv 1.
K€v6a> (h, ct0-) ZuVfc, po. ; kcvo-o)
[ c ao., 2 a. eA
7. 16, § 284 e;]
2 pf. pret. K£K€v0a, \_n£Kevdp.cu r. Cog.
Kev6d»u>, V. 453.]
[id]8a> (g, /ca§-) vcr; ktiS^cto) c ao.
311 c ; 2 pf. pret. KEKTjSa sorrow.]
M. KTJSopai sorrow, care ; iKvde<rdp,7)v
r., iEsch. Th. 138 ; [3 f. /ce/caSTja-o^at,
9. 353. Cp. d-Kr)d£o) -f neglect, -tjctu} 1.,
dKTjdeaa, S. 427.]
K^8vT]pi spread; see GKeMwvpu.
kiv€ w, -T]<ro), &c. , move ; J/. [& /ci-
yu/iai, A. 281.] Cog. k£co <jfo, po., [pZ.
Kiihv • 2 a. pXT-eidafiov 353 a, 2. 581.]
[kixSvw m.,] Att. Ki7X^ vw » v - ^ *&?
X^w (n 6 , n 5 , /ctx-) ^M po.; kixi]-
o-opat, [-(rw 1., ao. a. 1., m.,] 2 a. e'/«-
Xov. [Cog. /tlxp («X e " v ; n °t in.
pr. ind.), m. pt. Kixynwos 314 b.].
Kixpnpt lend ; see xpdw.
Kk&l<a (j 3 , /cAa7-, ^Aayy- n 3 ) clan-
go, scream, clang, ch. po.; K\d-y£a>
ao., 2 a. eicXayov; 2 pf. pret. KCKXa^-
70, Ven. 3. 9 JW/cA^a, B. 222, pt.
K€K\riyovTes 326 b, ^. 30, but -tDres
Bek.], 3 f. K€K\dy£o/xcu 319 b. Po. cog.
KXayydvo} + , KXayyaLvu, nXayyeu.
Kkal<o (h, /cAaF-, /fXav- f 2 , kAo- f 2 )
?yggj9, also Att. KXdw g, 309 b, if. ;
icXav<ropai, -cw 1. (-oO/xai 305 d, Ar.
Pax 1081), also Att. KXattjo-to or kXci-
ijo-o) 311 c, fKXavaa m. [2 a.? €kXS.ov,
Theoc. 14. 32] ; Kt/cXav/mi (-cr/xat 1.),
3 f. K€KXavaop.ai, iKXavad-qv f. 1.
kXoig) break, M.; kKoxth) 1., c m. 1.,
ao. a., m. 1., [nude 2 a. pt. diro-KXds
Anac. 17]; /ce/cAacr/x-cu, eKXdadrjv c f.
kXcico claudo, s/iw£ ; kXcio-co, ao. a.
c m. ; KCKXciKa, -/nai & -o-fiai 307 e,
3f. K6KXeiaop.ai, eKXdadrjv f. : [r. kXt^ici),
eKXr/Taa, &c. ;] older Att. kX^w, -rjVw.
kXc'ittco (t, KXaw-, icXeir- b) clepo,
5feaZ, c 3f. 1.; kXc\}/&) in., ao. a.; kc-
»cXo(^a 312 c, KtuXep-pjOLi, €KXi<pdr}v y
comm. 2 a. ^KXdirrjv.
kXlvw (g, /cA"^-) clino, &e^, incline,
so
k\ci
TABLES.
*ay X c
§50.
M.; kXXvw c m., ixXTva m.; kc'kXXko
1., -/mt, 304a, iKXL0 w f. [UXiv0r,v + 1,
2 a. c iK\ipr]u e f.
kXvco 7«ear, po. ; ipf. ckXvov also as
ao. ; nude 2 a. wiv. kXO0c A. 37 [k£-
kXv0l 284 e, K. 284, m. pt. KXvfievos
in-clutus ; kckXvko. Epieh.]
Kvdto scrape, M., see 120 g; Kin^crw,
&c. (ewMdrju 307 d). Cog. kpcuw,
KVlfa, KV7)0(ol., KPuLJ po.
koXovco maim; koXovctw L, ao.;
K€Ko\ov/xac or -cr/«u 1., etcoXoOOrjv or
-(rtfTp/, f. 1., 307 e.
ko(ju£w (j 1 , ko/juS-) bring; see 39 e.
Ko-n-Td) (t, /C07T-) cw£, Jf. bewail ;
KDtj/cD, f. }., ao.; c K€KO<j>a [2 pf. pL
K£KOTrJ>S IS. 60], AC^ACOyUyUCU, 3 f. C K€KO-
\fo,u.at, i. 5. 16, 2 a. eKotn\v f.
Kopevvuju (n 8 , /cope-) satiate, ch.
po., Jf.; [Kope'^w Hdt. 1. 212, m. 1.,
iro/>e'w, 305 b, 323 c, IN". 831,] ixbpeaa
[m. ; 2 pf. pt. intrans. KCKoprjibs 325 d,
c. 372,] KeKopecr/uuii [-yiuti E. I.], 3 f.
K€Koprj<ro,ucu I., enopeadyv, f. 1.: ko/o^w
& KOptVKU r. 1.
Kopvo-crto fi 2 , Kopvd-} arm, po., Jf. ;
[ao. jp£. Kopvaadpitvos T. 397 ; neicopv-
0/*&osl48b, P. 3 +.]
[Korew + fe angry, M.; Koria-cro-
p.ai ? a. 101, ao. a. m. ; 2 pf. J& Ace-
kot7)<J)s 325 d, 3>. 456.] Cog. nora'tva
po., iEsch. Th. 485.
Kpd£co (j a , /c/acry-) cry om£, pr. r. ;
Kpdijo 1., m. 1., ao. a. 1., 2 a. c expa-
yov v. 1. 14 j 2 pf. pret. Kctcpa-ya vii.
8. 15 (imv. KtKpaxdi 320 f), 3 f. Ace-
Kp6.£op.ai 319 b. Cog. KeKpdyw 1. 326 c,
/tXdfa? q. v., Acpwfar CROAK, /cXe&£"a>.
Kpcuvw (h, ac/jccp-) fulfil, po. & I.
[ac/>cucuW 135]; Kpav<o7tt., e.Kpdva, m.
]., [e/t077*tt, eKp^Tjva, 130 a, 135 ;] pf.
j). 3 s. n^Kpavrai Eur. Hipp. 1255 (or
3 p. for -av-vrai ?), €Kpdv0t\v f.
Kpep,dvvv(xi (n 8 , Kpefia-) & 1. Kpep-dco
sttspend, hang ; Kpep.d<r<i>, Att. Kpep-co
[/cpe/i6w 322 c], €Kpep:a<ra m. ; K€Kpi/j.a-
cpxii L, eicp€fid<x6r}v. Cog. Kpt/xapuxi,
-■q<jop.ai, iv. 1. 2 ; Kprjp.vr)p.i po. or 1.
Kpi^CD (j 2 , AC/)iy- or KpiK-) CREAK,
po. ; ticpi^a L, [2 a. 3 s. KpUe or Acpfye
II. 470 ;] 2 pf. ^?/J. KeKpZyores Ar. Av.
1521.
Kptvto (g, Kptv-) judge, M.; KpTvco
m., €KpTva m.; Kexplica, -/itat, etzpid-qv
f. |V/t/>f j^ti*'], 304 a. Cp. diro-KpivojMU
answer, -Kptvovptai, -Kcicpip.ai, ao. dv-
€Kplvdp.-qv & later -eKpidrjv.
Kpovw beat, M. ; Kpowro) ra. , ao.m. ;
KeKpovKa, c -/acu & c -ap.ai, k:<po(ia0r]v,
307 e. [Cog. npoaivu stamp, Z. 507.]
KpVTTTOi (t, K/W/3- & KpV(f>-) COHCCal,
hide, M.; [iter. KpiirravKov 332 e ;]
Kpwjreo m., ao., 2 a. c 2Kpv(3ov m. 1.;
K£Kpv(j>a, -/i/viai, [3 f. K€Kp{n}/o/xai Hipp.,]
eicpij(p07)v, f. 1., later 2 a. eKpixptjvT. or
€Kpv^T}u f. : 1. e /cptf/3ca & Kp6(pio.
KToojiai acquire ; KT^o-opai ao. ;
K€KTT]H(H & leSS Att. eKTT)[MU 280 b,
/kwe acquired, jrret. possess (kcktCo/jlcu,
-r/fxrjv or -yu.77»', 317 c), 3 f . KeKryaopxic
(r. &ct-), £ktt]07]v as pass., f. 1.
KTeCvti) (ll, KTCt-, KTOLV- TV, KT6V- b)
kill (usu. ep. with diro, or /rard po. );
ktcvw [/crai/e'a; m., 2. 309], enTtiva,
2 a. po.+ eKTCLvov, po. eKravm. 314 d;
2 pf. c &<Tova, later 1 pf. v eKTayKa f
e t/craica, & c CKTovvKa, pf. j9. i??/. c t ac-
Tdvdon Polyb. 7. 7, [eAcrd^rji'] i/crav-
6tjv 1. Cog. KTiwvpa. b, vi. 3. 5, or
KTelviifii n*; Aca^w q. r. As the^ass.
of KTeivo), the Att. comm. used 6vq<TK(>j.
kt^cd (z, Acri-) build,- kt^ctcj, ao.
a., ?/T. po. r.,, [2 a. jt;<. ev-KTip.ej'os, B.
501 ;] K6KTIKO, or eKTtica 1. 280 c, tAC-
TiapLCu, -a0T)v, f. 1.
KTvirc'oi r, sound, crash, ch. po., Jf. ;
€K-nhrrjaa, [2 a. €ktvttov +, 0. 75.]
kvXCvSo) o 1 , KvXivScw v, & r. or 1.
ac uXlw, ro?Z, M. ; icuXivS-qoxi) 1. , c kv\[-
aopMil., €KuXT.<ra, e m. 1.; Ace/c^Xicrpat,
eKvXi<r0T}v f., €KvXcv5ri&T]v 1. Cog. Aca-
Xu>5eh) m. ; dXLvdw or -^w, m. L, € 7^\i-
cra, c 7^X7Aca.
icuyeo) (n 10 , aci/-) Hss, po. + ; kvcto*
1., ao., (Kvin)(Top.at r., ao. a. 1.) Cp.
irpocr-Kwco) icorship, -rpto, &c. Cog.
Kveu (-Tja-w), aci/w (tAcucra), kvictku), con-
ceive.
KiJp» J». & KVpCtt (g, V, ACUyO-) Weef,
chance, po., I., or 1.; Kt>p<ra> ao. 152 d,
& Kvprjcrw ao.; K€icvpT]Ka, -/tat.
A.
XaTXava) (n 5 , Xa%-, X77X- g, Xe7x-
n 3 b) obtain by lot; X-qfjopcu [Xd^ofiai,
Hdt. 7. 144], 2 a. eXa^ [redupl. &
causative, 284 e] ; ctXiix a 281, Xc-
Xoyxa po., I., or 1. [\eX67xa0-t 328 c%
134 a], €iXrjyp.ai., kX-ffx^tiv.
§50.
Xa/i/3dVa>
VERBS.
jxao/jLat
81
Xap-pavw (n 5 , Xa/3-, X?7/3- g) take,
M. lay Iwld of; X.TJx|/ojiat, -\J/u) 1.,
2 a. tXafiov m. fredupl. 284 e] ; f&q-
<}>a 281, e'CX-qfiixat & po. XeXri/A/Juai, 3 f.
c XeXri-J<oiJ.ai\., iXrj(j>drjv f. ( c dXr}(j>dr}v
281b): [Ion. f. Xdfi^ofmi n 8 , ao. c a.
W. r., XeXaf}r)Ka v, c XeXa/m/xai, iXdfi-
<p0 V u, Hdt. 9. 108, 51, 119, 4. 79 :
Hellen. X-^axf/ofiai, c iX^fjL<pdriv, Acts
I. 8, 2.] Po. & I. cog. \dtvfiai & Xd-
£o,txcu.
Xd|iira> shine, M.; Xdp[/<i> [ c m. I.],
ao. a.; 2 pf. pret. XeXajxira, c iXdfM-
<pdr)vl., °f. 1. [Cog. Xa,u7rerdw.]
XavGdvco & cli. po. \i\Q<a (n & , g,
Xa0-) lateo, lie hid, escape notice; M.
forget, in prose usu. cp. w. iiri • Xtjo-cd
m., ao. a. po. +, m. 1., 2 a. eXadov
m. [redupl. 284 ej ; 2 pf. \4Xi\Qa, Xi-
\rja/JUiL [-aa/xai, E. 834], 3 f. XeXycro-
fiat, Eur. Ale. 198, [eX^w c f- L+.
Cog. iK-Xr)0dvw cause to forget, v. 221.]
Xdo-Kw (k 3 , XdV, cf. loquor) sound,
utter, po. + ; XaKTJ<rop,at, ao. a., la,.
ZXclkov m. [redupl. 284 e] ; 2 pf. pret.
Xe'XaKa 312 a [-r]Ka,pt. XeXdnvTa 325 e].
Po. cog. Xaicdfa ^Esch., [X^/cew.]
[Xdco, a Dor. pres. = ideXw wish;
ind. ct. XcD, Xrjs, Xfj, X&fxes, Xrjre,
Xwvti, &c, 131 c, 328 a, Ar. Lys., &c.
Cog. XiXaLo/xcu r 1 h, desire eagerly;
pret. XeXiT)/jLai, M. 106.]
Xc-yw lego, Germ, legen, lay,
gather, (Att. only in comp., esp. w.
c6t>,) M.\ \£i,<a m., ao., [nude 2 a.
iXiy^-qv 326 e, i. 335, w. X<?£o & Xe^eo
327a, I. 617, inf. c Xe"x0cu, pt. C X<?-
7/uews;] c €t'Xoxa ( c -ex« M 281, 312c,
Dem. 522. 12, c XtXey[xai, more Att.
c etXeyfmi, Th. 2. 10, iXtyOw* £ l,
usu. in Att. 2 ao. c eX&yqv c f. Some
have inferred a second stem, Xex-,
fr. the noun X4x°s, bed.
Xiyu say, tell (the same in origin
with the preceding, & borrowing, ch.
1., some of its special forms), M.\
Xe'jj-w m., ao. a.°m.; XeXe\a 1. (classic
eiprjKa, see 0^), XtXey/mi, 3 f. Xe-
Xe£o/ucu, eXtx^W £ Cog. Xoylfr/Acu
reckon.
Xelpco Hbo, ^<mr, po. €?P» e 1 , II.
II, If.; iXecxj/am.
Xtiiro) (h, Xi7r-) linquo, leave, r.
Xt/iTrdi'w
7TTO 326
d^w n 5 , JJf. remain [ipf. Aei-
326 e, Ap. Rh. 1. 45] ; Xcwj/tt m.,
ao. 1., 2 a. eXiirov m., 38 ; 2 pf. X&-
Xoiira, XtXetfj.nai, 3 f. XeXetyojxat,
eXd^d-qu f., 2 a. cXiTr^ 1., + ?
Xei\w lingo, Germ,, leeken, lick,
not in Att. prose ; Xei£<o 1., ao. ; [2 pf.
pt. XeXeixfJ-us o 1 , Hes. Th. 826],
c eXeixQw 1. Cog. Xixfuiv, Xtxv-dfa.
X&rw (b, Xa7r-) 2?eeZ, ch. po., i/. ;
c X6|/« ao.; [ c XeXe/xfuit. Epiih. 109,]
c eXdiryjv, f. 1.
Xevcrcrtt look, po. ; Xtvcrw ao. 1.
Xrj6co, XT]6dvo>, see Xavddvuy.
\r\Llop.ai plunder, A. v.; \\r\L(ro-
ficuj ao. ; XeX/gurfACU, [iXr/fodriv.] In
Att., some would contract the ij'i into
T] throughout. Cog. XrjcrTevu}.
Xiyy-; ao. Xt-y^ twanged (both,
onomatopes), 337 a, A. 125.
[XiXa£o|xai, XcXirmcu ; see Xdco.]
\HLirav<aleave,Th. 8. 17 ; seeXet7ra;.
X£(r<ro}JMui 2 , r. Xirofiai,pray, po. + ;
[eXurd/JLT)u, X. 35, 2 a. eXirbix-qv, II. 47.]
Xdw&Xovco (f 12 , XoF-) lavo, wash,
esp. the body, M. bathe (the ct. forms
from Xooj, as <?Xov, Xovfxai, Xovrai, &c,
are the more common ; pr. a. r. ) ;
[Xoticrw] m., ao. a. ?«. ; X^Xov/xcu, iXou-
drjv, -adriv 1. : [e. Xoew v, -^(rw 1., w.,
ao., f. 221, 227 ; r. Xovew.]
Xvo) [usu. u Horn. } Zoose, see 37,
48 b ; [iter. (di>a-X) aXki?e<Ticei> 332c,
136 ; 2 a. m. eXvuw 313 b, *. 80, 114 ;
pf. opt. XeXvvro or -vto <r. 238, § 317 c]
M.
fxaivw (h, /wcj>-) madden, oftener
)j.aCvo|xai 6e mud, rave; [|xavo3|j.ai.
r., Hdt. 1. 109,] efirjva [m. +] ; fie-
li.dvr\Ka. 1., -fiat 1., 2 pf. pret. (jL€|j.T]va
am mad, 2 a. efidvrji>, f. 1. Cog. ,
fjicuop.cH seeA:, po. + ; see /xdofxai.
fiavOdvu (n 5 , fiad-) learn: \iaQr\-
croficu [fiadedfiai D. 305 a], 2 a. 2/xa-
dov ; fJL€fj(.d0T]Ka, -fiat 1.
pdofxai & [xatofiai h, a*c5tVc eagerly,
feel after, po. + ; [pdo-opai c ao., X.
591] ; 2 pf pret. p.e|xova n b, am,
eager, iEsch. Th. 686, [pi. fiefm/xev,
-are, -ddai, H. 260, imv. /nefidria A.
304, pt. fie/uidos A. 40, pip. 3 p. fi.t-
fiavav B. 863, § 320 e, 325 d. The
Dor. has forms as fr. /jlw-, ch. nude
or ct., as 3 s. fiwrai, imv. /xGxro or
[ubeo (Mem. 2. 1. 20), inf. fiQxjdat.
GR. TAB.
82
fxaofxat
TABLES.
50.
(PL Crat. 406 a).] Cog. m^aw po.,
fj.vdoju.ai woo, p.alvop.at. rage, &c.
fidfvap.au fight, po.; sub. <tc. fidp-
vwp.ai, -aifj.rjv (v. I. -oip.e0a 315 c r ), -ao
0. 475, -aadai, -d/xevos ; ipf. ep.apvd-
firp>,Il. 300, Eur. Ph. 1142.
adpirra) ( t, p,apir- ) seize, po. ; pdpv}/w
ao., Ar. Eq. 197, [2 a. Zp-apirov or
Zjxcl-kov e 1 (redupl. 284e); pe'papira.]
p.d<r<r<o (i *, pay-) knead, M. ; pd£a>
c m. , ao. ; pepaya, -yp.ai, ep.dx®nv po.,
2 a. G ep.dyrfv.
pdyopau fight [pxtx^opm, A. 272,
2>t. -eioptvos or -eoij/xevos 134 a, p. 471,
X. 403] ; p.ax&rop.at ao., [-eo/xai, B.
366] Att. p.a\ovp.ai, E. & 1. p.axv<ro-
fxai ao. ; pepax^pau (-ea/xai!), ep.a-
X^cr0r)p f. 1. ; 311(1. Cf. di-mieo.
pe'Su & -&> protect, rule, po. + ; ^/.
p-eSouai care for, devise; [pcS^a-opxuu
311, I. 650.] Cog. pt|8opai q. v.
Cf. moderor, medeor, meditor.
pcGtio-Kw (k 1 , ixedv-) intoxicate,
379b, M. ; p,€0iio-a> L, ao.; fxefiedv-
cp.ai 1., i/j.e6vo-0r)v, f . 1. : ueOvw intrans.,
be intoxicated.
peuSidw (p.eida-, p.ei8ia-) smile ;
ifxeididaa [ep.eL8rjo-a O. 47].
[peipopau (h, p.ap-, p.ep- b) obtain,
1. 616; 2 pf. i!up,opa 284 d, 1. ^o/w
as 2 a. 326 b,] ctuopuai 281 (as if for
ae-ap.ap-p.ai, eeptappuxi 141, 142), PL,
[1. p.ep.6pr]Ka, -fiai & fiep.opfj.ai.]
pteXXw fo a&ow£ to, intend, delay;
p-eXXtjo-w 311, m. L, ep.i\\r)aa & ^/i^X-
X^<ra 279 a.
p^XcD concern (often irapers. ), If.
(in prose ch. cp. w. iiri or yuerd) care
/or, concern; \Ltki\<ra> [m. A. 523]
ao. a. ; [2 pf. pLtfirfKa ch. pret., B. 25,]
p.epA.T)Ka, -fiai [3 s. sync. p.e"fj.(3\eTai,
-to, 146 b, 311 d, T. 343, <i>. 516],
£p.e\r)d7)v c f. Cp. e'lrip.tXopAii & -/ite-
\toiMLi v, care for, -p.e\r)aofiai, ao. L,
-fiep.4Xrjp.ai, eirep.e\T)dTjv f. Der. /*e-
Xerdw study, practice.
pipova « eaasr ; see fidopuu.
p.€vw nianeo, reMAiN, w?a# ; pevw,
ep-eiva • pepe vrjKa 31 1 b ( 2 pf . p.£p.ova ?
Eur. Iph. A. 1495). Po. cog. /tt^w
r 1 c 2 , yEsch. Ag. 74, Lui/wdfw.]
pr)Souai devise, po., <£. 413 ; p.^j-
o-op.au, ao. ^Esch. Pr. 477 ; see p.e'dw.
p/qKoopxu ? (g u, pxtK-) bleat ; [2 a.
pt. fj.aK(hv a. 98 ; 2 pf. pret. pt. pjefirf-
kws, fx.tpxx.KvXa 325 e, 2 pip. ep.4p.rjKou
326 b.] Like onomatopes, fj.vKdop.at,
(3\r)xdop.at, (3pi>xdop.ai.
piatvw (h, puav-) stain, c M. ; uta-
vco, ep.ldva & less Att. -rjva 152 c;
pspaa\«a L, -aap.ai & 1. -afipai 304 b,
ifuavOriv f. [3 p. AudftfTp 330 b, 134,
A. 146.J
pl-yvupa (n 7 , fity-) & p-itryw 350,
misceo, Germ, mischen, mix, M.;
p.££to [m.,] ao. a., m. 1., [nude 2 a. fyuiy-
fxrjv 326 e;] pcpiyal., -ypai, 3 f. p.e-
p.l^opxtL, ep-ixOw f., 2 a. epiyrjv f.
274 b r . [Cog. p.iydi;op.ai, 6. 271.]
pcp.vr|o-Kw (r 1 k 6 , M"«-) remind (cf.
moneo), J/, re-miniscor, re-MEMBEB,
mention ; p,Wjcr«m., ao. ft., m.po. + ;
pqxvrjpcu memini, remember, pret.
268 [2 s. fiefiurjai, -vrj, 331b], sub.
&c. fiep.vG)fmi, -TTjp.r]v or -4f*V, -^fo
[/x^eo 140, 134, Hdt. 5. 105]; &c,
317 s, 3 f. p.€piv^<rop.ai, ifivr)o-drjv f.
307 e. The old M. pvdouai [remem-
ber, heed, pay attention to, ipf. 3 p.
ifjuibovTO 322 c, pt. p.vu)op,epos, 5. 106,
& by like protraction imv. p.vikeo Ap.
R. 1. 896] passed into the sense of
solicit, court, woo (in Att., cp. \v.
wp6, vii. 3. 18) ; £fivr}adp.rjv. Cog.
\pvr\o 'Kio remind ;] pLvrjarevui woo ; p.vrj-
pLovetiu) remember, -aw, ep.vrjp.ovevKa
280.
p,(<ryci) misceo, mix ; see pdyvvpu..
pvdcpai, pvT]p.ov€vco, see ixipv-qo-Kw.
poXovp.au, 1. pr. fjoXiu go; see
j3\lx)0~KU).
p.v£a), -c'ti), l. c -do), 5«c^; eptifycra.
p.v6ea>, -^(ra), &c, say, po. + ; [p.v-
Oelai, p.vd£ai, 323 e.]
ptvKdop.au (g u, p.vK-) mugio, low,
bellow, A. L; p,vK^o-op.au ao., [2 a.
Zp-vKov, E. 749 ; 2 pf. pret. p.€p.vKa + ,
S. 580.] See p.r}Kdop.ai, & pf. of
p.v« shut eyes or lips ; p.vV« L,
ao. ; p.e'p.vKa, 310 d. Late Kap.p.vu
for Kara-fxiKo 136, Mat. 13. 15.
N.
vale* (h, va-) dwell, settle, po. ;
[vdo-o-op.au, ao. a.] in.; veva<rp.ai L,
tvdadrfv. Der. vaierdw po. [vaterdwaa
or -douo-a 322 c].
vcwro-o) i, 5^^, pr. L; \tva£a, <p.
122 ;J vtvao-fjjai, Ar.,' vevay p.ai 1. +.
§50.
VERBS.
Ofiopyvvfxi
83
[v€ik&>, -ei'o) 323 c, chide ; veiKeVw,
ao. T. 59.]
V€|xw distribute, pasture, M. possess,
feed; vep.» m. (1. vepL-qaw m., ao.,
311b), tveifxa m. ; c V€Wp.T]Ka, -/Aat,
vii. 3. 21, he^driv {-idriv v. I.), f. 1.
Cog. vojfidu} n ' 2 , voixetiu, \vep.£du.]
vt'ofiai [ct. veujj.a.L 2. 136] (jro, co?;i<j
(also as fat. 305 f), po. +, Cyr. 4. 1.
11. Po. cog. viacro/uLai, f. Aao/xai ao.
c vaj>€co v, nubilo, gather clouds (cp.
w. cw) ; c v€«j)i]<rc») 1.; c v€VO<pa Ar.
ve'w (f, i/eF-) no, nato, swim, 309 b;
vcvtrovpai or vevcropai 305 d, iv. 3.
12, °h€v<ra ; c vev€VKaPl. Rep. 441c.
Cog. v-qxu ch. po.
c Wa> Hdt., heap up; vf\<r<a Suid.,
evrjaa, m. 1. ; vivrjixai, v. 4. 27, & -cr/xai
Ar. Nub. 12O3,<^07?j/&-(T077i>l., 307 e.
[Cog. ^w, c j'^w.i
[v€«, Hes. Op. 775] & WjGw q 3 , neo,
jpm; v^trco, evtjaa [m. v. 198] ; p4-
i>7}<tju.cli 1., evrjdrjv. Cog. cdai ?
vl£a> (j 4 j ^0- or w/3-), & ch. 1. vi-
irra t, wasA hands or feet, M. ; vh|/a>
m., ao. ; vivip.pi.aL, [° tv'upQnv Hipp.,]
2 f. vKprjo-ofiai 1. Lxx. Cog. ? j/t0a>,
-^w, &c, ningo, s^ow; (cf. nix, rw'vis).
votco, -^o-w, &c, think ; [i. a> for
otj 131 f.]
&
^€<i) scrape ; [e£e<ra B. 81 ;] Zijeafiai,
-crdrjv 1. Cog. £aivco, tjvu) • j-upeto shave.
Eflpalva dry ; -av»w., ao. a. 152c
[c^-^pcr^ for dva-^rjpdvy, 136, <£.
347] ; itfpacr/xai &c. 304 fy -d*^, f. 1.
O.
68d£<i> (k 5 , San-, dda/c-p, cf. ddicvio),
-ia>, -d« 1., feel a bite, bite, M.; [65a-
%-fiaop.ai 311, Hipp.], d)5a£dp,r)v 1. ;
&5ay pai.
oSoLTTope'co travel, 6SoiroU<o make a
road; -^o-cdj&c. ; dtSoiirdpTjKa&oSoi-
ireiroprjKa • a>8oir€iroiT]Ka, -p.ai & u>5o-
Troirj/xai • 283 a.
[68v- oe angry, cf. odi ; ib5vadp.r)v + ,
a. 62 ; 68_o8vcr|j.ai pret., e. 423.]
68fJpop,aip, &trag. Sopopcu lament ;
68vpo{ip.ai, d)dvp&!J.7)i> ; (bSvpdrjv 1.
o£ w (j l i od-) odoro, oleo, emit ODOR ;
6^0-0 l [^<rw Hipp.] ao., 311 ; 2 pf.
tfSttSa : [6<r5w d. js., 170 a, Theoc]
otyo> & oi'-yvvpi Ti 7 , open, very r. in
prose exc. in comp., ch. with dvd &
5td • ol'fjo), y^a [&i'£a 132, a. 436] ; $x.~
drjv. Cp. dv-oi-yw & dv-oiYvup.i, J/.
1. ; dvo^w, d^y^a, Th. 2. 2, & r.^ot£a
[d^yja po.], 279 b, 282 b, m. r. 1.;
dv€ft>X a > 2 pf. dvitpya ch. 1., dv£ipyp.ai,
Th. 2. 4, i)voiyp.ai 1. [d^a/y^ou po. |,
3 f. dve£;op,ai Hel. 5. 1. 14, ave^x^W
{sub. dvoix^co, &c. ), ijvoixQw f. 1.,
2 a. rjvoiyrjv f. 1. Even a triple aug-
ment occurs late : fytyZa, 7jve^x^V l '>
Lxx.
ot8a know, d'o-o^ai ■ see 46 & bpdw.
ol8-€«, -&v», l.-dci) & -a£va>, swell,
M. r. ; olS^o-w Hi}>p., ao. ; uStixa.
olKT€lpCi> h, j»t^/ * OlKTCpCi), $XT€tpa '
late oLKTecp-^aoj Horn. 9. 15, ao. a. £>.
olvoxoew, -^<r&), ^owr wt'?w ; 279 b.
otofiat opinor, think (nude 1 s.
oi/zcu, ipf. fa-nv, 313 e ; 2 s. otet 297 f);
olTJ<rop.ai 311c, ao. 1.; £$i]Qy\v, f. 1.:
[ofo/xcu 132, E. 644, (bl'adfiTjv (61'cr- in
Horn., a. 323), ibUd-qv. A. (pr. 1 s.
only) ofw, E. USUi 6t(a A. 59, Lac. old
Ar. Lys. 81 ; in 6'C- or wt-, usu. u]
ol(TTpd» <70ftc?, -i](ra) ; aug. 278 d.
oixojjtat go, be gone; oly'no'ojJLat
311 ; ol'x«Ka or a)\a)xa 312 d, Soph.
Aj. 896, $xv !<:a E - ? & !•» of%??/Aat or
oKe'XXb) (p, KeX-) jwi ashore, vii.
5. 12 ; Ke'Xo-co ao. po. 152 d, w/cctXo.
<5\ur8dv«, r. or 1. -a£vo> (n 4 , n 6 ,
oXttr^-), »^p, slide; 6\«r8i]cra>l., ao.
ch. 1., 2 ao. &\l<t6ov, Soph. El. 746 ;
a>\(<r0r)Ka Hipp. & 1.
6'XXvp.i (6\- 351. 4) perdo, destroy,
lose, (po. or 1. exc. in comp., ch. with
d7r6,) M. perish; 6\4<r<o 311 d, [r.
6\£u) m.] Att. 6Xa> m., wXecra, m. 1.,
2 a. m. <b\6p.7)v [pt. ov\5p.evos + 134a,
A. 2] ; c oXtGXeKci, perdidi, 2 pf. pret.
6\<a\a peril, a?>t undone, 6\u)\ea/j.cu ].,
tiKtadnv, f. 1. [Cog. 6X<*/c« ?;i. + , A.
10,^ 6X^T. 135 t'. ;.]
6|i(xpT€'a> accompany, meet, po. + ;
[ipf. du. bp.apT7jrriv 323 f. ;] ofxaprtjo-o)
ao., v. 87, [2 a. op.aprov 1.]
op.vup.1 (n 7 , o/A-, 6/xo- w) swear, G M. ;
6p.ovp.ai 152 (1. opLoaiom.), &p.ocra c m.;
6pwp.oKa, -p.ai & -07/.CU 307 e (&plu-
ap.ai 1.), <bp.'jdrjv & -a-^^ f. : [Lac. f.
opucbfieda, 323 f r .]
dpdp-yvupi (u 7 , 6p.opy-) wipe, po. + ,
84
ofiopyirufxi
TABLES.
§50.
If.; 6ji.<Spttt °m., ao. c a. m., 0. 88,
PI. Gorg. 525 a; c CbpMpxOnv.
6vivT][ii {ova- 357. 2) benefit, If.;
6vr\aru>m., ao. a.,m. 1., 2a.inf.6urjpac%
in. (hvijixriv 314 b & -dfivv, opt. ovaifxrv,
[imv. cvqao r. 68], inf. fivaadai [-vcOai
I., pt. -7jjJLei>os j3. 33 ;] tivrjixai 1., -drjp.
[6vo[«xt {6vo-) scorn, e. & I. ; pr. &
ipf. nude, cf. 8L8op.ai 45 ; 6v6o-o|iai
ao. ; c d)voa6r}v. Fr. 6v-, pr. otiveade
(134 a) a 241, & 1 a. ibvaro P. 25,
if these forms are genuine.]
ottuio) or oir-Do) marry ; 6iriJo-o> •
Gnrvafxai : according to some, -vi- be-
fore a vowel, -v- before a consonant.
opoUtf (6pa-) see, If., ipf. e<J)p(aov)<ov
279 b, [bplw I., -6a) E., ipf. wpeop or
wpaw I., 48 e, 322 ;] IwpaKa & esp. in
comedy lopaica, -fxai (later than cD/x-
fiai, Isoc. Antid.), eupddnp f. 1.: (fr.
6ir- xj f. Sij/ofuu (2 s. o^ei 297 f), ao.
r. ; 2 pf. 6iru3Tra po. & I. +, &pp.ai,
iEsch. Pr. 998, w007ji/ f. : (fr. Fi8- x,
cf. video) 2 a. eldov, on. ch. po. or I.,
279 c, sua. tte, tdu/jiai, &c. [imv. !5e,
i8ov, or as exclam. tde, I8cv); 2 pf.
ot8a (I have seen, hence) / know
(46, 320, k below) ; Mid. (ch. po.)
c'i8op.ai h, seem, resemble, 1 a. eurd-
/Mfv, T. 81. [Cog. Sprifu je. 335 b;
m. 2 s. 0/37701 314 b, £. 343 : cao-opai
i 3 , w. 81.]
In the pret. ot8a, the stem has
four forms: (1) 18-; io~/jl€p [18-p.ep
148 b, A. 124], teOiy fa™ [b. Ittu
Ay. Ach. 911], &c, 320 a [also to
shorten other forms, as below, 134]:
(2) el8- h ; [sub. etSofiep, eiSere, 326 d,]
eldevai [td-ptev, t8p.evcu, 333 c], elSws
[Idvia, A. 608], rj8eu> [w. double aug.
2 s. yeLSys X. 280, 3 s. rjeidrj 1. 206,
or -Set, or l.-5e ?, 3 p. rjeiSeLP or rjdeiu
330 b, also (l5-<rai>) Zo-av v. 170], f.
c%(ro|Mu: (3) 018- 312 b; olSa, olSas
or olaOa (oZSas very r. in Att., Eur.
Ale. 780 ; the comic poets sometimes
blend the two forms into dtadas, also
Eur. Ion 999 ?): (4) clSe- v ; (elSe-u)
eloG) [I8eu g. 235], dMt)v, 320 c ; f.
eidrjau}, A. 546, Isoc. 11 d [id770-tD
Theoc. 3. 37], ao. 1. or 1. In the ind.
plur., the shorter forms were more
comm. in the pf., & the longer in the
pip. (also 1. rjdeicrap Mk. 14. 40).
The defects of olda are ch. supplied
by yiyvdxTKU. [Cog. tad fit D. (per-
haps suggested by 3 p. fodai) Pind.
P. 4. 441, tads, tadri 328 a, Theoc.
15. 146, &c] With the ind. of ol8a f
cf. the corresponding Sanskrit 1 s.
vid-a, 2 vettha, 3 veda ; 1 p. vid-ma,
2 vida, 3 vidus.
ope'-yw [r. dpeypv/min' 7 , X. 37] stretch
out, beach (cf. rego, Germ, recken,
reichen), If. reach for, desire, {A.
ch. po. or 1. ;) opt'lu m., ao. ; [w/3€7-
Atat Hipp., dpwpeypuai, II. 834,] cipex-
At?? as mid. See 430 b. Cog. optyva-
o/.icu, 6pex6£c*> po.
cpi£o> j 1 [ou/u'fw i.] bound; see 39.
cpvijp.i (n 7 , op-) ?wse, po., If.
arise ; 3p<ra> ao. 152 d, [f. m. cpovpai,
2 ao. &popov 284 e,] 2 ao. m. upop-nv
i&pro, imv. 6pao, -eo, -ev, inf. dpOai,
&c. 326 e, 327); 2 pf. 6'pcopa as mid.,
% 78, 2 pip. wpwpeiv 281 d, iEsch.
Ag. 653: [fr. ope- v, ipf. optovro B.
398, pf. dpibpep.ai, sub. opdipyrai N.
271.] Cog., ch. po., 6pu, opivu, 6po-
6vpu), opouu) ' Lat. orior.
cpv<ro-ft) (i 1 ,^^- or dpvy- d 2 ) cZ?Vy j.-
6pv|ft), ao. o., -wi. 1. or 1., 2 a. &pvyov r.;
c cpccpvxct (1- t^p^xa,) -yp.ai, (plf. o/jw/)-
or Cbpwp- 281 d, ) ibptixdw c ^> 2 a. 1.
ibpvxw or -7771', f.
co-(|)patvo|xat & 1. 6a<ppdop.ai (n 6 ,
u, 6<r<pp-) perceive by smell, A. 1. ;
6<r<|>pT t <rop,ai, ao. 1., 2 a. &<r<ppbp.yv
[6<T(f>paPTo ? 327 b, Hdt.]; <b<r<ppav9nv.
[ovrdw wound, + ; ovTr-orft) 1., ao.,
2 a. oS-rap m. 314 d, A. 525, X. 40 ;
ovTTjO-qv, 9. 537.] Cog. ot'Tafw po.
6c|>€t\a> (h, i<pe\-) enve, ought, [c<pe\-
Xa> m. E. 171 a, 0. 462 ;] c^iX^crto
ao. 311b, 2 a. &<pe\ov (po. & 1. t'0e-
Xoi'284b, c) expressing wish, (I ought)
O that, utinam, (1. as a particle, Gal.
5. 12 ;) a><|>€iXT]Ka, -Qiyv. Cog. [6<f>e'X-
Xw+ increase, ao. ojo<. 3 s. 6<pe\\eie
171a, 325 c r , II. 651,] &
6<j>Xio-Kdva> (k 2 n 4 , 60X-) owe, m-
cwr; o^Xtjo-w 311, ao. r., 2 a. &<p\ov,
v. 8. 1 ; w(} > k T l Ka > -fiat: 1. pr. c'^Xw.
n.
iratl<a (j, Traid-,iraiy-, 349 a) 5joor^;
irai|ovp.ai 305 d, Symp. 9. 2 (1. -£o/mi
& -£w), eiraicra (-^a 1.) ; ireiraiKa (-xa
1.), -cr/wit (-7/uot 1.), -X e W L
50.
mfnrXrjixi
85
iraio) strike, M. ; iratora) & po. irat-
fao} 311, eirataa m. ; ir€iraiKa & 1.
ire-rraiTiKa, c 7r^7r aid ptai 1., iiraiadrjv.
See tvwtu.
ira\t\\o-y€» repeat; [pip. iiraXiX-
\6yoto 284 b, Hdt. 1. 118.]
iraWto (1, 7ra\-) shake, ch. po., Jf. ;
e7T7?\a [m. 1., 2 a. 3 s. nude 7rd\To
326 e, 0. 645, jw5. aii-irewahuv 284e;]
ireiraX/xat, 2 a. c iird\r)i> 1.
ird- acquire ; ird<ro(iat ao. po. ;
•n-^irctjuu pret. possess, iii. 3. 18, 3 f.
Teirdcrofjuii r. Cf. potior.
Tra.pavop.ew transgress; -T]<ra>, 7ra-
pev&pt-rjaa 282 c, & Trapyivoptr^aa 279 a
(as if cp. of 7rapd & dro^w); irapa-
vevop/T]Ka (1. Trapr)v5/u.T]Ka) , -fiat, &e.
Trapoive'oj ac£ £Ae drunkard ; eirapip-
yrjaa 282 c ; ir€irap(pvT]Ka, -piai 1., &c.
irdo-o-ft) i 2 , sprinkle; iracna, c ao.
«., m. 1. ; irtira<rp.at 1., kira<jQr\v, c f. 1.
ird(TX<«> (k 3 350, 7ra0-, 7re^- n 3 b)
patior, suffer; Trcto-op-ai 156, (ao. j?£.
po. 7r>jcras ?, ) 2 a. ewadov ; 2 pf. ire-
irovOa, Th. 6. 11, [7r^7ro<rxa D. ; 2 p.
■n-tirocrde 320 f, SP\ 53, ^. ireiradvi-Q p.
555, § 325 e.]
[iraTc'ojiai (v, irar-) eat, taste, Hdt.
2. 37 ;] 7n£rop.ai po. r., ao. po., I.,
or 1., y. 9, Soph. Ant. 202 ; [pip.
ireirdapnjv ft. 642]. Cf. pascor.
iravto stojO, repress, M. cease, PAUSE,
34; iravo-ft) m., ao. ; ire'iravKa, -//.at,
3 f. TreiraijiTOfiai Soph. Ant. 91, eVatf-
6r)v (-<t6t]u 1. or v. I.), f. r., 2 a. 1.
iwd w Of., Rev. 14. 13.
ireCOio (h, 7rt0-) persuade, M. be-
lieve, obey, 38, 39 ; ireCo-w m., ao. a.,
m. 1., [7re7rt^a-w 284 f., 311, & as
mid. Trid-fivb), <p. 369, ao. + A. 398,]
2 a. eiridov m. po. [Triiridov m. 284 f,
^. 40] ; irc-jreiKa, 2 pf. pret. ireTroida
trust, 38. 8, Th. 2. 42, nude imv. r.
irtireurdi 320, iEsch. Eum. 599, [2 pip.
1 p. £-rr£iridp.ev B. 341,] iriireiapiai,
iireiadrju f. Cog. iriGrevw ; Lat. fido.
irnvdw hunger, 7reii/(dei)fj 120 g;
-rjcTio (1. -crcrw) ao. ; ireircCvnKa.
ircipw (h, 7rap-, 7rep- b) pierce, po.,
T., or 1. ; irepcU?, iweipa, A. 465 ; 7r^-
irappmt, 2 a. €irdpy)v, Hdt. 4. 94.
ir€KT€(o (t 2 , 7reK-)pecto,co?7i5,sAear,
po., [irekw h, <r. 316; iref-eS D. 325b,
tire^a 1., m. ;] <?7re'x<V, Ar. Nub. 1356.
ircXd^ft) (z, 7re\a-), & po. 7re\da>,
TreXtitdu q, & (TrXeatf- c 51 ) TrXrftfa;,
bring or come wear, J/, po. ; ircXdcrw,
ireXw 305 b, eirtXaaa iv. 2. 3, [2 a. wi.
£jr\ifip.rjv 314 b, 9. 63;] TriirX-qpai po.,
po. iTreXdadrju & eirXddrjv. Cog. ttAtj-
o-idfa, [iri\i>da n 3 b, viXvapiai, T. 94.]
ire'Xtt 6e, po. + , J/. ; [ipf. 3 s. eirXe
c 4 , M. 11, m. 2 s. ZirXeo, -eu, 3 s.
eVXero, X. 281, 116, pt. irXopievos.]
ircjAirco 5enf/, 41 ; M. cp. in classic
prose, i. 1. 2 ; irep-ij/ft), ir€irop.<}>a, &c.
ireirapeiv, ireirpwTai ; see iropifa.
TrrtpSofJicu (b, wapd-) pedo, A. r. ;
c irap8T]0-0|xai 311, 2 a. c eTrapdov;
ire'iropSa ; Ar.
irep9ci> (b, irapd-) destroy, ravage,
po. +, [nude pr. inf. p. (irepO-adat,
irep-adat, 151, 158) irepdai II. 708 ;]
ir4p<r<a m., ao. a., [2 a. evpadov c w.
c 6 , t. 40.] Usu. iropOcw v 2 , -^<rw.
ir€pvrj|j.i sell, po. ; see TrnrpdcrKW.
ir€<r<ro) (i 3 , 7re7r-), & later 7r^7rra> t,
coquo, cooA;, digest, M. ; it€\|k«>, ao. a.,
M. ?; ireirep.pa.1, eir^cpdrjv f.
irerdvvvpA (n 8 ,7rera-) pando,5p7ro:oT,
expand, (in Att. ch. cp., esp. w. dvd-)
ircTaircD, c tt£T(S 305 b, eiriraaa, m. 1. ;
c ir6Tr6TaKal., -a fiat, usu. irtTTTap.a.1 c 4 ,
Ar. Nub. 343, ktrerdcrQ^v. Cog. [7r£-
rv?7/it n 8 b, A. 392, ttituu),] 1. c 7rerda/.
ir€Top.ai (i. 5. 3) & po. or 1. irira.-
yCiCU U, & tTTTa.IJ.CU r 3 c 2 , ,/Z?/ ; Tr€Ttj<ro-
p»at 311, usu. imj<rop.at c 4 , 2 a. a.
eirTrjv po. or 1., m. iirT6/j.rjv & ^7rrd-
/a^ • €Tr€Td<T0r]v 1. Po. cog. iroTa-
op.ai, Ar. Av. 251 [nude 2 s. ttottj
Sap. 20, ^. TTorrip.ei'os, Theoc. 29. 30,
§ 335 b], TroTTjirofiai ?, ireTrorrjptat, X.
222, ^TTOT-t]Qr\v • {jrwrdofxat, Trerdopiat ?]
•JT€v0op,ai inquire ; see ■jrwddvop.at.
infj"yvvp.i (n 7 , 7ra7-, irrry- g) pango,
fasten, fix, M. {opt. Try)yvvTo 316 e) ;
ir»]£(i> w., ao., [2 a. m. 3 s. KaT-^ir^KTo
326 e, A. 378 ;] c ir€irt)xa 1., 2 pf.
■jr^Trrrya pret. am fixed, T. 135, -7/iat
1., eirrjxOriv, usu. 2 a. eirdyrjv f . : 1.
7r?7<r<ra;.
ifip.irX'qfit (7rXa-, Trt-pL-TrXa r 1 e 2 )
pleo, t ^W, (esp. cp. w. 6>,j J/.; irXip
<r», c m. 1., ao., 2 a. po. iirXripcrji' 314 b
(o/>^. c irXryx.y)v Ar. Ach. 236, ?'mv.
c 7r\?}(ro, &c. ); c ireTX'qKa PI. Apol.
23 e, -a-fjtat or -/xai 307 e, 3 f. ttcttX^-
(roptat 1., €7rXrj<r8r)u f. In the com-
pounds of irip.7rX7]pu & irtpur pt)p,i, the
86
7rip'ir\T)fii
TABLES.
irplacrdai
§50.
p. is usu. omitted after -pm- : i/u,-
7ri7r\r)/xi, imv. ep-irlirXv Ar. Av. 1310
[£fnrlir\ri6i 335 d r , <P. 311, ^. ^tti-
7rXets Hipp, as fr. 7r\f-] ; so 7ri7rXds
171, ^Esch. Ch. 360; but ipf. ev-
€Trlp.irXt]v. Cog. [■mp.TrXew I. 322 a,
iri.p,7rXdvop.ai, I. 679,] irXrjpou • TrXrjdw
be full (2 pf. 7r<?7r\7?0a, Theoc. 22. 38),
whence irXiqQiLXj) & 7rXr}d6v(>).
TrijjnrpT]|xt (r 1 e, 7173a-, see Tri/xirXTj/xi)
burn, esp. cp. w. ep ; irptjo-tt c m.,
ao. a., c m. 1., [tirpeae 134, 130b,
Hes. Th. 856 ;] c ir€Trpi]ica, -p.ai &
-(r/xai 307 e, [3 f. c ireirpr)<jopai, Hdt.
6. 9,] lirp-qad-qv, f. 1. Cog. c irlp-wpu ?,
[ c 7i7>7?0w, I. 589.]
TrivvcrKti), irtirvvpuai, see 7n^w.
irtvw (n 2 , 7TO-, 7rt- b 2 ) poto, bibo,
drink; mopcu (usu. 7 ; Hellen. 7ri'e-
cai 331), later -movpai, 305 f, a, 2 a.
tir-tcw (imc. irie & po. 7ri0i Ar. Vesp.
1489, [r. inf. inhai Hipp.,] 313 c r ) ;
ireirwKa, ireirop.aL 310 d, eTrodrjv c f.
Causal, iroTifa &
iriirio-KOD r 1 k 1 , grt've to drink, po.
or 1. ; m<r&>, [ao. a. Hipp., ft». 1. ; iiri-
(rdrjv 1.]
mirpdo-Kft) 1. (r 1 k, -rrepa-, vpa- c 2 ),
& ire'pvrjp.i n 3 po., sell ; [ircpaoro), -dw
321s, <P. 454, ao.;] irc'irpaKa, -fiat
[ireTre prjfiiuos <P. 58], 3 f. irewpd(Top.ai,
vii. 1. 36, iirpad-qv, f. 1.: in Att., cli.
supplied in pres. by iruXe'w, & in fut.
& aor. by d7ro5c£cro/x.cu & aTe86p.7]v.
irarroo (r 1 c 2 , irer-, softened ire<x-,
cf. 143b, 7rre- c 7 ) fall; ireo-ovpai
305 d [1. -opal], 2 a. €ire<rov [eirerov
D. 169 b, iTeaa m. 1., Rev. 1. 17;
ir^irrwKa 312 c, ir^irrvKa 1., 2 pf. pt.
po. [7re7TTec6s or -?7c6s 325 d] ireirrus
320 d, Soph. Aj. 828. Po. cog. tt'itvw
or -eu Eur. Sup. 285.
irXd£w (j 3 , 7rXa77-) cause to wan-
der, po. or 1. + , M. irXd^op-at wan-
der ; TrXd'y£opai, eirXay^a, m. 1. ;
eirXdyxdv v > a - 2. Usu. irXavdu.
irXdo-crci) shape, M. ; c irXdo-to, m.
1., ao. ii. 6. 26 ; ircirXaKa 1. , -(rp.ai,
i-n-Xdadw, PI. Rep. 377 b, c f. 1.
irXeKo) (b 1 , 7r\a/c-) plecto, plico,
plait, twine, M. po. or 1. ; irXif a> m.
1., ao.; [ c ir€irXoxa or c -€\a 312c,
Hipp.] iriirXey pxu, iirXe'xO 7 ) 1 ' f., 2 a.
eirX6.Ki)v (v. I. -€Ki)v), f. 1.
irXc'w (f 1 , TrXeF-, 7rXeu- f 2 ) sail,
42 g, 309 b ; irXevo-opcu & irXevcov-
Mcu305d,v. 7. 8, 1. 10, -<rwl., eTrXeucra ;
TrcirXtVKa, -ayxcu, -oBr\v, f. 1. : [r. &
po. ttXcoo), irXu)<ro[j.cu, ireirXwua, &c,
114, Hdt. 8. 10, 5; 2a. eVXa>»/ 313b,
c y. 15, pt. eiri-irXibs Z. 291.] Der.
irXmfa, Th. 1. 13, irXo'ifopai 1.
irXTjco-ft) (i 1 , irXay-, irXrfy- g) strike
(pr. ch. cp. w. Ik or e7ri), M. ; irXr^w,
m. 1., ao., [2 a. iriirXtryov m., ewe"-
irXrjyov, 284 e] ; 2pf. irfirXijYci, vi. 1.
5, -ypui, 3 f. ireTrX^opxtL, Ar. Eq.
272, tirXrixd-nv v., 2 a. eirXyfy-qv (e£-
€TrXdyT]v, KaT-eirXdy-qv) f. Cog. c«-
TrX-fiyvv/xai, Th. 4. 125. See ttjittu.
•irXova) (g, ttXuj'-) was/?, clothes (cf.
Xotfw, wfiw); irXiivca m., twXvva m.\
tre'irXvp.ai, eirXvOyv (\.-vv0t]v)L, 304a.
Trve'io (f 1 , irveY-, irvev- f 2 , ttw-,
142 r ) breathe, blow, 309 b; irvcv-
<rop.ai & rrvevaov/xai 305 d, Ar. Ran.
1221, -<rw 1.,. eirvevaa ; c ireTrvevKa,
-apML or -p-ai 1. [TreTrw/iai pret. ^t?i<
wise, ft. 377, tww. Tr^Trj'i'o 331 b,
Theog. 29, &c], c eirvetad^v 1., c f. 1.
Cp. dva-irvtw recover breath [2 a. 3 s.
&p.-iruvep, 136, Q. Sm. 9. 470, imv.
&lx-Trvve X. 222, nude 2 a. m. &fi-
irvvTO 314 b, w. 349 ; 1 a. p. dpsrvvv-
Qy\v n 1 , E. 697]. Cog. iroLirvtiu puf,
379 c r j; irivvo-Kco or irLvtiaau r 1 e 1 ,
?7iaA:e r^we, ch. B., iEsch.; [1 a. or ipf.
3 s. iirivvaaev S. 249 ;] iwivvaOrji' 1.
irviyoi (g, TTviy-) choke, v. 7. 25,
esp. cp. w. dirb • c irvi|«?n., ao. a.;
irtirviypai, Ar. Vesp. 511, 3 f . c 7re-
irvit.op.ai 1., €Tn>ix&V v ^-> 2 a. eirviyr.v f.
iroOe'w desidero, desire, miss, M. r. ;
iro0Tior&) m., eTTodrjcra k -€<ra 310 d ;
TT€iro9i]Ka 1., -pua.1 1., eiroO-qdrjv 1.
•7ro1.vdop.a1 punish ; -d<rop.ai 310 a.
ttovco), -tjo-ft) (-^(rw 1. + ), labor.
Tropica (z 2 , 7TO/3-) supply, 3L; iro-
pio-co, -tw, m., eiropiaa in., 2 a. po.
€iropov[Treiropeiv, v. I. ireTrapeiv, 284 e,
Pind. P. 2. 105 ;] ircTropiKa, -cr/xat
(3 s. iriirpwrcu it is fated, S. 329, p^.
ireirpupAvos, Mem. 2. 1. 33), eiropl-
crdrjv f. Cog. iroptjvvu).
iropirda) fasten ; cj. w. a or tj, 310.
TTpfio-o-a) (i 1 , 7r/5a7-) do [l.vp-rjcraio],
M. exact; Trpd|<o m., ao. ; ireirpaxa,
2 pf. iriirpaya have fared, -ypai, 3 f.
Treirpd&pai., Ar. Av. 847, tTrpdxdv v f-
I Trptao-Qat &wy; see 45 i & <hveop.au
§ 50. irpcxfrrjTevco
VERBS.
(TKebaUVVfll
87
Trpo<f>T]T€v<i>, -cvcrw, prophesy ; aug.
iirpocp- or irpoe<p-, 282 c, N. T., Lxx.
irrdpyvfjiai (n 7 , irrap-) sneeze, iii.
2. 9, A.\.'j Hirrdpa, usu. 2 a. eVrd-
pov, p. 541, [m. Hipp.]; eTrrdprjU.
irri]cr(r<a (i 1 , irra-, tttclk- o, ttttjk-
g) cotoer, crouch ; imfjfja) 1., ao., 2 a.
c evTaKOf, Much. Eum. 252 [3 d. /caret -
TTTTjTrju 314 c, 9. 136]; ^TTTT]xa, -^a
1., [2 pf. pt. ireirTTjdjs 325 d, ft. 354,
cf. 7rfrrTC<>.] Cog. iTTcbcrcru), A. 371,
[7rTW<r/cdfa>, A. 372.]
irrftrcrco i 2 , pinso, pound ; ^irriaa,
Hdt. 2. 92 ; eVrccr/wu, -<j6t)v 1.
TTTiJpofMH fear, 1. + ; 2 a. iirTvprjv.
•nrvo-crco (i 1 , 7rri;x- or irrvy- d 2 )
fold, M.; c irru£a> c ?;i., ao.; HirTvyp-ac,
Hier. 2. 4, (or TreVr- 280 c,) e7TTjJ-
X^j/, [2 a. c £irTiL>y7}v Hipp.]
irruo) (u) spuo, QP&; irrtfcrco m.,
ao. a., Soph. Ant. 653 ; iirrvKO. 1.,
-o-fl^, f. 1., [2 a. iirTOrjv Hipp.]
7ruv0dvop.ai (n 5 , irvd-, irevd- h),
po. TevOop-ai, inquire, hear; irevcro-
aai (r. -ovjxaL 305 d), 2 a. £wv0op.r]i>
[■n-eirvd- 284 e, Z. 50] ; ir£mKrp.ai.
P, § 146, 93 d.
palva (h, pav-, pad-) sprinkle, po.
& I. + ; pavoi, eppdua [imv. pdtrvare
v. 150], °m. 1.; c dppayKQ. Lxx., -ao-fiai
[3 p. eppddarai, -to, 329 a], -dudrjv.
paTTO) (t, /3<xc/>-) stitch; c pd\|/co,
tppa\pa m.; tppafifiac, Dem. 1268. 2,
2 a. ippdf-qv, Eur. Bac. 243, c f. 1.
p€£a> (j 2 , pe7- c 5 , see epSw) cfo,
po. +; pego), eppe^a PL Leg. 642 c,
po. epefa 171, Eur. And. 838 ; [ippt-
X0i)v, I. 250.]
pew (f 1, peF-, pet/- f 2 , /Su- 142 r , cf.
Lat. ruo) flow; pevcropai, -era/ 1.,
eppevaa, but more Att. p-u^j<rop,ai,
ippv-qv ( 2 f. & a. p., or 2 f. m. & nude
2 a. a.); ippvrpca 311 c, Isoc. 159 d.
pTJ-yvup-i (n 7 , Fpay-, pay- 141, ^777-
g) BREAK, M.; pt||a) [???.], eppv^a m.\
c ^PP T lX a ^» ^ p*« tppuya am broken,
312c, eppriy p.ai v., -x®W r -> 2 a. ep-
pd77?i' f. : po. & 1. p-fjo-o-w beat. Cog.
pacrcru) & dpdcrau}, -£o>, smite ; frango.
pi/yew v, shudder, po. + ; |&Cyirjo-«
ao. ; 2 pf. pret. epplya P. 175. Cog.
pfyoto, -c6cru>, shiver (inf. pvydv or
piyodv 324 b); (ppta-aw q. v.; frigeo.
piirrw & piirreeo (t 12 , pi(f>-) throw;
[iter. pliTTao-Kov 332 e;] pu{/w ao.,
[2 a. eppicpov 1. ;] ^pplcpa, -ippuzi [inf.
pepicpOat 159 e r ], 3 f. eppl-J/opuxi 1.,
-l<pdT}s c f., 2 a. -tc^, f. 1. Cog. /k-
7rrd^w 379 b, epeiiroj q. v.
ptiofxcu (ch. U) = £pvop.ai draw to
one's self, protect (also in Att., yet r.
in prose) ; pv<rop.cu, Th. 5. 63, ao.;
eppvaQr\v 1. Nude ipf. 3 s. tppvro
Soph. O. T. 1352, [3 p. pvaro 329 a,
2. 515, pr. inf. pvcrdat O. 141 ; iter.
2 s. puo-nev 332, 323 c, fi. 730.]
pwvvvp.i (n 8 , po-) strengthen ; °pc&crco
1., ao. ; tppup.ai (imv.ippwao farewell,
Cyr. 4. 5. 33), ipp^advu, Th. 4. 72, f. 1.
2.
craipco (h, cap-) sweep; earjpa,
Soph. Ant. 409 ; 2 pf. pret. or&nipa
grin, At. Pax 620. Cog. aapbu 1.
<raX.iri£tt (j 3 , o-a\iriyy-) sound a
trumpet; eadXirty^a 571 b ; late <ra\-
m<r&) (-i<S), 1 Cor. 15, 52, ao., c ce-
crd\Ticrp.ai & c -iyp.ac, 349 a.
[(mow & o-oto, sarc ; see o~ibfa.
a-acrcr<a i, pack; [ c <rd<r» ao.Hipp.,]
taatja 349 a, (Ec. 19. 11 ; o-£<rayp.ai,
lb., eadxQnv 1.
<rdw & <ri\Q{a sift, I. & 1. ; Icr^cra, &c.
<rp€vvvp.i (n 8 , <r/3e-) quench, M. be
quenched, go out; cr$i<r<a, ao. a. m.,
f. 7^. c o-p-tjcrofiaL 310 d, (as mid., 2 a.
eapyv 45 h, 313 d r , I. 471, & pf.
c &rpTjKa), ecr{3eo-pLai, -crdrjv, f. 1.
crefo), -cra>, WcreiKa, &c, shake, 44.
<rcvop.ai & <rdop.ai, Ar. Vesp. 458,
(<reF-, crew- f 2 , av- 142 r , ere- f !, (ro-
ll 4,) msA, hasten, po. (3 s. aeurai
326 e); 2 a.m. eVi^i/ 313b; i<rvdT)v + .
[A . crevctf 1. , drive, urge ; 1 ao. ecr-
aeva m. 306a, 171 (1. c -eucra); pret.
eo-0-vp.ai 284 d, 2 a. 3 s. d7r-ecrerotfd ?
Hel. 1. 1. 23, Lac. for direo-vv.]
o-tjitco (g, cra7r-) ro#, trans.; <r^j4' w
c ao. ; 2 pf. intrans. <r€<rT]ira, B. 135,
c iv. 5. 12, -p-fxai., eo-qepdrjv 1., 2 a.
^crdTTT?^, Hdt. 3. 6Q, f. 1.
crtvo(Aca harm; iii. 4. 16; [a-iv/j-
crop.ai 311, Hipp., €0-~ivdix7}v, Id.]
a-Kdirrco (t, <r/cac/)-) c?i^; crs<d\};ft)
ao. ; c ?crKatpa, Isoc. 298 a, -p-fiai,
-<t>dt)v\., 2 a. eo-Kdcp-qv, c f. 1-
o*Ke8dvvvp.k (n 8 , o*/ce5a-) scalier (as
88
o-Kebdvpvfii
TABLES.
Tapaacra)
50.
sub., SiaaKeddppvai, -vrai, 316 c) ;
o-KcSdo-w, -w, 305 b, iaicedaaa c m.;
eaKedaa/xai, -a0r,p, f. 1. Cog., ch. po.
or L, (XKi5v7},u.i n 3 b, [i<e8di>pvpu e 1 ,
Kidvy)!Ai + , aKeddu), tceddw, /ce5cuo/tcu.]
o-kcXXo) (b 1 1, <rica\-) dry, parch,
ch. po. or L, J/, become dry ; otkcXu
1. [eauvXa 4r. 191] ; as mid., 2 ao.
c e<TK\r)v c 6 (r. Ar. Vesp. 160) & pf.
<i<rkkr\Ka, (so f. to. cTcX^cro/iai 1.)
o-K€TTTO|xai t, specio, TO'eio; <tk€\|/o-
jxaiao. ; t'<rK€|xjj.eu, 3 f . ecr/c^o/tat, PL
Eep. 392 c, eaKe<p0r)v r., 2 a. c ecr^-
Tn/i', c f. 1. In Att., the pr. & ipf.
were usu. supplied by <tkoit&d v 2 , of
which the other tenses were later.
Cog. (TKOirevw, [07co7rtd£a;.]
o-fxaw smear, 120 g : Za/xyaa to.
crjx«x w (cf- smoke) bum, po. or 1.;
c Zaixv^a, I. 653; c Zap.vyp.ai, C -X0V V >
Theoc. 8. 90, 2 a. c eap.iyt]p d 2 .
<rdc|JLai hasten, po. ; see aeijop.ai.
<nrda> draw, -<r«, go-jraica, &c, 307.
<nreip« (b 1 h, airap-) spargo, scat-
ter, sozy ; o-ircpw, eaireipa [m. 1.];
ga-irapxa 1., -/o/tat, Ages. 1. 30, -pdrjp'i,
2 a. icrirdpriv, Th. 2. 27, f. 1.
o-irev8<*> ^o«r a libation, M. make
a treaty ; <nrtC<r(a m. 156, ao. p. 55 ;
c >f(nr€iKci L, (iaT€vd-p,ai, eairepap-aL
148, 156) c"Wettr/tat, Th. 4. 16, -tr^l.
crirevSo) k <nrov8d£<i>, hasten, 114b.
o-rd^to (j 2 , <rra7-) drop ; errata) 1.,
ao.; [ c &rra7/tat, /3. 271,] o -x0W 2 a.
c eardyrjp 1.
<TT€iPfc) or <rr£{3a> £rcae£ ; <TT€foJ/t«> 1. ,
c ao., Soph. ; eo-r i/lfy/tai 311, Id. Aj. 874.
frrd\<a h (or ctIx^) walk, po. or
I.; [ c lcrreti;a, 5. 277, 2 a. earixop LT.
258. Cog. CTixdo/xai, B. 92, yL 1.]
orc'XXw (b 1 1, araX-) fit out, send,
J\L; o-Te\w,?».L, tareCXam.; &rra\Ka,
-Xyuai, iii. 2. 7, -Xdypr., 2 a. eardX-qp c f.
<TT€p"yw foye; <rr€p£<«>, w. 1., ao. a.;
[2 pf. go-rop-ya^ Hdt. 7. 104, c<rre/>-
yficu Emped.,] earipxOrjp 1.
O-Tcp€C0 & CTT6pl<rK<l) (v, k 2 , OTep-)
deprive ; orep'/jo-tt m., kartp-qaa [-eaa
v. 262]; eo-T€pT]Ka, -/tat, -Orjp f., 2 a.
])0. eareprjp f., Eur. Ale. 200, 622.
Also artpG) ?, 0-T^pop.ai. be deprived of,
leant, (f. arepw, arepovpat, unless
these are always ct. pr. )
[tTTiv[t.ai stand to, 326 e; see tarrip.L.']
OT<Jpvvp.i (n 7 , urop-y (Trope- v)
stcrno, strew, ch. po., I., or L, M.
(also 1. <TTopfri>vp.ai); oropeo-w, Att.
c (TTopw, earopeaa to,, £. 50 ; iarope-
cr/tat 1., -adrjp. Also <rTp<uvvu|Xi (arpo-
c 5 ); o-Tp«<rw, w. L, ( c crr/)wwi;(rw r.
Luc.,) earpwaa, to. 1. ; &rrpa>Ka L,
-/tat, Th. 2. 34, «#l, f. 1.
o-Tp€«j><«) ( b l , arpa(p- ) fcettsl, Item, If. ;
<rTpe\j/cD to., ao. ; c &TTpo(|>al., tar pap.-
/tat, iv. 7. 15, taTpe<pdr}v r. in Att.,
E. 40, [-d<p0r]v D. I.,] 2 a. iarpdtprjp
f., iii. 5. 1. Cog. arpw(pdw & (TTpo(peu)
ch. po., 355 a ; arpe^Xow, rpeirw.
CTTvycti) (v, (TTiry-) /tafc, po., I., or
1. ; o-Ti>yfj<rop.ai will be hateful, Soph.
O. T. 672 ; iarvyqaa, Eur. Tro. 705,
[earvfa, X. 502, 2 a. tarvyop k. 113;]
c(TTvyr)Ka, -/tat 1., -^t?J', Eur. Ale. 465.
<rvpi£« & a-vpCrrta \-L(r8ot) D. 170 a]
j9tpe, whistle, cf. siisurro ; <rupi|co to.
1., ao. a., & <rvpi<r<a (-iu>) ao. 1., 349 a.
<rdp« q, drag, M.; <rvpa> L, tavpa,
c iEsch. Pr. 1065, to, 1.; c a-£<rvpKa 1.,
c -/)/tat L, 2 a. eavprjv, c f. 1.
<r<j>d£a) & <r<j>dTTO) (349 i, j, <r<pay-)
slay ; <r()>d|a>, ao. a., c to. r. i. 8. 29;
t<r<payp.ai, X. 45, -x^'7*' r- Hdt. 5. 5,
2 a. €ff(f>dy V p f., Eur. Ph. 933 : 1. pip.
iacpdneip Dio C. See (pa-.
<r<J>dXXtt (1, <r0a\-) fallo^ trip, de-
ceive ; <r4>a\<3 m., eaipT]\a, 2 a. ea(pa-
\op m. 1. or ? ; ^<r<)>aX.Ka L, -Xp.ac,
-Xdyp 1. r., 2 a. ea(pdXriP l, Th. 6. 80.
<r(o£(i> (z, crao-, aw- c 1 )
J/.
(rw<ru to., ao.; o-co-wKa, Lsoc. 410 c,
-/tat, oftener -ap.ai, iaibdwp f. [Ep.
o-adto, -cocro), A. 83, &c. ; pr. z'wtv. 2 s.
& ipf. 3 s. (crdoe, ct. trdoi;, aw, 322 c)
adw p. 230, II. 363, sub. 2 s. (caofls,
caots, afc, 322 c) (r^ys, 3 s. adw, I.
681, 424 (v. 1. aorjs, aoy, as fr. aow):
ct. <r«w t. 430.]
T.
[ra-, ray- o, TAKE, seize, cf. tango,
reipw : imv. 2 s. (roe, cf. 120 g) rr\
g. 219 + , 2 p. r^re Sophr. 100 ; 2 a.
y& reraywp 284 e, A. 591.]
Tapatrcro) (i 1 , rapax-) disturb;
Tapd3|a)TO., ao. a. ; rcrapaxa 1. [pret.
intrans. re'rpijx 01 c 7 (-r/>aa-, ct. -rpv-),
H. 346], TerdpaypLCu, irapdxOw f-:
0pdo-<ro)C 7 J {rpaa,6pd, 159 h r ),e^pa^a,
iEsch. Pr. 628, PI. Parm. 130d, -xQw-
VERBS.
§50.
Tdo-o-o), -£», TeVaya, CEc. 4. 5, &c,
arrange, 39 ; rerdxarat, <?TeTdxaT<>,
T€rd?oA«it, Th. 3. 13, 5. 6, 71, c Tayif-
aofxxtL r. 1.
T€%ira (d 1 , da<f>-, 312a) oe amazed,
2 pf. pret., po., i., or 1., £ 168;
2 a. traipov d 1 , tt. 12. Cf. 0d7rrw.
Tcivo) (h, Ttt-, rev- b 1 n) ten do,
sfrefeA, 31.; Tev» c m., Ireawm.; t^-
TaKa 304 a, -fj.at, X. 19, ^rd^j/ f.
[Cog. ravv<a+, -t/<rw, &c, nude pr.
3 hJ't&vvtcli, P. 390, 393 ; nraiva,
B. 390, ao. pt. Ttr^vas. See to.-.]
TeXe'co, -€o-w, -w, TtT^XcKa, PL Apol.
20 a, &e., finish, 42 g. Cog. Te\«r6c«;,
reXetow, TeXeurdw, & probably
t&\« (b 1 1, TaX-) perform, raise,
(po., exe. in comp., ch. w. dvd, ev, or
I**,) M.; C T€\«, c m. 1., &eiXa c w.;
c T6TaXjca 1. ; ^TiraKfuu, Cyr. 5. 5. 3 :
po. reklQoi arise, be, Eur. And. 783.
tc'uvw (n, Ta/i-, rep.- b) cz^, |Yd-
^w e. i. D.j Hdt. 2. 65,] M.; T€p.»
c w., 2 a. Zrafiov m., Y. 94, more Att.
erefiov m., Th. 6. 7 ; T*r|Mjica 308,
-p,cu, 3 f. T6TfJLr}aoixai, It\i.t\Qt)v f. [Cog.
Tp.^Y», -£«, ao. a., m. 1., 2 a. 5t-
trpayov rj. 276 ; 2 a. p. ir^dynv II.
374, -ifrip' 1. Heyne & Bekker read
Ttyei, as pr., N. 707.]
Tcpirw (b, rapw-) please, satisfy,
M. ; T^p\|f«, m. po., ao. a. [m. v., 2 a.
m. eTapirofirjv, TeTapir6p.r)v 284 e, T.
19 ;] trtpepd-qv, Mem. 2. 1. 24, f. 1.,
\iTap<pdr}v £ 99, 2 a. irdpiryv, S. 47,
sit&. I p. Tpairelofjieu c 6 , 323 c, 326 d,
T. 441.]
[repcraCvo) (n 6 , Tep-, Tepcr- o) torreo,
dry (pr. 1.), Jf. & T€p<rop.ai 77. 124 ;
T€po-a> 1. 152 d, ao. a. m. 1., iripayva
n. 529 ; 2 &. p. iripo-rjv £ 98.]
[T6Tp.ov & 2t€T|iov, 2 a. as tt. rep.-
find, 284 e, a. 218, Hes. Th. 610.]
c T€Tpaiva> (r 1 n' 2 , rpa-), 1. Tirpdio
& c TLTpr}p.t., terebro, &orc ; Tp^j<ra> 1.,
ao. a., P«. L, [ c rerpa^aj Hdt. 3. 12,
eWrp^a, e. 247,] °m. Ar. Th. 18,
er^rpdua 1., 152 c; rirp-qpLai, krpi]dr\v
& -dvQt\v 1. : TLTpalvw & Terprjvu 1. or ?.
Cog. TOpt(j), TlTpd)<TK(A), q. V.
T6i»xw (h, tux- j twc- d 2 ) prepare,
make, po. + , Jf . ; T€v|a> m., ao., [2 a.
t£tvkov m. 284 e ; T6T€v\a, as p. p..
423, -yp,ai + , j3. 63, 3 f. rere^o/iat,
M. 345, iretixOyv I. +»] Ttrvypai, £.
Tp«7T<0
89
9, Eur. El. 457, Mx^W- c °g- TlTl5 -
(Tko; r 1 k 3 po., Tiryxd^w, Wktw ■ [pf.
m/. Terevxycrdcu to be armed, x- 104.]
t-^ko) (g, ra/c-) melt, thaw ; ttj|o>
[?n,. Hipp.], eryfia [m. 1.]; 2 pf.
intrans. rirr\Ka, iv. 5. 15 ; rirvyp-at
1., £tt}x&W r -» 2 a. irdKrjv, f. 1.
[ri€- grieve ; 2 pf. p£. reTirj&s 325 d,
I. 13, pf. ^?. 2 d. Terirjcrdop, pt. ren-
Tjfxiuos, O. 447, 437.]
t£9t](jli (r 1 , de-) y put, Gfyrw, rtQtiKa,
Mem. 4. 4. 19, &c., 45 : late TiGe'to,
Tid-/)<Top.cu,eT[dri3ra. Forthe^ass. (not
found in Horn.), Keipuu is often used.
riK.ru (b 2 1, t€k-) beget, bring forth,
pr. m. po.; ri^o^ax (po. t<?£&>, ao. r.;
for T€K€?a0at see 305 a), 2 a. ere/cov,
m. po. A. 59 ; r^TOKa Ven. 5. 13,
TtreypLOLi (or -oypjxi ?) 1., €T^x^V v > f- U
Tip.d(o, -•fjo-a), &c., honor, 42 : rert-
p.7j(rofmL Lys. 189. 11 ; for f. j?., usu.
Tip.r}(rop.ai. Cog. ria>, tijacj, rt/xw^w.
tIvco (?e.; n 1 , Tt-) jja?/, expiate,
M., ch. po. or I., take payment, pun-
ish ; Ti<ra> w., ao.; T^Tixa, c -<rp,at,
c €Ticr0r}^: also J/. Tivvp.a.1 (less cor-
rectly rivvvpiai) po., i., or 1., T. 260,
(^4. 1.) Po. Tio) (t) £>«?/ Ao?ior to,
m.r. ; [tio-ci), ao. + ; pt. TiripAvos v. 28.]
titp<oo-k<d (r 1 k tt , r/90-) wound [r.
rpciw, 0. 293] ; Tpwo-to [m. ], ao. a. ;
T^rpoDxa 1., -p.ai, ii. 5. 33, 3 f. rer/)u»-
cro/iat 1., irpiidrjv f. Cog. roptco.
r\6.(a (c 5 , TaX-, raka- u, cf. Lat.
tul-i) endure, dare, ch. po., pr. very
1.; T\^<rop.ai (1. tXi)<tw & raXdcrw),
erXijaa 1. [eTaXacrora, P. 166, ??i. 1.],
2 a. ItXtjv 313 b, A. 94, Cyr. 3. 1. 2 ;
TeVX^Ka Ar. PI. 280 [2 pf. 1 p. rt-
r\ap,ev, opt. &c. rerXalrfv, T^rXaflt,
rerXdvai, rerXrjcbs, 2 pip. 1 p. ir^rXa-
p.ev, 320 e, 325 d, v. 311, 18, 23, L
373.] Cog. ToXudu, [otX^oj or -ei'/w 1.]
[Tp^7<a, -|«, cut, po. ; see t^w.]
[ c Tope'co (v, rop-) pierce, pr. r.,
Horn. Merc. 283 ; c TopTJ<ra> r., ao.,
2 a. eTopov, A. 236 ; reTdpr/pcu 1.;]
redupl. f. TtTopiqcrio 284 g. Cog. to-
pevco, TiTpuxTKia, TeTpaivw.
Tpeirco (b 1 , rpatr-) turn [i. rpdirui],
M.\ Tp4x|/wm., ao., 2 a. [eTpa-rrov, E.
187] »».; TtTpojpa, Ar. Nub. 858,
later Tirpa<pa Dinarch. (cf. rptcpu),
T<?Tpap.p.aL, 3 f. ° TeTpd\pop,<ti, irpiepd-qv
[i. irpdcpdrjv], 2 a. irpdirrp usu. as
90
T/367TO)
TABLES.
(jiepco
50.
m., f. 1. Tptirto has the six aorists,
as, less surely or less simply, d77<?X-
Xw & 7rXr)crcra>. Po. cog. Tpuirdw, rpo-
Treu), 355 a, Tpairtw.
Tpe<f>ci> (d 1 , dpacp-, Opecp- b) nour-
ish [d. r/)d0o;], M.\ (rptyoiv 296b;)
6pe\j/o> m., ao., [2 a. erpa<pov usu.
interns. 7- 28 ;] Tt?Tpo<j>a \j/. 237, 1.
rtrpaipa Polyb. (cf. rptvu)), redpaju,-
/j.ai (redpdcpdai, PI. Gorg. 525 a, v. I.
rerp-), idpt<pdr)v Eur. Hec. 351, oft-
ener 2 a. erpd^-rjv, f. 1.
Tpe'x» fd 1 , &pex; dpafi- x) rww ;
8pap.ovp.at (r. 5pap.u> & 0p<?£a;, comic
c dpi£op.ai Ar. ), efy>e£a po. r., 2 a.
tdpap.ov ; c ScSpap/rpca 311, 2 pf. po.
c 8t5po/u.a, e. 412, c 8e5pdpi.rjp.ac. Cog.
r/)oxdl*w, vii. 3. 46, [rpwxaw, ctyo/mw.]
Tp€a> /ear, yfce ; irpeaa, i. 9. 6.
Cog. terreo ; rpeiua [rpofitto v 2 +] tre-
mo, TREMBLE.
Tptp» g,rub, Tp£\j/a>, c T£rpu}>a Ar.
Lys. 952, rtTpiixp.ai [3 p. rerpi^aTai
300 c, Hdt. 2. 93], &c, 38, 39. Cog.
reipu) tero ; t/ji/w, rpvx^o ' tribulo.
rpC^o) (j 2 , 773*7-) twitter, gibber,
po., 1., or 1., w. 5 ; &y>t£a 1.; 2 pf.
pret. Terpi-ya, B. 314. An onoma-
tope, like rpv^w murmur.
rpiayw (b 3 h, rpay-) gnaw, eat raw
food ; Tpw£op.<u, Symp. 4. 8, [ c erpio-
|a, ] 2 a. erpayov • c Tirptoypuit.
rvy\dv(o (n 5 , ri»x-, Tfy X- n ) #«p-
joe?i, Ai£; rcv|op.ai, ao. 1. r., [£t6-
XV<?a 311. A. 106,] 2 a. ervxov ; tc-
TvxTjKa, a-. 88, Th. 1. 32, later rirev-
%a, c T^Tevy/jLcu 1., c erevx^W 1. Cog.
retfx w q. v. ; [d. 1 a. troaoa, Pind.]
tvttto) (t, TU7T-) strike, M. plangor,
mourn; tuttt^o-o) 311, Ar. PI. 21,
m. r., [rvxpu 1.,] trvipa, N. 529, m.,
later eTVTTTV&a Aristl., 2 a. ervirov r.
Eur. Ion 767 [redupl. 284 e] ; tctv-
irrT|Ka 1., TtTvfj.pt.ai, N. 782, Hdt. 3.
64, TeTVtTTTIp.ai 1., iTVirT-qdT}V & €T1J<p0r)P
1., 2 a. ^Trr/i/ po. or 1., O. 421, f.?
Of the verbs signifying to strike, the
Att. use of tutttw is especially in the
pres. system ; of Trardcrcrio, in the
aor. act. ; & of 7r\^<ro-o>, in the perf.
pass. & compound systems ; while
7rcu'w has a freer range of the tenses :
IIard£cu r) ir\r)yrjvcu, to strike or be
struck, Aristl. Rh. 1. 15. Ttirrei . .,
Kal . . wardfrs Lys. 136. 22.
TtJtfxo (d J g, 6v(p-) fumigate, smoke;
Tt'efcpa r., rtdvixtxai., 2 a. c eT$<pr}v c f.
[vXdw ululo, howl, bark, ir. 9 :]
v\d(TKU po., uXdircrwl., vXanTto}, u. 13,
Ven. 3. 5, [yXa/cdw & vXaKTidco 1.]
iiTr-i<rxv€op.ai, undertake, promise,
A. r. 1. ; vrro-a-XTJo-op,ai, 2 a. for-
eaxofi-qv ; vTr-e<rxTjp.ai, vir-ecFxtdnv r. :
po. or 1. VTrlvxop^au. See £xw.
"iw ram, 571 d, e ; "vera [m. as p.
Hdt. 2. 14], Sera; c 5o>iai 307 d, Ven.
9. 5, &T0r/»', Hdt. 3. 10.
[<j>a-, <{>6v- b 1 n, kill, + ; Z<pa<ra 1.,
2 a. Zire<pvov c 3 , 284 e; Trtcpapiai, E.
531, -cr/Acu 1., 3 f. ire<pr)<Top.at., O. 140:
1. trt<pvw, whence some accent 2 a.
pt. as pres., irtcbvwv.] Cog. a<pdfa.
<ba.70p.a1, ?<j>aYov, see eadiu) eat.
cpafvw h, <bavco, Tr€<pa7Ka c Dinarch.,
&c, show, shine, M. appear, 40 ; as
v. 1. 2 a. Z<pavov m. ? ; 2 a. p. iter.
(pdveaxe 332 g. Po. cog. [<6aaVw, 7.
2,] f. ((paevw) <pavG) ? Ar. Eq. 300 ;
[<6dw, pf. p. ir£(pa.Tai ?, 3 f. TrecprjcreTcu
P. 155, cf. <pa-;] <p*tdw, Soph. El.
824 ; irt<pav(XKO}, X. 442, ^Esch. Ag. 23.
Cog. <py)p,i say, Sans, bhami 271 d r .
<pe(8opai (h, <p<.8-) spare ; (beCo-opaL
ao., [Tre(j)i5ri(T0pLai,2a,.Tre<pi86pu)v,28ii';
ir€<pl8r)pi.aL ]., 311,] ir^cpcicpai 1.
fyipfitafeed, nourish, M. po. + , PI.
Criti. 115 a ; [2 pip. iire<p6p/3ei Horn.
Merc. 105.] Cog. ?,
<pe'pci> fero, bear, bring, M., [imv.
2 p. (pipre 326 e :] fr. 01- x, f. oi'crw
m., ao. a. r., m.?, [m?/. di'a-orcrai, ct.
dpcpo-cu Hdt. 1. 157, imv. olcre 327 a ;]
f. p. oladr/aofxai. : fr. «v€K-x, cveyK- n 3 ,
1 a. yveyica m., 306 a, 2 a. rjveynov
(preferred in inf. k pt.; but scarcely
used in ind. exc. 1 s. po., or in imv.
exc. 2 s., where 1 a. is r. : 'E7W tfvey-
kov. "Hj^/ois <ri5 / Ar. Th. 742), m.
not in ind. & r. Soph. O. C. 470 ; pf.
Ivfpyoxa 281c, 312 c, Isoc. 128 d,
iwr)V€yp.ai, t/^x^ 7 ? 1 ' f-> i y - 7. 12 : [fr.
4v€iK-, E. & I. 1 a. rjjteiKd m., 2 a.
tjvukov r. <p. 178 ; ° tvqvei.yp.ai, Hdt.
8. 37, z-qvelxGnv.] Cog. cpop^w v' 2 ,
50.
<pepa>
VERBS.
cppvyc
91
-770-w (1. -icrw), kc. [pr. inf. (poprjuai
335 b, (pop-q/xevai 333 e, 0. 310] ; <l>pi<a
(po. 2 a. imv. 0/oe's) ; [ c eveiKOfj.a.1.]
tytvyat (h, <pvy-) fugio, flee; <pev-
£op.cu & -ovfxai 305 d, -^w 1., ao. 1.,
[1. f. (pvyodfiai 305 a], 2 a. Zcpvyov ;
2 pf. ire'tpev-ya, a. 12, [pt. 7re<f>vyp.ei'os
0. 18, J £(peux9w 1- U^g. (pvyydfw
jEsch. Pr. 513 ; [as fr. 0i;fda>, 2 pf.
_p£. Trecpv^jTes 4>. 6, Tre<pv£7)u)s\., 1 a.
^?. cpvfadeb l.J
<f>T||xC (0a-), 45 u, 27l r s, & <pd<rK»,
fa-ri, (a) say, affirm (this stronger
sense belonging esp. to ^riV/co, & the
fut., aor., & mid. fr. 0a-) ; ipf. £0a-
otkoj' & (usu. as aor.) ecpr)i> ; if. pr.
[2 p. <pd<r9e k. 562, fmi). <fedo ir. 168,
<pacr6w v. 100, M%£ (p&adcu +, Msch.
Per. 700,] jrf. cj>duevos, Hel. 1. 6. 3,
ipf. tyafi-qv eh. po. or ]., A. 43 ;
<j)Vj(rco (ojrf. 1. r.), tyrjcra (imv. want-
ing) ; pf. p. [3 s. irtyaTai Ap. Rh.
2. 500, ] %***. 3 s. TT€<p&(r6w PI. Tim.
72 e, c i(pdeT)p Aristl. Int. 9. 9 : (b)
fr. (Tep- x, cf. Lat. verhum) Ip- f,
j&e- c 8 [pr. a. (Is. only) ctpw h, r. 7,
m. 1., ipf. m. t. 542 ;] f. cp<3, c m. 1.;
ei!pT]Ka 281, -/uai, 3 f. eiprj<ro}iai Th.
6. 34, tpp-qd-qv, -td-qv v., [l. elpidrjv,]
sub. p7)du>,kc, Hdt. 3. 9, f. pnO-qaop-ai :
(c) fr. (Fe7r-, Fei7r-h) clir-, 1 a. elira 306 a
(mrt*. 2 s., & imv. exc. 2 s., esp. used ;
opt, inf., k pt. r. in Att.), °»t. 1. or
1., oftener (exc. as above) 2 a. elirov
(etwu), -oifu, -^, -etv, -&v), G m. ? 1.,
[w. syllabic aug., tFenrov, Zenrov K.
445, teiwa Pind. N. 9. 78.] (d) Cog.
(pari^u k (pvfilfa ch. po. ; <paivw slww,
q. v. ; [eLpew, Hes. Th. 38 ;] epuT&u
ask, q. v. ; [^ttw 1. r. ; eair- o, in pr.
or 2 a. imv. 2 p. to-were B. 484, pr.
TO. Zairoucu 1. ;] eviirw q. v.
e. The forms with <j> omitted (45 u),
TjfJiC [3 s. ?jjl Sap. 48], rjv, ^, are used
for greater vivacity or the metre-
Some refer them to a distinct root,
akin to the Lat. aio. The subject
follows, if expressed : fju 5' eyd, quoth
1, Ar. Eq. 634 ; f, 5' 6s § 518 f; %
he spake, A. 219 ; irou, -fjpu, iral, wat,
boy! I say, boy! boy! Ar. Nub. 1145.
(f) The pr. 2 s. is usu. written 0r?s,
as if ct. fr. 0ae*s, 120 g, [0V0a 297 b,
£. 149 ; 3 s. <t>7j fr. 0aei or <f>-q<rl, 103 c,
Anac. 41 ; D. 0aW, 3 p. (pavrl, 328.]
(g) #do-K<tf is most used in the pt.,
to supply the place of 0ds (45 u).
Horn, has only the ipf., X. 100. The
pr. ind. is esp. rare, (h) The familiar
forms from ep- k elir- have associate
presents, not only as above, but also
in X^yw, dyopeuu (ch. in comp. ), &c.
)dvw ( d E. ; n
?a- ) anticipate,
M. 1.; <}>8dora>, Cyr. 5. 4. 38, oftener
<|>0rf|<ropai 310 d, Th. 8. 12, e00acra,
Th. 1. 33, 2 a. itpd-qp 313 b, X. 58,
Th. 4. 4, [to. pt. <pddfjL€i>os E. 119 ;]
&p0aKa, €(p6dadt]v 1.
cj>0€tpw (h, (pdap-, <f>6ep- b) corrupt,
destroy, esp. cp. w. 5td, J/. ; <(>0ep<D
TO., e00etpa, [f. c <p9epau), X. 625, ao.
1., 152 d, c (pdapiop.aL 1. ;] &j>0apKa,
c Eur. Med. 226, 2 pf. ty0opa c lb.
349, €<f>8apfjLcu, 2 a. e^ddpvv f. Cog.,
<{>0ivtt n 1 [7 E., & r. 00£a>, /3. 368],
decay, consume (usu. intrans. exc. in
fut. & ao.), ch. po., M.; <J>0io-co [t E.,
7)1-., \ ao. a. [m. 1., 2 a. c £(j>didovU\\
e. 110 v. ^.,] 2 a. ?». i<pdtur}u 313 b,
Eur. Ale. 414, s*j&. &c. [(^diojuai,
c (peip.r)v 316 c, 3 s. (pdiadw, <pdiadai,]
<j)6ipL€vos • &j>0tKa 1., -fiat, v. 340, -Qr\v.
Cog. (pdtvvdw po., (pdiveu 1., 00^w ?
(piXeo) (v, </uX-), -^jo-a), Tr€<p£XT]Ka,
&c, love, 42: [^1X77/^ 335 b, 0t'Xei-
<xda 297 b, <pi\7ifjLei>at 333 e, X. 265 ;
1 a. m. e<pl.\d,u.7)v 152, E. 61.]
<|>\a8-, 2 a. HcfSKab'oy burst, iEsch.
(pXe-yw flagro, bum ; <j>X^w, c m. 1.,
ao. a. iEsch. Pr. 582 ; irtyXeypxit. 1.,
tyXtyOw, 2 a. c i<p\iyT]v c f. 1. Der.
(pXeyedoj po., P. 738, (jAoyifa.
(popee
-■tfj<ro>, 7re(p6(3T]Ka, &c,
ferrz/7/, J/. [& 0e^o«ai E. 532] /car.
<j>pdi;w (j 1 , 4>pa5-) tell, M.; <j>pd<r«
[/».], ao., [2 a. iri<Ppa5ov, ewefipadov,
284 e ;] ire'tppaKa Isoc. 101 a, -ap.ai
[ c ire4>pab^vos 148 b, Hes. Op. 653],
i<ppd<T07]v. [Cog. r. <ppa8dfa, Pind.]
cppdcro-a> & r. <j>pa7vvp.i (i, n 7 ,
0P a 7-] /^wc«, if. (ppdyvvtxai ; JH,
c (j>pd|op.at 1., <!(ppa£a m.; 2 pf. c ir^-
{ppd^a (or -Ka) 1., -yp-ai, Th. 1. 82,
ecpodxQWi ° 1 '- !•» 2 a. itppdyrju 1., f. 1.:
sometimes written 0ap for 0pa, 145.
<ppio-o-c«) (i, <ppu<-) shudder; <j>p££<o
1., ao. a., »». 1.; 2 pf. pret. irecpp'iKa,
A. 383* [pt. TrecpplKovras 326b.] Cog.
(F/H7-, 139, 141) piy4oj q. v.^
4>pO-ya> g, frigo, roas< ; [eppv^co] ao. ;
92
(ppvya
TABLES.
Xpaa
§50.
irtypvyfiai, Th. 6. 22, icpptxQw 1.,
ecppvyyv I. or 1. : 1. (ppfoaw. Cog.
<J>w7vv|ii n 7 , 1. [(fxhyw d., 0c£fw i. ;
Z(pu£a & -onto. Hipp. ;J &c.
<pvXda-<r« (i, <pv\a.K-), -£«, c ire$v-
Xaxa, &c, guard, M. beware; [pr.
a. imv. 2 p. irpo-KpvXaxde 326 e ;] 2 pf.
7re0i/\a/ca 1. Lxx.
cpopco g, mix, knead, M. ; £0i~pa 1.
\t<pbpcra 152 d, <r. 21, m. l.J; ire<pvp-
/iat, [3 f. irecpvpaofAcu 319, J e<pvp6yv,
yEsch. Ag. 732, 2 a. ^p^ c f. 1.
Cog. (pvpaw, -dcrw • \<pof.\)vu} k -vacria.]
$vo> (v) produce, M. grow ; §ij<ro>
7)1., ao. a., 2 ao. t<pvv (<p6oj, <pvr]v 316c,
<pvvcu, <pvs, cf. £5£Si' 45 h) was born or
made, became, hence aw; tt^vko.
pret., f«w (by nature), Th. 4. 61,
\eir£<pvKoi> 326 b, 2 pf. 3 p. irecptaai
A. 484, sub. c we(f>uoi), pt. ~re<pvd>$, e.
477,] c i<t>tdr]i> 1. r., 2 a. icpfyv, f. 1.
Cog. (piirevb), -etata, & 07tvw, -daw,
plant; Lat. fui.
<j>c&-yvvfu [-«y«, -£a>, J : see <ppfryw.
Vy&V* (j T , %a5-, /ca5- d 2 ) drive back,
M. ch. E., cedo, retreat (so y*. iv. 1.
16) ; [K€Ka8-fjo-a> 284 f, xdcro^at, c ex a "
oa, Pind. N. 10. 129, m. +, A. 535,
2 a. K^Kadov, m. A. 497.]
Xaivw gwpe, 1. A nth. ; see %ct(TKa>.
Xafpto (h, x a P~) rejoice, M.\ \ox-
pi\cr<a 311 b, Ar. PI. 64, ao. 1., x a "
povp.cu 1. Lxx., [/cex<x/)77crw, -aopuii,
284 f, 1 a. ixvpo-M^ S. 270, 2 a.
e'xapbp.yv 1-, Kexapop. ?7i'284e, A. 256;]
KeyapiiKa, Hdt. 3. 42, [^. Kexapyds
325d, H. 312, j Kex6.p-qp.ai k Ke"x a PP- aL
po., Eur. Iph. A. 200, El. 1077, i x &-
prjv, f. l. Cog. x a P^°p- ai gratify-
[\avBdva (n 5 , x a ^-, X ai ^- n 3 , X fI/ 5-
b) contain, +; (x^S-co^ucti 156) x € ^-
o-ofiai, <r. 17, 2 a. %xaoov, A. 24 ; 2 pf.
l>ret. K^xavSa, 5. 96.] Cog.?,
Xao-Kw (k 3 , x a,/ -)» l.X at ' J/a, h, hisco,
gripe; c xavovfi.ai [xv^opMi ?], 2 a.
exavov, A. 182 ; 2 pf. pret. Kex^va
Ar. Av. 264. Der. x«<™dfr> 379 b.
X^t w (j' X e ^") caco, comic + ; \e-
oro€|xai 305 d, c x^op.aL r., ex ecra m ->
2 a. exevov r. 327 a ; 2 pf. c KcxoSa,
K^X e<r A tcu 5 Ar.
X€« (f 1 , x^F-, x«w- f 2 , X*>* 142 ')
^owr, ch. cp. w. €k, iv, civ, &c, M.,
309 b; f. C X€« or x*w 305 f, b, m.,
[xei^w^. 222,] 1 a. £x ta »*. 306, [ exeva
m., H. 86, 63, 2 a. ra. exvp-w 313b,
A. 526 ;] c Kc'xvKa 1., -ficu, ex^dyv f.
(1. -iQt]v f.) : also x^> 1- {x*™, &c),
X^w 1., Acts 9. 22, x e ^ w (l )r -) P°->
ch. 1., (exevaa). Cog. x ow ( 1- v -
XXXBdwu, luxuriate, po. orl.; 2]if.
c K€xXl8a. [Cog. K^x-^apret-j Pind.]
XoXdto, -wo-<tf, &c, anger ; M. x°~
Xoofiai [xwojiai c 21 , T. 29, x { ^ ff0 P M -h
ao. A. 64] be angry ; pret. Kex<SXw/xat,
a. 69, 3 f. Kexo\iixropaL >K 543.
X<5« & later x^ vv ^P l ll8 » ^<wp t^>/
X«crci), ao. a. [m. ].] ; c Ktx wKa j Dem.
1279. 20, -tr/iat, e X 6<r6r)v f. ; Cyr. 7.
3. 11, 16, 17. Cog. x<*> q- v.
[Xpai<rp.€o> v, avert, help, pr. 1. r. ;
Xpaurp^|o-ft>, T. 296, ao. 2. 62, 2 a.
expo.arp.ov, S. 66; not in Od.] Cog.,
'Xpd« (xp^o-o), &c, 310 a, 307 e ;
Xpdeis XPV* 120g, I. or 1. xpfc Hdt.
4. 155, &c. ) to supply need, —
a.) The need of another, by lend-
ing ; M., one's own need, by borrow-
ing : KixpT]p.i r 1 , m. Kixpo.p.0.1 • [\pi\-
o-a>, Hdt. 3. 58,] ao. a. m.; Kt\pr\Ka.
1., c -/wtt, Dem. 817. 2 : 1. klxp^w.
b. ) The need of one who consults
an oracle, by answering ; M. one's
own need, by consulting an oracle :
Xpaw, »». xP&°P- ai ' XP^ <rw m -> ao -
a. ; K€XpT)KaL, -ap.ai or -/xat, Hdt. 7.
141, expTjo-Qriv. Po. cog. x/ 07 ?^' Eur.
c. ) One's own need, by using what
is required : M. xpdop.ai • xp^t^op.ai
ao. ; Ki\pr\p.ax, Hdt. 1. 42, ixprjardyv.
d. Impers. xp^i (f° r XP& eL or nude
XP'n°~h c ^ 0^/** 0» ^ supplies need,
i. e. it is useful or necessary, it must
or OM»7i< to be; sub. xPV-> Pt> (XP € -
b 1 ) XP € ' L7 1 ^sch. Pr. 213, mi/. Xi 07 ?*' 04
nude, & po. XPW Eur - Hec. 260, |h5.
neut. & indecl. \xP& 0V -> ct - 120 i) xpe-
^ Th. 6. 18 ; ipf. 3 s. ixpw 163 b,
oftener XPW 284 c ; XP^ 61 Hdt. 7. 8.
(e) Cp. dir<5-XpT] [i. dwoxpa Hdt. 9.
79], it fully supplies need, it suffices
or contents ; inf. airo-xpyv Hem. 52.
13, ipf. air-e'xPV ', diro-xp^o-ci, aT-
e'XPV ~ € - [So I. a.T-exp^To, Kara-xp^,
-Xp-h^ei, eK-xpv^h Hdt. 8. 14, 1. 164,
3. 137.] (f) These or corresponding
forms are also used personally : [Meg.
§ 51. xP™
yprjcrOa you must, 297 b ;] &tt6-xpv,
-xpfaovai, Ar. Av. 1603, PL 484,
[i^XPV^ Hdt. 8. 70 ;] arro-xpao/xai
content one's self, Hdt. 1. 37.
g. Forms fr. xP°-« sometimes agree
in sense w. its cog. XPT)£ W [ E - *« XPV-
tfa, -tow, 132, p. 121, I. xpyfoKopc-h
Hdt. 3. 117] need, wish, 414 c : as,
Xprj Soph. Ant. 887 ; po. pret. KexPV
fia\ ne:d, wish, Eur. Iph. A. 382, a.
13, 3 f . Kexpv™/J.ai, Theoc. 16. 73.
Xfiio anoint, M.\ Xfi°" w w -> ao ->
K€\pt<o- 1- Lxx., -itrpuii or -l^ai 307 e,
Cyr. 7. 5. 22, ixp'wdw, f- 1- Cog.,
yp^co & 1. xpuvvdp.i (z, n 8 , X/ 00 ")
fcwe/t, co£or ; e'xpwcra 1. ; c Ke'xpcoxa 1.,
K^xpuvp-a-h Eur. Med. 497, kxp^Q^W,
f. 1. Cog. X/ 30 '^ P°-> Xpurifa, XP a ' L -
vco • (xP aF ~) X^ ^ or X/ 5a ^ w 9^ az ^-
[x«op,ai, 6e angry ; see x°^oop:ai. ]
V.
\j/dco, c \Jnfjcra>, &c, r?<&, 120 g.
Cog. xprix 00 ru0 > favu touch, \f/d\\o}
twitch, \}/ri\a.<pa.u) feel after.
VERBS.
au/eo/zai
93
\|/OX« breathe, cool ; \|/v£a> ao. ; ire -
\|nix,a 1. 280 c, eipvy/xat, -xdw f->
Ven. 5. 3, 2 a. £\j/uxw or -T 7 ?" d 2 ,
Ar. Nub. 151, f. 1. Mat. 24. 12.
n.
a>8iv« g, fo in travail, A. 269 ;
late w&ivco ao., & (hdw-qao) 311, Lxx.,
ao. a. m. ^?.
a>0€« (v, ci0-) pztsA, Jf. ; ipf. idi-
deov m. 279 b (cod- e., i., L, & r. in
Att.) ; aia-ft) c m., & po. (bO-qau), m. 1.,
tWa |». [Sera m. E. I., E. 19], tidrjaa
c m. L; c &oica L, -cyicu, Cyr. 7. 1. 36,
-<r0?7z' f., (r. or 1. &<rp.ai, &<iQr\v.) Der.
(ba-TL^o/xai justle, Ar. Ach. 42.
cov60|iai, v. 3. 7, 6w?/ (pr. r. as^ass.
PL Phajdo 69 b) ; ipf. iwedfirjv 279 b
{<hv- i., L, & r. in Att.); a>vfj«rop.ax
vii. 2. 38, i(ai>r}crdjj.r}p or d/vrjadpL-qv ch.
1. ; Iwvnp-ai as mic?. & jras.% Lys. 108.
26, 211. 1, -6-rjvdspass. : 2 a. fr. irpia-
x, eTrpid,u7)u 45 i, a. 430 ; 2 s. irrpiu},
vpiacro, irpiu), Ar. Vesp. 1440, Ach.
870, 34. Cog. iriwpd<TK0i) sell.
51. Remarks, a. In using the preceding List, it is important to
observe carefully the punctuation, as showing with what words the ab-
breviations, references, and various marks are connected ; and also to dis-
tinguish the small Roman letters of abbreviation (marked by periods, as f.,
L, r., for future, late, rare), from mere letters of reference (not so marked,
though periods may follow them for punctuation). If the latter immedi-
ately follow figures, they refer (except s) to parts of sections or pages ;
but otherwise, to the notation of stems in § 49, 340 s. The articles on
eUL, <pr)p.i, and xpu-u, have also division-letters, (b) If the abbreviation L,
r., e., i., or po. follows ao., f., or m., its force extends back to the pre-
ceding word, unless arrested by [, (, or a comma.
c. Thus, in the paragraphs on ariWoj and <r<pd\\a), 1 first denotes the'
union of consonant I with X in the stem, to form W ; while the follow-
ing 1. marks the form there noted, as late. "EacpaXov preceding is likewise
so marked, as no comma intervenes, but not <rre\cD • while €<ttoJ\67}p is
marked as rare, and e<x<pd\dy}v as both late and rare. In the article on
Xe'w, f x denotes the dropping of f in the stem ; and f after 305, a part of
the section so numbered ; while f. following is an abbreviation for future,
showing that the Aor. extiOw an d the late ix^V v have corresponding
futures, x^M !*- -*- an d x e ^V (T0 P La '- It is also shown, that the Fut. x^ w
has only been found in composition ; and that the Fut. x e ^ w * s dialectic,
occurring in Homer. The sign + shows that xcfSaVw, though also enclosed
in brackets, is not wholly excluded from the Attic (Ar. Ran. 260). The
references to authors have been usually, but not exclusively, attached to
the less familiar forms. Before a reference, c marks the word as there
compound, though sometimes simple. See Notes on page Q7.
94
TABLES.
§52.
52. D. TABLE OF NUMERALS.
I. Adjectives.
1. Cardinal.
Interrog. irbaoi ; quot ? how many ,
Indefinite iroaol, aliquot, some.
Rel. Ind. owoaoi, quotquot.
Relative oaoi, quot, as many.
Diminut. 0X1701, pauci, feiv.
Augment. iroWoi, multi, many.
Demonst. rocroi, tot, so many.
cts, p. to, ev, unus, one.
8vo, 8vo>, duo, two.
Tpcis, Tpia, tres, three.
TcVo-apes, -a, quatuor, four.
•7T€vt€, quinque, five.
$j, sex, s£c.
€7TTd, septem, seven.
oktw, octo, ei#/^.
Ivvia, novem, nine.
8«Ka, decern, ten.
'eVSexa, undecim, eleven.
SuSeica, duodecim, twelve.
Tpio-KaiScKa, Sexarpeis, tre-
decim, thirteen. [decim.
T£<ro-apeo-Kai8£Ka, quatuor-
irevT€Kai5€Ka, quindecim.
€KKai8eKa, sexdecim.
cirraKaiSeKa, septendecim.
oKTUKaiStKa, duodeviginti.
cvveaKaiStKa, undeviginti.
€1'ko<ti(v, viginti, twenty.
els Kal cI'koo-i, cI'koctiv *l%,
viginti unus, twenty-one.
TptdKovTa, triginta, thirty.
TecrcrapaKOVTa, quadraginta.
irevT^KovTa, quinquaginta.
c^KovTa, sexaginta, sixty.
i(38op.T|KovTa, septuaginta.
o^SoTiKovTa, octoginta.
€V«v^|KovTa, nonaginta.
cKarov, centum, a hundred.
Siaicoo-ioi, -at, -a, ducenti.
TpiaKocrioi, trecenti.
T€TpaKo<rioi, quadringenti.
irevTttKoo-toi, quingenti.
1
a
2
P'
3
i
4 8'
5
i
6
r'
It
8
l'
9 6'
10
t'
11
La'
12
V
13
•V
14
18'
15
ie
16
tr'
17
<
18
W|'
19 i9'
20
k'
21
Ka'
30 X'
40
?
50
V
60
£'
70
o'
80
it'
90
r
100
p
200 <r'
300
t'
400
V
500 <}>'
2. Ordinal.
7r6<rros ; quotus ? which in order ?
or, o?ie o/ how many ?
ottovtos, quotuscumque, whichsoever
in order.
dXiyoaros, one of few.
7roA\o<rros, one of many, or, one fol-
lowing many.
-rrpwTOS, -r\, -ov, primus, first..
8evT€pos, -d, -ov, secundus, second.
TpiVos, -r\, -ov, tertius, third.
T€TapTos, quartus, fourth.
ircp/irros, quintus, fifth.
JIktos, sextus, sie^t.
^j3Solios, septimus, seventh.
6-ySoos, octavus, eighth.
evaTos, nonus, ninth.
Setca/ros, decimus, tenth.
IvSc'xaTos, undecimus, eleventh.
ScoSeKaros, duodecimus, twelfth.
Tpio-KaiSeKaros, tertius decimus,
thirteenth.
T€<rorapaKCu8€KaTOS, quartus decimus.
TrcvTCKaiStKaros, quintus decimus.
eKKaiSexaros, sextus decimus.
lirraKatSe'scaTOS, Septimus decimus.
oKTWKaiStKaTos, duodevicesimus.
cvvcaKcuSe'KaTos, undevicesimus.
€tKo<rTos, vicesimus, twentieth.
€iko<ttos irpwros, unus et vicesimus,
twenty-first.
TpiaKO<rr<Js, tricesimus, thirtieth.
T€o-<rapaKoo-Tds, quadragesimus.
TT€VTT]KO(rrds, quinquagesimus.
c|t]koo-t<5s, sexagesimus, sixtieth.
epSop/rjKoords, septuagesimus.
o^Sotikoo-tcs, octogesimus.
lv€VT]KOtrTos, nonagesimus.
Iko-too-tos, centesimus, hundredth.
SicLkoouoo-tos, ducentesimus.
TpiaKoo-ioo-Tos, trecentesimus.
TCTpaKotriooTos, quadringentesimus.
7revTaKoo-io<rTos, quingentesimus.
§52
NUMERALS.
95
600 \' ^aicdotot, sexcenti.
700 t|/ eirraKoo-toi, septingenti.
800 «' oKTaKoaaoi, octingenti.
900 77< cvaKoorioi, nongenti.
1,000 ,a \tXioi, -ai, -a, mille.
2,000 ,P 8to-xi\ioi, duo millia.
10,000 ,i pvpioi, -ai, -a, decern
millia, ten thousand.
20,000 ,k 8urp,iipioi, viginti millia.
100,000 ,p 8€KaKi<rp.vpioi, centum
millia, 100 thousand.
3. Temporal.
Inter, ttootcuos; on wJuit day ?
1. (av0^p.€pos, on the same day.)
2. Scvrepaios, on the Seconal day.
3. Tpiraios, on the third day.
4. rerapTcuos, on the fourth day.
5. ir6p.irTcuos, on the fifth day.
6. Iktcuos, on the sixth day.
7. ip8op.aios, on the seventh day.
8. oySocuos, on the eighth day.
If-aKoo-ioo-Tos, sexcentesimus.
lirraKexrioords, septingentesimus.
6KTaKO<rio<rros, octingentesimus.
€vaKoo-ioo-Tos, nongentesimus.
\iXtoo-Tos, millesimus, thousandth.
Sia-xtXioo-Tos, bis millesimus.
piptoo-Tos, decies millesimus, ten-
thousandth.
8i<rp.vpio(TT6s, vicies millesimus.
8eKaKio-p.vpioo-Tds, centies millesi-
mus, hundred-thousandth.
4. Multiple.
Augni. TroWairXous, multiplex.
dirX(6os)ovs, simplex, simple, single.
SiirXovs, duplex, double.
rpiirXovs, triplex, triple.
TCTpairXovs, quadruplex, quadruple.
ircvTairXows, quincuplex, quintuple.
t£airXovs, sextuple.
lirrairXovs, septemplex, septuple.
OKTairXovs, octuple.
5. Proportional.
Inter. iroaa-n-Xdcios ; how
many fold?
Dim.
[fold.
Augm. 7ro\\air\d(Tios, many
1. (frros, sequus, equal.)
2. 8nrXd<rios, diplus, twof.
3. TptirXdo-ios, triplus.
4. TCTpairXdo-ios, quadru-
plus, fourfold.
5. irevTairXdcrtos, fivefold.
6. l^airXdo-ios, sixfold.
7. 4irrairXdo-ios, septuplus.
8. oKTairXdo-ios, octuplus.
cvvcairXdcrios, ninefold.
ScKairXdo-ios, tenfold.
clKoo-airXdo-tos.
100. €KaTovTaTrXd<rios.
1,000. x i ^ loir ^ c w rio s«
10,000. p.vpioirXdo-ios,
10,000-fold.
9.
10.
20.
II. Adverbs.
irocr&Kis ; quoties ?
how many times ?
6\iydias, paucies, few
limes.
7roXXd/cts, many times.
diraij, semel, once.
8£s, bis, twice.
Tpfe, ter, thrice.
T€TpaKis, quater, four
times.
irevTOKis, quinquies.
k% aKts, sexies.
cirrdKis, septies.
oktokis, octies. .
cvokis, novies.
SeKaKis, decies.
clKoo-aKis, vicies.
€KarovTaKis, centies.
XiXidias, millies.
(ivjptdKis, decies mil-
lies.
III. Substantives.
iroaoTvs, quantitas,
quantity, number.
6X176x775, paucitas,
fewness.
ttoWotvs, multitiido.
Ivds, p.ovds, monad.
8vds, duad.
rpids, triad.
TCTpds, T€TpaKTvis,
qitaternion.
ircp/irds, ircvTas.
I£ds, hexade.
iirrds, e|38op.ds.
oKTas, 6-ySods.
evveds, ennead.
Sexds, decade.
eiKas, score. •
cKarovrds, century.
XtXtds, chiliad.
p/upids, myriad.
96
TABLES.
53.
53. E. PRONOMINAL
Obsolete Primitives are printed in capitals . Poetic , Late , and Dialectic Forms are not marked .
Latin equivalents occupy the
Orders, I.
n.
Negative.
Relative.
Ill , IV.
V
VI.
Classes.
Interrogative
Indefinite
i. Ob( Subjective.
Definite.
Indefinite.
Positive,
lit ;
tis,IIOS ov(/mtj)tls
6's qui
OCTTLS
1
nos;
'AMOS
ov{p.rj)bap.b$
oairep
'OIIOS
1.
quis?
aliquis
ov{p.rj)8els
Bare
quicumque
Pu oc
Comparative,7r6repos ;
irorepos
ov(p,7))8eTepos
birbrepos
°s
uter?
uter
oi){p.rj)8oirbrepos
k*
Superlative
, irbaros ;
[neuter
birbcrTos
1
Quantity,
irocros ;
irocbs
8a os
birbaos
quantus ?
aliquantus
quantus
quantus
I
Quality,
7TO?OS ;
7TOIOS
ovriSavbs
OlOS
O7roios
qualis ?
qualis
oiu(jjt,7))5apuvbs
qualis
qualis
Pm
Age, Size,
rrrjXiKOS ;
irr)\li<os
7}\LK0S
brnfklKos
ei
Country,
Day,
irobairbs ;
TTOCTTOUOS /
birobairbs
biroarcuos
Whence,
TroOev ;
irodip
firj7ro6ev
66ev
birbdev
unde ?
dfiodev
ov(p.7J)bap.bdev
Zvdav
undecuin-
alicunde
unde
[que
ov(p.7))8eT4pu0eu
OTTortpudev
Where,
irov ;
ttoij
o${[X7J)irov
oS, hda
8irov
1
dpLOU
ov(p.r))8ap.ou
baaxov
S "^
irbdi ;
TTodl
ovTrodi nusquam
80i, tva.
birbdi
i-i
ubi?
alicubi
ov(fjt,r))8a/ji.6di.
ubi
ubiubi
irortpoidi ,
uspiam
ovSeripwdt
birortpiaOi
Whither,
woi ;
7T0£
0v(pL7})Sa/J,0L
of
oiroi
irbo~e ;
dyLtOt
ov(p.T))8ap.bcre
quo
birbae
quo ?
aliquo
quoquo
la
o
iroT^poxre ,
Ov(p,7])8€T^p(>}<T€
biroTtpwae
I 2 "
Way, or Place wtj ; qua ?
■K-f]
0VTT7)
V, fa*
8TT7)
g *
rhere,
irolg. ;
dfirj
0V8€TT7)
qua
quaqua
P
■3
Trovaxv ;
aliqua
oi(p.rj)8aixri
baaxv
bTrocraxv
d 3 -
Manner, &c
, 7rcDs ;
7TWS
ofl(p.ifi)Tr<t)S
ws ut
6V ws
W
quomodo
' api&s
ov(p.7])8anios
quomodo
utcumque
irolo)? ;
irocrQs
o'iws
ottoLios
TTOTtpUS ;
oti(firi)8eT{pws
qualiter
OTTOT^pUS
ttogclx&s ;
oti(p,rj)ir<i)
ocax^s
irQ) ;
7Tc6
ov(p.rj)8£TT(j)
' General,
it ore ;
7T0T^
oti{p.r))iroTe
8re
birbre
I
quando ?
aliquan
ov(pir))8eiroT€
quum
quandoque
ownvina
Specific,
irr)VLKa ;
• [do
[nunquam fylm
T*
Various,
tttj/xos ;
quando ?
ov(fir))K£ri
Tj/Aos, itrd
'eus, 8(ppa
OTrrJixos
5.
dumber,
Tro<r&Kis ;
quoties ?
ovSev&Kis
ba&Kis
quoties
biroa&Kis
quotiesque
Derivative Nouns, iroabrrjs quantitas, Troibr-qs qualitas, irr/XiKOTTjs,
tTepoTrjs, TavrbTTjs, bp.oibT7]s, labrr]*, ovS&eia, fawcrts, aXXoiwais, bfiolwp.a, &c.
§53.
PRONOMINAL CORRELATIVES.
97
CORRELATIVES.
Of the Negative Forms, the Objective begin with ou-, and the Subjective with fi^.
space after or below some words.
Definite or Demonstrative.
Universal.
XII
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
XI.
Of Identity,
Diversity, &c.
Simple.
Emphatic.
Deictic
Distributive.
Collective.
o, TOS
oSros hie
6'5ehic
sras omnis
bjmbs, avrbs
ineifos
oiiToai
m
&fl<f)(0
dXXos
ille
hicce
hicce
ambo
alius
erepos
itcdrepos
dfupbrepos
alter
alteruter
ZnaaTos
uierque
avrbraros
t6<xos tan-
TOCTOVTOS
roabaSe
rvvvbs [tus tvwovtos
roaoffdl
tolos talis
TOIOUTOS
roibcrSe
TTVLVTOIOS
Sfioiot
iKebivos
TOlOVTOCrl
TOLOGOL
omnigenus
dXXotos
ttjXLkos
ttjXucoDtos
TT)\uc6<Tde
iravroSa-rrbs
OfXrjXli;
dXXobcnrbs
avdripjepos
rbOev inde rovrbdev
€Kd<TTO0€V
irdvrodev
bfiWep
ivdtv hinc Ivrevdew
ivdtvZe
eKacrraxbOev
iravTaxbdev
avrbdev
tK&dtV
hinc
hinc
eKdrepOev
undique
dXXodev
ertpwdev
inde
inde
iKartpwdev
dp.<poTip(o0ev
dXXax60€v
hda hie
ivravda
irddSe
[utrimque
i Travraxov
bfiov, at/rod
ixel illie
hie
hie
eKaaraxov
ubique
dXXaxov
rbdi ibi
ibi
ibi
CKdarodi
■jrdvrodi
avrbdi
txeidt
ivravOl
<55e
iKaarax66i
iravraxbOi
&XXodi
irtpwdi
hie
iKartpiodi
d/xtpoT^pcodt
dXXaxbdi
hdd8e eo
ivravdol
iKCLGTCLXOL
iravraxol
bfibae
iiceiffe
hue
quocumque
irdvToae
avrbae
illuc
eo
eKavTaxbce
vavraxbee
&XXo<re
irdptaae
e/caWpaxre
dfupoTtpuxre
dXXaxbae
tyj ea
ra^TTj
rrjSe
Trdvrrj
b/iy
inchy
hac
hac
ubique
&XX V
iliac
iKaaraxv
Travraxv
dXXaxv
tws, &s ita ourws
&5e sic
irdvrws
b/xus
£KeLp(i)$
ovtuxxI
d>8l
omnino
atfrws
toLws
sic
Toiu><r8e
iravToltos
bfiolcos
ertpws
ita
taliter
iKartpws
dpLtporepus
tlxrafrrtos
secus
Toaavrax&s
iravTax&s
&XX(dS
t<J>, t6gu$
tot modis
irdvv
dXXolios
rbre turn
€Kd<XTOT€
vdvrore,
aXXore
tunc
semper
SidTravrds
alias
T7]vIkcl
TrjptKavra
TTjviKdde
[semper
aVTlKd
T7)p.OS, VVV
TTJfWVTOS
T7]p,6(r8€
statim
Wus, rb<f>pa
ad, aWis
TOGOLKIS
roaavrdKis toties
eKaardKis
ladKis
toties
rovrdicis
eKarepdKis
dp:<f>0T€pdKis
Derivative Verbs, bftoibw assimulo, labw aequo, dXXoibw, iro<xbw, iroibw,
crepoiow, oi/Sevlfa, dp-Qoreplfa, iVdfu, o/Aotdi'w, e/care/^w, dXXdaaca, &c.
98
TABLES.
§54.
54. F. TABLE OF DERIVATION.
A. Nouns
I. From Verbs : denoting
1. The Action, in -cris, -trld, -tis,
-T], -d, -OS (G. -Ov), -TOS, -TTJ,
-tvs, -|ios, -|atj, -os (g. -eos).
2. The Effect or Object, in -pa, -ov.
3. The Doer, in -tt]s, -*Hjp, -T«p,
(F. -Tpia, -TCipa, -T/31S, -m,)
-€VS, OS, -UttV.
4. The Place, Instrument, &c, in
-T^ptov, -Tpov, -Tpa.
II. From Adjectives : expressing
the Abstract, in -Cd (-eia, -ota),
-TTjs (g. -Trpros), -<rovt], -os (g. -eos),
-as (g. -ados).
III. From Other Nouns :
1. Patriate, in -ttjs (-Itws, -17x77$,
(363 s).
-dr7)S, -idrr]$, -iihrvs '• T. -rts),
-€VS (F. -ts).
2. Patronymics, in -CStjs, -d8t]s,
-ioStjs (F. -is, -as, -ids), -C<av,
(F.-i<Jn>r), Avq) : i8ovs(f. -ibrj).
3. Female Appellatives, in -is,
-aiva, -€id, -o-o-a (-rra), -a, -tj.
4. Diminutives, in -iov (-i5io>/,
-dpLov, -i/XXtov, -tidptov, -ixpiov,
&C.), -io-KOS (F. -L<TKrj), -(s,
-i8cvs, -fyy 1 !' -ttKVTi, -aXos, -cXos,
-iXos, -v.XXIs, -vXos, &c.
5. Augmcntatives, in -o>v, -avid,
-a£.
6. Place, Instrument, &c, in -aiov,
-6wv, 375 r N.
B. Adjectives (373 s).
I. From Verbs : in -ikos, -rijpios,
-|j.u>v, active; -tos, -tcos, -vds,
passive; -tpos, implying /i-
?iess; -pds, -as, -os.
II. From Nouns : in -10s (-aios,
-etos, -010s, -yos, -uios), joer-
taining to ; -ikos, -kos, -aicds,
-d'iKos, relating to ; -«os, -tvos,
-en, material; -tvds, time or
prevalence ; -tvos, -tjvos, -avds,
patrial ; -pds, -epos, -ipos,
-aXtos, -T]Xds, -wXds, -€ts, -toons,
fulness or quality.
III. From Adjectives and Ad-
verbs :
1. As from Nouns.
2. Strengthened Forms : Com-
parative, Superlative.
C. Pronouns (53, 244 s, 377).
D. Verbs (378 s).
I. From Nouns and Adjectives :
in -4<a, -cv<«), -do>, to be or do ; -d«,
-aiv&), -l5vtt, to make; -CXfit, -d£«,
imitative, active, &c. ; -idw, -aw,
desiderative; -« with penult
strengthened, active, &c.
II. From Other Verbs : in -o-cCu,
desiderative; -£«, -ctkco, -XXa>,
frequentative, intensive, inceptive,
causative, diminutive, &c; redu-
plicated.
E. Adverbs (380 s).
I. Oblique Cases of Nouns and
Adjectives :
1. Accusatives : of Nouns ; Neut.
Sing, and Plur. of Adjectives
(esp. Comparatives and Super-
latives).
2. Genitives, in -0cv, place whence;
-ov, place where ; -rjs, &c
3. Datives, in -01, -o0i, -■nou, -do-i,
place wh-cre ; -j\ (-tj), -a (-a), -ai,
-t, way, manner, place where,
time when; &c.
II. Derivatives signifying,
1. Manner, in -»s, -tjoov, -Sdv,
-8-nv, -dBtjv, -8a, -81s, -( (t), -eC, -$•
2. Time «?7«mi, in -tc, -tea.
3. Place whither, in -o-c, -81s.
4. Number, in -dias.
III. Prepositional Forms and
Phrases :
1. Prepositions with their Cases.
2. Prepositions without Cases.
3. Derivatives from Prepositions,
in -cd, -8ev, -wflcv, -tos, -8ov, &c.
§55.
ETYMOLOGY.
99
55. G. SIGNIFICANT ELEMENTS OF LANGUAGE.
Note. The term " things " is here used in its large sense, as including every ohject of
sense, discourse, or thought; whether persons, material things, or mere abstractions-
The term " actions " is used for both actions and states.
Grand
Divisions.
A.
Essential
Elements.
The Signs
of
Things,
. Actions,
Classes.
Substantives,
II.
Verbs,
Orders.
Subdivisions.
B.
Descriptive
Elements.
r Properties )
of \
Things, J
III.
Adjectives,
C.
Connective
Elements.
D.
Instinctive
Elements.
Properties '
of
Actions or
of other
Properties, t
Relations
of
Things,
IV.
Adverbs,
V.
' Nouns,
( Proper.
Common,
Appellative.
Collective.
Substantial.
Abstract.
Substantive
Pronouns,
( Personal,
< Reflexive,
( Connective, &c.
, Infinitives (Gerunds, Supines).
Transitive,
Intransitive,
' Articles,
Numerals,
Adjective
Pronoun*
Participles.
Adjectives,
Of Manner,
Of Place,
Of Time,
Of Degree,
Of Number,
&c.
{Finite Verbs.
Infinitives.
Participles.
| Definite.
} Indefinite.
{Cardinal.
Ordinal.
Multiple, &c.
Possessive.
Demonstrative.
Connective.
Interrogative.
Indefinite.
Distributive.
Negative, &c.
Of Quality.
Of Circumstance.
Demonstrative.
Connective.
Interrogative.
Indefinite.
Negative.
b Emphatic, &c.
Prepositions, Of Place, Time, Action, Cause, &c.
Relations ) VT
Sentences, {Conjunctions,
Emotions,
VII.
Interjections,
{Copulative.
Adversative.
Alternative.
' Complementary.
Conditional.
Subordinate, ■ Concessive.
Causal.
Final, &c.
Of Pleasure, Pain, Address, &c.
Without its essential elements, language could have no existence as rational discourse ;
•without its descriptive elements, it would be vague and meagre ; without its connective
elements, it would be disjointed ; and without its instinctive elements, it would want
sensibility and passion.
100 TABLES. SYNTAX. §56.
III. SYNTAX.
A. GENERAL PRINCIPLES.
56. A thought expressed in words forms a sentence (sen-
tentia, thought). Syntax is the doctrine of sentences, as Ety-
mology, of words, Orthoepy, of vocal sounds, and Orthog-
raphy, of written characters.
a. To analyze a sentence is to divide it into its parts, observing their
offices and relations. These parts, in Syntax, are of three kinds : in-
cluded sentences, commonly called clauses ; phrases, expressive combina-
tions of words, yet not sentences ; and single words, or those which in
Etymology are so regarded : ' He came when it was time ' ; ' He came in
good time ' ; ' He came ~
i. Sentential Analysis.
57. 1. Every complete sentence has two chief or primary
elements, the Subject and Predicate ; and may have a third,
the Compellative.
a. The subject and compellative are those substantives in the sentence
which denote most directly the persons or things spoken of (subject) or
addressed (compellative) : 'Brethren, virtue ennobles.'
b. The term substantives is here employed, as commonly in Syntax, to
include not only nouns, substantive pronouns, and infinitives (55), but
whatever is used substantively ; as, an adjective or adverb denoting some
person or thing, a phrase or clause forming an object of thought or re-
mark, or any word spoken of as a word: 'Now *s the day' ; 'Above
twenty came'; ' Go is a verb.' See 68 a, 70 a, 491.
c. The predicate is always a verb ; and, of more than one, that which
is most closely related to the subject in the expression of the thought,
(d) As the essence of a sentence is predication, the predicate is often taken
as a representative of the sentence. Thus a word which connects or
modifies a sentence, is familiarly spoken of as connecting or modifying
the verb of the sentence : ' But perhaps he will go.'
2. Sentences have also various minor elements :
e.) Exponents, words which mark the offices or relations of sentences
or their parts : * He said that he went to Paris and Rome.' See 65 s.
f . ) Elements that are grammatically independent ; as, a participial
phrase absolute, interjections, &c. : ' This said, he fell, alas ! '
g.) Subordinate elements, or modifiers, which are joined with other
elements to modify or limit them, i. e. to affect in various ways their
force or application : ' Dear brethren, true virtue always ennobles.'
h. A word which is modified by another, is termed its principal ; and
this distinction of principals and modifiers applies not only to single
words, but also to phrases and sentences.
58. Modifiers are of three kinds: (1) Words of Prop-
erty, i. e. Adjectives and Adverbs (55), including all words so
considered ; (2) Modifying Substantives, including Apposi-
lives and Adjuncts ; and (3) Dependent Sentences.
a. Modifying Substantives. When, with one name of a person
§59. SENTENTIAL ANALYSIS. » 101
or thing, another is connected for the sake of explanation, specification,
description, or emphasis, the latter is said to be in apposition with the
former, and is termed an Appositive : 'Paul the apostle.' All other
modifying substantives are termed Adjuncts : 'Saul of Tarsus.'
b. When two names for the same person or thing are connected as
above, that should be regarded as the appositive which is added for the
sake of modifying the other, whatever may be its position : ' George the
King,' or 'King George.' It is not, however, always easy to determine
this ; and two or more names are often so joined that they may be re-
garded as forming one complex noun : * Charles James Fox.'
c. An adjunct, in respect to form, is either prepositional or nude ;
that is, it is either joined to its principal by a preposition, which serves
as an exponent of its relation ; or it is joined immediately, without a prep-
osition. — In the first case, it is also termed exponential ; and in the sec-
ond, immediate. In the sentence, 'Give me the book,' the adjuncts me
and book are both nude, or immediate ; while in ' Give the book to
me,' the adjunct me (or, prefixing the exponent, to me) is prepositional.
d. As to its use, an adjunct is regarded either as completing the idea of
its principal, or as denoting some circumstance respecting it ; and is hence
distinguished as complementary or circumstantial (more briefly, as a com-
plement or a circumstance). In ' The son of Jesse slew Goliath with a
sling,' 'of Jesse' and 'Goliath' are complements of 'son' and 'slew/
which would seem incomplete without them ; while the less essential
'with a sling' expresses a circumstance of 'slew,' viz. the instrument.
e. A complement is distinguished as direct or indirect, according to the
closeness of its relation. This distinction appears especially in the ob-
jects of verbs, which form the most prominent class of complements.
f. Among the most prominent circumstances, are those of place, time,
cause, origin, material, motive, price, manner, means, degree, agency, &c.
g. There is no line of division between complements and circumstances,
or between direct and indirect complements ; and many adjuncts may be
differently classed, according to the view which the mind takes of them.
h. A modifying clause performs the office of an adjective, adverb, or
substantive (appositive or adjunct) in the sentence to which it belongs.
See 62 b, h. (i) Hence, all modifiers are adjective, adverbial, or substan-
tive, in their force ; and, as substantive modifiers, when they modify other
substantives, are akin to the adjective, but when they modify verbs, ad-
jectives, or adverbs, to the adverbial, adjectives and adverbs may be
taken as the types of all modifiers.
59. Some words have a double relation, which may be
termed complex modification. Thus,
a. A word modifying a verb, and thus partaking of an adverbial force
(58 i), may also belong as an adjective, appositive, or adjunct, to the sub-
ject or a complement of the verb : 'He is esteemed wise.' 'He stood
erect.' 'They made him king.' An adjective, &c, thus predicated of
its subject, is termed a predicate adjective, &c. ; while others, joined with-
out predication, are termed direct or assumed (393 a, b). An assumed ad-
jective is also called an epithet. A verb which can thus connect an ap-
positive to its subject, is termed an oppositional verb.
b. A clause modifying the predicate is often incorporated in a parti-
cipial form, and assumed of the subject : ' Fearing this [as he feared this],
he fled.' See 62 a, d.
c. When two adjectives belong to the same substantive, one sometimes
102 TABLES. SENTENCES. § 59.
exerts an adverbial force upon the other, or modifies the substantive taken
with the other as a complex whole : ' Red hot iron ' ; ' All good men.'
d. An adverb modifying a sentence or phrase, often gives a special em-
pliasis, or bears a special relation to a particular word in the sentence or
phrase : ' Bless me, even me also,' Gen. 27. 34. ' He, he surely, will go.'
60. a. Any element, with all the words which arc subordinate to it
and aid in expressing its idea, forms a logical part bearing the name of its
element, but distinguished by the addition of 'part' ; while the element
itself is distinguished, if need be, by the addition of 'word.' The for-
mer is also distinguished as 'logical,' and the latter as 'grammatical'
(sometimes called the "basis" of the logical part). In 'Good men are
wise,' the subject-part, or logical subject (the subject as thought of), is
1 Good men,' containing the subject-w T ord, or grammatical subject, ' men ' ;
and the predicate-part is 'are wise,' containing the predicate-word, or
grammatical predicate (the word that expresses predication, and has the
appropriate grammatical form and office) 'are.'
b. The predicate-part may be resolved into the attribute and the
copula. The attribute (attribiitus, ascribed) expresses the action, state,
property, &c, ascribed to the subject; as 'wise,' above. The copula
(Lat. tie, bond) is a substantive verb (a verb which simply expresses being),
uniting the attribute with the subject ; as 'are,' above : 'The sun shines
[is shining].' ' He fears [is afraid].'
ii. Offices and Relations of Sentences.
61. A sentence is intellective (intellectus, understanding)
or volitive (volo, to will), according as it primarily expresses
an act of the understanding, or an act of the will.
a. An intellective sentence is declarative or interrogative, accord-
ing as it makes a statement, or asks a question: 'He Avill go.' 'Will he
go ? ' (b) Interrogation is sometimes used rhetorically for strong statement,
(c) A volitive sentence (also termed imperative, from its mode) may
express command, entreaty, exhortation, permission, or even supposition :
'Go.' (d) A sentence of any one of these forms is termed exclamatory,
when used for exclamation : ' How fast he goes ! ' (e) Sentences of all
these classes may be either positive or negative ; i. e. they may affirm
or deny, require or prohibit, &c. : ' I will go.' ' Do not go.'
f. A declarative or interrogative sentence is actual, when it has re-
spect to fact (what is, or is not, &c.) ; but contingent, when it has re-
spect to contingency (what may be, or may not be, kc). See 613 s. These
sentences may be also named from their modes and time {indicative, &c.)
62. Sentences are connected with each other in four ways :
a.) By incorporation, in which the verb of one sentence is incorpo-
rated in another sentence as an infinitive or participle (i. e. as a substan-
tive or adjective). — Such a sentence, as well as its verb, is termed incor-
porated, while sentences in which the predicate has a distinct form as a
finite verb are termed distinct or finite. See G57 s.
b.) By subordination, in which one of the sentences, without losing
its distinct form, belongs to the other as a part or circumstance (subject,
object, condition, reason, result, time, &c.) ; and is therefore termed subor-
dinate, dependent, or included, while the other is distinguished as the
chief, principal, or leading sentence or clause. — The two together form a
complex sentence : ' Go, if you wish' ; ' That he went, is strange.'
§ 63. METHODS OP INDICATION. 103
c.) By coordination, in which the sentences are joined by a connec-
tive, but neither is subordinate to the other. Sentences so connected are
termed coordinate, and together form a compound sentence. See d, e.
d.) By simple succession, in which one sentence directly follows an-
other, without a connective (often referred to ellipsis, 68 d) : ' Luther said
this. He sat down.' — This form may be changed to coordination, by
supplying a connective (' L. said this, and he sat down ') ; often even to
subordination (* When L. had said this, he sat down'), or the yet closer
form of incorporation ('Having said this, L. sat down '). See 657 s, 693.
e. A sentence is termed simple, if it is neither complex nor com-
pound ; and independent, if it is neither incorporated nor subordinate,
(f) A sentence which according to its main division is compound, may
have complex members, and the converse, (g) Parts of a sentence are also
compound, complex, or simple, according as they consist of portions joined
by coordinate conjunctions expressed or understood, of portions joined by
subordinate conjunctions, or of neither : * Asa and Eli gave more tluin
ten dollars to John.' A sentence containing a compound or complex part
may usually be resolved into two or more clauses, by supplying words.
h. A subordinate clause is usually declarative in form. It is termed
adjective (or relative), adverbial (final, conditional, concessive, causal,
&c), or substantive (apposilive, adjunct, &c), according to its office or
connective. See 58 h, 66. (i) An incorporated clause, though always
substantive or adjective in form, is often adverbial in force (665, 674).
j. An independent sentence, whether simple or compound, with all its
dependent clauses, forms a period, which may be further named accord-
ing to its special character. If a dependent clause expresses a condition
of the principal, the combination is called a hypothetical period
(virddecris, supposition) ; the dependent clause being called the premise, con-
dition, or protasis (irpordvo), to stretch forth) ; and the principal clause, the
conclusion, or apodosis (airodidwfii, to give back). — Some of these terms
are also applied to parts of other complex sentences.
k. Quotations, which form so important a class of substantive sen-
tences, have two forms. In the first and more dramatic form, we simply
repeat the words of another, without change or incorporation into our
own discourse: He said, "I will go." This is termed Oratio Recta,
Direct Discourse or Quotation. In the second and more narrative form,
we make such changes and insert such connectives as will render the quo-
tation an integral part of our own discourse : He said, that he vjouM go.
This is termed Oratio Obliqua, Indirect Discourse or Quotation (643 s).
This distinction likewise applies to the thoughts and feelings of another.
1. An incorporated clause does not usually require a separate analysis,
except where, as in Latin and Greek, an Infinitive takes the place of an-
other mode in Indirect Discourse.
in. Methods of Indication.
63. The offices and relations of sentences and their parts
are indicated in three ways : (a) by the form of the words ;
(b) by the arrangement ; and (c) by separate words, which act
as signs or exponents of these offices or relations.
A. Indication by Form. This has four chief objects :
a.) To mark the connection of appositives, adjectives, pronouns, and
verbs, with their subjects (i. e. the substantives to which they refer), by a
correspondence of form, termed agreement or concord. See 76, 492 s.
104 TABLES. — SYNTAX. § 63.
b.) To mark, by appropriate forms, the offices and relations of substan-
tives. This is done, in most languages, through the distinction of case.
"When the form of a substantive is determined by its dependence upon
another word, it is said to be governed by that word ; and the influence
exerted upon it is termed government or regimen. See 76.
c.) To mark, by the form of an adjective or adverb, the degree in which
its property is possessed (comparison, 29, 256 s).
d.) To mark the offices and relations of sentences, through the form of
the verb, the predicating word. See 57 c, 30, 265 s.
e. In agreement, the words which are connected are regarded, by a
species of personification, as allies ; in government, as ruler and ruled.
(t) Of nude adjuncts, those only which are complementary (58 c, d), are
usually spoken of as governed. Prepositional adjuncts are commonly said
to be governed by the prepositions ; and are called their complements, ob-
jects, or, by a happier term, sequents.
g. In the development of a language, new forms arise to express more
specifically what has been generally expressed by some older form. This
older form thus becomes narrowed in its appropriate sphere, and itself
more specific in its expression. But habit, which is mighty everywhere,
is peculiarly the arbiter of language ; —
"Usus,
Quern penes arbitrium est et jus et norma loquendi "; —
and, wherever the new distinction is unimportant, there is a tendency to
employ the old and familiar form in its original extent of meaning. The
same is true of words and methods of construction. See 70 v.
64i B. Arrangement, a. Words are arranged for effect upon the
understanding, the emotions, or the ear : in other words, the arrangement
of a sentence may have for its object, (1) To exhibit the offices and rela-
tions of the words ; (2) To present the thought in an impressive manner ;
(3) To produce an agreeable effect upon the ear. — That order which most
effectually secures the first object is termed the logical order; the second,
the rhetorical order; the third, the rhythmical order.
b. In the logical order, the verb is usually placed after the subject,
and before the attribute, if this is distinct from the verb (60 b) ; and (c)
a word which is governed by another is usually placed after it. (d) Words
are often spoken of in Syntax, as following or preceding others, with refer-
ence to the logical or usual order, without regard to their actual position.
65. C. Use of Exponents. These mark the offices or relations (1)
of words (including pJirases), or (2) of sentences.
1. Word-Exponents are (a) those which mark the relations of ad-
juncts (58 c), i. e. prepositions ("case-links") ; (b) conjunctions used
as in 62 g; (c) interjections marking address or exclamation (O, ah,
484, 73 e) ; (d) modal signs (modus, manner), i. e. connective adverbs
of manner used elliptically to limit the application of modifiers (' I took
him as a friend,' 393 c, 711). The last may be parsed as connective ad-
verbs by supplying ellipses, but most conveniently as mere signs uniting
modifiers with their principals.
66. 2. Sentential Exponents are either connective (denoting
the connection of sentences), or characteristic (marking their charac-
ter, without connecting them).
a. The connectives may simply denote the relations of the sentences
(conjunctions, "clause-links," 700 s); or (b) they may also enter into
their structure as pronouns or adverbs (connective pronouns or ad-
verbs). A connective pronoun or adverb is either (c) relative (referring
§ 68. FIGURES. ELLIPSIS. 105
to an antecedent, 549 s), or (d) complementary (introducing a sentence
nsed substantively, 563 s). Thus, (a) tlud, if, until, though, (c) wlw
(73 e) ; (d) what (73 d).
Connectives are either (e) primary (directly uniting the sentences), or
(f) secondary (corresponding to the primary, "as the eye to the hook") :
'He (f) both reads (e) and writes ;' '(e) Though he feared, (f) yet lie went.*
g. The characteristic exponents (marking sentences as negative,
interrogative, contingent, &c.) maybe adverbs or pronouns: * Who was it?'
' It was not I.' 'I see no man.'
B. FIGURES OF SYNTAX.
67. Those special forms of expression which are termed
Figures of Syntax, may be referred to four great heads,
Ellipsis, Pleonasm, Enallage, and Hyperbaton.
a. Figures of Syntax are associated and blended with those of
Rhetoric ; and some of the latter will be mentioned below. Both
classes are more common in poetry than in prose ; in colloquial, than in
formal discourse ; and in the language of passion, than in that of narra-
tive or argument.
b. The use of unauthorized constructions is termed solecism (from
26Xoi/cot, dwellers in Soli, of Cilicia, famed for their bad Greek) ; of un-
authorized words, barbarism (fidpfiapos, barbarian) ; of antique words or
constructions, ARCHAfsM (dpxaios, ancient). A form of construction
specially belonging to a particular language is called an idiotism or
Idiom (tdios, peculiar) ; or, from the name of the language, a Hebraism,
Hellenism or Grecism, Latinism, Anglicism, &c.
68. i. Ellipsis (eWeiyjns, defect) is the omission of words
which are required for the most complete and regular expres-
sion of the sense.
1. These words are said to be understood. The omission may take
place without any other change in the form of the expression ; or it may
be attended with other changes, respecting either the words which are
employed, or the forms of those words : • Will you go ? ' ' [I will go]
Certainly'; or 'Fes' [=1 will go]; or, ' No' [= not]. See 69a.
(2) There is a rhetorical figure called Omission, in which there is a pre-
tence of omitting something, which is thus mentioned and often made
more prominent : ' His crime and. folly I forbear to mention.'
3. Ellipsis exhibits a striking paradox. It is generally true, that, the
more essential a word is to the grammatical construction of the discourse,
the more apt it is to be omitted ; for this reason, that it is the more
readily supplied from the very necessity of the case. Hence the frequent
omission of the word to which another refers as its subject or by which
another is governed, of the substantive verb, of the direct object of a
transitive verb, &c. ; in general, of words modified rather than modifiers,
and of leading rather than subordinate clauses. See 506, 571 s, 476, 626.
4. To ellipsis are usually referred, by grammarians, all abbreviated
and compendious forms of construction, however familiar (though the
term Brachylogy [brief expression] would often apply more properly) : as,
a.) Adjectives used substantively, and adverbs used substantively or ad-
jectively (506 s, 526 s) : (b) Many forms of inscription, salutation, excla-
mation, &c. (401, 670) : (c) The construction of responsives (words in
the answer, corresponding to interrogatives in the question), and other
10G TABLES. PLEONASM. § G8.
forms of reply; as, '"Who saw it?' 'I' [saw it]: (d) Asyndeton
(dolfofcroff, tio£ bound together), the omission of a conjunction or other con-
nective ; often greatly promoting energy and vivacity, as in Caesar's cele-
brated despatch, Veni, vidi, vici, 1 came — saw — conquered. See 707.
(e) Aposiopkms (airoai&Trnais, tfic becoming silent), the failure to finish
a sentence, whether from design, diversion of thought, overpowering emo-
tion, or any other cause ; as, ' If you ever do this again ' So not
unfrequently after a conditional clause (636 s).
f.) Most cases of compound construction (60). A word referring to
a compound subject has either the form which is required by all the sub-
stantives in the subject, taken together, or that which is required by ons
of them, taken singly. In the former construction, named Syllepsis (a6\-
\r}ij/is, taking together), the word is said to agree with all the substantives ;
in the latter, named Zeugma (^eOy/xa, yoking), it is said to agree with
one of the substantives, and to be understood with the rest. For ' My
heart and my flesh rejoice,' Ps. 84. 2, an older version has, ' My heart and
my flesh crieth out. 1 See 495 s. (g) The term zeugma is used, in general,
to denote the connection of a word with a number of words, to a part of
which only it is appropriate in meaning, or in form (while, in syllepsis, it
would suit the whole) : ' You are blind of ear, mind, and eye ' (Soph. 0.
T. 371). Cf. § 572 b.
69. ii. Pleonasm (irXcovao-pos, redundance) is the use of
more words than the sense requires.
a. Pleonasm may consist in the simple repetition or insertion of words,
or it may be attended with more important changes in the form of the ex-
pression (cf. 68. 1 ; the limits of both Ellipsis and Pleonasm are very in-
definite), (b) One of its common forms is empliatic repetition, in the same
or in similar words (the latter specially named Synonymia) : ' Never,
never, never ! ' ' Oh, spare me ! pardon and forgive ! '
c. Useless repetition is termed Tautology (rauroXoyia, saying the same
thing) : (d) a circuitous manner of expression, Periphrasis or Circumlocu-
tion (irepL<ppa<ris circumlocutio, roundabout speaking) ; as loss of life, for
death : (e) the expression of one thing as though it were two, Hendiadys
(iv 5ia dvoiv, one thing by two) ; as, ' Whose nature and property is ever
to have mercy' : (f) the use of more connectives than are needed, Poly-
syndeton (iro\is, many ; cf. 68 d) ; as, ' Whenne that,' for 'when,' Chauc.
70. in. Enallage (eVaXXayjJ, exchange) is the use of one
word or form for another. — 1. As the use of one word for an-
other, it has respect either to the grammatical office of words,
or to their signification.
a. The use of one part of speech for another is termed antimeria
(avrl, instead of, fitpos, part) : 'Now 's the day,' Burns. Cf. 68 a.
b. A figure by which a word is turned from its literal sense, is called
a trope (rpovos, turning). The principal tropes (commonly classed as
rhetorical figures, 67 a) are mentioned below, (c) The figurative sense of
a word often becomes so familiar that we employ it without intending or
being conscious of any figure : 'a sweet temper,' 'works of taste.' This
use, in which the word has passed over from its primary to a secondary
sense, is hence termed transitive (transeo, to pass over).
d. In Metaphor (/xeTcupopd, transfer), a word appropriate to one ob-
ject is transferred to another, by reason of some analogy between them :
'Tell that fox,' Lk. 13. 32. (e) Allegories are formed by extending and
§71. ENALLAGE, HYPERBATON. 107
combining metaphors, (f) When inanimate or irrational objects are rep-
resented as persons, the figure is termed Prosopopozia or Personification
(irpoaojirov persona, person, irot£u> facio, to make) ; (g) when a speaker
turns aside in his discourse so to address them (or to address absent per-
sons as if present), it is termed Apostrophe (airoo-Tpttpw, to turn from) :
' Sing, heavens ; and be joyful, earth ! ' Is. 49! 13.
h. Metonymy (ixerwvvpda, change of name) gives to one object the
name of another which is related to it : as, crown, throne, and sceptre, for
sovereignty, (i) An abstract noun is often used for a concrete, for greater
strength of expression, especially in apposition : ' He is my defence.'
j. Synecdoche (o-vv€k8ox^, comprehension) puts apart for the whole, or
the whole for a part : keel, for ship ; steel, for sivord.
k. Irony (dpuveia, dissimulation) is the use of a word for its opposite :
hero, for coward. (1) A seeming contradiction, termed Oxymoron (<5£i/-
fiwpos, keenly foolish), is sometimes made by uniting words of opposite
signification : learned ignorance.
m. A form of expression beyond the truth is termed Hyperbole (virep-
/3oXt7, throwing beyond) ; designedly short of it, Litotes (Xirorrj?, sim-
plicity) ; more agreeable, .Euphemism (€v<t>7)tu<rfi6$, use of good words).
(n) A play upon words similar in sound but differing in sense, or upon
the same word used in different senses, is termed Paronomasia (irapovo-
fiaaia, comparison of names, pun) ; and (o) an imitation of the sense by
the sound, Onomatopoeia (6vofia.Toirot.ta, name-making; certainly one of
the most copious of the original sources of language).
2. Enallage, as the use of one form for another, is specially-
termed,
p.) Synesis (civeaLs, understanding), when the construction follows
the sense or the conception of the mind, in disregard of grammatical form
or of the reality of things (498 s) : (q) Attraction (attractio), when a
word is drawn from its appropriate form by the influence of another word
(500, 552, 71 b) : (r) Hypallage (viraWay^, interchange), when two
words interchange constructions (474 a) : (t) Anacoluthon (a.vaKo\ovdos,
inconsistent), when there is a change of construction, so that two parts of a
sentence do not agree (402, 504 b) : (u) Vision (visio, seeing), when the
present tense is used in speaking of past or future events, as if they were
actually occurring before the eye (609) : (v) Retention (retentio), when
a form retains from its earlier extent of application a use afterwards
assigned to another form (392 a r , 485, 576, 603 s, 651s): (w) Change of
Number, Gender, or Person (488 s, 501 s).
71. iv. Hyperbaton (vncpParos, transposed) is a disregard
of the common laws of arrangement. It is specially termed,
a.) Inversion, or Anastrophe (dvaa-Tpo<p^ inversio, inversion), when
words in a clause are inverted (chiefly for emphasis, euphony, rhythm, to
bring similar or contrasted words nearer together, or to mark the connec-
tion of sentences, 719 a, s). — The name Chiasma (xiao-fxa, imitation of\)
is applied, when the arrangement in one pair of , jr: n( j W ords but
words or expressions is inverted in a similar thoughts X unkind.'
pair following. °
b.) Prolepsis (Trp6\7j\f/is, anticipation), when a word is placed in a clause
earlier than that to which it properly belongs, or is otherwise anticipated.
This is commonly due to attraction (70 q, 474, 657).
c.) Parenthesis (irapfrdeais, insertion), when one sentence is inserted
108 TABLES. SYNTAX. §71.
within another, with which it has no grammatical connection : ' This,
mark me, is true.' — The term may be likewise applied to any interrup-
tion of the sense by the insertion of unessential words or clauses.
d.) Hysteron Proteron {varepov irpbrepov, the last first), when that
which follows in the order of occurrence or nature, is placed first : ' I was
bred and born,' Shales, (e) Confused Arrangement, when this term
applies, (f) Tmesis, see 388 c.
C. FORMS OF ANALYSIS AND PARSING.
72. i. For Sentences.
1. Describe the Sentence : as, — It is Simple, Complex, or Compound
[consisting of the Coord., or Lead'g & Subord. Clauses — ] ; Pos. or Neg.;
'Infinitive, incorporated in the sentence — as a Substantive.\ p ,
Participial, " " " " " " an Adjective. )^ emarlcs -
(i + n H /Declarative, /Actual [Indicative, Past, &c.]n
Finite J lntellecnve > \Interrogative,\Contingent [Subjunctive, &cj; kol-
Umperative, expressing command, entreaty, exclamatory, &c. ;J
lowing — by simple succession, or connected by •— to — as a Coordinate
Sentence, or as a Subordinate Clause, performing the office of a Substan-
tive, Adjective, or Adverb. Remarks.
2. Analyze the Sentence into its Grammatical or its Logical Parts, or both :
s^ect i iter 1
The Predicate \\% — , modified by the ~ uyerD . \ which [is intro-
Costive/ «™J
duced by — , and] is itself modified by — , and this by — , &c. ; or by the
Dependent Clause — , which performs the office of — , and consists of — .
[Minor parts independent are the Interjection — , &c] Remarks.
KIte, & c}-' "»*** "y «„ U3S55&,) -, consisting - the
Adjunct &c.}~ [ mtro <l uce< l h 7 — and] modified by — , &c. [The Pred-
icate-Part may be resolved into the Copula — , and the Attribute — .]
73. Written Analysis. It is of great benefit, in the study of
other languages, as of English, so to write the analysis of sentences, that
the office of each word shall determine its place. Of the soveral methods
that have been proposed for this, the following is suggested as the most
simple in use, that is also minute :
a. Write the several sentences under each other, prefixing symbols to
mark their general offices and relations, and placing connectives in one
column, subject-parts in another, predicate-parts in the third, and inde-
pendent parts in a fourth. Write all modifiers (or their symbols, in the
case of modifying clauses) under the words which they modify, but indent-
ed, that is, with the line beginning farther to the right. Exponents of
the use of words are simply written with the words, in the same line.
Compound parts, according to convenience, are either written as if simple,
or with their elements under each other and connected by a brace (which
may be extended below, to meet a common modifier). Words supplied
§73.
ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES.
109
to complete the grammatical construction are underlined in writing
(printed below as Italic, or, in Greek, with smaller type) ; while paren-
theses or brackets mark the repetition of a word in the scheme, to show
a double office or relation (especially where a word in the subject or predi-
cate part serves also as a connective). In complex modification, the modi-
fier, is sometimes repeated ; but oftener written only once, in the place
which shows its closest connection or is most convenient, its double office
being shown, if desired, by a double mark. Space may be gained, if
wished, by writing the article in the same line with its noun or with an-
other modifier ; and time, by abbreviating words, or simply writing their
initials. The article is sometimes even omitted.
b. For sentences, the following symbols may be used : The capitals A,
B, C, &c, for independent sentences (sentences of the 1st rank) ; the
numerals 1, 2, 3, &c, for sentences immediately dependent upon these
(2d rank) ; the small letters a, b, c, &c, for sentences dependent upon
the latter (3d rank) ; the Italics a, b, c, &c, for sentences of the 4th
rank ; the last letters of the alphabet, z, y, x, &c, for those of the 5th
rank ; these in Italics, for the 6th rank ; the middle letters, m, n, o, &c,
and m, n, o, &c, for the rare 7th and 8th ranks. If the sentence is in-
terrogative, the sign ? may be added ; if imperative, t ; if exclamatory,
! ; if quoted or parenthetic, the usual sign in part, " or ). The members
of compound sentences, or of those which have prominent parts com-
pound, may be distinguished by the use of accents (unless a separate no-
tation is preferred) : as A, A', A", &c. (read "A," "A prime," "A sec-
ond," &c). The different kinds of modifiers may be distinguished by
any convenient marks, or indices. An adjective modifier is marked below
with °; an adverbial modifier, with * ; a substantive modifier, with an
angle, the opening turned up for an adjunct ( v ), and down for an apposi-
tive ( A ). Judgment will, of course, be exercised in regard to the extent
to which, in any exercise, the notation shall be carried.
c. When minute analysis is not desired, some of its most important ob-
jects may be rapidly obtained by symbolizing a period or paragraph, that
is, by writing the symbols of its sentences in the order of occurrence (the
symbol being repeated, when a clause is divided), with additional signs
above or below to mark the offices of the sentences, and such punctuation
as will best suit their connections. The examples below will be first sym-
bolized, and then analyzed more fully, with the proposed arrangement and
notation.
A%
<C o o o
M*S
SS^ o
d. From Campbell's Ode to the Rainbow :
PRED.
ask
not'
Philosophy v
proud .
to teach v
1°
2 V
CONN.
STOJ.
I
(that)
That
(when)
Storms
(what)
Thou
me
(2 V )
fill'st
sky v
the°
prepare
to part v
when*
art
what A *
Arch
triumphal
(1°)
110
TABLES.
SENTENCES.
§73.
e. How long, men of Athens, will yon indulge in this guilty and, alas !
fatal supineness ? The clouds continually gathering and darkening above
us, how can you hope that the storm will not at length burst upon the
city ? Beware of imagining, my fellow-citizens, that this ambitious
{uinee and warrior, who delights in the severest toil if it may advance
lis schemes of conquest, will ever rest until he has reached the coveted
goal, the subjugation of Attica, — that, having conquered the rest of
Greece, he will cry "Enough!" and will offer us terms of honorable
friendship. It is only through the strangest infatuation, be assured, that
you can expect to escape, ah foolish dreamers ! though all others fall.
A;Bl;C2a«, 2b, 3c, 3';D(E)4d.
CONN.
A?
Bl
1*
that
Ct
2 V
that
a°
(Who)
a'
if
V
until
3 V
that
You
You
The storm
Yc
Prince & warrior
this
ambitious
(a°)
Who
It
He
He
having conquered '
the rest v
of Greece 7
PRED.
will indulge
long'
how*
in supineness ,
this
guilty & fatal
can hope
how'
(l v )
will burst
not'
at length 7
upon the city v
Beware
of imagining 7
(2\ 3 7 )
will rest
ever'
0O
delights
in the toil 7
severest
(a')
may advance
schemes 7
his v
of conquest 7
has reached
the goal 7
coveted°[tion A
the subjuga-
of Attica 7
will cry
(O
& will offer
us 7
terms 7
of friendship 7
honorable
IND.
Men
of Athens 7
alas
The clouds [ening
gathering & dart
continually'
above us 7
fellow-citizens
my°
§73.
WRITTEN ANALYSIS.
Ill
c"
D
It
It
( 4 A) .
is
enough *
is
only'
through infatuation 7
the strangest
Et)
Ye
be assured
4 *
that
You
can expect
to escape 7
(<T)
fall
ah dreamers
foolish
d<
though
Others
alF
f. KXtapxc Kal Updi-eve, Kal oi &W01 oi irapovres "EXX^e?, ovk tare, 8 ti
iroieire. E£ yap riva dXX^Xots P&XW o~vvd\peTe, vofxlfcre, £v rfjSe rrj rjfiepa
e/ie re KaraK€K6\f/€a6ai, Kal vjj.o.% ov irokd ifiob vaTepov • kcikws yb.p t&v
yp-erdpuv ex^Tiou, iravres oStol, o£)s Spare, f3dp(3apoi irokepLubrepoi tj/uup iaov-
tcu tG>v irapa /ScurcXet 6mu)v. " Clearchus and Proxenus, and the other
Greeks present, you know not what you are doing. For, if you engage
in any battle with each other, consider that this day both I shall be cut
down, and you not long after me ; for, our affairs going ill, all these bar-
barians, whom you see, will be worse enemies to us than those with the
king." Xen. An. i. 5. 16.
A 1 ; a 2 a 2 a a', b z b.
*Y v » o
CONN.
A
l v
(on)
2f
Y*P
a v
.
yi
a'
.KCU
a'
El
it
-yap
(ovs)
SUB J.
PRED.
IKD.
T/A€tS
frlTC
fKXiwpye Kal np6£«v€
w*e
\Kal"EXXi]v€s
(l v , 2')
ol aXXot°
Tfieis
TTOICIT6
8ti v
oi irapovTCS
'T(X€?5
(J)
&
KaTaK€Koi|/£O-0at
4v ttj T|u^pa v
vp.ds
(KaTaKCK<5J;€<r0ai, &c.)
VOT€pOV
€UOV V
iroXv*
ov %
"T^ecs
<rvvd\|/€T€
ud\TlV V
Tivd°
dXXrjXois 7
Bdp(3apoL
&rovTat
Trpayfidruv
irdvT€s°
^^0X€UlWT6p0LO ,
T»V°
OVTOl°
^^ vV
T|U6T^pa)V°
( Z o)
tcov (3ap(3apo)v v
i\6vr(av°
6vtcov°
KaK«s x
irapd patriXei 7
'T/*ets
°P a J € .
ovs
112 TABLES. ANALYSIS AND §74.
74. ii. For Greek Words.
Proper of the 1 Dec/) Masc.^
Common
l^^l^fZ) (Decline.)
Noun,,, „ g „ U- eut Uom ;[ Comp . d .
Abstract, &cj Irregular, &c. J Com. J
* nm i Norn.") Sing.") the subject of — ,") -p„,
edTf-1 Stem-, Affix-; theGen. Plur. I; governed by -, L^ s
ea 0I ' J &c. J Dual J Gen. of — , &c, J Kemarlcs '
Pos. ^|
is an Adjective [in the Comp. \ Degree, from {compare),']
Sup. J
of ^Terminations {decline); [founded o7-,] Stem ~' Affix ~ '.
Nom.^) Sing.^j Masc.^ _ 00 j„„ «.:*v -\
the Gen. [ Plur. ^Fem. V ; A ^ eem ^ w ^ lin .~ , . k Rule. Remarks.
&c. jDualjNeutJ used substantively, &c./>
Personal ^ 1^ {Decline.) r^. t
is a Reflexive [• Pronoun, [of the 2 >Pers.],from ; L, er ' 'K
Relative, &cj 3J '[Comp.-,]
Nom.^i Sing.^ Masc.^ the subject of — ^
Stem — , Affix — ; the Gen. j-Plur. [-Fern. > ; agreeing with — I, Rule.
&c. J Dual J Neut. J gov'd by — , &c.J
[It refers to — as its a ntecedent J ' ^ u * e ' an( ^ connects — to — Remarks.
. De^onfnT^'l, ^^^> [Der'd from-,] /Stem - \
1S a Contract " \ lTOm ; [Comp'd of—, ] \Stems f*
Verb in /u, &c, J
Pres. ^ Ind. ^ Act. "j
[Prefix — ,] Affix — ; the Impf. > Subj. >• Mid. V {vary and inflect) ;
Fut, &c.J Opt, &cJ Pass. J
'{if finite) the 1 Pers. Sing., &c, agreeing with — ,
(if Inf.) having for its subject -, and {J^ « ^
Nom.^ SingO Masc.^ . .,,
{if Part.) the Gen. Ipiu?. I Fern. I; agreeing with -
&c. J DualJ NeutJ used substantively, &c
Rule.
Remarks.
Interrogative ^ Manner ^ Pos. "^
ve u
is an Demonstrative V Adverb of Place V, [in the Comp. [-Degree,
Indefinite, &c.J Time,&cJ Sup. J
from — {compare) ; Der. from — , or Comp. of — ] ; modifying — , Rule.
[It refers to — as its antecedent, and connects — to — .] Remarks.
is a Preposition [Der. or Comp. — ], governing — , and marking its
relation to — (a relation of place, time, agency, cause, &c), Rule. Remarks.
^ a Fi^lT} Conjunction. [compA] co ^^8 ~ to - (and
75.
PARSING OF WORDS.
113
denoting addition, opposition, comparison, &c, or introducing its clause as
an end, condition, <&c., or as used substantively), Rule. Remarks.
is an Interjection [Der. or Comp. — ], (expressing emotion, &c.,)
and independent of grammatical construction (684). Remarks.
75. Notes, a. When declension in full is not desired, give the Nom.
and Gen. in Substantives and in Adjectives of 1 Term., and the different
forms of the Nom. in Adjectives of 2 or 3 Term, (b) In conjugating, give
the Theme, with the corresponding Fut. and Perf. if in use (to which it is
also well to add the 2 Aor. if used) ; but sometimes, more fully, the leading
tense of each system in use. The term "vary " is used above in a specific
sense, to denote giving the different modes of a tense, or, as it is sometimes
called, giving the synopsis of the tense; and the term "inflect" to denote
giving the numbers and persons (in the Participle, declension, of course,
takes the place of this), (c) After completing the formula above (which
will be done with least danger of omission or delay, if a uniform order is
observed), add such Remarks as may properly be made upon the form,
signification, and use of the word ; as, in respect to contraction, euphonic
changes of consonants, literal or figurative sense, the force or use of the
number, case, degree, voice, mode, tense, &c. ; citing, from the Grammar,
the appropriate rule or remark, (d) Some particulars in the forms above,
which do not apply to all words, are inclosed in brackets \ and some di-
rections or suggestions, in parentheses.
e. It is a very useful exercise to write minute analyses of words ; some-
times even marking the offices of the different parts of a flexible ending
(12, 33). E. g., the following verbs (mostly in compound forms), and the
following compound nouns and adjectives may be written as below : k\ii-
(TdTO, ~\eXvKCUTLV (37), &p«TOM (39 d), 7}d£\-q<T€V (311 b), Ke\€V<r0d7IT€ (307 b),
«-€0t\^cro£icu (42 f ), idedid&xew (50, SiScutkw), yeyovfo (50), Tifirjadtrdcov
(42) ; <pi.\o<jo<j>iav (Ace.) philosophy, fipoxXos (385 a), ipyoXdfiov (387 a),
ayvures (386. 4), irvpiyeviaiv (383 a), XtfofidXcp (386. 1), vofiodiras (386. 3),
6€<T<paT0i$ divinely appointed (383 c).
PREFIX.
STEM.
AFFIX.
I
ti
j
I
|
a
>
a
"•3
d
o
1
Cm
|
3
<
1
A
3
1
1
1
o
o
|
1
,2
|
a
k
I
to
.5
1
s
§
1
1
!
k
G
|
!
#
€
M
a
a
TO
n
\e
\<>
1
K
a
v<rc
V
e
ft
id
<r
a
VT
£
e
e«x
V
a
€
T
V
iv
KtX
ev
<T
Oe
iv
re
7T<f
<f>t\
e !
<r
fxai
n
e
5e
5c
8d
X
K
ei
£
h
ye
yo
v \
6
rs
pvmn
ev
Tl
ixa
a
A
LT0COU
STEM.
1 AFFIX.
||
t"r
o
■if
j
i
w
|
3
d
©
"a
1
33
2
-3
be
s
1
s
§
a
W
|
■
i2
|
i
i
<f)iX
cro4>
«
a
y
Av
oirX
$
4pY
Xdp
!o
d
■yvo
yvw
T
i
cs
irvp
M
e
PaX
/36X
4
!o
I
j'
V€|X
06
T
a
V<!
TO/t
m
66
<r
4>d
T
ts
114: TABLES. § 76.
76. D. CHIEF RULES OF GREEK SYNTAX.
I. An Appositive agrees in case with its subject. § 393.
II. The Subject of a finite verb is put in the Nominative. 400.
III. Substantives independent of grammatical construction are
put in the Nominative. 401.
A. General Rule for the Genitive. The Point of Departure and the
Cause are put in the Genitive ; or, The Genitive is used to ex-
press that of or from which something is or is done. 403.
IV. Words of separation and distinction govern the Genitive. 404.
V. The Comparative Degree governs the Genitive. 408.
VI. The origin, source, and material are put in the Genitive. 412.
VII. The theme of discourse or of thought is put in the Gen. 413.
VIII. Words of plenty and want govern the Genitive. 414.
IX. The whole of which a part is taken is put in the Genitive. 415.
X. Words of sharing, beginning, and touch govern the Genitive. 424.
XL The motive, reason, and end in view are put in the Gen. 429.
XII. Price, value, merit, and crime are put in the Genitive. 431.
XIII. Words of sensation and of mental state or action govern the
Genitive. 432.
XIV. The time and place in which are put in the Genitive. 433.
XV. The author, agent, and giver are put in the Genitive. 434.
XVI. An adjunct defining A thing or property is put in the Gen-
itive ; or, A substantive, adjective, or adverb, as such, governs
the Genitive. 435.
B. A word may govern the Genitive, by virtue of an included substantive, adjective, or
adverb. 436.
C. The Compounds of Alpha Privative govern the Genitive. 436.
D. General Rule for the Dative Objective. The Object of Approach
or of Influence is put in the Dative ; or, An Indirect Object
is put in the Dative ; or, The Dative is used to express that to or
for which something is or is done. 448.
XVII. Words of nearness and likeness govern the Dative. 449.
XVIII. The object of influence is put in the Dative. 452.
E. Substantive verbs take a Dative of the possessor. 459.
F. General Rule for the Dative Residual. An Attendant Thing or
Circumstance, simply viewed as such, is put in the Dative. 465.
XIX. The means and mode are put in the Dative. 466.
XX. The time and place at which are put in the Dative. 469.
XXI. The direct object and the effect of an action are put in the
Accusative. 472.
G. An adjunct simply considered as modifying a verb is put in the Accusative. 472.
Causatives govern the Accusative together with the case of the included verb. 473.
H. Adverbs of swearing are followed by the Accusative. 476.
XXII. The Accusative is used in specifying to what part, property, &c.
a word or expression applies 481.
XXIII. Extent of time or space is put in the Accusative. 482.
XXIV. The Accusative is often used adverbially, to express degree,
manner, order, &c. 483.
XXV. The Compellative of a sentence is put in the Vocative. 484.
J. Agreement is commonly according to form, but often rather according to sense. 493.
XXVI. An Adjective agrees with its subject in gender, number, and
case. 504.
XXVII. A Pronoun agrees with its subject in gender t number, and per-
son. 505.
§76. RULES OF SYNTAX. 115
The relative commonly takes the case of the antecedent, when the relative clause limits
or defines an antecedent in the Genitive or Dative, and the relative would properly
be an Accusative depending upon a verb. 554.
K. The repetition of the relative is commonly avoided, either by ellipsis, or by the
substitution of & personal pronoun or of a demonstrative. 562.
XXVIII. The Article is prefixed to substantives, to mark them as
definite. 520.
XXIX. A Verb agrees with its subject in member and person. 568.
L. The Neuter Plural has regularly its verb in the singular. 569.
M. The uses of the Voices are sometimes interchanged. 575.
The Passive Voice has for its subject a complement of the Active, commonly a direct,
but sometimes an indirect complement. Any other word governed by the Act. , and not
in apposition with this, may remain unchanged with the Pass. The subject of the
Active is commonly expressed, with the Pass., by the Gen. with a preposition. 586.
XXX. The Definite Tenses express the action as doing at the time ;
the Indefinite, simply as performed in the time ; and the Complete,
as complete at the time. In the Indicative, this time is marked as
present or future by the primary tenses, and as past by the sec-
ondary ; in the other modes, it is not marked. 590.
N. The uses of the Tenses are often interchanged. 602.
XXXI. The Indicative expresses fact; the Subjunctive, present con-
tingency ; and the Optative, past contingency. 613.
0. The Subjunctive regularly follows a tense referring to present or future time ; and
the Optative, a tense referring to past time. 617.
P. After a final conjunction, (a) an object of present forethought is expressed by the
Sub)., or (b) in the Future, by the Ind. ; but (c) an object of past forethought, by
the Opt., or (d), to mark it as now contrary to fact, by a prior tense of the Ind. 624.
Q. In prohibitions with /u>?, the Present is put in the Imperative, and the Aorist in
the Subjunctive. 628.
R. In the hypothetical period, (a, b) if the premise is presented as already decided in
point of fact, it takes the Indicative ; (c) if it is presented as undecided, but ivith pres-
ent expectation of decision, it takes the Subjunctive; (d) otherwise, it takes the Opta-
tive. In the first case, the conclusion is commonly in the Ind. or Imv. ; in the sec-
ond, in the Fut. Ind. or an equivalent ; and in the third, in theGV. with av. 631.
S. A relative clause commonly uses the modes like other sentences to which it is most
nearly akin . 640.
T. The Optative is the finite mode appropriate to Indirect Discourse in past time. 643.
U. The uses of the Finite Modes are often interchanged. 649.
XXXII. The Imperative is the most direct expression of an act of the
will. 655.
XXXIII. The Infinitive is construed as a neuter noun. 663.
XXXIV. The Subject of the Infinitive is put in the Accusative. 666.
V. The Infinitive often forms an elliptical command, request, counsel, salutation, ex-
clamation, or question. 670.
W. Some connectives are followed by the Infinitive ; especially «s, wore, olos, and
00-05. 671.
XXXV. A participle and substantive are put absolute in the Gen-
itive ; an impersonal participle, in the Accusative. 675.
X. A Participle is often preceded by cos or wo-nep, chiefly to mark it as subjective. 680.
Y. Impersonal verbals in -reov, or -re'a, (a) govern the same cases as the verbs from
which thev are derived ; and (b) have sometimes the agent in the Accusative, instead
of the Dative. 682.
XXXVI. Adverbs modify sentences, phrases, and words; chiefly verbs,
adjectives, and other adverbs. 685.
Negation, as desired, feared, or assumed, uses /liij ; but otherwise, ov. 686.
XXXVII. Prepositions govern adjuncts, and mark their relations. 688.
Z. A Preposition in composition often governs the same case, as when it stands by
itself. 699.
XXXVIII. Conjunctions connect sentences and like parts of a sen-
tence. 700.
The uses of the particles are often interchanged. 703.
The Interjection is independent of grammatical construction 684 b.
116
TABLES. PROSODY.
§77.
IV. PROSODY AND PRONUNCIATION.
77. A. Table of Feet.
The Numeral prefixed to each Class marks the number of Breves 3
n its measure.
1.
[2u\Xa/3r? Bpax«a,
Short Syllable,
w
f*6\l
2.
[2i/\\a/3?7 Mcucpd,
Long Syllable,
fify.]
Hvpptxtos,
Pyrrhic,
( :
p.be.
3.
"la/x^os,
Iambus, Iamb,
SB ,
pAvu.
Tpoxcuos, Xo/3€toj,
Trochee, Choree,
^
fJLTJKOS.
TpLppaxvs,
Tribrach,
^,_^
pdvopuev.
4.
A&KTv\o$,
Dactyl,
— s*.w
Suxrere.
' Apo.it ai<TT os,
Anapaest,
^^
edeXuj.
"Lirovoeios,
Spondee,
Clbfa.
'Ap.<f>Lftpaxvs,
Amphibrach,
w ^
%8<tiK€V.
HpoKe\ev<rpiaTiK6$,
Proceleusmatic,
-,_-.^w
\ey6pevos.
5.
KpTjTiKSs, ' Ap.<plp.a,Kpos,
Cretic, Amphimacer,
_
ddxroputi.
BaKxeios,
Bacchius,
w
Xeywrai.
'AvTifi&Kxeios,
HaLuv a,
Antibacchius,
m ^
awfapiev.
Paeon I.,
ww^.
8uxr6p.ei>os.
Jlalwv p',
Paeon II.,
w — _^.
iydpopev.
llaiwp y,
Pajon III.,
w_ — w
€dt\ V Te.
Haliav 5',
Paeon IV.,
— .««<
deo<repri$.
6.
Xoplapfiios,
'AvTia-rrao-TOit
Choriamb,
_w
a(a^op.tvwv.
Antispast,
w ~
eyelpwpuev.
Aua/z,/3os,
Diiamb,
w— .
ao<pwTip(j}v.
AtTp6xa.t.os,
Ditrochee,
_^__-
aiV<ratre.
'IwviKbs dirb p-elfovos,
Falling Ionic,
-w
fiovXevere.
'IwinKbs air iXacrcovos,
Kising Ionic,
w^,
etfeXifcret.
MoXo<T(r6s,
Molossus,
pwrjo-rripw.
7.
'EttI rpiros a,
'EirirpiTos j8',
Epitrite I.,
^_
eydpuvrai.
Epitrite II.,
_-W
evirpoG&irwv.
'EirirpiTos y,
Epitrite III.,
^
ijyovpAvuv.
'EirLrpiTO* 8 ,
Epitrite IV.,
,
(iovXetxreie.
8.
ASxfuos,
Dochmius,
_ ipovKevSprju.
Ai<TTr6i>5eios,
Dispondee,
fiovXefouvTcu.
78. B. Metrical Description and Analysis.
I. Give a general description of the Metre in which the Poem is written.
II. Describe the particular Verse.
Monomcter ) Acatalectic ) consist- ) 1
Dimeter, &c. \ Catalectic, &c. ) ' ing of ) 2,&c.
TMaso 1 Peiltliemim > )
which are — . The Caesura is the \ v V Hephthemim, > after — .
T4. : fl Dactylic
11 1S Iambic, &c
Feet,
[Fern.]
Pastoral, &c,
III. Analyze by [Dipodies and] Feet.
-«& | HL *<, | W* i by j ***£, | Eule.
§ 79. PRONUNCIATION. 117
79. C. Methods op Pronunciation.
[a. The directions here given do not apply to 7 before k, y, \, or g,
where it is regarded as a nasal, having the sound of ng in king : dyyeXos,
\fry£. Those for d, rj, and « apply also to a, fl, and a>. See 137 c, 109.
b. Where consonants or the rough breathing are not specially noticed,
it will be understood that they have the prevalent sounds of the corre-
sponding letters in English : thus, p, 8, £, X, p., v, ir, p, t, <j>, i|r, \ pro-
nounced like b, d, z, I, m, n, p, r, t, ph, ps, h, in bud, zeal, p/uintom, rap,
hops; y, k, hard, like g, k, in keg ; 0, £, <r, sharp, like th, x, s, in sixth.
The smooth breathing simply marks the absence of the rough.
c. To avoid confusion, the terms protracted and abrupt are used below
to mark what are commonly called, in English orthoepy, long and short
sounds; and the term ictus (Lat., stroke, beat), to denote that stress of
the voice which in English we usually call accent. Any secondary ictus
needed in long words, may commonly be placed as their formation and
the ear seem to require.]
1. Ancient Greek Method, d. The pronunciation of every lan-
guage, from the very laws of language, is in a continual process of change,
more or less rapid. And in respect to the Greek, there is full internal
evidence, both that its pronunciation had materially changed before its
orthography became fixed, and that it has materially changed since.
Therefore, as there is no art of embalming sounds, the ancient method can
now only be inferred, and, in part, with much uncertainty. For the
probable pronunciation of the simple vowels, see 107. (e) In the diph-
thongs, the sounds of the two elements seem originally to have been sim-
ply combined, and uttered with a single impulse of the voice. But the
mode of representing Greek words in Latin (92 b) shows that, in some
diphthongs, one of these sounds was early lost or became obscure, (f )
The consonants seem, in general, to have been pronounced like the cor-
responding letters in English ; \> however, resembling the German guttu-
ral ch more than the English k, and doubled or combined consonants
being both sounded. — For probabilities respecting the details of the An-
cient Method, see "History of the Greek Alphabet and Pronunciation,"
by Professor Sophocles ; from whose Romaic Grammars, the following
statement of Method 2 has been chiefly condensed. It shows how greatly
the Greek, like the English, has been affected by the precession of vowels.
2. Modern Greek Method, g. Vowels: a like a in father ; but
after the sound of t, more like a in peculiarity : c or at a little longer than
e in men : 1, tj, -j|, «i, 01, v, or vi, like i in machine : o or <■> nearly as in
obey : ov like 00 in moon. In av, €v, i)v, a>v, the v has the sound of P be-
fore p, -y, 8, I, X, a, v, p, or a vowel ; but otherwise, that of <|> : (pevyw,
avros, pronounced (frtpyw, &<f>r6s.
h. Consonants : p nearly as v (a little softer) : -y before the sound of 6
or 1, a little stronger than y in yes ; otherwise guttural, very nearly like
the German g in Tag : 8 like th in the : k like k (somewhat softened be-
fore the sound of € or 1) ; but after the sound of ng, like g in go : X and v
like I and n ; but before the sound of 1, like li in filial, and ni in onion ;
while final v in av, lav, Iv, trvv, or the article, sounds like ng before k or
I, and like m before ir or \|f (rbv Kaipov, abv irdXei pron. tong-gerdn, (sim-
bdli) : x, ik like p, ps ; but after the sound of m, like b, bs : <r like s in
so ; but before p, 7, 8, 5, X, p., v, p, like z (so even <r final in the article, as
T\>i/s /3a<rt\ers rrjs yrjs, pron. tooz-vasilis tiz-yis) : t like t ; but after v, like
d (so even in initial t after ay, «dv, 4v, crvv, or the article ; as *v tiutj,
118 TABLES. — PRONUNCIATION. § 79.
pron. en-dimt) : <j> nearly as / (a little softer) : \ like the German ch.
See a, b. As in English, a consonant doubled is sounded but once.
i. The rough breathing is silent ; and the quantity of a vowel is not
considered. The ictus is placed according to the written accent. A pro-
clitic is pronounced as if a part of the word which it precedes ; and an
enclitic, as if a part of the word which it follows. The accent of an en-
clitic is only regarded when the preceding word is accented on the ante-
penult : thus \7\eKral /xoi has a secondary ictus on Krai.
3. English Method, j. Modern scholars have pronounced the Greek
variously ; commonly according to the analogy of their respective lan-
guages. Hence the following method, though not closely approaching
the ancient, has been extensively used in England and this country :
k. Simple Voivels : tj, v, «, like e in mete, u in tube, o in note (tvtttt)-
cwv) : €, o, like e in let, o in dot ; but before another vowel, or at the end of
a word, like e in real and o in go (iv, \eovre, to) : a and i, in general, like
a and i in English; when protracted, like a in hate, i in pine; when
abrupt, like a in hat, i in pin. At the end of a word, i is always pro-
tracted ; but a, except in monosyllables, takes the sound of a in era : avrl,
fxia, rd. If a or i receives the ictus, whether primary or secondary, and
is followed by a single consonant or £, it is protracted in the penult, but
abrupt in any preceding syllable (except that a is here protracted, if the
next vowel is 6 or i before another voweb : i'fw • irarepa, KaratpiX^u • rafmnt
See c. — P affects an abrupt vowel preceding, in the same way as r in
English : ap/xa, 'Ep/xrjs, 8pvis.
1. Diphthongs: at like the affirmative ay ; ci, ci in height; ot, oim oil ;
vt, ui in quiet ; av, au in liaul ; cv and T)v, eu in feud, Europe ; ov and »v,
ou in thou : eldviai, <pe&yoi, avrou, vi$. See a.
m. Consonants : tr like s in so ; but in the middle of a word before ji,
or at the end after tj or «, like z (arriaas • xoafiius, ^s) : <r and r never like
sh : x like ch in chaos: £, t|f, like x, ps, in ox, lips; but, when initial,
like z, s (&£p£ws, ipvx'fi). Of two initial consonants which cannot both he
pronounced with ease, the first is silent ; a consonant doubled is sounded
but once ; and p is pronounced bike p : p.va, wrr/aav, tppw. See a, b.
n. In dissyllables, the ictus is on the penult ; in polysyllables, on the
penult if long in quantity, but otherwise on the antepenult.
4. " Continental Method." o. Many of our scholars prefer a
method of pronouncing Greek more like that which prevails, though with
much variety, upon the continent of Europe. This method, in the details
of which there is not yet full agreement, appears to be taking, in our
countiy, a form like the following :
j). Simple Vowels: d, a, like a in father, fast (nearly as in man) ; ij, «, e
in fete, men (or a in machine) ; Z,X,i in machine, pin (or direct) ; a, o, o in
hope, hop (or obey) ; v, v, u in tube, duet, or yet closer, like the French u.
Cf. 107. The distinction between vowels long and short by nature should
be carefully observed : irpdy/ia ■ d-f), 8e • *Ipis • \6ywv • <rvs, <rv6s.
q. Diphtlwngs: at like the affirmative ay (by some closer, like ai in
aisle) ; «i, ci in height ; ot, oi in oil ; vt, uee in queen ; av, ou in loud ; cv,
i)v, eu in feud ; ov, wv, ou in soup : eldviai, avrov, <f>e&yoi, vicp. See a.
r. Consonants : £ like z (by some, like a soft dz) : \, by some, like ch
in clxaos ; by others, like the German guttural ch: x^ip-i.^. Every con-
sonant should be pronounced, and with a uniform sound except v (a) ; the
doubling of a consonant should be, at least, slightly marked ; and p
should be rougher than p : pva., trT-qaaw, fiMWiov, ippw. See b.
t. The ictus is placed according to the written accent.
§ 80. . GREEK APPENDIX. 119
80. IIAPAPTHMA 'EAAHNIKON.
[o. *OP0OrPA$IA. STOix«ia elements, "ypappaTa letters; iiri<rrjpM..
4?(avf\tvra voivels : fipax^a short, p.aKpd long, dixpova doubtful, dlcpdoyyoi
diphthongs. Evpxpwva consonants : Tjp.£<pa>va semivowels, vypd liquids,
<Tvp.<pwva dtrrXa double consonants ; &<pa>va mutes, i/>7Ad smooth, /*eVa mid-
dle, Saata rough. SvXXapT) syllable ; XP 0V0S quantity.
p\ IIvevfiaTa breathings: 5a<rv rough, \f/~iX6v smooth. IIpocra>8uxi
(rbvoi) accents : d£eia acute, fiapeia grave, irepi<riru)ix£vq circumflex. STiy-
]p&l points: TeXeia ffTCfftfy period, p,6<Tn ffTtyplj colon, viroa-Tiyp.^ comma.]
■y. 'ETTMOAOriA. Td tov Xo-yov o-roixcta Xeyourac tS5e • [/cXtrd]
dpGpov, ovofxa, iirlQerov, avrawpia, p^pa • [fi/cXira] tirippT]ua, irp60c<ris,
crvvSco-uos, lirup»vT]p.a. [KXfcris, o~vyKp«ris, avfvyla.']
8. Tov ovdparos al irr<o<r€is 6vop.&£optcu [evdelai] op0^| rj ovoucuttiki 1 !,
kXtitik^, [7rXa7iai] -y€Viicf|, Sotikt 1 ), alrta-riK^ (179) ■ rd 8e rpla y*vr\ (174),
dpo-€VLKov, OtjXvkov, ovSercpov ■ [rd 5e rpla irpocwira, irpwrov, Scv-rcpov,
rpirov.] TpiirXovs d' io~Tlt> waavTus 6 dpiOpbs, dvXaSr] cvikos, Svucbs, itXti-
0vvtikos (178). Tov riri0€TOv ol (3a0p.ol XtyovTat. 0€tikos, o-vyKpiTiKbs,
tnrcpOeriKos (256).
€. T/)e?5 £x ei 8ia0co-6is to pt]pa, 4v€p7T]TiK'f|v, |iio-T]v, ira0T]TiK^v (266) •
/cal iv endo-Tv 5ta06ret irhre SiaKpiuovrai l-yicXio-cis, &v rivo-apes p.kv irapep.-
4>a-ri.Kai, 6pumicf|, viroTaKTtK-fi, cvktiic?|, irpo<rraKTiK^|, fda 8e d-rraptp.-
(paTO$ • p.ipos 5e tov pilaris eari Kal t) uctoxti (269). Oi \povoi tov p-q-
fiaros XtyovTcu w5e (267) ■ cveorws, irapaTariicbs, piXXwv, [per 6Xtyov
\iiXXoiv,] dopio-TOS, irapa.KcCp.cvos [rj o-vvtcXikos], tnrepo-vvTcXiKOS. [Atf-
£t]<ris o-vXXa(3iK7i Kal xpowq, dvaSiirXaa-iao-uos, 277.]
{. STNTASIS. Ao-yos 6vop.d{eTai Adpoiais Xt&wp aicipaiov drjXova-a
Sidvoiav. 'YitokcCucvov X4yerai r6 irepl o5 6 \670s ■ /cai KarT|-yopovp^vov t)
KaTq , yop T lr va > T0 KaT0 ^ T °v faroKeifxe'vov Xey6p.evov (56 b). Aid p.bvov tov
pt|paTos KaTrryopetTai ti. — Meraf3aTiica kclXovvtcli to. p^txara t& Toidvdt
ivtpyeiav drjXovvra, ijris e£ dvdyKrjs cis irpdcruirov rj irpdy/xa 8id<popov tov
inroK€ifj.frov, t6 7rapd ypap.p.aTt.Koh dvTiKcCuevov [object] Xey6p.ei>ov, /iera-
/3aiWi (58 c).
T]. Ilapep^paTiKOv pharos t6 viroKeip.evov Tiderat /car' dvouacrriK'fjv (400) •
Kal Ta6rrj o~up.<j>6>V€i r6 prjfia /car dpiOpov re /cat irpdo-wirov (568). — IIXci-
ovcuv 6vtuv tQ>v tov pruxaTos viroKeip-huiv Kal erepoirpocrc&irwv, riderac t6
prjp.a /card to liriKpaTc'orcpov ■ viKq. 5' del t6 irp»TOV to ScvTcpov irpdawTrov,
Kal TovTo-rb Tpfrrov (496 d).
0. 2xfjp.a 'Attikov. Wnvdaai p.hroi ol 'AttikoI irXT]0wriicf|v ovoaa-
(ttik^V ov>8€T€pav prjp.aTi Ivikw irapaTidivai (569).
1, T/75 dira-pcp-cpaTOv t6 viroKeifieuov TideraL Kar ttlnaTtK^v (670).
K. T6 4iru0€TOV Kal i] ueroX"?! crvfiipoivovai rols ets d dva<ptpovTai dvo/xaai,
Kara yivos, dpiGpbv, itt<3o-iv (504). — noXXtDj/ tQu duop-druv Evtiov, Ttderat
to iirldeT op f\ i) p-troxh itXt]0vvtik(Ss ' iirl jueV d\J/0\ wv > c ^ re bp.OY€V(5v cfre
120 . TABLES. — GREEK RULES. • §80.
erepo-yevwv (223 a), Kar ovSt'repov yivos ' eVi 8e k^^6\<av, rOsv p.ev opo-ye-
V<5v, Kara rb rots dvofiact kolvov yivos, rwc 8e knpoytv&v, /card rd cmicpa-
TCOTtpov (496).
X. 'H dvac^opiKT) XeyopJvrj dvrwvvpia avpupwve'i r£ eavrrjs y\yov\L(vta Kara
Y^vos Kal dpiGpbv /cat Trpocrwirov (505). — T« crvvraKriKip 8e a-x^ari 5 ica-
Xetrot fe'X^is ?) e'tpeX^is, cAxcrai ^ dvriovvpua els rr\v irrCjaiv rod iryovp,e'vov ■
avrurrplxpias 5' eV0* ore \-oi 17 dvruvvpia £Xkci rd rryov'pA.vov (554 a, c).
p.. 'Ovopara, rd fikv irpbs rb avrb irpdcrwrrov -^ irpd-ypa avcupepo/xeva,
op/HOirTWTtts rlBevrai • tovto be ovopaTttv TrpocrGecris KaXeir cu (393). Td
8e 7rpos Sidcpopa dXXw d\\o vw order cerai eVi "ytviKfjs (435 a).
v. roaicfj <rwrd<nroj'rai iirlOera Kal p-qp.ara rd irX^piicreus (414), p.eGe'-
|€«s (424), 4pir€ip£as, empeXeCas, p.v^p.tjs (432), liriTvxfas (426 s), <J>€i8o€s
(405 b) 0-Tjp.a.PTucd, Kal rd rovrois kvavrla ' irpbs 8e £k rdv iiridirup, rd els
-iKos \-ffyovra (444), rd £k tov a- OTepijTiicoO aivdera (436 b), Kal rd irapa-
Oeriicd (406 s), rd crvyKpiTiKa dyXadr) Kal virepOenicd, Kal rovrois avd\oya •
iK be t&v prjpidTU)!', rd applied, (407) Kal virapKTiKa (437), rd evdpgecas f) X'/j-
£e«S o-r]iiai>TiKd (425, 405), Kal rd t<Sv alcrQi\<rmv, ttXtjv tov opcS (432 a, h).
£. Aotikt) cvvrdaaovrai eirldera Kal p-qixara, rd 6potOTt]Tos, dvaXoYias,
irpo<r€yy£<r€ft)S, p.££e<i>s, evavTionjTos, Sit] -y^j crews, Sdcreus o-rfpuvriKa, rd re
cJ>i\ikt)v 7) tyGpiK-^v 7rp6s rim SidGecrtv b-r\kovvra (450 s).
o. AtTiaTiKfj (rwrdtrcoj^rot rd /5/ws ?) d/ieVws peTo-Paritcd ^/xara (472).
AiitXtJ alriariKrj o~vvrao~o~Qvrai rd iKereuriKa, rd iraiSeuriicd, rd evSucrcws 7)
ckSvctcws 0-rjp.avTLKa, rd r^v twoiav e"x ovTa T °v € $ % ko,k«s Xe-yeiv 7) iroitiv
(480 c).
it. 'O xpovos oirdrc ij Iv <5 yiveral n, eV^epercu SotiktJ ifj "yeviKfj, etre
dirpo06T<o efre €p/irpo0€T« [without or with a preposition, 433, 469, 487].
p. /jhraufomrcM) ^^ ( 8<miri|t (469), ) i/lirpo irov
|5L* ( erased h™^ ^ *± Z a.poOirov.
' oir6<r€ ' > aiTiaTiKT)s (472 g), '
<r. T6 atnov \ / 5td ycviktis (410 s).
J J Sid 8otikt]s (466 a).
Tb Sp-yavov 5t o5 yiveral ti, J \ 81a Sotiktis (466).
'O Tp<Siro« Kad' 6v yiveral ri, ( . . J 5id Sotiktjs (467).
T6 Stcupopas ^rpov f ^<peperai \ &4 Sotiktjs (468).
T6 KaTa ti V / 81' alTiaTiKijs (481).
To iro<rbv r67rou ^ XP^ V0V I I ^' alTtaTiKfjs (482).
To xo<rbv inl dvraWay&v I \ did *y€ViKT]S (431).
t. Ty opio-TiKT], tis 0€tik6v ri Kal PePaiov ■jraptvrdo'r), irpe'irei rb diro-
<paTLKbv OT • rais 5£ Xoiirats t»v IykXCccwv, ai ovk 6vrus ti 8v irapivracri,
dWd n i7roTi0ep.€vov ^ irpocrTa<r<r6p.evov if €vktov, irpiirei rb MH (731 a).
END OF TABLES.
INTRODUCTION.
81. The Ancient Greeks were divided into three principal
races : the Ionic, of which the Attic was a branch, the Doric,
and the iEolic. These races spoke the same general language,
but with many dialectic peculiarities.
82. The Ancient Greek Language (commonly called sim-
ply the Greek) has accordingly been divided by grammarians
into four principal Dialects, the Attic, Ionic, Doric, and
^Eolic.
Of these the Attie and Ionic were far the most refined, and had far the
greatest unity within themselves. The Doric and iEolic were not only
much ruder, but, as the dialects of races widely extended and united by
no common bond of literature, abounded in local diversities. Some of
the varieties of the Doric or iEolic were separated from each other by dif-
ferences scarcely less marked than those which distinguished them in
common from the other dialects. Of the iEolic, the principal varieties
were the Lesbian, the Boeotian, and the Thessalian. The Doric, accord-
ing as it was more or less removed from the Attic and Ionic, was char-
acterized as the stricter or the milder Doric : the former prevailing in the
Laconic, Tarentine, Cretan, Cyrenian, and some other varieties ; the lat-
ter in the Corinthian, Syracusan, Megarian, Delphian, and some others.
83. The Greek colonies upon the coast of Asia Minor and
the adjacent islands, from various causes, took the lead of the
mother country in refinement ; and the first development of
Greek literature which secured permanence for its productions
was among the Asiatic Ionians. This development was Epic
Poetry, and we have, doubtless, its choicest strains remaining
to us in the still unsurpassed Homeric poems.
The language of these poems, often called Epic and Homeric, is the old
Ionic, with those modifications and additions which a wandering bard
would insensibly gather up, as he sang from city to city, and those poetic
licenses which are always allowed to early minstrelsy, when as yet the
language is unfixed and critics are unknown. The Old Ionic of the Epic
poets was followed by the Middle Ionic of the Elegiac poets ; and this
again by the New Ionic, found in the prose of Herodotus and Hippocrates.
84. The next dialect which attained distinction in litera-
ture was the JEolic of Lesbos, in which the lyric strains of
Alcseus and Sappho were sung. But its distinction was short-
122 INTRODUCTION. § 84.
lived, and we have scarce any remains of the dialect except
some brief fragments. There arose later among the iEolians
of Bceotia another school of Lyric Poetry, of which the most
illustrious ornament was Pindar ; who is commonly said, how-
ever, but loosely, to have written in the Doric.
85. Meanwhile, the Athenians, a branch of the Ionian race,
were gradually rising to such political and commercial impor-
tance, and to such intellectual pre-eminence among the states
of Greece, that their dialect, the Attic, adorned by such drama-
tists as vEschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, Aristophanes, and
Menander, by such historians as Thucydides and Xenophon,
by such philosophers as Plato and Aristotle, and by such ora-
tors as Lysias, ^Eschines, and Demosthenes, became at length
the standard language of the Greeks, and, as such, was adopted
by the educated classes in all the states. It became the gen-
eral medium of intercourse, and, with a few exceptions, the
universal language of composition. Its diffusion was especially
promoted by the conquests of the Macedonians, who adopted it
as their court language.
a. As its use extended, it naturally lost some of its peculiarities, and
received many additions ; and thus diffused and modified, it ceased to be
regarded as the language of a particular state, and received the appellation
of the Common Dialect or Language.
b. The pure Attic has been divided into three periods : the Old, used
by Thucydides, ' the Tragedians, and Aristophanes ; the Middle, used by
Xenophon, Isocrates, and Plato ; and the New, used by Demosthenes, and
the other Orators of his time, and the later Comedians. The period of
the Common dialect may be regarded as commencing with the subjection
of Athens to the Macedonians.
c. The exceptions to the universality acquired by the Attic dialect are
found almost entirely in poetry. Here the later writers felt constrained
to imitate the language of the great early models. The Epic poet never
felt at liberty to depart from the dialect of Homer. Indeed, the old Epic
language was regarded by subsequent poets in all departments as a sacred
tongue, the language of the gods, from which they might enrich their
several compositions.
d. The culture of the Athenians was so liberal, and their intercourse
with other states so extensive, that not only Attic poets, but even prose-
writers, felt at liberty to borrow some forms of expression which belonged
more strictly to other dialects.
86. Of the Doric dialect, in proportion to its wide extent,
we have very scanty remains ; and of most of its varieties our
knowledge is derived from passages in Attic writers, from mon-
uments, and from the works of grammarians. In Greece it-
self, it seems scarcely to have been applied to any other branch
of literature than Lyric Poetry. In the more refined Dorian
colonies of Italy and Sicily, it was employed in Philosophy by
§ 89. DIALECTS. 123
the Pythagoreans (Archytas, Timseus, &c), in Mathematics
by the great Archimedes, in Comedy by Epicharmus and his
successors, and in Pastoral Poetry (which was confined to this
dialect) by Theocritus, Bion, and Moschus.
87. In this grammar, an attempt is made to exhibit first
and distinctly, under each head, the language in its standard
form, that is, the Attic and the purer Common Greek ; and
afterwards to specify the important dialectic peculiarities. It
will not, however, be understood that everything which is
ascribed to one of the dialects prevails in that dialect through-
out, or is found in no other.
a. This applies especially to the Doric and iEolic, which, with great
variety within themselves (§ 82), are closely akin to each other. By the
term /Eolic, as employed by grammarians, is commonly denoted the culti-
vated iEolic of Lesbos.
b. Grammar flourished among the Greeks only in the decline of their
language, and the Greek grammarians usually treated the dialects with
little precision. Whatever they found in the old Ionic of Homer that
seemed to them more akin to the later-cultivated iEolic, Doric, or even
Attic, than to the new Ionic, they did not hesitate to ascribe to those dia-
lects. Even in the common language, whatever appeared to them irreg-
ular or peculiar, they usually referred to one of the old dialects.
88. The wide diffusion of the Greek by the Macedonian
conquerors, and subsequently the conquest of the Greek world
by the Romans, much affected the purity of the later language,
which became especially degenerate in the Byzantine period.
a. The Macedonians, who had previously spoken a rude and semi-
barbarous dialect of the Greek, retained and diffused some of the peculi-
arities of their native tongue. These are termed Maccdonic, or, some-
times, from Alexandria, the principal seat of Macedonian, and indeed of
later Greek culture, Alexandrine. Words and forms borrowed from the
language of the Romans are called Latinisnis.
b. The Greek, as the common language of the civilized world, was em-
ployed in the translation of the Jewish Scriptures, and the composition of
the Christian. When so employed by native Jews, it naturally received
a strong Hebrew coloring ; and, as a Jew speaking Greek was called
'FA\i]Via-T7js (from iWyvifa, to speak Greek), this form of the language has
been termed the Hellenistic (or by some the Ecclesiastical) dialect.
89. Since the destruction of the Eastern Empire by the
Turks, the fusion of the Byzantine and Ecclesiastical Greek
with the popular dialects of the different districts and islands
of Greece has produced the Modern Greek, or, as it is often
called, by a name derived from the Roman Empire in the East,
the Romaic. The Greek, therefore, in its various forms, has
never ceased to be a living language ; and it offers to the stu-
dent a series of compositions, not only including many of the
highest productions of genius, but extending through a period
of nearly three thousand years.
BOOK I.
ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY.
Tpafi/xdruv re cvvOeaut
'E^eupov avToiis.
Prometheus of jEschylus.
CHAPTEE I.
CHARACTERS.
.90. The Greek language is written with
tiventy-four letters, two breathings, three accents, four
marks of punctuation, and a few other characters.
1. For the Letters (called the Alphabet from Alpha, Beta,
just as we speak of " the A, B, C "), see Table, § 1.
Remarks. 1. Double Forms. Sigma final is written s) not
final, a- : as, araais. Many editors, without authority from manu-
scripts, use the final form at the end of any word compounded with
another: as. 7rposcis<ficpeis. The other double forms are used indif-
ferently : as, /3j}3i or GrjBt-
2. Ligatures. Two or more letters are often united, except in
recent editions, into one character, called a ligature (ligatura, tie) :
as, a for ov, r (named ort or ariyp.a) for or. See § 3.
91. 3. Numeral Power. To denote numbers under a thou-
sand, the Greeks employed the letters of the alphabet, and three
obsolete letters termed Episema (£nlcrr)p.ov, sign, mark), as shown in
§ 1, with the mark (') over them : as, a 1, i 10, i(3' 12, pay 123.
The first eight letters, with Vau, represented the nine units ; the next
eight, w r ith Koppa, the nine tens ; and the last eight, with San,
the nine hundreds. The thousands were denoted by the same let-
ters with the mark beneath : as, e' 5, <e 5,000, jcy or ay 23,000.
a. Sometimes the Greek letters, like our own, denote ordinal numbers,
according to their own order in the alphabet. In this way the books of
Homer are marked : as, 'IXiddos A, Z, ti, The Iliad, Books 1, 6, 24.
92. 4. Roman Letters. By the side of the Greek letters in
§ 1, are placed the Roman letters which take their place when Greek
w r ords are transferred into Latin or English : as, KvkXco^ Cyclops.
§ 96. CHARACTERS. 125
a. The letter y becomes n, when followed by another palatal ; but,
otherwise, g (137 c) : as, &yye\os, Lat. angelus, Eng. angel, <tvjkox^
syncope, \dpvy% larynx, Atylva iEgina.
b. The diphthong at becomes ce ; oi, oz ; a, I or e (before a consonant
almost always l) ; ov, u ; and vi, yi : as, $cu5pos Phiedrus, Bonaria
Boeotia, NetXof Nilus, Aapeios Darius, M??5eta Medea, MoOou Musa,
EiXddvLa Ilithyia. A few words ending in -aia and -oia are excepted : as,
Mcua Maia, Tpoio. Troia or Troja ; so also Aias Ajax. For a, xj, <}>, see 109.
93. II. The Breathings are the Smooth or Soft (spiritus
lenis : ' ), and the Rough (spiritus asper : * ), also called the
Aspirate (asplro, to breathe). The first denotes a gentle emis-
sion of the breath, such as is needed before the utterance of
any initial vowel, but in most languages is not marked ; the
second, a strong emission, such as in English is represented
by h.
a. The rough breathing becomes, in Latin and English, h, while the
smooth is not written : as, "E/crup Hector, "Epv% Eryx, 'P6x Rhea.
b. One of the breathings is placed over every initial vowel. For its
place over a diphthong, see 110.
c. An initial v has always the rough breathing to assist in its utterance
(as in English an initial long u is always preceded by the sound of y ;
thus, 5s, i^ets, as, in English, use, pronounced yuse, union) ; except in
the JEolic dialect, and in the Epic forms tffi/xes, ti/Afju, {Jfi/xe.
d. An initial p requires, for its proper vibration or rolling, a strong
aspiration, and is therefore always marked with the rough breathing : as,
ptu. ' When p is doubled, the first p has the smooth breathing, and the
second the rough (in Latin rrh) : as, Ilvppos Pyrrhus. Some excellent
editors, however, notwithstanding old usage and Latin analogy, now write
pp without the breathings : thus, II%>os.
94. III. The Accents are the Acute ( ' ), the Grave ( ),
and the Circumflex ( " or " ). For their use, see Prosody.
See also 5.
95. IV. The Marks of Punctuation are the Comma (, );
the Colon ( • ), taking the place of our colon and semicolon ;
the Period ( . ) ; and the Note of Interrogation ( ; ), which
has the form of ours ( / ) inverted.
To these some editors have judiciously added the Note of Exclama-
tion ( !).
96. V. Other- Characters, a. Coronis and Apostrophe.
The mark ( ' ), which at the beginning of a word is the smooth
breathing, over the middle is the Coronis (Kopavls, crooked
mark), or mark of crasis, and at the end, the Apostrophe
(124 b, 127) : as, ravrd for ra avrd, aXX' eyco for a\\a eyd>.
b. The Hyphen, Diaeresis, Dash, and Marks of Parenthesis and
Quotation are used in printing Greek as in English.
c. Among the other signs used by critics and editors are Brackets [],
to enclose words of doubtful authenticity; the Obelisk (t or — ), to
mark verses or words as faulty ; the Asterisk ( * ), to denote that some-
126 HISTORY OP ORTHOGRAPHY. § 96.
thing is wanting in the text ; and Marks of Quantity, viz. (-), to
mark a vowel or syllable as long ; ( w ), as short ; ( s or "" ), as either long
or short.
HISTORY OF GREEK ORTHOGRAPHY.
97. That the Greek alphabet was borrowed from the Phoe-
nician is abundantly established both by historical and by
internal evidence.
a. According to common tradition, letters were first "brought into
Greece by Cadmus, a Phoenician, who founded Thebes long before the
Trojan war. In illustration, we present in § 2 the common Hebrew
alphabet, which is substantially the same with the old Phoenician, placing
by the side the corresponding Greek letters, and also the Latin.
98. This borrowed alphabet received in the course of time
important modifications.
a. The original Phoenician alphabet had no proper vowels. The
Greeks, therefore, employed as such those letters which, as representing
various breathings or aspirate sounds, were nearest akin to vowels ; viz.
A, E, F, H, 1, andO.
b. The aspirate use of E and F still continued for a period, and hence
these letters when employed as vowels were distinguished by the term
\f.l\6v, smooth; thus, "E \fi\ov, T T \fi\bv. It will be observed that the
last of these letters, when used as a vowel, was somewhat changed in
form, and was put at the end of the old alphabet.
c. To the Phoenician alphabet the Greeks added the aspirates <f> and X,
the double consonant M>, and the sign for long o, Q, naturally placing
them at the end. In distinction, the short o was now termed "0 /xiKpuv,
small ; and the long o, "Q /«7a, great 0.
d. In the softening of the language, the labial breathing F, and also 9
and <7%, which were only rougher forms of K and 2, fell into disuse, and
these letters were retained only as numeral characters ; F and 9 i n their
proper places in the alphabet, but <7ft -at the end. The Latin alphabet,
which ours here follows, dropped <%), but retained the other two, F and Q,
in their proper places.
e. F (also named from its form the Digamma, i. e. the double Gamma)
is still found upon some inscriptions and coins, and performs an important
office in the explanation of the forms of the language. Its restoration by
Bentley to the Homeric poems has removed so many apparent hiatuses
and irregularities of metre, that we cannot doubt its existence, in the time
of Homer, though apparently even then beginning to lose its power.
CHAPTEE II.
FIGURES AFFECTING LETTERS AND SOUNDS.
99. The letters and sounds in words are subject to many
changes, called figures, as affecting the form of the word,
a. These changes may be either euphonic, poetic, or dialectic.
§ 105. FIGURES. 127
b. Euphonic changes are chiefly to avoid hiatus (the succession of dis-
tinct vowels wi Jiout an intervening consonant) ; to reduce the openness
of vowels (107, 114-116) ; to secure a proper rhythm ; and to prevent
excessive or undesirable combinations of consonants, and difficult or less
agreeable modes of beginning and ending words.
100. Iii the earliest Greek of which we have traces, the
prevalent method of preventing hiatus was by the insertion of
consonants ; particularly F and 2 (as in Latin v, b, and r), but
also A, $, &c. In the progress of the language, these inserted
consonants extensively dropped out, and the more rapid method
by contraction prevailed.
101. To give to the discourse a proper flow and rhythm,
especially in poetry, syllables are lengthened or shortened,
united or resolved.
102. To prevent undesirable combinations of consonants,
or modes of beginning and ending words, letters are dropped,
added, changed, and transposed.
a. The names below ending in -thesis and -ccrcsis are derived from com-
pounds of Tid-rj/ju, to put, and alptio, to take.
103. Figures (see § 6). Addition and Subtraction, a. Pro-
thesis (7rpo, before ; less properly Prosthesis) adds one or more let-
ters at the beginning of a word ; Epenthesis (eVt, to, ev, in), in the
middle ; and Paragoge (nap ay coy rj, a bringing beside), at the end : as,
X&s ey#<f?, heri, yesterday ; dvpos dv8pos (18) ; c'Uoai cticoarw, twenty.
b. By the extension of a vowel is meant its repetition, either in whole
or in part, either before or after : as, £ it, himself, cpQs cpocos, light.
c. Aphaeresis (two, from) takes one or more letters from the be-
ginning of a word ; Syncope (crvyK07rf}, abridgment), from the middle ;
and Apocope (throKonr), a cutting off), from the end : as, \elfico e'lftco,
libo, to pour ; narepos Trarpos, patris (18) ; dvd av, up.
d. One form of Apocope has received the special name of Apostrophe
or Elision (117).
104. Exchange. Metathesis (pcrd, among, interchangeably), or
Transposition, changes the order of letters ; and Antithesis (aim, in-
stead of) substitutes one letter for another : as, cdapdou tdpaOov, rdcraco
Tatrco.
a. When one letter thus becomes the same with an adjoining letter,
the change is called Assimilation : as, crvvkeyco crvWeyw, to collect.
105. Union, &c. a. Synasresis (crvv, together) unites two vow-
els (and thus two syllables) into one ; and Diaeresis (6\a, apart), or
Resolution, divides one vowel into two: as, voos vovs, mind; irats
nd'is, boy.
b. Synseresis is divided into Contraction, Crasis, and Synizcsis (117).
c. Systole (o~vcrTo\ri, a drawing in) shortens a long vowel ; and
Diastole (SiaoToAq, a drawing out) lengthens a short one : as, iraipos
erapos, comrade, gevos £elvos, stranger. For Precession, see 107, 113 s.
^iV£#s^
Libr
ary<
VOWELS. PRECESSION.
HAPTEE III.
TOWELS.
§10G.
s£T Qtllfomte-
106. The Greek has Jive simple voivels, and seven
diphthongs. Each of the simple vowels may be
either long or short, and each of the diphthongs
may have either a long or short prepositive, or
first vowel.
a. Of three vowels, the short and long sounds are represented by
the same letters (a, a ; I, I ; v, v) ; but of the other two, whose long
sounds occur far more frequently, by different letters (?, fj ; o, £).
b. When speaking of letters, and not of sounds, we say that the
Greek has seven vowels ; and call e and o the short vowels, because
they always represent short sounds, n and o> the long vowels, because
they always represent long sounds, and a, t, and v the doubtful vow-
els, because their form leaves it doubtful whether the sound is long
or short.
107. There is strong evidence, that, in general, these vowels
were pronounced nearly as follows : a like a in far, fast (not as in
fate) ; n, e, like e in they, then (not as in mete) ; * like i in machine,
pin (not as in pine) ; a>, o, like o in note, obey ; v like u in rule, full
(afterwards becoming closer, more like u in tube, or the still closer
Trench u or German u). They may hence be thus placed upon a
scale of precession or attenuation.
Entire
Openness.
Scale of attenuate
Scale o
01 att enuation
w t&e tongue. Leagt
Opening.
Least
h y the lips. V °P enhl g-
a. In general, 1 and v are termed the c/osg, and the others the open vow-
els ; but a is more open than € and o, and 1 is somewhat closer than v.
b. There is a strong tendency, in the progress of language, towards the
attenuation, or closer pronunciation, of the open, especially the long open
vowels (99). This change would be represented on the scale above by a
moving forward of the vowel from the left to the right ; and hence has
been called precession (pra3ce§sio, going forward). Thus the open a of the
old Greek became r\ in the relined Ionic ; and this again in the Modern
Greek has passed (as also v, €i, tj, 01, and m) into the closer sound of t.
§111. DIFHTHONGS. SYLLABICATION. 129
108. In the Greek diphthongs, the voice always passes
from a more open to a closer sound ; and the subjunctive, or
last vowel, is always i or v.
a. A short prepositive left time for the full utterance of the subjunc-
tive vowel, and the diphthong was then termed proper, as really combin-
ing two sounds ; but a long prepositive nearly or quite crowded out the
sound of the subjunctive, and the diphthong was then termed improper,
as though diphthongal only in appearance.
109. After a long, rj, and a>, the subjunctive 1 so lost its
sound, that it was at last merely written beneath the pre-
positive, if this was a small letter, and was then termed Iota
subscript (subscriptus, written beneath). With capitals, it still
remains in the line, but is not sounded. It is not represented
in Latin, except that, in a few compounds of &>§»/, g> becomes oe.
Thus, "~Ai8t]s or qdrjs Hades, epfja-aa Thressa, v Ui or J, where,
'Qidrj or adr) ode, song ; but rpaytobia tragoedia, tragedy.
a. Editors vary in the use of the 1 subscript, from different views of ety-
mology, &c. : as, contract infinitive ri/xav or rifx.au, adverbial datives Siry
or 6irv, 'Adi)vr}<n or ' Adr)vr\ai. So some have improperly written %<$>r)va,
irtyrjva (40, as if made directly from <f>aLvia, instead of the root <pav-), &c.
110. In diphthongs, except the three just mentioned (a, rj,
and »), the breathings and accents are written over the second
vowel, and thus often mark the union of the two vowels : as,
avrrj herself, but stmg cry ; rjvSa he spoke, but rjvac he shouted ;
Atfiav (a) Haemon, but "AiS^s (a).
a. If two vowels which might form a diphthong are pronounced sep-
arately, the second is commonly marked, as above, with a diaeresis ;
though the place of a breathing, accent, or i often renders this needless,
and it is then omitted by some : as in avrrj, txOvi, Xrii^oifirjv (109).
b. In the table (4), the vowels, simple and compound, are divided into
classes, according to the simple sound which is their sole or leading ele-
ment, as A sounds, &c. ; and into orders, according to the length of this
sound, or its combination with other sounds, as short vowels, &c. Vow-
els of the same class are termed cognate ; and those of the same order, co-
ordinate.
111. Syllabication. In Greek, a word has as many syl-
lables as it has simple vowels or diphthongs : noteeai has
four.
a. The last syllable in a word is termed the ultima (ultimus, last) ; the
last but one, the penultima or penult (pene, almost) ; and the last but
two, the antepenultima or antepenult (ante, before).
b. In the syllabication of a word, any consonant between two vowels
is now joined by most editors with the latter ; and so even two or more
consonants, — unless the first is a liquid, or the same with the second, or
a smooth mute before its cognate rough, when it is joined with the former
vowel (except in the case of \iv) : as, i-\J/r}-(pi-<T}x.e-da, a-arpa-Trru, e-fxvi)-
oBrjv • but 2p-yov, &v-rpov, &y-xi (137 c), 'Liriros, ra<r-<ru), Bdn-xos.
c. Words joined by crasis or elision are here regarded as a single word :
comp. gr. 6* I
130 EUPHONIC CHANGES. PRECESSION. §111.
as, dX-X' ot-5' 8-ti • so, in composition, i-7rd-v€ifii (4tti, dvd, elfxi). But the
elements of a compound word not so joined are here treated as separate
words : as, <rvv-eta-€tfju.
112. A vowel preceded by a consonant is said to be impure
(impurus, mixed, sc. with the consonant sound) ; otherwise, it
is said to be pure.
a. The same distinction is made in affixes "beginning with a vowel ;
and even the word itself and its stem are termed pure or impure, accord-
ing as these affixes are preceded by a vowel or consonant. Thus, in <rv6s
(14) the o and affix os are pure, and the same term, by an extension of its
use, is applied to the word and its stem <rv- ; while in yvw6s (17) the o and
os are impure, and the word itself and its stem yvir- are so termed.
113. The Greek vowels are subject to a great
number of Euphonic Changes, which may be
referred, for the most part, to two great heads,
the Precession of Vowels, and the Union of
Syllables.
i. precession of vowels.
114. The great tendency in Greek to the
attenuation of vowel sounds shows itself,
1.) In the interchange of vowels.
a. Precession especially affects a, as the most open of the
vowels, changing it, when short, to e and o ; and, when long,
to 17, and sometimes to a.
b. Hence, these three vowels may be regarded as kindred, and are
often interchanged in the formation and inflection of words. Thus, in the
verbs rptiru to turn, <TTp£<pw to twist, we find the stem in three forms,
Tpa.iT- rpeir- rpoir-, CTpa<p- <XTpe<p- arpofp-, as in the Eng. speak, spake,
spoken, or in the equivalent Germ., where precession is carried still
further, spreclie, spricht, sprach, gcsprochen ; and in prfyvvpu to break, we
find the forms pay- pyy- puy- (cf. frango, fregi). The change extends to
diphthongs : thus, in irddw to persuade, the forms ireid- and iroid- ;
<rirev8a} to hasten, a-rovd-fi haste ; fieaSyaia and fiecrdyeia,, interior.
c. This interchange is also illustrated by the connecting vowels in-
serted in the inflection of words. Thus, in Dec. 1, the connecting vowel
is a, but in Dec. 2, o, for which in one case e appears (12). In the In-
dicative active, the connecting vowel in the Aorist and Perfect is a (pass-
ing, however, into c in the 3d pers. sing. ; compare the Imperative \vaov) ;
while in the Present, Imperfect, and Future, it is o before a liquid, but
otherwise €. So, in the Aor. optative, we find both at and 6ta. See 35.
d. The change of e to the closer t abounds especially in
stems of the third declension : as, 7roXe- noKis, city. Cf. tjku
and poet. T/cw, to come. The use of v for o or a is especially
^Eolic : as, ovofia owpa, ?iame, \ € ^ VT } X 6 ^ 1 "?? tortoise.
§ 118. UNION OP SYLLABLES. CONTRACTION. 131
115. 2.) In the lengthening of the short
vowels, and in the general laws of contraction.
Thus,
a. The long vowel is regarded as the short vowel doubled ; that
is, a, n, to, v, I =. aa, ec, oo, vv, XX. In the formation of words, there-
fore, the lengthening of a short vowel, or the union of two short
vowels of the same class, should produce the cognate long. The
close vowels obey this law: as, Xuos Xios, a Chian, paydd K XX)l vii. 3.
32, (vvfvfipiKa, I have insulted. Cf. Lat. otii oti, curruum currum.
But through precession, which especially affects the long open vow-
els, a, unless it follows . e, t, o, or po, is usually lengthened, not to a,
but to the closer rj ; and ee and oo commonly form, not rj and <b, but
the closer diphthongs « and ov, which are hence termed the corre-
sponding diphthongs of e and o. Cf. Lat. amaam amem (43).
116. In Latin inflection, through precession and the interchange
of kindred vowels, e takes extensively the place of a ; i of t, ei, o, oi, ai,
and even a ; and u of o and <a ; and they are often similarly contracted.
This must be kept in mind, in comparing affixes and contractions. Thus,
-as -es, -os -is, -<av -urn, Dec. 3 ; -ais -is, Dec. 1 ; -ot -i, -ois -is, -os -us,
-ov um, Dec. 2 ; and in verbs, -cis, -€i (Bceot. -is, -i), -is, -it, -ouev (Dor.
-oucs) -imus, -ere -itis, -erax -itur, -ovtch -untur, -a (in Perf. and Aor.) -i,
■aada -isti. See 13, 36.
II. UNION OF SYLLABLES.
117. The most important changes belonging
to this head are, A. Contraction, which unites
two successive vowels in the same word ; B. Cra-
sis (/c/oao-t?, mingling), which unites the final and
initial vowels of successive and closely connected
words ; and C. Apostrophe or Elision, which
simply drops a final vowel before a word begin-
ning with a vowel.
a. All these forms may occur in the composition of words.
b. In poetry, two vowels are often united in pronunciation, which are
written separately. This union is termed synizesis (<rvt>ifr]<ris, placing to-
gether), or sijnecphonesis (avveKcfxJjvqaLs, pronouncing together). Here, the
first vowel (which may have commonly had a kind of semivowel force,
like our y and w) is in most instances an E vowel ; more rarely t, a,
&c. E. g. (using a mark employed by grammarians) iroXTux (as if pron.
polyos).
A. Contraction.
118. Contraction takes place in three ways ; (a) by simple
union, when i or u simply unites with the preceding vowel to
132 VOWELS. RULES OF CONTRACTION. §H8.
form a diphthong, as ot 01 ; (b) by union with precession, when
the second vowel passes into i or v, and then forms a diph-
thong with the preceding, as ee et, oo ov ; and (c) by absorption,
when one vowel is simply lost in the other, which, if before
short, now of course becomes long (including the case in which
both vowels are of the same class, 115 a), as ea 77, oa <o, aa a.
d. In the -following general rules, a, c, and tj are regarded as including
the cognate diphthongs in t. For the mode of writing 1, when contracted
with a long, tj, or <a, or absorbed in these, see 109.
e. In the examples below, and in others similarly printed, the letters
or syllables which receive the change are inclosed in parentheses, and the
result of the change follows in full-face type ; so that, in reading the forms
of the word before and after the change, we first omit the full-face letters,
and then the letters in the parentheses ; thus, p{ai)qxTTos is an abridged
mode of representing that " at becomes a, as pdiaros pg.<xros."
119. General Eules. I. Two vowels which
can form a diphthong unite without further
change : as,
7&(eL')€i, i7x(<S't)oi (19) ; p(di')a.(TTo$ easiest, Qp(-q'i)^<r(ra, A(c6t)uw-Tos
best, p£k(vi)vi (Epic), yf)p{d'C)ox (so Thiersch, Bekker, Kiihner in his latest
grammar, &c, while others have written yr'ipa, as if 1 were absorbed).
120. II. (a) a, before an E sound (§4), absorbs
it ; but, (b) after an E or another A sound, is it-
self absorbed, (c) a, or (d) tj, with an sound,
forms 0. Thus,
(a) TifJL(ae)a, ri / u,(dei)a, Tip.(dr))Gi.Te, Tifi(dv)a (42) ; (b) 7eV(ea)r|, y4p(aa)S.
(19), \v(eai)r\, Xi>(?7at)Tj (37) ; (c) TL,ui{do)(opLev, rt / ci(dw)w, n/^(dot)w,
TL,u{dov)(a (42), 7)x{oa)&, %(«a)w (19), (oua)a>r6s (17 ; while, in the
Nom. sing., oDas becomes oOs by an absorption of the a, or by precession
from the Dor. &s) ; (d) 87j\(6r))<ore (42), 8c8(6rj)(a (45), v(r,o)<aS6s toothless.
Cf. Lat. lyr(ae)d, am(ae)are, am(ao)o, c(oa)ogo, am(ai)ate (116).
e. In Dec. 1, and the plural and dual of the common Dec. 2, contrac-
tion imitates the forms of uncontracted words ; but in the Attic Dec. 2
(200), it has o> throughout : as, xP V(T ^ a )^[ an( l 8nr\{6v)r\, -v\% -fj, -fjv, -at,
&c. (23 ; cf. y5^, 15) ; 6<rr(ia)a (16) ; &yr)p(aa)<o (22).
f. After a vowel, ea commonly becomes a ; as U.€ipat(ia)a (220 e), 'H/ra-
k\4(ea)5. (19) ; but adjectives in -trfjs and -vf\s vary in the neuter pi. : as,
from vyi-qs sound, eixpvrjs clever, vyL(^a)a and -fj, ev<pv(ea)a and -fj.
g. In the purer Attie, tj takes the place of d in the contract forms of
four every-day verbs : ireivau to hunger, St,\J/dio to thirst, XP& W t° supply
need, and £dw to live : as, we«'(det)rj > x/°(de)T|0"#c». Add nvdu to scratch,
a/xdw to smear, and ^dw to rub.
h. In the liquid Aorist, and in the Subjunctive and Imperative of
verbs in -ui, ae and av commonly become tj, unless 1 or p precedes : as,
icprjva, eiridva (152) ; l(TT{drj)r\, 8p{drj)q, 'i<TT{ae)r\ (45).
i. When a long is contracted with an O sound, there is usually inserted
before the « an €, which, however, is not treated in the accentuation as a
distinct syllable (cf. 117 b) : as, vd6s (uus) vedis (16), 'A.Tpel8{do)tta (197 c).
So sometimes, chiefly in the Ion. (135 a, 322), when the a is short.
§ 124. crasis. 133
121. III. (a) ee becomes 6l. (b) e or o, with o,
forms ou; but (c) with other sounds is absorbed,
(d) In other combinations not already given (119 ?
120), e is absorbed. Thus,
(a) <pl\(ee)ei, <pi\(tei)el (42), 7r6X(ees)as (19), /cX(e?e5)€is (207) ; (b) 0t-
X(eo)ov/xcu, dir)\(oe)ov (42), '07r(6eis)ovs (17), j/(6os)ovs (16) ; (c) 0iX(ew)a>,
0iX(eot)ot, (pi\(^ov)ov, 8t)\(6u))(o, 5?7X(6oi)oi, cfyX^oi^ov (42), co - r(ey)a),
*/(oy)<3 (16) ; (d) 0iX(«fy)fjre, 0fX(<?T?)-rj (42), n/^etsjfjs, Ti/^ei^v (207 c),
lx&{i>e)v (19), (eau)avroD (27).
e. In the dual of Dec. 3, ee becomes tj : as, YeV(ee)f] (19). So, in the
older Attic writers, in the Nom. plur. of nouns in -evs : as, hriries lirirrjs
(by some incorrectly written -fjs, 109 a) Th. 6. 68, instead of the common
i7T7rers. Cf. Lat. ree re, mon(ee)ere. For (oe) vi, see 233 c.
122. Special Rules. 1. a, taking the place of v before <r
(156) is contracted like e : as, in the affixes of the Accusative
pi., (-ops -oas) -ovs, (-avs -aas) -as (13 ; cf. Lat. -oms -os, -ams
-as). Hence, in Dec. 3, the contract Nom. and Ace. pi. agree
in form : as, 7r6Xees and noXeas 7ro'Xei?, l^Bves and Ix^vas Ix&vs
(19), fxelCovs (22) ; cf. Ace. fioas ftovs, olds ots (19). So, in Lat.,
Nom. and Ace. pi. sues, fructus, res. See 156.
a. By a similar contraction with /35as /SoOs, we find also vaas pads (19),
ypaias ypavs ; and in late writers, even Nom. pi. pads. For x°^$ x°« J »
see 220 e.
123. 2. In a few cases, the first vowel of a diphthong in t
is absorbed, and the t retained. Thus, (a) in verbs in -6a> (not
-w/xt), oei and orj become oi : as, o^Xoet S7X01, 89X07 drjXol (42).
(b) In the 2d pers. sing., the affix -fat becomes not only -#
(120 b), but, as a special Attic form, -ei : as, Xvcai \vy and
\v€t (37). (c) In a very few roots, aei becomes <u, as deucrjs
oIktjs, unseemly.
d. For special contractions in the affixes of declension, see 7, 13 ; in
the augment and reduplication, 7, 278 s.
e. Remark. Contraction is omitted in many words in which it might
take place according to the preceding rules, particularly in nouns of the
third declension, and in dissyllabic verbs in -tot ; and other forms of con-
traction occur in the dialects, or rarely in the common language.
B. Crasis.
124. Crasis (1), for the most part, follows the
laws of contraction, disregarding however an
i final, which according to the best usage is not
even subscribed. But often (2), without respect
to these laws, a final, or (3) an initial vowel is
entirely absorbed.
134 VOWELS. CRASIS AND ELISION. §124.
a. See examples below of these three forms, chiefly marked with cor-
responding numbers. The first word, as the less important, is commonly
most affected. Hence the rule above respecting i.
b. Crasis prevails most in Attic poetry. It is commonly indicated (96)
by the coronis ( ' ), except when this mark is excluded by the rough
breathing : as, rdfid, ov/jloi. When an initial vowel has been simply ab-
sorbed, the words are more frequently separated in writing : as, ol 'fxol.
The same is sometimes done, when a final vowel has been absorbed.
Hence, cases are often referred to aphceresis and apostrophe, which prop-
erly belong to crasis. For the change of a smooth mute to its cognate
rough, when the second word is aspirated, see 161. For the accent, see
Prosody, 773.
125. The principal words in which the final vowel is sub-
ject to crasis are the following :
a.) The article; in which (as in the particle rot, 126 y) the
second form prevails before a : as,
(1) 6 £k, becoming by crasis ovk • 6 eirl, ovirl • ol i/iot, ov/jloI- 6 8pm, ovpvis •
ttj i/xfj, Trjfirj. (2) 6 dvrjp, avrjp (less Att. <hvif}p) ■ t£ dvbpl, rdvSpl ■ i] dper-f],
apery ■ eu dyadai, dyaOal • rod avrov, ravrov' rod were" pov, dr/fxcTtpov. (3)
6 olvos, §vos ' ol i/jLo'i, ol 'fioi • rod vdaros, Oofidaros.
a. The neuter forms rb and rd are especially subject to crasis : as (1)
rb evavrlov, rovvavrlov • rb lp.dri.ov, 6olp.driov ' rb Vdwp, 6ov8up ' rd 6V Xa,
d&irXa. (2) rb dX-r)6£s, rdXrjdis. (3) rd altrxpd, r^Vxpd.
b. In crasis with the article, Zrepos, other, retains the old form drepos :
as, (2) 6 erepos, drepos • rb Zrepov, ddrepov • rod ertpov, ddrtpov.
126. /3.) The conjunction ml, and : as,
(1) Kal &v, k&v • Kal ii>, Kdv ' Kal Zrepos, x#repos ■ Kal elra, Kq.ra ' Kal 6, x<*> '
Kal ol, xy. (2) Kal el, net • Kal ov, kov. (2, 3) Kal i] dyxowa, xtfyx ovaa '
y.) The preposition irpo (chiefly in composition before e and o
unaspirated) ; the interjection a> (especially before a) ; and a
few other particles : as,
■jrpoe'diaKa irpottbuKa, wpooTrros irpoftirros (£-, 6ir-) ' irpb fpyov, Trpo&pyov •
cD dyadi, Si 'yaOe" ' & dvdpuire, &vdpwire • tfroi &pa, -qrdpa • fiivroi &v, p.evrdv •
oiiroi dpa, ovrdpa • el p.rj e^otyut, el fxr] 'xoifii • fir] evpio, fir] 'iipu.
5.) Some forms of the pronouns : as,
iyui ol8a, iy$5a ' iyCo olp.ai, iy^ai ' fiol £86Kei, fiovdbKei • aol iartv, aoforiv •
6 £(p6pei, ov<f>6pei ' oD eVe/ca, otiveKa • 6rov eVe/co, bdotiveKa • d&v,dv 3. £p.£, dpi.
C. Apostrophe, or Elision.
127. Apostrophe affects the short vowels «, e, X,
and o (in monosyllables only e) ; and sometimes,
in poetry, at in verbal affixes (chiefly passive)
where it is treated as short in accentuation : as,
T65' Her tkciv aivtyp: 6 irpoo-iroKov kXijoj Eur. Hel. 788. KXa&reT' dpa
(KXavaerai dpa) Ar. Th. 916. "Ep X ed' £s (fyxrnu, 161) lb. 1178. KoXda
ifcffft (Ko\d<rai, Inf. act.) Nub. 7. In Tragic dialogue, the elision of at
is rare : Aei<pd^<rop, ijd-r) Soph. Ph. 1071.
§ 130. DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 135
a. For the sign of apostrophe ( ' ), which has the same name with the
figure, see 96. For the accentuation, see Prosody.
128. Elision is most common,
a. In the prepositions, and other particles of constant use :
as, d<p* iavTov (ano, 161), eV cicelvov, Kar ip.e, aXX' eyd>, ap ovv, y
ovdev, fxd\' av, off 6 (ore 6), rdx av. So, in composition (where
the sign ' is omitted), dvepxop.ai, 8u\avvco, 7rdpeipi, orav.
b. In a few pronouns, and in some phrases of frequent oc-
currence : as, toCt* aAAo, tout fjbrj ' yevoir av, taff" onov (eon),
\eyoip av, otS' on, Cprjp eyoa.
129. a. Elision is less frequent in t, than in the other short vowels
above mentioned. Particularly, it is not elided by the Attics in irepl,
&XPh fi^xpt (§ 164), or &Vt (which might then be confounded with #re) ;
or, except rarely in poetry, in the Dat. sing., which might then be con-
founded with the Ace. The forms which take v paragogic (163) are not
elided in prose, except ecri • and in the Dat. pi. , not even in Attic poetry.
b. Elision is least frequent in Ionic prose. In Attic prose, it is found
chiefly in a few words, but these often recurring. In poetry, where hiatus
is more carefully avoided and the metre so governs, its use is far more ex-
tended ; and here an especial freedom belongs to Comic and Epic verse.
c. On some points in crasis and elision, critics differ. Thus, some
regard the enclitics fioi, aoi, and rot, and the possessive pronoun ad, as
affected by elision in Attic poetry ; but others, only by crasis.
d. Both elision and the absorption of a vowel by crasis may occur at
those minor punctuation-marks which the voice disregards ; and in poe-
try, are sometimes permitted at the more important marks, even where
the speaker is changed : as, vq AC, £<p-q Mem. 2. 7. 4 ; ^w • Vi tovtois
Eur. Rh. 157 ; tovw #. EL & Id. Or. 1345.
DIALECTIC VARIATIONS.
130. The dialectic variations in the vowels may be mostly
referred to the heads of Precession, Union or Resolution,
Quantity, and Insertion or Omission.
I. Precession prevailed most in the soft Ionic, and least in
the rough Doric and JEolic ; while the Attic, which blended
strength and refinement, held a middle place. E. g.
a. Long a, for the most part, is retained in the Dor. and iEol., but in
the Ion. passes into tj ; while the Att. preserves a mean : as, Dor. 'dp.e'p'J,
Att. ijjjLepd, Ion. rjfiepri • Dor. 5ct,uos, Trdyd, u)kijt<xs, Att. and Ion. 8rjp.os,
•n-rjyrj, w/cur^s • Dor. and Att. aocpid, 7rpdyp.a, Ion. aocpirj, irpriyp.a. So,
even in diphthongs, Ion. vym, ypyvs, for vavs, ypavs, and in Dat. pi. of
Dec. 1, -yai, -t?s, for -auri, -cus. The use of long a produced, in great
measure, the Dor. feature called ir\aTeLaap.6s, broad pronunciation, which
was imitated by the Attics in the lyric parts of their drama.
b. Short a is retained by the Dor. and iEol. in some words, where, in
the Att., it passes into c ; and in some (particularly verbs in -do>) by the
Att., where it becomes e in the Ion. Thus, Dor. rpacpu, <ppaal, oxa, ya,
Att. Tpt<p<j), <pp€<ri, tire, ye • Att. bpdu), dparjv, Ion. opio), e"par)v.
136 vowels. § 130.
c. As the long of € and o, or the contraction of « and oo or oe, the
stricter Dor. prefers the long vowels t\ and to to the closer diphthongs ei
and ov ; while, on the other hand, the Ion. is particularly fond of pro-
tracting c to €i, and o to ov or oi. Thus, Dor. XVP> 5<3\os • Gen. of
Dec. 2, rw ihpavG) • Inf. evp'qv, birvwv • for x c 'P> SovXos, rod ovpavov, evpelv,
virvovv. Ion. ^e?uos, p,ovvos, Troirj, for %evos, p.bvos, ir6a.
d. Other examples of precession or the interchange of kindred vowels
(114) are the following ; in some of which, contrary to the general laAv of
the dialects, the Ion. has a more open sound than the Att., or the Att.
than the Dor. or iEol. : Att. 'del, 'derbs, earid, danos, Ion. alel, aleros,
iarrir}, OGjkos • Old Att. /caw, /cXaw, Ion. and Com. mla, kXcUw • Ion. rpd-
7rw, fiiyaOos, p.eaau(3pir}, appoide'o}, Att. Tpiiroj, -fieyedos, p.eo-qp.^pla, oppwde'u} •
Dor. and Ep. al, Att. ei • Dor. dvdaKu, Ion. and Att. Bv^ckw, BLq\. dval-
CK(o • Att. arparos, epirerbv, arbp-a, JEol. arporbs, 6pireTOv, arijptu.
131. II. Union or Resolution. A. The Contraction
of vowels prevailed most in the vivacious Attic, and least in
the luxurious Ionic. By the poets, it is often employed or
omitted according to the demands of the metre. There are
also dialectic differences in the mode of contraction, which, for
the most part, may be explained by precession. E. g.
a. In contracting a with an sound, the Dor. often prefers a to the
closer co ; in Dec. 1, regularly. Thus, Dor. 'Arpeldd, rciv Bvpdv (20 a),
IIoTei5c6', ireivavTi, Trparos, Meve'Xds, for 'Arpetdov (uncontracted -do), tu>v
6vpQv (-dwv), UocreidQv (-dojv), ireipQvri (-dovri), tt/nDtos, Me^Xews (-dos).
b. For the contraction of €6, and oo or oe, see 130 c. "With the Ionics
and some of the Dorics, the favorite contraction of to and tov is into cv,
instead of ov. This use of cv for ov sometimes extends to cases where this
diphthong results from a different contraction. Thus, <pi\evp.ev, 0iXeO,
tp-ev, dtpevs, for <pi\ovp.ev (-e'op.ev), (pi\ov (-tov), ip.ov (-to), dipovs (-cos) •
idwalev, idiKalevv, 8iKCuev<ri, in Hdt. for ediKaiov (-oe), idiKaiovv (-oov).
c. The Dorics (but not Pindar), contrary to the general law of the dialect,
commonly contract a with an E sound following, into r\ : as, epwT-q, <nyrjv,
Xrjs, from ipdrrae, oiyaeiv, Xctys. Cf. 120 g.
d. In the contractions which folloAv the change of v before or (156), the
^Eol. often employs cu and oi for d and ov : as, Ace. pi. rals rtp.ais, rots
vbp-ois, for rets ri/tds, tovs vbp.ovs • Nom. sing, of adj. and part. p,t\ai.s,
tu-J/cus, ^x 0l<xa > f° r A^Xcts, rOxf/ds, ^x ov<ra ' 3d pers. pi. of verbs, (paial,
Kpv-rrroKn, for <pdai, Kpijirrovin. The Dor. has here great variety, both
employing the simple long vowels, the short vowels (as though v were
simply dropped before o~), the common diphthongs of contraction (122),
and the iEol. diphthongs : thus, Ace. pi. r^ras and r^as Theoc. 21. 1 ;
rods Xvkovs and rebs Xikos Theoc. 4. 11 ; eh and ijs, one.
e. The Ion. use of cov (written by some tov) for av in a few words, ap-
pears, at least in some of them, to have arisen from a union of o and a to
form co : thus, for ravrb, ip-avrov, Ion. tcovto, epLewvrov, from to avrb,
ip.io avrov. Also Ion. &vvp.a, rpuvpLa (yet better r/xD/xa), for 6avp,a, rpa.vp.ix.
f. The Ion. in a few cases employs contraction where the Att. omits it,
particularly of otj into co : as, Ipds, 'ifiuxxa, for iepbs, eftbrjaa.
132. B. Vowels which appear only as diphthongs in the
Attic are often resolved in the other dialects, especially the
Ionic and JEolic, into separate sounds : as, ev, Ep. f'v, well. In
§ 136 DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 137
the Ionic, the resolution of «, with c prolonged, into rfi, is
especially common : as, fiao-iXTjirj, kXtjls, for (Sao-iXela, kXcU.
a. The fondness of the Ion. for a concurrence of vowels leads it, in
some cases, to change v to a (138) after a vowel (which, if previously a,
now becomes €) : as, 'Apcaraybpea, edwearo, for 'ApLcrrayopav, edvvavro.
133. C. In Crasis, the Doric and Ionic often differ from
the Attic by uniting the o of the article with a and at initial, to
form a> and <» : as, to dXr)8es, T(oXrj6es • of alnokoi, conoXoi.
a. A few erases in Horn, and fldt. are written by most editors with the
coronis or the smooth breathing in place of the rough : as, 6 d/aioTos, &pi-
cttos A. 288 ; 6 avros, cjvtos E. 396 ; ol aXXot, &XX01 • 6 dvOpojiros, &vdpwnos.
b. The concurrence of vowels in Horn, is often only apparent, as they
were once separated by a Digamma ; which, of course, forbade either con-
traction, crasis, or elision.
134. III. Quantity. For a short vowel in the Attic, the
other dialects often employ a long vowel or diphthong, and the
converse : as, Ion. bnrXr](Tios for diirXaatos ' Ion. cvperj, anodcf-is,
lieCoav, eaaedv, for evpela, a7rooVi£t?, /zft£coi>, rjao-Qiv • Dor. and Ep.
erapos for eraipos * /Eol. 'AX*ao?, dpx&os, for 'AA/caioy, apyaios.
a. The poets, especially the Epic, often lengthen or shorten a vowel
according to the metre. A short vowel, when lengthened in Epic verse,
usually passes into a cognate diphthong : as, dX-r}Xov6as A. 202, irapcd
B. 711, irvoir} E. 697, eiv a. 162, for eXriXvdas, irapd, Trvo-q, ev.
135. IV. Addition or Omission. Vowels are often em-
ployed in one dialect which are omitted in another ; and here,
as elsewhere, a peculiar freedom belongs to the poets, especial-
ly the Epic. These often add or drop a vowel, and often
double a vowel or insert the half of it (the short for the long\
for the sake of the metre, particularly in contract verbs : as,
M and elvi for ev • ij\i 0. 128, for -fiXee" p. 243 ; Kp-fytpov itXdwp, for
Kprjvov e'Xdup, A. 41, (pdavdev, yifiwuaa, opoai, opdas, yeXwovres, (pdus, e£,
ieiKocn, rjd, for <pdvdev, 7)(3&cra, bpd, bpqs, yeXwvres, (pQs, e, e'Uoai, tf.
a. The Ion. is especially fond of the insertion of € : as, Gen. pi. dv-
Sptuv, avrewv, for dvopwv, &c. ; 2 Aor. inf. evp^eiv, for eiipeiv.
b. The use of elision is extended in the dialects : as, in Horn., to the
enclitics fioi, aoi, rot, pa (by apha3resis for apa) ; to i in Stl and in the
Dat., both sing, and pi. ; to the affix of declension -at in (5£ei' ddtivai
A. 272 ; and, as some think, to /cat (x biroaa occurs Anac. 43. 7).
136. In the Dor., iEol., and Ep., a particle often omits its
final vowel before a consonant, with such assimilation of the
preceding consonant as euphony may require : chiefly apa, dvd,
Kara, irapa, and 7rort • rarely dno, vno, and (in JEol.) 7repi • as,
dp crepwe, da (3(d}ji.oi<ri, dyKpiais, dvcrrds (166 a), icdS 86vap.iv, tcair (pdXapa.
(159 f ), KaK necpaXrjs, Kay yovir, KaKx^uai, nap poov, tcdXXnrov, icap.pu£as, Trap
2ir]vi, ttot t6v, aTTiripLtpei., vfifiaXXeiv, irep <tQ.
a. When three consonants are thus brought together, the first is some-
times rejected : as, nd/crave, dpj>daei, for ndKurave, dp.pLV<£<rei.
138 CONSONANTS. § 136.
b. In some of these words, the final vowel was probably a euphonic ad-
dition to the original form (102). Compare airb and virb (which has also
the poetic form viral) with the Lat. ab and sub. The old form irpbr, in
accordance with the rule (160), became irpbs and irpoTi, whence the Dor.
and Ep. ttotL
c. From the close connection of the preposition with the following
word, these cases are not regarded as making any exception to the rule in
160. Compare 165 d. The two words are often written together, even
when there is no composition : as, Kabbivap.Lv, worrbv.
d. Some of these forms even passed into the Att. and into Ion. prose :
as, Karddvys Eur. Or. 308, d^arQv Mem. 3. 3. 2, apuravovrat. Hdt. 1. 181.
CHAPTEE IV.
CONSONANTS.
137. The Greek has eighteen consonants,
represented by seventeen letters.
a. In § 4, these consonants are arranged in classes according to the
organs which give them their distinctive character, as labials, or lip-
consonants, palatals, or palate-consonants, and linguals, or tongue-
consonants. They are also arranged in orders, according to the method
in which they are made by these and assisting organs, as smooth mutes,
made by a simple closure of the organs ; middle mutes, so called as in-
termediate between the smooth and rough ; rough mutes, or aspirates,
in which the breath is sent strongly through the organs partially closed ;
spirants (spirans, breathing), similarly formed, but with the organs more
open, — one of these specially called a sibilant, from its hissing sound ;
double consonants, or compound sibilants, so named as combining a
mute and simple sibilant ; nasals, in which the passage through the
mouth is closed, and the voice is sent through the nose ; and fluents
(fluens, flowing), so named from their flowing so easily with other con-
sonant sounds ; while the nasals and fluents, all flowing sounds of various
kind and degree, are classed together as liquids ; and all the consonants,
except the mutes {dumb in comparison with the others), are called semi-
vowels, as intermediate in vocality between the vowels and mutes.
b. Consonants of the same class are termed cognate ; and those of the
same order, co-ordinate. The classes are sometimes named from the let-
ters standing at the head : as, the it class, &c. ; so, ir, k, and t mutes.
Some use the term guttural instead of palatal, and dental instead of lin-
gual. Euphonic, dialectic, and other interchanges of consonants are most
frequent in cognates ; and then, in co-ordinates.
c. The letter y performs a double office. When followed by another
palatal, it is a nasal ; otherwise, a middle mute. As a nasal it has n for
its corresponding Roman letter ; as a middle mute, g (92 a).
d. The double consonants were formed by the union of a mute with or ;
in 4* and £ the mute preceding, and in £ the <r : as, 7i/7rs yfy, Kopans
Kbpa% (17), 0i7/3ao-5e 6ijj8afo to Thebes.
§ 142. OLD SEMIVOWELS. 139
138. The early Greek speech appears to have had four
semivowels which were not yet as fixed in their character as
the consonants afterwards became, and which had correspond-
ing vowels into which they often passed when the later laws
of euphony forbade their use : viz., 2, corresponding to c ; N,
corresponding to a ; F, corresponding to v, as v in Latin and w
in English to u ; and a palatal spirant corresponding to t, as j
in Latin and y in English to t, yet partaking perhaps, some-
what more than these consonants, of the nature of a sibilant.
a. The last seems to have had no character distinct from that of the
vowel i (cf. 98 a), just as in the old Latin alphabet i and j were written
alike, and u and v. It will here be distinguished, so far as this seems im-
portant, by the use of the capital I, which should then be pronounced nearly
like the semivowel y, or i in valiant. It may be distinguished, in speak-
ing, as the consonant, spirant, or semivoivcl I. Capitals are also some-
times used to distinguish other consonants in an early unfixed state.
139. In the progress of the language, these old semivowels
met with various fortunes :
1.) They became fixed as consonants : the old 2 as o- (Lat. s ; yet
in Lat. formation extensively represented by r) ; the old N as v
(often in Lat. as m, which, however, ecthlipsis shows to have been
a very weak consonant) ; F, especially in the older or less refined
dialects, as /3 or <f> (in Lat. as p, / or b ; sometimes also in Eng. as
to) : as, <rvs sus, swine (cf. 141), Xvpau lyram, lyre, ftpodcop JEol. for
p68(ov, of roses, Sap. 69 [19].
a. Cf. povXo.uat volo, to avill, ft and /fc'a vis, force, /3t6w vivo, to live,
(ptpw fero, to bear, (pdvai fari, to say, <pup fur, thief.
140. 2.) They were- simply dropped : as, between two vowels,
F regularly, 2 often, and N and I sometimes : as, a>rou a>6v ovum,
egg, ftovas (Boas boves, yeveo-os yeveos generis, Xvecrai Xvcat. lueris or
luere, iXao-(o iXdco, p.ei£ova pei£oa, 7rXel(ou irXeaiv more.
a. So t in a few, and 8 in many words, of Dec. 3. See 207, 217.
b. The two vowels were then often contracted : as, pods, yevovs (19),
Ur, or Xtfei (37), iXQ (42), [xeifa (22).
141. 3.) They were changed into common breathings. So, be-
fore an initial vowel, F regularly, and 2 in some words : as, Feanepa
cWe'/aa vespera, evening, Fideiv Xdeiv video, to see, toivos olvos vinum,
wine, Feap cap ver, Spring; crvs and vs sus, swine, atarnpi to-Tnpi sisto,
to stand, e£ sex, six, eVra septern, seven, aXs sal, salt, virep super,
over. Also F before initial p : as, Fpnywpi pr\yvv\xi frango, to break.
142. 4.) They were changed into their corresponding vowels.
So F regularly, except as above ; and the others in many forma-
tions : as, vavs vavs navis, ship, /3of fiov (19); yvnv yvna (1G0 e) ;
(pavo~<0 (paveco cpavco (152) ; rjdlcov fjdimv, TrXelcov nXetoiU (260 s).
a. Here contraction often takes place, as in most of the examples
above ; and, after a liquid, 6 and i are sometimes transposed and con-
tracted with the preceding vowel : as, iryyeXa-a -^yyeiXa (152 b), prp-ops
pi'lTwp (153) ; x e P^- iav X eL P wv ) tywlw &(j.eLvwv (261), fieXavIa fitXaiva (233).
140 CONSONANTS. LIQUIDS. §143.
143. The palatal spirant, or consonant I, with a con-
sonant preceding, received yet other changes : thus,
a.) With X, it was assimilated : as, pdklov pdXkov more. Cf. Lat.
melius ; and also aWos alius, other, aWopai salio, to leap.
b.) It united with r to form tr or at : as, iravrla navaa rtdaa (233).
ttAovtIos ifkovaios rich, adavaaia (from dddvaros) immortality. Hence,
we often find <r for r before t.
c.) It united with a palatal or lingual mute (or, rarely, with a la-
bial mute or a double palatal) to form aa- (in later Attic rr) or £: as,
7]kIu>v fjaaoov or fjTToov, Tayla>' rdaao), Kopvdlco Kopvaaw, n(7rI(o necrara),
dyxlov acraov oKiyloov 6\i£oov, i\7ri8la> eK$ri§»> See 233, 26 L b, 349.
144. Liquids, from their flowing, semivowel character,
often affect or are affected by adjoining vowels :
1. Syncope. In some stems, the adjoining vowel is syncopated :
as, prjrepos prjrpos (210), pipevco pipvco to remain, rfkvOov rjKBov I came,
KCKaXrjKa KeicknKa. I have called. See also 140 for the syncope of the
liquid.
145. 2. Metathesis. In some cases, a liquid is transposed with
a vowel, which is then often contracted with another vowel, or
otherwise changed. In some of these, the liquid is evidently fleeing
from combination with a following consonant. Thus, ddpaos Bpdcros
boldness, fitfiXnica (stem /3aX- /3Xa-) I have thrown See also 142 a.
a. In the Dat. pi. of syncopated liquids of Dec. 3, and of daT^p star,
€ is transposed with p or v, and changed to a: as, irarepcn warpdai (18).
146. 3. Epenthesis, Sfc. a. When a simple vowel is brought by
inflection or composition before an initial p, a smooth p is inserted :
as, eppaxra, appuxiTos, c7rippd>vvvpi, from pd>vvvpi to strengthen (e-, d-,
and mi prefixed) ; but evpcooros (the diphthong ev prefixed).
b. When, by syncope or metathesis, a nasal is brought before X
or p, the cognate middle mute is inserted or substituted : as, dvepos
(dvpos) dvdpos (18), pearjpepia peanpfipia midday ; /SXghtko) (s. fioX-
pko- /3Xo-) to go, fiporos (s. popr- ppor- fipor-) mortalis, mortal.
147. The following laws, mostly euphonic, are
observed in the formation and connection of
words.
A. In the Formation of Words.
I. Before a lingual mute, a labial or palatal
mute becomes co-ordinate (137b); and a lingual
mute, a : as,
rer/)t((3r)'7rTat, rira^^KTai, 7riirei(6T)a-Tai, Kopi(dT)<rr6s (39) ; ypa~
((^irTo'? written, ti>(xt)ktos made, xf/ei(5T)crrrjs liar ; e(Tr5)$Sopos seventh,
6(/c8)-ySoos eighth, ypd{(p8)fi§7)v, (3pv(x§)y$V v ' £rpt(/30)<j>0??j', €Ta(yd)y > pT]i>,
eirel{dd)<rQr}v, iKopi(dd)<rQr)i> (39) ; £8ef(K0)x<V (45), i\ei(Trd)$QriJ>, ibvopd-
(t6)(tQt)v. Cf. Lat. scri(bt)jp£us, re(gt)c£us, tra(ht)c£us, clau(dt)sfrum.
§ 152. EUPHONIC CHANGES. 141
a. Two lingual mutes may remain together, if both, belong to the stem :
as, t&ttw to arrange, 'Ardis Attic.
148. II. Before fi, a labial mute becomes //. ;
a palatal mute, y ; and a lingual mute, a : as,
T€Tpi(j3fx)\i\iat, Tr^Tr€i(dfjL)(rii.ai, K€K6fxi(5/M)(r^ai (39) ; 848ei(i<p)y\t.cu (45) ;
7pd(0 / u)|ip.a letter, T€Tv(xfJ-)y\t.ai, <hvo;j.a{T^)Q-^.ai. Cf. Lat. se(cm)#?n.en.
a. If two p.'s or two -y's are thus brought before jx, one of them is
dropped : as, Treire(/xTTfi, ju/^fip.cu, eXr/\e(yx^, TT^Y^ai (41).
b. This rule has exceptions, when the fi does not belong to an affix of
inflection, as dap.-)] point, acme, dpaxp-v drachma, drachm, dr/x.6s vapor,
pv0p.6s rhythm ; and in the dialects, even when it does so belong, as in
Horn. 15;jl€v we know, tirtiri6 t uev, K€Kopv6p.evos, d/ca^/xeVos.
149. III. Before the tense-sign k, a labial or
palatal mute unites with it in the cognate rough, and
a lingual mute is dropped : as,
r^r/Di(/3«a)<J>a, T4Ta(yKa)\a, Tr^7rei(d Ka) Ka, tca<6/j.i(dKa)Ka, (39) ; 5^5et-
(KKa)\a (45), /^/co(7r/ca)<|>a, yeypa(<pKa)^a, 8e8L8a(xKa)\a, wuop.a(TKa) Ka.
150. IV. v, before a (a) labial or (b) palatal, is
changed int.o the cognate nasal (4, 137 b) ; and (c)
before a liquid, is assimilated (104 a) : as,
(a) <Tv(vTr)\i.rrdax^, £{vfi)\i.$d\\w, <Tv(v<p)[i.$epw, £{vp.)\Lp.hh}, e(v\j/)y.^uxos •
(b) e(yK)yKa\£u, av(py)yyevrjs, av(vx)yXaipw, ty£)y$£u • (c) 2(v\)\\oyos,
cv(vp)ppdiTT0j. Cf. Lat. i(np)rapello, imbibo, co(nl)^oco, corrumpo.
d. Before fi in the Perfect passive, v commonly becomes or or is
omitted : as, ire(pa{vp,)<ry.ai (40), k{k\i[icu (Pf. of kXxvu to bend).
e. Before k in the Perfect active, v was commonly omitted, or the form
avoided, except by later writers : as, Ktupim (Pf. of Kptvu to judge) ; iricpay-
kcl, Dinarch. 92. 4.
f. In applying Rule IV., enclitics are regarded as distinct words :
thus, ovwep, Tovye.
151. V. No consonant should stand before or, ex-
cept a- itself. This principle, from the great use
of a in formation, requires many changes :
1.) Before <r, a labial or palatal mute unites with it in the
cognate double consonant ; and a lingual mute is dropped : as,
yv(irs)ty, 0\^(/3s)\J/, Kopa(Ks)^, at(ys)^, Qpi(x s )£i ffd>pi.a(T<ri)oi t e\7r/(5s)s,
Kjpv(ds)s (17) ; 7/)d(0;7co)\j/cu. Cf. Lat. du(cs)«, re(gs)a?, ar(ts)s, lapi(ds)s.
a. It will be seen that some of these changes are simply orthographic.
152. 2.) In the Future and Aorist of liquid verbs, the
tense-sign <r is changed into e ; which (a) in the Future is con-
tracted with the following vowel, but (b) in the Aorist is trans-
posed and contracted with the preceding vowel. See 142 a.
Thus, in the Fut. and Aor. of dyyiWu to announce, vipua to distribute,
Kpivu to judge, tX^w to wash, and 8epw to flay, —
14:2 CONSONANTS. § 152.
(a) d77e\(<rw, £u))w,v€fi(<ru>, 4u)<o,Kpiv(<Tw, 4ui)<o,Tr\vv(<r<i), 4w)5>, 5ep(<raj, e?a;)<S *
(b) tfyy(e\<ra, eeXa)ei\a, £v (ep.aa, ee,ua)€i|ia, &<p(iv<Ta, tem)tva, ewX^uaa, veva)
■Ova, Z5(epcra, eepa)eipa..
c. Here ae commonly passes into tj, unless t or p precedes (120 h) : as,
<palvu) to shoiv, a<pa\\u} to trip, iriaivio to fatten, Trepaivio to complete (s. <pav-,
ccpaX-, iriav-, irepav-) ; Aor. %<pnva. (not Zcpnva, 109 a), ^(p-qXa, irridva,
iirepdva. But i<rx va ' LV(j} to make lean, Kepdalvw to gain, KoiXaivu to hollow
out, Xev/caivw to whiten, dpyaivu, to enrage, ireTaivw to ripen, atpu to raise,
and a\Xo/xcu to leap, have here a (in the two last becoming q in the Ind.
through the augment : ijpa, Subj. "dpw) ; Terpaivw, to bore, has tj ; and
tnjftalvu) to give a signal, puaivu to stain, and nadaipio to purify, both t)
and d. The use of d in the liquid Aor. increased in the later Greek.
d. A few poetic verbs retain the old forms with <r : as, kAAw to land,
Kvpoj to meet, &pvvp.i to rouse, <pvpw to knead, F. and A. kAcw, &ceX<ra,
6pau), &p<ra, &c. Add these forms, mostly from Horn., fjpea, ?X<ra, epaa,
6£p(Top.ai, K^pcro}, Znepcra, diacpOepcru), ijepaa.
153. 3.) In the Nominative, the affix -? after p, and some-
times after v, is transposed as e, and absorbed (118 c) by the
preceding vowel : as,
^(a/)s, ae/o)dp starling; 7rar(ep?, e€p)-f\p, p*iJr(ops, oep)<ap (18); irai(avs,
aev)6.v paianj \ifx(ei>s, eev)i\v, daifx(o^s, oei>)<av (18). Cf. Lat. fu(rs)r,
pate(rs)r, orato(rs)r; lie(ns)w, daenio(ns)7i.
a. Except in d&fiup wife, where <r is simply dropped.,
154. 4.) In liquids of Dec. 3, v is simply dropped before
-<ri in the Dative plural : as,
p.(:\a(pcri)<ri (23) ; \i/jL{(v<n)<ri, 8aip,o(v(n)(ri, pi(u(Ti)a-i (18). For the Dat.
pi. of syncopated liquids and avr-qp, see 145 a.
155. 5.) In adjectives (not participles) in «s, v becomes or
before <r in the feminine, and is simply dropped before o-t in the
Dat. pi. : as, xapievo-a xapiWo-a, x a P lfVT< * 1 X a P U(Tl (^3).
156. 6.) Otherwise, v before <r is changed into a, which is
then contracted with the preceding vowel (142, 122) : as,
Nom. Sing. Masc. and Fern., and Dat. PI. ixiX(avs, aas)Gs, Tr(avTS,
av$, 151. 1, a<xs)as, ir(avaa, 233, aa<ra)d«ra, Tr(avT<ri, avoi, aacrt;do-i (23) ;
6(evTS, evs, eas)cis, 6(euaa, €<tcra)eZ(ra, 0(ejTsrt)eto-i, 5{ovts)ous, 8{ovaa)ov<m,
S(oPTai)ova-i t 5(vvTs)v<$ f dvcra, 8v<ri (26) ; p(u>s)pis (18) : Verbs in 3d Pers. PL
for (avert, aa<rt)do"i, ti6 (eva t)ecUri Tidiltri, 8i8(ovat)6G.<ri StSoxxri, 8encv(vv(n)v(L-
<ri deiKvva-i, i'(vcrt)a<ri (45) : Fut. cnr(ev8ao}, cetera/) si<r&>, ir(€v6cr, eaxfiwrofuu.
a. The forms rtOidcrt, 8t86d<rt, and SetKvudat were used by the Attics for
the most part, and tdcrt uniformly, without contraction.
b. In nouns, if v9 precede <r, the v is retained : as, (eXf.uv6s) ZXpavs
worm, 2X/ju(v6(Ti)v<ri (yet others, ZXpIcrt). It is also retained in some
forms in -<r<u and derivatives in -<ris, from verbs in -v&>, as Tri(pav<xai from
<paivu (40), a8pvv<ris from aSpivca to ripen. Add the Homeric Ktvtxat, ^.
337. For iv, <rvv, iraXtv, and ttoLv, see 166.
157. 7.) In cases not mentioned above, the combinations
Xo- and pa were permitted to stand ; except as a radical after p
was softened in the later Attic to p : as, a\s salt, sea ; apanv
male, Oapcros boldness, New Att. Spfyw, 6dppos.
§ 1G0. EUPHONIC CHANGES. 143
158. VI. Between two consonants, a- inflective
is dropped, and v is changed to a (102) : as,
Ttrpi{8<Td)$toxi } TtrpifyQe, TeTa{y<rd)x$cu (39, 147) ; €(pdd(pvT)pa.rat (142).
This rule applies to cases where the iirst consonant is not removed by pre-
vious rules.
159. VII. If rough mutes begin two successive
syllables, the first is often changed into its cog-
nate smooth, especially (a) in reduplications, or (b)
when both letters are radical ; but (c) in the sec-
ond person singular of the Aorist imperative passive,
the second rough mute is changed : as,
(a) (<t>e<t>)TT€$l\r}Ka (42) ; (x«xWx/»»*«« ' (OeO)TiQvKa (44) ; (ei6)rl9rifii
(45) ; (b) (0/3ix)Tpi\6s (17) ; (dax)ra\vs swift, (fyex) T p€X w to run,
(0pe<p)Tpi$i>) to nourish; (c) \6(drjdi)Qr\Ti (37).
d. So a/xirixu (d.fJ.<pl 2x w ) io cover •' an d * n ^or. P ass -> eridrjv (45), irv-
dyv (44) ; but here in most words the aspiration remains, as even edp^O-rju.
e. Upon the same principle, <?x w becomes £x w ' an< i whenever p is
reduplicated, the first p becomes smooth, and, as it then cannot stand at
the beginning of a word (93 d), is transposed : as, pfyipa Zpplfia. Yet
we find, by a softening of the second p, pepvwujxiva f. 59.
f. So, to avoid excessive aspiration, a rough mute is never preceded by
the same rough mute, but, instead of it, by the cognate smooth : as,
2<x7r0u> Sappho, Bd/cxos Bacchus, 'At0i's (147 a) ; and, upon the same
principle, llvppos (93 d). See also the Epic ko.it <p~<xkapa, naKxevat (136).
g. Aspiration is sometimes transferred : as, iraQaKw iraaxw t° suffer.
160. VIII. The semivowels v, p, and ? are the
only consonants that may end a word. Any other
consonant, therefore, falling at the end of a word,
is either (a) dropped, or (b) changed into one of
these, or (c) assumes a voivel : as
<TtJ,:t(aT)a, ^7r(ar)ap, A^p(ar)as (17) ; 2\v(o/u)ov, Xi5(ot^)oi|ii, 2\v(eT)c,
£\v(ojt)ov, XG(ojt)ov > XO(e0)e (37) ; rW(^/i)tj|tt, tTld(r)p)r\v, e3i5(wr)a>,
<rr(T}d)r[Q\., 8(od)6$ (45) ; u£\(ct)i mel, honey, yd\(aKr)a. lac, milk ; 0(wr)JJs
light ; Voc. 7r(cu5)ai, boy ! yvv(atK)ai, woman ! Cf. Lat. co(rd)r.
d. Both the assumption and the change appear in -<n for -t, and -vtri
for -vt, in the 3d pers. of verbs : as, 'i<rr{yyr)r\tr\., lo-T(avT)a<ri (45, 143 b,
156). In applying this rule and the note below, £ and \j/ are considered
as combinations ending with s (137 d).
e. A word can end with two consonants, only when the last
is a- : as, aXs* yv^r (yvirt), <u£ (atyy), Kopa£ (17). Hence the for-
mative v of the Accusative is changed into a (142) after a con-
sonant, except in a few cases, in which a lingual mute preced-
ing v is dropped : as,
yi{irv)Tzo., ic6pa(Kp)Ka, 7ro(oV)8a •■ K\ei(8v)v and -8a, K6pv{6v)v and -9a (17).
144 CONSONANTS. FINAL LETTERS. §160.
»
f. As final ji and t or 8 so extensively pass into v and s, they may be
considered as having the same corresponding vowels : viz. a correspond-
ing to final ft, and e to final t or 6 (138).
B. In the Connection of Words.
161. I. When a smooth mute is brought by
(a) erasis or (b) elision before the rough breathing, it
unites with it to form the cognate rough : as,
(a) Kal 6, x& " i<al oi, x<p ' rb i/xdriov, doi/xaTLOv • toO ertpov, ddripov • 6'rou
&eKa, bOoxJveKa • (b) airb ov, d(j> o5 • v\jktcl o\r)i>, v6x^ o\t]v • and in composi-
tion, a<plrifj.t (dirb, irjfMi), 8exW e P°s (8ei<a, we" pa), e<pdrip.epos (cirra, rj/xepa).
162. II. Some words and forms end either
with or ivithout a final consonant according to eu-
phony, emphasis, or rhythm.
a. Such consonants are termed movable ; and in grammars and lexicons
are often marked thus : €lwe{v), or elTre{v. Before the digamma, they were
of course not needed to prevent hiatus : date rot E. 4 ; ov Yedev A. 114.
163. 1.) Datives plural in i, and verbs of the third person
in e or simple i, assume v at the end of a sentence, or when the
next word begins with a vowel : as,
Udcri yap dire tovto • hut, Wiirev avrb Tracriv.
TLdiXL Xeyovai tovto • hut, Haaiv auro X^yovffiv.
a. So, likewise, adverbs of place in -crt (properly datives plural), the
adverb irtpvcn, last year, the numeral eiKoai (commonly), the demonstra-
tive -i preceded by <r (sometimes), the Epic case-ending -4>i, and the
Epic particles k4, vti, and vbcrcpi. • as, t\ WXaTaidcnv i)yep.oi>la • eluociv frr).
h. So, also, in a few instances, chiefly poetic, the Plup. and Impf.
3d Pers. in -ei (contracted from -ee) : as, rjdetv tv Eur. Ion 1187, Ve7roi-
6uv, ovk Ar. Nub. 1347, ^€J3X-rjK€Li/ virip £. 412 ; irpoa^iv ; Ovbiira) Ar.
PI. 696, tfo-Keiv elpia V. 388. The form with v became the common form
in the Impf. 3d Pers. ijv, was, and ixpfy or XPV V > ought, even before a
consonant : as, fy 8e i. 2. 3, expw rotOra Cyr. 5. 5. 9.
c. The v thus assumed is often called v paragogic (in Greek, v i<pe\Kv-
GTiKbv, attached). It is sometimes employed by the poets before a con-
sonant to make a syllable long by position ; and in most kinds of verse,
is used at the end of a line. In Ionic prose it is generally neglected ; hut
in Attic prose it is sometimes found even "before a consonant in the mid-
dle of a sentence, while, on the other hand, it is sometimes omitted in
closely connected discourse, even where we point with a period.
164. 2.) The adverb ovrcos, thus, commonly loses a- before
a consonant ; and axP 1 an d H-*XP l > until, often assume it before
a VOWel : as ovtco (prjaiv • fiexpis ov.
a. Some other words have poetic or dialectic forms, in which a final v
or s is dropped or assumed : as, local adverbs in -Ocv (poet., chiefly Ep.,
-0«), numeral adverbs in -Kig (Ion. -ki), dfupls, tivTiKpvs, drptfias, addis,
fyi7ras, TrdXiv, &<pi>b)(s, iy<J}(v, evdij(s } id6(s, ixearryi{s.
§ 1G8. SPECIAL RULES. DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 145-
C. Special Rules.
165. a. The preposition *£, out of, has the form e< before
any consonant : as, €K kokcou, tKcrevu), e/cyeXao), ZkBctos, eKfiao-o-a).
b. So in Horn, the compounds dirl|, 5ie£, virei;, and commonly irapti; •
but not 7r<£/>e£ in Hdt. : as, vtt£k kcikov N. 89 ; but irdpe^ M Hdt. 1. 14.
c. The adverb ov, not, before a vowel, has the form ovk,
which becomes ot'x before the rough breathing : as, ov (prjo-iv,
ovk eveo-Ttv, ov% va, oCfce'rt (imitated by pf\, not, in prjKen).
d. In these words, e/c and ovk may perhaps be regarded as the original
forms. That in certain situations these forms are retained is owing to
their close connection as proclitics, or in composition, with the following
word, and therefore forms no real exception to the rule in 160. When
orthotone, they conform to the rule, the one by assuming s, and the other
by dropping k, except as it also takes the form ovxl-
166. In composition, the preposition eV, in, regularly re-
tains its v before p and <r ; o-uv, ivith, drops its v before a fol-
lowed by another consonant, and before £ ; but before a- fol-
lowed by a vowel, changes v to <r ; while naXtv, again, and nav,
all, vary in their forms : as, tvpaara, cWct'w, evpv$pos, yet also
tfppvBpos • o-vo-TTipa (for o~vv<TTT]pa), av^vyla • avao-evco (for avuaevw),
<ru(T(riTia • 7raAtVov«os and naXiaKtos, navacKpos and nao-o~o(pos.
a. The Epic &v for dvd (136) here imitates kv • as, dvards, &t><rx €T °S'
DIALECTIC VARIATIONS.
167. A. The dialects often interchange consonants : chiefly,
1. Cognate Mutes (137 b) : as, Ion. adris, S^ko/aou, for aWts, §£x°~
fiat • Mo\. d/xwi for dfupi. Compare djj.(f)oj and ambo, both, &yx<*> an d ango,
to choice, kOkvos and cygnus, swan, p,layco and misceo, to mix.
a. The iEol. and Ion. were both far less inclined than the Att. to aspi-
ration (cf. 93 c). In the new Ion. the smooth mute remains before the
rough breathing (161, 165 c) : as, dir o5, 8eKr)/nepo$, ovk vei. In some
compounds, this passed into the Att. : as, d-mjXicoTrjS (dirb, rjXios).
b. Aspiration is sometimes transposed : as, Ion. Ktdcbu, ivdavra, evdev-
rev, KaAxTjSwj', for x VT< * }V ) evravda, ivrevdev, XaX/aySwj'.
c. The dialects also varied in the use of the breathings. In place of
the rough, the iEolic seems commonly, and the Epic often, to have used
the smooth breathing or the digamma. In Homer we find the smooth
for the rough particularly in words which are strengthened in some other
way : as, eijKTjXos, odXos, rj^Xios, fyi/ues, for €ktj\os, 8Xos,tjXlos, vp.e'is.
168. 2.) Co-ordinate Mutes (137 b) : as, Ion. k for ir in inter-
rogative and indefinite pronouns and adverbs : thus, kolos, kov, kot£, for
iroios, irov, ttot£ • Dor., k for t in 7t6k<z, o/ca, toko., for irdre, 8re, Tore, and
in similar adverbs of time ; iEol. -ir£p.ire for irhre quinque, five, <pr)p for drip
fera, wild beast ; Dor. yXicpapov for fiXicpapov, da for yr), dSeXos for 6(3e\6s,
6/3i txos for 6pii0os. Compare X6kos and lupus, wolf, yXvKvs and dulcis,
sweet, rls and quis, who t and Lat. bis, bellum, fr. duis, duellum.
COM P. GR. 7 J
146 CONSONANTS. DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. §169.
3.) Liquids : as, Dor. fyQov, ptirierros, eplvraros, for fjXOov, (HXtio-tos,
tpiXraTos ' Ion. and Att. TrXe^Lucv for irve6p.wv pulmo, lung ; Ion. plv, Dor.
viv. Cf. Xelpiov lilinm, LILY.
a. The interchange of X with another lingual appears in 'Q5v<r<revs
Ulixes, Saicpvov lacrima.
169. 4.) <r with other letters. E.g.
a. The Dor., Ion., and Old Att. <r<r passes, for the most part, in the
later Att., into tt : as, rdereru tolttw (39), yXQcraa yXOtrra, tongue. So t
Att. for initial <r in a few words : as, cr^/xepov T7)p.epov, to-day.
b. Dor. t for <r : as, Uoreiddv, Zttctov, d'/can, for HoaetbOiv, Zireerov,
etKocri. This appears especially in the 2d personal pronoun, and in the
3d pers. of verbs : as, t6, t£, for eri, ere (Lat. tu, ic) ; (pari, epavri,
<p£povTi, for <p7)<jL, <pa<xl, <pepovcrt (Lat. ferunt). See 160 d.
c. Dor. <r for v, and v for <r : as, 2i>8os for ZvSov intus, within, btt for
icrri est, is ; and in the verb-ending of 1st pers. pi. -fj.es for -|i€V (Lat.
-onus), as X£yop.es for Xeyopev (Lat. legimus).
d. The Laconic often changes to <r, and final s to p : as, iraXeop Ay.
Lys. 988, eribp, ertXw, for 7ra\cu6s, 6eos, WXw • iro'Cp for 7rcus (Lat. puer, cf.
Marcipor). Compare the marked correspondence of or and the Lat. r ;
and in Lat., arbos arid arbor, honos and honor.
170. 5.) The Double Consonants with other letters : as, old £iV,
later and common civ (in the Lat. cum the <r has been omitted instead
of the k) ; iEol. ^aircpib for 2a7r</>w • TEol. cuevos, erdepos, for £&os, £i0os •
Dor. \p£, yj/iv, for erepi, ereplv • Ion. 8i£os, rpt£6s, for Surer 6s, t purer 6s.
a. For £, we find, in the iEol. and Dor., cr8, 88, and 8 : as, tieroos, /xe-
XiaSb) (137 d), ira/SSw, pLcLSSa, Aetfs, for 6£os, /*e\ifa>, iraifa, pt-afa, Zetfs.
b. Interchanges of consonants are sometimes poetic rather than dia-
lectic, or simply took place in the progress of the language.
171. B. Consonants are often doubled, inserted, omitted,
and transposed by the poets, especially the Epic, for the sake
of the metre : as,
^XXafiov, eppd<r<rop:ai, vUveren, 6<r<ros, 8iriro)S, tSSeure, for tXafiov, &C. ;
ttt6X€llos, ttt6Xis, 8ix0d, vdjvvp-vos, dirdXapvos, for TroXepos, ir6Xis, SLx a >
vcbvvLios, dvdXa/jLos ' Zpefrv, 'Ooveretis, 'Ax^evs, epdpvyos, for Zppefrv,
'Odvcraetjs, 'AxiXXetfs, epdpvyyos • KpaSLn, ndpTierros, (idp8i<rTOS, dTapir6s, for
Kapdia, KpaTiarros, fipddurTos, aTpair6s.
a. Similar changes are also dialectic, or took place in the progress of
the language. E. g., the iEolic, instead of lengthening a vowel before a
liquid, often made the syllable long by doubling the liquid : as, ip/ii for
eiLii to be, erirtppw for aireipu} to sow, KpLvvu) for Kpivu to judge, eVreXXa for
Aor. tcrreiXa. Not unfrequently, that which is poetic in one dialect is
used in the prose of another.
BOOK II.
ETYMOLOGY.
"E7rea irrepbevra.
Homer.
172. Etymology treats of the Inflection - and
Formation of Words : the former including
Declension, Comparison, and Conjugation ;
and the latter, Derivation and Composition.
a. Inflection is variation in the form of a word to distinguish its
different offices or relations (inflecto, to bend to, change). A word which
is inflected has two parts : the one constituting its essence, and receiving
no change except as euphony or emphasis may require ; the other circum-
stantial, and varying according to its different offices and connections.
The former is called the essential part, or, by a botanical figure, the stem
or root ; and the latter, from its producing the various forms of inflec-
tion, the inflective part.
b. It is now common to limit the term root to primitive elements in
the formation of words, while the term stem is not thus limited. Syl-
lables or letters belonging to the root are termed radical ; and others,
formative.
c. Syllables or letters belonging to the stem are called essential ; and
others, inflective. Of the latter, those which precede the stem are termed
prefixes ; and those which follow it, affixes. Affixes are of two kinds :
open, or voioel affixes, those which begin with a vowel ; and close, or con-
sonant affixes, those which begin with a consonant.
d. The last letter, or sometimes letters, of the stem, as marking its
character, are called the stem-mark or characteristic ; and from this,
words and stems are named mute, liquid, double-consonant, labial, pure
(112 a), &c.
e. By the theme of a word, is meant that form which is first given in
grammatical inflection : as commonly, in declension, the Nominative
singular, and, if the word has the different genders, the masculine ; in
comparison, the Positive ; in conjugation, the first person singular of the
Present indicative active, or, if the verb is deponent, middle (though some
prefer the Present infinitive).
148 ' DECLENSION. § 173.
CHAPTEK I.
PRINCIPLES OF DECLENSION.
173. The two classes of Substantives (includ-
ing Nouns and Substantive Pronouns) and Adjec-
tives (including the Article, Adjectives commonly
so called, Adjective Pronouns, and Participles) are
declined to mark three distinctions, Gendee, Num-
ber, and Case.
a. Adjectives receive these distinctions merely for the sake of conform-
ing to the substantives to which they belong.
b. In grammars and lexicons, these distinctions are often marked by
the appropriate forms of the article (with the interjection cD for the Voca-
tive) : thus, in 6 ra/xLas, or ra/xias, 6, steward, the noun is marked as
masculine and in the Nom. sing. ; while in 6, ij rpo<pos, nurse, it is marked
as of the common gender, and in tcl avKa, figs, as neuter.
174. A. Gender. The Greek has three gen-
ders ; the Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter.
a. • Nouns which are both masculine and feminine are said to be of the
common gender. In the case of most animals, it is seldom important to
distinguish the gender. Hence in Greek, for the most part, the names
of animals, instead *of being common, have but a single gender, which is
used indifferently for both sexes. Such nouns are termed epicene (iiriKoi-
vos, promiscuous). Thus, 6 Xikos wolf, i] ak&irrjt- fox, whether the male
or the female is spoken of.
b. In words in which the feminine may either have a common form
with the masculine or a distinct form, the Attic sometimes prefers the
common form, where the Ionic and Common dialects prefer the distinct
form : as, b, i) Beds, god, goddess, and i} 6ed or diaiva, goddess. So, like-
wise, in adjectives.
175. The masculine gender belongs properly to words de-
noting males; the feminine, to words denoting females; and
the neuter, to words denoting neither males nor females. In
Greek, however, the names of most things without life are
masculine or feminine, either from the real or fancied posses-
sion of masculine or feminine qualities, or from a similarity in
their formation to other nouns of these genders.
Thus, for the most part, the names of winds and rivers
(from their power and violence), and also of the months, are
masculine; and the names of trees, plants, countries, islands,
and cities (regarded as mothers of their products or inhabitants)
§ 177. GENDER. 149
are feminine ; while nouns denoting mere products, or imply-
ing inferiority (even though names of persons), especially dimin-
utives, are neuter : as,
6 &i>€fj.os wind, 6 Boppas Boreas, 6 irora/jiSs river, 6 Net Xos the Nile, 6 p,r)v
month, 6 'E«:aT0yti/3cuwj> June -July; 17 aval) fig-tree, 77 fir/Xta apple-tree,
77 &iatt€\os vine, 77 fivpXos papyrus, 77 x^pa country, ij Aiyvirros Egypt,
77 v?,<xos island, 77 2d/uos Samos, 77 ttoXls city, 77 A.aKebaip.uv Lacedo3?)ion ; rb
ffuxop 'fig, to ixrjXov apple, rb t£kvov child, rb dvbpdirobov slave, to ytivaiov,
dim. of yvvr) woman, rb iraiblov little boy or girl.
176. The gender of nouns, when not determined by the
signification, may be, for the most part, inferred from the form
of the theme or stem, according to the following rules :
I. In the first declension (15), all words in -as and -rjs are
masculine ; and all in -a and -77, feminine : as, 6 rap,ias, 6 noirjTTjs •
f] Tpane£a, 17 Tipr).
II. In the second declension (16), most words in -os and
-as are masculine, but some are feminine or common ; words in
-ov and -cov are neuter : as, 6 x°P° s i 6 vea>s • 77 vrjaos, 17 ecos dawn ;
6, r) 6(6s god, 6, fj apKTos bear ; to d\6v, to duaycav chamber.
a. Except when the diminutive form in -ov is given to feminine proper
names : as, 77 Aebvriov, 77 FXvK^piop.
177. III. In the THIRD declension (17 s),
a.) All words in -evs are masculine; all in -a> and -avs, femi-
nine ; and all in -a, -1, -u, -os, and -op, neuter : as, 6 Imrs vs, 6 dp.-
(popevs amphora ; fj ^«, 7 j/ctOs • r6 o-<o/^a, to p.e\i honey, to aarv,
to yevos, to qrop heart.
b.) All abstracts in -tijs and -is, and most other words in -is
are feminine : as, 7 -yXuKuri/s sweetness, 7 bvvapis power, 77 Trolrjais
poesy, x] pis, fj noXis.
c.) All labials and palatals, and all liquids (except a few in
which p is the stem-mark) are either masculine or feminine.
Except palatals, they are more frequently masculine.
d.) Nouns in which the stem ends
1.) in -cot-, -av-, -cv-, or -vt-, are masculine: as, 6 ytXm, -orros, laugh-
ter ; 6 iroudv, -avos, pon-an ; 6 Xip.r)i>, -tvos • b Xtiov, -ovros, b 68ovs, b yiyas,
6 ip,ds, -&i>Tos, thong. Except to ofo, (brbs, ear, rb <p<2s, (poorbs, light (both
contracts), 77 <ppf)v, <ppevbs, mind, b, 77 ddrjv, -tvos, gland ; and a few names
of cities (175) : as, 77 "Papvovs, -ovvtos, BJiamnus.
2.) in -8-, -0-, or two palatals, feminine: as, 7} Xa/xirds, -dbos, torch,
7) tyis, -idos, strife, 17 x^a^s, -Odos, cloak ; 77 abpvs, -vdos, helmet ; 77 crdX-
iri-yii, -1770s, trumpet. Except 6, 77 irah, waibos, child, 6 ttovs, irodos, foot ;
6, i} 6pvLs, -Idos, bird ; 6 X&y^, Xvyubs, lynx, and a few other double palatals.
3.) in -<xt-, or -a-, neuter : as, rb f}7rap, t -aros, rb Kepas, -tiros, rb ytpas,
-tios.
150 DECLENSION. NUMBER. CASE. §178.
178. B. Number. The Greek has three num-
bers ; the Singular, denoting one ; the Plural,
denoting more than one; and the Dual (dualis, from
duo, two), a variety of the plural, which may be
employed when only tivo are spoken of.
Thus, the singular &i>dpwiros signifies man, the plural dvOpuiroi, men
(whether two or more), and the dual avdp&iro}, two men.
a. The dual is most used in the Attic and Homeric Greek. The iEolic
dialect (as the Latin, which it approaches the most nearly of the Greek
dialects) and the Hellenistic Greek show scarce a trace of the dual (the
New Testament, like the Modern Greek, none), except in Svo, two, and
&;j.<pu, both (Lat. duo, ambo).
179. C. Case. The Greek has Rye cases : the
Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusative, and
Vocative.
a. From the general character of the relations which they denote, the
Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative are termed the direct, and the
Genitive and Dative, the indirect cases. The cases are also distinguished
as subjective, objective, and residual. See 10, 14, and Syntax.
b. The Nominative and Vocative are also termed casus recti, the right
cases, and the other three, casus obllqui, the oblique cases.
180. D. Methods of Declension. Words
are declined, in Greek, by annexing to the stem
certain affixes (172 a, c), which mark the dis-
tinctions of gender, number, and case. There
are three sets of these affixes ; and hence arise
three distinct methods of declining words, called
the first, second, and third declensions.
a. The first of these methods applies only to masculine and femi-
nine words ; but the second and third, to words of all the genders.
In some of the cases, however, the affixes vary, in the same declen-
sion, according to the gender ; so that, to know how a word is de-
clined, it is necessary to ascertain three things : 1. its stem ; 2. the
declension to which it belongs ; and 3. its gender (173 b, 174 s).
b. If the theme (172 e) and gender do not determine the stem
and declension, these are commonly shown, as in Latin, by adding
the Genitive singular, or its ending. If the Genitive singular ends in
-as or -ns, or in -ov from a theme in -as or -ns, the word is of the first
declension ; if it ends in -ov from a theme in -os or -ov, the word is of
the second declension ; if it ends in -os, the word is of the third declen-
sion. The stem is obtained by throwing off the affix of the Genitive ;
or it may be obtained by throwing off any open affix (172 c).
§ 183. METHODS. GENERAL RULES. 151
Thus the nouns, 6 raaias steward, tj olda house, y y\Cxxaa tongue, 6 8rj-
fjios people, and 6 "Apa\j/ Arab, make in the Gen. ra/niov, olrias, yXuxxcrjs,
8fiiiov t and "Apafios. From these genitives we ascertain that ra/xias, oixia,
and yXuaara belong to Dec. 1, drjfios to Dec. 2, and "Apa\J/ to Dec. 3. By
throwing off the affixes -ov, -as, -rjs, and -os, we obtain the stems raui-,
otii-, yXucra-, Srjp,-, and 'Apaj3-. The words are then declined by annexing
to these stems the affixes in § 11.
181. Each declension observes the following
General Rules. 1. The masculine and feminine affixes are
the same, except in the Nominative and Genitive singular of the
first declension. The neuter has also the same affixes, except
in the direct cases, singular and plural.
2. In neuters, the three direct cases have the same form, and
in the plural always end in a.
3. The dual has but two forms : one for the direct, and the
other for the indirect cases.
4. In the feminine singular of the first declension, and in
the plural of all words, the Vocative has the same form with the
Nominative.
182. a. The use of the Voc. as a distinct form is still further lim-
ited. Few substantives or adjectives, except proper names and personal
appellatives or epithets, are sufficiently employed in address to require
a separate form for this purpose. Hence a distinct Voc. is scarce found
in the participle, pronoun, article, or numeral. In respect to other words :
b. Masculines of Dec. 1 are commonly names or epithets of persons,
and therefore form the Voc. sing.
c. In Dee. 2, the distinct form of the Voc. is commonly used, except
for euphony or rhythm : as, T <piXos, & <pi\os, my friend/ my friend/ Ar.
Nub. 1167. <N\os 3> Me^XcTe A. 189. 'HAi65 re T. 277. To avoid the
double c, 6e6s, god (like deus in Latin), has, in classic writers, no distinct
Voc. ; yet Oe<? St. Mat. 27. 46.
d. In Dec. 3, few words, except proper names and personal appellatives
and epithets, have a distinct Voc. ; and even in those which have, the
Nom. is sometimes employed in its stead, especiallv by Att. writers : thus,
T fl iraaa irbXi Ar. Ach. 971 ; but *0 7r6\ts Soph. Phil. 1213.
183. The Table (12) exhibits the affixes as resolved into
their two classes of Elements : I. Flexible Endings, w T hich
are significant additions, marking distinctions of number, case,
and gender ; and II. Connecting Vowels, which are chiefly
euphonic in their origin, and serve to unite the flexible endings
with the stem.
a. These elements, when there is no danger of mistake, may be more
briefly called Flcxives and Connectives. The affixes are termed euphonic,
when they have connecting vowels, and nude (nudus, naked), when they
want them. Where the connectives were followed by other vowels, con-
traction took place in one or another of its forms, though not always
according to the common laws. See 7, 13.
152 DECLENSION. HISTORY. §184.
184. The tables (11 s) show, that, in regular declension,
a.) The flexive of the Nom. sing. masc. and (except in Dec. 1) fern, is
always s.
b.) The Dat. has always i : in the sing., ending with this vowel ; in
the plur., joining it with <r, and in the dual, with v.
c.) The Ace. sing, (except in neuters of Dec. 3) always ends in v, or its
corresponding vowel a (138) ; and the Ace. pi. masc. and fern, is always
formed, by adding s to the Ace. sing. (122, 156).
d.) The Gen. pi. and dual always ends in v ; which, in the plur., is
preceded by o>, and in the dual by an i diphthong.
e.) In Dec. 1 and 2, the affixes are all open (172 c) and constitute a dis-
tinct syllable. In Dec. 3, three of the affixes, <r, v, and en., are close.
f.) In the singular of Dec. 3, the direct cases neut., and the Voc. masc.
and fem., have no affixes.
185. The three Greek and first three Latin declensions
correspond. The fourth and fifth declensions in Latin are con-
tract varieties of the third.
186. E. Historic View. a. The following view has much
evidence in its support, though, from the very nature of the case, it can-
not be established by direct testimony : (b, c^The Greek cases were at
first only two, a Direct and an Indirect Case ; and these only singular and
plural, (d) From the Direct Case, in the masculine and feminine genders,
the Nominative and Accusative were formed by significant affixes, to dis-
tinguish the subject and direct object of an action, (e, f ) To mark indirect
subjective relations, the Genitive was separated from the old Indirect Case,
which then remained as a Dative. The different forms of the Gen. sing,
point to 0, or, with a euphonic vowel, o0, as its original affix. As, by the
laws of euphony which afterwards prevailed, could not end a word (160),
it was dropped, or became s, or assumed € (commonly written with v para-
gogic, 164 a). (g) After the formation of a new and enlarged plural, the
old plural with its two case-forms was restricted to a dual sense ; while
the old Direct Case singular, in which the stem received no affix, was now
left simply as a "Vocative.
187. a. To the primitive nude declension, now called the third,
two others were afterwards added, having connecting vowels, (b) In the
Nom. and Ace. sing, of these declensions, the primitive direct form, with-
out s or v appended, was sometimes retained (197 b, 199).
188. Neuters, as denoting things without life, which can have no
voluntary action, and therefore require less the distinction of subject and
object, remained content with the single Direct Case. In the singular,
this was the simple stem in Dec. 3 ; and in Dec. 2, took the Ace. form,
which suited the objective character of the gender. In the plural, instead
of the old affix -€, it took the more objective -a, and with no connecting
vowel. Observe here the striking analogy of the Latin throughout.
189. a. The first declension appears to have arisen in the effort to
obtain a distinct form for the feminine, with an appropriate connecting
vowel. This vowel was commonly lengthened, unless contracted with a
vowel following, (b) The feminine is distinguished from the masculine
words admitted into this declension by the want of the strong flexive -s
in the Nom. sing., and by the affix -os, instead of -o in the Genitive.
§192. FORMS IN -*I, -01, -0EN, &c. 153
190. The prevention of hiatus Toy the insertion of aspirate conso-
nants (the successors of the digamma or used like it), and by different
modes of contraction (100), has given an especial variety of form, in the
first and second declensions, to the Dative singular, which, as the primi-
tive Indirect Case (186 c), originally performed the offices of both the
Genitive and the Dative. Thus, we find,
1.) The i appended with the insertion of <{>, a natural successor of the
digamma. This form is Epic, and from its being used as both Gen. and
Dat., and in Dec. 2 even as plural, is evidently of great antiquity. It
does not occur in names of persons, and is chiefly used where local rela-
tions are spoken of. E. g.
Dec. 1. £!• evj>r}(pi, from the bed, y. 405 ; dirb vevprjcpiv (163 a) 9. 300 ;
Jj<f>L piycpL TriOrjo-as, trusting to his strength, X. 107 ; KecpaXriQiv iird Xdpev
II. 762 ; ws (pprjTpw <ppi\T pn<t>iv dprp/n B. 363 ; x e P <T '- v Te P<-V<P<- T€ f 1 - 246 ;
&p! rjol (paLvopihrj^LV I. 618, 682; Kpareprjcpi. filnfyiv 4>. 501 ; er£pi)<pc II. 734;
Qvprjrpiv t. 238.
Dec. 2. 'IXiocpi kXvtcl rei'xea, the famed walls of (or at) Troy, <i>. 295 ;
£k irouTO(f)Lv a>. 83 ; dirb irXartos irrvocpiv &. 588 ; iirl defrfanv N. 308 ;
da.Kpv6<pt. irXijaOev, were filled ivith tears, P. 696 ; airb ira.acraX6(pi, il. 268 ;
irap avrocpi p.. 302 ; dp.<j> dareocpiv p.. 45 ; deocpiv p.i\<JTwp drdXavros H. 366.
So £<rxapo(piv e. 59, and KorvXydovocpiv e. 433, as of Dec. 2, while the
themes in use are icrxdpi) of Dec. 1, and KOTvXrjdibv of Dec. 3.
a. The <}> is likewise inserted in the Dative plural of a few words of
Dec. 3, chiefly neuters, in -o$ ; and here serves to lengthen the preceding
syllable. These forms were also used as both Gen. and Dat., and some-
times with the force of the singular : as, kclt dpe<r<pi, down tJie mountains,
A. 452 ; dirb ar-qdea^Lv, from the breast, £. 214 ; irpoaO' ' 'Lirirouv kclI 6x C(T< t> LV
E. 107; cbv 6xe<r<t>i II. 811 ; dpecrcpt A. 474 (cf. A. 479) ; wrb Kpdrea^i,
under the head, K. 156 ; 'Epi^eacpiv (probably the correct form for "Epe-
§ev<T(piv I. 572, &c.) ; dirb vavcpi (or here diopped), from the ships, II. 246.
191. 2.) The i appended with the insertion of 8. This form be-
came adverbial (chiefly poetic), denoting the place where : as, o?ko6i at
home, ftXXodi elsewJiere, avrodi, 6di, Kopivdodi. It was mostly confined to
Dec. 2 ; and, in the few instances in which it was made from nouns of
other declensions, it still imitated the forms of this. Traces of its old use
as the Indirect Case still remain in Homer : thus, Gen. 'IXtodi irpo, before
Troy, 0. 561, ovpav69t irpo T. 3, i)G)9i irpo f. 36 ; Dat. Kvpodt I. 300.
3.) The t appended with the insertion of \- This appears in the Epic
?JXi for the adverbial Dative #, wliere, A. 607.
4.) The t contracted with the preceding vowel into cu or oi (119).
This simpler mode of contraction now scarcely appears except in adverbial
Datives : as, x a , u - a <- humi, on the ground, ol'/cot at home (but olmp to a house;
cf. Lat. domi and domus), ire8ot, 'I<r9p.ot, of, Siroi. Yet h 'Io~dp.oi Simon.
Er. 209 ; ev Upiavaiot Insc. Cret. ; tol 8dp.oi Insc. Bceot.
5.) The common form, in which the i is absorbed by the preceding
vowel : as, X6p(a-i)a, oi'/c(o-i)<i), 'ladp,^, rip 8r]p:(p.
192. The forms of the Genitive in -oGcv or -0€V (186 e) remained in
the common language only as adverbs, denoting the place whence : as,
otKodev from home, dXXodev, avroOev, 'AdrjurjOev. As examples of their use
as decided Genitives, may be cited dir ovpavodev, from Jieavcn, 0. 365, 4£
Alcrvp,r)dev 0. 304, <?£ dXodev 3>. 335, Atodep O. 489 ; and the pronominal
forms £p.edei>, a£0ev, Wev (27), which even occur in Attic poets.
comp. gr. 7*
154 FIRST DECLENSION. § 193.
CHAPTEE II.
DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
193. The declension of adjectives is also here treated, so
far as it corresponds with the declension of nouns. See 229.
I. THE FIEST DECLENSION.
(For the affixes and paradigms, see 11 - 15, 20; for the gender, 176.)
194. The original affixes of Dec. 1 all had a as a connect-
ing vowel (187, 189). In most of these, the a, if not contract-
ed with a vowel following (183 a), was itself made long. Short
a, however, remained in the singular,
1.) In the direct cases of feminines whose stem ended in a-,
a double consonant, XX, or aiv : as, povaa, povcrav, Tpcmc£a (15),
yXaaaa (or -yXdJrra, 1 69 a) tongue, apiWa contest, \eaiva lioness.
a. Add a few others in -\a and -vet ; as, iraDXa rest, e^ 4 ^" viper, pe-
pifiva care, decnroipu mistress : and a very few in which |x or a mute pre-
cedes a ; as, ro\pa courage, &Kav6a thorn, Blaira mock of life.
b. Add many feminines in -a pure and -pa, mostly having a diph-
thong in the penult, and easily recognized by the accent. The principal
classes are, (a) Polysyllables in -eta and -oia, except abstracts in -€ia from
verbs in -euw ; as, aXirjdeia truth, efivoiu good-ivill, /3aertXeta queen, but
jSoo-iXeta reign, from (3a<n\e6u ■ (]3) Female designations in -Tpia ; as,
\f/d\Tpia female musician : (y) Dissyllables and some polysyllabic names
of places in -ata ; as, paia good mother, 'lo-riaia • (S) Words in -via ; as,
fivTa fly : (e) Most words in -pa, whose penult is lengthened by a diph-
thong (except av), by v, or by pp ; as, p&x aL P& sword, ye<pvpa bridge.
c. The accent commonly shows the quantity of final a in the theme.
Thus, in all proparoxytones and properispomes it must be short by the gen-
eral laws of accent ; while, by a special law of the declension, it is long in
all oxy tones, and in all paroxytones in -a, Gen. -as, except the proper
names Kippa, Tltippa, (b. e), and the numeral pla. one.
2.) In the Vocative of nouns in -ttjs, and of gentiles and com-
pound verbals in -rjs : as, vavrrjs (14), Ileparjs Persian, pvponaAvs
(pvpov perfume, TrooXeo) to sell) perfumer ; Voc. vavra, nlpaa (but
Ueparrjs Perses, a man's name, Voc. Uepa-rj), pvponaXa.
195. In the singular, long a passed, by precession, into rj,
unless preceded by e, i, p, or po (115 a) : as, vavrt]s, vavrn,
*Arpeldr], pova-qs, povcrrj, <abf), codfjv • but rapids, fapia, 0ed } 6eas,
\vpa, \vpav (14, 15), Ibka idea, XP € ^ need, xP°& color.
§ 198. DIALECTIC FORMS. 155
a. Long a likewise remains in the pures, Trod grass, <rrod porch, ytid
field, ciKva gourd, icaptd walnut-tree, iXdd olive-tree, NavcriKcxd ; in dXaXd
war-cry, iiripdd, aKavSdXd, yevvddds ; and in some proper names, partic-
ularly those which are Doric or foreign, as, Ai]8d, <&iXopi.rjXd, Aewidds,
2,vXXds • and it became tj after p or po in the words dep-rj nezk, Kopy\ maid-
en, Kopprj (Ion. and Old Att. KOpo-q, 157) cheek, dddprj pap, aWprj clear sky,
poi) stream ; in some proper names, as Tyjprjs • and in compounds of p.e-
Tpew, as yeup.e'Tprjs land-measurer, geometer. In some words, usage fluc-
tuates between long or short a and tj : as, vpipwd and irp6p.vq, stern.
196. Contracts. A few nouns, in which the stem ends in
a or e, and feminine adjectives in -ea and -07, are contracted :
as, ftvda pii, 'Eppeas 'Epp.fjs, fiopeas (3oppas (p doubled), (rvKea <rvKr},
Jig-tree; xP var * a XP va Vi SinXorj dinXfj. See 15, 23, J20e.
Dialectic Forms.
197. a. In the affixes of this declension, the Doric dialect retains
throughout the original a ; while, in the singular, the Ionic has tj in most
of those words in which the Attic and Common dialects have long a, and
even in some in which they have short a, particularly derivatives in -ti&
and -oiu (130) : as, Dor. y5a, y5as, ufiq, ipSdv • Ion. Xvprj, XOprjs, Xipyj,
X6pr}v, rapurjs (yet Horn, has Bed) • Ep. dX-qBeirj, evirXohj, New Ion. dX-q-
#77477, p.L-q, for dX-qdeid, evTrXotd, fiid.
b. In words in -tjs, the primitive Direct Case in -d is sometimes re-
tained by Horn, and some of the other poets as Nom. (187 b), for the sake
of the metre or euphony : as, 6 ctiVe Ovta-rd B. 107 ; Imrord N&rru/j
B. 336 ; ivpvoira Zei5s p. 146 ; padvpLTJra Xe'ipwv Pind. N. 3. 92. Com-
pare Lat. nauta, scriba. So in feminines in -tj, the poets sometimes re-
tain the old short a in the Voc. : as, v6p.<pd <f>LX-q Y. 130 ; *£l AUd, Sapph.
c. The old Gen. affixes, -do and dwv, which often occur in the Epic
writers, were contracted as follows : (1) In the Ion. , they were regularly
contracted into -« and -wv, with the insertion of € after a consonant, but
commonly in the poets with synizesis (120 i, 117 b) : as, 'Arp€L5(do, w)w,
'Arp€i8(duv, wv)(<av ' Bope"do Boptw, 'E/tyteiw 0. 214, £up,pLeXlu A. 47. (2)
In the Dor., d absorbed the following vowel, and the affixes became d
and &v (131 a) : as, , ATpei'5(ao)d, 'ATp€i8(duv)av. (3) In the Att., do and
d«v were contracted into ov (by precession from «, 115) and «v : as,
'Arp€ld(ao, w)ov, 'Arpei8(d<>)v)<av.
d. In some masculines, chiefly proper names, the later Ion. has cd in
the Ace. for tjv : as AeuHSea Hdt. 8. 15 (-tjv Id. 7. 206), 5e<nr6rea Id. 1. 11.
198. a. The Dat. pi. in Horn, commonly ends in -tjoi or -tjs before
a vowel (which may be referred to apostrophe) : as 6erj<riv A. 638, 0eijs els
T. 158. In a few instances, -tjs precedes a consonant : as, <rrjs nal A. 179,
irtrpris irp6s 77. 279. We even find deals e. 119, d/crals M. 284.
b. Antique, Ion., and Dor. forms are sometimes found in Att. writers:
1.) The Dor. Gen. in -d, from some nouns in -as, mostly proper names :
as, opvidodqpas, fowler, Tu)j3p6as, KaXXias • G. bpviQoOqpa, Tu)j3pva Cyr. 5.
2. 14 (YvPpvov lb. 2). So all contracts in -ds : as, Poppas, G. poppa.
2.) The Ion. Gen. in -&a, from a few proper names in -tjs : as Tfy-qs,
Ka/tj3tJtrT/s * G. Typew Th. 2. 29, Kafipfoea Cyr. 1. 2. I.
§).' The old Dat. pi. in -cuo-i, which is frequent in the poets. So, in
Plato, rexvacai Leg. 920 e, r/p.e'paio-i Phsedr. 276 b.
156 SECOND DECLENSION. DIALECTIC FORMS. §199.
II. THE SECOND DECLENSION.
(For the affixes and paradigms, see 11-14, 16, 20; for the gender, 176.)
199. The flexible endings of the Nominative and Accusa-
tive singular are wanting (187 b),
1.) In the theme of the article: thus, 6 for 6s.
2.) In the neuter of the article and of the pronouns aXkos,
avros, ckcIvos, and os • thus, to, aAAo, avro, liceivo, o, for top, &C.
a. In crasis with the article (125), and in composition with the defini-
tives ToioSy roaos, ttjXLicos, and twos, the neuter ai/rd more frequently he-
comes avrbv • thus, tclvtSv and Taurd, for t6 avro ' tolovtov and tolovto.
3.) Frequently in the Accusative of the Attic declension
(200), particularly in 17 ems dawn, 17 aktos threshing-floor, 6 Aa-
ycas hare, fj Ke'oy, fj Kcos, rj Tecos, 6 "Adas • thus, Ace. ca (only),
Aaycof and Aoyco, "Ada. So, in the adjectives dyrjpas (22), dva-
7r\ea>s full, dt-ioxpeoas competent.
200. Contracts. If the stem-mark' (172 d) is a, e, or o,
it may be contracted with the affix. See dyrjpaos (22), ocrrtou,
voos (16) ; and also 120 c, e, i, 121. The contract declension
in -cos and -av, from -aos and -aov, is termed by grammarians
the Attic Declension from its prevalence among Attic writers,
although it is far from being peculiar to them (87 b).
a. If the stem-mark is long a, € is inserted after the contraction (120 i) :
as, mis (i'ws) vedbs (16), vaov (voj) veiv, vaip (vw) vej, vabv (vwv) veuv.
b. The number of words belonging to the Attic declension is small.
In some of them, the uncontracted form does not occur, or occurs only
with some change. Thus eifyews, fertile, is the contract form of evyaos
(fir. (yaa)yrj, poet, ycua, earth), in place of which we find the protracted
etiyaios and evyeios.
Dialectic Forms.
201. a. The affix of the Gen. sing. -0-0 (13), which was commonly
contracted to -ov, or, in the iEol. and stricter Dor., to -w (130 c), Avas often
prolonged by the poets, especially the Epic (sometimes even by the Tragic
in lyric portions), to -010 (called the Thessalian form, and not receiving
elision) : thus, ttovtov 'iKapioio B. 145 ; 86/j.ov vxprikoio a. 126 ; olo 56/j.oio
a. 330 ; TroTa/ioio . . . 'Avdtiru Theoc. 1. 68 ; /xaXaKQ x^P 7010 hi. 4. 18.
b. A single contraction, with the insertion of c (120 i), gives the Epic
genitives IleT{aoo)t<oo A. 327, IIej'eX(aoo)€a)0 (v. 1. -tow) % 489. The
poetic doubling of t gives the Epic dual form in -ot'iv (so always in Horn.).
c. The new Ion. has Gen. forms with € inserted : as, irvpiav Hdt. 2.
36, "Lovaiav Id. 5. 35. In some proper names in -os, these imitate Dec. 1 :
as, Kpoiaos, Kpoiaea Hdt. 8. 122 (Kpoiaov 1. 6) ; Bctrrew, KXeo/x^poreu:,
Id. 4. 160 ; 5. 32.
d. The old Dat. pi. in -o«ri is common in the poets of all classes, and
in Ion. prose. So, even in Plato, 6eolai Leg. 955 e.
J 204. THIRD DECLENSION. MUTES. 157
III. THE THIRD DECLENSION".
(For the affixes and paradigms, see 11-14, 17-21; for the gender, 177.)
202. In this declension, the Nominative, though regarded
as the theme of the word, seldom exhibits the stem in its sim-
ple distinct form. This form must therefore be learned from
the Genitive, or some case which has an open affix (172 c).
a. Special attention must be given to the euphonic changes which occur
in those cases which have either close affixes, or no affixes ; that is, in the
Nom. and Voc. sing., in the Ace. sing, in -v (where the stem receives the
same changes as in the theme), and in the Dat. pi.
b. The change of v, the original flexive of the Ace. sing., into a, was so
extensively required in this declension by the rule (160 e), that a became
the prevailing affix, and was often used even after a vowel. It will there-
fore be understood that the affix is a, if not stated otherwise.
Words of Dec. 3 are divided, according to the stem-mark, or
characteristic, into Mutes, Liquids, and Pures (172 d).
A. Mutes (17).
203. Labials and Palatals. These are all masculine or
feminine (177 c). Except in the irregular ywr), the theme ends
in ^ or £ (151), and the Voc. has no distinct form.
a. Yvv-f), woman, wife, which has its theme after the form of De?. 1,
and is accented as if dissyllabic throughout, is thus declined : S. N. yvvij,
G. yvvaiKos (accented as if pronounced y'uaixds), D. yvvcuKi, A. ywcur.a,
V. yOuac- P. N. ywouKes, G. yvvaixtov, D. yvvai^t, A. ywaiKas ■ &c.
b. In the stem 9ptx-> 9 becomes t, exeept where \ is changed (159 b).
In i] a\ibirr)£, -eicos, fox, the e of the stem is lengthened in the theme.
204. Linguals. In these, the characteristic lingual can-
not remain in any case which has either a close affix or no affix
(202 a) ; and if another consonant is thus brought before o- or
to the end of a word, further change may be required : as,
e\irl(8s)s, Kopv(6s)s, irai(8cri)(rC, K\e?(8v)v, (Tra^ircu, o-tD/i(ar)a , \e , o(vr)v
(17) ; 'e\fXL{vds)vs (156 b) ; <£w(t)s, ^7ra(r)p (17) : &vcl(kts, ks)%, &>(a/cr)a,
8dp.a(pTs)p, \<:{ovts, ovs, oev)uv, \£(pvT<ri) overt (17). Cf. Lat. reta(ts)s.
a. Barytones in -is and -vs form the Ace. sing, both in -v and less fre-
quently in -a : as, tyis, Kopvs (17), 6, ij 6pvis bird, ij %dpis grace'; Ace. tow,
6pviv (160 e), and poet, epida, 8pvWa, commonly Xdptra as the name of a
goddess, but otherwise x&P LV - So kXcLs (17), 6 7^\ws laughter, and the
compounds of ttovs foot, have both forms : KXelv and icXet&s, yiXurra and
7^/W ; see Oldt-rrovs, diirovs (21, 22).
b. If a distinct Voc. is needed, linguals obtain this by dropping the
stem-mark (160 a) : as, irat, Xtov (17) ; "Apre/uis Diana, veavts girl, rvpav-
vis sovereignty, V. "Aprepu, veavi, rvpavvi Soph. O. T. 380. A few proper
names in -as, -avros, then change v as in the theme : as, "ArXds, IloXvdd-
p.ds, V. "Ar\(avT, av, aa)a, IloXvdd/iid Hel. 6. 1. 5. The Voc. form &va is
used only in addressing a god, as Zed &ua T. 351, Soph. G. C. 1485.
158 THIRD DECLENSION. MUTES. § 2C5.
205. Stems in -vt-. When, by the dropping of r, v is
brought before s in the theme, the s is changed, if an vowel
precedes ; but otherwise the v : as, Xe(oprs, ovs, oev)av, yly[avrs,
avs, aas)ds (17, 153, 156) ; ~\v(ovts)o>v, 6(evTs)eis, \varas, 6vs (26).
a. Except 65ovs (17), and participles from verbs in -copi : as, dldovs,
dote, fr. dldwfu (45). Yet Ion. 6Uv Hdt. 6. 107.
206. Neuter Linguals. In these the stem-mark is always
r, which, in the theme, is commonly dropped after pa, but
otherwise gives place to s or p (160) : as, a(op(ar)a, <jf>(a>r)<o?,
rJTr(ar)ap (17); el8(oT)6s (26). Cf. Lat. poem(at)a, co(rd)r.
a. The t is also omitted in pe"\(ir)i mel, honey ; in yd\(aKr)a lac, milk,
which also drops k ; and in y6v(ar)v genu, knee, and 8bp(ar)v spear, which
have also v in place of a (cf. 224 c). In the poet. ^p(ar)ap day, p takes
the place of t after pa ; and in i)d(ar)<ap water, crK(ar)<6p filth, top takeo the
place of aT.
207. Contract Linguals. a. A few linguals drop the stem-mark
(140 a) before some or all of the open affixes, and are then contracted : as,
/cXe?2as (/cXetas) /cXets ' K^p(dros, aos)a>s (17) ; rb ripas, prodigy, P. N. re-
para re"pd, G. reparuu repQv ' 6 XP&h shin, S. D. xP( b}T h wt)w (in the
phrase tv XP$)- So, in Horn., from 6 lopus sudor, sweat, 6 7Aws laughter,
6 fpws love, S. D. idp(CoTi)iu, yiXto, tp<a • A. ldp{u>Ta, wa)<a, y^\<a.
b. These neuters are contracted in the stem : o&s, wrbs, car, fr. the old
o&as, oijaros (17) ; crtap &rijp, tallow, G. aridros arnrbs • cpptap well, G.
tpptaros ("a) (pprjrbs. See 120 b, c.
c. So, usually, nouns and adjectives in -eis, -cvros, preceded by o or r\ :
as, '07r(o«TS, 6eis)ovs, -(6e)ovVTOS (17), 6 7rXa/c(6eis)ovs cake; riptfeis) fjs or
i\s (109 a), TLp(rie)v\<TQ-a, rip(i]€v)r\v, honored. Add some in -is, -iSos : as,
i) Bats dps torch, irapnts iraprjs clieek, (puts <p(^s blister. '
B. Liquids (18).
208. Masculine and Feminine Liquids. In these the
stem always ends in v or p, except in a\s (6 sal, salt, fj sea), of
which the singular is rare in Attic prose. For the euphonic
changes in the theme and Dat. pi., see 153, 154, 156, 145 a.
In -vs of the theme, (a) the s is changed after an E or vowel ;
(b) the v, after i or v; and (c) after a, in nouns the s, but in
adjectives the v : as,
(a) \ip(evs, eev)i\v, 8aip(ovs)av (18) ; b al(wvs)<av sevum, age, b p(rjvs)r\v
mensis, month ; (b) p(u>s, ias)is (18), b$6pK(v vs)vs Phorcys ; (c) 7ra£(ews)ttv
(18), fi£\(aps)5* (23).
d. Except 6 fcreis, KTtvbs, comb ; ds, hbs, one (25) ; the Ion. b pels (as
fr. s. pev-, yet G. prjvbs) for p-fjv month, Hdt. 2. 82 ; and b pbaavv, -vuos,
wooden tower. In the pronoun ris (28), v is simply omitted in the theme.
e. Most words in -is and -vs have a second, but less classic form, in
-iv and -vv : as, pis and plv, Qbpicvs and QbpKvv, b 5eX0:'s and de\<pLv.
f. In the Voc. of 'KirbWuiv, -uvos, Apollo, Uoo-eibQy, -Qvos, Neptune,
b vuT'fjp, -rjpos, savior, dd-fjp, -4pos, brotlier -in-law, and of the personal
§212. LIQUIDS. PURES. 159
words in 210, the natural tone of address has thrown back the accent as
far as possible, and shortened the last syllable of the stem if long : "A7ro\-
\ov, Ildcreidov, crurep, ddep, dvep, irdrip, d&yarep, A.rjfi7]Tep. If the accent
is not thrown back, oxytone nouns retaining v or p in the theme have no
distinct Voc. : as, Xifirjv, 6, r/ aid-qp, -tpos, ETHER.
209. Neuter Liquids. A few nouns in which the stem
ends in p are neuter. They are, for the most part, confined to
the singular; and require, in their declension, no euphonic
changes of letters. E. g. nvp, nvpos (14 j v lengthened in the
monosyllabic stem), veKrap, -apos, nectar.
a. In tap (Fcop) ver, spring, and the poetic xiap cor, heart, contraction
takes place in the stem : N. Zap, poet, ijp, G. and D. Zapos, Zapi, oftener
fjpos, ijpi ■ N. ictap, in Horn, always nrjp, D. Krjpi.
210. Syncopated Liquids. I. In a few familiar liquids,
a short vowel is syncopated before the stem-mark : viz.,
a. In these three, the syncope takes place before all the open affixes :
avVjp (s. dvep-, sync, dvp-, di>5p-, 146b) man; kvwv (s. kvov, sync, kvv-)
canis, dog, also syncopated in Dat. pi. ; dpvos (s. dpev-, sync, dpv-) lamb's,
of which the Nom. sing, is not used, but in its place, dfxvos agnus, of
Dec. 2. See 18.
b. These five are syncopated in tlie Gen. and Dat. sing. : iruWjp (18 ; s.
irarep-, irarp-) FATHER ; (J^njp MOTHER, G. (irjrtpos fnrrpos, 1). p.r]T^pL
p.T)rpi ; Ov-yarrjp DAUGHTER, 0vya(ripos)rp6s, 6vya(T^pi)rpi ■ ij ya<rri\p
stomach, ya<r(T^pos)rp6s, yaa{T^pi)rpi- ij Ar\p.r\rr\p Ceres, A7]fir,(Tepos)Tpos,
Atj/xt] (T€pi)r pi, also Ace. ArijjLv(Tepa)Tpa.
c. In these words, the poets sometimes neglect the syncope, and some-
times employ it in other cases than those which are specified.
d. Compare Lat. pater, pa(ter)£ris ; mater, ma(ter)Ms ; caro, carnis.
211. Comparatives in -au often drop the v before a and e in
the sing, and pi., and are then contracted (140 b) : as,
fielfapa p,d£(oa)a>, p.dfoves fielf(oes)ov$, pidfrvas /xeifrvs (22). Both forms
are freely used, and even together : as, dp.eivovas ical KpeLrrovs i. 7. 3.
a. A like contraction occurs in a few other words, particularly in the
Ace. of 'AttoXXwv and Jloaeidtiv (itself contr. fr. TLoaaMwv, 131 a) : 'AirdX-
Xwva 'Atr6W((oa)(a (iii. 1. 6), TLoaeibuva IIoaeidQ. See for both forms, of
which the shorter is especially used with the article, PI. Crat. 402 d, e,
404 d, 405 d. So, likewise, 6 Kv/cevv mixed drink, Ace. KVKeQm, and poet.
KVKew (k. 316, Kvxeiu A. 624) ; ij yXrrxw pennyroyal, A. yXrjxwva, yXr/xu-
C. Pures (19).
212. The euphonic changes in the declension of pures may-
be mostly referred, (I.) to a special law of Greek declension,
and (II.) to contraction.
I. Special Law of Greek Declension. The
short votvels, e and o, can never remain in the stem, either
before the affixes -9 and -v, or at the end of a tvord.
Hence,
160 THIRD DECLENSION. PURES. §213.
213. A.) Before the affixes -? and -v, e be-
comes rj, c, v, or ev ; and o becomes co or ov : thus,
1.)' a. In masculine nouns, e becomes ev in simple, and rj in
compound words : as,
Simple, 6 iTwefc, -ews (19 ; stem linre-), paaiXevs king, Qrjtrefc Tlieseus ;
compound, IhiKparvs, -eos (19 ; fr. cws entire, and kp&tos strength), 'Api-
aroTiXns, An/Aoadfrvs (observe the difference in accentuation).
Except the simples "Aprs, -eos, Mars, 6 a-qs, aeos, moth • and the fol-
lowing, in which e becomes v or t, 6 irrjxvs, -ews, A. tttjxvv (19), 6 witeKvt
axe, 6 -rrptafivs elder (properly an adj.) ; 6 e^ts, -ews, viper, 6 8<pts serpent,
irpiravis president, and also kottis, Kopis, fxdpis, and &>xts.
b. In feminine and common nouns, e becomes t : as, j? 7r6\is,
-ea)?, A. noXiv (19), r) bvvajxis power ; 6, r) fiauTts prophet.
c. In adjectives, e becomes' v in simple, and tj in compound
words : as,
Simple, rjdijs, -eos, A. i)8vi> (23), y\vK6s sweet, 6%vs sluirp ; compound,
atcparris, tos (d not, Kpdros strength), weak, rpcrjpvs liaving three banks of
oars, or, as a substantive (raOs, vessel, being understood), trireme.
Except a few simple adjectives, in which e becomes i] : as, aacpqs, -eos
(22), irXr)p7]S full, byi-qs healthy, \pevbr)s false.
d. If the last element of a compound ends in -€vs, -is, or -vs, its form is
commonly retained : as in apx-iepe6s high-priest, <pi\6-iro\is (Gen. -ews,
-i5os, or -tos, 218) patriotic, di-Trvxvs two cubits long (yet contracted in
neut. pi., as if formed in -tjs, 219 : 5iirrix( ea )' r \ iv. 2. 28).
214. 2.) In monosyllables, o becomes ov ; otherwise o> : as,
@ovs, fioos, A. fiovv (19) ; but i) albas, -60s, shame.
a. This rule applies also to Unguals in which o precedes the stem-
mark : as, iro6s, irodos (17), and its compounds ; but eidus, -6ros (26).
b. In feminine nouns of more than one syllable, in which the stem ends
in o, the affix s is absorbed, as if € (142 a). Thus from the stem ifoo- is
formed the theme i7%(os, oe)w (19). So i) ireidd), -60s, persuasion, ij A-qrib,
-6os,Latona, &c. Except, as above, aidibs, and the Ionic 77 r)(Jos dawn. In
these words in -c& and -«s, the plural and dual are very rare, and only
formed according to Dec. 2 : as, Xe^ti, N. pi. Xexoi ; dicotis, (224 a).
215. B.) In cases which have no affix, e char-
acteristic becomes i, v, or ev, or else assumes a eu-
phonic 9 ; and o characteristic becomes oc or ov : thus,
a.) If the theme ends in -tjs, e becomes es ; but, otherwise,
is changed as in the theme : thus, Nom. neut. and Voc. oralis
(22), r)8v (23) ; Voc. Saxpares, iroki, tttjxv, Imrev (19).
b.) In the theme of neuter nouns, e assumes s, becoming
itself o (114 b) : as, to yevos, -eos (19), to rei^os, -eos, wall.
Except r6 &<ttv, -eos, town (19), the Epic to ir&v, -eos, flock, and a few
foreign names of natural productions in -1, as rd ire'irepi, -ews, pepper.
§ 217. CHANGES OP STEM-MARK. 161
c.) In the Vocative, o becomes oi, if the theme ends in a or
-as ; but ov, if it ends in -ovs : as, t]x° 1 (19), alSol (fr. aldcos, 214);
/3o0 (19) ; and in like manner, OtdtVov (21, 214 a).
216. a. After the analogy of e and o, a characteristic be-
comes uv in 17 i>aDs (s. va) ship, r\ ypavs, ypaos, old woman; and
assumes s in the theme of neuters: as, to yepas, -aos (19).
For the declension of pads, see 19, 21, 222 f. That of ypavs agrees with
the Dor. forms of vavs, as lirst given, contracting ypdas into ypavs (122 a).
b. In the Accusative singular of pures, the inflective v be-
comes a (202b), except when the theme ends in -as, -«, -vs, -at/?,
or -ovs : as, tjpota, r)x° a i " r7re ' a (19) ', o-acpea (22) ; but from 6 Xap,
sfowe, kis, ols (contracted from 6'is), rroXis, l\Bvs, 7"7xus, vais, /3ovy,
Ace. AaV ; KiV, oti/, ttoXiv, lx$vv, 7tr}X vv i va » v i P ovv (19).
c. Proper names in -t)s, -cos, for the most part, admit both forms of the
Ace. : as, ^^Kpar-qs (19), A. Zuxparri (Plat.), Sw/cpdrT/y (Xen.) ; 6"A/D7?s,
Mars, A. "Ap-q and'Aprp. So %>ws, A. ■ijpuiv Hdt. 1. 167 (%wa 2. 143).
d. When the stem-mark is changed to a diphthong before -s
in the theme, the same change is made before -on in the Dative
plural : as, Imrevai, fioval, vavcrl (19).
217. These changes in pures indicate the use of certain consonants,
as F, 2, A, in their early inflection, to prevent hiatus (100). Of these, F
and S were afterwards (a) simply dropped between two vowels (140 ; hence,
except as above, 210 d, in the Dat. pi., originally ending in -e<ri, 12) ; but
otherwise (b) the F, as v (142), formed a diphthong with the preceding
vowel or (c) was absorbed by it ; while the 2 (d) remained where there
was no affix, but (e) before the affixes -s and -v was absorbed, as if 6, by
the preceding vowel. If the old stem ended in -eA-, three forms after-
wards arose : (f ) the A remained, and the € became i throughout by pre-
cession (114 d) ; (g) the A was dropped, and € became t in the Nom., Ace.,
and Voc. sing. ; (h) the A was dropped, and e became i throughout. Thus,
(a) jSofos /3oos bovis, t'x0(t>Fos)vos, 'nnr(eFes)i€<$ ' 7^(eSos)eos (fr. yivos ;
cf. Lat. gfritis, generis, 139), 7^>(a2os)aos (19) ; AiFos Atos (21 ; cf. Lat.
dlvus and dius, and bourn for bovnm), rj5(eFos)&>s (23) ; (ra0(eSos)€OS (22).
(b) /3oFs j3ovs, fioYv fiovv, /3oF (3ov, i7r7r(eFs)€vs, t7nr(eF)e-0, iwTrevai, raFs
vavs navis, vavai (19). In adjectives, and in a few masculine and ( neuter
nouns, short v takes the place of €v : as, ijdeFs rjdvs, tj5(cf)v (23) ;
TT7Jx(eYs)vs, Ttrjxvv, tt^X^j d<rr(eF)ti (19).
(c) IxOvfs ixdvs, lx6{ vF )*> hut Dat.pl. IxOvai ; klFs (or /als, Kiihn.) /cts (19).
(d) Nom. neut. <ra<peL cacpts (22), yep(e?,)os (< passing into a kindred
vowel, 114 b), 7^p(aS)os (19); Voc. Sii/cpar(e2)€s (19). The peculiar
form of the Voc. of ifaw and aldws (215 c) may have arisen from the change
of s to its corresponding €, and then contraction with precession (142,
118 b) ; thus, i?x(°2> oe ) ot ( cf - 214 b).
(e) aacpells <ra<pris (22), Sw/cpdT (e2s)r,s (19), cu5(o2s)ws (214), 6 (jlvUs /xvs
mils, mouse, G. /u,v26s p.uos mitris (a). For i)xu, see 214 b ; cf. -fao? (d).
(f) ~M.eyape-, Megarian, had two forms, Me7a/oeF- masc, and with pre-
cession Me7apiA- fem. ; from the former we have Meyapevs, -e<as, Megarian
man, and from the latter (8 retained and becoming the stem-mark), Me7a-
pis, Ados, Megarian woman or land. This became the prevalent mode of
comp. gr. K
162 THIRD DECLENSION. PURES. §217.
declining feminines in -is, if we except abstract nouns in -<rts. Especially-
many fern, adjectives, or words which are properly such, are thus declined.
(g) 7r6\(eAs)is, 7r6X(eAos)€ws, 7r6Xet, 7r6Xte, iroXt • iroXeis, &c. (19). This
became the usual form of fem. pures in -is, in the Att. and Comm. Greek.
(h) This became the regular form of feminine pures in -is in the Ionic
(130) : thus, Ion. N. -is, G. -"os, D. -tt, commonly contracted into -7, A.
-t*, V. "l ; PI. N. -les, sometimes contr. into -ts, G. "mv, D. -Vi, A. -"as,
commonly contr. into -h : as, irokis, tt6\ios, iroXi, irokiv • 7r6Xtes, -iwv, irb-
Xuri, 7r6Xias, -7s. The i was also the prevalent vowel in the Doric.
218. As might have been expected, the three last forms
(f, g, h) are far from being kept entirely separate ; and are not
wholly restricted to feminines (213 a, b, 215 b). Thus,
1.) Some words exhibit both the lingual and the pure inflection, the
latter especially in the Ionic and Doric, which were less averse than the
Attic to hiatus (131s) : as, tj rpSiris keel, G. rpdireus, rpo-mos, and rpoiridos •
particularly proper names, as "l<ris, G. -tSos, -tos Hdt. 2. 41, D. -iSi, 'I<fl
lb. 59 ; OMs, G. ©Moos 0. 370, D. 0<?r7 2. 407. Compare 207, 211.
2.) In some pures in -is, the Attic adopts, in whole or in part (par-
ticularly in the Gen. sing.), the Ionic forms : as, 77 rijp<rts turris, toiver,
G. rijpaios vii. 8. 12, but PI. N. rtf/xreis iv. 4. 2, Tt/paewv Hel. 4. 7. 6,
Tipatai. Cyr. 7. 5. 10 ; 6 irdcris spouse, G. -tos, D. -et • 77 p.dya5is, -tos,
a Mind of harp, D. p.ayd8l vii. 3. 32 ; 6, i) riypis tigris, tiger, G. riypios,
and in later writers riypiSos, PI. N. rlypeis, G. rlypewv ■ some proper
names, as 6 Xviwecns, G. -tos, i. 2. 12, 6 "Ipis, G. -tos vi. 2. 1 ; and the
adjectives tdpts intelligent, vtjcttis abstemious. In like manner, i], 6 £yx e -
\vs (217 b) anguilla, eel, G. iyx&vos, PI. N. <?7X<^« S > G. iyx^euf • rd
irtirepi (215 b), G. -eus and -tos.
219. II. Contraction. Most pures in -a?, -779,
-09, and -co are contracted in all the cases that
hare open affixes ; but others, for the most part,
only in the Norn, and Ace. pi and Bat. sing. ; and
some, if at all, only in the Ace. pi.
a. See 19, and also <ra<p^s (which i] TpL-qptjs and like words, properly
adjectives, follow, 213 c), vyi-qs, and i]5vs (22, 23). The common con-
tractions are given in the tables ; and also some in brackets which are
rare or doubtful. The contractions there shown are sometimes omitted,
and others sometimes occur ; especially in the poets.
b. Of nouns in -«, the uncontracted form scarcely occurs, even in the
poets and dialects. So, in alStbs and 7)6$ (214 b) : G. -(oos)oOs, D. -01,
A. -&, V. -ot. Cf., in Lat., Dido, G. -dus (92 b), D. A. V. -do.
c. In proper names in -KXirjs, cont. -kXtjs (fr. k\4os renown), the Dat.
and sometimes Ace. sing, are doubly contracted. See 'HpctKX^s (19) ;
and for its Attic forms, Mem. 2. 1. 21 - 26. For the later Voc. "H>a/cXes,
used in exclamations, cf. 208 f.
d. For the contraction of the Nom. pi. of nouns in -cvs into i]s, see 121.
e. It is not as often that we wish to pass rapidly over a noun which is
the subject of a sentence, as over one which is a mere object. Hence, as
we observe from the tables, the Nominative plural is less frequently con-
tracted than the Accusative.
f. Compare the contracts in -vs, -vos, with the Lat. Dec. 4 :
§221. CONTRACTION. DIALECTIC FORMS. 163
&pnvs, vet, -vos, -v'C, -vi> • PI. -(i/es)us, -vwv, -vai, -(vas)vs.
arcus, bow, -(uis)ws, -ui, -Um ; PI. -(ues)us, -uum, -ubus, -(ues)us.
220. In the Attic and Common Greek, the endings -cos,
-ca, and -eas, instead of the common contraction, receive in cer-
tain words a peculiar change, which lengthens the last vowel.
This change 'takes place,
a.) In the Gen. sing, of nouns in -ts, -vs and -cvs, and some-
times of nouns in -i and -v : as, nobis, G. noXeos noXccos, n^x v ^
-ecos, Innevs, -ecu?, aarv, -eos and -cojs (19) ', rreVf/Jt, -c<os (215 b).
Also 6 "Aprjs (213 a), G. *Apeos and "Apecos.
b.) In the Ace. sing, and pi. of nouns in -evs : as, Imrevs,
Ace. sing. innta iimea, pi. imreas inn eas.
c. This change appears to be simply a less perfect and an earlier mode
of contraction. From the accentuation of such words as 7r6Xea>s, it is evi-
dent that the € (as in MevtXews, 120 i) has not the full force of a distinct
syllable. We may infer that it commonly united as a species of semivowel
(cf. 117 b) with the vowel following, and thus lengthened it.
d^The poets sometimes complete the contraction by synizesis : as, /3a-
cnXews Eur. Ale. 240, 'AxtXXfo Id. Iph. A. 1341. Instances also occur, in
the Attic poets, of the unchanged Gen. in -cos, of the Ace. in -cu and
-c&3, and of the Ace. sing, regularly contracted into f\ : as, Nrjptos Eur.
Ion 1082, TroXeos Id. Hec. 866 ; <pov4a lb. 882 ; ^vyypa^i) Ar. Ach. 1150,
'Obvaari Eur. Rh. 708, and even lepr) Id. Ale. 25. The regularly con-
tracted Ace. pi. in -6i9, instead of -eds, is sometimes found in Attic writ-
ers, and later became the common form : /SacrtXc?s Mem. 3. 9. 10.
e. If another vowel precedes, the c is commonly absorbed by the -cos, -a,
and -ds : as, Heipaieijs Pirreus, G. Heip(ai4ws)cn.<as, A. ITet/)(atea)aid.
f. Grammarians give the name Attic Genitive to the form in -e«s ; and
also to the Gen. pi. in -etov when accented upon the antepenult, the accent
then showing a like use of 6 ; as, iroXewv (19). The regularly contracted
r-qx&i' occurs iv. 7. 16.
g. The Gen. in -€«s is also found in a few adjectives in -is (213 d) ; in
ij/Aicrvs, Imlf (G. -eos ; later -ews and -ovs, and also Neut. pi. -(ca)i\) ; and,
in later writers, in other adjectives in -vs (thus, $oaxews Plut.).
Dialectic Forms.
221. (A.) Dialectic changes affecting the affix.
a. In the poets, especially the Epic, the Ace. sing, sometimes ends in
-a, in words in which it has commonly -v ; as, evpia Z. 291, vrja or vea,
TruXrja, for evpw, vavv, ttoXiv • Ixdva Theoc. 21. 45. On the other hand,
the New Ion. often forms the Ace. of nouns in -to or -«s, -<5os, in -ovv (in
the Mo\. and stricter Dor. -cuv, 130 c) : as, 'lib To, i]dj$ dawn, A. 'louv, rjovv.
b. In the Gen. pi., the Ion. sometimes changes -cov to -ecov (135 a, cf.
201 c) : as, x r l v ^ (j}V Hdt. 2. 45, p.vpiad£wv, for xn v & v i f^vpiddoju.
c. In the Dat. pi., for the common affix -<ri(v, the poets often employ
the old or prolonged forms -€<ri, -ccrcri, and -<r<ri (186 f, h, 171). Horn,
uses the four forms, though -€<rt rarely. The forms -€<r<ri and -c<rt are
also common in Dor. and iEol. prose ; and -ecn is used in Ion. prose after
the stem-mark v. Thus, x 6 / 00 "'" A - 14, x^'P 60 " " 4 r - 271, x et '/° e(rt T. 468 ;
164 THIRD DECLENSION. DIALECTS. §221.
7ro<ri E. 745, roaai B. 44, irodea-criv T. 407 ; tirecnv B. 73, Hcjci 8. 597,
tirieaatv B. 75 ; daiTv/xoveat Hdt. 6. 57. So, F dropped between two
vowels (217 a), fioeaai B. 481, vdeacn Pind. P. 4. 98, &pi<TTr)e<r<n A. 227.
d. In the Dual, the Epic prolongs -oiv (as in Dec. 2, 201 b) to -owv :
thus, irodouv S. 228, l^eipfyoiiv /x. 52.
222. (B.) Dialectic changes affecting the stem, either sim-
ply or in connection with the affix.
a. Many changes result from dialectic preferences of vowels (130 s) : as,
Ion. OtbpTjt;, vvvs, ypvvs, for dupai;, &c. : Dor. iroi/xdv, ci/cirrds, vaes, for
ttoi/j.'i']v, &c. ; xrfp f° r X eL P '■> ^ s ? P&*i &X^ S > f° r °^ J > /3oDs, fjfcioil ; for /cXds
key, Dor. (kXolfls clavis) k\<xls, Ion. /c\7?is, Old Att. kXt?s.
b. The dialects and poets vary greatly in the extent to which they em-
ploy contraction, and in the mode of contraction (131). The Epic has
here especial license. In the poets, contractions are often made by syni-
zesis (117 b), which are not written. In respect to the usage of Homer,
we remark as follows : (1) In the Gen. sing., contraction is commonly
omitted, except in nouns in -» and -»s, G. -60s. In a few instances, -cos is
contracted into^-evs (131 b), or synizesis occurs : as, 'Eptfievs Q. 368, dtpevs
7). 118 ; UrjXi^s A. 489, tt6X^s B. 811. (2) In the Dat. sing., both the
contracted and uncontracted forms are freely used in most words : as,
y-qpa'C and y-qpai or yrjpq. (119), reixei and T6t%et, Tjpon'and ijpci) H. 453.
See 21. The endings -u, -vi, and -oi are almost always contracted : as,
Kvr,<TTi A. 640, v£kvi II. 526, i]dl I. 618. (3) The endings -ea, -€»v, and
-€as are commonly uncontracted, except "bv synizesis : as, deoeid^a F. 27,
&Xyea O. 7, via i. 283; crrjde^v K. 95 ; ttoXI^s A. 559. So 7r6\ms 6. 560 ;
but Tvdrj A. 384, 'Odvaij t. 136 (21 ; so paaiXr} Oracle in Hdt. 7. 220).
(4) The ending -ees is used both with and, oftener, without contraction :
as, irpwroirayeis veorevx&s E. 194. (5) The neut. plur. ending -act, with
scarce an exception, is contracted or drops one a (cf. d) : as, Kipa, diwa,
ytpa B. 237. The form with the single short a sometimes occurs in the
Attic poets : as, Kpid Ar. Pax 192.
c. In common nouns in -cvs, the characteristic eE before a vowel regu-
larly becomes t\, in the Epic : as, iTnrrjos, iwirTJes (21 ; t^7rets A. 151, and
PaaiXds Hes. Op. 246, are doubtful). Doubtful examples of this change
appear in Hdt. (PaatXr/os, /3c«nX?)a, 7. 137, &c.) ; while the regular inflec-
tion of these nouns in Ion. prose, and in the Dor., is in -io$, &c. In
proper names in -cvs, the Epic has much freedom in using the long or
short vowel according to the metre. So in "Aprjs and iroXis (21). These
Ep. and Ion. forms are not wholly unknown to Att. poetry, or even prose.
d. In words whose root ends in ce-, the Epic often unites these vowels
into i] (as regularly in proper names in -KXirjs), or into &. ; but sometimes
protracts the first € into ci or rj. In many instances, the root is shortened
by the poets, or in dialectic prose, by dropping one c. E. g., forms of
nXeos, fame, and of its compounds in -€-qs, /cXeia Hes. Th. 100, /cX<fa I.
189, evKXeias K. 281, emXias Pind. O. 2. 163, d/cX^Ts M. 318, ayaKXyos
II. 738, dvvKXta B. 115 (so ivppeios Z. 508, virepdtZ P. 330, but iiriddes
Hdt. 4. 130 ; see awtos and IldrpoicXos, 21).
e. In ntpas and rtpas (207), the t is commonly omitted in dialectic
Greek ; and then in these, as in other neuters in -as, -aos, the later Ionic
often changes a into € except in the theme : as, Kipeos, ytpea, Hdt.
f. In vavs (vaFs, navis, 217 b, 19, 21), the original a remains throughout
in the Dor. ; but in the Ion. passes by precession either into tj, or with
short quantity, especially in the later Ion., into c. The Att. retains the
a in the diphthong au, but has otherwise r\ or € (the latter having appar-
§224. IRREGULAR NOUNS. METAPLASTS. 165
ently been inserted in the Gen. sing, and pi. after the contraction of So
and dw, 120 i ; and the Gen. dual having followed the analogy of the
other numbers). In the Att. poets, the Ion. forms occur rarely, the Dor.
oftener : as, vqbs Eur. Iph. T. 1385, vabs Soph. Ant. 715.
IV. IRREGULAR NOUNS.
223. Irregularities in the declension of nouns, which have
not been already noticed, may be chiefly referred to two heads :
variety of declension, and defect of declension.
A. Variety of Declension.
a. A noun may vary, (1.) in its stem ; (2.) in its m,ethod of
declension ; and (3.) in its gender (180). In the first case, it
is termed a metaplast (fxeTanXaa-Tos, transformed) ; in the second,
a heteroclite (ircpoicXtTos, of different declensions) ; in the third,
heterogeneous (hepoycurjs, of different genders).
b. Words which have distinct double forms, either throughout or in
part, are termed redundant. Those, on the other hand, that want some
of the usual forms, are termed defective.
224. 1. Metaplasts.
Metaplasm has mostly arisen from a change of the stem, in the progress
of the language, for the sake of euphony or emphasis, chiefly by the pre-
cession of an open vowel, or the addition of a consonant to prevent hiatus ;
while, at the same time, forms have remained from the old stem, espe-
cially in the poets and in the dialects. The double stem may be,
a.) In ov- and in p- (cf. 140, 211) : 17 ix.r\huiv, -6vos, nightingale; from
the stem arjdo-, G. drjdovs Soph. Aj. 629, D. a-rjboi Ar. Av. 679 : 17 eUcov,
•6vos, image ; (s. eko-) G. elicovs Eur. Hel. 77, A. elKib Hdt. 7. 69 ; PI. A.
€Iko6s Ar. Nub. 559 : 7? \e\t8wv, -ovos, swallow ; (s. x e ^o-) V. x e XtSoT.
b.) In a- and in -€ (e- esp. Ion., 222 e) : to (3p£ras, -eos, wooden image,
poet. : to Kve'cjxxs, darkness, G. Ep. Kv£<paos, Att. Kve<povs Ar. Eccl. 291.
c.) In F- and F<xt- ; rd "yovv, jovcltos, genu, KNEE, and to 8dpv, -aros
(s. 8opF-, hop- 140, Sopv- 142, dovp- 145, dopFar-, 8opa.T-, BovpaT-), spear.
For the forms of 86pv, see 21. Those which occur of ybw correspond :
Ion. and poet, yovvaros, -ara, -cltuv, -a<ri ; also poet, yovvbs, yovva, &c.
d.) With and without a- final : 6 kcLXcds, cable, (s. € /caXa-, Att. Dec. 2),
G. AcdXw • Ion. /cdXos, -ov, e. 260 and Hdt. ; in later Ep., PI. /cdXwes, &c.
e. Lingual and Pure : 6, ^ opvls, bird, G. 8pvt.dos (Dor. 6pvTxos, 168),
D. 6pv~t6i, A. 'opvlv and 'opvlda • PI. 8pvWes, &c. ; (s. opve-) N. 'opvXs, A. 6pviv,
PI. N. Bpveis, G. opveuv, A. 8pueis and 6pvis (218) ; also to 6pveov, -ov :
6 enrjs, moth, G. o~ebs and later (ttjtos : 6 Xptos, skin, surface, -wr6s, -wtL
(XP$, 207 a), &c. ; Ion. and poet. G. x/>o6s, D. XP '^ A. x/aoa.
f.) Variously Double : 8opvfj(6os)ovs and -£os Ar. Pax 447, -ov, spear-
maker : Zcvs (s. ZeF-, Atr-, Zov-) ; see 21, and cf. Lat. Jupiter (Zed ird-
Tep T. 276), Jovis, divas: 6 Ocpdirwv, -ovtos, attendant; poet. A. dipaira,
N. pi. depaires Eur. Ion 94 : rd <}>dos, -eos -ovs Cyr. 4. 2. 26, light,
poet. ; contr. </>ws, $ojt6s : 6, ij <{>dpv-y£, -vyyos, poet, -ifyos i. 373, throat :
6 <£>opicvs, -vo$ and -vvos, Phorcys : ij \eip, hand, G. x ei P 0S an( i X € P 0S > & c -
(for the common forms, see 18 ; for the rest, the poets and Ion. prose).
166 IRREGULAR NOUNS, —r HETEROCLITE. §224.
g. r) ©ejus, Themis, as a common noun, right, law, G. QefiiSos, Ep.
GtfiicrTos §. 68, Ion. Gefctos Hdt. 2. 50, Dor. 04/iitos Find. O. 13. 11, also
PL Rep. 380 a. In the Attic, 64/xis occurs mostly in certain forms of ex-
pression, where it is used without declension, as an adjective or neuter
noun : thus, dipas tart, it is lawful ; <f>acrl . . . 64 pus eivcu, they say that it
is lawful, PI. Gorg. 505 d ; to p.7) dt/jus, that which is not lawful, J&ch.
h. t) irvvg (s. irvKv-, as in adj. Trvicvbs, crowded ; by met., from the dif-
ficulty of appending s in the theme, ttvvk-), G. ttvkvos and later ttvvkos.
i. Poetic, mostly Epic, forms (with the themes to which they are
referred or allied, in parentheses) : A. pi. AlBio-Trfjas A. 423 (6 Aldiorp,
-ottos, Ethiopian) ; i) Sws Hes. Op. 354 (8b<ris gift) ; G. Xif3ds ^Esch. Ch.
292, A. Xi'/3a Id. Fr. 49 (i) Xtfids libation) ; 6 Xis O. 275 (Xtw lion).
j. Many prolonged forms are used in poetry or dialectic juose : as,
'Adrjvaia, o-eXyvala, IlvveXbireia, for 'Adrjva Minerva, aeX-qvi) moon, HriveXoirr).
225. 2. Heteroclites.
a. Of the First and Second Declensions. Some personal nouns
have forms both in -os and in -tjs or -as, particularly compounds of ap\<»
(where the form in -os is usually more Att.) : as, 6 yvixva<riapxos and
-dpxns, gymnasiarch ; 6 dSoXtaxv* and -os, prater.
b. Of the First and Third Declensions : 6 "Ai8tjs, -ov, poet. 'M8ys,
Hades ; Dec. 3, Ep. G. "At 80s, D. "At Si • also poet. 'AiSoovevs, -eoos, Ion.
-ijos : i) yvvf\ (203 a) : 6 X&as, contr. Xds, lapis, stone, G. Xdos M. 462,
and Xdov Soph. 0. C. 196, D. XSt, A. Xdav, Xav, and Xda, PL N. Xdes, &c.
c. Some personal derivatives have double forms in -ttjs, -tov, and in
-T^p, -Tfjpos, or -Ttop, -TOpos : as, oIktjttjs, ohnr-qp, and oiktjtcjp, diceller.
d. Add some proper names, mostly in -tjs, of which a part admit a
double formation throughout, as GaXvJs, GdXcw (198. 2 ; late -oO) and Gd-
Xwros • but others only in part : as, Ti<ro~a<p4pv7)s, -ovs, but & Tio-aacpipvij
ii. 5. 3 ; ?,Tpe\J/id8r]S, -ov, but & IrpexpiaSes Ar. Nub. 1206.
e. Add, also, the Epic D. pi. d-yKoXiSco-o-i 2. 555 (i) dytcdXr) arm) ;
D. dXtcf (always in the phrase dX/ct Treirotdus) E. 299 (dXnr) might) ; i) ap-
ira£ Hes. Op. 354 (dpirayy) robbery) ; D. vo-|iivi O. 56 (vo-puvr) battle) ; A.
epirya (only in <pvya8e, to flight) G. 157 (t) <pvy 7) flight).
f. Of the Second and Third Declensions : to 8dicpvov and poet.
Sdnpv (14), lacrima (168 a), tear, G. SaKptov, D. SaKpvcp • PL N. SdKpva,
G. SaKp\ju)v, D. 8a.KprjoLs and 8dicpv<n Th. 7. 75 : t6 St'vSpov, -ov, and Ion.
84v8peov, tree ; Dec. 3, D. 8h8pei, A. 8tv8pos Hdt. 6. 79 ; PL N. SeuSpv,
D. more Attic form Uvbpeai iv. 8. 2, Th. 2. 75, but 8£v8pois iv. 7. 9 :
6 |x6<r<ruv, -vvos, wooden tower, D. pLoacrvpi v. 4. 26 ; Dec. 2, D. pi. p.oo~ovvois
lb. : 6 oveipos and to 6v«ipov, dream (fr. 6rap, 228 a),G. ovdpov and oveLpa-
tos' PL oveipara and sometimes tfj/et/oa. : LTdTpoKXos (21) : t6 irvp, ?ri>/)6s
(14), fire; Dec. 2, PL N. nrvpd, watch-fires, D. Tru/jots vii. 2. 18.
g. Some contracts in -ovs of Dec. 2 have also forms, mostly late, like
those of @ovs (19) : as, 6 poOs mind, 6 irXovs voyage, G. vobs, 1 Cor. 14. 19,
irXobs Acts 27. 9, D. vot Rom. 7. 25 ; 7) irpbxovs ewer, D. pi. irpbxowi Ar.
h. Some verbals have double forms in -os, -ov, and -evs, -&>s, or -ttjp,
-Ttjpos : as, 6 irofxirbs and 7ro/i7retfs, guide, 6 larpos and poet. t'dr^/D, Jiealer.
i. Add the poetic D. pi. dv8pair68co-o-i H. 475 (to dvSpdiroSov slave) ;
6 2pos U. 315, A. fyoj/ I. 92 (fyws, -wtos, fore) ; A. otica, only in ofrca&r,
homeward, Horn., and even in Att. prose, vii. 7. 57 (6 oXkos house).
j. Of the Attic Second and Third Declensions : 7) a\»s threshing-
floor, G. &Xu, aXuuos, and poet. aXwos • also Ep. 7) dXu)7) • 7) ^«s ofoww (s. "d"-),
G. ^w, D. Zy, A. ^w (199) ; Dor. 'dibs (s. ao-), G. d(6os)ovs ■ Ion. ijibs, G.
t)ovs, D. ^ot, A. t)w and ^oOv (221 a) ; 6 Mivws, -w and -coos, Minos.
§ 227. HETEROGENEOUS AND DEFECTIVE. 167
226. 3. Heterogeneous Nouns.
The names of things without life naturally vary in gender, according
to the conceptions formed by the mind (175). Hence there are many
words in which two genders are associated, either throughout or in part ;
chiefly the neuter, as the natural gender of things without life, with the
masculine or feminine, the genders of personification. E. g.
a. Of Dec. I. 77 n&pa or 6 ridpas Hdt. 1. 132, tiara or tiaras, turban.
b. Of Dec. II. 6 8«t|jl<$$ band, PI. rot, deo-fid, ol Seafxoi, and poet, rd
oVcr/tara • to £vyov and 6 £vy6s, yoke, PL ra £vyd • 6 o-itos com, PI. r&
o~ira • rb ordSiov stadium, PI. to, arddia and ol (rrddcoi ' 6 crra9|x<$$ station,
balance, PI. ol arad^ol and r<x aradfid stations, id Graded balances : 6 Tdp-
rapos (77 Pind. P. 1. 29), PI. ret Tdprapa, Tartarus, Tartara.
c. Things, when viewed collectively, seem least akin to persons ; and
other masculines and feminines occur with which a neuter pi. is associated
(chiefly in the poets and dialects) : 6 dpvp.6s thicket, 6 iiravXos stall, 6 'Z6s
arrow, 77 k Aeuflos way, 6 kjjkXos circle, 6 pviros filth, and others.
d. Of Dec. III. rd Aop, dopos, poet., sword; A. pi. tiopas ? p. 222 :
to ir\f]9os, -eos, and less common 77 irXrjdfc, -vos, fulness : rb Kapd and
(Soph. Ph. 1457) Kpara, head, poet., G. Kpar6$ (rijs, Eur. El. 140), D.
Kpdri and Kapa Soph. El. 445, A. like N. and also masc. Kpara Soph. Ph.
1207, pi. Kparas Eur. Ph. 1149. The following forms are found in Homer :
S. N. A. /ca/>r;,/«£pll.392,
G. Kdprjros Kapr/aros Kpdrds Kpddros tcprjdevX. 588 Kapfyov
D. Kdprjri O. 75 Kap-q&Ti Kpdrl u. 99 /cpaanx-218 Mar. 12
P. JST. A. Kapd Cer. 12 Kap-ffara Kpara 6. 92 KpadraT. 93 Kdprjva
G. P. 437 Kparuvx- 309 Kaprjuuv
D. *cpa<r*, Kpdreo-(pi, K. 152, 156 A. 44
e. Of Dec. I. and II. rd 8p£iravov and 17 dpe-rrdurj, sickle ; 71 lo-ir^pa,
Ep. 6 eairtpos, vespera and vesper, evening (also r& t-airepa p. 191) : 77 irXdvr]
and 6 TrXctj'os, error ; 7? irXeupa and rb wXevpbu, rib.
f. Of Dec. I. and III. 17 (3XcLj3t) and rb /3\d/3os, -eos, injury; 17 8tya and
to Sii/'os, <Airs^ ; 7/ vdirrj and rb vdiros, dell ; 77 <rriyi] and rb (rreyos, roof.
g. Of Dec. II. and III. 6 dor^p, -epos, and rb darpov, astrum, star ;
6 and to <tk6to$ (also 77 o-Koria), darkness ; 6 and to <tkv<|>os, cup.
B. Defect of Declension.
227. a. Some nouns receive no declension, as the names of
the letters, some foreign proper names, and a few other words,
chiefly foreign : thus, t6, tov, tg> aXcf)a • 6, tov, t<5, tov 'A/3paa/x •
t6, tov, tu irao-x a > passover. A word of this kind is termed in-
declinable, or an aptote {anr<aros, without cases).
b. A few shortened or foreign proper names, whose stem
ends with a vowel, receive s in the Nom., v in the Ace, and,
if the vowel admits it, an iota subscript in the Dat., but have
no further declension : as,
rXovs (21) ii. 1. 3 ; 6 Aiovvs (fr. Ai6vvo~os, Bacchus), A. Aiovvv, G. D.
V. Aiovv • 6 Mrivas (fr. Mrjp65(apos) Th. 5. 19, D. Mr)vqi, A. Mrjvav, G. V.
Mrwi • 6 Md<ncas, D. MdcKa, A. MdaKav, G. V. Mdcr/ca, i. 5. 4.
c. Many nouns are defective in number. Thus,
168 ADJECTIVES. § 227.
1. Many nouns, from their signification, want the plural : as, 6, y aldrjp,
sether, to iXaiov oleum, oil, tj raxvT-qs, swiftness. Proper and abstract
nouns do not require a plural, except when employed as common nouns.
2. The names of festivals, some names of cities, and a few other words
want the singular : as, ret Aioviaia the feast of Bacchus, ai 'Adrjvai Athense,
Alliens, oi Ae\<j>ol Delphi, ol ernaiat the trade-winds.
228. Some nouns are employed only in particular cases,
and these, it may be, occurring only in certain forms of ex-
pression : as,
a. Neut. Nom. and Ace. : 6vap sleep, dream, -uirap waking, reality ;
6<|>e\os advantage; i-lxuap and Ep. Tiptop, mark: Poet., Sc'jxas instar, body,
form; r\Bos pleasure; 8<5 (s. 8wp,-, 160) A. 426 (rb SQ/na domus, house),
pi. Hes. Th. 933 ; «pt (s. Kf>i0-, cf. Ppl, pi, 238b) 9. 564 (77 KpWr) barley).
b. Neut. \Cira ivith oil, indecl., chiefly as Dat. f. 227 ; Du. N. and A.
5<ro-€ eyes, poet., M. 466, PI. 6o~<jwv, 6<t<tols, Eur. Hec. 915, 1105.
c. Fem. G. p.d\T|s (p-aax^V) a ^ a > axilla, arm-pit), in the phrase vtto p.a\vs,
under the arm, secretly, Hel. 2. 3. 23 ; D. Sat (1) battle, Ep., N. 286.
d. Dat. Xir£, Ep., 2. 352, A. sing, or pi. Xira 0. 441 (rb \Lvov linum,
linen) ; Voc. masc. and fem. S> jxeXe, my friend, in familiar address, Ar.
Lys. 157 ; Voc. cD rav or rav (also written & Wav or Srrav), my good sir (6
Ztvs, -ov, comrade), Attic, PI. Apol. 25 c.
e. A word which is only employed in a single case, is termed a monoptote
(jxbvos single, irrQais case) ; in two cases, a diptote ; in three,- a triptote ; in
four, a tetraptote.
CHAPTER III.
DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES.
(For paradigms, see 22 - 26, 28.)
229. Adjectives are declined like substantives,
except so far as they vary their form to denote
variation of gender (173 s). In this respect, they
are divided into three classes, adjectives of one, of
two, and of three terminations.
a. In adjectives of more than one termination, the masculine is regard-
ed as the primary gender, and the stem, theme, and declension of the
masculine, as the general stem, theme, and declension of the word. The
mode of declining an adjective is commonly marked by subjoining to the
theme the other forms of the Nom. sing., or their endings ; and, if neces-
sary, the form of the Gen. sing. Thus, &5ikos, -ov • <xa<p-q$, -4s • p.upos,
-a, -ov • 6, ij diTrovs, -oSos, rb biirovv.
230. I. Adjectives of One Termination are declined
precisely like nouns, and therefore require no separate rules or
§ 233. OF TWO OR THREE TERMINATIONS. 169
paradigms. They are chiefly confined to the masculine and
feminine genders, or even to one of these. E. g.
Dec. 1, o yevvddas, -ov, noble, 6 fiovias, -ov, solitary, 6 ideXovTfjs, -ov,
voluntary: Dec. 3, 6 yvp-v-qs, -yros, light-armed; r) fiavcds, -ados, frantic,
6, i] cforcus, -aidos, childless, 6, r) Spofids, -ados, running, 6, t) r)Xii-, -ucos, of
tlie same age, 6, i) t);j.l6vt)s, -t,tos, half dead.
a. In indirect cases of Dec. 3, where all the genders have the same
form, such adjectives are sometimes employed in poetry (rarely in prose)
as neuter : as, fiavidaiv Xvacrr/fiaaiv, with frantic ravings, Eur. Or. 270 ;
8po/xd8i KiiiXip, with swift limb. A neuter is sometimes supplied from a
kindred or derived root : as, 6, i) &pira%, -ayos, rapacious, to dpiraKTiKov.
231. II. In Adjectives op Two Terminations (22), the
masculine and feminine agree, but the neuter differs in those
cases which have special neuter affixes.
a. It is only in Dec. 2 and 3 that adjectives can have a neuter (176 s) ;
and in Dec. 3, labials and palatals do not form it, on account of the maim-
ing of the stem which this would require (160).
" b. The neuter must have two distinct forms, and can have only two,
one for the direct cases sing., and the other for the direct cases pi. (181).
Hence, every complete adjective must have two terminations. A neut.
pi. is sometimes given, though rarely, to adjectives which do not form the
neut. sing. : as, reicea irarpos dirdropa, 'fatherless,' Eur. Here. 114.
c. In di-rrovs (22), and similar compounds of Trots, foot, the neut. sing.,
on account of the difficulty of forming it from the stem, is formed from
the theme, after the analogy of contracts of Dec. 2 (23) : thus, d, i) rpl-
ttovs, -odos, three-footed, to Tplirovv. Some of these compounds have sec-
ondary, chiefly poetic, forms in Dec. 2 : as, Tpliros X. 164, "Ipis deWoTros.
232. III. Adjectives op Three Terminations (23 s) dif-
fer from those of two in having a distinct form for the feminine.
It is only in Dec. 1 that the feminine has a separate form.
These adjectives, therefore, are of two declensions, adding the
feminine forms of the first to the masculine and neuter of the
second or third ; as follows :
Kule I. If the theme belongs to the second
declension, the feminine affixes of the first are an-
nexed to the simple stem.
a. If the stem ends in <?, t, p, or po, the feminine is declined
like Bea- otherwise, like todfj (15) : as, pupa, papd?- <rocpr), o-ocpTJs-
Xpvo-ea, 8nr\or) (23); cplXtos, -a, -ov, friendly, ddpoos, -a, -ov, dense;
Ka\6s,-fj, -6v, beautiful ; olos dlvus, divine, F. did, Ep. and Lyr. dla.
233. Rule II. If the theme belongs to the
third declension, the feminine affixes of the first are
annexed to the stem modified by the consonant I :
a. After e or a liquid, I became t, which was contracted,
either directly or through transposition, with the preceding
vowel (142 a) : as, i$6V (rjdel-) rjoeta, pe\av- (pe\aul-) peXaiva (23).
COMP. GR. 8
170 ADJECTIVES. § 233.
b. The I united with a preceding t to form a- (143 b) : as,
iravT- ynavrl- iravo--) iraaa, ^apifvr- (^aotfirl- x a P LfV(r ~) X a P iecro ~ a
(23, 155, 156) ; \vovr- (\vovo-) Xvovaa, 6evr- (6eva-) tieto-a (20).
c. In perfect participles, this a united, as e, with a preceding
o, to form vi : as, «8or- (eiSorl- etSocr- cldoe-, 142) cldvla (26).
a. The <r remained, if the o had already "been contracted with another
vowel : as, ecrraoT- eorwr- ecrrwaa (26). Here the neuter has not only the
contracted e<XT(a6s)<as, but also the syncopated earos.
d. If the stem, after these changes, ends in t or p, the femi-
nine is declined like fxvla • but, if it ends in a- or v, like fxovaa
Or rpane^a '. as, fjbeta, rj&eias • nava, naarjs • peXaiva, peXaivrjs (23).
e. For the fern, termination -eiu, the shorter il (a added to the simple
stem) is commonly used in Ion. prose, and sometimes in Ep. and other
poetry (sometimes Ion. -&r\, especially in Hipp.) : as, paOea, evpea Hdt. 1.
178, (3a6eT)v lb. 75, fiadens E. 147. The poets, in a few instances, prolong
-4a of the neut. pi. to -eta for the sake of the metre (134 a) : as, d^ela Res.
Sc. 348, dSem Soph. Tr. 122 (so vicioeiv for <TKt6ev, Ap. Rh. 2. 404).
234. Of those words which belong to the general class of
adjectives (173), the following have three terminations :
1.) All participles : as, \vav, 6eis, \vo-as, el8<i>s (26).
a. In participles, which partake of the verb and the adjective, a distinc-
tion must be made between the stem, affix, connecting vowel, and flexible
ending of conjugation, and those of declension : thus, in Gen. \douros, the
stem of conjugation is Xv-, and the affix -ovtos ■ while the stem of declen-
sion is Xvovt-, and the affix -os.
2.) All comparatives and superlatives in -os : as, o-o<p<i>Tcpos, -a,
-ov, wiser ; o-o<pa>TaTos t -rj, -ov, wisest.
3.) All numerals, except cardinals from 2 to 100 inclusive :
as, diaKoaioi, -at, -a, two hundred, rplros, -17, -ov, third.
4.) The article and adjective pronouns (28), except rls (t\s).
5.) Of adjectives commonly so called, simples in -os, -«s, and
-vs, with some others : as, p.5>pos, ao(pos, ^a/uW, rjdvs, nets, p.e\as
(23) : 4ko>Pj -o0o"a, -of, willing ; raXas, -uiva, -av, wretched.
b. For the most part, simples in -os have three terminations, and coin-
pounds, but two. Yet some compounds have three, and many simples,
particularly derivatives in -eios, -10s, and -ip.os, have but two. Derivatives
from compound verbs, as being themselves uncompounded, especially
those in -ikos, -t<$s, and -nreos, have more commonly three terminations.
A distinct fern, is most found in oxytones, and least in proparoxytones.
In many words, usage is variable (d, e, f ).
c. Adjectives in -«s, of the Attic Dec. 2, have but two terminations :
as, d7i7po)s (22), 0, i) euyews, to evyeuv, fertile. For ir\ews, see 236.
d. In words in which the fem. has commonly a distinct form, the form
of the masc. is sometimes employed in its stead : as, Adjectives in -os
(particularly in Att. writers, 174 b), brfhos Eur. Med. 1197, dvaytcaLov Th.
1.2; Adjectives in -us and -«s (chiefly in the poets), i)8vs /x. 369, yeveav
6r)\6i>, female sex, Eur. Med. 1083 ; Comparatives, Superlatives, Partici-
ples, and Pronouns (all rarely, except in the dual, e), aTroptirepos Th. 5.
110, 6\o6tcltos 0. 442, ridevres iEsch. Ag. 560.
§ 236. IRREGULAR DECLENSION. 171
e. This use of the masc. form for the fern, is particularly frequent in
the dual, in which, from its limited use, t'.ie distinction of gender is least
important : as, tw xe?/36, the two hands, vi. 1. 8 (the fern, form tu is
especially rare, Soph. Ant. 769) ; toutu rcb y;xepx, t/iese two days, Cyr. 1.
2. 11 ; ibovre nal iradovaa Soph. 0. 0. 1676 ; rrXrryevTe 0. 455.
f. On the other hand, a distinct form is sometimes given to the fem. in
words in which it is commonly the same with the masc. : as, dOavdrr) K.
401, avTofj-cLTcu iv. 3. 8. This use is especially Epic and Lyric.
235. To some adjectives, feminine forms are supplied from
a kindred or derived stem. These forms may be either re-
quired to complete the adjective, or they may be only special
feminines, used (particularly in poetry and the dialects) by the
side of forms of the common gender (174 b). The feminines
thus supplied most frequently end in -is, G. -idos (21 7 f), but
also in -as, G. -ados, in -cia, -eipa, &c. Thus,
a. Masculines in -tjs of Dec. 1, and in -cvs of Dec. 3, have often cor-
responding feminines in -is, -i8os. These words are chiefly patrials and
gentiles, or other personal designations, and are commonly used as sub-
stantives. Thus, o iroXiTTjs, -ov, belonging to a city (deol ttoXltcii JE&ch. Th.
253), citizen, i] 7roXiTts, -idos • 6 Meyaiev's, -cws, r? Meyapis, Megarian.
b. The compounds of £ros year (in -ns, -€S of Dec. 3, but sometimes in
-TjSi G. -ov of Dec. 1), have often a special fem. in -is, -i8os : as, 6, ij ewT€-
rrjs, rb orreres, seven years old, and t) eirrerLS, -ibos.
c. Some compounds in -rs, -es have a poetic (particularly Epic) fem. in
-eta : as, rjpiyev-qs, -es, early -b>rn, i) rjpiyeveia A. 477 ; rjdveweia, Hes. Th.
d. Add 6, i) irlwv, and rj wieipa, rb iriov, fat ; 6 Trpeafivs, old, venerable,
fem., chiefly poet., irpeapZ, Trpecrfieipa, and irpea^rjts • 6, i) p.dicap, and
i] ii6.Ka.ipa, blessed, poet. ; and some others.
236. Irregular Adjectives. Among the adjectives which
deserve special notice are the following :
a. ue'-yas great, and iroXvs much (24). In these adjectives, the Nom.
and Ace. sing. masc. and neut. are formed from the stems p.eya- and woXe-,
according to Dec. 3. The other cases are formed from the stems p-eyaX-
and 7to\\-, according to Dec. 1 and 2. The Voc. /xeydXe occurs once,
iEsch. Th. 822. From its signification, iroXOs has no dual. In Hdt., the
forms from iroWos prevail throughout, yet not exclusively.
b. 6 irX&os, v rrXed, rb irXew, full. The masc. and neut. are formed
from s. 7r\a-, according to the Attic Dec. 2 (200) ; the fem. is formed from
s. 7r\e- (with Nom. pi. trXeq. in imitation of masc, according to some
editors, Soph. El. 1405). Ion. irXtos plenus, Ep. irXetos, -rj, -ov. So,
likewise, in Att. writers, the neut. pi. irXia Cyr. 7. 4. 6, and the pi.
compounds fyvXeoi, ZKirXea. In like manner i'Xea K. pi. from i'Xews.
c. 6 irpaos (24 ; by some written irpyos, 109 a), mild, borrows fem. and
plur. forms from Trpdus, which occurs Find. Py. 3. 125.
d. 6, i) o-»s, to <rQv, safe. In this adj., contract forms from s. o~a- are
blended, with forms from s. <rw- (contr. from crao-), belonging partly to
Dec. 2, and partly to Dec. 3. Thus,
6, t) rb
S. N. (craos)o-(os Ar. <rwos iii. 1. 32 <rcDa Hel. ( (<raov)o-<av vii. 6.
A. (aaov)(rav Th. aQov Lys. 109. 3 awai'Dem. ( <xG>ov Hdt. [32.
P. K. ii. 2. 21 (tljol, (aQes ) <r<3s Dem. crQai Hdt. j (<raa)<ra Eur.
A. Luc. o-uiovs, (crQas) <rQ$ Dem. 93. 24. \ crwaHel.1.1.24.
172 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE ADJECTIVES. § 236.
In Horn., forms from er<5os prevail, r. 300. With the above may he
compared the Homeric (faos) fws E. 87, Ace. &; II. 445, = £a>5s, faiv,
living (iii. 4. 5).
237. a. Some adjectives vary in the mode of declension
from the same stem : as,
Dec. 1 and 3, neXaivdnrav Soph. Aj. 954, and KeXcuvJnreao-i Pind. P. 4.
377, dark ; Dec. 2 and 3, dXdaTwp accursed, dXao-Tdpoiaiv Soph. Ant. 974.
b. In compounds of -yAxos laughter, and Kc-pas horn, we find both the
Att. Dec. 2 and Dec. 3 : as, <pi\6ye\ws, -wv, G. -w and -ojtos, laughter-
loving, j3ovKepio irapdtvov, 'heifer-horned,' iEsch. Pr. 588. Shorter forms
also occur, according to the common Dec. 2 : as, v-qnepoi Jiornless, Hes.
Op. 527.
c. Adjectives in -is vary in declension like substantives (118).
d. Among other examples of varied inflection, we notice the Homeric
d eu'9 B. 819, and t)vs II. 464, good, brave, to iu, ed, and rji), G. irjos A. 393
(cf. 222 c), A. iuv and t)vv, G. pi. neuter eawc U. 528 ; d Ipirjpos A. 266,
trusty, Pi. epLrjpes, epi-rjpas, T. 47, 378 ; d iroXvpp'nvos X. 257, rich in sheep,
PL TToXOpprjves I. 154 (cf. troXijapvi, 238 d) ; alirvis 6Xedpos N. 773, "IXlov
vIttO 0. 71, "IXios alireivy) N. 773, troXiv aiirrjv X. 625, alird pteOpa, 9. 369,
ll-fjdatrov alir-qecraav <f>. 87 ; dpYtjTi V. 419, dpyiri A. 818, dpyrJTct and dp-
yera ; dp\v<{>eov 2. 50, tipyvipov O. 621 ; ttoKlv . . . €VTe£x € °v A. 129, toXlu
evreixea II. 57 ; Tpoir)i> €pi(3c£\aica V. 74, Tpolrjv ipl(3wXoi> I. 329 ; iroX-vrXas
e. 171, tto\vt\7]pui}v o~. 319, woXvtXtjtoi X. 38.
238. Among defective adjectives, we notice,
a.) The following, chiefly poetic : d, r) aSaicpus, rd ti.8a.Kpv, tearless,
Ace. aSaKpvv (the other cases supplied by dddKpvros, -ov) ; so iroX-iSatcpvs
tearful ; 6 irpeo-p-us (for fern, see 235 d) oZe?, as subst. elder, ambassador
(in the last sense G. irpecfiem Ar. Aeh. 93), A. Trptafiw, V. irpea^v • PL
7rpe<x[3eis, 7rpeo-j3rjes Hes. Sc. 245, elders, ambassadors, G. irptafiewv, D.
7rpicrj3eai, irpecr^evcriv Lye. 1056, A. irptafieis, Du. trpk<J^r\ Ar. Fr. 495 (the
plur. in the sense of ambassadors was in common use ; otherwise, the
word was almost exclusively poetic, and its place supplied by d Trpeaj3vrr)s,
old man, and 6 irpeo-^eir-qs, ambassador) ; <j>pov8os, -rj, -ov, gone, which,
with the Nom. throughout, has the Gen. (ppoiSov Soph. Aj. 264.
b.) Poetic feminities and neuters, which have no corresponding masc. :
as, i) ir<$Tvia A. 357 (sometimes itotvu v. 61) revered, rrjv troTviav, ai irorviai
(yet irbrvie Orph. H. 10. 20) ; t) GdXaa rich, H. 475 ; avSpoXc'-mpa man-
destroying, ^Esch. Th. 314; KvSidveipa ennobling, A. 225; eupvd-yvia widc-
strected, A. 52 ; evpvoSelrjs X. 52 ; iiriroSdcma crested, P. 295 ; dp.(piddcreiav O.
309 ; i] Xis and Xio~<rr), p.. 79, y. 293 (akin to Xe?os smooth) ; to Ppt (s. fipiO-)
Hes. ap. Strab. 364 (fipidv's heavy) ; to pa (s. pg.8-) Soph. Fr. 932 (pa'Sios
easy ; cf. 8Q, npt, 228 a) ; t<x ■fjpa and iirir/pa, pleasing, y. 164, A. 572.
c.) Poetic plurals which have no corresponding sing. : as, oi Bailees K.
264, and Tap<f>&s A. 387 (yet Tap<pfc Msch. Th. 535), -etai, -ia, thick,
frequent ; cpvo-dpuaTes . . . tiriroi II. 370 ; ol irX&s A. 395, tovs 7rXeas B.
129 = 7rXewes, irXtovas, more.
d.) Poetic oblique cases which have no corresponding Nom. : as, too
8v<r8duapTOS unhappily wedded, iEsch. Ag. 1319 ; KaXXi-yvvaiicos having
beautiful women, Sapph. (135), 'EXXdSa /caXAryiWi/ca B. 683 ; iroXviapvi
QvicTTT) B. 106 ; iroXvScvSpea-o-iv Eur. Bac. 560 ; v\|;iK£pdTa -irirpav Ar.
Nub. 597 ; X € 'P 1 T'> xfyv a > also PL x^PV^s, X^PV - or X^P eia > A. 80, A. 400,
&c. (as fr. x € P- hand, 224 f ; under the hand of, subject), inferior, worse.
§240. NUMERALS. ADJECTIVES. 173
CHAPTEE IV.
NUMERALS.
239. I. Numeral Adjectives. Of numeral adjectives, the
principal are, (1) the Cardinal, answering the question, n6voi;
how many ? (2) the Ordeslvl, answering the question, iroaros ;
which in order ? or, one of hoio many ? (3) the Temporal, an-
swering the question, irocrraios ; on what day .?«or, in how many
days ? (4) the Multiple (multiplex, having many folds), show-
ing to what extent anything is complicated ; and (5) the Pro-
portional, showing the proportion which one thing bears to
another.
240. 1. Cardinal. The first four cardinals (25), and those
above 100 are declined ; the latter as adjectives of Dec. 2 and 1.
The rest are indeclinable. Cf. the Lat. cardinals.
a. Eh, from its signification, is used only in the sing. ; 5tfw, only in
the dual and pi. ; and the other cardinals only in the pi., except with col-
lective nouns in such expressions as a<nrls fivpla xal Terpaxoala, 10,400 in-
fantry, i. 7. 10, 'iirirov dxTaxivx^i-W, 8,000 horse, Hdt. 7. 85.
b. Efs has two stems, 4v- and p-. Its compounds ovdeis and pcvdeis
(written, with more strength, ov8e els, /j-nSe els) have a masc. plural.
c. The common form of the second cardinal is 5vo, shortened from the
regular 5uu. The Dat. pi. 8v<xi, found in late writers and Hipp., also
occurs (?) Th. 8. 101. Both 8vo (5t5w) and &ft$w, both (which is placed in
25, as partaking of the nature of a numeral, with that of an emphatic
pronoun), are sometimes indecl. (in Horn, never otherwise) : as, 56o irXe'-
6pwv i. 2. 23, duo* xavbveacri N. 407, x e P <JLV &P &p-4>u Horn. Cer. 15.
d. In the derivatives from evvia, hva-, for iva-, is a less classic form.
e. In recraapeaxaidexa, and the later dexariaaapes, dexarpeis, the rpe?s
and re'craapes are declined : dexarpets, dexarpia, dexarptCiv • rots reacrapcrixai-
dexa. Yet we sometimes find reaaapeaxaihexa, and later even Teaaapaxal-
8exa used as indeclinable ; as in Hdt. 1. 86, Mem. 2. 7. 2. The com-
pounds from 13 to 19, both cardinal and ordinal, are often written sep-
arately : as, rpeh xal 8e"xa i. 5. 5, rpla xal 8exa Hdt. 1. 119, re'craapes xai
8e"xa • Tphov xal dixarov Th. 5. 56, Te'raprov xal Sexarov, lb. 81, irhre 9)
exxaidexa Cyr. 1. 4. 16, irepLirTV 9) ^xry /cat dexdry Hel. 4. 6. 6 ; also 2v
/cat elxocrrbv Th. 8. 109.
f. The cardinals become collective or distributive by composition with
aiv • as, avvdvo bini, two together, or two at a time, vi. 3. 2, avvrpeis terni,
t. 429, awSibSexa duodeni, Eur. Tro. 1076. The distributive sense is also
expressed by means of the prepositions dvd, /card, and, in some connec-
tions, els and iiri. ■ as, 2% Xbxovs dvd exarbv tivdpas, 6 companies, each 100
men, hi. 4. 21 ; xard rerpa/ctcrxtXtoi/s, 4,000 at a time, iii. 5. 8 ; els exarbv,
100 deep, Cyr. 6. 3. 23 ; iiri reTrdpwv, 4 deep, i. 2. 15.
2. The Ordinal Numbers are all derived from the cardinal, ex-
cept irpcoros, and are all of Dec. 2 and 1. They all end in -tos (Eng.
174 NUMERALS. ADVERBS AND SUBSTANTIVES. §240.
-th), except Scvrepos, eftbopos, and oydoos • and those from 20, up-
wards, all end in -oaros (Lat. -esimus).
3. The Temporal Numbers are formed from the ordinals by
changing the final -os into -aios, -a, -op : as, rpiros rpirdios, v. 3. 2.
4. The Multiple Numbers end in -tt\6os, contracted -nXovs (Lat.
-plex), and are declined like 8nr\6os, dinXovs (23).
5. The Proportional Numbers have double forms, in -nXaa-ios,
-a, -op (Lat. -plus), and, more rarely, -7rAao-iW, -op, G. -opos. Thus
the ratio of 2 to 1 is expressed by dnrXdo-ios duplus, or SwrXacriW.
241. II. Numeral Adverbs, a. The numeral adverbs which
reply to the interrogative iroo-dius ; how many times ? all end in -gkis
(Lat. -ies), except the three first : as, beicdius decies, ten times, ippea-
KauiKoai.KaieirraKoo~i.oTrkao-i.aKi$ 729 times, PI. Rep. 578 e.
b. These adverbs are employed in the formation of the higher cardinal
and ordinal numbers : as, 8iaxlXioc b!s mille, 2,000, irevTaKio'x'-Xioo'Tbs.
c. Other numeral adverbs relate to division, order, pface, manner,
&c. : as, 8ixa or 8ixfj, poet. bixQd, in two divisions, rpixa, -xf), or -x@d,
in 3 divisions ; devrepop secondly, rpirop thirdly ; rpixov in 3 places.
III. Numeral Substantives. These, for the most part, end in
-as, -aSoy, and are employed both as abstract and as collective nouns.
Thus, fj pvptds may signify, either the number 10,000, considered ab-
stractly, or a collection of 10,000. These numerals often take the
place of the cardinals, particularly in the expression of the higher
numbers : as, deica pvpidBes, ten myriads =z 100,000, i. 7. 10.
242. a. When numerals are combined, the less commonly pre-
cedes with Kal' but often the greater with or without kclL: as,
Trevre Kal duoaiv, five and twenty, i. 4. 2 ; rpidKovra Kal -rrhre, thirty and
five, lb. ; TCTTapaKOvra irtvre, forty-five, v. 5. 5 ; crradficl rpeis Kal ive-
vf)KOVTa, irapaadyyai irevre Kal TpidKOvra Kal irevraKbcrioi, crdbici TrevTTjKovTa
Kal e^aKtax^ 101 Kac V^pioi, ii. 2. 6 ; ffrad/xol diaKtaioi. beKairtvre, irapaady-
yai X'Xiot eKarbv irevT'qKovTa irivre, crdbia Tpia^pia rerpaKiaxi-Xia e|a/c6<rta
■rrei>T-f)KovTa, vii. 8. 26. See v. 5. 4, and § 240 e.
b. From the division of the Greek month into decades, the days were
often designated as follows ; /xr/vbs f3o7}bpo/j,iQuos Zktiq eirl 54m, upon the
[6th after 10] 16th of tlie month Boedromion, Dem. 261. 12 ; dvdeaTrjpiuvos
2kt% iirl deKarr}, Id. 279. 17 ; fiotibpofu&vos 'eKTrj /mct eUdba, 'the 26th,' Id.
c. Instead of adding eight or nine, subtraction is often employed : as,
pr\e$ . . . fiias dtovaai recrcrap&KovTa, forty shi2)S wanting otic [40 - 1 = 39],
Th. 8. 7 ; vaval bvoiv beofoaii irevT-fiKovra [50 - 2 = 48] lb. 25.
d. In fractions, the denominator may be expressed ; or, if it is only
greater by one than the numerator, it may be understood : as, rCbv ir^re
t&s bvo fioipas, § , Th. 1. 10, tQv 5vo fiep&v, o/f, lb. 104, t<x irfrre fiepv, f-
e. The combinations of fractions with whole numbers are variously ex-
pressed : thus, (a) rpla rj/jLidapeiKd, three Imlf-darics, i. e. 1^ darics, i. 3.
21 : (j8) Particularly in Herodotus, rplrov i]fjLiTd\avTov, the third talent a
half one, i. e. 2\ talents (so Germ, dritthalb), Hdt. 1. 50 ; £/35oyuov rjfiird-
\avrov + riraprou T},aiTa\avTov = rdXavra deKa, 6-| + 3-j = 10, lb. (cf. Lat.
sestertius, fr. semis-tertius) : (7) Less classic, bio Kal ijfji.l<reiav pvav, bvco Kal
ijtxio-v bpaxp-cLi, Poll. 9. 56, 62 : (5) iiriTpiTov, a third in addition, i. e. lj,
Vect. 3. 9 ; iirlirepTrTov, 1%, lb. : (e) TjfiibXiop, Jmlf as much again, i. e.
1\, i. 3. 21.
§ 245. SUBSTANTIVE PEONOUNS. 175
CHAPTER Y.
PEONOUNS.
I. SUBSTANTIVE (27).
243. 1. Personal, iya>, <rv, ov. These pronouns have
special laws of declension.
a. The analysis of these pronouns (27 e) shows that the nurahers vary in
the stem; that the connective is 6 in the sing, and pi., and w in the dual ;
that the Ace. sing, has no flexive (the primitive Direct Case remaining as
Ace, while the Nom., in the 1st and 2d Persons, has the peculiar forms
iy& and <ri;, and in the 3d, from its reflexive use, early disappeared ; com-
pare the Latin) ; that the Dat. pi. has the flexive of the old Indirect Case
(186 c), except in the form <r<j>l<ri, where the connective t, in imitation of
other forms of this case, becomes i ; and that, in the contraction of the
connectives and flexives, e passes into its kindred o in the Dat. sing.
(114 b). The dual of the 3d Pers. was distinguished from that of the 2d,
by the accent, and by remaining uncontracted.
b. The pronoun o5 is used both as a simple personal pronoun, and as a
reflexive ; but in the common language not greatly in either sense. See
Syntax. To complete its inflection, the Ep. <r<j>w£ and <x<f>uiiv, and the Ion.
ccpea are added in 27 a.
244. 2. Reflexive, epavrov, o-eavrov, iavrov. These pro-
nouns, from their nature, want the Nom., and the two first
also the neuter. They are formed by joining the personal pro-
nouns with clvtos.
a. In the plur. of the 1st and 2d Persons, and often of the 3d, the two
elements remain distinct : rnxG>v avrCbv. Otherwise, the old Direct Case
of the personal pronoun unites with the forms of avrds ; while, in the 1st
Pers., and often in the other two, contraction takes place : (efie-avrov)
ifxavrov, ae-avrov aavrov, e-avrov avrov.
3. Reciprocal. This pronoun is formed by doubling tikkos,
other : aXkyXav, for dXXdWcov. From its nature, it wants the
Nom. and the sing., and is not common in the dual.
245. 4. Indefinite, 6 Belva. This pronoun may be termed,
with almost equal propriety, definite and indefinite.
a. It is used to designate a particular person or thing, which the speaker
either cannot, or does not care to name ; in the language of Matthire, it
"indefinitely expresses a definite person or thing " : Tbv 5e?i>a yiyvuirKeis ;
Do you know Mr. So and So ? At. Th. 620. '0 Setva rod delvos rbv Sdva
elvayyiWei, A. B., tlie son of G. D., impeaclies E. F., Dem. 167. 24. In
the sing, this pronoun is of the three genders ; in the plur. it is masc.
only, and wants the Dat. It is sometimes indecl. : rod 5dva Ar. Th. 262.
b. The article is an essential part of this pronoun ; and it were better
written as a single word, oSeiva. It appears to be simply an extension of
176 SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. § 245.
the demonstrative 68e, by adding -iv- or -iva, which gives to it an in-
definite force (cf. 253 b), making it a demonstrative indefinite. It belongs
properly to the colloquial Attic, and first appears in Aristophanes.
246. Histoky. a. The distinction of person, like those of ease and
number (186 b, c), appears to have been at first only twofold, merely sep-
arating the person speaking from all others, whether spoken to or of.
b. To denote ourselves, we naturally keep the voice at home as In^^ch as
is consistent with enunciation ; while we denote another by & forcible emis-
sion of it, a pointing, as it were, of the voice towards the person. The for-
mer of these is accomplished by closing the lips and murmuring within,
that is, by uttering m, which hence became the great root of the 1st per-
sonal pronouns. The latter is accomplished by sending the voice out
forcibly through a narrow aperture. This, according to the place of the
aperture, and the mode of emission, may produce either a sibilant, a lin-
gual, or a strong breathing. Hence we find all these as roots of the 2d
and 3d personal pronouns.
c. The |jl- of the 1st Pers. passed in the old plur. (which afterwards be-
came the dual, 186 g) into the kindred v- (cf. Lat. nos) ; and in the sing.,
when pronounced with emphasis, assumed an initial a which passed by
precession into €. In the new plur., the idea of plurality was conveyed
by doubling the p. (d/t^i-) ; or more commonly by doubling the u to r\
(115 a), pronounced with the rough breathing (rjp^).
d. From this the new plur. of the 2d Pers. appears to have been formed,
by changing a, the deepest of the vowels, into v, the most protrusive (vpfi-,
*v\i.'). With the exception of tliis imitative plural, the plur. and dual
of the 2d and 3d Persons have the same root, in which plurality is ex-
pressed by joining two of the signs of these persons (<r<|>- = tr + r, the
latter remaining in the Lat. vos). In the separation of the two persons,
the sign <r- became appropriated to the pronoun of the 2d Pers. (but in
the Dor., t-, as in the Lat., and also in the verb-endings -t«, -tov, -lis) ;
and the rough breathing to that of the 3d Pers. (in an early state of the
language, this was F-, 247 a ; in Lat. it became s- ; while in the article
we find both the rough breathing and t-, and in verb-endings of the 3d
Pers. both <r, and more frequently t).
e. In the Nom. sing., the subjective force appears to have been ex-
pressed by peculiar modes of strengthening ; in the 1st Pers. by a double
prefix to the p, thus, i-y-o-fi (the y being inserted simply to prevent hia-
tus), which passed into (iyoa, 160 f ) eyib ; in the 2d Pers. by affixing F,
which with the preceding e passed into v (cf. 217 b) ; in the 3d Pers. per-
haps by affixing A, before which precession took place (217 f ), so that the
form became (fiA, iA or tA, d, 160) I or I (an obsolete Nom. cited by
Apollonius). With this Nom. there appears to have been associated an
Ace. 'iv or iv, of which fj.lv and viv are strengthened forms.
247. Dialects. The dialectic forms of the Personal Pro-
nouns arise chiefly,
a.) From variation of stem: as, Dor. and iEol. t- for <r- (169 b ; some-
times Ep., or even Ion.), ri) tu, Sap. 1. 13, t£ te, Theoc. 1. 5, toI A. 28,
PIdt. 1. 9 ; Mol. and Ep. p- for the rough breathing, f<? Ale. 56 [84], Fot
Sap. 2. 1 (so originally in Horn., 98 e, 162 a) ; Dor. 'dfi,-, v|x(x-, JEol. and
Ep. d(i(L-, v\l\l- (130 a, 167 c), for tjj*-, vp.-, a/xiov, a/udv Theoc. (d, e).
b.) From toant of contraction, or from peculiar contraction (131 b) : ifido
K. 124, <rio Hdt. 1. 8, cr<£o>e A. 8 ; (with precession, in imitation of the
Gen.) v&'C A. 418 ; ff<pa&> A. 338 : <*e0 Hdt. 7. 209, aev Id. 1. 9, eS T. 464.
§ 249. HISTORY. DIALECTIC FORMS. 177
c.) From lengthening or repeating the connective (134 a, 135) : ip.e?o A.
174, <r<pe?as v. 213 : ie T. 171, eol N. 495, reelo (v. 1. reoto) 9. 37.
d.) From want of a connective : dp.es Alcm. 58, defies <!>. 432, tip.es Ar.
e.) From the retention of primitive forms having no flexive : dp.?, ip.e,
V/i/ie, Ar. Lys. 95, 87, 1076, &n,ue A. 59, tifi/ie ^. 412, a<pi A. 111.
f.) From the use of different endings : as, Gen. Ep. -0ev (192), ep.e6ev,
aedev, Wev, A. 525 ; Ace. sing, -v, fdv A. 29, vlv Pind. O. 1. 40 (246 e).
g.) From the retraction of the accent, or shortening tlie last syllable, or
"both ; and also from an extension of enclitic use : ij,uuu (v. 1. ripXv) A. 147,
ffp.iv (v. 1. rpxtv) X. 344, fjnas (v. 1. rj/xas) ir. 372 ; aQewv 2. 311. Cf. i.
h.) Add the strengthened Nom. forms eyuv A. 76 (in Horn, only before
a vowel), rivn E. 485 ; and the Ion. Ace. neut. pi. <r<pea Hdt. 1. 46.
i. Some of these forms are also found in the Attic poets : as, eyuv
JEsch. Pers. 931 ; e/xedev Eur. Or. 986, aedev Id. Ale. 51, edev iEsch. Sup.
66 ; viv (often, and without distinction of number or gender) Id. Pr. 55,
Soph. El. 436, fdv (rarely) iEsch. Th. 453, Soph. Tr. 388, <r<f>e (often ;
also in sing.) Id. Ant. 44 ; tip.p.e lb. 846, dp.lv iEsch. Eum. 347 ; rifuv or
rjfiiv Soph. El. 17, 41, iftiv or tifUP Id. Ant. 308, <r<pas lb. 839. This re-
traction of the accent belongs especially to Sophocles.
248. Reflexive Pronouns. In these the New Ionic compounds
the Genitive of the personal pronouns with the forms of avrds, contracting
oav into a>v (131 e) : ifi€(o-av)<avrov, ifieuvTys, ifieuvrip. In Horn., the
elements are always distinct : as, 2fi aiirbv A. 271, col cLvrcpT. 51, iavrrjv,
II. ADJECTIVE (28).
249. All the pronouns which are declined in 28, may be
traced back to a common foundation in an old definitive,
which had two roots, the rough breathing and t- (cf. 246 b, d),
and which performed the offices both of an article and of a
demonstrative, personal, and relative pronoun.
a. To this definitive the Greeks gave the name dpdpov, artus, joint,
from its giving connection to discourse, by marking the person or thing
spoken of as one which had been spoken of before, or which was about to
be spoken of further, or which was familiar to the mind. The Greek
name dpdpov became, in Latin, articulus, small joint, from which has
come the English name, article.
b. This definitive, when used as a demonstrative, or simply as the
definite article, naturally precedes the name of the person or thing spoken
of ; but when used as a relative, usually follows it : as, oSr6s iariv o dvrjp
8v elSes, this is THE man WHOM you saw; rb p68ov 8 dvdet, THE rose
WHICH blooms. Hence, in the former use, it was termed the prepositive,
and in the latter, the postpositive article. When prepositive, it was so
closely connected with the following word that its aspirated forms became
proclitic. Compare the different uses of the Germ, der, the Anglo-Saxon
se, the Eng. tliat, &c.
c. In the progress of the language, the forms of this old definitive
became specially appropriated, though with many exceptions in the dia-
lects and poets, and some even in Attic prose (see Syntax) ; and other
pronouns arose from it by derivation and composition. The forms
t6s and r-fj of the Nom. sing, became obsolete. Special care is required
in distinguishing the forms of 6, 8s, od, ris, and ris. Forms which have
the same letters may be often distinguished by the accentuation.
comp. gr. 8* L
178 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. — DEFINITE. § 250.
A. Definite.
250. 1. Article, 6, 17, to. The prepositive article, or, as it
is commonly termed simply, the article, unites the proclitic
aspirated forms of the old definitive, 6, 17, ol, al, with the t-
forms of the neuter, the oblique cases, and the dual.
2. Relative, 5s, rj, o. The postpositive article, or, as it is
now commonly termed, the relative pronoun, has the orthotone
aspirated forms of the old definitive. See 786, 788 g.
251. 3. Iterative, avros, -f), -6. This pronoun appears to
be compounded of the particle av, again, back, and the old
definitive ros (249 c). It is hence a pronoun of return (or,
as it may be termed, an iterative pronoun), marking the return
of the mind to the same person or thing.
a. The article and avros are often united by crasis (125) : as, avrbs, tJie
same, ravrbv (199 a) or ravrb (Ion. ravrb Hdt. 1. 53, § 131 e), ravrov, rav-
rd, for 6 avrbs, rb avrb, rod avrov, rd avrd.
252. 4. Demonstrative. The primary demonstratives
are ovros, this, compounded of the article and avros • 68e, this,
compounded of the article (declined as usual) and tie, an in-
separable particle marking direction towards ; and etcclvos, that,
derived from !««, there (28 1).
a. The definitives of quality, quantity, and age, rolos talis, such,
tocos tantus, so much, tt]\Ikos so old, and rvwos tautulus, so small, are
strengthened, in the same manner as the article, by composition with
avros and 8e • thus, toiovtos and rowade, just such, too~ovtos and ro-
o~6o~8e, just so much, ttj\ikovtos and TrjKucoo-de, tvwovtos- These com-
pound pronouns are commonly employed, instead of the simple
(which are chiefly poetic), even when there is no special emphasis.
b. In these compounds with avros, if the affix of the first element
has an vowel, it unites with av- to form ov ; but otherwise, it is ab-
sorbed: as, (6 avros) ovros, (fj avrrj) avrr), (rov alrov) rovrov, (rrjs
avrrjs) ravrqs, (ol avroi) ovroi, (ai avrai) avrai, (ra>v avrav) rovroav
(roaos avros) roaovros, (too~q avrrj) roaavrq.
c. To demonstratives, for the sake of stronger expression, an i is
affixed, which is always long and acute, and before which a short
vowel is dropped, and a long vowel or diphthong regarded as short :
as, ovrooi, avrfji, rovri, hicce, Fr. celui-ci, this here (28) ; ineivoo-l ilhc,
Fr. celui-la, that there ; 681, roaovroal.
d. This i paragogic is Attic, and belongs especially to the style of con-
versation and popular discourse. It was also affixed to adverbs : as, ov-
rwo-i, &5L, vvvi, iuravdi, hrevdevi. So, in comic language, even with an
inserted particle, vvv/xevL Ar. Av. 448, ivycravdl Id. Th. 646, ey/xevrevdeui.
5. Possessive. The possessive pronouns are derived in
Greek, as in other languages, from the personal ; and are
arranged in 28 according to the person and number of the pro-
nouns from which they are formed.
§ 255. INDEFINITE. DIALECTS. 179
B. Indefinite.
253. 1. The simple indefinite is t\s, which has two stems :
Tiv-, declined throughout after Dec. 3 ; and re-, declined in the
Gen. and Dat. only, after Dec. 2 (except that the Gen. sing,
imitates the personal pronouns) with contraction : thus,
tis, rt (the v omitted as in the theme, 208 d), tIv6s, &c. : G. rko tov Cyr.
8. 5. 7, tov; Soph. 0. T. 1435, D. rc V r V A. 299, i. 9. 7, rw ; Soph. El.
679 ; and, in the compound, 8tov i. 9. 21, iEsch. Pr. 170, 6'rp ii. 6. 23,
PL G. Sreuu 8twv vii. 6. 24, D. oreois 8tois Soph. Tr. 1119, 8toi<jl Ar. E<p
758 (so, rarely, toicti ; Soph. Tr. 984). See c, and 254 b.
2. The intePvROGAtives in Greek are simply the indefinites
with a change of accent. See Syntax, 563 s.
a. Thus, the forms of the indefinite rls (except the peculiar drra, which
is rarely used except in connection with an adjective, and which is never
used interrogatively) are enclitic ; while those of the interrogative tis are
orthotone, and never take the grave accent. In lexicons and grammars,
for the sake of distinction, the forms tIs and H of the indefinite are writ-
ten with the grave accent, or without an accent. See 784 a, 787 b.
b. The stems t€- and tiv- may be traced back to the great pronominal
root t-, here rendered indefinite by the additions made.
c. The short i of tis, and the omission of v in f% suggest an inter-
mediate root ti-, formed from tc- by precession, and afterwards increased
by v (cf. 218). To this intermediate root may be referred, according to
Dec. 2, the Mo\. ri<p ; and Dor. neut. pi. (na) <to\ (cf. 143 b) Ar. Ach. 757.
254. 3. The composition of 6s with ris forms the relative
indefinite oo-tis, ivhoever, of which both parts are declined in
those forms which have the root tiv , but the latter only in
those which have the root tc- ; thus, ovto/os, but 6Veo orou.
a. Of the double forms of the Gen. and Dat., the longer prevail in Attic
prose, and the shorter in Attic poetry.
b. The form &<r<xa, Att. cLttcl (169 a) appears to be compounded of a and
the Dor. ad (253 c). In certain connections, it passed into a simple in-
definite, and then, by a softer pronunciation, became dcaa, arret.
c. In 8 rt a space is used to distinguish it from the conjunction on.
255. Dialectic Forms, a. Article (28 i, j). With ol and al of
the Nom. pi., the old forms toL and to.1 are also used, especially for the
sake of metre, euphony, or emphasis, in the Dor. and Ion. (chiefly the
Ep.) ; and, rarely, even in Att. poetry.
b. Iterative. The New Ion. often inserts € in avr6s and its compounds,
before a long vowel in the affix (135 a, 28 1) : avrtwv tovt£wv Hdt. 2. 3.
c. Demonstrative (28 1, m). The shorter kcivos is also used by the Att.
poets for the sake of the metre ; and, according to some, even occurs in
Att. prose, as Hel. 2. 3. 48.
d. Possessive. Some of the forms in 28 n also occur in Att. poetry : as,
8s, tc5s, ajuos or d,u6s (sometimes used for ijmds, as in Eng. our for my).
e. Indefinite. For dialectic forms, see 28 o, 253 c. Horn, and Hdt.
have also regular forms from 8<xtls. Some references are added : 6'rts
(= oo-tis, but the first part undeclined) T. 279 (octtis T. 167), 6' tti (171)
B. 408, Teo Hdt. 1. 58, rev (131 b) B. 388, rdo ; B. 225, rev; Hdt. 5. 106,
riouri; Id. 1. 37, ortoiaip O. 491, ort^o-iv Hdt. 2.66 v. l.,<Wa r. 218, 6Vi-
vas O. 492 (o&rriras A. 240), a<rcra Hdt'. 1. 138.
180 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. § 256.
CHAPTER VI.
COMPARISON.
256- Adjectives and Adverbs have, in Greek,
three degrees of comparison, the Positive, Com-
parative, and Superlative.
a. Comparative and superlative forms may be analyzed into the base,
which is commonly the stem of the positive ; the connective, which
varies according to euphony, metre, and other influences ; and the
degree-sign, to which, in the adjective, are also attached the affixes
of declension. See 29.
I. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
A. BY -TfpOff, -TdTOS.
257. In adjectives, the comparative is usually
formed in -t«-/>o?, -a, -ov, and the superlative in
-TaT09, -v, -ov. In receiving these affixes, the end-
ings of the theme are changed as follows :
1.) -0?, preceded by a long syllable, becomes
-o- ; by a short syllable, -co- : as,
kov<|>cs light, Kovcpdrepos, -a, -ov, Kovcpbraros, -v, -ov.
crowds wise, aocpurepos wiser, o-o<pd>Ta.Tos wisest.
a. A syllable before a mute and liquid is here regarded as long : as,
a<po5p6s vcliement, atpodpSrepos, -draros.
b. The change to -«- takes place to avoid the succession of too many
short syllables. Epic verse admits only two short syllables in succes-
sion. Some exceptions to the rule occur in the poets for the sake of the
metre : as, KaKo&ivdbrepos v. 376, evTeKVibrare Eur. Hec. 620.
c. Adjectives contracted in the theme are commonly contracted in the
Comp. and Sup. : as, irop<pvpeos Tropcpvpovs, 'purple, irop(pvp(eu))<aTepos.
d. In a few words, -os is dropped ; and, in a few, it becomes
-at-, -co--, or -to- : as, commonly,
iraAaids ancient, TraXairepos, -airaros • <f>£\o$ dear, cpiXrepos, (plXraros •
(-os -cu-) <j>i\os friendly, (piXairepos, -aiTaros • (-os -e<r-) cpp«|i6VOS strong,
eppwixeuiarepos, -^crraros • so most contracts in -oos, as air\(6os)oiis single,
a,7r\(oi<r)ovcrTepos • (-os -i<r-) XaXos talkative, XaXLcrrepos, -Lo-tcltos.
e. MeVos middle, and vc'os new, have old superlatives of limited and
chiefly poetic use in -a-ros : fi^traros midmost, Ar. Vesp. 1502, Ep. fi£<r-
craTos 0. 223, Metros novissimus, last, A. 712, Soph. Ant. 627. Of. Z<Tx aTOS >
{irpbaros) irpwros, ihraros (262 d) ; and Poet. p.i>x aT0S inmost, inj^aros last.
258. 2.) -«?, and -?/? of Dec. 3, become -ea- ;
and -u? becomes -v- : as,
§ 261. SECOND FORM. 181
\api6is agreeable, x a P t ^°" r€ P 0S f -^crraTos • ToXp.(?7ecs)TJs daring, ro\-
fi{^(x)-f\<TTaTos (207 c) Soph. Ph. 984 ; <ra<prfjs evident, aa<pe<TTepos, -Arra-
tos • irevTjs poor, Trev^arepos, -^araros ■ 6|vs sluirp, d^vrepos, -irraros.
a. In adjectives of Dec. 1, -r\s becomes -i<r- : as, irXeope" terns, -ov, cov-
etous, irXeoveicTiaTCLTos.
259. 4.) In adjectives of other endings, -repo?
and -tclto? are either added to the simple stem, or
to the stem increased by -e<r-, -to--, -o-, or -&>- : as,
rdXas, -avos, wretched, TaXdVrepos, -toltos \ so ,u.Aas black, fid/cap,
blessed, fiaKapraros • (-€<r-) a&cppwv, -ovos, discreet, cra><f>pov€o-Tepos, -e<rra-
tos • so most adjectives in -cov • (-icr-) dpira.%, -ayos, rapax, rapaciotts, dp-
irayla-TCLTOS • (-»-) iirixapis, -itos, pleasing, ttr^apir <ar epos, -wraros.
a. No part of inflection is less strictly bound by rule than comparison
(while the poets have here, as elsewhere, especial freedom) ; and the forms
above stated are sometimes interchanged or varied from regard to metre,
euphony, brevity, &c. : as, tttwx^s poor, -drepos and -iarepos, Ar. Ach. 425 ;
vfipiar-fis insolent, -rbrepos, -T&raros, v. 8. 3, 22 ; i-mXrio'/xwv forgetful, iiri-
Xr)(TfiQTaTos, Ar. Nub. 790 ; ireiruv ripe, ireiraiTepos iEsch. Fr. 244 ; dxapis
disagreeable, dxapto-repos v. 392 ; idOs straight, idwrara, for the sake of
the metre, 2. 508 ; <paeiu6s, shining, (padvTaros v. 93.
B. By -lav, -toroy.
260. A few adjectives are compared by -lav
and -lo-Tos, commonly adding these to the root of
the word.
a. In adducing examples, a noun or verb will sometimes be introduced,
as showing well the base : kckos bad, icaiduv, k&kio-tos • f|8v$ pleasant
(fj8w to please), ijdlwv, -l<ttos • a'wrxpos shameful (afcrxos shame), aiax^v,
-X<-<ttos • so ixOpfc hostile, Kv8p6s glorious, poet., and in Sup. oUrphs piti-
able (?X® 0S hatred, kvSos glory, oIktos pity), tx® lU} v, nvbiwv, ottcTio-Tos •
dX-yeivrfs painful (AX-yos pain), dXyLojv, -yiaTos ■ xepSaXios gainful (K^pSos
gain), poet. Kepdiuv, -diaros • koXos beautiful (k&XXos beauty), koXXLoju,
-icttos • (PcXt-, akin to /3eXos, weapon ?), fieXrlwv better, ^Xtkttos best.
b. This was an early method of comparison, retained in a few common
words, and in poetic forms of some others. For the declension of com-
paratives in -»v, see 22, 211. The t in -Co»v is regularly long in the Att.
poets, but short in the Epic and Doric. Yet rjb\ov Eur. Sup. 1101.
261. The different forms of the Comp. in -a>v are well ex-
plained by reference to -lav as their common origin, and to the
various changes of the consonant I. Thus, we notice, besides
the use of the corresponding vowel t,
a.) Contraction (sometimes with transposition), or omission between
two vowels (142, 140) : as, iroXvs much (base 7roXe-, sync. 7rXe-), irXeiwv
or irXewv more, irXetaros most, Lat. plus, plurimus ; (xiKpos small (ue-)
lidwv minor, rare poet, /neio-ros minimus ; paSios easy (pd-) pduv, pharos
(Ion. pv'toiu, prji'o-Tos, 8. 565) ; (X«-, akin to Dor. X<3 to desire, neut. pi.
Xdold desirable, Theoc. 26. 32) Xw&v, /3. 169, Att. Xuxav, vi. 2. 15, X^rros;
(dp-, ape-, in dper-rj virtus, valor, virtue) dpeiwv poet., braver, better, &pt-
(ttos best ; (aucv-, cf. amcenus) d^eivuv better ; (X € P _ or X €l P"> 238 d) xefy>&w
(Ep. xepeLw A. 114) inferior, worse, x^P t0 " r0 ^'
182 COMPARISON OP ADJECTIVES. § 261.
b.) The change into <r«r (tt) or £ (143 c), the preceding vowel, if short,
now becoming long by nature : as, ra\vs swift, {0ax; 159 b ; 0axW)
ddaauv or ddrrwv, tcExuttos • 4\a\vs Ep., small, iXdo-acw, £Xdx<.<TTos •
patcpos long (ua/c-, /jltjk-), fidaawu poet., fufficurros ■ Kpa-rvs Ep., strong,
(Kparlcop) KpelcrcTojv, KpdrKTTos (icpeacrtav, Hdt. 1. 66, k&pthttos, A. 266,
§ 134, 171) ; 6Xt-yos little, SXifa" Ep., dX^yicrros • pe-yas magnus, great,
fixLfov major (Ion. p.efav Hdt. 1. 202), piyuxTos maximus.
c. Some Comparatives have a double form in -i<av and -<rcrwv • as,
fipaMs bardus, slow, ppadiuv, Hes. Op. 526, fipdcawv K. 226.
d. Of the Comp. forms irXciwv and irX&ov, the Attic uses more the
former, especially in the contracted cases ; but in the neut. sing., prefers
irXeov, especially as an adverb. It sometimes syncopates irXeiop to irXeiv,
but only in such phrases as ttXclv ?) p.ipioi, more than 10,000. Hdt. pre-
fers irXkuiv, often contracting «o to «: as, irXevv, irXevvos. The Epic
varies according to the metre.
e. Most adjectives compared by -«v, -urros, have also forms, often more
common, in -repos, -t<xto$ • as, dXyeivds, pxiKpds, p.a<p6s, -drepos, -6tcltos •
Ppa5u$, Traxfc, raxfo, -tirepos, -ifraros • /SeXrepos and /SeXraros, iEsch. ;
<plXos, (piXraros, Cyr. 4. 3. 2, tpiXalrepos, i. 9. 29, (piXibrepos, Mem. 3. 11.
18 ; (piXlwp t. 351, (piXurros, Soph. Aj. 842. Other adjectives compared
in both ways are alaxpos, ^X^P^ S > olicrpos, /3a66s deep, ppaxte short, &c.
f. New poetic or late comparatives are made by changing -«v into
-<$T€pos or -T€pos • as, x e ' L P l3}V X €l P 0T€ P os > peioTepos, fiei^orepos • Xwtrepos.
C. Irregular Comparison.
262. Many adjectives (a) are defective or redundant in com-
parison ; and some comparatives and superlatives are formed
(b) from positives which are not in use, (c) from words which are
themselves comparatives or superlatives, or (d) from other parts
of speech. Some of these are usually referred to positives in
use, which have a similar signification. Thus,
(a) Only those words which express properties that may exist in dif-
ferent degrees, are compared ; except in a modified sense, for hyperbole, or
for comic effect : as, pMvos alone, p-ovibraros alonest, most emphatically
alone, Ar. PI. 182. See c and d.
(b) Several forms, not strictly synonymous, are commonly referred to
dyadds, good : thus, d-yaOos, dp-eiviav, dpicrros • (ieXTiwv, jSeXrio-ros • Kpeia-
cruv, KpdTKxros • X<jxx)v, Xqxrros • poet. <pepT€pos, (pepTaros and <pep«TTos (late
dyaddrraros, Diod. 16. 85). So, x €L P wv an ^ x € Lp L<TT0 * are referred to kcikos •
y<T<Twv, tfKKTTOs, to tccucos or pitcpos ' iXdaauv, eXdxt-VTos, to pucpos or
oXfyos. See 260 a, 261 a, b.
(c) Double Comparison. lo-yaTOS last, extreme, icrxo-Tibrepos (Otfre yap
rod iaxdrov iax aT uTepoi> ety &v Tl Aristl. Metaph. 10. 4), kaxo.riiiTaro%,
Hel. 2. 3. 49 ; iXaxurros least, eXax^Torepos less tlian (lie least, Ephes.
3. 8 ; trp&ros first, irpumaTos first of all, B. 228.
(d) Comparatives and Superlatives from other parts of speech. |3a<riXevs
king, ^aaiXevrepos more kingly, a greater king, I. 160, /SacnXeirraros the
greatest king, I. 69 ; kX^itttjs thief, KXeirrio-TaTos most adroit thief; kvwv
dog, Kijvrepos more clog-like, more impudent, O. 483, /ctWaros K. 503 ;
avr<$s himself, avrfrrepos Epich. 2 (1), avrSraTos (ipsissumus Plant. Trin.
4. 2) his very self, Ar. Plut. 83 ; dyX 1 or &YX 0V war, dyxorepos nearer,
Hdt. 7. 175, dyxwTos Soph. O. T. 919 ; &v« up, dvwrepos upper, dvuTaros
uppermost, Hdt. 2. 125 ; ^plpa quietly, ypefxiarepos more quiet, Cyr. 7. 5.
§264. OF ADVERBS. HISTORY. 183
63 ; irpotfp'yov of importance, irpovpyiaiTepos more important, PI. Gorg.
458 c, irpovpyiairaTos • «£ ex, out of, ^txcitos (104) extremus, uttermost;
trp6 prse, before, irporepos prior, former, irpQros (257 e) primus, first; virip
super, OVER, vireprepos superior, vTrepraros and vrraros supremus, highest ;
trmS (?) sub, sus-, below, vjrepos later, {xttcltos last.
II. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS.
263. Adverbs derived from adjectives are com-
monly compared by taking the neuter singular com-
parative, and the neuter plural superlative of these
adjectives ; but other adverbs by -repay and -rdrco :
o-o<]>cus (ft'. <ro<p6s, 257) wisely, <ro<purrepoj> more wisely, <ro<p&TaTa most
wisely ; Tax&>s (rax^s, 261 b) quickly, Bdaaov, Oolttov, r&xurra • &v« up,
dvwrtpw, ai>u)T&T(a • «k<xs afar, poet, and Ion. eKacrripw, eKaardru}.
a. Adverbs from which adjectives are formed are sometimes compared
in the first method : as, 6\{/t late, w put early, dxpiatrepov, -rara, &c. (257 d).
So fidXa very, p.d\\ov (143 a), p.d\i<TTa.
b. The adverbial Sup. has sometimes the neut. sing, form, chiefly when
denoting time or place : as, irpQyrov k<xX vararov, first and last, PI. Menex.
c. The adverbial termination -ws is sometimes given to the Comp. ;
and, rarely, to the Sup. : as, x ct ^ e7rwr< fc ws more severely, Th. 2. 50, p.ei.^6-
vus Th. 4. 19, ^vvTop.wTdTws most concisely, Soph. 0. C. 1579.
d. Some adverbs vary in their comparison : as, eyyvs near, iyyvripw,
iyyvrdru) • iyyvrepop, iyy&rara • less Att. Zyyiov, ZyyicrTa • &y\i or d/YX **
poet, and Ion., near, daaov A. 335 (143 c), Ayxtcrra iEsch. Sup. 1036,
daaoripu) (cf. 261 f) p. 572, dyxordru Hdt. 2. 24.
264. History of Comparison, a. So far as we can trace com-
parison in the Greek, it appears to have commenced with an emphatic
annexation of the old article, in its strong form tos, to the stem of the
positive, with a connecting vowel where needed : as, rf-a-ros, the nexo
one, i. e. the newest ; /u^cr-a-Tos, the middle one (257 e). So, in numer-
als, rpi-ros \6yos, the iVo. 3 book.
b. This form was then strengthened by doubling the root of the
article : -tt-os. And now two forms arose. The first t became <r :
-o-t-os (147) ; or a euphonic vowel was inserted : -to,t-os. Connectives
were also prefixed according to need or preference. Thus from <{>C\os, <pl-
Xkttos, and (piXraros or ^tXafrraTOS ■ among ordinals, x i Xioot<5s.
c. The comparative distinguishes or separates one person or thing from
another in respect to the possession of some quality ; and this separation
has been extensively expressed by a liquid prolongation of the adjective.
In Greek, both, v and p were used for this purpose, with a connecting
vowel, viz. o before v (cf. 114 c), and e before p. After the analogy of
the superlative, I (or i) was prefixed to -ov- ; and t, with the preceding
connective, to -«p- : <pi\C<av, <pL\repos, tpikaCrcpos. The two Greek forms
are mingled in the Lat. -ior ; and the r appears also in the Germ, and
Eng. : lougior, langer, longer. The Sanskrit has analogies to the forms
of both Greek and Lat. comparison. Its prevalent form is Comp. -taras
(-repos), Sup. -tamos (-ra-ros, -i-mus).
184 CONJUGATION. VOICE. §265.
CHAPTEE VII.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION.
265. Verbs are conjugated, in Greek, to mark
five distinctions : Voice, Tense, Mode, Number,
and Person. Of these distinctions, the first shows
how the action of a verb is related to its subject ;
the second, how it is related to time; and the
third, how it is related to the mind of the speaker,
or to some other action. The two remaining dis-
tinctions merely show the number and person of
the subject.
a. These distinctions are marked by prefixes, by affixes, and also,
to some extent, by changes in the stem. See 30 s, 49.
266. A. Voice. The Greek has three voices :
the Active, Middle, and Passive (30 a).
a. The Middle is so called as intermediate between the
Active and Passive, representing the subject of the verb not
only as acting, but also as, more or less directly, acted upon :
as, from \ova>, to wash, eXovo-dfirjv I washed myself, I bathed.
b. The middle and passive voices have a common form, ex-
cept in the Future and Aorist. In Etymology, this form is
usually spoken of simply as pn^^sive, or as middle. Even in the
Future and Aorist, the distinction in sense between the two
voices is not always preserved.
c. The reflexive sense of the middle voice often becomes so
indistinct, that this voice does not differ from the active in its
use. Hence, in many verbs, either wholly or in part, the mid-
dle voice takes the place of the active. This is particularly
frequent in the Future. When it occurs in the theme (172 c),
the verb is termed deponent (deponens, as if putting off its
proper sense to take that of another voice). E. g.
1.) Verbs, in which the theme has the active, and the Future has the
middle form : clko6co to hear, aKotio-oiAat. • fiaLvoj go, f3rjo~ou.ai • yiyvtbcrKco
know, yvivcrofiaL • ei/ud be, 'toojxai • /xavdavto learn, /xadrjaofiai.
2.) Deponent Verbs : aia06.vop.aL to perceive, f3o6\o{iai will, yiyvo/JLai
become, 5{x°f JLCU receive, dvvaixat. be able, -^dofiai rejoice, otofiat think.
d. A Deponent Verb is termed deponent middle, or deponent passive,
according as its Aorist has the middle or the passive form.
§ 267. tense. 185
267. B. Tense. The Greek has seven tenses :
the Present, Imperfect, Future, Aorist, Per-
fect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect.
a. Tenses may be classified in two ways : I. with respect to
the time which is spoken of; II. with respect to the relation
which the action bears to this time.
b. I. The time which is spoken of is either, 1. present,
2. future, or 3. past. The reference to time is most distinct
in the Indicative. In this mode, those tenses which refer to
present or future time are termed primary or chief tenses ;
and those which refer to past time, secondary or historical
tenses.
c. II. The action is related to the time, either, 1. as doing at
the time, 2. as done in the time, or 3. as complete at the time.
The tenses which denote the first of these relations are termed
definite ; the second, indefinite ; and the third, complete.
These constitute three great formations, or classes of forms,
in the Greek verb.
d. The Aorist (dopia-ros indefinite) represents an action
simply as performed. Its place is chiefly supplied in the Latin
by the Perfect. Thus Zypatya scripsi, / ivrote.
e. Of the Future Perfect (also called the Third Future, and
in old grammars the Paulo-post Future), the simple form is
found in only a few verbs ; and, with this exception, this tense
and those which are marked in 30 as wanting, viz. the indefinite
present and the definite future, are supplied by forms belong-
ing to other tenses, or by participles combined with auxiliary
verbs.
f. For the general formation of the Greek tenses, see 31.
In respect to the details of formation, they are naturally asso-
ciated in six systems : 1. the Present, or Definite System, in-
cluding the Pres. and Impf. j 2. the Future System, including
the Fut. Act. and Mid. ; 3. the Aorist System, including the
Aor. Act. and Mid. ; 4. the Perfect (or Perf. Act.) System, in-
cluding the Perf. and Plup. Act. ; 5. the Perfect Passive System,
including the Perf. and Plup. Pass, and Mid., and the Fut.
Perf. ; and 6. the Compound System, including the Aor. and
Fut. Pass., which are formed with an auxiliary (274). Of these
systems, the 1 st belongs to the great definite formation ;
the 2d, 3d, and 6th, to the indefinite ; and the 4th and 5th,
to the complete. For the so-called second systems, see 289 b.
186 CONJUGATION. TENSE. MODE. §268.
268. In some verbs the sense of the complete tenses, by a
natural transition, passes into that of other tenses ; and the
Perfect becomes, in signification, a Present ; the Pluperfect,
an Imperfect or Aorist ; and the Future Perfect, a common
Future. Thus, ton^u (45) to station, Perf. cornica (I have sta-
tioned myself) I stand, Plup. iarf)K€ip I stood, Fut. Perf. ion&i
/ shall stand ; p.ipvf)(TKa> to remind, Perf. Pass, fxkp.vnp.ai (I have
been reminded) I remember, Plup. ip.epvrjp.nv I remembered, Fut.
Perf. pepvfjaropai I shall remember.
a. In a few of these verbs, the Pres. is not used, and the Perf. is
regarded as the t/ieme. Such verbs, as having a preterite tense for the
theme, are termed treteritive. In like manner, those Perfect systems
in which the Perf. is used in the sense of the Pres. may be termed, for
convenience, pretcritivc systems ; and even a Perf. so used, a Prcteritive.
269. C. Mode. The Greek has six modes :
the Indicative, Subjunctive, Optative, Impera-
tive, Infinitive, and Participle.
a. For a table of these modes, classified according to the character
of the sentences which they form, see 30 c.
b. In the regular inflection of the Greek verb, the Pres. and Aor.
have all the modes ; but the Fut and the Fut. Perf. want the Sub-
junctive and Imperative ; and the Perf, for the most part, wants
the Subjunctive and Optative, except as supplied by compound forms,
and likewise, in the active voice, the Imperative.
c. The tenses of the Subjunctive and Optative are related to each
other as present and past, or as primary and secondary, tenses (267 b) ;
and some have therefore chosen to consider them as only different
tenses of a general conjunctive, or contingent mode, calling the Pres.
and Perf. Opt. the Imperfect and Pluperfect Conjunctive. With this
change, the number and general offices of the Greek modes are the
same with those of the Latin, and the correspondence between tno
Greek conjunctive and the English potential modes becomes more
obvious. In the Infinitive and Participle, the forms called Present
and Perfect belong also to the Imperfect and Pluperfect. Without
changing familiar names, the relations of the modes and tenses are
illustrated by the arrangement in 37. The Imperative, from its very
signification, cannot belong to a past tense.
d. The passive verbal adjectives in -tos and -reos (Lat. -tus and
-ndus), as closely akin to participles, are often included in tables of
inflection. In the form of the stem, they commonly agree with the
Aor. in -6nv, except as a preceding mute is changed before r (147) :
as, OpeTrreos, fr. rpi(pa> to nourish, Aor. i6pi(p6nv.
270. D. Number and Person. The numbers
and persons of verbs correspond to those of nouns
and pronouns (265).
§ 273. NUMBER AND PERSON. HISTORY. 187
a. The Imperative, from its signification, wants the first person;
the Infinitive, from its character as partaking of the nature of an ab-
stract noun, wants the distinctions of number and person altogether;
and the Participle, as partaking of the nature of an adjective, has the
distinctions of gender and case, instead of person.
b. The 1st Pers. sing, of the Pres. ind., is commonly regarded as
the theme of a verb (172 e) ; while, in adding its meaning, the Eng.
Inf. is more frequently used : as, Xv<a to loose (yet also, / loose, or
simply, loose). The stem is obtained by throwing off the affix of the
theme, or it may be obtained from any form of the verb, by throwing
off the prefix and affix, and allowing for euphonic changes. A verb is
conjugated by adding to the stem the prefixes and affixes in 35 and 36.
c. Verbs are divided, according to the stem-mark, or characteristic,
into Mute, Liquid, Double Consonant, and Pure Verbs ; and, ac-
cording to the affix in the theme, into Verbs in -o>, and Verbs in -/«.
For a full paradigm of regular conjugation, see Xu'w (37) ; for shorter
paradigms of the several classes of verbs, see 39 s.
d. In \6<v, the v is short in the Perf., the Plup., and the Compound
System ; but otherwise, long in the common language. In Homer, it is
commonly short in the Pres. and Impf.
271. E. Historic View. a. The following view is offered as one
which has much in its support, and serves to explain the general phe-
nomena of the Greek verb : (b) The distinction of person was at first only
twofold, |x being affixed for the 1st pers., and a lingual or sibilant for the
other two (246, 249) ; and there were only two numbers, sing, and plur.
(c) The 2d and 3d persons were then separated, the 2d taking in the sing,
the affix s (sometimes or o-0), and the 3d, t ; while they took new plur.
forms in -re and -vt, the old plural now remaining as dual (cf. 186 g).
d. A secondary tense was formed by prefixing € to denote past time,
while the original form now became a primary tense, expressing present
and future time (267 b, 277). (e) An objective voice was formed, chiefly by
adding ai or o, or by inserting (-T0- becoming -or0-, 147 ; and -f«v com-
monly becoming -p.€0a, 142) ; and the older form now became subjective,
or active (30, 285). (f) For euphony, a connecting vowel was used in at-
taching the affixes to stems ending with consonants, and this became
the common mode of inflection even when the stem ended with a vowel.
272. a. The Infinitive, which is substantive in its use and commonly
expresses either a direct or oftener an indirect object, took the objective
endings of nouns, -v or -i, or uniting these, -vat, which became in the
Pass. -(v-<r0-ai)<r9ai (cf. 271 e, 154 s). (b, c) The Participle, which is ad-
jective in its use, took the adjective endings -vrs in the Act., and -fievos
(or in an older form, afterwards used rather as a verbal adjective, -tos) in
the objective voice, (d) From the original mode (which now became In-
dicative), the Subjunctive was formed by using « and t] as connectives, to
express present contingence; and the Optative, by protracting a simple vowel
to a diphthong in i, to express past contingence. (e) An Imperative was
also formed, naturally preferring short forms in the 2 Pers., but prolong-
ing the forms of the 3 Pers., through the use of <a.
273. a. A few verbs formed only the old Primary and Secondary
Tenses ; (b, c) but, in most verbs, a Future and Aorist were formed by
adding <r to the stem, the older tenses now becoming Present and Im~
188 CONJUGATION. — HISTORY. §273.
•perfect. The Aor. was marked by the use of a as a connecting vowel,
while the Fut. took the connectives of the Pres. (d) In many verbs, a
new Pres. and Impf. were formed from a new stem ; and in some of these
verbs, the old Secondary Tense remained as an Aor. (2 Aor., 289 a) ; and
in a few, the old Primary (305 f ), as a Future, (e) Three reduplicated
tenses were formed to mark an action as completed : the Perfect, having, in
the Act., its Ind. in -a, its Inf. in -€vai, its Part, in -cos, and Pres. affixes
in the other modes ; the Pluperfect, having, in the Act., the connective
ea, cont. n,'by precession et (while, in both these tenses, the objective
affixes are nude) ; and the Future Perfect, having the affixes of the com-
mon Future.
274. a. A special Aor. and Fut. passive were formed by com-
pounding the past and future tenses of dpi, to be, with the old passive
participle in -tos (t becoming 0), or in some verbs with an early stem
(2 Aor. and Fut., 289). (b) The old objective Aor. and Fut. now became
middle, and the two voices were so far distinct in form.
275. Subsequent modifications were chiefly euphonic :
a. By a law which became so established in the language as not to
allow exception (160), and which strikingly distinguishes Greek from
Latin inflection, the endings p, t, and could not remain. They were,
therefore, either dropped, changed, prolonged, or both changed and pro-
longed : as, i\ver i\ve, \vofi (-oa, 160 f, 120) \voj, Xvol/j, Xvoi/jll, (par
<j>-qal (45 u, 143 b). See 296 s.
b. In some forms, cr fell out between two vowels, which were then
usually contracted (140) : as, 4\4y(e<ro, eo)ov, \{y(oi<ro)oio.
c. A new form of the 3 Pers. plur. secondary was formed by changing
-t of the sing, into -<rav (i. e. by changing t final into cr, 160), and then
affixing the plural sign v, instead of prefixing it, with the needed union-
vowel, which here, as after <r in the Aor., was a, 160, 273 b) : thus,
3 Sing. £<pa.T, PL £<t>a.<rav. Cf. the form in -erunt, in the Lat. Perf. (139).
d. In the Greek verb, there is a great tendency to lengthen a short
vowel before an affix beginning with a single consonant (it being already
long by position before those beginning with two consonants). It is
natural that this should appear especially in the shorter forms ; hence, in
the subjective more than in the objective, and in the sing, more than in
the plur. or dual : thus, 0a,tt 0a/u (prifil, 0as <p-rjs, <par (prjai (ft) ; but PI.
tpafxlv - £(p7}v, 2(pafjLev • <f>tx ftevos (45 u).
276. a. We observe three corresponding periods in declension
and in conjugation. The oldest inflection in both, that of Dec. 3, and of
the nude Pres. and Impf. (followed by the Perf. and Plup. pass.), was
without connecting vowels. The next in order, that of Dec. 2, and of the
euphonic Pres. and Impf. (followed by the Fut.), took the connecting
vowels o and e (Lat. o and u, e and i) ; while the latest form of simple in-
flection, that of Dec. 1, and of the Aor. and Perf. act. systems, made use
of a (Lat. a or i) as a connective.
b. In the Perf. and Plup. act., we find a series of euphonic devices,
to meet the alternate demands of pure and impure stems ; and, as the
result, four successive formations: 1. the primitive nude formation; 2.
the formation in -a, -eiv ; 3. the formation in -tea, -iceiv after a vowel ;
4. the formation in -Ka, -k&.v after a consonant (after a labial or palatal
mute, softened to -d, -elv, 149). The last formation nowhere appear;; in.
Horn., and the third only in a few words. See 289, 317 s.
§278. PREFIXES OP CONJUGATION. — AUGMENT. 189
CHAPTER VIII.
PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION.
277. The Greek verb has two prefixes : the
Augment and the Eeduplication (32).
I. The Augment (augmentum, increase) pre-
fixes e- in the secondary tenses of the Indica-
tive, to denote past time (271 d).
a. If the verb begins with a consonant, the e- constitutes a
distinct syllable, and the augment is termed syllabic : as,
Avo> to loose, yvcopiCa recognize, piVra> throw ; Impf. ? A£oi>, eyva-
pi&v, eppiiTTOv (14G) ; Aor. eXikra, eyi/coptcra, eppiyjta.
b. If the verb begins with a vowel, the e- unites with it, and
the augment is termed temporal.
c. The syllabic augment is so named, because it increases the number
of syllables ; the temporal (temporalis, from tempus, time), because it in-
creases the time, or quantity, of an initial short vowel. For the syllabic
augment before a vowel, see 279 b. The breathing of an initial vowel re-
mains the same after the augment.
278. Rules for the Temporal Augment (7). a. The
prefix e- unites with a to form rj, and with the other vowels, if
short, to form the cognate long vowels : as,
'aSuoEcu to injure, 'dOXico contend, cXir^a) hope, 'ikctcvw supplicate, opGeco
erect, 'v(3pii;a> insult ; Impf. (4a)1\Sticow, tfdXovv, (ee)i\\Tri{ou, (eL)'iK€Tevop t
(eo)&pdovv, (<E'v)"vppi£ov ■ Aor. rjdinricra, ijdXrjaa, ifKiriaa, 'iK^revaa, &c.
b. In like manner, the e- unites with the prepositive of the
diphthong at, and also of av and ot not followed by a vowel in
the stem : as,
aiTtco to ask, av£dva> increase, oIkti£g> pity, ol'ojxai think ; Impf. (eat)
•§tovv (109), nv^avov, Qkti^ov, qj/atjv • Aor. rJTrjcra, Tju^cra, tyKTiaa, (xsrjdrjv.
c. In other cases, the e- is absorbed by the initial vowel or
diphthong, without producing any change : as,
Tjveoficu to lead, c!>cj>e\t'co profit, cI'ko) yield, cuovi£oficu augur, oirat,(a
wound; Impf. {er))v{yoi>ixnv, ibcptXovv, eluov, oluvi^ofivv, ovra^ov • Aor. rjyrj-
ad/X7]v, uicptX-qaa, el£a, oiwvLO-a/iwv, ovraaa.
d. But in verbs beginning with cv, a few beginning with 01, €iKd£<i> to
conjecture, and avalva to dry, usage is variable : as, eiKafov and in Att.
also rjnafav, av&vdnv and rjvdvdnv ■ €i5\op.ai pray, ev^afiTjv and -qv^aixriv •
olorpdw goad, otarp^aa or toarp-qaa Eur. Bac. 32. Et is also changed in
-flew and rjdeiv (45 m, 46 a).
190 PREFIXES. AUGMENT. REDUPLICATION. §279.
279. a. The verbs fiovXopai to will, dvvapat to be able, and
fxeWa to purpose, sometimes add the temporal to the syllabic
augment, particularly in the later Attic : as,
ij3ov\6fM7)P and 7j/3ov\6p,7}v, eSvvr/drjv and 7}8vv^0tjv, fyteXXcw and tf/xeWov.
Like forms are found from airoXaijcj enjoy, and irapapofieu transgress.
b. In a few verbs beginning with a vowel, the e- constitutes
a distinct syllable, with, sometimes, a double augment : as,
fryvufu to break, 2ai;a • dvoi-yco to open, aviipyov (278 b), avi^a. Add
dXto-Kojiai to be captured, avSdvco (Ion. and poet. ) please, 6pd« see, ovp&a
mingo, wGeco push, wvc'op.ai buy, and some poetic, chiefly Epic, forms : as,
icpvoxoei A. 3.
c. In a few verbs beginning with e, the usual contraction of
fe into ei takes place (121) : as,
€aco to permit, elW, elacra. Add kQCtfi) to accustom, IXicrcrco roll, ?Xkg>
draw, £irw be occupied toith, 4p"yd£op.ai work, 2pira> and epinjfa serpo, creep,
co-rido) entertain, %\<o have ; the Aorists elXov took, elaa (Ion. and poet.)
set, et/xev, elp-qv, eWr)v (45 k, n) ; and the Plup. eicrTrfKeiP fr. Perf. earnm
(45 f ) stand. So ei from it (119) in the Aor. el8ov, el86p,r}P (s. 18-, 50), I saw.
d. An initial e followed by o unites with this vowel, instead of uniting
with the augment : as, 4opTd£<i> to celebrate a feast, (e€o)enpTafov. So, in
the Plup., icpicecv, and the poet. iu>\iren>, eupyeiv, fr. Perf. coiko, seem,
&>\ira hope, ?op-ya have wrought.
e. The forms in b, c, and d are to be referred, in part at least, to an
original digamma or <r (140) : as, iFafav 2a%av y. 298, iv. 2. 20 ; (^Fa)
kavSave Hdt. 9. 5 ; e<repirov (ee)&pirov Soph. 0. C. 147, (e<Tea)da-T7)K€iv
(cf. 141). In a very few cases, a form resembling the augmented is found
out of the Indicative : as, Part. Kar-edf as Lys. 100. 5.
f. An initial a, chiefly when followed by a vowel, remains in the aug-
mented tenses of a very few verbs, mostly poetic : as, atu to hear, iLXov
(yet tirr)C<x€ Hdt. 9. 93). See avahlaKb) (50). So i\\7]via6r)v (that the
word "EXXrjv may not be disguised), Th. 2. 68, and in poetry €^6/j.tjv, icaOe-
£6p,7)v, iEsch. Eum. 3, Pr. 229. In these words e is long by position.
280. II. The Eeduplication" (reduplico, to re-
double) doubles the initial letter of the complete
tenses in all the modes, to denote completed action.
a. Rule. If the verb begins with a single consonant, or with
a mute and liquid (except yv), the initial consonant is repeated,
with the insertion of c ; but otherwise, the reduplication has
the same form with the augment. In the Pluperfect, the
augment is prefixed to the reduplication, except when this has
the same form with the augment. Thus,
\vti> to loose, Perf. XeXi/xu, Plup. £\4\vKeiv • •ypd^c* write, yty pa<pa,
iyeypdfaiv • (jnXt'co love, iretyik-qKa (159 a), €7re<pi\r]Keiv • pa\|/o>8la> prate,
ippa^/u)8r]Ka (159 e), ippa\f/u)Sr)Keiv • -yva>pii;io (277 a), eyvibptKa, eyvwp'meiv •■
X,y\K6(a emulate, e^Aw/ca ■ \j/€vSop.ai lie, £iJ/evo-p.ai • d8iK€a> (278 a), rjSiKrjKa,
rjSiKTjKeiv • av£dva> (278 b), vS^/iai. • ij-ycofiai (278 c), rfyvfj-ai • opdco (279 b),
iuipdKa, eupdi<eu> • ep\d£op.ai (279 c), etpyacrpLai • efra, eUeiv (45 k).
§ 282. IN COMPOUND VERBS. 191
b. In a few cases, the first of two other consonants is repeated, espe-
cially if there has been syncope : as, ireTdvvvp.i to spread (s. irera-, irra-)
irtTTTafAcu • p.ip.vr)<ri<u remind, p.e"p.v-qu.ai • Krdop.ai acquire, k£ktt)/jui, i. 7. 3,
but also &cT77£icu (properly Ion., as HJt. 2. 42, yet PI. Prot. 340 d, e).
c. Verbs beginning with (3X, yX } and a few others vary : as, (3Xa<TTdvu
to bud, /3e[3\dcrTr]Ka and e(3\a<TT7]Ka • yXixpu carve, ye"yXvp.uut and &yXvp.p.ai.
For ioiKa, foX-ira, 'iopya, cf. 279 b, d ; and for the Pret. oUa know, 278 d.
281. a. In five verbs beginning with a liquid, «- or tl-
commonly takes the place of the regular reduplication, through
euphonic change :
Xa-yxavw to obtain by lot, etXrjxa. and XtXoyxa, e?Xr)yp.ai ■ Xa|xf3dva> take,
etX-q^a, etXr};xp.ai and Xe'Xrjp.p.ai. • Xeyot collect, etXoxa, etXeyp.ai and XiXe-
yp.at • p.eipop.ai share, etp.app.ai, elp.dpp.rjv • s. pc- say, elprjKa, etprjpxn.
b. Some of these forms seem to have arisen from an omitted consonant
(the rough breathing in eip.app.ai, as in 'iarrjica, pointing to an original <r ;
cf. 141, 279 e). They were sometimes imitated by late writers in the Aor.
Pass.: irapeiXrj<pQrj<jav Dion. H. 168. 3.
c. Some verbs which begin with a, e, or o, followed by a sin-
gle consonant, prefix to the usual reduplication the two first
letters of the root : as, aXeicpa to anoint, dXr)X«pa, dXrjXicpeiv, dXfj-
Xi/x/xat • eXavvco drive, iXrjXaica, eXrjXaiceLv • opuacrco dig, 6poapv\a.
d. This prefix is termed by grammarians, though not very appropri-
ately (87 b), the Attic Reduplication. It seldom receives an augment in
the Plup. (c), except in the verb aKovw to hear : dnrjKoa, commonly 17/07-
Koeiv (Hdt. dicrjKoeiv) ; so ibp&pvKTo vii. 8. 14. This reduplication prefers
a short vowel in the penult : as, dXf)Xi<pa, though f/Xeicpa • eXrjXvda, Pf. of
e"pXop.ai (50). In eyprjyopa (eyeipo wake), v. 7. 10, the second consonant is
also prefixed ; and in the Ep. ip.urjp.vKe (r)p.uu) bow) X. 491, € lengthened
by an inserted, consonant is used, instead of repeating t|.
282. III. Prefixes in Composition. 1. Verbs compounded
with a preposition, receive the augment and reduplication after
the preposition : thus, 7rpoo-ypu(£a) to ascribe, irpoa'eypacpov, irpoaye-
ypatpa • e£cXavva> drive out, i^r)Xavvov, e^eXrjXaica.
a. Before the prefix €-, prepositions ending in a consonant which is
changed in the theme, resume that consonant ; and those ending in a
vowel, except irtpC and irpo, regularly suffer elision (128). The final vowel
of irpo often unites with the €- by crasis (126 7). Thus, €ji/3dXXw to throw
in (150), euefiaXXov cK/SdXXw throw met (165), eZifiaXXov • airo/JdXXw throw
away, dire^aXXov • irepi/SdXXw throw around, wepi^aXXov • irpo/3dX\a>
throw before, rrpoefiaXXov and rrpovfiaXXov.
b. A few verbs receive their prefixes before the preposition ; a few re-
ceive them both before and after ; and a few are variable : as, €iritrrap.at
to understand, r)rriaTdp.rjv • hoy\i<a trouble, rjv&xXovv, r)vd)xXrjKa • KaQivBaa
sleep, inddevdov, KaOrjvdov, and naBevdov (278 d). These exceptions to the
rule are chiefly in those compounds in which the simple verb is not in
common use, so that the composition is lost sight of.
c. Some derivative verbs, resembling compounds in their form, follow
the same analogy : as, SicutcUo to regulate (from dlaira mode of life), Sirj-
rr]<ra and iSirjrrjaa, dedtrjTrjKa • eKKX^crid^w Iwld an assembly (eKuXrjcria),
e^eKXryrla^ov, rjKicXrjcriafov, and eKKXrjaia^ov (e^eKKXrjaiacav V. 1. Th. 8. 93) ;
en-to-Tcmw command (emtXTdTrjs), iireardTei. ii. 3. 11.
192 PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. DIALECTIC USE. §283.
283. 2. Verbs in which 6W-, ill, precedes a vowel which
the augment changes (§ 278), commonly receive their prefixes
after this particle : as, bva-apeareco to be displeased, dvarjpevTovv.
So, sometimes, with ev, well: evepyerea) benefit, evepyerovv and
evrjpyerovv.
3. Other verbs in which there is composition, receive the
augment and reduplication at the beginning : as, Xoyonoieco to
fable, iXoyoTTolovv • Suotuycgj fare ill, edvarvx^ca, deSuorrv^Ka •
evru^cco prosper, evrv^ovv or tjvtvxovv (278 d).
a. With, however, doubtful or rare variations ; as in some compounds
of troiiu : &§OTreTroir}ix£v7i (v. 1. wdoironj/Jifrr)) v. 3. 1.
DIALECTIC USE.
284. a. It was long before the use of the augment as the sign of
past time became fully established in the Greek. In the old poets it
appears as a kind of optional sign, which might be used or omitted at
pleasure : thus, Zd-qKev, Orjue, A. 2, 55 ; u>s Zcparo, &s <pdro, A. 33, 188 ;
£/3<x\e, pd\e, A. 473, 4S0 ; opupec, wpwpei, S. 493, 498. Horn, regularly
omits it with the dual in -ttjv. The omission of the reduplication is rare
in Horn., chiefly found in some preteritive forms : as, "Zvwya command,
a. 269 (so retained in Hdt. and Att. poets), ^a/xai wear, w. 250, tyxarai
II. 481. But in the Att. redupl., he does not always lengthen the second
vowel : as, dXaXrjpicu ^. 74, a\a\6nT7)/j.ai K. 94.
b. This license continued in Ionic prose in respect to the temporal aug-
ment, and the augment of the Plup., and was even extended to the re-
duplication when it had the same form with the temporal augment : as,
&yov, fjyov, Hdt. 1. 70, 3. 47 ; dedoKro Id. 5. 96 ; acpdr), d^aro, dixjj.lvr]<s,
ipydfrvro, Karipyaaro, Kareipyaa-fi^vov Id. 1. 19, 86, 66, 123. So, more
rarely, in respect to the syllabic augment, and the reduplication having the
same form : as, v6ee or evoee Hdt. 1. 155 ; TrapeanevadaTO, irapaaKevddaro
Id. 7. 218, 219 ; and even, for euphony's sake, eiraXi.XX6yriTo Id. 1. 118.
c. In respect to the augment of tlie Pluperfect, and of the impersonal
eXpfjv, this freedom remained even in Attic prose : as, ^t) rereXevTiriKei,
dirodedpaicei, vi. 4. 11, 13, 5ta/3e/3?7Ke4 vii. 3. 20 (this omission of the aug-
ment occurs chiefly after a vowel) ; ixpw Cyr. 8. 1. 1, oftener XPW Rep.
A. 3. 6. Of the poets, the lyric approached the nearest to the freedom of
the old Epic, while the dramatic, in the iambic trimeter, were confined
the most closely to the usage of Attic prose.
d. For such forms as ipefcp B. 274, 285ecaev A. 33, deidoiKa A. 555, see
171, 134 a. For Perf. etpxu r. 72, 'ddvKibs, K. 98, 'dpy/xtpos £ 2, cf. 279 c,f.
For pepviroofiiva, &c, see 159 e. On the other hand, we find, after the
analogy of verbs beginning with p, ^fiope A. 278, £<j<rv\xai N. 79.
e. In the Epic language, the 2 Aor. act. and mid. often receives the
reduplication, which remains through all the modes, while the Ind. ad-
mits the augment in addition (especially in case of the Att. redupl. ) : as,
8i5ae 9. 448, K€ K dfico A. 168, KeKtdwai {. 303, XeXdxoxn H. 80, XeXap£a9ai
5. 388 ; with the augment sometimes added, k^kXcto A. 508, ix^KXero Z.
66, irtcppade g. 500, eirtypaSov K. 127, irtcpve N. 363, Zirecpve A. 397 ;
Att. Redupl. ijya.yev A. 179, rrydyero X. 116, dpapov M. 105, ijpape A.
110, wpope B. 146. These are reduplicated at the end oi the stem : fyi-
irair-ov from s. ivnr-, B. 245, and^/wKa/c-cw from ipvn-, E. 321.
§ 287. AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. 193
f. With some of these 2 Aor. forms, reduplicated Futures are associat-
ed : as, Kexaddov A. 334, Kenabrjcrei <p. 153 ; ireiriOoifjiev A. 100, ireiriOoiTO
K. 204, ireTriBfao) X. 223 ; v€<pidoifMr)v t. 277, ve<pi8ri<r€Tai O. 215.
g. Some of these reduplicated forms occur in Attic poetry : as, dpapev
Soph. El. 147, TeToprpu) Ar. Pax 381. "Ryayov, and, less frequent, rjya-
y6jj.T]v remained even in Attic prose : as, i. 3. 17, Eq. 4. 1.
CHAPTEE IX.
AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION.
I. CLASSIFICATION AND ANALYSIS.
285. The Affixes of the Greek verb may be
divided into two great classes (35 s) :
I. The Subjective, belonging to all the tenses
of the active voice, and to the Aorist passive.
n. The Objective, belonging to all the tenses
of the middle voice, and to the Future passive.
a. The affixes of the Aor. pass, are subjective, as derived from the Impf.
of the verb el/d, to be ; and those of the Fut. pass, are objective, as de-
rived from the Fut. of this verb (274). Of the affixes which are not thus
derived, the subjective represent the subject of the verb as the doer of the
action, and the objective, as, more or less directly, its object (30 a).
286. The affixes of the verb may likewise be
divided into the following orders :
1. The Primary, belonging to the primary tenses of the In-
dicative mode, and to all the tenses of the Subjunctive.
2. The Secondary, belonging to the secondary tenses of the
Indicative, and to all the tenses of the Optative (267 b, 269 c).
3. The Imperative, belonging to the Imperative mode.
4. The Infinitive, belonging to the Infinitive mode
\ 5. The Participial, belonging to the Participle.
287. These affixes may be resolved into the
following elements : A. Tense-Signs, B. Con-
necting Vowels, and C. Flexible Endings.
a. See 32. When there is no danger of mistake, these elements may
he simply called signs, connectives, and flexives or endings.
COMP. GR. 9 M
194 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. TENSE-SIGNS. §288.
A. Tense-Signs (32 g).
288. The tense-signs are letters or syllables
which are added to the stem in particular tenses,
and to which the flexible endings are appended,
either immediately or with connecting vowels.
In the Fut. and Aor., act and mid., and in the Fut. Per/.,
the tense-sign is -a- ; in the Per/, and Plup. act, it is -a- ; in
the Aor. pass., it is -0c- ; in the Fut pass., it is -0rj<r-; in the
other tenses, it is wanting :
Xtf-cr-w, i\v-<x-dfiTjv, XeXi/-<r-o / u.cu • \iXv-K-a, eXeXtf-K-ew • \v-6e-lr}v • \v~
Oria-Ojxai • X6-w, iXv-6nr)v, X^Xv-fiai, iXeXO-firjv (37).
a. The sign -0c-, before a vowel, is contracted with it ; other-
wise, except before it, it becomes -Br]- (275 d) : \v{0c a>)0£>,
\v{0c-ir)v)0cir)v • \v-0c-vrcov, \v(0c-vts)0cis ' c\v-0r)-v, Xv 0t)-ti.
289. The letters k and 0, of the tense-signs, are sometimes
omitted. Tenses wanting these letters are termed second ; and,
in distinction, tenses which have them, though commonly later
forms, are termed first : as, 1 Perf. TrcnciKa, 2 Perf. niiTot0a •
1 Plup. circtrcUciv, 2 Plup. circiroi0cw (39); l'Aor. pass. r)yye\0r)v,
2 Aor. pass. rjyycXrjv • 1 Fut. pass. dyyc\0r)<rofiai, 2 Fut. pass.
iyycXfaoiuu (40). See § 274, 276 b.
a. The tense in the active and middle voices, which is termed the Sec-
ond Aorist, is simply an old Present System retained (except the Pres.
ind.) in an aorist sense, after the formation of a new Present System from
a later form of the stem (273 d) : thus, HXtirov and eXurdfjLTjv (38) are formed
from the old stem Xtir-, in precisely the same way as ZXenrov and eXcnrbfj.y)v
from the new stem Xetir-.
b. We have thus, in the three voices, six additional tense-forms, con-
stituting three systems : viz. (distinguishing the systems in the same way
as their tenses), the Second Aorist System, the Second Perfect
System, and the Second Compound System.
c. The regular or first tenses will be usually spoken of, where no dis-
tinction is required, simply as the Aorist, the Perfect, &c. ; and their sys-
tems, as the Aorist System, the Perfect System, &c.
d. In each system, the form first presented in the tables and rules of
inflection is regarded as the leading form : and whatever appears in this
form of any verb in respect to the stem,, or the tense-sign, or the union of
the affix with the stem, will be understood as belonging also to the other
forms of the system, if nothing appears to the contrary.
e. In each tense, the stem, with the tense-sign and reduplication, if
these are present, is termed the base of the tense, or the tense-stem ; as in
the Pres. of X6<o, Xv- ; in the Fut., Xvcr- ; in the Perf. act., X«Xvk-.
f. The regular additions which are made to the base in the Fut. and
Fut. Perf. throughout, and in the Subjunctive of every tense, are the
same as in the Pres. : as, Xtf-w Xva-oi, Xtf-ets X«5<r-eis • Xtf-o/xcu Xticr-o/jiai
Xi^cr-o/tcu XcXOa-o/xat • Subj. XjJ-w Xtfcr-w XeXtiic-ia.
§ 293. CONNECTING VOWELS. 195
B. Connecting Vowels (32 h).
290- The connecting vowels serve to unite the
flexible endings with the stem or tense-sign, and
assist in marking the distinctions of mode and
tense.
a. The Aor., Per/., and Plup. pass, have no connecting vowel in the
Ind., Imv., Inf., and Part. With this exception, the regular formation
is according to the following rules. But wherever these admit eitJter an
A vowel or another vowel, it will be understood that the A vowel belongs
to the Aorist (273 b, c), and the other vowel to the remaining tenses ; and
that, wherever they admit cither an or an E vowel, the vowel is used
before a liquid, and the E vowel before other letters (114 c).
b. The connective is regularly contracted with an a, €, or o preceding ;
and also with the fiexives -i, -cu, and -o, except in the Optative.
291. 1. In the Indicative, the connective is -a- in the Aor.
and Perf., -ei- in the Plup., and -o- or -e- in the other tenses :
Aor. e\v<r-a-fiev, iXva-d-fxiju • Pf. \e\vK-a-T€ • Plup. eXeXv* «-t» • Pr.
Xu-o/iei/, Xv-e-Tf • Impf. e\v-o-v, e\v e-s • Fut. Xvo-o /uai, Xvo-e-Ttu.
a. In the sing, of the Pres. and Fut. act., the connectives, by simple
protraction or the absorption of the fiexives, became -co- and -«i- : \6(o-n,
o-a)<o, \6<tw, Xtf(e-s)€is, \v<reis, Xtf(e-r, e-e)«i, Xtfcrei. See 275 a, d, 160 f.
b. In the 3 Sing, of the Aor. and Perf. act., -€- takes the place of -a- ;
and in the 3 Piur. of the Plup., it commonly takes the place of -€i- :
dXva-e, \4\vK-e • XeXtiK-e-crav or \e\vK-ei-aav.
c. The original connective of the Plup. was -ea-, which remained in the
Ion. (273 e) : as, rjdea S. 71, iyeydvee Hdt. 1. 11. An early contraction
into -r\- is especially old Att., but also occurs in' the Ep. and Dor. : as,
1 Sing, rjdrj Soph. Ant. 18 ; 2 S. 77577s lb. 447 ; 3 S. ydrj A. 70. By pre-
cession (114 s) -r\- passed into -«,-, which became the common connective,
and in the 3 Sing, is already found in Horn. (fir. -€€) : as, ear-qKei. 2. 557.
292. 2. The Subjunctive takes the connectives of the
Pres. ind., lengthening -o- to -a>- and -e- to -77- (§ 272 d ) : Ind.
and Subj. Xu-o), Xvtr-a) • Xv-« s Xv-tj-s, Xu-« Xv-77, kv-ojuv Xv-tt-pc*,
Xu c-re \vt)-T€, Xv^o-vaijovai Xv^ca-vaijaxri • Xvcr-e-rai Xixr-rjTai.
293. 3. The Optative has, for its connective, t (the general
sign of the mode, 272 d), either alone or with other vowels.
Rule. If the tense has no connecting vowel in the Ind., and
its base ends in a, e , or o, then the Opt. has -trj- in the subjective
forms, and simply -1- in the objective ; in other cases, it has -at-
or -01- : XvQe-irjv (37) : i<rrair]-v, Itrra-l-ftrjv, ride irj-v, ride i-fir)v, 81-
bo-irj-v, dido i-firjv (45) ; Xvo*-<u-/xt, \v(r-ai-[xr)v • Xv-01 /it, Xv-oi-fxrjv, Xvcr-
oi-/zi, XcXva-oi-firjv • 1-01-/U, deiKvv ot-/u, deiKw ol-firjv (45 a, C, m).
a. In Optatives in -trjv, the rj is often omitted in the plural and
dual, especially in the 3 Plur., where the longer form is much less
used in classic Greek : torrat/uei/, ndelre, diboiev, Urrcurov (45) ; XvdeUp
(37) ; but irapaboirjo-au ii. 1. 10, o-aOciijaav Cyr. 8. 1. 2.
196 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. CONNECTIVES. .§293.
b. In contract active forms, the connective -01- often assumes rj in
the Pres., and sometimes in the Fut. : q)iXe-oi-[xi, contr. (fiiXoi-fxi or
<j>iKoir}-v (42) ; (fiavoifii or cfravoirjp (40).
c. The form of the Opt. in -oitjv, for -oiju, is called the Attic Optative,
as especially used by Att. writers, though not confined to them : ivupJrrj
Hdt. 1. 89, oiKolyTe Theoc. 12. 28. It is most employed in the sing.,
where it is the common form in contracts in -€« and -da>, and still more in
those in -do). In the 3 Plur. it is very rare. It is also found in the 2 Perf.,
as ire7roi0oL7) (38) Ar. Ach. 940, and in the 2 Aor. of the simple verb ^x w
to have, though its compounds have commonly the form in -oiju ■ axoir]
Cyr. 7. 1. 36, Kardcrxois Mem. 3. 11. 11. So ioi-qv (45 m).
d. The Aor. opt. act. has, in the 2 and 3 Sing, and the 3 Plural, a
second and far more common form, in which the connective is that
of the Ind. with « prefixed : as, Xvar-eia-s, Xva-eie, Xva-eia-v.
e. This form, like many other remains of old usage, was termed by
grammarians JEolic. It was little used in the Dor. It greatly prevailed
in the Att. and Ion., but not exclusively : fielveias Y. 52, xpawete Hdt. 3.
30, dptetav Th. 6. 11 ; X<f£ai ^Esch. Ag. 170, arrod^aiep Hdt. 8. 35.
f. The Opt. avoided the immediate attachment of the short flexives -v
and -vt to t, and in various ways. See above, and 296, 300.
294. 4. In the Imperative, the connective is -a-, -e-, or -o-;
in the Infinitive, it is -a- or -e- ; in the Participle, it is -a- or
-o- : \v<r-d -to), Xvad-adcop, Xv-e-rco, Xv-c-aOe, Xv-o-vrcov • Xva-a-aOai,
\iia--a-i, Xv e <r6ai, XcXvK-e-vai • Xva-dfievos, Xvcr-6 /xepos, Xv(o-vts)ow.
a. In the Imv., -a- passes into the kindred -o- before the nexive -v
(114 b, c, 297 c) : XOs(a0, av)ov.
b. In the Inf. of the Pres. and Fut. act, -€- is lengthened to -€i-
(275 d) : Xu'(€-p)«,-v, Xva-ei-v.
C. Flexible Endings.
295. The flexible endings (flexibilis, changeable)
are the chief instruments of conjugation, marking
by their changes the distinctions of person, number,
voice, and, in part, of tense and mode.
a. In the finite modes they are essentially pronouns, affixed instead of
being, as in English, prefixed (271 b). They are exhibited in 32 i.
b. Where the secondary endings differ from the primary, they are usu-
ally shorter, on account of the augment.
296. 1 Sing. : -/* (pi, v, *) ; -fiai, -pnv. The flexive -p,
after -a- connective, and, in primary forms, after -o- and -a>- con-
nective, is wanting ; after -oi- and -at-, and in the nude Present
(303 a), it becomes -fu ; in other cases, it becomes v (275 a) :
2\va-a, \4\vK-a, rj8-ea ydr) (46 a) ; Ai5(o-/*)w, Xi5(w-/a)« ■ Xi*-oi-/a, \tia-ai-
fu (293 f), &rri7-/u (45) ; t\v-o-p, iXeXvK-ei-v (273 e), i\vd v -v, Xvddy-p -
<pi\oiT}-v, <pa.voli\-v (293 b) ; tarry, iarai-qv (45). Cf. Lat. lu(o-m)o 3 lui.
§ 299. FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. 197
a. In those cases in which the flexive -|i is usually said to be wanting,
it may still be regarded as virtually present in a vowel into which it has
been changed or absorbed ; and so, in some cases, the flexive -t of the
3 Pers. (n having passed into a, and t into €, 160 f, 291 a).
297. 2 Sing. : -a (a-6a), -0 (0i, s, e, v, *) ; -aai, -o-o. a. For
-s, a stronger form was -a6a (271 c ; cf. Lat. -sti and Eng. -st).
b. This was retained as the common form in 9}<r0a, ZcpTjada (45 1, u), and
olcrda (46 a) ; and was good Attic in rjdeiada, rjdrjo-da (46 a), and rjeto-da
(45 m). Other examples are furnished by the poets (particularly in the
Subj., by Horn.) : as, idiX-QfiOa A. 554, civ-gada T. 250 ; pd\our6a O. 571,
KXaioiada 11 619 ; Tid-q<rda\. 404, didoiada T. 270 ; ^xetcrfla, <pl\ei<rda, Sap.
c. The Imv. flexive -0 is dropped after -e- connective ; with
-a- connective, it becomes -ov ; after a shoi^t vowel in the stem, it
becomes -s in the 2 Aor., but in the Pres. unites as c with the .
preceding vowel ; in other cases, it becomes -0i (275 a, 160 f) :
\v(e-0)t (cf. Lat. hie) ; \va(a-6)ov (294 a ; cf. 169 c) ; Ots, 86s, H (45 h) ;
t<TT(a-d, a-e, 120 h)r|, r/0(e-e)et, SL8(o-e)ov, 8eiKv(v-e)v (45 a) j Tpip-q-di (38),
\v6tj-ti (159 c) ; yvQdi, Spade (45 h) ; tadi, 8£8idi (46).
d. $r}/d and efyu form the Pres. imv. in -0i : <padi, ' X Qi. The poets
and late writers sometimes give this form to yet other Presents in -pi ;
and they sometimes shorten ^rjdi and ffr-rjdi, in composition, to /3a and or a :
6ppv0i rouse, Z. 363, ZXadi be gracious ; Kard^a descend, Ar. Ran. 35.
e. In the flexive s -o-ai and -o-o, o- is dropped between two vow-
els, except in the Per/, and Plup. pass., and sometimes the nude
Pres. and Impf. (275 b) : as,
\6(e-acu, e-cu)r\ or Xifci (123 b) ; \6(e-o)ov, i\ti(e-o)ov, <?\i5<r(ct-o)a> (120 s) ;
\6-aoL-o, Xda-ac-o • \t\v-crai, \4\v-(ro, £\4\v-ao ■ tara-aai, 'Lara-ao and
i'o-T(a-o)ft), ride-aai and ri0(e-ai)T), 8i8o-<ro and 5L8(o-o)ov, 8(o-o)ov (45 c, d, i).
f. The contraction of -ecu into -€i is a special Attic form, which was
much used by pure writers, especially the more colloquial, and which,
after yielding in other words to the common contraction into -g, remained
in f3ov\ci, oi'ct, and S\J/€i, as the only good Attic.
g. The use of -cu for -a-o in the Aor. imv. seems to be an irregular con-
traction with precession (118 b) : \va(a-<ro, a-o)ax.
. h. In verbs in -jii, -o-ai remained more frequently than -o-o. Exceptional
cases occur, both of the retention and omission of the a-, esp. in the poets.
298. 3 Sing. : -r (o-t, *) -t© j -rat, -to, -o~0<o. The flexive -r
becomes -eri in the nude Pres., but elsewhere is omitted : as,
'((TT{-q-T)r\a-\., tort], SLSuai, iSLSu (45 a, b) ; £\i/(e-7-)e f \i$(e-T, e-e)ei, 2\v<re.
See 275 a, 296 a.
a. In ia-ri (45 1), -n is naturally preferred to -o-t after ar.
299. 1 and 2 Plur., with the Dual ; -^v, -^0a (peaOu) ;
-re, -o-0e ; -top, -o-0ov \ -ttjv, -o~0t)v ; -tcov, -ct0<dv. a. The 1 Pers. is
the same hi the plur. and dual, having, for its subjective ending,
-fiev, and for its objective, -p.e0a (271e ; poet, -/xeo-0a) : Xvo/xev,
>iv6-fi€0a or, for the sake of the metre, \v6fieo-0a.
b. The 1 Dual primary had a special form in -peOov, of which only three
classical examples have been found, all in poetry before a vowel : xeptdJ)-
Hedov *. 485, XeXelfifiedov Soph. El. 950, 6p/x(Jbfiedov Id. Ph. 1079.
198 CONJUGATION. FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. §299.
c. The 2 Plur. always ends in c The 2 Dual is obtained
by changing this vowel into -ov ; and the 3 Dual, by changing
it into -ov in the primary inflection, into -rjv in the secondary,
and into -<ov in the imperative : 2 PI. Xue-re, iXve-re • 2 Du. Xue-
tov, eXve-rov • 3 Du. Xverov, iXverrjv, Xvercov.
d. The 2 and 3 Dual secondary were not always distinct in form : as,
in Horn. 3 Pers. irevxerov N. 346, duip-qaaeaeov N. 301 ; in Attic, 2 Pers.
eixer-qv Soph. 0. T. 1511, ij\\a^T7]v Eur. Ale, ebptT-qv, iireb-qpL-qadr-qv PI.
300. 3 PLUR. : -vr (vai, v, €V, aav), -vtcov or -raxrau J -vrai,
-vto, -(rOcov or -adaxrav. a. The flexive -vr, in the primary tenses,
becomes -vai. In the secondary, after -o- or -a- connective, it be-
comes -»/ ; after a diphthong in the Opt., -ev ; but, otherwise,
-aav (275 a, c).
\v(o-v<ri, o-a<rt)av<ri, \v<rov<ri, XeXu/c(a-j'(ri)d<ri, XiWt • lOTatrt, TtMcrt
(45 a) ; £\v-o-v, %\v<x-a~v • Xu'oi-ei', XuVat-e^, \v6ei-ev • eXeXvice-aav, iXvdv-
aav, tara-vav, ^rrjaav, We-aav (45 b, h). See 160, 143 b, 156, 293 f.
b. In the Perf. and Plup. pass, of impure verbs, the 3d Pers.
pi. is either formed in -arai and -aro (158) or, more commonly,
supplied by the Part, with dai and rjaav (45 1) : as, ecpOdparai
Th. 3. 13, from cpddpco (s. (poap-) to waste, rerpippevoi elai (39).
c. The forms in -arai and -cito are termed Ionic. Before these end-
ings, a labial or palatal mute must be rough (<}>, \), and a lingual, middle
(8) : as, from rpiirw (s. rpair-) to turn, (reTpair-vTai) T€Tpd(f>arac PL Pep.
533 b; from rd<r<rw (39; Teray-VTai) rerdxaTcuiv. 8. 5, irerdxaTO Th. 7. 4.
d. In the Imv., the older and shorter forms in -vrav and
-a6<ov (termed Attic, 87 b), are the more common.
e. The forms in -«<rav do not occur in Horn., and scarcely in Hdt. or
the Dramatists : Zarwaav Hdt. 1. 147. They may have been later pre-
ferred, as distinct in form from the Part, and 3 Du. In the less frequent
2<ttu)i> Cyr. 4. 6. 10, and Itwv JEsch. Eum. 32 (45 1, m), the old plural
form (afterwards the dual, cf. 186 g, 271 c) remained without change.
301. Infinitive : -v, -vai, -i ; -<r6ai. The subjective ending,
after -ei- connective, is -v ; after -a- connective, -i ; but otherwise,
-vai : \v-ei-v, \va-ci-v • Xvcr-a-t (290 b) j \c\vk£-vcu, \v$rj-vai • lard-
vai, deiKvvvai, tiel-vai, dov-vai (45).
a. In the Pres. and Fut. act., the old form of the Inf. in -€-v prevailed,
and obtained an i in the prolonged connective, in lieu of the Dat. sign i
annexed in other forms. See 272 a.
302. Participle : -vr-s (t-s) ; -pev-os. In the Perf. act., v
(passing into a, and then by precession into o, 142, 114) be-
came a connecting vowel : -o-ts, for vrs. For the declension of
the Part., see 26, 232 s ; for the Verbals in -tos and -rtos, 2G9 d,
272 c.
303. Eemarks. a. Affixes and forms which have no connecting
vowel are termed nude; and others euphonic (183a). Tenses are so
§ 305. UNION OF STEM AND AFFIXES. 199
termed according to the affixes of the Ind. The regular affixes of the
verb are those which are assigned to the tenses in 35 and 36, the nude
Pres. and Imp/, and the Second Tenses excepted. These affixes are open
in the Pres. and Impf., and close in the other tenses (172 c). The 2 Aor.
act. and mid. has the affixes of the Impf. ind., and of the Pres. in the
other modes (289 a), with some variation of accent and, in the nude form,
of euphonic change (38, 297 c). The other Second Tenses have the affixes
of the First, with the omission noted in 35, 36, 289.
b. In the study of the Greek verb, the forms should be analyzed
throughout, and the force of their parts carefully observed. The inflec-
tion should be repeated, not by a simple act of memory, but by an intel-
ligent combination of the elements ; which, few in number, produce a
great and beautiful variety of forms.
c. Besides the full paradigm in 37, a briefer paradigm of strictly regu-
lar conjugation is presented in iravw (34), though less approved forms with
an inserted <r also occur (307 e). The leading forms of translation are add-
ed, which the student will apply, with the requisite changes, to other
verbs, while the details will appear more fully in Syntax.
II. UNION WITH THE STEM.
A. Consonant Changes.
304. 1. When the close affixes follow a consonant,
changes are often required by general laws : as,
Tpl{ft-<ru))ty(ii, £ra(7-0-a)£a, ir<?7ret(0-<rcu)<rai (151) ; r/9t(j8-Tos)irr<Js (147) ;
iTeTpi(fi-ixriv)\i\Lr\v (148) ; iT€Td(y-K€iv)\f\.v (149) ; £ire<p&(v-Keu>)yKG.v (150) ;
<pa(v-(T(»>)vti», i<p(av-(ra)i\va (152). See 39 s.
a. In the liquid verbs kXCvcd to bend, >cp(va> to judge, ktcCvw to slay,
tcCvo) to stretch, and irXvvco to wash, v is omitted before the affixes which
remain close (152) ; except sometimes in poetry for the sake of the metre,
and in late writers : KetcXifiai, iKXidrjv (£kXLv6tj Z. 468) ; idicpiKa, iKptd-rjv.
b. In other verbs, v characteristic, before p, more frequently becomes
op, but sometimes becomes p or is dropped : as, irtyaapuzi (40) ; %t)patva»
to dry, i&foaaptu, j^paftf/at, and late i^papuii.
305. 2. Future Tense-Sign, -a--. In the Fu-
ture active and middle, changes affecting the
tense-sign often bring together two vowels, which
are then contracted :
a. Attic Future. In Futures in 4<ra> from verbs in -i£w of
more than two syllables, the -a- becomes -e- : as,
KOfi(c-<r(a, i-€U})ici, Kop.(i-<ro, i-eo)iovp.ai, KOfx(i-<re, t-ee)ie£<r0ai, Kop.{L-<ru)v)\.(av
(39 d) ; Kadieiv ii. 1.4. So in KoJM£of«u to sit, Fut. (s. id-) Ka6e(d-ao, 8-eo)
Sovp.ai • and a few poet, or later forms : as, Te(K-(re)K€ur0cu Horn. Ven.
b. Some Futures in -ao-<o and -eo-a> drop the -a- : as,
cXavvo) or £Xdu to drive, F. A(a-<rw, d-a>)», 4X(d<xet s)£s, £X(d<retv)a.v or
i\av, £X(d(rut>)iav ' reX^-crw, ^-w)», reX(^aet)€t, reX^-ao, 4-o)ovpLcu (42 g) ;
200 FUTURE AND AORIST. TENSE-SIGNS. INSERTION. § 305.
\i<a pour, F. x(&rw)&>, x(^<ret?, &is)cts, x^ " )^ /** 4 (°f- 309 b). So in
KaXe'w call, (taxoftai fight, a\u\>Uvvv\u clothe ; in all verbs in -dvvv|ii,
as <Tice5&i>vvfu scatter ; and sometimes in verbs in -d£«, /3i/3dfu> make go.
c. This form of Futures in -euro, -&rw, and -t<r<o, is termed the Attic
Future, from its prevalence in Attic writers. It is not, however, confined
to them ; nor do they employ it without exception : KreplQ 2. 334 ; kclto.-
yteiv, dinav, Hdt. 1. 86, 97 ; iXdaovras vii. 7. 55, rekiaovvw Cyr. 8. 6. 3,
KOfilew Ar. PL 768. It is rare in the Opt. : padiolfjiriv Ar. PL 90.
d. Doric Future. A few verbs, in the Fut. mid. with an
active sense, sometimes add e to -o--, after the Dor. form (325 b) :
irXco) to sail, F. 7r\ei'cro/Aai and 7r\ev(<reo)<rov/«u ■ <f>€i>va> flee, <f>ev^o/j.ou
and (pev^ovfxai. Other Att. examples are kAoXu weep, vi<a no, swim, ira££a>
sport, -jrCirrw fall, irWu bloio, iruvGdvojiai inquire. So iaaecrai B. 393.
e. The Liquid, Att., and Dor. Futures, from their formation, are in-
flected like the contract Pres. (42). In a few verbs, the Pres. and Att.
Fut. have the same form : iXG>, reXQ, kclXQ.
f. In a few verbs, the old Pres. remained as a Fut., after the formation
of a new Pres. ; or the poets used the same form as both Pres. and Fut.
(273 a, d) : as, itrQita to eat, F. Z8ojjlcli, Ar. Nub. 121 ; irCvw drink, F. irio-
/aou Cyr. 1. 3. 9 ; dvvw accomplish, 4pva> draw, Tavtiw strctcli, also as Fut.
A. 365, 454, 0. 174. For xetfw as Fut., /S. 222, see 50.
306. 3. Aorist Tense-Sign. a. The sign of the Aor. is
omitted in tma said, rjveyica bore, *x ea poured, Zkco poet., burned;
and in a few Epic forms, as eaaeva E. 208. See tfnjfit, (fxpa>, x*°h
Kala>, (tcvco, aXevw, baTcopai, in 50. For the Liq. Aor., see 152.
b. The Aor. borrows the Perf. tense-sign in eOijica, e8oo/ca, and
Jjm (45).
These Aorisjs are used by classic writers only in the Ind., and chiefly
in the Sing, and 3 Plur., the other forms being supplied by the 2 Aor. :
idtbuare vii. 7. 10. In the Middle, the Att. has only the Ind. i}K<ifn]v.
(Eur. El. 622) ; while other dialects add idrjKdfjLrjv, K. 31, driK&fievos Pind.
P. 4. 52. Late writers extend the use of forms with k in these verbs, and
sometimes substitute forms with <r : Subj. Sci/cawi iEsop. 78 ; 8dxrr} Jn.
• • c. These peculiar forms in -ko, called 1 Aor. from the connective a, are
euphonic extensions of the 2 Aor., after the analogy of the Perf. The fiex-
ive -jjl passed into a, which became a connecting vowel ; and then k was
inserted to prevent hiatus (cf. 276 b, 320) : idi^-v, ^-^tj-k-ol, ZdrjKas.
307. 4. Insektion of <t. In many pure verbs,
a is inserted before the regular passive affixes be-
ginning with p, r, or 0.
a. This insertion is usual after a short vowel, and (b) fre-
quent after a diphthong ; but (c) not after a simple long vowel
(d) Exceptions, however, occur both ways J and (e) some verbs
are variable. Thus,
(a) tnraw to draw, Pass. Pf. Z<rn-a-<r-ixcu, tairavox, £(nra-<r-Tat, e<nr<L-
c-fieda, £(rira-<r-/j.fros, A. icnrd-a-drju, F. <nra-(r-07)<TOficu ' rer6Xe-cr-/Mti, ire-
\£adriv, TeXecrrios (42 g) ; (b) a£cei-<r-nai, eaelad-qv, <reurr6s (44) ; eireirXeb-
ff-firjv (42 g) ; KeXevw command, KCKiXev-a-iJtxu, /ce/c^XeuaTai, eKcXevadrpt •
§310. METATHESIS. VOWEL CHANGES. 201
(c) rerlfirj^ai, (piXrp-os, iSrjXibdrjv (42 f ) ; (d) \4Xvfj.ai, iXvOvv (37) ; f3ef3oij-
Xevp-ai, £(3ov\e607}v (44) ; \6<a heap, /c^xw-<r-ywat, tx^vOw / ( e ) 8pda> efo, 5^-
5pd/j.ai, rarely 8e"5paap.ai, edpdadrjv ■ kXelw shut, KixXeifxai and Ke"KXeia/xcu,
iKXeiffdyjv • pljiVT] fiat renumber, £p.vf}adrjv xpdofiai use, K^xpvP^-h &XfripOw*
f. The <r is attracted most strongly by 0. When <r is thus inserted in
the Perf. or Plup., the 3 Plur. wants the simple form (300 b) : iairaapAvoi.
elai, aeaei.crfji.4yoi. 9jaav.
308. 5. Metathesis. In a few liquid verbs, the concur-
rence of consonants is avoided by transposing the stem-mark
(145 ; cf. 152) : as, /3aXX<» to throw, icd[xva> labor, re fxva> cut ; Pf.
(3tfi\r)Ka, KeKjir]Ka, T6Tfir)Ka, for /3ej3a\Ka, &C. ; /3f/3X»7/uai, CTprjOrjv.
B. Vowel Changes.
309. 1. Contraction". The regular open af-
fixes are contracted with a, e, or o preceding.
a. Verbs in which this contraction takes place are termed Contract
Verbs or, from the accent of the theme, Perispomena. In distinction,
other verbs are termed Barytone Verbs (768).
b. The verbs K<ia> to burn, and xXdu weep, which have likewise the
forms Kaioo and /cXcuw, are not contracted. Dissyllabic Verbs in -i<a ad-
mit only the contractions into a : as, irX&i> sail, 7rX^ets 7rXets, 7rX^et 7rXei,
ir\4o/xev, irX^ere TrXeire, irXe'ovat. Except 8«»> bind (thus distinguished from
di(a need), to 8odv, rq> dovvn PI. Crat. 419 a, b; and a few rare cases.
c. The Inf. is now commonly regarded as contracted from the old form
in -cv (301 a) : Tip.(a-ev)av, rather than Ti/-i(a-eu>)q.v, <pcX(e-ev)eXv, 5q\(o-ev)ovv.
See 109 a. The contract Ind. and Subj. of verbs in -d« agree in form.
310. 2. Vowel Lengthened. Before the
regular close affixes, a short vowel is commonly
lengthened (a becoming 17, unless preceded by e, 1,
p, or po, 115 a) : as,
TijJiattf, Tifx-^au), TerlfivKa, e'Tifxirjdwv • <j>iX&>, i<ptXrjaa, <f>iX^aofxai, Tre<f>lX-q~
fiat, TrecpiXTfjaofiai ' StjXow, edrjXuadfXTjv, edeorfkdjfxrfv (42) ; Tt» honor, poet.,
fiau), irTaa. ' <j>v» produce, (pvaoj, iritpvKa ■ caw, idau, etdaa. • fortcta,
eiaridKa (279 c) ; 0r]paco, edrjpddrjv (42 g) ; aKpoaop.cu licar, dtcpodaofxai.
a. A few verbs vary from the rule in respect to the use of d or r\ : thus,
a becomes tj, in TiTpdw bore, and tenses from XP a_ to supply need (F. rprf-
aw, XPV™* XPV (TO f xat ) 5 a, in Troi.vdop.ai avenge one's self, ira- acquire (iroi-
ydaofiai, iriwdpLcu) ; a and tj, in Goivdw feast, Tropirda) fasten, and dXodco
thresh : doivdaopxn Eur. Cycl. 550, iK0otvrjaop.at iEsch. Pr. 1025.
b. In the Perf. of t£0t||u and Ktjui, e becomes ci • rideiKa, etna, et/xai (45).
c. In some verbs, the short vowel is retained; and (d) some
are variable : as,
(c) onrdw to draw, a-rraau, ^airaKa • reX4u», iriXeaa, reriXeapMi (42 g) ;
dpow plow, apbaw, r/pddvv • (d) 8&o bind, d-rjacj, ^8-qaa, de'dena, 8£8e/u.ai •
0va), Ovab), ridvKa (44) ; Xva> (37) ; 8w» sink, Svaw, didvua, iSvdyv.
COMP. GR. 9*
202 CONJUGATION. VOWEL CHANGES. §310.
e. Verbs in -dvvvui and -cvvvui, and stems in Xa-, or in v- after a short
syllable, for the most part retain the short vowel : as, <rK€8dvvvp.i scatter,
<TKe§(<£<jo), 305 b)w, £ai<££a<ra • Kop^vvvut satiate, £x:6pe<ra, K€K6pea/xai ' "yeXdw
laugh, yeXaaop-ai, eytXaadriv • 'uvvw accomplish, avt<xo), fyuica.
f. The short vowel is least retained before cr in the tense-sign, and
most before 0.
311. 3. Vowel Inserted. The regular close
affixes are annexed with the insertion of rj,
a.) To double consonant stems, except those which end in a
labial or palatal mute not preceded by cr, and those which end in
a lingual mute preceded by a liquid : as,
av£w, au£-^-<rw, rj^-T}-p.ai, ty6£-£>0qv • &|/o> to boil, tf\J/-rj-aa ■ feppco go
away, -fjppTjKa • u&Xa> delay, /xeXXrfvu (41) ; fijw smell, tifoaa • jdoo-Kw
/bed, fioGicfjVw ' but ir^JLirtt, tt^^w ■ apx<*>> fy>£a ' o-irc'vSw, (Tireiau (41).
b.) To liquid stems in which a diphthong precedes the stem-
mark ; and to a few in which e precedes : as,
(3ovXopcu to will, ^ovK-'fj-aofiai, j3e(3oijX-T]~p.at ■ yaipo? rejoice, xatp^crw •
€8e'Xa> or Se'Xw wish, edeX-Zjcru} or deX-qcu) • \Uk<a concern, epLtXyaa., ep.eXrj07]i> •
ip- inquire, epfoopt-ai • pivw remain, F. ixtvw, but Pf. pep-tv-qna. (cf. 150 e).
c.) To a few other stems : as,
Zi<a to need, de-^-crw, 5ed£-rj-Ka • cvSo> sleep, eu5^<r« • ol'op.ai think, ol-qao-
fiai, ^rjdrjv ' ofyouai depart, oixnvop.ai.
d. In a few verbs, € is inserted instead of r\ (cf. 310 c) : as, axOopai t°
be vexed, ax0-t-<rop.ai, jfxfiiff-Qip • p-d\op.ai fight, p.ax(t<ro)ovp,ai. (305 b),
tfxa.x*o&P-Wi p-ep-a-XVpa 1 '
e. In most of these cases, the vowel is obviously inserted for the sake
of euphony, to prevent undesired combinations of consonants. That the
vowel should be commonly tj, rather than 6, results from 310.
312. 4. In the Second Perfect System, the
common affixes are annexed with these changes
in the preceding syllable :
a.) Short a, i, or v, before a single consonant, is lengthened
(a commonly becoming 17, unless preceded by e or p, 115 a):
<paivo>, (s. <f>av-) ir^-qva, iire^veiv (40) ; 6dXX» to bloom, TiOyjXa • but
tcpaXfit cry out, (icpay-) kiicp&yd • Kpi^w creak, (icpiy-) Ktuplya ■ p.vKaop.at
bellow, (p.vk-) fi4p,vKa. After the Att. reduplication, the short vowel com-
monly remains : as, iX-qXvda (281 d, 134 a).
b.) e becomes o, and « (lengthened from V) becomes ot : as,
KTetvo> to kill, (tcrev-) ficrova • depicopai see, poet,, dedopKa • XeiVa>
(Xitt-, Xet7r-) leave, XeXotzra, ir'eTroiOa (39) ; eoX7ra, coikci, olda (280 c).
c. This change of an E to an O vowel is also found in foprijp to break,
2 Pf. Zppwya ; and in the 1 Perf. System of a few verbs : as, Tpeirtt to turn,
rirpo<pa • kX£jtto> steal, k£kXo<p<i • irtp/irw, iriirop.<pa (41) ; 8c8otKa (46 b).
d. A few Perfects obtain an O vowel in the penult by a less simple
change or by insertion ; and in a few dialectic forms, the change or inser-
tion appears in the Pass. : as, &y<a to lead, Pf. fjxa, later dy^-o-xa ' cc^fo,
§ 315. -MI FORM. 203
poet. tSu, eat, tdffi-o-xa, Ep. eS^So/icu • oK\o|i.cu (311 c), ofy-a-Ha. or <fow/ca
(278 d) ; (id-) &oQa I am wont, pret. ; Pass. awpro y. 272, for -fjepro, iwdj-
Xa.ro M. 340, a<p£u)VTai Mat. 9. 2 (see adpu, iirix^t tVPh 50).
C. -MI Form (45).
313. In some verbs, chiefly pure with a short stem-
mark, the Present and Imperfect are nude (303).
a. From the affix in the theme, these verbs are named
Verbs in -pi (270 c) ; and this mode of inflection is called the
-fit farm, a name extended to the nude inflection of all tenses
which have regularly a connecting vowel.
b. The 2 Aorist from a pure stem commonly retains the
primitive nude form, whatever may be the form of the theme :
as, efirjv, edpdv, eyvav, edvu (45 h).
c. If a stem in i- otherwise takes this form, it has commonly a con-
nective before a flexive beginning with v : 1-6-vtwv, i-i-vcu, l&v (45 m).
d. The verbs in -|U are few in number, but include some of the most
common words in the language. They are subject to many defects and
irregularities. The most complete are Xgtthai, Tldrjfxi, trj/ii, and didu/xi (45).
e. For the 1 Sing, o'iojacu / think, Impf. $!>firjv> the nude forms ofytcu,
$prjv, are commonly used, especially when the verb is parenthetic : p.d\\
olfiai, epwvrts toijtov, greatly desiring this, mcthinks, iii. 1. 29.
314. Before the nude affixes, the short stem-mark
is lengthened (a becoming v, unless preceded by p,
115 ; and I, ei),
a.) In the Indicative sing, of the Pres. and Impf. act.: as,
Zffrrifii, tLOtjs, 8iduai, deiKvvfit (s. 1<tt&-, ride-, 8i5o-, SeiKvv-) ; tar-qv, irl-
Qr\v, iUdtotf idelKvv • elpu (s. '!-), el, elo-t (45 a, b, m).
b.) In a few Middle forms, mostly poetic : as,
difyfiai to seek, throughout ; uv-qprju, 2 A. of dvivrjtju benefit.
c.) In the 2 Aor. act. throughout, except before vt (275 d) :
^(TTffv, fdpav, Hyvw, H8vt> (s. <rra-, Spa-, yvo-, SiJ-) ; ia-TTjfiev, <ttt}8i, arri-
val, dpavai, Zyvuxxav, yvQdi, Svpcli ; gt&vtwv, yvbvruv, yv(ovTs)oyt5 (45 h).
d. Exc. The short vowel remains in the 2 Aor. of rlQrjfju, didw/xi, and
Zrjfu, except in the Inf., where it is changed to its corresponding diph-
thong (115 a) : Zdefiev, tdopev, etfiev (s. 6e-, do-, £-, augmented el-, 279 c ;
for the sing., see 306 c) ; 8h, 86s, <?s ■ (devrs) Belt • Qeivai, Sovvat, elvai
(45 h, k). Except, also, the poet, furau slew, and Ep. odrav wounded.
315. The forms of verbs in -a sometimes take
the place of the -/u forms : particularly,
a.) In verbs in -vju, which may be regarded as having a second but less
Attic theme in -v« : 6/xvvu), deiKvvovai (a frequent form in the 3 Plur.
Pres.), vi. 1. 31, 2. 2, fcucnfo Cyr. 6. 1. 7, fcixwe PI. Phsedr. 228 e, 8«-
20-1 CONJUGATION. VERBS IN -MI. §315.
kvvuv Mem. 1. 3. 1 ; so Impf., chiefly in Sing, and 3 Plur. (&jjlwov Th. 5.
19). This form was rare in the Pass, and Mid.: Kareixiyvvovro vii. 2. 3.
b.) In the sing, oftlie Impf. act., if the stem-mark is € or o. The con-
tract forms in 45 b are the moie common, except trldovv. So lets, lei
(45 k). W« even find by imitation (or precession from ftp, 115), 1 Sing.
lew (rjfoeiv PI. Euthyd. 293 a) ; also 3 Plur. pw Isse. 60. 19, diredidow.
c.) In the Opt. mid., by the frequent use of -ot- for -&.- when not in the
initial syllable : ridoi/jL-qv, lotfirjv (45 c, n) ; and, in composition, 2 Aor.
cvvdoiro, irpooiro, i. 9. 7, 10. So Opt. act. d^ioire PI. Apol. 29 d (45 k).
316. a. The Subj. of verbs in -/n agrees with the common
form, except in contracting at] into ij } and oy into a (120 h,
123 a) : as,
i<TT{a-iti)(Oy £o"7-((£-t7s)t}s, l<TT(d.-r])i\T€, £cr(d-w)a» i u.ot, «n"((£-7j)TJ • ridii-ut)^
Ti0(^-77s)TJs • 5i5(6-w)<S, 5i5(6-77s)a>s, 5(6-w)(3//,cu, 8(6-y)u>.
b. In like manner, o>tj is sometimes found in the Opt. for oitj ; chief-
ly, but not wholly, in the later Greek : as, aXcpy £. 183 (aXol-qv X. 253),
Pl<$7)v (2 Aor., thus distinguished from the Att. Pres., 293 c) Ar. Ran.
c. In a few instances, the Subj. and Opt. of verbs in -vjju. are irregularly
formed, or supplied by the Ind. : thus, used as Subj., diaaKed&wvcri, 5ta-
<rKe8auvvTcu PL Phfed. 77 d, b, fawwrcu w. 89 ; Opt. (having the common
-|u form, with i absorbed, 293) 8(v-l)vt}i> (45 h), 5vtj <t. 348, ^Theoc. 15.
94, enSv/Aev II. 99, irrpfu{v-i)vTo PI. Phsed. 118 a, Bclivvto Q. 665, daivvaro
(for -vvto) <r. 248. So (p&ifnju (as for <t>du^rjv) k. 51, QOIto A. 330.
d. In the Opt. act., the forms without tj (293 a) naturally prevail more
in the longer Pres., than in the shorter 2 Aor.
D. Complete Tenses.
317. The complete tenses are wholly wanting in many
verbs. They are more used in the passive than in the active
system, and more by later than by earlier writers. The use
of their simple forms is chiefly limited, except in preteritive
systems (268), to the Perf. and Plup. indic, inf., and part.,
other needed forms being commonly supplied by the Perf.
PART, with the auxiliary dpi
a. The Perf. subj. and opt. are chiefly so supplied : Subj.
AeXvfcws S, XeXv/zeVos 3> • Opt. XfXwco)? WJtt, XfXu/xeVoy ctrjv.
b. The Perf. act. may also form these modes by inflection, especially
when used as a Pres. : as, iar^Ku, vi. 5. 10, earQ, PI. Gorg. 468 b,
£<rTal7}i>, ^. 101, Sedlw, Rep. A. 1. 11 (46 d, b), TreiroiBol-qv (293 c) ; d\^-
(puaiv PI. Pol. 269 c, ireiTTWKOi v. 7. 26, ireiroi.7]Koi Th., ^XrjKOLev Id.
c. In the Perf. pass., these modes have a simple form in only a few
pure verbs : as, Kraopcu to acquire, |ju|j.vt|o-kco remind, koX&o call ; Pf. P.
or M. K€KT7]fxai I have acquired, I possess, ^ixvq^ai I remember, /ce/cX^at
I have been called, I am named (268) ; Subj. K€KT(Tj-(o)(a/xai, k€kttj, jceKrij-
rat. Symp. 1. 8, fiefivdifiai, PI. Phil. 31 a ; Opt. K€KT(r}-i)wr)v, KCKTrJTO PL
Leg. 731 c, fiefxvriixriv Q. 745, fx.efj.i>rJTo Ar. PL 991, k€k\tiix7}v, kckK^o Soph.
Ph. 119 (292, 293) ; also k€kt(7j-oi)^/x7)v, KenTy/ieda Em. Heracl. 282,
fi€fjM'^r]v, ixefxv^o i. 7. 5 (v. 1. fxe/uLvrjo, /xi/xvoio), fiefivyro Cyr. 1. 6. 3 (cf.
315 c). So Subj. (pa\-, j3Xa-) ^Xijade Andoc; Opt. \e\(v-i)vvTO <r. 238.
§ 320. COMPLETE TENSES. 205
318. The Perf., in its proper sense, may have the impera-
tive in the 3 Pers. ; but otherwise, this mode belongs only to
those Perfects which are used in a Present sense (268, 46).
a. In the active voice, the Perf. imv. is very rare, except in the nude
form of the 2 Perf. (320) : Wye, iceKpdyere (320 f ), yiytave Eur. Or. 1220,
^rjKiTO} Luc. Hist. Sc. 45, eot/ceVw lb. 49. The Imv. act. \4\vice is in-
serted in 37, not as itself used, but to represent such forms as these.
319. The simple form of the Future Perfect is found in
only a small number of verbs; and is especially rare in liquids,
in verbs beginning with a vowel, in verbs in -fxt, and in those
which form the Perf. pass, in -a-/xai : 7re(f>vpa-ea0at Pind. N. 1.
104, elpfjacTai Cyr. 7. 1. 9, XeXijo-erai (Pf. Xe'Ai?o>iat) Eur. Ale.
a. The Fut. Perf. is frequent in those verbs only in which it is used as
a common Future (268). Its Participle is scarcely found in classic Greek.
b. Of the active form, only two examples belong to Attic prose, both
formed from preteritives, and both giving rise to equivalent middle forms :
Pf. 'iarriKa I stand, r^dvrjKa I am dead, Fut. Pf. ear^w and iffr^oficu
I shall stand, Tt&rtfaa and Tcdrffconat. Other examines of the Fut. Pf.
mid. with the Perf. act. are KticXayya.I scream, Keic\dy£ofw.i Ar. Vesp.
930, K^Kpdya I cry, KeKpd%op.ai Ar. Ran. 265. See 284 f, g.
c. The Fut. Perf. unites the base of the Perf. with Future affixes ; and
a vowel lengthened before the tense-sign -<r- in the Fut. is also length-
ened in the Fut. Perf. : as, dew bind, brjau), dideficu, Sedrjao/xai.
320. Nude Forms, a. In the 2 Perf. and Plup., the
connecting vowel is sometimes omitted in the Ind. plur. and
dual (276 b). When this omission takes place, then commonly,
(b) the Ind. sing, is supplied by forms from a longer base (cf.
306 c) ; which forms likewise occur in the plur. and dual, but
less frequently ; (c) the Subj., Opt., Imp., and Inf. are formed
after the analogy of verbs in -/u ; (d) the Part, is contracted, if
the characteristic is a or o. Thus,
(a) tara-fiey, 8t8i-nev, (18-p.ev, 148) fofiev ii. 4. 6, (18-re, 147) fore, (t'5-
vo~i, 8 becoming <r in imitation of the other persons) tafiai • (b) ^arrjKa,
ear-ffKeLv, 8e8oiKa, otda (bases eara-, earrjK- ; 8e8t-, 8e8otK- ; Id-, old-, elSe-) ;
ia-T^Kda-iP A. 434, ear-qKeaav . . . '4<XTa<xau Cyr. 8. 3. 9, idedotKeaav iii. 5.
18, ol8a/xev PI. Ale. 141 e ; (c) e<rrw • earai-qv, dM-qv • forest, 5<?Si0i, ttrdi
ii. 1. 13 ; kardvai iv. 5. 7, dedUvai (313 c), etfeVcu • (d) e<rr(a-ws)w$ i. 3. 2,
pepp(o-<is)&s, 2 Pf. Pt. of ptppcbo-Ka) eat. See 46.
e. The Perfects of QvqaKW to die, fialvu go, and r\a- bear, T^OvnKa, fii-
PrjKct, and t{t\wkcl have associated nude forms, partly poet., closely akin
to those of £<rTrjKa. So ytyova, 2 Pf. of ylyvo/xai to become, and p,£[xova.
I am eager, have nude poet, forms from the shorter bases 767a-, fiepia-.
f. In a few nude poet, forms of impure verbs, t passes into 6 : &v<ay%
I command, pret., Imv. dvuye Eur. Or. 119, and duuxdi Id. Ale. 1044,
dj/oryeVoj /3. 195, and dvd)(y-Tio)xQ<t> A. 189, dvibyere \£>. 132, and tivwxOe
Eur. Rh. 987 ; KeKpdya (319 b), Imv. ntupaxdi. Ar. Vesp. 198, Keicpdyere
lb. 415, and K^Kpa(y-re)\Q€ Ar. Ach. 335 ; 4-yetpw rouse, 2 Pf. iyp-qyopa
1 am awake, Imv. 2 pi. iyprjyopde 2. 299 ; ird<rx» suffer, 2 Pf. wiirovda,
2 pi. TriT{ovd-T€, ovo-de, 147, 159 g, 151s)oo-e€ T. 99. See 274 a.
206 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. DIALECTS. §321.
DIALECTIC FORMS (48).
A. Contraction.
321. Forms which are contracted in the Attic (and which
are also commonly contracted in the Doric, but often with a
different vowel of contraction) more frequently remain uncon-
tracted in Ionic prose, while the Epic has great freedom in the
employment of either uncontracted, contracted, or variously pro-
tracted forms.
a. Here belong, particularly, Contract Verbs in -dco, -iot, and -6<a (309),
the Liquid, Att., and Dor. Fat (305), the Aor. Pass. Subj. (288 a), the
Subj. of Verbs in -|u (316), and the 2 Sing, in -<u and -o (297 e). In
these forms, the first vowel is commonly either (I.) a, (II.) c, or (III.) o.
322. I. The first vowel a. a. In the Ionic, the a is commonly
contracted or changed into c (a change sometimes found in the Dor., 130 b,d);
and when a with an vowel is contracted into w, e is often inserted (135,
120 i). Thus we find, as various readings, dpuvres, bptovres, and optwvres,
Hdt. 1. 82, 99. So <bp4op.ev, xp&crdai, xpScrflai, ^xP^ U}VTO i £xP^ 0VT0 > XP^, Id.
Subj. of Verbs in -ui, dweibpeda Hdt. 4. 97, 2 Aor. oTeaxri Id. 3. 15, £<?«-
fieu 7. 50, KTiw/xev %. 216. See c. (b) In the 2 Sing., the termination
-ao commonly remains : as, ixpfo - Hdt. 1. 117, tirlarao 7. 209.
c. In the Epic, extended forms are made by doubling the vowel of con-
traction, either in whole, or in part (i. e. by inserting one of its elements,
or its corresponding short vowel, commonly o with <■>, and o with d, 135) ;
and sometimes by prolonging a short vowel, particularly € used for a to
«i : as, opdu, contr. opu F. 234, extended 6p6w E. 244, 6p6cpre A. 347, 6p6-
hxrai A. 9, 6/)(deis)£s A. 202, 6/odo.s H. 448, ip.vibovro B. 686 ; pydaadai. a.
39, Spibuxn o. 324 ; 5pwoip.i 317 ; Att. Fut. (305 b) t\6w<n N. 315, eMav
e. 290, Kpep.6u H. 83 : 2 Aor. Subj. of Verbs in -ui, 0-7-77 <r. 334, (tttjtj E.
598, <rTeloixev O. 297, CT-qeTov <r. 183, /3etw Z. 113. (d) So in Ion. prose,
in imitation of the Ep., Kopibwai Hdt. 4. 191 ; Dor. kop.6wvti Theoc. 4. 57.
(e) If the flexive begins with t, a is not prefixed : as in opd-re, opd-rai.
f. The Doric sometimes contracts a with an O sound following into
d ; and commonly a with an E sound following into r\ (131 a, c) : as,
ireivavTt Theoc. 15, 148 ; 1 Aor. 2 sing. iird£d Theoc. 4. 28, for iirri^ao,
-w ; toX/atjj Id. 5. 35, dpiJTe 110. The latter contraction appears in some
Ion. prose-writers ; and in some Ep. Du. forms, as avkrp-qv N. 202.
323. II. The first Vowel €. a. In Ionic prose, contraction
is commonly omitted, except as €0 and eov often become «v : as, iroUu
Hdt. 1. 38, 7roi&ts 39, eiroiee 22, Troiedpxvos 73, Toietpevos 68, iroiev<n 131;
Fut. <nip.a.v£<>) Id. 1. 75, d/iweuo-i 9. 6 ; Aor. Subj. airaipedeu Id. 3. 65,
dtuai 4. 71 (316 a) ; 2 Sing. j3oi;\eat, retreat, Id. 1. 90, eyeveo 35, $6ev 7.
209. (b) In like manner, co, used for ao (322 a), may become ev : as, elptb-
revv Hdt. 3. 140. So in the Dor., -fipurew Theoc. 1. 81 ; y&evm 90.
c. The Epic commonly omits contraction, if the last vowel is «, o>, 01,
ij, or fl (except in the Aor. pass, subj., and in the Perf. subj. d8Co) ; but
otherwise employs or omits it according to the metre (co and cov, when
contracted, regularly becoming ev. Synizesis is frequent when c precedes
a long O vowel, and sometimes occurs in eov, and even in cat. The Ep.,
also, often protracts e to ci, and sometimes doubles the vowel of contrac-
§ 326. CONTRACTION. TENSE-SIGNS. CONNECTING VOWELS. 207
tion tj. Thus, <pi\toi o. 305, (piX4up,€P 0. 42, <pt\4r)(riv o. 70, ireipr]0QuevX.
381, ei8£> A. 515 ; <pt.Xei B. 197, <f>t\4ei I. 342, Zppei P. 86, ippee N. 539, ^77
r. 2 A, taeai A. 563, ftrcrtcu f. 33 ; 0/>dfeo E. 440, cppdfcv 8. 395, /cdXeov
0. 550, naXevvTo B. 684 ; retxeUa A. 359, ireXeiero A. 5 ; Aor. Pass. Subj.
8a,ueiu} a. 54, Sap-vys, v. 1. Sa/za'fls, Y. 436 ; 2 Aor. Subj. of Verbs in -|u,
0etw II. 83, dvrjV B - 34, Wwuev a>. 485, tfeiV"' A. 143.
d. After the analogy of the contract Pres., the Ion. often extends the
2 Aor. Inf. in -€tv, as if formed by contraction, to -&iv : as, id^ir, <pvyt-
eiv, i\4cw, *. 463, B. 393 (cpvyeiv 401), X. 205, Hdt. 1. 32, 1, 36.
e. In the Ion., & followed by a distinct vowel, sometimes becomes ci,
or loses one £ : as, p.v0(t-eai)tiai 0. 180, p.v0tai ft. 202, mat X. 114, aib{£-
eo)«io 12. 503, Trw\(i-eo)h 5. 811, 4>opto Hdt. 7. 52 (0o/3eO 1. 9).
f. For the Doric contraction of co and eov into cv, and, in the stricter
Dor., of €6 into tj, see 131 b, 130 c : eXtyev Theoc. 1. 86, p&xev 113, ty^ew
2. 89, edaa 76 ; 7rot?/ Ar. Lys. 1318. So, in Horn., direCX-frr-riv X. 313.
324. III. The first vowel 0. a. Here the Ionic and Doric
usually employ contraction, following the common rules, except that the
Ion. sometimes uses ev for ov, and the Dor. « and u> for ov and 01 (131 b,
130 c) : as, diiccuevat Hdt. 1. 133, fiaarlyQv Epich. 19 [1]. •
b. The Dor. <■> is likewise used by other dialects in pi-yow to be cold,
and in the Ion. L8p6o> sweat : as, piywv Ar. Vesp. 446, pcytp PI. Gorg.
c. The Epic sometimes protracts the o to «, and sometimes employs
the combination ou after the analogy of verbs in -da> (322 c) : as, idpuovra
2. 372, apbuxnv 1. 108 ; 2 Aor. Subj. yvuw if. 118, durj p.. 216, dibyaiv A. 324.
B. Tense-Signs, and Union of Stem and Affix.
325. a. In verbs in -£», the Dor. commonly employs £ for <r, in the
Fut. and Aor.: as, Ka0i%as Theoc. 1. 12, for Ka0i<ras from KaOLfa, x a P^V
5. 71, inopai-av Pind. N. 2. 31. This change appears also in a few other
verbs in which short a precedes : as, yeXdfcs (fr. 7eXdw, 310 e) Theoc. 7.
b. In the Fut. act. and mid., the Dor. commonly adds to the tense-
sign €, which is then contracted with the connecting vowel : as, {q.-<rt-u>)
aVw Theoc. 1. 145, (4-<r£-op.ai) q,trevp.ai 3. 38, irorjcreis 3. 9. See § 305 d.
c. For the doubling of <r by the poets, especially the Ep., see 171.
d. The omission of the tense-sign -k- is extended, particularly in the
Epic ; where we specially notice the Perf. Participles in -tos pure. In
these, the vowel preceding -a»s is more frequently lengthened ; and the
Part, is then declined in -oVos or -<Stos, according to the metre. If the
preceding vowel remains short, the form in -wtos is commonly required.
Thus, KeKp,T]6Tas A. 801, /ce/c/ATjcDra k. 31, ireirTeCiTa <£. 503. See 320.
e. In the fem. of the Perf. Part., the Ep. sometimes shortens the ante-
penult on account of the verse : as, XeXa/cwa p.. 85 (XeX-qKibs X. 141).
C. Connecting Vowels.
326. a. For the 2 Sing, and Inf. affixes -€is and -civ, the Dor. has
sometimes the old short forms -€S and -«v (291 a, 294 b) ; and sometimes
prolongs these to -tjs and -tjv : as, a-vplades, a-vpioSev, Theoc. 1. 3, 14,
yapvev Pind. O. 1. 5 ; evprjv, x^PWt dirrjv, Theoc. 11. 4, 14. 1, 19.
b. The Dor. and iEol. sometimes give to the Perf. the connecting vowel
of the Pres. (276 a), especially in the Inf. : as, dedoiicu) Theoc. 15. 58, for
dedoina, ire-roWei 5. 28 ; Inf. dedvKew Id. 1. 102, TeOpdn-qv Sap. 2. 15 ;
208 CONJUGATION. DIALECTS. §326.
Part. Kex^ddovras Pind. Instances likewise occur, in the Ep., of the Perf.
passing over into the form of the Pres., and of the Plup. into that of the
Impf. : as, KeKXrjyovras M. 125 ; ep.ep.wK.ov i. 439, ewtyUnov Hes. Th. 152.
c. In this way new verbs arose, not confined to the Ep. : as, fr. &vojya,
avdjyw order', 0. 43, Hdt. 7. 104, Impf. ijvwyov I. 578 (ijvdbyeov H. 394),
F. <W>£« 7r. 404, A. ijvoj^a, Hes. Sc. 479 ; fr. &\em, oX^koj destroy, 2. 172.
d. Where the Inch has a short connective, the Ep. often retains this in
the Subj. (292. 2), for the sake of the metre : as, dyelpop.ev A. 142, top.ev
B. 440, (pdierai T. 173, pdayeat B. 232, eldere 9. 18, Xdperov K. 545.
e. The poets, especially the Epic, much extended the use of nude af-
fixes in the Pres., Impf., and 2 Aor. ; introducing them into euphonic
systems, and even using them after a diphthong or a consonant, chiefly
in the Pass, and Mid. : as, dvvu, ipvo>, Tavvw (305 f ), Pres. rdvvrat. P. 393,
2pvcr0ai e. 484 ; Impf. -jjvvto e. 243, "dvvro, "dvvix.es, Theoc. 2. 92, 7. 10 ;
<r€va» shake, <mv- stand, purpose, <T€vtcu Soph. Tr. 645, <rreOrcu T. 83,
crevvTca iEsch. Pers. 49, arevro X. 583 ; cpcpw bear, <Jn>\dcrora> watch,
Imv. <pe"pre I. 171, (s. (pvXaK-) cpvXaxOe (cf. 320 f) Horn. Ap. 538 ; &XXo-
pai leap, -yryvopcu become, Sc'xopcu receive, ptyvupi mix, opvvpi rouse ;
2 Aor. Ind. &Xto A. 532, tyevro Theoc. 1. 88, edeytiyv t. 513, 84kto O. 88,
tyiicro a. 433, (bpro Msch. Ag. 987 ; Imv. &?£o T. 10,' dix^ Ap. Eh. 4.
1554, 6pao A. 204 ; Inf. 5^at A. 23, 6p6at 9. 474 ; PL 5cyp.evos B. 794.
327. The 1 and 2 Aor. forms are united,
a.) In poetic, chiefly Ep., Aorists Avhich have the tense-sign -cr- with
the connectives -o- and -€- : as, (3cuvco go, 8v» sink, Xkw come, o\-(<pipw)
bear, opvupi rouse ; Aor. Ind. e^cero v. 75, Bvaero H. 465, l^ov E. 473 ;
Imv. pfoeo E. 109, olcre x- 106, 6paeo V. 250, contr. 6paev A. 264.
b.) In forms, chiefly Alexandrine and Hellenistic, which attach the
connectives and flexives of the 1 Aor. to 2 Aor. bases : as, cX0- {tyxop-at)
come, k\- (alpe'v) take, evp- (evpiaKw) find, 6<r<pp- (6o-<ppaivi,)) smell ; Aor.
-fjXdare Mt. 25. 36, 7)X6av Acts 12. 10, dveiXdro lb. 7. 21, eiiparo Ap. Rh.
4. 1133, 5a<ppavro Hdt. 1. 80. See 306.
c. These tenses of mixed formation are usually classed as 1 or 2 Aor.,
according to the connective : 1 A. fjXdav, 2 A. 2$or.
D. Flexible Endings.
328. a. 1 and 3 Persons. The old flexives -t and -vt, prolonged
to -Tt and -vti, remained in the Dor., which had also -p.es for -pev (Lat. t,
nt, mus ; 169 b, c) : as, (pari Theoc. 1. 51, riBnTi 3. 48, rptyovri 6. 36 ;
etdop.es Theoc. 2. 25, 5e8olicap.es 1. 16 (Pind. uses the form -pev).
b. Epic forms of the Subjunctive, with -p and -r prolonged to -pi and
-<ri, are not unfrequent : as, ediXupu A. 549, Gtufu 2. 63, eOtXyo-iv A. 408.
329. The change of v into a (142) is extended, especially in
the Ion.
a. Here, the 3 Plur. endings -aTCU and -aro, for -vtcu, -vto (300 c), are
usual in the Opt., and the Perf. and Plup. ind., and are also employed in
the Impf., 2 Aor., and nude Pres. ind. Before these endings, a short
vowel in the stem is not lengthened (310), except in the poets for the sake
of the metre, the connective -c- is used instead of -o- (290 a), a and some-
times €i become 6, and consonants are changed according to 300 c. Thus,
oiKtarai Hdt. 1. 142, for ficvvrai • &rrcu V. 134, elarai (134 a)B. 137, earo
H. 414, for IjvTai, %vto' ire<popr}aTO <£. 206 ; e^ovX(o-vTo)4aro Hdt. 1. 4 ;
§333. FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. 209
dvv(a-VTai}4arax Id. 2. 142 ; K(ei-v)iarai A. 659, hiaro Hdt. 1. 167 (so,
with an intervening consonant, eprtp^Sarat ty. 284, iprjp^Saro t). 95, from
ipelSw) ; T€Tpi(paTau (t/h/3-, 39) Hdt. 2. 93, ecncev&daTo 7. 67 (so, as if from
verbs in -£w, iXnXdSaro rj. 86, ippddarai v. 354, -to M. 431 ; /3ovXoiaTo Hdt.
1. 3, ireipyaTo 68, yevaa.la.To 2. 47. (b) The Opt. forms in -o,to are like-
wise used by the Att. poets : as, Sei-alaTo Soph. (Ed. C. 44.
c. In a few cases-, the poets seem to have simply dropped v between
two consonants, in the 3 Plur. : as, Kexdp.(av-vTai)avT(x.i <ppives Pind. P. 9.
57, 845o(K-vTai.)KTai . . <f>vyal Id. Bac. 1350. Cf. 158.
d. For the Impf. hlthp and fy, the Ion. has erldea Hdt. 3. 155, and
9ja p. 313, unaugmented Ha A. 321, Hdt. 2. 19. So fas Hdt. 1. 187, $ftf
A. 381, fore Hdt. 4. 119, fcurav 9. 31. Cf. 306 c.
330. The flexives of the 3 Plur. are interchanged, espe-
cially in the Alex, and Hellen. Greek, and the Ep. and Dor.
poets : thus,
a.) Alex, and Hellen., -dv for -curt of the Perf., and -crav for -v or -ev :
as, ir4<f>pTKav Lye. 252, ffyMMCO* Jn. 17. 7 (so Zopyav Horn. Batr. 179) ;
erxafraav Lye. 21, ijXdoo-av Ps. 79. 1, iroi^craiaaM Deut. 1. 44.
b.) In the Ep. and Dor. poets (sometimes imitated by the Att.), the
older -v for -<rav. (275 c) : as, Aor. Pass. tfyepOev for riy^pdrjaav, A. 57,
rpdfev 251, (paavdev 200, ^Kpv^dev Eur. Hipp. 1247 ; -fu Form, kvTav A.
535 (to-Trjo-av N. 488), Uv M. 33, Tidev Pind. P. 3. \\i,%^v e. 481.
331. 2 Pers. a. In the Subj. 2 sing., the uncontracted -tjcu (or
shorter -ecu, 326 d) commonly remains in the Ep., and sometimes in Ion.
prose : as, frpu Z. 143, iSyai Hdt. 4. 9. Cf. 323.
b. The Ep. sometimes drops <r in the Perf. and Plup. pass. : as, pd/xnjdi
$. 442, contr. fxip:u V O. 18, Theoc. 21. 41, ptpx-qai E. 284, &r<ruo n. 585.
c. On the other hand, in the S. S., we find the <r retained in some con-
tract forms, and in the Presents having the sense of the Fut. TrLo/xai, <pd-
yop.ai (305 f ) : as, Kavx(decrai)a.<rai Rom. 2. 17, irleacu, <f>dyeaai Lk. 17. 8.
332. Iterative Form. a. The Ep., to express with more
emphasis the idea of repeated or continued action, or sometimes
perhaps for metrical effect, often formed the Impf. and Aor. in
-o-Kov, -a-KOfirju.
b. This form, called the iterative (itero, to repeat), and akin to the Lat.
formation in -sco, also appears in Ion. prose, and rarely in Dor. and Att.
poets, (c) Of the connectives of the Impf. and Aor., it used -6- and -a-
(290 a), (d) sometimes dropping the -€- after a or €, and (e) rarely using
-a- for -€-. (f) It was almost strictly confined to the Ind. sing, and
3 plur., where it was inflected as an Impf. (-ctkov, -ctkcs, -otcc, &c), but
commonly without the augment, which was now less needed, (g) Be-
fore the -o-K-, a short vowel was not lengthened. Thus,
(c, f ) Impf. ix e(TK0V I was i n the habit of carrying, N. 257, ?x ecrKcy E.
472, ^cecr/ce 126, Hdt. 6. 12, 3 pi. $xe<™ov 8. 627, for el X ov, -es, -c, -ov ;
v<paiveaK€u she kept weaving, /3. 104, <pipe<TKe Theoc. 25, 138, ep.iaye'cTKOvTO
v. 7 ', 2 Aor. ffieo-Ke T. 217, yevtaxtTo X. 208 ; 1 Aor. (only poet.), o-Tptya.-
ckov 2. 546, p.v7i<Td<rKeTo A. 566 ; (d) Sciences for eicts, T. 295, KaXeea-KC f*.
402, ko.X4(Tk€to O. 338 ; (e) piTTTaaicov O. 23 ; (g) (t8uv) 85<tkov I. 331,
(V) foicov H. 153, to-nei? iEsch. Per. 656, (e<pdvr)) (pdvevicev A. 64.
333. Infinitive, a. In the Inf., instead of -vat, the Dor. and Mo\.
commonly retain the old ending -v (272 a), or, with the Ep., reduplicate
this ending to -aev, which may be still farther prolonged to -<ievcu.
comp. gr. N
210 STEM OF THE VERB. § 333.
b. Thus the Mo\. forms the Aor. pass. inf. in -r\v f the Dor. in -fjjwv,
and the Ep. (which also employs the common form) in --fjfievcu : as, fxedt-
cdrjv Ale. 28 [29], \a<rdr)fxei> Theoc. 2. 18, o^otw^evcu A. 187.
c. In other tenses, the nude Inf. has commonly in the Dor. the form
-jxev, in the iEol. -v and -pevai, and in the Ep. -vox, -p.€v, and -fievcu : as,
et/xev Theoc 5. 21, X. 315, teftevai Insc. Cum., B. 285, detveu A. 26 (cf.
A. 57), yvibfievai a. 411 ; vUdv (335 b) Ale. 86 [15] ; redydfievai 0. 225,
tdfxeu A. 719, tBfxepai N. 273. So eard/ievai Hdt. 1. 17. Before -|«v and
-fievai, a short vowel in the 2 Aor. does not pass into a diphthong (314 d).
d. In like manner the non- Attic poets employ, for -eiv (originally -cv,
294 b), the prolonged -4\lw and -Ipevcu : as, &icov(€v){pw A. 547, Pind. 0.
3. 44, Theoc. 8. 83, ijcovifupcu X. 380, d#/i«» *. Ill, d^erat 50.
e. Verbs in -6m and -&> have a contract form in -T|p.€vcu : as, yo(d-€t>)1\-
jitvai £. 502, irew^fievai. v. 137, KoX^-e^^jievai K. 125, Trevd^/ievai <r. 174.
334. Participle. For the Fern, -ovcra, the Laconic uses -«a : as,
f/cXi7r(oi}<ra)»a, /cXewa, ^y/xra(fou(rwi', 170 a)88a>av, Ar. Lys. 1297, &c.
E. Verbs in -/«.
335. a. The Ion. and Dor. employ more freely than the Att. the
forms with a connecting vowel (315), especially in the Pres. sing, of verbs
whose characteristic is € or o : as, ndeis Pind. P. 8. 14, ndei a. 192, Hdt.
1. 133, didois I. 164, 81S01 519, Hdt. 1. 107, SiSovrtv B. 255 ; larq. Hdt. 4.
b. On the other hand, the JM., Dor., and Ep. retain the form in -p
in some verbs, which in the Att. and in Ion. prose have only the form in
-w : as, KdXrj/xi Sap. 1. 16, 8pr)/u 2. 11, rUnyu Theoc. 7. 40, for /caX^w, &c.
c. The Ion. changes a characteristic before another a to « (cf. 322 a),
and sometimes inserts € before a (135 a) : as, i<rr(aa<ri, 156)^dox Hdt. 5.
71, dv^arai (329 a), lariairo 4. 166. So, in the nude Pert., carfare 5. 49.
CHAPTEE X.
STEM OF THE VERB.
336- The stem of the Greek verb, although
not properly varied by inflection, yet received many
changes in the progress of the language. .These
changes affected the different tenses unequally, so
that there are but few primitive verbs in which the
stem appears in only a single form.
a. The earliest form in which the stem of a verb appears is briefly called
the prime or old stem ; and other forms, later or modified stems. If a later
form appears in the Present System, this is called the new stem ; and any
intermediate forms, middle stems.
b. The 2 Aor. and 2 Compound Systems are widely distinguished from
the others by their attachment to the original form of the stem ; and the
§ 339. DEFECTIVE AND REDUNDANT VERBS. 211
Pres. System no less by its inclination to depart from this form. The
other systems differ comparatively little from each other in the form of
the stem. If the verb has three stems, they are commonly formed from
the middle. If it has only two stems, they are sometimes formed from the
earlier, sometimes from the later, and are sometimes divided : as, in T&cr-
<r« (39), old stem ray- irdyrjv rirayixat er&xdw re'raya. tra^a rd^oi, new
stem Tcuror- rdacrb) ; in orfjirw to rot, o. s. <rair- iadxyju, n. s. orrjir- ae'crrjfx-
fiai iarj<f)dT]v aiarjira gav^f/a a-qipoi arpno ; in fyevyo* flee, o. s. <f>vy- Z(pvyoi>
irt<f>vy/j.ai, n. s. <J>6vy- i4>e6x^V J/ Trefevya i<pev^a (peOi-ofiai (pefryu).
c. The tenses may be arranged, with respect to the degree in which
they exhibit the departure of the stem from its original form, as in 47 ;
which shows a general table (with a few exceptions) for verbs having three
forms of the stem.
337. Many verbs are defective, either from the want of a
complete formation, or from the disuse of some of their forms.
a. In both cases, the defect is often supplied by other verbs having the
same signification. In the poets, especially the older, we find many frag-
ments of verbs belonging to the earlier language. These occur often in
but a single tense, and sometimes in only a single form of that tense : as,
3 Sing. Zppaxe rang, A. 420, decCro (s. Sea-) appeared, £ 242.
338. On the other hand, many verbs are redundant,
either through a double formation from the same stem, or the
use of forms from different stems. It should be observed, how-
ever, that two or more forms of the same tense, with few ex-
ceptions, either, ,
(a) Belong to different periods, dialects, or styles of composition : thus,
KTeivu, and later ktIvvv/jli (50), to kill ; naiu) (44), A. P. iKaiOyjv, and Ion.
indrjiv • irw6dvo/j.ai, and poet. iretidofAcu (50), inquire.
(b) Differ in their use : thus, 1 Pf. Treireiica., transitive, I have persuad-
ed, 2 Pf. iretroida, intransitive, I trust (39) ; irtQayica I have sJwwn,
7r€(f)T]va 1 have appeared (40) ; 1 A. Zo-Trjaa, trans., I placed, 2 A. ^artjv
intrans., I stood (45). The second tenses are more inclined than the first
to an intransitive use.
Or, (c) Are supplementary to each other. See 306 b, 320.
d. From the various changes which take place in the stem, many verbs,
together with their common themes, have others, either older, derived, or
collateral. In regard to some forms, it seems doubtful whether they should
be rather viewed as redundant forms of the same verb, or as the forms of
distinct but kindred verbs. Themes derived from the same root are
termed cognate.
339. The changes in the stem of the Greek
verb are of three kinds, euphonic, emphatic, and
ADOPTIVE.
a. The same or similar terms are applied to the modified stems which
result ; while special names have also been given to some of their more
common forms.
b. The dialects increase greatly the number of these changes, especially
of the euphonic : as, T<xcro-a>, new Att. tolttw (169 a) ; opdw, Ion. ope'w.
c. In the following sections of this chapter, and in some of the tables,
small Roman letters, and figures annexed, are used to mark classes of
stems and their subdivisions : as, a, a 1 , b 2 .
212 THE "VERB. PRIME AND MODIFIED STEMS. §340.
I. Prime Stems (a).
340. 1. Prime Stems may be roots, either (a 1 ) giving rise
to modified stems, or (a 2 ) remaining alone ; or they may be
derived stems, either (a 3 ) giving rise to other stems, or (a 4 ) re-
maining alone.
Thus, (a 1 ) the root ti-, to pay (itself found in the poet. Pres. tLw), gives
rise to the stems tiv- and tivv-, used in the later Presents tlvoj and poet.
rivvuac ; while (a 2 ) the root 4\ir-, to cause to hope, remains alone in the
Ep. verh 2\ir<a. But these verbs have derivatives in the nouns iXiris
Jwpe, and rifi^j honor ; and from these are taken derived stems for new
verbs : viz., (a 3 ) IXiriS-, giving rise to c\m£- in the Pres. iXirlfa to hope ;
and (a 4 ) Tip-a-, the only stem of the verb rt/xdw to honor.
2. Most verbs which have only the prime stem are derivative 'pure
verbs : as, Tifx&w, <pi\eu), 5r}X6(a (42).
3. Most roots are monosyllabic, and have a short vowel. Hence these
became rules for the stem of the 2 Aor. ; and some changes appear even
in this stem, either for conformity to these rules, or to enable the tense
to take the old nude inflection (313 b). See 342. 2, 3, 353 a. A very
few forms from stems otherwise modified are used as 2 Aorists : as, 2 A.
Zrapov, commonly £r€|ioj' (341), cut. See 327.
4. The 2 Aor. System (except in a few defective forms, 337 a) belongs
only to verbs which have more than one stem ; and so, with very few ex-
ceptions, the 2 Compound System. Few verbs have both systems, and
comparatively few have either ; though among these are some of the most
common verbs in the language.
%
II. Euphonic Stems.
341. Euphonic changes in the stem are chiefly the following :
b. Precession (Attenuated Stems). In some stems, a vowel
is changed by precession, (b 1 ) a becoming c, (b 2 ) e or o, i (chief-
ly when consonants are annexed to the stem), (b 3 ) d, o>, &c. : as,
(b 1 ) 2 Aor. P. €$apr)v, Pr. A. hipio flay ; eVXaK^j', ttX^kw plait ; crpa-
trt]v, rp£irw turn ; (b 2 ) 2 A. Ztskov, Pr. tiktw bring forth, beget ; ap.f3\6a>
and dfj.f3\{o-Kw miscarry ; (b 3 ) 2 A. Zrpayov, Pr. (Tpoty-) rputyu eat.
342. c. Contraction, Syncope, Metathesis, Antithesis
(103 s).
1. Some stems (c 1 ) are contracted: as, aeCSu $8a> sing, dttrora? a'<r<rw
rush, K\j]tco kXtjoj old Att. (later ic\eLu>, cf. 222 a) shut.
2. Some stems are (c 2 ) syncopated in the theme, chiefly in cases of redu-
plication; (c 3 ) others, in the 2 Aor. (340. 3) ; and (c 4 ) others, in other
tenses : as, (c 2 ) 2 A. iyivdfirju, Pr. (yiyeu-) yCyvo/xai become (cf. Lat. gig[e]-
no) ; iirerov (Dor.), irforrw fall ; pivw and poet. p,£p.vw remain; (c 3 ) (eytp-,
l-yp-) 7ryp6,aT)u awoke ; (c 4 ) tcaXlu call, Pf. (kX.€-) KiicXvKa, fce/cX^ca.
3. In some stems there is transposition, chiefly by changing the place
of a liquid. This occurs (c 5 ) in the theme ; (c 6 ) in the 2 Aor. ; (c 7 ) in
otJier tenses : as, (c 6 ) 2 A. ZQopov, Pr. (6po-) dp&anu leap ; ZQavov, (0va-)
dvriffKw die ; (c 6 ) (to.\-, r\a-) ^tXtjv endured, (<tkoX-, o-kXo,-) ^<tk\tjv became
dry, (8apK-) ftpfaov saw (340. 3) ; (c 7 ) /SqSXij/ca, K€Kfxr]Ka (308).
. 4. (c 8 ) The substitution of one letter for another is chiefly presented
under other heads (341, 343, &c). ,
§ 348. EUPHONIC AND EMPHATIC STEMS. 213
343. d. Omitting or adding aspiration. 1. Some stems
(d 1 ) are changed to avoid a double aspiration : as, (6pe(\>-) rpe'c/xu,
(dpex-) rpexv, (ix-) fy 1 *, (&-) ere'^i/, (6v) irCOrjv (159 b, d, e).
2. A few stems (d 2 ) have both aspirated and unaspirated forms : as,
Ppvx w an( l Ppw*« J ^x w coo h 2 A. P. €^v\7}y and i^yriv.
344. e. In some stems, a consonant is (e 1 ) dropped or (e 2 )
added for the sake of euphony or the metre : as,
yCyvofxai, become, (7V0-, vivvo-) yiyv&VKw [gjnosco, know, later softened
forms -yivo/mt, yiisuaKU) ; XeijSo;, poet, €l'|3w, pour. In other verbs, the in-
sertion of a consonant, especially v, renders a syllable long, and thus relieves
the succession of short syllables, particularly in objective forms. See 351.
345. f. (Digamma Verbs, &c.) In some verbs, the (f 1 )
dropping or (f 2 ) change of F, or (f 3 ) of <r, has led to different
forms of the stem (140 s) : as,
(7r\eF-, 7r\e- f 1 , ir\ev- f 2 ) irXeo, irXevcro/wu (42 g) ; (0eF-) Q£u rim, Qevcro-
fiai • v(u} swim, vevao/xac • (x^F-, X € ~> X eu "> X u ") X* w P our > Aor. ^X €a > Ep.
£\ €va > A. P. iyyd-qv ; /cai'w (44) : (cex-, <r%- c 3 , <xx e " c6 > &" 141, ex* d 1 ) 2\w
Aaw, F. (€X-0"w) ^£ w > 2 A. 2<r\ov, Imv. <r\(s • (<re7r-, <r7r- c 3 , ex-, ceair-
284 e, e<T7r-) $irw be busy with, 2 A. Zo-irov, ifrtrbixrjv, poet. k<rtr6firjv.
III. Emphatic, or Protracted Stems.
346. Most impure stems and many pure stems
are peotracted in the Present System, to express
with more emphasis the idea of continued, or per-
haps, in some cases, of transitive action. This pro-
traction takes place, (A.) by lengthening short
vowels j (B.) by adding syllables or letters.
347. A. By LENGTHENING SHORT VOWELS ;
either (g) to cognate long vowels {Long Vowel
Stems) ; or (h) to diphthongs (Diphtlwng Stems) :
(1.) In mute verbs, a becomes 77 ; in liquid verbs, and in some
mute verbs, 1 and v are simply lengthened ; in other cases, the
short vowel is usually changed to a diphthong. (2.) In mute
verbs, the change commonly extends to all the regular tenses
(303 a). Thus,
*(g) 2 A. P. io-airyv, eraKrjv, Pr. o-^irw rot, t^jkw melt ; eKKivrjv, k\ivw
bend ; irpl^rjv, rptpw (39) ; iarvpTjv, <rdpa> drag ; irvfyrju, tv<j>w fumigate.
(h) Fut. <j>dvw, Ka.Qa.pQ, Pr. <|>a£vw (40), KaQaCpu purify ; arirepu, o-ircCpw
soiv ; T€V<S, Tctvw stretch; 2 A. HXlttov, ZiriQov, Pr. Xctiraj, ir€i0w (38s).
348. B. By ADDING SYLLABLES OR LETTERS.
These may be annexed, inserted, or prefixed (32).
i. The consonants annexed or inserted are the consonant
t (with the resulting changes, 143), o-k, v, t, 6, &c.
214 THE VERB. EMPHATIC STEMS. §349.
349. Iota Form. i. The consonant I unites (i 1 ) with a
palatal mute, or less frequently (i 2 ) with a lingual or (i 3 ) labial
mute, to form aa (in later Att. tt, 1G9 a) : as,
(i 1 ) 2 A. P. irLy-qv, (\t-a.yr)v, Pr. Tao-<rw or rdrro} (39), jtdo-o-w knead ;
4>v\uk-, <j)vXd<r<rw guard ; (i 2 ) PXXt-, pXfrrro; take honey; Kopvd-, poet, ko-
pva-tru) arm; (i 3 ) F. (tretr-aw) ire\}/w, Pr. ire<r<ra; or tt^tto; cook.
j. The I unites (j 1 ) with a lingual mute, or less frequently
(j 2 ) with a palatal mute, (j 3 ) a double palatal, or (j 4 ) a labial
mute, to form £ : as,
(j 1 ) <J>pu8-, <j>pd£a> tell ; ovopur-, 6vopd£a> name ; (j 2 ) 2 A. fapiiyov,
ia-fy&yrjv, Pr. Kpd£w cry, <r<pd£a> or <r<pdTTa> slay ; <TT€vaX-> o"T€vd£a> groan ;
( j 3 ) KXayy-, KXd£w clang ; ( j 4 ) vl<f>-, v^w, later viirro;, wash.
1 (/or k, see 350). The I unites with X, to form XX : as,
F. (3uX&, crcpaXu), <tt6XcD, Pr. |3a.XXw throw, ar<j>dXXu deceive, oriKkw send.
a. Palatals in -£a> are mostly onomatopes (words formed to imitate
sounds). Some verbs in -£» or -<r<rc* have both palatal and lingual forms.
p. Linguals in -£« are very numerous, particularly those in -££<■>. They
are mostly derivatives, wanting the second tenses and, by reason of
euphonic changes, nowhere showing the stem in its prime form. This
may often, however, be ascertained from a cognate word. It ends most
frequently in 8, and may be assumed to do so, if the contrary does not
appear : as, 6pi8-, 6pi£- (39 d).
7. Most linguals in -£&> may be practically regarded as having but a
single form of the stem, with £ as the stem-mark. And in some, (z) the
stem may be regarded as having for an added consonant simply £, either
(z 1 ) alone or (z 2 ) with a vowel (the modified stem marked with z, to avoid
double notation) : as, (z 1 ) irpiw, and later irp^w, to saw ; ovTdu and ov-
Ta£w wound, poet.; (z 2 ) 2 A. iiropov, Pr. Tropica; furnish.
350. k (for 1, see 349). Inceptive Form. In this form,
-o-K- is annexed, (k 1 ) either alone, or (k 2 ) with a vowel, com-
monly 1. When -ox- alone is added, (k 3 ) a consonant preceding
is dropped or (k 4 ) transposed, or (k 5 ) rarely unites with the a,
excluding the k ; while a vowel preceding, particularly o, (k 6 )
may be lengthened or (k 7 ) changed to 1. Thus,
^ (k 1 ) F. dp&rw, jmGvo-w, Pr. apio-tcw please, p-cOvancw intoxicate ; (k 2 ) 2 A.
evpov, Pr. €vp£crKw find ; (k 3 ) t\avoi>, \ao-KU) (151) gape ; 2ka.Koi>, Xdo-tcw
sound, utter, poet.; tiraQou, (iradaK-, 151, 159 g) irdorxw suffer; (k 4 , c )
ZQopov, (dopaK-) GpwcTKw leap, tQavov, {dawn-) Ovtjo-kw die (342. 3) ; (k 5 )
dXcK-, (a\eK<TK-) dXigw ward off; (k 7 ) dppXdw and dppX£<ricw (341) ; 2 A.
(dXo-) edXuv, aXCa-Kofxai to be taken. So from r. ju-y-, with transposition,
may be formed (fiiyaic-) p,£<ryw mix; cf. Lat. misceo, (mics) mixtum.
a. These verbs correspond in form and sometimes in force to the Lat.
inceptives in -sco : as, yrjpdaicw senesco, grow old, 7]j3do-KU) pubesco (379 b).
351. n. Nasal Form. In this, v is added, either alone,
or with a vowel (chiefly as -ay-, -pv-, or -ve-).
1. When -v- alone is added, (n 1 ) it commonly follows the
former stem-mark, which, (n 2 ) if a short vowel, often becomes
a long vowel or diphthong; but (n 3 ) sometimes precedes it
(chiefly a in a few poetic forms) : as,
§ 354. I, N, T, &C, ANNEXED. 215
(n 1 ) 2 A. Zoolkov, Pr. Sclkvw Site (47) ; ^Kap.ov, Ka|xvw labor; frepov,
rt\kV(/} cut ; (n 2 ) ZtrLov, mvw, drink, (8v-) ^Sup, Stfvw enter; (Pa-) £/£gp,
Patvw #o ; 4Xaw, commonly cXaww, drive ; (n 3 ) F. Saucta-cu, poet. Pr.
oauvda; or d&fivrjfu subdue ; (ircpa-, irtpva-) irkpvr\p.i poet., sell.
2. There are three ways of adding -av- : (n 4 ) without farther
change, chiefly to double-consonant stems (already long) ; (n 5 )
with v inserted before a characteristic mute, to lengthen a short
syllable (344) ; (n 6 ) with -av- prolonged to -aiv- or -av- : as,
(n 4 ) a{l£« and av£avo> (41) ; 2 A. g$\aaroi>, pXacnravw bud ; ZoapQov,
8ap0dva> sleep; tfp.apTOV, ap-apravw err ; (n 5 ) £\i$ov, XavGdvw fo'e /a<2;
?aa0oy, p,av6dvct> learn ; ZXafiov, Xap-Pavw (150) take ; ^tv\ov, Tvyxdvw
happen; (n 6 ) (6or<pp-) <ha(ppbp.y\v, 6o-fypa.lvop.ai smell ; K€p8-, KepSaivw gain;
^ki\ov, Ep. Kix»*vw, Att. Kt-yx^v^ n& > v - 1- Klxavu, j£na.
3. When -W- is added, the preceding syllable is by rule
long. Hence, while -w- can be (n 7 ) annexed without further
change to consonants (chiefly palatals and liquids), (n 8 ) the v is
doubled after a short vowel (o also becoming o>) : as,
(n 7 ) 2 A. iplyrjv, p.Cyvvp.i mingle ; ftrrapoj', irrapvu^tat sneeze ; ol'-yw and
otyvv/u open ; F. Spew, 6pvvpu rouse ; (d-y-) a£u>, &yvvp.i break ; (n 8 ) icepa-
<rw, Kcpdvvvac m«c/ «rp&rw, o-fiivvvpu extinguish; Kopiaca, Kopt'vvv/xt
satiate ; (Jo-) fuxro), £wvvv,iu gird ; x^* an( l later x«vvv^t , heap up.
4. (n 9 ) After a diphthong (securing in itself a long syllable), a lingual
or liquid is dropped before -w- : as, 8cut-, oaivvp.c feast ; ktcCvw, later
KTiCvvp.i kill. In d\\vp.i (o\-, 6\vv-) destroy, v is assimilated.
5. (n 10 ) A few stems receive -ve- : as, 2 A. iKop.rjv, iKv(op,ai, and poet.
tV iKduu) n 6 , come ; 1 A. £»cv<ra, kvvc'w kiss ; Puw and pvvew stoj9 «p.
352. t (/or o, see 354). Tau Form. In this, t is added,
either (t 1 ) alone, chiefly to labial stems, or (t 2 ) with a vowel :
(t 1 ) 2 A. €KOifqv, koittoj cut ; €TVirr)v, tvtttw &ea£ ; e'pXdp^, pXdirTW
(1 47) hurt ; CKpvflrjv, KpvTrroj /izVfc ; efiafy-rjv, pdiTTw dip ; eppafyriv, pdirrw
stitch; £t*kov, tiktw (341); dvvcj and dvuTw accomplish; (t 2 ) eppttyrjv,
piirru) and ptirrcw throw ; 1 A. (ttck-) &re£a, ttcktcw com6.
353. q (for p, see 356). Theta Form. In this form,
which is chiefly poetic, 6 is annexed, (q 1 ) either alone, or (q 2 )
with a vowel, commonly a or e. (q 8 ) A short vowel in the
stem is oftener lengthened before 6. Thus,
(q 1 ) TrcXdw and ireXaGo; approach, poet.; (q 2 ) cpXc'vw, poet. QktyiQoj,
burn; (0aX-) BdWo) 1, poet. QakiQw flourish; <p0ivw, poet. <|>0ivtf0a>, consume;
tow, poet. (<?50a; 147) &r0a>, comm. €<r0ia;, «rf; (q 3 ) via) and v^0«, spm.
a. A few verbs obtain, in this form, a 2 Aor. with a short penult
(340. 3) : as, 5ii6/cu pursue, e8iu)ica0ov • efrcw yield, etnadov. These extended
Aorists, which are chiefly poet., are regarded by some as Present Systems.
354. o. A few stems receive other consonants, either (o 1 )
alone, or (o 2 ) with vowels : as,
(o 1 ) dp.ep-, dp.ep8w and 6.p.dpw h, deprive, poet.; 8Cw and SeCSw h, fear,
Ep. ; rp-Qio and rp-6)(U) wear out ; xj/aw and t|/^x a, ru0 >' v ^ w ai) d poet, v^x.^
swim ; (o 2 ) &o> to be sated, Ep. A. (dSc-) "ddrjaa • <£\Q<a and IxdaCpca hate,
mostly poet, j *vXta;, kvXivSo; n s , and kvXivS^w, roll.
216 THE VERB. EMPHATIC AND ADOPTED STEMS. §355.
355. % v, w (for r and t, see 357, 352). II.
Vowel Form. Vowels annexed to protract the
stem are chiefly (u) a and (v) e, but (w) some-
times others : as,
(u) 2 A. Zyoov, 700,0; bewail ; gpvKov, [ivKao/mai low ; fyaKou, pipcdo^ai
bleat ; 2 Pf. /3e(3pvxct, ppvxdo/xcu roar (onomatopes, as also (3\r)x&o[Aai,
halo, Germ, bloken, bleat) ; (v) yiyrfio; Yn^ w poet., rejoice; 2 A. ^ktvitoj',
KTviriw cras/i ; F. (8ok-) 56£w, SpKcw seem, think ; (a>0-) #0-0, &Qiw push ;
(w) £Xko>, late IXxvoj iraw ; (op.-, 6p.vv- n 7 , 6^0-) fyvv/u swear, F. op.6Vo>.
a. (u 2 , v 2 ) When a is affixed, c in the preceding syllable usually be-
comes o> ; but when € is affixed, o : as, Tp£ira>, poet. Tpcoirdw and Tpoirew,
turn ; crrp6pa>, chiefly poet. o-Tpoxpdw and orpocpew, twist.
356. p, r (for q, see 353). III. Prefokma-
tiyes lengthening the stem consist chiefly of (r)
three kinds of reduplication ; and (p) the few others
may be rather euphonic than emphatic. : as, .
(p) aircUpw and do-Trcupw gasp ; Svpo/xcu and 68vpo/icu lament.
357. r. Reduplicated Stems. Reduplication in the stem
is most frequent in verbs in -fit and -o-ko>. It is of three kinds :
1. (r 1 ) Proper, prefixing the first letter with -X- (rarely with
-e-) to stems beginning with a single consonant, with a mute and
liquid, or with fiv- : as,
(8o-, 8180-) 5L8w/j.i, (0«-, dide-, 159 a) rW-qiu (45) ; (xp°<-> X l XP a ') k<-XPW-
lend ; (irXa-, iri-p-irXa-, 344) Trljj.TrXr),ui fill, (irpa-) irlfiirprjiM burn; 2 A.
iSaov poet., 8i8do-Ka> teach; £Spcu/ (45 h), 8i8pdo-Kw run; (yvo-) 'iyvwv,
yiyvuMTKw k 6 , know ; F. (rpa-) rp-qaw, TCTpaivw bore. Cf. Lat. gigno ,sisto.
2. (r 2 ) Attic, prefixing the two first letters to stems begin-
ning with a short vowel followed by a single consonant : as,
(dp-) dpap£o-Kw fit, poet. ; (d\-, d%ax-, 159 a) a.Ka\ilo) ajjlict, Ep.
So, with the familiar vowel of reduplication i, in place of the initial vowel
repeated, (6ra-) duivyfju benefit ; ut&XXu) and oltlt&XXu) rear, poet.
3. (r 8 ) Improper, simply prefixing t with the rough breathing
to stems not included above : as, (ora-, o-tora-, 141) tor^u, (i-,
i-i) it) (it (45); 2 A. iirra^v, Inrafxai fly.
IV. Adopted Stems.
{For t, see 352 ; u, v, w, 355 ; z, 349 7.)
358. x. Some themes, to complete their inflec-
tion, adopt tenses from stems that appear to be
radically distinct : as,
alp^w take, 2 A. (IX.-) etXov ; '4p\ofiai come, F. (IX.v8-, eXevd-h.) eXedcrofxai,
2 Pf. i\7)\v6a ; la-0iw eat, 2 A. tyayov ; 6pda> see, F. (oir-) 6\pofxai, 2 A.
(18-, 279 c) eWop ; rpixca run, 2 A. ^Spapc^; <pepw bear, F. olVw, Pf.
(svcK-) evrjvoxa ; mviofxcu buy, 2 A. eirpiaixrjv (45 i).
§ 361. FORMATION OP WORDS. 217
CHAPTER XI.
FOKMATION OF WORDS.
359. a. The Greek, like all other original languages, is the
development, according to certain natural laws, of a small num-
ber of germs, or primary elements. These elements (termed by
botanic figure roots or radicals) have a significance which is not
arbitrary, but founded upon instinctive principles of the human
constitution.
b. If a word contains only one radical, either with or with-
out formative elements (172b), it is termed simple; but, if
more than one, compound. Of simple words containing the same
radical, that which appears to have been the earliest is called
the primitive ; and the others, derivatives.
c. Of those words which are commonly distinguished as •primitive and
derivative, some are directly related to each, other as parent and child ;
while others are merely formations from the same radical, which, however,
may have a simpler form in the one than in the other. The parent of a
word is sometimes called its primitive, even when it is itself the child of
an older word. So the term stem is sometimes extended to the essence
of a word which is not inflected (172 a).
360. The stem of a primitive sometimes remains unchanged
in a derivative ; but it is commonly modified, chiefly by annex-
ing significant syllables or letters. These are termed afforma-
tives ; while the afformative, with the affix of the theme if this
is added, may be distinguished as the suffix.
Thus, in dporpov plough and \6rpov ransom, the stems apo- and \v- of the
verbs apbu to plough, Xtfw to loose, are modified by the addition of the affor-
mative -Tp-, which denotes instrument or means ; and thus give rise to the
new stems dporp- and Xwp-, to which again the affix of inflection -ov is
added, making the themes &po-rp-ov and \ti-rp-ov. These words are more
briefly said to be formed by adding to the primitive stems the suffix -Tpov.
361. Derivation shows also many euphonic changes, espe-
cially such as take place before the affixes of verbs : thus,
a.) Changes of consonants : as, TpC(/3-r)im7S rubber. Cf. 304.
b.) Precession or the use of a kindred vowel : as, (Pao-iXe-) (3a(ri\e6s
king, |3cunXiK6s kingly ;■ Xi-yu to speak, X.6yos speech. Cf. 312.
c.) The lengthening of a short vowel, or the insertion of <r or tj : as,
iroUto to compose, rroi^r-ris poet ; ccfo to sJiake, o-ei-o--p,6s a slinking, shock ;
atf|w to increase, avg-T|-Tiic6s augmentative. Cf. 307, 310, 311. Even an
initial vowel is sometimes lengthened : as, fjdos (20w) usage, dbcpeXew {6<pe-
Xos) to help.
d.) Contraction, Syncope, Metathesis, &c: as, deiafia dafia song ; KaXdco
to call, (/cXe-) /cXtjt^p summoner; repivw to cut, Tp,rj<ns cutting. Cf. 342.
e. A union-vowel is often inserted.
comp. gr. 10
218 DERIVATION. § 361.
I. FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS.
362. Simple words are divided in respect to their forma'
tion into three classes : (a) those which consist of the mere
radical, without change, except for euphony or emphasis ; (b)
those which have, in addition, merely the affixes of inflection ;
(c) those which receive further modifications.
d. The Rules and Remarks which follow have respect chiefly to the
last class.
e. Words derived from verbs are called verbals ; from nouns (whether
substantive or adjective, according to the old classification), denomina-
tives ; from pronouns, pronominals.
f. Many derivative nouns are properly adjectives used substantively.
A. Nouns.
363. I. From Verbs. Nouns formed from verbs (or from
common radicals, 359 c) denote,
1.) The action or abstract idea of the verb. These are
formed by adding to the stem of the verb,
a.) -oris (Gen. -o-ews, fern.), or -<rla (Gen. -a-Cas, f.) : as, /ufie-ofiai to
imitate, pLlp-v-txis imitation; irpdacu (r. irpdy-) to act, Trpa(y-<ris)%is action ;
Ota to sacrifice, dvaia sacrifice ; doKifi&fa to try, doKi/xaala trial.
b.) -tj, -a (G. -i]s, -as, f.) : as, <pe&yu (r. <j>vy-) to flee, <f>vy--q flight ;
rpicpu to nourish, rpo<p^ nourishment ; x<*W (r. X a P~) t° rejoice, x«/°-a joy.
c.) -os (G. -ov, m.) : as, irXew to sail, ir\6os sailing, voyage.
d. -tos (G. -tov, m.), -rtj (G. -Tt\s, f.) and Ion. -tvs (G. -tuos, f.) : as,
kukij-v to wail, k(okv-t6s wailing ; /3i6o> to live, fiioT-q and filoTos life.
e.) -u(Js (G. -uov, m.), or -ji/rj (G. -utjs, f) '• as » tSOp-op-ai to lament,
68vp-fx6s lamentation ; ftd-fanj-fteu to remember, p.vr)-p.r\ remembrance.
f.) -os (G. -«os, n.) : as, K-qb-opxti to care, ktj5-os care.
g. Other suffixes appear in 6 yeXus, -ottos, laughter, 6\e6pos destruc-
tion ; i] aXyrjSwv pain (cf. Lat. cupldo), 86vapus, -ews, power, &c.
h. From the tendency of abstracts to pass into concretes, verbals of
Class 1 often express not so much the action itself, as an effect, object,
circumstance, &c, of the action, and thus blend with other classes : as,
ypap.p.7] line, d6<ris gift, Xd%os sliare.
364. 2.) The effect, or object of the action. These are
formed by adding to the stem of the verb,
a.) -ua (G. -uai-os, n.) : as, irpdaaia to do, irpay-fia (rb Teirpay/xevov fac-
tum, thing done) deed ; o-irelpoj to sow, o-ireppM. thing soivn, seed.
b. Other suffixes appear in t6 dwpov gift, ireraXoi' leaf, fieXepivov missile.
365. 3.) The doer. These are formed by adding to the
stem of the verb,
a.) -rr]s (G. -tov, m.) : as, iroiew to compose, iroirp-^s poeta, poet.
b.) --HJP (G. -r»ipos, m.) or -T«p (G. -Topos, m.) : as, <ra>fw to save, <rw-
r-qp servator, savior ; r. pe-, to speak, prj-rup orator, speaker, (c) The
feminines corresponding to Classes a. and b. end in -Tpia or -rcipu (pro-
paroxytone, G. -ds), or in -Tp£s or -tis (G. -t8os) : as, iroirjTpia poetria,
poetess, (xdrretpa servatrix, female deliverer, -rrpcxp qr is prophetess.
§ 368. nouns. 219
d.) -evs (G. -6ft)S, m.) : as, ypdcp-w to paint, ypacp-ets painter.
e.) -6s (G. -ov, m. f.) : as, rpe<pw to nourish, Tpocpos nurse.
f.) -|ic«>v (G. -uovos, m.) : as, -rjye-o/xai to lead, rjye-fxdjv leader.
g. Other suffixes appear in 6 tcktwu, -ovos, workman, rpbx^, runner, &c.
366. 4.) The place, instrument, or other means or cir-
cumstances of the action. These are formed by adding to the
stem of the verb,
a.) -T^jpiov (G. -ov, n.), more frequently expressing place : as, aKpod-
op.au to hear, dupoa-T-qpLov auditorium, place of hearing, auditory.
b.) -rpov (G. -ov, n.), or -Tpd (G. -as, f.), more frequently expressing
means : as, £tfa> to curry, ^varpov and ^varpa currycomb, dporpov plough.
c. Other suffixes appear in to KkeWpov bar ; 6 <XTe<pavos crown ; &c.
d. Note. Suffixes of verbals are annexed, in general, with the same
euphonic changes as the similar affixes of inflection (361) : i. e. those be-
ginning with o- follow the analogy of -o-o> of the Fut. or -o-ai of the Perf.
pass. ; those beginning with p. and t, of -aai and -rat of the Perf. pass. ;
and those beginning with a vowel, of the 2d Perf. It is convenient to re-
member, that verbal nouns following the 1st Pers. sing, of the Perf. pass,
more frequently denote the thing done ; the 2d, the doing ; and the 3d,
the doer. Thus,
Tre-Trotrj-pMi, ire-irol-q-aai, ire-trolri-Tai,
Trolr]-p.a, poem, iroirj-o-is, poesy, Troirj-Trjs, poet.
367. II. From Adjectives. Nouns formed from adjec-
tives (or from common radicals, 359 c) usually express the
abstract of the adjective, and are formed in,
a.) -Ca (G. -Cds, t), or oftener, if the stem ends in e or o, -id forming,
with the stem-mark, -€td or -ota : as, aofi-bs wise, aocp-La sapient-ia, wis-
dom ; aXydris, -e-os, true, dXrjdeca truth; evvo-os, kind, efooia kindness.
b.) -Ttis (G. -ti]tos, f.), from adjectives in -os and -vs : as, foos equal,
labrvs aequalitas, equality ; raxte swift, raxvT-rjs celeritas, swiftness.
c.) -crvvTj (G. -Tjs, f.), from adjectives in -os and -tav : as, 8Uaiosjust,
dinaioav'vq justice ; aucppuv discreet, crueppoavpn discretion.
d.) -os (G. -cos, n.), chiefly from adjectives in -vs : as, /3a0tfs deep,
.fiidos depth; edpds broad, edpos breadth; raxvs (b), rd^os speed.
e.) -as (G. -d8os, f.), from numerals : as, 5i5o two, dvds duad ; rpids.
368. III. From Other Nouns. Nouns derived from
other nouns are chiefly,
1.) Patrials, and similar words denoting persons related to
some object. These end in,
a.) -tt]s (G. -tov, m.) and -ns (G. -tiSos, f. ; 235 a), with the preceding
vowel long in patrials {-\tt\s, -^tt]s, -4nft -icIttjs, -icott]s) and also in other
nouns in it^s, -ins : as, 2tf/3ct/ns Sybaris, ^v^apir-q^, a man of S., a Sy-
barite, Zvpapiris, a woman of S.; Aiyiv^rvs, Uiaarvs, ^irapTidrys, 2tKe-
Xiwttjs, a man of JEglna, &c. ; rb^ov bow, to^otvs archer, ro£6ris archeress.
b.) -cvs (G. -&>s, m.) and -Cs (G. -{80s, f.; 217 f) : as, Miyapa Megara,
Meyape)j$ Megarian man, Meyapis M. woman ; <pd.pp.aKov drug, <papp.aKeij$
dealer in drugs, sorcerer, <f>app.aids sorceress; Xttttos equus, iirirevs eques.
c A patrial noun (patria, native land) denotes a person belonging
to a particular country ; a gentile noun (gens, nation), one belonging
to a particular nation. Adjectives have like distinctions.
220 DERIVATION. NOUNS. § 369.
369. 2.) Patronymics (so called from containing the fa-
ther's or an ancestor's name, irarpbs ovofxa). These end in,
a.) -8t]s (G. -8ov, m.) and -s (G. -80s, f), preceded by -&- if from
names in -10s or of Dec. 1, but otherwise by -t- (-18ns uniting with a pre-
ceding € or o) : as, Boptds Boreas, Bopeddr/s son of B., Bopeas daughter of
B.; Qicrrios, QecrTiadrjs, Gecrrtds ' IlpLauos, UpLa/Judrjs, Upiapis ■ K^Kpoxp,
KeKpoiriSyjs, KeKpowls ' HyXeijs, -^ws, llrjXeidrjs Pelldes ; 'H/oa/cXeiSris (19 b) ;
At?tc6, -jos, ArjToidTjs. The Ep. often uses the form in -idSrjs after a long
syllable, for the sake of the metre : ^TjprjTidSris, B. 763 ; n^X^i'dS^s, A. 1.
b.) -lav (G. -twos, rarely -Covos, m.) and -iwvt] or -Ivtj (G. -tjs, f),
only poetic : as, Kpovos Saturn, Kpoviwv, ^ilovos or iovos, son of S., A. 397;
Hr/Xetis, HyXetuv, v. 1. -eluv, A. 188 ; 'A/cpiVios, 'AKpiotcvvw, daughter of A.,
S. 319 ; "A5pr]<TTos, 'Adprjariur) E. 412. The poets even blend the forms
a. and b. ; and use other freedoms : as, fr. Adpiros, AapTreridrjs, 0. 526.
370. 3.) Female Appellatives. These end in,
a.) -is (G. -180s), chiefly from masculines of Dec. 1, and from those in
-€vs : as, deo-rr 6x97s master, deairoTis mistress (also beairoiva, cf. b).
b.) -cuvtt (G. -t]s), chiefly from masculines in -tav : as, Xiw, -ovtos,
leo, lion, X^cuva lesena, lioness ; t£ktuj>, -ovos, artisan, " riicTaiva.
c.) -€ia (G. -€ias) : as, (iaaiXefc rex, king, fiaclXeia regina, queen.
d.) -<r<rtt (-tto, 169 a ; G. --qs), from several endings of Dec. 3 : as,
KiXi£, -t/cos, Cilician, Ki'X(i/cIa, 1 43 c)i<r<ra • dra£, -ktos, sovereign, dvaaaa.
e.) -a, -i], &c. : as, Bed goddess (cf. b) ; d5eX<pos brotJier, d5eX<fnf} sister.
See also 235, 365 c, 368, 369.
371. 4.) Diminutives (sometimes expressing affection, often
contempt). These end in,
a.) -iov (G. -Iov, n.), with a syllable often prefixed (-iSiov, -dptov,
-vXXiov, -v8piov, -ifyiov, &c.) ; (b) -£o-kos (G. -ov, m.), -£<no] (G. -t]s, f.) : as,
ttcus puer, child, Diminutives, iraidiov little child, 7rcu5i'o-/cos, irai5api<TK0S,
puerulus, puellus, puerciilus, young boy, little boy, ttcuSio-kt? puella, puel-
lula, young or little girl, iraiddpLov, iraidaptdiou, rraidapOXXiov, TraidKncdpiov •
*£l 2w/c/oares, 2> ZuicpaTldiop, Socrates ! dear Socky ! Ar. Nub. 222.
c.) -is (G. -£8os and -t8os, f.) : as, irlva% tabula, table, irwaicis, -idos,
tabella, tablet ; t>r)<ros isle, vr\ai%, -T5os, islet ; Kp-qvv fons, fountain, Kprpfa.
d.) -vSevs (G. -&>s, m. ; of the young of animals) : as, deros eagle, deri-
devs eaglet ; Xaytbs ho.re, Xayidefc ; also vios, v'uSevs grandson.
e.) -l\vr\, -dicvii, -oXos, -eXos, -&x\ t -iXos, -vXkls, -vXos, -vXtj, &c: as,
w6\is city, iroXix v V ' irtdos wine-jar, iriBdnvr) • kokkos kernel, kSkkoXos •
CKOirbs peak, o-kottcXos scopiilus ; vtyos nubes, cloud, veQiX-q nebula ; coi;-
rvs sailor, pavriXos nautilus (little sailor) ; duavBls finch, aKavdvXXls.
f. Some diminutives (especially in -iov) have lost their peculiar force :
thus, drip, commonly in prose Brjplov wild beast.
372. 5.) Augmentatives, words implying increase or large-
ness, either of number, size, or degree. These end in,
a.) -wv (G. -wvos,*m.). This ending may express either a place, an
animal, or a person, in which any thing exists in numbers, or in large
size or degree : as, d/j-ireXos vine, dprreXdjv vinetum, vineyard, Itriruv (iwiros)
horse-stable, yvdBosjaw, yvdBuv glutton. Cf. Lat. Naso, -onis, Big-nose.^
b.) -a£ (G. -&kos, m.), applied, like the preceding, to persons and ani-
mals, but harsher in its expression : as, irXovros wealth, vXotJTai; a rich
churl. So Xdppos greedy, Xdppa£ sea-wolf. Cf. Lat. adj. loauax, rapax.
§ 375. ADJECTIVES. 221
B. Adjectives.
373. Adjectives derived from verbs express, in general, relations
(active or passive in their character) to the actions or states denoted by the
verbs ; and those derived from nouns express relations to the persons or
tilings denoted by the nouns. But, from their very nature, relations are
distinguished with less precision than things or actions ; and, to some ex-
tent, the offices stated below blend with each other.
374. I. From Verbs. These end in,
a.) -ucos, -r\, -ov, active : as, apxw to rule, dpx-tfcbs able to rule ; ypd<pw
to describe, ypcupiubs descriptive, graphic. This ending is more frequently
preceded by t (cf. 365 a, b) : as, iroirp-iKos (woita) poetic. See 375 b.
b.) -T^ptos, -d, -ov, active (<Wjp + ios, 365 b, 375 a) : as, ado fa to save,
awr-qp, awT-tipLos saving, preservative. Cf. Lat. ora-tor-ius.
c.) -1(109, -ov (or -t), -ov), implying fitness, both active and passive, and
annexed after the analogy of different verbal nouns : as, rpitpw, Tpo^-fj
(363 b), rp6(f>-ip.os fitted to impart or to receive nourishment, nutritious, vig-
orous; xpr\<jip.o<i (xpd.op.ai, x/>%"s) fit for use.
d.) -uwv, -pov (G. -povos), active : as, iXetw to pity, iXe-^-fiwv compas-
sionate ; p.vqp.uv (pLt?p,v7]p.ai) mindful ; voi)p.wv (votia) thoughtful.
e.) -tos, -4\, -ov, passive, signifying that which is done, either as a mat-
ter of fact (like the Lat. Part, in -tus or -sus), or more commonly as a
matter of habit or possibility : as, opdco to see, opd-rbs visus, seen, visibi-
lis, visible ; <pCkt\rbs amatus, amabilis. See 269 d, 272 c.
f.) -t&>s, -a, -ov, passive (269 d), expressing necessity or obligation (like
the Lat. Part, in -ndus) : as, iroitu to make, ttolv-t^cs faciendus, tliat is to
be made. Often in neut. as impers. : ypairrtov scribendum.
g.) -v6s, -4\, -ov, passive (compare the Part, in -pevos) : as, <r^Sw to
revere, (ae^-vbs, 148 c) o-ep.vos revered, irodeivbs (iroBtoj) longed for.
h.) -pos (-a, -ov), -as (G. -<£8os), -6s, &c. : as, x a ^dw to slacken, x a ^ a ~
p6s slack ; fapw to bear, <f>opds fruitful ; \£yw to choose, Xoyds chosen.
375. II. From Nouns. These have the following end-
ings, with, in general, the significations that are annexed :
a.) -ios, pertaining to ; if a vowel precedes, commonly uniting with it
in a diphthong (-aios, -€ios, -oios, -«os, -vios), and often, without respect
to this, assuming the form -€ios (Ion. -4\'ios, 132), especially from names
of persons and animals (iv. 5. 31). Many patrials (properly adjectives,
but often used substantively) belong to this class. Thus, obpavbs heaven,
ovpdv-Los ccelestis, pertaining to heaven, heavenly ; 'AOyvctios ('Adrian) Athen-
ian ; Mos (de-bs) divine, 'Apyeios Argivus ; 'O^petos ("Op-Tjpos) Homeric.
b.) "ikos, -i\, -ov (commonly -kos or -okcs after i or v, while -aios often
makes -clI'kSs), relating to. These adjectives in -kos are often formed from
words that are themselves derivative. They apply to things rather than
to persons. When used of the latter, they commonly signify related to in
quality, or fit for, and are mostly derived from personal appellations.
Thus, rexvrj art, rexv-mbs relating to art, artistic, iro\ep.iKbs (irbXep-os) bel-
licus, military ; veavi-ubs (vefivias) youthful, Alftvs Libyan, Ai(3vk6s per-
taining to tlie Libyans ; 'Axaios Achozan, 'Axdl'Kos. See 374 a.
c.) -«os, -d, -ov, and -ivos, -r\, -ov (proparoxytone), denoting material,
-en : as, %pi7<r js gold, x/w<r-eos aur-eus, golden ; ^v\-ivos (%6Xov) wooden.
d.) -Tv<Js, seldom -ivos, expressing time ox prevalence: as, rjp-ivbs (9jp)
vernus, vernal, iredivbs (iriSov) level, bpewbs (opos, -e-os) mountainous.
e.) -ivos, -T]v6s, -dvos, patrials, from names of cities and countries out
222 DERIVATION. PRONOUNS. §375.
of Greece : as, TapavT-wos (Tdpas, -euros) Tarenline, KvfiKrjvbs (K6fr>cos)
Cyzicerie, ~Zap8idu6s (SctoScis) Sardian. Cf. Lat. Latlnus, Romdnus, &c.
f. ) -pds, -epos, -Tjpos, -ctXt'os, -y\\6s f -wX<$$, -eis (-€<ro-a, -ev, G. -cvtos),
-w8t]s (-€S, G. -eos, contr., as most think, fr. -o-eiS-rjs, fr. ddos form), &c,
expressing fulness, quality, &c. : as, ai<rxP 0S (alaxos) shameful, (pofiepbs
((pjj3os) fearful, irovrjpbs (irbvos) painful, dapaaXtos (ddpaos) courageous.
376. III. From Adjectives and Adverbs, a. From some
adjectives and adverbs, derivatives are formed in the same man-
ner as from nouns : thus, KaSapos clean, naOapios cleanly ; ekev-
OepLos (eXevdepos liber) liberalis, liberal; OrjXvtcos (6r)\vs), feminine.
b. The adjective has in Greek, as in other languages, two
strengthened forms, of which one may be termed dual, apply-
ing to an object as one of two, and the other plural, applying
to an object as one of a number (commonly more than two).
The most obvious examples of these strengthened forms are
the comparative and superlative degrees, commonly so called.
c. Other examples of the comparative or dual strengthened form are,
(1) the correlatives irbrepos; whether of the two ? irorepos, Zrepos (formed
from the 3d Pers. pron. as the positive, or, as some think, from the
numeral els) one of the two, ovStrepos, birbrepos, ixdrepos, dpeporepos (see 58,
and compare the Lat. uter, neuter, alter, and the Eng. whether, either,
neither, other) ; (2) the following, implying a consideration of two objects or
relations : 5e|tre/a6s (poet.) dexter, right (rather than left), dpto-repbs sinister,
left, devrepos second, i]p.eTepos noster, our (rather than yours), vp-irepos
vester, your (and, extending the analogy, a^repos tlieir).
d. Other examples of the superlative or plural strengthened form are,
(1) the correlatives irbaros; which in order? or, one ofJwwmany? birbaros,
ftmffTOt (58) ; (2) all ordinals except Seisrepos; see 240. 2, 264.
C. Pronouns.
377. For the formation of the most common pronouns, see
244 s. The Greek abounds in correlative pronouns and ad-
verbs (53).
a. In respect to many of these, it will he ohserved that, when they he-
gin with it-, they are indefinite, or interrogative (with a change of accent) ;
with t-, definite or demonstrative ; with the rough breathing, relative
definite ; and with oir-, relative indefinite : as, irbaos ; how much ? -roads
of a certain quantity, rbtros, togovtos, and Toabade (252 a), so much, oaos
as much, birbaos how much soever ; irbre ; when ? irore at some time, rbre
then, ore wlien, birbre whensoever.
D. Verbs.
378. I. From Nouns and Adjectives. Of these the chief
endings and prevailing significations are as follows :
a.) -€», -tv<a, and (mostly from nouns of Dec. 1) -do>, to be or do that
which is pointed out hy the primitive : as, <pl\os friend, (ptX-eca to be a
friend, love, /3acriXeiJw (/SacriXevs) regno, reign, riudw (Tip.rj) honor.
§ 380. VERBS. ADVERBS. 223
b.) -6<a (mostly from words of Dec. 2), -aCvw and -vvto (mostly from
adjectives), to make that which is pointed out by the primitive : as, SrjXos
evident, 5yX-6u to make evident, crjixaivw (<rr)p.a) signify, rjoif^w (i)8tis) sweeten.
c.) -i£a>, and (chiefly when formed from words which have aort] in the
last syllable, or when preceded by t, cf. 369 a, 375 b) -d£a> ; from names
of persons or animals, imitative (denoting the adoption of the manners,
language, opinions, party, &c.) ; from other words, used in various senses,
but mostly active : as, M^S-tfw (M?~5os) to imitate or favor the Medes, 'E\-
\rjvifa speak Greek, irXovrifa (7t\ovtos) make rich, dticdfa (8ikv) judge.
d.) -idco, rarely -d», expressing desire (Desideratives), or morbid state :
as, /xadrjTrjs disciple, [xadrjT-i&w to wish to become a disciple, Ar. Nub. 183.
e. -» with simply a strengthening of the penult, more frequently
active : as, KaOaoSs pure, KaOalpw to purify, ixakdaaui (pLaXanos) soften.
f. Other endings appear in kovioj (k6vis) to bedust, daupvio (Sdicpv) weep,
<peijfa (<peu) and oipubfy (olfioi) wail, ocKTeipu) (oiktos) pity, &c.
379. II. From Other Verbs. These are,
a.) Desideratives, formed in -<reUa, from the Fut.: as, yeXdw to laugh,
yeXaaeiw wish to laugh, rroXefirjaeiw (ttoX€/j.^u>) wish for war, Th. i. 33.
b.) Various prolonged forms in -£o>, -<tk«, -XAw, &c, sometimes frequen-
tative ox intensive, as, piirru} jacio, to throw, piirTafa jacto, throw to and fro,
(rrivw sigh, areifdfa sigh deeply, alreu) ask, alrlfa beg ; sometimes incep-
tive (350 a), as, yfidu to be of age, ypdaKw become of age ; sometimes causa-
tive, as, fieduu) to be intoxicated, p.edv<TKU) intoxicate ; sometimes diminutive,
as, ^airardu} cheat, i^airar^XXw (cf. 371) cheat a little, humbug, Ar. Eq.
1144 ; but often scarce differing in force from the primitive form (336 s).
E. Adverbs.
380. Most adverbs belong to the following classes :
I. Oblique Cases op Nouns and Adjectives, employed as
circumstantial adjuncts (see Syntax). With an adjective thus
employed, a noun is strictly to be supplied. Many of these
oblique cases have antique forms, and many belong to themes
that are not in use. Thus,
a. ) Accusatives : as, dwpedv as a gift, gratis, dic/ify at the moment,
X&pw in gratiam, for the sake of, Uktjv instar, like ; and the Neut. sing,
and pi. of adjectives, especially Comparatives and Superlatives (263).
b.) Genitives, (1) in -0«v (192), denoting the place whence; (2) in
-ov, denoting the place where : as, o5 [sc. rbirov or xw/koi/] in which place,
where, airrou there, bp.ov in the same place, ovda/xov nowhere ; (3) in -tjs :
as, aiipvrjs (and e£ai<pvris, 382 a ; so Lat. rcpente and derepente) of a sudden.
c. ) Datives, (1) in -ot, -o6t of Dec. 2 sing., and in -t)<ti(v, -ao-t(v, of
Dec. 1 pi., denoting the place where (in adverbs in -ot derived from pro-
nouns, this commonly passes into the idea of whitlier ; cf. the familiar use
oiwlierc, tliere, &c, in Eng. ) : as, 'Adrjurjai at Athens, UXaraiaai at Pla-
tozaz, 66pd(ri at tJie door ; (2) in -tj (-i\), -a (-a), -at of Dec. 1, and in -t of
Dec. 3, denoting way, place where, or time when : as, ravry [sc. 68ip\ in
this way, thus, [sc. x^PV] * w &*• place, here, iravraxv every way, every-
where, iretfj on foot, tSiq. privately, x a P- a ^ humi, on the ground, trdXat in
olden time, Zktjti by the will of, l<pi (is, 190) with might, A. 38, &yxt near.
d. For the old Dat. forms -ot, -081, -at, and -t]<ri (for which -don was
common after «, t, or p, 115 a), see 187, 191, 198. The adverbial Dat. is
224 DERIVATION. COMPOSITION. § 380.
usually written with i subsc, when it has the same form in common
Greek with a noun or adj. so written, and some carry the use of this
i still farther (109 a).
e. Some pronominal or kindred adverbs are strengthened by the inser-
tion of -ux- - as, dXXaxou and aWaxn elsewhere, iravraxn (c). See 58.
381. II. Derivatives signifying, (1.) Manner, in,
a. ) -»s, from adjectives. The adverb may be formed by changing v of
the Gen. pi. into s : as, <ro06s, G. pi. <xo^dv, wise, ao<f>Qs sapienter, wisely ;
tolXvs, raxtuv, swift, to-x^us swiftly.
b. ) -tj8ov or -8ov (perhaps kindred with &5os, form), chiefly from
nouns; -8tjv or -d8rjv, chiefly from verbs (those in -dSijv conforming to
366 d ; and -8a : as, tt\u^^5<Sj/ {irXLvdos) like bricks, Hdt. 2. 96, /SorpiTSoj'
(fioTpvs) in clusters, B. 89, Kp^8r\v or -5a (KpfarTw) secretly. These ap-
pear to be Ace. forms (cf. 380 a) : Sing. fern. -8t]v, neut. -Sov and pi. -Sou
c. -C or -€£, especially from imitative verbs (378 c ; -f« becoming -art),
and in compounds of d- privative, avros, and was ■ as, Mr/diari like tlie
Medes, 'EWrjvurri in the Greek language; ap.urOL (pucrdds) without pay,
avroxeipi (x e ^p) w ^ one's own hand, iravdrjficl (5i)p.os) with the whole
people. These appear to be Dat. forms (cf. 380 c).
d.) -£, mostly from palatal stems : as, dva-p.iyvvp.c (r. pay-, 351. 3) to
mix up, avapil- confusedly, pellmell, Trapa\\&£ {irap-aWdaTU}) alternately.
(2.) Time when, in -re (Dor. -*a, 168), or, for more specific
expression, in -Ua : as, aXXoY« (fiXXos) at another time, avrUa
(avros) at the very moment. See 58.
(3.) Place whither, in -<re (which appears to be a softened
form of -de , 382 a, or at least kindred with it) : as, irfdoo-e to the
ground, Eur. Bac. 137, = Tredovd* Soph. Tr. 786 ; Ueto-f thither.
382. III. Prepositional Forms and Phrases : as,
a. ) Prepositions with their Cases, (irpb Zpyov) irpoHpyov before the work,
to the purpose, irapaxpypa upon the a fair, immediately, (8i 8) 8c6 on ac-
count of which, wherefore, (h iroS&v 65£) epnrodwv in the way of the feet,
Bypafr (from GtjjSo? and -8e, an inseparable preposition denoting direction
towards, 137 d), poet. &r)pa<r8e <fr. 679, to Thebes, 'Afl^a^e to Athens.
b. Prepositions used without Cases, irp6s [sc. roimp] in addition to this,
besides, iEsch. Pr. 73 ; ev [sc. to&tois] meanwhile, Soph. O. T. 27.
c. Derivatives from Prepositions, &vw (dvd) up, Kdrto down, etcru, tfa
vpbera}, later irbppw porro ; h>8ov (381 b), ivrds intus, e/cr6? extra.
d. These adverbs in -«, with Comparatives and Superlatives in -rip<*
and -t&tcd, as well as ttui yet, diricoj behind, &c, have the Dat. form.
II. FORMATION OF COMPOUND WORDS.
383. In the union of two words to form a compound,
A.) The first word has commonly its stem-form with sim-
ply euphonic or imitative changes. These changes, besides
those which the general rules of orthoepy require, consist chiefly,
a. ) In the addition of a union-vowel (termed the composition-voiccl),
which, after a substantive or adjective, is commonly -o-, but sometimes
-i]-, -a-, -i-, -oi-, or -ai- ; and, after a verb, -o-, -e-, or -v- : as, p.vd-o-
§ 386. FIRST AND LAST WORDS. 225
ypd(pos (/j,Q$-o$, ypd<pco) fable-writer, Qavar-t]-^>bpo% death-bringing, iro8-iC-
vnrTTjp foot-bath, wvp-L-yei/rjs fire-born, 68-oi-iropos wayfarer, p.€<r-ai-ir6Xtos
half -gray ; Xenr-o-ra^ia (Xeiir-o}, rdfa) leaving one's post, dpx-£-X°P°s
(apx" w ) chorus-leading, Tepir-t.-K.tpavvos (t^ptt-oj) delighting in thunder.
b.) In the contraction of this vowel with an adjoining vowel : as, (ope-
i-fiaTr)s, fr. 6pos, -e-os, and fiaivw) dpei^drTjs mountaAn-ranging, (vd-o-ndpos,
fr. va-6s and Kopico, 120 i) eeunopos temple-siveeper, (ya-o-fierpia) yewp^erpia.
c. ) In the addition of or, commonly connected by a union-vowel either
to the succeeding or preceding word, and sometimes even to both : as,
irav-<r-dvep.os (7rat/-«, &i>€pt,os) wind-allaying, vav-crl-Tropos navigable, de-cxr-
exdpia impiety, Tap.-eai-xpus {r^fivca, 340. 3) flesh-cutting, A. 511.
d. ) In using a shorter form, sometimes, perhaps, suggested by the
theme, or another stem : as, alp.-o-pa(pr)s (atpa, -aros, /3a7rra>) blood-
bathed, ai-irdXos (aft;, aiyds) goat-herd. So, for tfpuavs half, the old short
stem ijpu- is commonly used : fytA-Mp half '-dead, ij/xt-ovos mule.
e. ) In conforming to the theme with respect to vowel-cliange, &c. : as,
Pov-k6\o5 (/3oGs, /3o-6s) ox-herd, vav-irrryds ship-wright, woXl-apxos.
f. ) It results from these changes or from direct adoption, that the first
word has sometimes the form of one of the cases : as, Nom. vacw-Qopos
bringing victory, dyopd-vop,os clerk of the market ; Gen. ve&s-oiKos ship-
house ; Dat. vvktl-ttSXos roaming by night, Eur. Ion 718. See 388 b.
384. If the first word is a particle, it is commonly un-
changed except by the general laws of euphony.
a. For crasis in trpb, see 126 7; for elision in prepositions, 127 s.
An<f>i, like irepi, often retains its vowel. In the other prepositions, the
elision is rarely omitted, except in the Ion., particularly in the Ep. be-
fore some words which begin with the digamma : as, diroYenreiv I. 309.
385. Some particles occur only in composition, and are
hence called inseparable. Of these the most important are,
a. ) d-, commonly denoting privation or negation, and then called a-
privative, as, &-irais without children, 5-<ro0os unwise ; but sometimes de-
noting union, likeness, or intensity (the result of concentration), and then
termed a- copulative, as, d-KbXovdos (/ciXevOos way) going the same way,
following, &-Ppop.os (Ppfyw) loud-shouting, d-re^s (reiva) strained;
while this prefix appears to be sometimes euphonic (356). 'A- privative
has commonly its full form dv- before a vowel, except where F or <r has
been lost ; and is akin to dvev without, to the Lat. in-, and to the Eng.
and Germ, un- : &v-oirXos (dvev SirXwv) in-ermis, un-armed, d-Ye'icwv A. 557
(Bek.), Att. &K<av, unwilling. 'A- copulative (also d-, as in d-7ras all to-
gether) appears to be akin to &p,a together.
b.) vi]-, akin to dv- privative (Lat. and Old Eng. ne) : as, vr)-iroivos
(iroivrj) un-avenged, (vw-avep:os) v-qvepios wind-less, calm.
c. ) 8v<r-, ill, mis-, un- : as, 86cr-<pr]p.os ill-omened, dva-rvx^a mis-
fortune, dv<r-8atpux)u un-happy, Afoirapis accursed Paris, Y. 39.
d.) The intensive dpi- (kindred with ape-, 261a), by precession Ipi-,
%a- and 8a-, all mostly poetic : as, dpi-8ai<pvs very tearful, iEsch. Per. 947,
epi-doviros loud-sounding, T. 50, £d-irXovros per-dives, very rich, Hdt.
386. B.) The form of the last word depends upon the
part of speech to which the compound belongs.
1. If the compound is a noun or adjective, it commonly
takes the most obvious form which is appropriate to the class
of words to which it belongs.
comp. gr. 10* o
226 composition. § 386.
a. Often the last word, if itself a noun or adjective, undergoes no
change : as, 6p.6-8ov\os con-servus, fellow-slave, p.aKpo-x^p longi-manus.
b. If the last element is a verb, the compound adjective or masculine
substantive ends commonly in,
1.) -os. This ending (which is far the most common) has both an
active and a passive sense, distinguished, for the most part, by the accent,
which, if the penult is short, the active compound commonly takes upon
the penult, but the passive upon the antepenult: as, \i6o-/36\os (\l6os,
jSaAAw) throwing stones, Th. 6. 69, Xi06-/3oXos stoned, Eur. Ph. 1063.
2.) -i]S (-es, G. -eos) : as, ev-irpeirr)s becoming, avT-dpicrjs sclf-sujjicing.
3.) -t]s or -as (G. -ov), and -T}p or -top, denoting the agent (365) : as,
vo/xo-d^Tvs legislator, 6pvido-d-f)pas bird-catcher, fnj\o^oT^p shepherd.
4.) -s : as, d-yvibs, -Grros [yvo-, 357. 1) unknown, d-5/j.ris, -t?tos untamed.
c. In compounds of this class, if the last word begins with a, c, or o,
followed by a single consonant, this vowel is commonly lengthened to r\
or » : as, crrpaTriybs (arpdros, &yca) general, 5va-rj\aTos (dver-, Aafeu) liard
for driving, dvcLw/xos (d-, ovopu, 11 4 d) nameless. The Att. uses the Dor.
a in some compounds of &yu : as, \oxdy6s captain, i. 7. 2.
387 ii. If the compound is a verb, it is important to ob-
serve that, with few exceptions, verbs are compounded directly
and without change with prepositions only ; and that, in other
cases, compound verbs have the form of derivatives from com-
pound nouns or adjectives existing or assumed.
a. Thus, Xa/i/faVw, to take, unites directly with the prep, dud up, to
form dva\ap.fidvw to take up ; but it cannot so unite with the noun Zpyov
work, and hence the idea to take work, contract, is expressed by epyo-
Xct/^w, derived from the compound verbal £pyo-\d(3os contractor. So the
verb compounded of 'iiriros horse, and rp£<pw to feed, is liriroTpo<p4u from
iinroTpb<pos horse-keeper. Sometimes the form of the verb happens not to
be changed in passing through the compound verbal : thus, from ottos
and iroitw, is formed <rtTO-iroi6s bread-maker, and from this again <rtro-
7roi€h) to make bread.
388. a. "Words formed by the direct union of others (as ipydXdpos,
iTnroTp6(pos, 387 a) are called direct compounds ; and derivatives from
these (as ipyoXa^iw, lirirorpo^eo}) are called indirect compounds (the term
compound extended beyond its strictest sense).
b. When the component words are joined without change except from
the general laws of orthoepy, the composition is termed loose (Gr. Trapddeats
putting side by side), as liable to separation ; but when they are joined
with further change, it is termed close (Gr. afodeo- is putting together), as
forming an inseparable word : thus, loose, or parathetic co7npounds, dva-
Xa/i/3a^w, Aida-Kopoi sons of Jupiter, 'EW^a-TrovTos sea of Helle, ' ' Aprft-cpCkos
dear to Mars ; close, or synthetic compounds, ipyo-\d/3os, clto-itoios.
c. Loose compounds are sometimes separated by other words, especially
particles. This figure is called Tmesis (rp.ijais netting). Thus, dirb \oi-
ybv dixvvai (= Xoiydv dirap.vvai), to ward off dearth, A. 67 ; £k U irrjdrjcras,
and leaping forth, Eur. Hec. 1172.
d. The loose connection of the preposition with its verb (as if a modi-
fying adverb) also explains 387 a, the intervention of prefixes (282), and
the position, permitted by the Epic, of the preposition after its verb : as,
6\eaas diro, for diro\e<ras, having lost, i. 534.
e. A compound is distinguished as double, triple, quadruple, &c, ac-
§390. VARIOUS DISTINCTIONS. LOOSE COMPOUNDS. 227
cording to the number of words of which it is composed : as, double,
vwoppsu to flow under; triple, vireKpeio flow from under ; quadruple,
vireK-rrpopea flow forth from under, f. 87. The extent to which the Greek
permitted composition was sportively illustrated by Aristophanes in a
seventy -eight- syllable compound, which follows, with Dr. Donaldson's
translation : \eTraSo-Tep.axo-o-e\axo-ya\eo-Kpavio-\ei\J/ai'o-8pt.p:-vTroTpip:p.aTO-
cCKcpio - wapao[v. 1. irpaao] -p,e\iro - Ka.TaKexvp.evo - kix^ - ^tt* - Koaavcpo - (parro-
Trepia-Tep-a\eKTpvov-oTrT-eyKe<pa\o-KiyK\o-ire\eio-\ayo}o-(npaLO-^a<p7)-Tpayayo-
irrepOy-uv, " a fricassee consisting of shellfish-saltfish-skate-shark-remain-
ders-of-heads-besprinkled-with-sharp-sauce-of-laserpitium-leek-and-honey-
thrushes-besides-blackbirds-pigeons-doves-roasted - cocks - brains - wagtails-
cushats-haresflesh-steeped-in-a-sauce-of-boiled-new-wine-with-the-cartilages-
and- wings," Eccl. 1169 s.
389. There is a loose form of composition, in which a
pronoun or particle is attached to a word with which it is
sometimes really and sometimes only apparently combined in
sense.
1. The orthography here varies, the words being sometimes written
together, especially if the last is an enclitic, and sometimes separately.
2. Among the chief words that are thus affixed to others are,
a. The indefinite pronoun tIs : as, 8<rris (or 8s tis) whoever, otiris
no one, elris if any one. Cf. Lat. quisquis, nequis, siquis.
The following particles : b. &v (Ep. k£ or Ke"v, Dor. K<i ), contingent
or indefinite : as, 8s a\v whoever, 8rav or 8t a\v, birbrav, eireiSdv (tirei 8q&v),
wlienever, whensoever, &c.
c. y( (Dor. 7a) at least, emphatic : as, £70776 (accent drawn back) I at
least, a6ye you surely, tovto ye this certainly, iirei ye since at least. See
247 h, and cf. Lat. egomet, tumet, equidem.
d. 8tfj now (shorter form of ijSv) : as, 8<ttls 8-fi whoever now, vvv 8-q just
now.
e. S^ttotc {8-fj irore) ever now : as, do-riaSriiroTe whosoever now t rl 8-q-
irore ; what in the world t
f. if surely, indeed: as, rirj (Att. rt-fj) or rl f\; why surely ? bri-fj be-
cause indeed, iirei-fi or &ret fj since indeed.
g. o$v (contr. fr. ibv, it being so ; see elpU, 50) then, therefore, yet, often
added to an indefinite pronoun or adverb to strengthen the expression of
indefiniteness : oo-tktovv whoever then, diruxrSr)TroTovv howsoever now then.
h. ir^p (shorter form of irepi) very, particularly, just : as, 8<rirep who in
particular, Sxxirep just as, oloa-rrep, 8rnrep, 8devirep. Cf. Lat. parumpcr.
i. irore at any time, ever, often added to interrogatives to strengthen
the expression : as, tL irori etrri tovto ; [what at any time is this ?] what
in tJie world is this ? or, what can this be ? Ep. Tlirre (sync. fr. tL irore).
j. t£, the simplest sign of connection, and hence often joined to other
connective words, before their use was established, to mark them as such.
In the Ep. and Ion. this is found to a great extent : and even with an
intervening particle, as 8s pd re 0. 411, rdirep re Hdt. 1. 74. In the
Att., it has remained in #re and (bare, as, otts re able, possible, and i(p'
#re on condition tliat.
3. With some of the forms above, compare the Lat. quicumque, quan-
documque, quisque, uterque, ublque, quisnam ? quisquam, utpote, &c.
390. For the mutual and external relations of the elements of com-
pound words, see 722 s.
OOK III.
YNIAX.
M6dovs iMpabeiv.
Homer.
391. Syntax, as the doctrine of sentences,
treats either of the offices and relations of words
as arranged in sentences, or of the offices and
relations of these sentences themselves.
392. The Greek is one of those languages whose syntax
exhibits the greatest freedom and variety.
CHAPTER I.
SYNTAX OF THE SUBSTANTIVE.
I. AGREEMENT OF THE SUBSTANTIVE.
393. Eule I. An Appositive agrees in case
with its subject. — Apposition may be
(a) Direct : Hapfoaris . . i] \L-t\rr\p, Parysatis, the mother, i. 1. 4.
(b) Predicate : Tot 5£ &d\a 9jaav trrXcyyCSes, and the prizes were flesh-
combs, i. 2. 10. T Hs atirbv o-aTpdirTjv iirolriae, of which he hud made him
satrap, i. 1. 2. "Ovo/xa avr£ ehai 'A-ydOwva PI. Prot. 315 e. (c) Modal :
Aafiuv Tca-<ra<pipwr}v us <j>{\ov, taking T. as a friend, i. 1. 2. (d) Parti-
tive : OCrot . . dXXos &\\a Xtyei, these say, one one thing, and another
another, ii. 1. 15. (e) Of generic and specific terms, especially of com-
mon and proper nouns : '0 MaiavSpos iroTafxbs, the river Mceander, i. 2. 7.
"Avdpes o-TpaTnorai, gentlemen soldiers, i. 3. 3. (f ) Of a noun and a pro-
noun : ' AXKi^iddrjs . . Kaxeivos i)^\t](Tev, A., he also neglected, Mem. 1. 2.
24. (g) Of a sentence and word (396), &c.
h. Appositives, more frequently, agree with their subjects in gender
and number, as well as in case : 'Enta^a, ij SvejWtrios yvvi\, rod KlXLkwv
PacriXe'ws, E. } tlie wife of S., the king of the Gilicians, i. 2. 12.
§397. SYNTAX. E. I. — APPOSITION. 229
394. a. Ellipsis. The appositive or the subject may he omitted,
when it can he supplied from the connection : Aikios 6 JloXvarpdrov [sc.
vlos], L., the son of P., iii. 3. 20. Q€pu<ttokXt]s 7?/cw irapd ae [sc. ^7^], I,
T., have come to thee, Th. 1. 137.
h. The sign of modal apposition (commonly ws, as) is often omitted :
Aupdipas, &$ elxov o-Keirao-fMiTa, tlie skins which tliey had as coverings, i. 5. 10.
c. Synesis. An appositive sometimes agrees with a subject which is
implied in another word : 'A&tjvcwos &v iroXews rrjs neylaT-qs, being an
Athenian, a city the greatest, PI. Apol. 29 d (here 7r6Xews agrees with 'A07J-
vQv, of Athens, implied in 'Adrjvcuos). 'AQLkovto ei's Korijwpa, ir6X.iv 'EX-
XrjviSa, liLvuirtuv diroLKOvs [referring to iroXlras, implied in irbXiv] v. 5. 3.
395. a. In partitive apposition, the statement of the parts is
not always complete ; and sometimes the appositive denotes that which is
closely related to the subject, rather than properly the same person or
thing, even in part. With a participle, it may take the place of the Gen.
absolute, in expressing some circumstance, as cause, manner, &c. Thus,
01 ^/nfiaxoi t<x 86o pipr] . . iatj3a\oi>, tlie allies, two thirds of them, in-
vaded, Th. 2. 47. EvcpXeKTa 8£ rd irp60vpa avr&v, </>oip7/cos fx-ev at Qvpai
Treiron)p.evcu, their portals are easily set on fire, the doors being made of tlie
palm-tree, Cyr. 7. 5. 22. '08vp/j.bs toXvs, 'Pa\^ Kkalovaa, Mat. 2. 18.
h. Hence by a poetic, especially Epic, construction, an appositive is
used to specify the part affected : BoOXei trbvov /xot rfj8e irpoadeivai \tpl ;
do you wish to impose labor on me, viz. on this hand 1 Eur. Heracl. 63.
"Zdfros ?/x^aX' eKdaTip xapSu], imparted strength [to each one, to the heart]
to the heart of each one, A. 11. 'Aya/x^uovL rjv8cwe 0vp.u> A. 24.
c. Some relations may be expressed either by an appositive or an ad-
junct ; and one of these constructions is sometimes used where the other
would seem more appropriate : Tofrrov rb e&pos Sjjo ir\#)pa, of this the
breadth is two plethra, i. 2. 5 ; but, ToO 8£ Mapatiov rb edpbs e<mv etmai
ml irtvre iroSwv, and the breadth of tlie M. is twenty -five feet, lb. 8. Ilora-
fibs . . eCpos 8vo tr\iQp<av lb. 23. A^/ca p.vai eiacftopd' but, Avow p-vatv irpb-
coSov, Vect. 3. UbXtv Tpo£T]v A. 129 ; but, Tpohjs lepbv irroXUdpov a. 2.
396. a. A word, in apposition with a sentence not used substantively,
is commonly in the Accusative, as expressing the effect of the action ; but
is sometimes in the Nominative, as if an inscription marking the character
of the sentence : 'Pi^et . . dirb trvpyov, Xvypbv oXeGpov, will hurl thee from
a tower, a sad fate, O. 735. 'Zt^tj fiiaiveTai, irbXei t 6vei8os ml de&v dri-
pia, our garlands are profaned, a dishonor to tlie city, and an insult to the
gods, Eur. Heracl. 72. 'EX^j/t/v KTav<a(A€i>, MeviXetp \virx\v irucpdv Id. Or.
b. This use of the Nom. and Ace. may be often explained by attraction
to the subject or object of the verb. Cf. 395 a.
c. Anacoluthon. Apposition is sometimes prevented by a change of
construction : as, M-qrpi r , 'Eptpoiav Xeyu, to my mother, Eribcea I mean
(for M.T]TpL r 'E/3i/3oi'p, to my mother E.), Soph. Aj. 569. See also 402.
II. USE OF THE CASES.
397. Cases serve to distinguish the relations
of substantives. These relations are regarded, in
Greek, (i.) as either direct or indirect, and (n.)
as either subjective, objective, or residual.
230 SYNTAX. R. II., III. USE OF THE CASES. §397.
I. Of these distinctions, the first is chiefly founded upon the
directness with which the substantive is related to the verb of
the sentence. The principal direct relations are those of
the subject and direct object of the verb, and that of direct ad-
dress. Other relations are, for the most part, regarded as
INDIRECT.
ii. The second distinction is founded upon the kind or char-
acter of the relation. The relation is,
1. Subjective, when the substantive denotes the source, or
subject, of motion, action, or influence ; or, in other words,
THAT FROM WHICH ANY THING COMES.
2. Objective, when the substantive denotes the end, or ob-
ject, of motion, action, or influence ; or, in other words, that
TO WHICH ANY THING GOES.
3. Residual (residuus, remaining), when it is not referred
to either of the two preceding classes.
398. a. The latter of the two distinctions appears to have had
its origin in the relations of place, which relations are both the ear-
liest understood, and, through life, the most familiar to the mind.
These relations are of two kinds; those of motion, and those of rest.
b. Motion may be considered with respect either to its source or
its end ; and both of these may be regarded either as direct or in-
direct. We may regard as the direct source of motion, that which
produces the motion, or, in other words, that which moves; as
the indirect source, that from which the motion proceeds ; as the
direct end, that which receives the motion, or that to or into which
the motion immediately goes ; and as the indirect end, that towards
which the motion tends.
c. By a natural analogy, the relations of action and influence in
general, whether subjective or objective, may be referred to the rela-
tions of motion ; while the relations which remain without being
thus referred may be classed together as relations of rest. These
residual relations, or relations of rest, may likewise be divided, ac-
cording to their office in the sentence (397), into the direct and the
indirect.
d. We have, thus, six kinds of relation, each of which, with a sin-
gle exception, is represented in Greek by an appropriate case, denot-
ing in general as follows :
i. Direct Relations.
1. Subjective. The Nominative. That which acts.
2. Objective. The Accusative. That which is acted upon.
3. Residual. The Vocative. That which is addressed.
n. Indirect Relations.
1. Subjective. The Genitive. That from ichich any thing proceeds.
2. Objective. The Dative. That towards which any thing tends,
3. Residual. The Dative. That with which any thing is associated.
§ 401. NOMINATIVE. 231
399. a. For the historical development of the Greek cases, see
186 s. From the primitive indirect case (which remained as the Dat.), a
special form was separated to express the subjective relations, hut none to
express the objective. The primitive form, therefore, continued to express
the objective relations, as well as all those relations which, from any cause,
were not referred to either of these two classes ; and hence the Dat. is
both an objective and a residual case.
b. In the Latin case-system, which so closely resembles the Greek,
there is a partial separation of the indirect objective and residual, or, as
they are termed in Lat., Dative and Ablative cases.
c. A more important difference between the two languages appears in
the extensive use of the Lat. Ablative. The Romans were more con-
trolled than the Greeks by the power of habit, while they were less ob-
servant of the minuter shades of thought, and niceties of relation. Hence,
even after the full development of the Lat. case-system, the primitive in-
direct case continued to retain, as it were by the mere force of possession,
many of the subjective relations.
d. As most verbs express action, and the Active is the leading voice,
the use of the Nominative as the subject of a finite verb became so
established, that it extended to verbs of state as well as of action, and to
the Passive no less than the Active voice.
e. The Nominative, from its high office as denoting the subject of
discourse, became the leading case, and was regarded as the representative
of the word in all its forms (its theme, 172 e). Hence it was employed
when the word was spoken of as a word, or was used witltout grammatical
construction (401).
f. There are no dividing lines either between direct and indirect, or
between subjective, objective, and residual relations. Some relations seem
to fall with equal propriety under two, or even three heads, according to
the view which the mind takes of them. Hence the use of the cases not
only varies in different languages, and in different dialects of the same
language, but even in the same dialect, and in the compositions of the
same author.
g. A case may sustain the same relation to more than one word in the
sentence : as, Kpt'a tyomes ijadtov, tJiey boiled and ate jlesh, ii. 1. 6.
A. The Nominative.
400. Rule II. The Subject of a finite verb
is put in the Nominative : as,
'E7ret57/ 8k eTeXeiT-qae Aapetos, Kal KaT^arrj els rnr\v pacriXeiav 'Apra^p^s,
Tt<ro-a<f>£pvT]S 5ta/3dX\ei tov KOpov, and when now Darius was dead, and
Artaxerxes was established in the royal authority, Tissaphernes accuses
Cyrus, i. 1. 3.
401. Eule III. Substantives independent
of grammatical construction are put in the
Nominative.
Note. The Nom. thus employed is termed the Nominative indepen-
dent or absolute (absolutus, released, free, sc. from grammatical fetters).
To this rule may be referred the use of the Nominative,
232 SYNTAX. R. A., IV. GENITIVE. §401.
a.) In the inscription of names, titles, and divisions : as, Ku-
pov 'AvdPao-is Cyri Expeditio, The Exjyedition of Cyrus;
B t /3 X L o v Tlparop Liber Primus, Book First.
b. In exclamations : as, dXarra, Q d\ arret, the Sea !
the Sea ! iv. 7. 24. *Q dva-rdXatv' eyd>, wretched me ! Eur.
e.) In address. — The appropriate case of address is the
Voc. (186 g). But there is often no distinct form for this
case, and even when there is, the Nom. is sometimes employed
in its stead (182). #
1. The Nom. is particularly used, when the address is exclamatory or
descriptive, or when the compilative is the same with the subject of the
sentence : 'Iinrias 6 naXbs re nal <ro<p6s, Hippias, the noble and, the wise /
PI. Hipp. Maj. 281 a. Xaipe, 6 pao-iXcvs Mat. 27. 29.
2. To the head of descriptive address belong those authoritative, con-
temptuous, and familiar forms, in which the person who is addressed is
described or designated as if he were a third person (and in which odros is
often used) : Ot 8e olicerai, . . iirideaOe, but the servants, do you put, PI.
Conv. 218 b. 'O ^aX-rjpevs . . odros 'AiroXX<$8»pos, ov irepifievels ; T/w Pha-
lerian tJiere, Apollodorus, stop ! won't you ? lb. 172 a.
3. In forms of address which are both direct, and likewise descriptive
or exclamatory, the Voc. and Nom. may be associated : Ilpofjeve teal ol
dXXoi ol irapovres "EXXtjvcs, Proxenus and the other Greeks present, i. 5.
16. Kvpie, mbs Aafild Mat. 20. 30. "ft <p£Xos, & <piXe Bdicxic Eur. Cycl.
402. Anacoluthon, &c. From the office of the Nom. in
denoting the subject of discourse, and from its independent
use, it is sometimes employed where the construction would
demand a different case : as,
a.) In the introduction of a sentence : 'Yjuis 8t, . . vvv 8t) Kaupbs vjjliv
8oKet etvat ; You tlien, . . does it now seem to you to be just the time ? vii.
6. 37. 'ETridvfxQv 6 Kvpos . ., 28o%ev avr<p, Cyrus desiring, . . it seemed
best to him, Cyr. Ma>v<ri]s oSros, . . ovk otda/nev rl ytyovev avTa> Acts 7. 40.
b.) In specification, repetition, or description : "AXXovs 5' 6 ptyas . .
NeiXos tirefiipcv 2ov<rwrKdvT]s, ITr]"yao-TaYwv, k. t. X., and others the vast
Nile hath sent; Susiskdnes, P., &c., iEseh. Per. 33. Qvydrvp p.eyaXrj-
To/3os 'Hertwvos, 'Herfov, 5s facte* Z. 395. Ta irepl UijXov xjit ap<pOT€p<ov
Kara Kpdros iiroXep-eLTO- 'AOtjvatoi fjth . . TrepiirXiopres Th. 4. 23.
c.) In speaking of names or words as such : Upo&eLXnfe tt)v tG>v ttovt]-
pCbv Koiurjv €Tru)vvp.iav <ruKo<j>dvr»]s, he has obtained the common appellation
of the vile, "sycophant," ^Eschin. 41. 15.
B. The Genitive.
403. That feom which any thing proceeds
(398 d) may be resolved into (i.) That from ivliich
any thing proceeds, as its point of departure ; and
(n.) That from which any thing proceeds, as its cause.
§ 405. OP DEPARTURE. OF SEPARATION. 233
Hence the Greek Genitive is either (i.) the Geni-
tive of Departure, or (n.) the Genitive of
Cause ; and we have the following general rule
for subjective adjuncts (397) :
Rule A. The Point of Departure and the
Cause are put in the Genitive.
a. The Genitive of departure is commonly expressed in English by
the preposition from ; and the Genitive of cause, by the preposition of
b. Hence the rule may take this general form :
The Genitive is used to express that of or
from which something is or is done.
c. The relations here denoted are, however, sometimes translated by
other prepositions, and sometimes without a preposition.
i. Genitive of Departure.
404. Departure may be either in place, in time, or in
character. Hence,
Eule IV. Words of separation and distinc-
tion govern the Genitive.
(1.) Genitive of Separation.
405. a. Words of separation include those of removal and
distance, of exclusion and restraint, of cessation and failure, of
abstinence and release, of deliverance and escape, of protection and
&c. : as,
Xo>p^€<r8at aKkrjkwv, to be separated from each other, PL Conv. 192 c.
Xwpls tQu &X\(ou, apart from the rest, i. 4. 13. "Libfiaros 8C\a Cyr. 8. 7.
20. AUo-yov dXXijXaw, were distant from each other, i. 10. 4. iioppco . .
avroO, far from him, i. 3. 12. Ei daX&TTrjs cfyj-yoivro, if they should be ex-
cluded from the sea, Hel. 7. 1. 8. KcoXvcreie too Kaieiv, he would prevent
them from burning, i. 6. 2. Tou irpbs £p.t iro\£p.ov irat><rcur0cu, to cease
from the war against me, i. 6. 6. OSros pk* aorov fjpaprev, this man
missed him, i. 5. 12. 2c5<rat kcucov, to save from evil, Soph. Ph. 919.
b. Words of sparing imply refraining from, and those of conceding,
resigning, remitting, and surrendering, imply parting with, or re-
tiring from. Hence, tQv pjtv vfier^pwv ijdv /xot (peiSecrBcu, it is my pleasure
to spare your property, Cyr. 3. 2. 28. Kd/cetpos vTr€Xd>pi\a-ev avr^rov dpb-
vov, and he [Sophocles] conceded to him [iEschylus] the throne, Ar.
c. The Gen. denoting that from which motion proceeds is, in prose,
commonly joined to words not in themselves expressing separation by a prep-
osition ; but in poetry, often without a preposition (ef. 450 b) : \bp,uv . .
<pepov<rav, bringing from the liouse, Soph. El. 324. Tofode iraiSas 777s
IXav, to drive these children from the land, Eur. Med. 70. Bddpwv tfa-rao-06,
rise from your seats, Soph. 0. T. 142. (d) So that from which action begins :
H Tp,vrj<rav Aibs apxfyepcu, they sang beginning from Jove, Pind. N. 5. 48,
234 SYNTAX. R. V., VI., VII., VIII. GENITIVE. § 405.
e. In a few rare phrases, the Gen. without a preposition denotes that
from which time is computed (forward or back) : Mer dXiyov 5£ tovtwv,
and [after a little from these things] a little after these things, Hel. 1. 1. 2.
(2.) Genitive of Distinction.
406. a. Words of distinction include those of difference
and exception, of superiority and inferiority, &c. : as,
Aiwpiorcu t^x^s, is distinct from the art, PI. Polit. 260 c. 'RXtKTpov
ovdtv Si&pcpcv, differed in nothing from amber, ii. 3. 15. Uaaai irX^v Mt-
\-frrov, all except Miletus, i. J. 6. Auupopov r&v AXXwv irdXewv, superior
to the other states, Mem. 4. 4. 15. UXovtov aperr) 8U<tttjkcv PI.
b. AeCirojuu, to be left behind [from or by, 405, 434 b], to come short of,
governs the Gen. in these, and various derived or kindred senses : IlX^et
. . ^(iwv Xeupdtvres, [left behind us] inferior to us in number, vii. 7. 31.
407. Words of superiority include,
1.) Words of authority, power, precedence, and pre-eminence :
'Avepdiruv &px»v, to rule men, Cyr. 1. 1. 3. 'E-yKparsts . . wdtn-uv,
sovereign over all, v. 4. 15. 'Hycito tov <TT/)areiJ/xoTos, led the army, iv.
1. 6. Ilpeo-pcvciv twv iroXXQv irdXeuv, to take rank of most cities, PI. Leg.
408. 2.) Adjectives and adverbs in the comparative degree
(as denoting the possession of a property in a higher degree),
and words derived from them.
Kule V. The Comparative Degree governs
the Genitive : as,
KpcCrrovi iavrov, more powerful than himself, i. 2. 26. TQv tirwav
trpexov Barrov, they ran faster than the horses, i. 5. 2. 'Euov vorcpov,
[later than] after me, i. 5. 16. 'Yor^pTjo-e rijs Mx 9 ? 5 * came after the battle.
a. So the other degrees,* if used in the sense of the Comparative : 2«o
. . p.aKdpTaTos, more completely happy than you, X. 482.
409. 3.) Multiple and proportional words (240) : as,
IIoWairXcuKovs v/xQv airruv, many times your own number, iii. 2. 14.
n. Genitive of Cause.
410. To the head of Cause may be referred,
(A) That from which any thing is derived, made,
supplied, or taken ; (B) That which exerts an
influence, as an excitement, occasion, or con-
dition ; ( O) That which produces any thing, as
its active or efficient cause ; and (D) That
which constitutes any thing what it is.
411. A. That from which any thing is de-
rived, made, supplied, or taken. To this divis-
§ 414. OF ORIGIN AND MATERIAL. OP SUPPLY. 235
ion belong, (J) the Genitive of Origin, (2) the Geni-
tive of Material, (3) the Genitive of Supply, and (4)
the Genitive of the Whole, or the Genitive Partitive.
1 and 2. Genitive of Origin and of Material.
412. Rule VI. The origin, source, and
material are put in the Genitive : as,
Aapeiov koI IlapvoraTiSos ytyvovrai irdiSes duo, of D. and P. are born
two children, i. 1. 1. Tov 5' t<pw, from him I sprang, Eur. Iph. T. 4.
T£ diroXadaais hv ttjs apx'qs ; what advantage should you derive from your
authority ? Cyr. 7. 5. 56. #oCv!kos fikv al dtipcu ireiroir)fxfrcu, tlte doors
being made of the palm-tree, lb. 22. Olvos <J>oiviko>v ii. 3. 14 (cf. i. 5. 10).
a. The Gen. of source or material occurs, especially in the Epic poets,
for other forms of construction, particularly the instrumental Dat. : as,
Uprjaat 8£ irvpbs drjtoio OOperpa, burn the gates with raging fire [from fire,
as the source], B. 415. Xelpas ntf/dpepas iroXirjs aXds, liaving waslved his
hands [with water from] in the foaming sea, /3. 261.
413. That of which one discourses or thinks may be regarded as the
material of his discourse or thoughts ; thus we speak of the matter of dis-
course, a matter of complaint, the subject-matter of a composition, &c.
Hence, not unfrequently, both in immediate dependence upon another
word, and even in the introduction of a sentence,
Rule VII. The theme of discourse or op
thought is put in the Genitive : as,
ToD to£<$tov ox) Ka\u>s ?x et X£y«", Sri, k. t. \., it is not well to say of
tlie bowman, that, d-c, PI. Pep. 439 b. Aiadeuj/meuos avr»v, 8o-rjv fib xw-
pav . . £x ote "> observing in respect to tlicm, how great a country tJiey Imve,
iii. 1. 19. Ttjs 5£ yuvaiKos, ei . . nanoiroiti, but in respect to tlie wife, if
she manages ill, 02c. 3. 11. K\i/a»> <rov, hearing of thee, Soph. 0. C. 307.
414. 3. Genitive of Supply.
Supply may be either abundant or defective. Hence,
Rule VIII. Words of plenty and want gov-
ern the Genitive : as,
a. Of Plenty. Qrjpiwv irki\pt\s, full of beasts, i. 2. 7. M«rral <tItov,
full of corn, i. 4. 19. Aupdepas . . eirfp/irXacrav x°P™v, tJiey filled tlie
skins with hay, i. 5. 10. Tovtwv &Xis, enough of these things, v. 7. 12.
b. Of Want. 'AvOputruv airopwv, wanting in men, i. 7. 3. 2<pev8o-
vryr&v . . 8ei, there is need of slingers, iii. 3. 16. OiW &v iXiridcov ifiavrdv
o-rep-qo-aifii, of what hopes I should deprive myself, ii. 5. 10. Mias hiov-
<rai Teo-o-ap&Kovra, 40 less 1 (§ 242 c). $>L\w 2pTip.os, devoid of friends.
c. The Gen. which belongs to 8eop.ai and xPTlt** as verbs of want may
be^retained by them in the derived senses, to desire, to request, to entreat :
OiStivos olv dfyade, whatever you may desire, i. 4. 15. AikcUcdv Seiadai,
to request what is reasonable, Cyr. 8. 3. 20. MaKpov XPVfa 1 ' P^° v i to desire
long life, Soph. Aj. 473.
236 SYNTAX. E. IX. GENITIVE PARTITIVE. § 415.
4. Genitive Partitive.
415. Eule IX. The whole of which a paet
is taken is put in the Genitive : as,
"Hp,i<ru rod 8\ov <TTpQT€up.aTos, half of tlie whole army, vi. 2. 10.
416. The partitive construction may be employed,
a.) To express quantity, degree, condition, place, time, &c,
considered as a limitation of a general idea, or as a part of an
extended whole (especially with a neuter adjective or an ad-
verb) :
MiKpbv 5' {jttvov \ax&v, obtaining a little [of] sleep, iii. 1. 11. 'Ev rot-
otircp . . rod Kivdvvov irpoaiovros, in such imminent danger [in such a degree
of], i. 7. 5. 'O 5' els Tovd' vfipews iX-^Xvdev, 'to such a pitch of insolence,'
Dem. 51. 1. "HV ntcrou we" pas, it was midday, i. 8. 8. See 420 a, b.
b.) In presenting the whole as the sum of all the parts ; in
denoting the whole and a part ; and in denying of all the parts :
'Ev rots dyadoivi 5e irdvr fveariv <ro<pLas, in the good dwell all the quali~
ties of wisdom, Eur. Ale. 601. 'HfuoXiov . . o5' irporepov Zcpepov, half
[and the whole of what] as much again as they before received, i. 3. 21.
Tofrruv . . ovScva olda, I know none of tlicse, Cyr. 7. 5. 45.
417. a. The whole is sometimes put in the case which belongs to
the part, the part agreeing with the whole instead of governing it ; chiefly
when different parts are successively mentioned (cf. 393 d, 395 a) : 'Akov-
op.ev vjias . . eviovs <tkt)vovv ev reus oldais, we hear tliat you, some of you,
quarter in tlie houses [for vp.Qp ivlovs], v. 5. 11. ALdvpa TtKea irbrepos &pa
irbrepov alp.d£ei; 'which of the two V Eur. Ph. 1289.
b. It is often at the option of the writer whether he will employ the
Gen. partitive or a simpler form of construction ; and one form is some-
times found, where the other would rather have been expected. The two
forms are sometimes combined : Efr odv Qeb$, efoe ppoTtov fy, whether lie
was a god, or one of mortals, Soph. El. 199.
418. According to Rule IX., a word referring to a part,
whether substantive, adjective, adverb, or verb, may take with it
a Gen. denoting the whole. Thus,
I. Substantives : T6 rplrov fu'pos rod . . Ittttlkov, tlie third part of the
cavalry, Cyr. T&r ireXraffTCov ns aWjp, a certain man of the targeteers.
a. When place is designated by mentioning both the country and the
town, the former, as the whole, may be put in the Gen., and may precede
the latter : 01 'Adrjvcuoi earpdrevaav rijs Qt<rtraXias inl 3?dp<rdXov, the A.
marched to Pharsalus [of] in Thessaly, Th. 1. 111. 'A0kero t^s'Attiktjs
^s Oivdrfv irpGrrov, came upon Attica first at (Enoe, Th. 2. 18.
b. The Gen., in all cases in which it is strictly partitive, maybe re-
garded as properly depending upon a substantive denoting the part ; and
therefore the use of this Gen. in connection with adjectives, verbs, and
adverbs, may be referred to ellipsis or synesis : TloXlpov, ical fidxvs ov p.e-
T-rjv [sc. p.e"pos~\ avrrj (421 a ; cf. dyadov tlvSs p-eriffrai . . p-tpos Cyr. 2. 3. 6).
Trjs ye oti8ap.ov, i. e. ev ovdevl p.e"peL tt)s yjjs (420 a).
c. If the substantive denoting the part is expressed, and that denoting
the whole is a form of the same word, the latter is commonly omitted :
Tpete dpdpes tQv yepair^puv [sc. avdpwv], three men of the more aged, v. 7.
§ 423. WITH SUBSTANTIVES, ADJECTIVES, ADVERBS, VERBS. 237
419. II. Adjectives, a. The Article, and Adjective Pronouns:
Toiis fJ-ev a&T&v airtKTeive, tovs 5' i&fiaXev, slew some of them, and banished
others, i. 1. 7. Tu>i> AWcav 'EXX^wv rive's, some of the other Greeks, i. 7.
b. Adjectives of Number : Els rdv o-Tpar-qyCbv, one of the generals, vii.
2. 29. "H./J.QV 5' ov8efe, none of us (416 b), iii. 1. 16.
c Superlatives, and words derived from them (by virtue of the includ-
ed adjective, cf. 408) ; and the otJier degrees when kindred in force : 'Ev
rots dpio-Tois Ilepo-Qit, among tlie best of the Persians, i. 6. 1. TQu . . dv-
Opu-Kuv dpto-T€v<ravT€s [= dpiaroi yevopievoi], being the best of the men, Mem.
3. 5. 10. *0 <p£Xa ywautuv, [beloved of] dearest of women, Eur. Ale. 460.
d. Participles : IZiiv rots irapoWi tup ttio-tGiv, with tlwse present cf his
faithful attendants, i. 5. 15. Kal t&v SXkwv top povX6p.€vov i. 3. 9.
e. Other Adjectives : "E%uv tG>v oTriadocpvX&Kwv rods Tjp,C<r€is, having luilf
of tlie rear-guard. Tous a-yaGovs ruv dvdpuirwv, the good among men, Ar.
f. Those adjectives which are most frequently employed to denote a
part are termed partitives. A neuter adjective used substantively is often
so employed. See 416 a.
420. III. Adverbs, a. Of Place and Time, used literally or fig-
uratively (416 a) : Ovd' 6irov y?js icr/iev olda, I know not where on earth
[upon what part of the earth] we are, Ar. Av. 9. TqXov yap oIkCo tCov..
dypwv, I dwell [in a remote part of the country] far from town, Ar. Nub.
138. 'EvTavOa -fjSr} el rrjs i]\iidas, you are now at tlmt point of life, PI.
Rep. 328 c. 'Oirqvfoa . . rrjs wpas, at whatever point of time, iii. 5. 18.
IIpoo-o) 8e rod Trora/xov TrpoPaLveiv, to advance far into tlie river, iv. 3. 28.
b. Of State or Condition, especially with the verbs '(i\<a and iJKw (416 a):
T77S T^xn s y&P $8' ^x w > I am ^ lus i n [have myself in this state of] fortune,
Eur. Hel. 857. Ilais odv 2x ets 86ijr)S ; [in what state of opinion] of what
opinion are you ? PL Rep. 456 d. IIws dywvos ^KOfiev ; how do we come
on in tlie strife [with what progress of the strife] ? Eur. El. 751.
c. Of the Superlative Degree : ' AjpctSeVraTa trdvrwv eTi/nupeiTo, lie pun-
islied most unsparingly of all [he of all, 418 b] i. 9. 13.
421. IV. Verbs. The Genitive partitive, in connection
with a verb, may perform the office either of a subject, an ap-
positive, or a complement ; taking the place of any case which
the verb would require, if referring to the whole. See 418 b.
1.) Tlie Gen. Partitive as a Subject, (a) Of a Finite Verb : Elcrl 8' ai-
tcSv, ods ovd' av . . biafiairjTe, there are some of them, which you could not
pass, ii. 5. 18. IloXefiov, nal p-axis ov fxeTr\i> avrrj, of war and battle,
there fell to her no share, Cyr. 7. 2. 28. (b) Of an Infinitive : 'Eiripnyvvvai
<r<]>cwv, that some of tliem mingled, iii. 5. 16. "fitero TrpoarjKeiv ovdevl dpxrjs,
he thought that [a share of] authority belonged to no one, Cyr. 8. 1. 37.
422. 2.) Tlie Gen. Partitive in the place of an Appositive is most
common with substantive verbs, but is likewise found with other verbs,
particularly those of reckoning, esteeming, and making : Ou/c iyu tovtwv
el/xl, I am not one of these, Cyr. 8. 3. 45. "TXas p.a,Kapa>v dpid/xelrai, Hylas
is nuvibered as one of the blest, Theoc. 13. Movotiktjs . . tLOtjs \6yovs ; PL
423. 3.) The Genitive Partitive is used as a Complement,
a. Generally, with any verb, when its action affects not the
whole object, but a, part only : as,
Aa(36vras rod papfiapiKov or-parou, taking a part of the barbarian army,
i. 5. 7. Twv KTipi'wv . . £<payov, ate of the Iwneycombs, iv. 8. 20.
238 SYNTAX. R. X., XL, XII. GENITIVE PARTITIVE. § 424.
424. /3.) Particularly, with verbs -which, in their ordinary
use, imply divided or partial action.
Note. The Gen. partitive may be connected with other parts of speech
upon the same principle. Hence the rule is expressed in a general form.
Rule X. Words of sharing, beginning, and
touch govern the Genitive.
1. Words of sharing include those of partaking (part-
taking), imparting, obtaining by distribution, &c. Thus,
Twv Kivbvvwv (i€T€X€tv, to share in [have a share of] tJie dangers, Hel. 2.
4. 9. Trjade koivuvw tvxvs, I partake of this fortune, Eur. Med. 303.
Twj' €i<f>po<rvvCbp p.6Ta8i8dvTes, imparting our joys, 02c. 9. 12.
425. 2. The beginning is, of course, only part of the work :
ToO 5e \6yov ^pyjero, lie commenced his address, iii. 2. 7. Qvyrjs dpxeiv,
to begin flight, lb. 17. So ii-dpxv, Karapx^, Kadrrytonai, to begin; &c.
a. The partitive idea appears also in such expressions as Mco-owcri . .
rrjs iropdas, being in tJie middle of the way, PI. Pol. 265 b.
426. 3. Touch may be regarded as a species of partial
action, affecting only the point of contact. To this head be-
long, either by direct connection or by obvious analogy, verbs
of laying hold of, hitting, meeting with, &c. Thus,
"Airr«r8ai rrjs nap^ys, to touch the Juiy, i. 5. 10. 'EmXan{3dv€Tat avrov
rrjs frvos, lays hold of his shield-rim, iv. 7. 12. $epati\a rvy\6.vti, hits
P., Cyr. 8. 3. 28. 'ApdpQv ayad&v iraidbs viravTrjo-as, having met with the
son of brave heroes, Soph. Ph. 719. M£<x<rov 8ovpbs 4X<ov T. 78.
a. Hence, the part taken hold of is put in the Gen., in connection with
other forms of construction : "EXafiop ttjs £<&viis top 'Opoprrjp, they took
Orontes by the girdle, i. 6. 10. Nip . . tf/afcip \€p«5s Eur. Here. 968.
b. To the analogy of verbs of touch may be referred expressions like
the following : T-^j K€<j>aXf]s Kartaye, he broke [was fractured in] his liead.
427. 4. Several words of obtaining, attaining, and receiving,
govern the Genitive, from their referring primarily either to
distribution or to touch. Thus,
"Ira T77$ TrpocrrjKo6<rr)s.p.oipas XayxavTj, thai it may receive its proper por-
tion, PI. Leg. 903 e. KXnpovofigiv ovdevSs, to inherit nothing, Dem. 1065.
25. Twj/ diKatcop rvy\o.v€iv, to obtain your rights, vii. 1. 30.
428. B. That which exerts an influence as an
EXCITEMENT, OCCASION, Or CONDITION. To this
division belong the following rules, respecting,
1. the motive, reason, and end in vietv ; 2. price, value,
merit, and crime ; 3. the sensible and mental object ;
and 4. time and place.
a. The Gen. so employed is often translated brother prepositions than
of&n&from, especially by for ; and sometimes without a preposition.
§ 431. OP MOTIVE, HEASON, PRICE, &C. 239
I. Genitive of Motive, Sfc.
429. Eule XI. The motive, reason, and
end m view are put in the Genitive.
To this rule may be referred the use of the Gen., both in
regular construction and in exclamation, to express the person
or thing, on account of which, in consequence of which, for the
sake of which, in honor of which, or to affect which, any thing
is done, said, felt, or existing. Thus,
a. With Verbs : Mi<r0ov virrjpeTovvTes, serving [from, or on account
of] for hire, Cyr. 6. 2. 37. Tovtou <re . . fr)\&, on this account I envif
you, lb. 8. 4. 23. 'M.-qbev avroiv Ka.Ta.deis, paying nothing for them, lb. 3.
1. 37. 3ȣ\ov Scleras . . t) \avrov, fearing [on account of] for a friend or
even himself, Soph. 0. T. 234. Tavrr]s licvoviial <re, / beseech you for her
sake, Eur. Or. 671. 'iKeretfw ere rdvbe -yovvaTttv, 'by these knees,' Id.
b. With Adjectives : ~Eiv5aip.wv . . tov Tpdirov, happy [by reason of]
from his character, PI. Phsedo 58 e. *Q fiandpie rrys tcxvtjs, Ar. Av. 1423.
c. With Adverbs : TlevdiKus 8e e'x ovffav T °v dSeAipov, in mourning for
her brother, Cyr. 5. 2. 7. Xa\e7ru>s iptpeiv avrav Th. 2. 62.
d. With Nouns : 'ftSiVas avrov irpoa-fiaXuv, causing pangs on his ac-
count, Soph. Tr. 41. rwcfov rovd' . . \irds, entreaties by this beard, Eur.
e. With Interjections : 3>eO rod dvSpds, Alas for the noble man !
f. In Simple Exclamation : TtJs tvxtjs* My ill-luck 1 Cyr. 2. 2. 3.
430. a. The Genitive of the end in view is put with
some words of direction, claim, and dispute. Words of direc-
tion include those of aiming at, throwing at, going towards, and
reaching after. Thus,
'AvdpcoTTuv o-Toxd^€<r0ai, to take aim at men, Cyr. 1. 6. 29. Avtov x*P-
H&5as . . gppnrrov, they threw stones at him, Eur. Baa 1096. Ew0v IleX-
Xrjvrjs ir£r€<r0cu, to fly straight for Pellene, Ar. Av. 1421. Ti's yap avrtp
ia-Tiu ovtls rrjs apxv* avTiiroictrai ; for who is there that disputes with him
the sovereignty [makes for the sovereignty in opposition to him] ? ii. 1. 11.
b. The student cannot fail to remark the ease with which verbs of
motion pass into those of simple effort and desire (432 e). Thus, tejiai,
and, more commonly, 4<p£ep,ai, to send one's self to, rush to, strive for, seek,
desire ; 6p£yop.ai, to reach after, strive for, seek, court, desire : A6^s e^te-
fievots, eager for glory. 'Op^aadai ttjs dfitXias avrov, to seek his company.
2. Genitive of Price, Merit, 8rc.
431. Eule XII. Price, value, merit, and
crime are put in the Genitive.
a. Price : "Ittttov, 6V . . aire'b'oTO irevrr/KovTa 8apeiK(3v, the horse, which
he had sold for fifty darics, vii. 8. 6. A6£a 8e xpT^drwv oik uv-qr-ti, glory
is not to be bought for money, Isoc. 21 b.
b. Value and Merit : "A£iot rrjs IktvQtplas, worthy of freedom, i. 7. 3.
rioXXov <££ios rrj arparlq., worth much to the army, iv. 1. 28. T^s d£ta$
Tipaadai, to estimate at the true desert, PI. Apol. 36 e.
240 SYNTAX. R. XIIL, XIV., XV. GEN. OF MENTAL OBJECT. § 431.
c. Crime : 'Ao-epeCas <pevyopra, accused of impiety, PI. Apol. 35 d.
Aidj^ofiai <re SeiXias, I will prosecute you for cowardice, Ar. Eq. 368.
d. The Gen. (chiefly Bo.p6.tov) is sometimes used to express the punish-
ment (regarded either as the desert of the crime, or as the end in view in
judicial proceedings) : Qavarov 5£ odroi npivovcri, tJiese pronounce sentence
of death [adjudge worthy of]. 'Tirrjyov 0avdrov, ' on a capital charge.'
3. Genitive of Sensible or Mental Object.
432. The object of sensation, thought, or emotion may be
regarded as its exciting cause, and, in this view, may.be put in
the Genitive. Hence,
Rule XIII. Words of sensation, and of men-
tal state or action govern the Genitive : as,
a. Of Sensation : ILtov eyevo-avro, tasted of food, iii. 1. 3. Otvov . .
6<r<f>pcuv€cr8ai, to smell wine, v. 8. 3. Qoptifiov 4ji<ov<re did tlop rd^eup 16p-
tos, *■ heard a murmur,' i. 8. 16.
b. Of Perception, Knowledge, Reflection, Experience, and
Habit : 'Eiri^ovXijs ovk Tjo-Odvero, he did not perceive the plot, i. 1. 8.
'AXXtjXup gw£c<rav, understood each otlier, Th. 1. 3. 'Ev(Kip.ov hk koX twp
elboTwv, consider those who know, Mem. 3. 6. 17. Ilciptojicvoi ra&rrjs t?,$
rd|ew5, making trial of this order, iii. 2. 38.
c. Of Memory : To&ruv ovdds pip-ynrcu, these things no one remembers,
v. 8. 25. To&raip i\U\ivr\ro, made mention of these, vii. 5. 8. M?) pt dva-
fjLv/jtrQs KaxQp, do not remind me of my woes, Eur. Ale. 1045. Tvr irdpoide
fib> Xbywp XaGcojicOa, let us forget tlie former words, Eur. Hipp. 288.
d. Of Care and Concern : KrtSco-Oai letdov, to care for Seuthes, vii.
5. 5. Toijtov col 8eT pe'Xeiv, of this [there must be to you a care} you must
take care, Cyr. 1. 6. 16. 'AftcXciv w&p avrCop, to be careless of ourselves,
i. 3. 11. Mt) p^TapeXetv <roi rfjs iptft dcopeas, that it may not repent thee
(old Eng.) of thy gift to me, Cyr. 8. 3. 32 (repentance or regret being after-
concern). vvKatra-ouAvovs tup peCbp, careful of the ships, Th. 4. 11.
e. Of Desire : 'Epwvrcs to&tov, desiring this, iii. 1. 29. XprjfidTUP
tmOvpct, [sets his mind upon, cf. 430 b] desires booty, iii. 2. 39.
f. Of Various Emotion : "A-yapcu X^aros, I admire the spirit, Eur.
Rhes. 244. 'Tp.u>p . . 0avp,d£w, 7 wonder at you, Hel. 2. 3. 53. OCs ovk
clp &va<rx^(r6ai clvtov fiacnXevoPTos, who would not endure him us their
king, ii. 2. 1. t Qp fyc6 col ov <f>6ov^<r<«>, which I shall not grudge to you.
g. The idea of hearing passes, by an easy transition, into that of
obedience (obedio, to give ear to, listen to, obey, fr. ob and audio). Hence,
words of obedience often govern the Gen. (cf. 455 g) : To&rovs . . paciXtios
ovk aicoviciv, that these did not obey [or were not subject to] the king, iii. 5.
16. 'YtHjkooi tup MoccvpoLkup, subject to the M., v. 5. 1.
h. Verhs of sight commonly govern the Ace; and many verbs which
are followed by the Gen. according to this rule, sometimes or often take
the Ace. (especially of a neuter adjective) : E'i8op.ev rovs iroXep.lovs, we
have seen the enemy, vi. 5. 10. KXvw poyp, I hear a cry. See 472 b, d.
4. Genitive of Time and Place.
433. The time and place in which any thing is done may
be regarded as essential conditions of the action, or as co-
operating to produce it. Hence,
§ 434. OP TIME, PLACE, AUTHOR, &C. 241
Rule XIV. The time and place V? which
are put in the Genitive (cf. 46 9, 482) : as,
a. Time : "ftix 67 " T V S vvktos, he went in the night, vii. 2. 17. Hotel Sk
touto ToXXaKts tov fJi-qvos, 'many times [in the] a month,' Cyr. 1. 2. 9.
Eire wkt&s 8e"oi tl, etre teal TJjis'pas, ' whether [in the] hy night or by day,'
iii. 1. 40. BaaiXevs ov puxeirai 8iKa Tjfiepwv (cf. iu . . tclutcus reus ijp.e'pais),
the king will not figM [within] for ten days, i. 7. 18. HoXXov xpovov,
Maxpov xpovov, Xpbvov avxvov, for a long time, i. 9. 25 ; &c.
b. Place : Avtov [sc. tSttov] p.eivavres, remaining in that place, i. 10.
17. T H owc"ApY€o$ 9}ev ; was he not in A. ? y. 251. Horepas rijs X € P^s;
*Ev 8e%L$ <rov. On which hand 1 On thy right. Eur. Cycl. 681.
c. This use of the Gen., to denote the place ivlwre, rarely occurs in
prose, except in those adverbs of place which are properly genitives
(380 b) : oS, ai/Tov, ofiov, ovSa/xov, &c. Cf. 469 b.
d. This Gen. is sometimes employed, chiefly in the Epic, to denote the
place upon, over, or through which any thing moves : "Epxovrai ttcSioio,
they advance [in] upon the plain, B. 801. LTeSittv eirivlo-o-eraL, Soph.
e. The ideas of place and time are combined in some expressions which
relate to journeying (Fr. journee, a day's-march, fr. Lat. diurnus, fr. dies,
day) : 'EirraKaLSeKa yap o-TaOjiwv t&v eyyvrdrcj oi>8ev eixofiev, ' [in] during
the last seventeen day's-marches,' ii. 2. 11.
f. The idea of cause appears especially in such expressions as Adxreiv . .
rpia rip.Ldapa.Ka tov iltjvos, to pay three half-darics a month, i. 3. 21.
434. C. That which produces any thing, as
its active or efficient cause ; or, in other
words, that by which, as its author, agent, or giver,
any thing is made, written, said, done, bestoived, &c,
or from which any thing is obtained, heard, learned,
inquired, requested, demanded, &c.
To this division, which refers chiefly to persons, belongs the following
rule, which will of course be understood as applying only to adjuncts.
Genitive Active.
Eule XV. The author, agent, and giver
are put in the Genitive : as,
a. With Verbs of Obtaining, Receiving, Hearing, Learning, Inquiring,
Requesting, &c. : Tavra de" <rov ri>x<Wes, obtaining this of you, vi. 6. 32.
'Ep,ov OLKOvaeade iraaav rijv a\f)6eiav, you shall hear from me the whole
truth, PI. Apol. Made 8e" p.ov Kal rdSe, learn from me this also, Cyr.
b. With Passive Verbs and Verbals : UXrry eis (hryevrpos rrjs ijiTJs, smit-
ten by my daughter, Eur. Or. 497. $L\a>v d/cXavros, unwept of friends,
Soph. Ant. 847. ' ' AyairrjToh 0€ov, beloved of God, Rom. 1. 7. —This use
of the Gen. is rare in prose, and is most frequent with the Participle or
Verbal.
c. With Substantives : £J€vo<|><Svtos Kupov ' Aj>dj3a<ns, Xenophon's Ex-
pedition of Cyrus. "Hpas dXarelais, wanderings caused by Juno, iEsch.
Pr. 900. rioXip,«v (pdopd, destruction by wars, Pi. Leg. 741 a.
COMP. GR. 11 P
242 SYNTAX. R. XVI. GENITIVE CONSTITUENT. § 435.
435. D. That which constitutes any thing
what it is. To this head may be referred what-
ever serves to complete the idea of a thing or prop-
erty, by adding some distinction or characteristic.
Genitive Constituent.
Rule XVI. An adjunct defining a thing
or property is put in the Genitive : as,
To Me'vojvos (rrpdrevfia, tlie army of Meno, i. 2. 21.
a. Substantives simply denote things (including persons) ; and adjec-
tives and adverbs, properties. Hence, if an adjunct is simply viewed as
modifying a substantive, adjective, or adverb, it is put in the Gen. ; and
Rule XVI. might be thus expressed :
A Substantive, Adjective, or Adverb, as
such, governs the Genitive.
b. If, on the other hand, tJie particular nature of the modification is to
be expressed, another case may be required ; so that the same substantive,
adjective, or adverb may either be followed by the Gen. as the generic
case, or by the Dat. or Ace. as a more specific case. See 442 a, 463, &c.
436. a. The thing or property defined may be either distinctly
expressed by its appropriate word, or may be involved in another word :
as /3acri\eus in /3act\ei)a> (442), irX-qaiov in Tr\i]<riafa (445 c). Hence,
Rule B. A word may govern the Genitive, by virtue of an
included substantive, adjective, or adverb.
b. Adjectives in which a substantive is compounded with d- privative
(385), have often a Gen. defining the substantive : as, T-rjpws dXvira, free
from the pains of age, Soph. See 446 b. Hence the special rule,
Rule C. Compounds of d-Privative govern the Genitive.
c. The verbs 8£a> to smell, irvita to breathe, and irpoa-pdXXw to em-it, may
take a Gen. defining a noun implied in these verbs or understood with
them : "Ofovai irfrmjs, they smell of pitch [emit the smell of pitch], Ar.
Ach. 190. Mvpov irviov, breathing of myrrh, Soph. Fr. 147.
d. Some adverbs govern the Gen., as originally substantives (380), or
by virtue of an included substantive : Tovde tou <pb^ov X<*P IV ( or 2i>ei<a),
on account of this fear, Soph. El. 427, &c. So 8'lkvv, dfyas poet., after
the manner or form of, like, Zurrri poet., by the will of, /ctkXy around, &c.
437. A Genitive denning a substantive (a) is often con-
nected with it through an oppositional verb. Less frequently,
(b) its connection is modified or strengthened by an adjective or
adverb. These constructions may be often explained by ellipsis.
(a.) Hp6^€vos . . ty [sc. dvOponros] erdv us TpidtcovTa, P. was [a man] of
about 30 years, ii. 6. 20. See 440, 443, and cf. 422. (b.) 'Iepbs 6 x&pos
t?i$ 'Aprtp-tdos, tlie spot is sacred to Diana [consecrated to be Diana's], v. 3.
13. 'IStwv iavrov KT7}p.a.TU3v, of his own acquisitions, PI. So with ot/cetos
proptrius, own M eirixuptos customary, koiv'js communis, common, &c.
§ 441. OF PROPERTY. OF RELATION. 243
c. The Gen. is often used in emphatic periphrasis, particularly with XP'HI 10 '
thing (446 a) and, by the poets, with cvojxa ?iame, Sejxas body, icdpa head,
cr\r\^.a foj'm, and similar words : 'fi <pl\raTov . . 6vop.a Wokvveinovs, dear-
est [name of P.] P., Eur. Ae/xas ' Ayaixep.vovos, ior'Aya/xefxvova, Id.
d. A substantive governing the Gen., or (e) the Gen. itself, is some-
times used instead of an adjective, especially by the poets and Hellenistic
writers : (d) Xpvcrbv. . iirQv, the gold of words, for " iilirr) xpv<r a, golden words,
Ar. (e) llddr] aTijifas, [passions of baseness] base passions, Rom. 1. 26.
438. Ellipsis, a. A substantive governing the Gen. is
often understood, particularly words denoting domestic relation
or abode (vlos son, olnos house, &c.), and such as the context sup-
plies : as,
TXovs 6 Tafjub, Glus, the son of Tamos, ii. 1. 3. Bvpffivys rrjs 'Iirirlov [sc.
yvvaiKos,] B., the wife of H., Ar. Qoit&v eis 5i8a<TK&\ov [sc. oIkov], resort-
ing to the house of a teacher, PL Ale. *Ev ' AaicXyTriov [sc. Upy temple]Mem.
3. 13. 3. 'Ev"Ai8ov Soph. Ant. 654 (cf. Elv"Ai8ov 56p.ois 1241).
b. Instead of simple ellipsis, the possessor is sometimes put in the case
belonging to the thing possessed, chiefly in comparison : as, "Ap/j-ara . .
tifxoia Ikclvo) [ as rots iKdvov apfiaai], cluiriots like [him] his (chariots), Cyr.
439. An adjunct denning a thing either expresses a prop-
erty of that thing, or points out another thing related to it. An
adjunct defining a property points out a thing related to that
property. Hence the constituent genitive is either, (1) the
Genitive of Property, or (2) the Genitive 'of Relation.
1. Genitive of Property
440. a. The Genitive of property expresses dimension,
age, quality, &c. (often expressed by an adjective, 435 d) :
Jlorap-bu 6vt<x to edpos ir\£Qpov i. 4. 9, a river being [of] a plethron in
width (cf. Hora/xdv rb eSpos irXeGpicuov i. 5. 4, and see 395 c). Hpiv etnoatv
Itwv elvai, before he was [of 20 years] 20 years old, Mem. See 437 a.
b. Except in the predicate, the Gen. of strict quality is chiefly poetic or
Hellen. (437 e) : "Oaoi t?)s avrrjs YVwpvT]S ^jaau, as many as were of t/ie same
mind, Th. 2roXi6a . . Tpv<j>as, a [dress of daintiness] dainty dress, Eur.
2. Genitive of Relation.
441. The Genitive of relation, in its full extent, in-
cludes much that has been already adduced under other and
more specific heads. The relations which remain to be con-
sidered are chiefly, (a) those of domestic, social, and civil life ;
(|3) those of possession and ownership ; (y) that of the object of
an action to the action or agent ; (8) those of time and place ;
(e) those of specification, explanation, and emphasis ; while yet
others are left for observation.
The Genitives expressing these relations may be termed, (a) the Gen.
of social relation, (|3) the Gen. possessive, (y) the Gen. objective, (8) the
Gen. of local or temporal relation, (c) the Gen. of specification, &c.
244 SYNTAX. R. XVI. — GENITIVE OF RELATION. § 442.
442. eu Genitive of Social Kelation\ '0 r?,s pao-iXews yuvai-
kos a5e\(pos, the brother of the king's wife, ii. 3. 17. BacriXevwu [— j3aai-
Xevs (bv, 436 a] avrwv, being their king, v. 6. 37 (cf. 407). Ydrwv . . rrjs
'EXXdBos, a neighbor of Greece ; Toi)s ckcivov ix^^ a " rovs > • • T0V * Kvpov
<piXous, his vjorstfoes, the friends of C. ; iii. 2. 4, 5. Cf. 450 a, 456.
a. To this analogy may be referred the use of the Gen. for the Dat.,
with some adjectives denoting near connection or correspondence (even com-
pounds of <rvv, 6p.ov, &c.) : SvyycvrjS rod Ktipov, related to Cyrus, or
a relative of Cyrus, Cyr. Zei>s opio-rios fipor&v, Jupiter dwelling vnth mor-
tals, Soph. Tovtojv dvTtppoirov, counterpoising these, Dem. Cf. 450 s.
b. In some of the examples falling under this head, an adjective may
be regarded as used substantively.
443. j8. Genitive Possessive, a. The Genitive posses-
sive denotes that to which any thing belongs as a possession,
power, right, duty, office, quality, characteristic, &c. Thus,
Ta Hv€W€(Tios fiaaiXeia, the palace of S., i. 2. 23. "Haav ai 'Iawt/cai irb-
Xeis Ti<rcra<pepvovs, the Ionian cities belonged to T., i. 1. 6. T«v ixev yap
vikwvtcov to Karanaiveiv, t«v 8e tjttm|A6V<»>v rb airody-fjaKeiv earl, for it is
the part of victors to kill, but of the vanquished to die, iii. 2. 39.
b. A neuter adjective used substantively takes the Gen. possessive, in
connection with some verbs of praise, blame, wonder, and the like : Tovro
iiraiva' Ay rjaiXdov, I commend this in Agesilaus [this characteristic of
Agesilaus], Ages. "Ev o~ov Sc'Soikci, one thing [of you] in you I fear, Eur.
c. An adjective sometimes supplies the place of the Gen. possessive
(435 d) : Tb (BacriXeiov [ = ./JacriXews] <nyi€iov, the king's ensign, i. 10. 12.
444. y. Genitive Objective. If an action, instead of
being predicated by a verb, is simply presented in a substan-
tive, adjective, or adverb, then its object is usually expressed
by the Genitive (instead of an Ace, Dat., or preposition with
its case, as with a verb, 435 a, b). Thus,
a. Genitive of the Direct Object : 'O (ppovpapxos ras <|>vXaKd$ ^gerdgei,
the commander reviews tlic guards, G£c. 9. 15 ; but, Kvpos Hgirao-iv iroieirai
tQ>v 'EXXtjvcdv, C. makes a review of the Greeks, i. 7. 1 ; TQu roiovrcav
Upywv €|6Tao-TiK<5v, fitted to review such matters, Mem. 1. 1. 7. Ad6pa (or
Kpv<J>a) 8e tG>v orpaTitDTaiv, witlwut the knowledge of the soldiers, i. 3. 8
(cf. Aa0€iv avrbv aireXO&v 17), &c. 'ApeTTJs Stodcr/caAos PL Meno 93 c.
b. Genitive of tlie Indirect Object : EvX€or9ai rots . . Scots, to pray to the
gods, iv. 3. 13 ; but, ©caiv €vx<*s> prayers to tlie gods, PL Phanlr. 244 e.
Trjv rav Kp€i<r<rova>v dovXeiav, subjection to the stronger, Th. 1. 8.
c. Genitive for a preposition with its case : ' Airier) Is ttjv yfjv, descended
upon tlie land ; but, 'Ev airofiao-ei rrjs yijs, in a descent upon tlie land, Th.
d. In like manner, the Gen. is employed with nouns, to denote rela-
tions, which, with the corresponding adjectives, are denoted by the Dat. :
T??s tG>v 'EXX^vwv evvolas, from good-will to the Greeks, iv. 7. 20 (cf. Eu-
vovs 5i croi wv vii. 3. 20). 'Av8pos evp.iveiav Soph. O. C. 631.
e. A participle may so perform the office of a substantive or common
adjective, as to take the Gen. objective : "O r Ikc'lvov tckwv, his fatlier, Eur.
f. To the Gen. of tlie direct object may be referred the Gen. with aiVios
and its derivatives : O ep.bs <?/oo>s rovrou atrtos, my desire is [causative of]
the cause of this, ii. Tovrwv ov ad atria, you are not responsible for this, die.
g. The Gen. in its more active uses (when employed to denote agent,
§ 448. POSSESSIVE, OBJECTIVE, LOCAL, &C. 245
possessor, &c.) has received the special designation of the Gen. subjective,
in distinction from the Gen. objective. They may both modify the same
word : T qv LTeXoTros p.ev airdaris n€\oTrovvT|<rov KardXrfxf/Lu, Pclops's seizure
of all Peloponnesus, Isoc. 249 a. Adjectives taking the place of the Gen.
are, in like manner, used both subjectively and objectively.
445. 8. Genitive of Local or Temporal Relation, a. With
Substantives : Tottov eXiovs, place for pity, Polyb. 1. 88. Tpiuv rjixcpwv
bdbv, a three days' inarch, ii. 2. 12. TeXevrqu rod (Biou, end of life, i. 1. 1.
b. With Adjectives. 'Eva^rtos icTaa cp-eiio, stand opposed to me, N. 448.
Tdfiov -rjdr) Copaia, now of proper age for marriage, Cyr. 4. 6. 9.
c. With Adverbs. The Gen. is used with many adverbs of place and
time: 'Eyyus TrapaSeiaov, near a park, ii. 4. 14. 'E77i>s pLvpiuv, nearly
10,000, v. 7. 9. Me'xfH ecnrtpas, until evening, Cyr. 1. 4. 23.
446. c. Genitive of Specification, Explanation, or
Emphasis. This makes the statement more precise or em-
phatic, by adding a more specific name, or by showing in what
sense or with what special application (in respect to what) the
statement is made, or by repetition, &c.
Note. In some of these uses, the Gen. rather denotes a relation be-
tween two expressions for the same thing, than between two different things.
In some cases, an appositive might be substituted for it ; and in others,
we might regard the Gen. as in apposition with a substantive implied.
a. With Substantives. Tpohjs rrroXledpov, city of Troy (395 c ; cf. urbs
Roma?), ©avdrov reXevrdv, the end [of life] in death, or simply, death,
Eur. Med. 152 (cf. § 445 a). Tvpdvvou xPV^y a [thing of a tyrant] vile
tyrant, PL Rep. 567 e. 'Yos xPWa p^eyiarov, a monster of a boar, Hdt.
b. With Adjectives. NewTaros . . -yovoio, youngest of birth, T. 409.
LTXTj-ytov ad~pv, free from the punishment of blows (436 b), Ar. Nub. 1413.
v A7rcus 5^ elju appevwv iraftW, / am childless [of] as to male children, Cyr.
c. With Adverbs. 'Acr^aXcDs tt}s dedp' 6Sov, safely as to his journey
hither, Soph. O. C. 1165. Cf. 420 b, 429 c.
d. With Verbs (436 a). T^s €irft>Pe\£as . . KivSvpctovra [= ev Kivdvvip
6vtcl], being in danger of the prescribed fine, Dem. 835. 14. Tdcf>ov . .
dri^do-as, having denied the honor of burial, Soph. Ant. 21.
e. With words of number or quantity, the Gen. is often used to specify
the class or hind : Kairldrjj' dXevpcov, two quarts of flour, i. 5. 6.
447. General Remark. Great care is requisite in dis-
tinguishing the various uses of the Genitive.
C. The Dative Objective.
448. That towards which any thing tends
may be resolved into (i.) That toivards ivhich any
thing tends, as an object of approach ; and (ii.)
That towards ivhich any thing tends, as an object of
influence. Hence the Dative Objective is either
246 SYNTAX. E. D., XVII. DATIVE. § 448.
(i.) the Dative of Approach, or (n.) the Dative
of Influence ; and we have the following general
rule :
Rule D. The Object of Approach or of
Influence is put in the Dative ;
or, in other words, since neither approach nor influence are
regarded as direct action,
An Indirect Object is put in the Dative.
a. The Dot. of approach is commonly expressed in English hy the prep-
osition to, and the Dat. of influence, by the prepositions to and for ;
both, in Latin, by the Dative. An imitation of 403 b would give to the
rule this form :
The Dative is used to express that to or for
which something is or is done.
b. The relations here denoted are, however, sometimes translated by
other prepositions, especially by with ; and sometimes without a prepo-
sition.
c. The Dat. of approach may denote either person or thing ; the Dat. of
influence oftener denotes person.
d. The Dative Objective is the converse of the Genitive ; the Dat.
of approach contrasting with the Gen. of departure, and the Dat. of in-
fluence with the Gen. of cause. See 397, 398, 403.
i. Dative of Approach.
449. Approach, like its opposite, departure (404), may be
either in place, in time, or in character. Hence,
Rule XVII. Words of nearness and likeness
govern the Dative.
(1.) Dative of Nearness.
450. a. Words of nearness may imply either being near,
coming near, or bringing near ; and to this class may be referred
words of union and mixture, of companionship and intercourse,
of meeting and following, of sending to and bringing to, &c. : as,
IlcXdo-ai . . rrj elaodcp, to approach the entrance, iv. 2. 3. Oivui Ktpcuras
avr-ffv, having mixed it with wine, i. 2. 13. "E\|/ovtch vfuv, they xcill fol-
low you, iii. 1. 36. AidSoyos KXedySpy, successor to C, vii. 2. 5. Tdrwv
oIkw rfi 'EXXdSt, I dwell a neighbor to Greece, ii. 3. 18 (cf. 442). 'Eiropevero
. . &p.a r Fi(X(ra<f)tpi>ei, marched in company with T., ii. 4. 9.
h. So words which become words of nearness through their application :
Ktfpy Uvtu, to go to C, i. 2. 26. nCirrovTos W5y, falling to the ground,
Soph. El. 747. Ilcjnrttv avry dyyeXov, sending a messenger to him, i. 3. 8.
§ 454. OF APPROACH. OF INFLUENCE. 247
(2.) Dative of Likeness.
451. a. Words of likeness include those of resemblance,
assimilation, comparison, identity, equality, &c. : as,
"Ofiotoi rots &\\ois, like tlie rest, vi. 6. 16. <f>t\ocr60y pJev ?oucag, you
resemble a philosopher, ii. 1. 13. 'E/xe d£ 6e$ ixh ovk efceurev, but me he
did not liken to a god, Apol. 15. To a\r)d£s evo/jufe to avrb t£ rjXcdi^ elvai,
he thought sincerity to be the same with folly, ii. 6. 22.
b. Many derivatives or compounds of ativ, dfxou, 6/xoios, and Zeros, govern
the Dat. by this rule.
n. Dative of Influence.
452. The Dative of Influence expresses a person
or thing which is affected by an action, property,
&c, without being directly acted upon.
Note. Influence has every variety and degree. On the one hand, it
may be so immediate, that it can scarcely be distinguished from direct
action, and the Dat. expressing it is used interchangeably with the Ace. ;
and, on the other hand, it may be so remote, that it can scarcely be ap-
preciated, and the Dat. expressing it might have been omitted without
impairing the sense.
Rule XVIII. The object of influence is put
in the Dative.
The Dative is governed, according to this rule, by,
a.) Words of address, including those of call and command,
of conversation and reply, of declaration and confession, of ex-
hortation and message, of oath and promise, of reproach and
threatening, &c. :
Ovtos Ki//xy etirev, this man said to C, i. 6. 2. KXedpxv cp<£a, called
out to C, i. 8. 12. AiaA€x.6evTCS dXX^Xots, liaving conversed with each
otJier, ii. 5. 42. Awry navrevros, pointed out to him by oracle, vi. 1. 22.
453. b.) Words of advantage and disadvantage, includ-
ing those of benefit and injury, of assistance and service, of favor
and fidelity, of necessity and sufficiency, of fitness and unfitness,
of convenience and trouble, of ease and difiicidty, of safety and
danger, &c. :
Xp^jo-ijta . . roh Kprjvt, useful to the Cretans, iii. 4. 17. 'Avdpuirounv
«<J>€\%ctTa, benefits to men, iEsch. Pr. 501. $l\ois dp^-yeiv, to succor
friends, Cyr. 1. 5. 13. TLapvaans . . virfjpxe r£ Kvpy, P. favored C, i.
1.^4. 'Eyc6 tlvl 4p.iro8»v elfu ; am I in tlie way [to] of any one ? v. 7. 10.
Trj ijXiKia girpeire, it suited his age, i. 9. 6. 01 fioi, Woe to me ! Alas!
454. c.) Words of appearance, including those of seeming,
showing, clearness, obscurity, &c. :
Ilao-i 8-qXov iytvero, it became evident to all, Hel. 6. 4. 20. "A8t]\ov
fth iravri, obscure to every one, vi. 1. 21. *Hi> ko.1 tois AWois <j>avTjs oloo-irep
ifioi Sokcis el^at, if you appear to others such as you seem to me to be, Cyr.
248 SYNTAX. R. XVIII., E. DATIVE OP INFLUENCE. § 454.
d.) Words of cause, destiny, obligation, and value :
*K.yaMQ>v afcrtoi dXXTjXots, authors of good to each other (444 f ), Cyr. 8. 5.
24. IIcirpwTcu aol, it is fated to you, iEsch. Pr. 815. Tots o-rpariuTais
a>4>€tX.ero aiadds, pay was due to tlie soldiers, i. 2. 11. Baa-tXet av ttoXXoO
di|ioi yevoivro (431 b), would be worth much to the king, ii. 1. 14.
e.) Words of giving, including those of granting, offering,
paying, distributing, supplying, &c. :
ACSapX ooi euavrdv, I give myself to you, Cyr. 4. 6. 2. Aiavetpai rots
crpcvrrryois, to distribute to the generals, vii. 5. 2. Efrre/j iuol ctc'Xci rt
Zeodrjs, if S. paid me anything. Geols Sup-fj/jucLTa, gifts to the gods, Ar. Nub.
455. f.) Words of opposition, including those of contention,
dispute, enmity, resistance, rivalry, warfare, &c. :
AifjLbv {ip.lv avTurdijai, to oppose to you famine, ii. 5. 19. 'EpC|ovTd ol
vepl <ro$Las, contending with him in skill, i. 2. 8. IlaXXdSi t gpiv, a dis-
pute with P., Eur. 'AvrCot iivou rots iroXe/ifots, to go against the enemy, L
8. 17. Ovdeis avT$ €itdx eT0 > no one fought with him, lb. 23.
g.) Words of yielding, subjection, and worship, including
those of homage, obedience (cf. 432 g), prayer, sacrifice, &c. :
Il&m-a. rots deois vtto\o, all things are subject to the gods, ii. 5. 7. *E/tol
ou diXere ir€i0e<r0ai, you are not uxilling to obey me, i. 3. 6. 'Ear /xoi irci-
er0fjT€, if you will listen to me, i. 4. 14. E^x €<r ^ at ro < s • • ^co?$, to pray
to the gods, iv. 3. 13. "E0ve t£ A«, sacrificed to Jupiter, yii. 6. 44.
456. h. Words expressing a mental act or peeling,
which Is regarded as going out towards an object ; as those of
friendship and hatred, pleasure and displeasure, joy and sorrow,
contentment and envy, belief and unbelief, trust and distrust, &c. :
Ki/py <|>tXaiT€pov, more friendly to C, i. 9. 29. Tot/rots \<t$t\ K0/>os,
C. was pleased with these, i. 9. 26. *£lv epuol \aXerraiveri, for which you
are angry with me (429 a), vii. 6. 32. Xatpets . . <f>l\ois dryadols, you
delight in good friends, Meni. 'Eirfarewov yap avrtfr they trusted him, L
457. i.) Words expressing the act or power of exciting
emotion : as pleasure, displeasure, care, fear, &c. :
' ApeoTcctv vpuv, to please you, Cyr. 3. 3. 39. *EfAol (te\^<ret, it shall be
[a care to me] my care, i. 4. 16. McrapiXa fiot, I repent, Cyr. See 432 d.
458. j.) Verbal Adjectives in -to? and -rcW With these
the Dat. is used to express relation to an agent (for which, in
Eng., to or for can be used, though other forms of expression
are frequent) :
0ai>fjwurr&v Tcicri, wonderful to all, iv. 2. 15. "Ira poi €virpaKTOTepov 77,
iluit it may be easier for me to effect, ii. 3. 20. Horap.bt . . ijpuv eeri 81a-
Partos, there is a river for us to cross [to be crossed by us], ii. 4. 6. 'llpuv
. . Trdm-a iroi-qTea, everything [is for us to do] should be done by us, iii. 1. 35.
Note. So rarely other verbals : Tota-t dvorvxoiknv evicraCa debt, Eur.
459. k.) Substantive Verbs implying possession (in forms
of expression which may be variously translated).
§ 462 OF POSSESSOR, AGENT, &0. 249
Rule E. Substantive Verbs take a Dative of the Possessor :
'EvravOa Kupcf} /3<xcrt\eia ■Jjv, here [there was a palace to C] C. had a pal-
ace, i. 2. 7. Tots 5£ viroTpia p.kv •fjv, they had a suspicion, or they suspected,
i. 3. 21. 'Yirapx 61 7&p ^ W"*' ovhiv, we have now nothing, ii. 2. 11.
'AvdyKw 5?7 /xoi [sc. €<tt(\ I am now compelled, i. 3. 5. IIoXis . . y 'cvopxt.
XiTTaKr), a city [to which there was the name] named S., ii. 4. 13. Apo-
/wos e-y€v«TO tois (XTpaTi&Tcus, [to the soldiers there came to be a running]
the soldiers began to run, i. 2. 17. "Eotiv dvdpuTrip . . (iXiireiv, [it is to a
man to look] a man can look, Symp. 4. 58. Tsvv <tol %&<rnv vii. 1. 21.
Note. The relation is sometimes denned by a participle or adjective
of mental state, joined with the Dat. : 'E»ceiV<f> Pou\o|xe vw tclvt earl, tliese
things are [to him willing] according to his will, or agreeable to him, Hel.
4. 1. 11. Ntidq. irpoo-Scxoncvw ?>, were as N. had expected, Th. 6. 46.
460. 1.) And, in general, words expressing any action,
property, &c, which is represented as being to or for some
person or thing :
Iipoiriva) aoi, I drink to you, vii. 3. 26. Kevor&cpiov avrois iirolri<rav,
they made for tliem a cenotaph, vi. 4. 9. Mey kttou ko<j\xov dudpi, tlie great-
est ornament to a man, i. 9. 23. "Qpa ?jv dirUvai tois iroXefdocs, it was time
for the enemy to withdraw, iii. 4. 34. 'E7W (riwirCb rySe; I be silent for
this fellow ? Ar. Ran. 1134. Aonrov fioi eliretv, left for me to say, iii. 2. 29.
461. m. A Dative of the Agent is sometimes joined with
passive verbs, chiefly with the Perfect and Pluperfect :
Udvd' Tjjtiv ireiroirjTat, all things have been done by us, i. 8. 12. El oe ti
KaXbv . . eiriirpaKTo vjuv, if any honor had been gained by you, vii. 6. 32.
Tois"EX\TjoT. fuaoiirro, would be hated by tlie Greeks [hateful to them], Th.
Note. This use seems to have come chiefly from the possessive xisc of
the Dat. (459). Thus, touto fx.01 ydypairrac, hoc mihi est scriptum, [this is
to me written, i" have this written] I have written this, or this has been
written by me. So the possessive has passed into the active idea, in the
use of the auxiliary in our own and in other languages : I have it written,
J have written it (Germ. Ich habe geschrieben, Fr. J'ai icrit, &c).
462. Remarks. 1. The remoter relations expressed by
the Dat. (452 n.) are various, having respect to place, time,
sensation, thought, feeling, expression, action, &c. They may be
expressed (a) directly by a substantive in the Dat., with which
(b) a participle is often joined ; (c) by the participle with its
subject omitted ; or (d) by an elliptical form of construction,
in which the Dat. is preceded by as, as :
IloXis ev 6e£i£ la-rrkiovri [sc. rivl or o~ol], a city on the right to one sail-
ing in, or as you sail in, Th. 1. 24 (cf. vi. 4. 1). To p.ev Zfadev dirrofie'vw
aCjp.a ovk txyw depixbv fy, * to the external touch,' Th. 2. 49. El yewoaos,
lis ISovti [sc. (paivei], * as you appear to one beholding,' ' in appearance,'
Soph. 0. C. 75. Kairoi a eyw Wipvqaa. tois <|>povov<nv eS, ' [for] in the
judgment of the wise,' Soph. Ant. 904. Kpewi> yap fy fyXurrbs, ws Iftol [sc.
456k€l], 'as it seemed to me,' 'in my opinion,' lb. 1161.
e. The Dat. is termed ethical, when it is introduced, not as an essen-
tial part of the sentence, but to render it more emphatic or subjective, by
referring to some one as interested (t)6ik6s, relating to the slate of mind).
The pronouns of the 1st and 2d Pers. are especially so used : Mefc^o-o pot,
COMP. GR. 11*
250 SYNTAX. R. F., XIX. DATIVE RESIDUAL. § 462.
(j.T]3e7roTe avafiivetv, remember [for me], / pray you, never to defer, Cyr. 1.
6. 10. Nocre? 8e poi irpoTras <tt6\os, the whole nation is sick [for me], alas!
Soph. 0. T. Ti <roi fiad-rja-ofiai ; ivhat sliall I learn for you ? Ar. Nub.
f. The use of the Dat. with a participle in denning time, especially pre-
vails in Hdt. : ©vope'vw ot . . 6 rfhios d/x-avpudv, while lie was sacrificing, &c.
463. 2. Words governing the Gen. sometimes take a Dat.
in its stead, to express the exertion of an influence :
'JHytlro 5' aureus 6 Koj/xapxys, and the bailiff led the way for them, i. e.
guided them, iv. 6. 2. Ta<pioi(ri . . dvclcro-w, lam lord [to] of the T., a. 181.
Aapbv yap ovk &pg« deois, he will not long rule the gods, JEsch. Toiaw
acptiXero voaTifiov 9jp.ap, lie took away [for] from tlicm the day of return,
a. 9. Be/nan . . Sc'kto SeVas, O. 87. Il€<f>ctry€V eXirls r&vte fiot, 'lias
fled [for] from me,' Eur. Td axpa iyuy . . irpoKa/raXappdveiv i. 3. 16.
464. 3. A Bat. depending upon a verb is often used instead
of a Gen. depending upon a substantive :
01 . . Xiriroi avrots dtdevrai, the horses are tied for them, — ol iWoi ai-
r&v dtdevrcu, their Jwrses are lied, iii. 4. 35. Tots (3ap(3dpois t&v re ire&v
diredavov iroWoi, [for] of the barbarians, many of the foot tcere slain, iii. 4.
5. *H . . rod iraurbs apxr) Xeipurocjxp ivravda KareXCdrj vi. 2. 12 (cf. 3. 1).
a. The Dat. for the Gen. is sometimes joined directly with a substan-
tive, chiefly the Dat. of a personal pronoun : Ol 6V <r<f>i fides . . ov irapeyi-
vovro, [the oxen for them] their oxen did not come, Hdt. 1. 31.
b. A Dat. is sometimes joined with a substantive, where the sense is
more fully expressed by supplying a participle or adjective : 'Air6&\eire . .
irpbs tt]v v4av Tjp.iv ttoXiv, look upon the new state [planned] for lis, PI.
c. Except as above, substantives governing the Dat. are commonly
derived from verbs or adjectives so construed.
D. The Dative Residual.
465. The Dative Residual is used in expressing
adjuncts, which are not viewed as either subjective
or objective (397 s). It simply denotes indirect rela-
tion, without specifying the character of that rela-
tion ; or, in other words, it denotes mere association
or connection. Hence we have the general rule :
Kule F. An Attendant Thing or Circum-
stance, SIMPLY VIEWED AS SUCH, IS PUT IN THE
Dative.
a. In accordance with this rule, the Dat. is sometimes used in express-
ing an adjunct, which, upon a more exact discrimination of its character,
would be expressed either by the Gen. or Ace. (399 a, f).
b. The Dative Residual is commonly expressed in Lat. by the Abla-
tive ; in Eng. most frequently by the preposition with, but likewise by the
prepositions at, in, by, through, &c. Cf. 403 a, 448 a.
§ 468. INSTRUMENTAL AND MODAL. 251
c. The Dative Residual may be resolved into (i.) the In-
strumental and Modal .Dative, and (n.) the Temporal and
Local Dative.
i. Instrumental and Modal Dative.
466. Rule XIX. The means and mode are
put in the Dative.
Instrumentality and mode may be either external or internal, and
mode may apply either to action or condition. Hence, to these heads may
be referred,
1.) The instrument, force, or other means, with which any
thing is done, or through which it comes to pass :
'AKovTifa Tis iraX/ru, one shoots with a dart, i. 8. 27. SxcSCcus 5ta/3a£-
vovres, crossing with rafts, i. 5. 10. 'EfeiTrovro . . liririKui, pursued with
cavalry, vii. 6. 29. ©avdxw ^ryxLovv, to punish with death, Cyr. 6. 3. 27.
'AirodvqcTKei. votrta, dies through disease, vii. 2. 32. Euvota ewoue'vovs, ii. 6.
a. Means and Cause, to some extent, cover the same ground. Hence
some of the examples above, and others like them, might be referred to a
Dative of Cause (for which the Gen. could be used, 465 a)..
b. Xpao|icu, to use [to supply one's need with, 50], takes the Dat.
(originally of means) : T£St|/a> crtry xM°" CTat > he will use meat as bread
(394 b), Mem. 3. 14. 4. (c) So the compounds diro-xpdouai, &c. ; and
sometimes vop.l£w, after the analogy of x/><£o/«u • <l>G>vf] . . vo/xltovtri, Hdt.
467. 2.) a. The way or manner, in which any thing is done
or affected, together with attendant circumstances; and also (b)
the respect in which any thing is taken or applied :
(a) Ov yap Kpavyfj, dXXa <riyp . . irpovrjeaav, they advanced not with
clamor, but in silence, i. 8. 11. "Slatrep op-yrj eictXevcre, he commanded, as
in anger , i. 5. 8. 'EXavvuv . . ISpovvn t<j> forira>, riding with his horse in
a sweat, i. 8. 1. Toury t£ Tp<5ira> e-rropeid-qaav, in this manner they marched.
(b) II\t|8€i ye tj/j-wv Xei^dhres, inferior to us in [respect to] number
(406 b). T# <p«vf) Tpaxijs, rough in voice, ii. 6. 9. n6Xis . . 6c£^a/cos
6v6\l*ti, 'by name,' i. 4. 11. Trj ImpAtlci irepLthai i. 9. 24.
c. The pronoun avnfe is sometimes joined to the dative of an associated
object to give emphasis ; and the preposition trvv, which is otherwise com-
mon with such adjuncts, is then usually omitted : Mr; rjads avrais tcus
Tpirfjpecri Karadua-ri, lest lie should sink us, triremes and all [with the tri-
remes themselves], i. 3. 17. Cf. £J. 498 and T. 482.
468. 3.) The measure of difference, especially with the
Comparative :
'Evuavrw irpeapijTepos, older by a year, Ar. Ran. 18. U6\i XoyLuy rj
'EXXas yeyove dadevecxTiprj, Greece has become weaker by an illustrious city,
Hdt. 6. 106. Xpova> fieT^iretra ttoXX£ Hdt. 2. 110. So often a neut.
adjective (fiaicpu) by far, oXlyip by little, &c.) : Ov iroWai 8e varepov, not
[later by much] long after, ii. 5. 32. "Ocrcp 5e fidXXov iriarevoj, toowtw
fidXXop diropd), [by how much] the more I believe, [by so much] the more 1
am at a loss, PI. Rep. 368 b. See i. 5. 9. Minor anno, Hor.
252 SYNTAX. R. XX., XXI. — DAT. OP TIME, &C. § 469.
ii. Temporal and Local Dative.
469. Kule XX. The time and place at which
are put in the Dative (cf. 433, 482) : as,
a. Time (in prose, chiefly in stating some day, night, month, season,
year, or festival, as the time at which an event occurred) : T# irpibrri 5Z
TifJ.e'pa olQIkovto, the first day, tJicy came, iv. 8. 1. T<£ 5' i-ribim Irak, & $p
'0\vfM7rias, ^ rb o~t6.8lov eviita Kpoidvas, the following year, in which was
the Olympic at which C. won the foot-race, Hel. 2. 3. 1. "12pa trout Th.
^ b. Place (in prose, chiefly in adverbs of place which are properly da-
tives, 380 c ; and in stating some town or Attic deme, as the place at which
an event occurred) : ravrrj and T-rjde [sc. x^pq-] in this region, here, iv. 5.
36, vii. 2. 13 ; rjirep where, ii. 2. 21 ; icvicXy in a circuit, around, i. 5. 4 ;
olkoi at home, i. 1. 10. Td rpbtraia t& re Mapa0«vi kcu 2aX.ap.tvi koX
nXaratats, the victories at M. and 8. and P., PI. Menex. 245 a. Kduevov
viSio A!yio-0op Eur. El. 763. M//tm aypta X. 188. Alttpi valoov B. 412.
c. This Dat., while at expresses its general idea, is often translated by
in, on, &c. ; or without a preposition.
d. To the local dative may be referred the use of the Dat., chiefly
poetic, to denote persons among whom, or in whom any thing occurs : A6-
vapuv dvOpwirois ^X^ v > to have power among men, Eur. Bac. 310.
E. The Accusative.
470. The local idea upon which the uses of
the Accusative are based (398), appears to be the
idea of that into which an action goes.
a. Locally viewed, as the Gen. is the Whence-Case, the Dat. Residual
the Where-Gase, and the Dat. Objective the Whitfier-Case, so the Ace. is
the Whcreinto-Case (10).
b. Under the local form of conception, an action is conceived of as
going towards or to an indirect object, but into a direct object; or, in famil-
iar grammatical language, this is regarded as the receiver of the action,
(c) In another view, the action passes into its effect, (d) It goes, in a
special sense, into the part affected. And (e), in going through an object,
it necessarily goes into successive parts. Hence,
471. Upon this general idea, are based (i.) the Accusative
of Direct Object, (n.) the Ace. of Effect, (in.) the Ace. of
Specification (specifying the particular part, property, &c. affect-
ed), and (iv.) the Ace. of Extent (denoting the space, time, &c.
through which anything extends), (v.) In some uses, which
may be referred to these heads or to its generic office (472 a),
the Ace. has been termed Adverbial.
L, ii. Accusative of Direct Object and Effect.
472. Eule XXI. The dikect object and the
effect of an action are put in the Accusative : as,
§ 474. ACCUSATIVE OF DIRECT OBJECT, &C. 253
Aapuu Tnr<ra<|)€pvT]V, taking T., i. 1. 2. Etp^vrjv irorfcrai, to maJee
peace, Ages. 1. 7. 'TiriiaTrTeve TcXevrfjv, i. 1. 1.
a. The term action is here used to denote that which is signified by a
verb ; since the verb, from its prevalent use, is grammatically regarded
and treated as the word of action (cf. 435 a). And as the direct is more
generic than the indirect, it results that
(Rule G.) An adjunct simply considered as modifying a verb
is put in the Accusative. Hence,
b. Many verbs may take the Ace. as the generic case, which, according
to preceding rules, govern the Gen. or Dat. as more specific cases : IIpo-
i\ov<riv ol iirweis rj/xas, the cavalry surpass us (406), iii. 2. 19. 2£ cuo-0e-
<r8ai, to perceive you (432), ii. 5. 4. $>L\ovs axpeXeiv, to benefit friends
(453), Cyr. 1. 4. 25. "E/cro/ja dire, spake to H. (452 a), M. 60. See e.
c. The same principle applies to circumstantial adjuncts (485 e). (d)
This generic use of the Ace. is far more frequent in respect to things than
persons, since the relations of the former are less varied and require less
careful discrimination. For bike reason, and also to distinguish the gen-
der (181. 1), it is most frequent of all in the neuter adjective used sub-
stantively (478 a, 483 a), (e) It is sometimes chosen for distinction from
a Gen. or Dat. modifying the same verb : as crov da.vp.afa (432 f), but roiJ-
rov ae 0avp,dfa (429 a), or tovt6 crov davfiafa (443 b).
f. As many Greek verbs govern the Gen. or Dat. while the correspond-
ing verbs in Eng. govern the Objective case ; so many verbs governing the
Ace. in Greek are translated into Eng. with a preposition : "Op.vv|u 6eovs
Kal Beds, I swear by gods and goddesses, vi. 6. 17. 'H/xas . . et5 irowSv,
doing well by us. <t>vX.aTT6ft€vov . . was, guarding against us, ii. 5. 3.
g. With verbs of motion, the place where it ends is commonly expressed
with a preposition ; but sometimes, chiefly in the poets, as a direct ob-
ject : 'Acpl^erai t6itov vXivdrj, will come to a woody spot, Ven. 10. 6. 2£
irip.\f/ai 4>dos, to send you into the light, Eur. Ale. 456. Kvicrn 8' ovpavbv
lice, the savor ascended to heaven, A. 317. (h) This construction applies
less frequently to persons : MvTjoTfjpas dcpUero, ca.me to the suitors, a. 332.
i. The poets sometimes even join an Ace. of the place with verbs of
standing, sitting, or lying (as implying occupation) : "E<rrnK€ ire'Tpav,
stands on a rock, Eur. Sup. 987. Tplirooa Ka0££a>v <J>o?/3o? lb. 956.
j. This rule primarily applies only to the adjuncts of verbs (a). Verbal
adjectives and nouns, however, sometimes take the Ace. by virtue of the
included verb : 2£ . . <pv£ip.os, able to escape you, Soph. Ant. 788 ; cf. "'H
/xr] (fnryw ere; Id. El. 1503. Tct re fxere'wpa <ppovTicrrT|$, a student of the
heavens, PI. Apol. 18 b ; cf. Tw /xerewpuu cppom-iar-qs Symp. 6. Cf. 477 a.
473. a. Causatives govern the Ace, together with the
case of the included verb : as,
M "{] p. dvap,v^crr]s kcik&v, do not remind me of [cause me to remember]
my woes (432 c), Eur. Td\a vfxets l-mSno-a, ' made you drink', 1 Cor. 3. 2.
b. The verbs Set and yprj are sometimes construed by the poets as
causatives : 2£ del Upop^-qdews, you have need of [it needs you of] a Pro-
metheus, iEsch. Pr. 86 (414 b). 2£ XPV • • a-lSovs, you have need of mod-
esty, y. 14. So xpecb tcrrai (as if a Fut. of xpti, 475 b) <£. 322.
474. Attraction, a. A word which is properly construed other-
wise, sometimes becomes the direct object of a verb by attraction, espe-
cially in the poets. This sometimes results in hypallage (an interchange
254 SYNTAX. R. XXI. ACCUSATIVE N 0F THE EFFECT. § 474.
of construction) : Et 5^ p* cD5' del X<5-yois e£%>x« [ = P- 01 Xbyovs or \6ytov],
if you had always begun your addresses to me thus, Soph. El. 556.
b. A verb, of which the proper object or effect is a distinct sentence,
often takes the subject (or some other prominent word) of that sentence in
the Ace, by attraction : "Hi8ei avrov, otl fieaov %x 0L i ^ e knew [him] that
he occupied the centre, i. 8. 21. (c) Nor is this anticipation confined to
the Ace. : Bappdpwv eirefueXelTo, ws iroXefietv re luavoi et-qaav, he took care
that the barbarians should be prepared for war, i. 1. 5. See 402 a.
475. Periphrasis, a. The place of a verb is often supplied by an
Ace. of the kindred noun joined with such verbs as uWu (or more fre-
quently Troieofiai), &y<a, 2x w > T^&rjpi, &c. : Kvpos e^eraatv koX apiOfibv t&v
'EXXfyuv e-jroirjaev [= e^rfraae ical -ffpldpL-qae rods "EWrjvas], C. made a review
and numbering of [= reviewed and numbered] the Greeks, i. 2. 9.
b. These and like periphrases sometimes take an Ace. by virtue of the
implied verb : 'Av8pdiro8a apway^v iroirjo-dfievos [= apTrdaas], having made
seizure of slaves, Th. 8. 62. S^ua ridels (= arffiaipw) . . vfrcqv, 6. 171.
476. Ellipsis. 1. The verb which governs the Ace. is
sometimes omitted ; particularly,
a.) In EMPHATIC ADDRESS or EXCLAMATION : OCroS, & <ri TOl [SC XejU)
or koKCj], You there, ho ! you / mean, Ar. 'Iu>, lw, Xiyeias popov arjdovos
[sc. irodCo], oh, oh [I long] for the fate of the melodious nightingale/ iEsch.
b.) In ENTREATY : Mr), irpbs <T€ dewv [sc. iKereiui], tXtjs fie irpobovvau,
I beseech you by tJie gods, do not forsake me,. Eur. Ale. 275. Observe the
hyperbaton, which is frequent in earnest entreaty.
c.) In prohibition: M77 Tpipds en [sc. 7roie?Te], No more delays!
d.) In swearing : Ou, tovS "OX.vp.irov [sc. ftfivvfii, 472 f], No ! by this
Olympus ! Soph. Ant. 758. Ov, rav Aids acrrpairdv Id. El. 1063. — By
this ellipsis may be explained the use of the Ace. with the particles vf\,
val, and pd (of which the two first are affirmative, and the last, unless
preceded by val, commonly negative), according to the following rule :
Rule H. Adverbs of swearing are followed by the Ace. :
N77 Ala, Fes, by Jupiter / i. 7. 9. Nai tw Su& vi. 6. 34. 'AXXd. fid
rods Geovs, ovk fry wye avrods 5tu>£a>, but, by tJie gods, I will not pursue them,
i. 4. 8. Nat /id Ala, Yes, indeed ! v. 8. 6.
e.) Some familiar verbs : '0 rbv icdvSvv [sc. i\ iAV \ m later writers], he
with the cloak, Luc. D. C. 9.
2. The Ace. required by a transitive verb is sometimes omitted: cf.
AtareXeaai ttjv 686v, to finish the way, iv. 5. 11, and irpbs £>5wp f3o6XoiTO
diareXeaat i. 5. 7 ; 'EXativovros rbv tirirov, riding his Iwrse, and TJapeXat-
vovros, Cyr. 8. 3. 28, 29. Mkios ijXaae i. 10. 15.
3. An elliptical or unusual construction of a verb and Ace. is sometimes
employed, especially by the poets, for energy or brevity of expression :
$iX6TVTa . . Ta.fiap.ev, let us strike friendship [a victim in pledge of friend-
ship], r. 94 (cf. fcedus ferire). Cf. 474 s, 479.
Accusative of the Effect.
477. The effect of a verb includes whatever the agent
does or makes. Hence any verb may take an Ace. expressing
or denning its action. The Ace. thus employed may be either
(1) a noun kindred, in its origin or signification, to the verb ;
§ 480. DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 255
or (2) a neuter adjective used substantively ; or (3) a noun simply
defining or characterizing the action.
1. Kindred Noun (with this, the verb is often translated by a more
general word) : Evt&xvw touto to €v-ri>XT|p.a, they had [succeeded] gained
this success, vi. 3. 6. 4»v\aKas <pu\a&iv, to keep guard, ii. 6. 10. 'fts
aidvduvov p£ov fap,€v, how secure a life we live, Eur. Med. 248.
a. In like manner, an adjective sometimes takes an Ace. of the kindred
noun : So06s &v ttjv eneivwv <ro<f>iav, being wise with their wisdom, PI.
b. It will be observed, that usually an adjective is joined with the Ace.
of the kindred noun, and the whole phrase is an emphatic substitution for
an adverb : 'fis ddvduvov §iov £G)p.ev = '12s aKivbuvus &p.ev. This adjective
not unfrequently occurs with an ellipsis of the noun : T6 IleporiKbv upxeiro
[sc. dpxvM-a], he danced the Persian [dance], vi. 1. 10. See 478.
478. 2. Neuter Adjective (commonly translated by supplying
a noun, or by an adverb) : Toiavra p&v TreiroliqKe, such acts has lie com-
mitted, or thus has he acted, i. 6. 9. Afyeis ouk a\dpifrra, you speak
pleasantly enough, ii. 1. 13. KXeirrov ^Xeiret [sc. /3\e,u/m], he looks [a
thievish look] thievish, Ar. Vesp. 900. 'Aviicpaye re iroX.ep.iKov vii. 3. 33.
a. This construction of the neuter adjective is very extensive in its use,
and often occurs where a substantive would be constructed differently
(472 d) : '0<r<ppalvei ti ; ToO tjruxovs, 'Do you smell any thing V ' TJie
cold.' It is closely allied to the adverbial use of the neuter adjective (483).
479. 3. Definitive Noun. 'H /3oiA/? . . ?p\e\J/e vairv, the senate
looked mustard, Ar. Eq. 629. Me'vea irvdovres, breathing courage, T. 8
("breathing united force," Milt.). 'Peirw -ydXa, let it flow milk, Theoc.
Double Accusative.
480. 1. A word may take as many adjuncts, in the same
or different cases, as the sense requires. Thus,
2. Many verbs govern two accusatives, which may be,
a.) The direct object and the effect, in apposition with each other
(393) ; as with verbs of making, appointing, choosing, esteeming, naming,
dividing, &c. : Bao-tXea <re lirofrrjorav, tliey made you king, vii. 7. 22. Srpa-
r-rrybv 5e aurbv direSeiije, he had appointed him general, i. 1. 2. liarepa i/xt
IkoAcitc, you called me father, vii. 6. 38. KOpos rd 0-Tpdrevp.a KaTeveipe
dudeKCL pkpt], C. divided the army into twelve parts (393 d), Cyr. 7. 5. 13.
b.) The direct object and the effect, not in apposition; as with
verbs of doing, saying, &c. (a neuter adj. often expressing the effect, 478 a) :
E? ris ti dyadbv if kclkov trof/|<rci€V aurbv, if any one had done him any good
or evil, i. 9. 11. 'AiroT£o-a<r0cu 8'lktjv exdpovs, to wreak vengeance on his
foes, Eur. Heracl. 852. "Ora^ . . aWrjXovs to. Zcrx aTa XIyomtiv, wlien they
say the worst things of each other, Mem. 2. 2. 9.
c.) Two objects differently related, but which are both regarded as
direct ; as with verbs of asking and requiring, of clothing and unclothing,
of concealing and depriving, of persuading and teaching, &c. : Kupov alrciv
ir\oia, to ask vessels of Cyrus, or to ask Cyrus for vessels, i. 3. 14. Tbv
5r)p.ov vpL&v xXatj/af V\\nnar\ov, they clad your people in a mantle, Ar. Lys.
1156. M-j^toi p.e Kpv»\j/Tjs touto, do not hide this from me, iEsch. Pr. 625.
'H/Aaj 5£ airocrrcpct Tbv puaObv, but us he robs of our pay, vii. 6. 9. 2£
8k8o>K€iv tt]v o~t par-fry lav , to teach you the military art, Mem. 3. 1. 5.
256 SYNTAX. R. XXII., &C. ACCUSATIVE. §481.
in. Accusative of Specification.
481. Kule XXII. The Accusative is used in
specifying to what part, property, &c, a word or
expression applies :
The force of this Ace. is expressed in Eng. by as to (nark, secundum),
though other forms of translation are more frequent : Td> \ilpd Se8ep.evov,
[bound as to the hands] with his hands bound, vi. 1. 8. TlorapLos, K6Svos
6vo|xa, evpos dvo trXedpuv, a river, Cydnus by name, two plethra in breadth,
i. 2. 23. ndvTa KpaTcaros, best in every thing, i. 9. 2 (cf. 416 b).
a. When a verb is in this way followed by two accusatives, the con-
struction (which is most frequent in Epic poetry) may be often referred to
partitive apposition : Tory* . . \Itt oa-ria 6vp,6s T. 406. See 395 b.
b. An Ace. of specification sometimes introduces a sentence : Ta fxev
yap irapcXOovra, i/p-eh p.h Kvpov vv^rjcraTe, as to the past, you have exalted
C, Cyr. 8. 6. 23. Toi>s d-ypovopovs toOtovs, . . 6vd8n (pep'cadwaav PI. Leg.
iv. Accusative of Extent.
482. Rule XXIII. Extent of time or
space is put in the Accusative : as,
a. Time : "Efieivev Tjpe'pas iTrrd, mansit dies septem, he remained
[through] seven days, i. 2. 6. 'Edaicpve iroXdp xp^vov, he tuept a long lime,
i. 3. 2. "EirXeov ^pipav ical vvicra vi. 1. 14. Efaoaip i-rr\ yeyopfa, viginti
annos natus, twenty years old, Mem. 3. 6. 1. *Os rtdpvKe ravra rpla Irq,
■ these three years,' Lys. 109. 12. (b) So sometimes repeated time, as
implying extent : Ttjp coprjv eirayip'eetp <r<pi afyas, to bring them goatf at
tlie proper hour (each day), Hdt. 2. 2. (c) In stating a period ending with
the present, an ordinal number is often used : 'EvaTTjv r\pJepap yeyap.yp.e-
vt)v, hawing been married [the ninth day] nine days, iv. 5. 24.
d. Space : 'Ei-eXavpei 8ia Qpvylas crTa.0p.bv h>a, irapao-dyyas oktc6, he
advances through P. one day's-march, eight parasangs, i. 2. 6. Mvplas
efieye icara yrjs opyuias yev'ecrOai, that I may be 10,000 fathoms under
ground, vii. 1. 30. T6 /3e\os avr&p Kai 8iir\d<nov [sc. didcrrnpLa] <pepeadai,
that their missile is sent double the distance, iii. 3. 16.
e. In the simple designation of time and place, the Genitive common-
ly expresses the time and place in which (433), the Dative, at which
(469), and the Accusative, through which ; the Gen. and Ace. differing
like in and through, but both containing the idea of extension ; the Dat.,
like at, not containing this idea, but simply presenting the when or wliere
as if a point in time or space. To some extent, however, the offices of the
cases blend with each other ; and the more on account of their generic
uses. See 485 e.
v. Adverbial Accusative.
483. Kule XXIY. The Accusative is often
used adverbially, to express degree, manner, order,
&c: as,
§ 485. OF SPECIFICATION, EXTENT, &C. VOCATIVE. 257
ToVSc rbv Tpoirov, in this way, or thus, i. 1. 9. KtpKfjv . . fufi-fjo-ofiac
irdvTas Tp<$irov$, 'every way,' Ar. PI. 302. TeXos 8£ elwe, [at the end]
finally he said, ii. 3. 26. 'Apx^v p.7) TrXovrija-ai, * in the first place,' ' at
all (with negatives),' vii. 7. 28. 'Ep.^v \dpiv, for my sake, Eur. Hec. 874.
a. This rule applies especially to the Ace. neut. of adjectives, both sing,
and plur.: T6 dpxcwov, formerly, i. 1. 6. Td fth . ., to. 8$, partly . .,
partly, iv. 1. 14. Mucpbv £l-£<pvye rb /jltj KaTaTreTpcoBrjvai i. 3. 2.
b. An Ace. neut. pronoun is sometimes used to denote that on account
of which something is done (especially an end in view) : Taw ey& ftnrev-
dov, [on account of these things] therefore I made haste, iv. 1. 21. "A 5'
ffkdov, what I came for, Soph. 0. C. 1291. Tl rd irvpa Kau-aafitaeiav,
' why,' vi. 3. 25. (c) So with xpjj|ia, thing, expressed : Ti xPVf* 01 ' Keiaai ;
tvhy do you lie there ? Eur. Heracl. 633.
d. An adjective may be used adverbially in the Ace. fern., with an
ellipsis of 68ov way, or oipav season : "EwTarTevdcu t^jv ra\l(rrt\v, to form
[in the quickest way] immediately, i. 3. 14. Tty irp»TT]v T/)^x eo ' XP^> we
mzist first run, Ar. Th. 662. So jxatcpdv a long way, &c.
F. The Vocative.
484. Eule XXV. The Compellatiye of a
sentence is put in the Vocative.
a. The usual sign of address, in Greek, as in so many lan-
guages, is S>. It is commonly employed in prose, except (b) in
abrupt or familiar address ; and (c) is frequent in poetry, (d)
It is commonly followed by the emphatic word in the address,
unless (e) this has already preceded ; and is (f) sometimes
doubled for special emphasis.
(a) *£l <£aX.iv€, dav/x&fa, Phalinus, I wonder, ii. 1. 10. (b) KXiapxe
Kal IlpdSjeve, . . ovk tare 6 tl Troieire, Clearchus and Proxenus, you know not
what you do, i. 5. 16. (c) *£l 'AxtXeu A. 74. (d) "fi Qav\uxcruaraT6 &v0pu-
ire, most wonderful man, iii. 1. 27. *tt kcucuttc avdpibTrw'Aptcue ii. 5.
39. (e) Goundou & Kplrw PL (f) *ft t£kvov & yevvouov Soph. Ph. 799.
g. The term of respectful address to a company of men is dvSpes, with
which may be likewise connected a more specific appellation : 'Opart p£p,
& avdpes, you see, gentlemen, iii. 2. 4. "Avdpes aTpctTtOrcu, i. 3. 3.
Remarks on the Cases.
485. It is important to distinguish not only the specific
offices of the cases, but also their generic uses. Thus,
a. The Nom. is the generic case for substantives independent of gram-
matical construction (401) ; while the Voc. is the specific case for address,
and the other cases are also used in exclamations (429 e, f, 453, 476 a). — •
Hence the union of the Nom. and Voc. is not deemed a violation of the
laws of agreement. An appositive with a Voc. is usually in the Nom.
b. The Gen. is the generic case for the adjuncts of substantives, adjec-
tives, and adverbs ; and thus may even express direct or indirect objects,
more specifically expressed by the Ace. or Dat. (435, 444).
c. The Dat. is the generic case for a thing or circumstance simply
viewed as an accompaniment (465).
COMP. GR. Q
258 SYNTAX. REMARKS ON THE CASES. §485.
d. The Ace. is the generic case for the adjuncts of verbs, and thus ex-
presses much which is also expressed by the Dat. or Gen. (472 a, b). It
often expresses as simple object, what is expressed by the Dat. as the object
of approach or influence, or by the Gen. as the point of departure or the
cause: ' A<paipei(rdai rods ivoiKowras "EXXijvas tt)v yrjv, to deprive the Greek
inhabitants of their land (480 c), i. 3. 4 ; *0 toio-iv acpelXero v6<rn/xov fj/xap
(463) ; TQv dXXcov atpoupotip-evoi. xP'n/^Ta, taking money from others (405),
Mem. 1. 5. 3. Also, with a Gen. of the thing, or with a preposition (487),
' AcpcupouvT at . . avrovs 8£ tt)s oxfxXcias, deprive themselves of the benefit,
Ven. 6. 4 ; 'Airb ttjs opyrjs rty dKa\-q<pT)v afaXtadcu, to take away the nettle
from his temper, Ar. Vesp. 883 (with 4k, Ven. 12. 9). So the Ace. of effect
may be supplied by another case : 'AkLv8vvov p{ov fw/aei' (477. 1). Zuxrau
&p\apei j3fo>, living with unharmed life (modal Dat., 467), Soph. El. 650.
e. If a circumstance is merely viewed as modifying a verb, it is put in
the Ace; if simply viewed as an accompaniment, in the Dat.; but if
viewed as having some causal relation, in the Gen. These differences of
view, and the prevalence of different analogies, have led to much variety
of construction. Thus, (a) Manner : Tbv ai/rbv rp6irov vi. 5. 6, T$ airy
Tpoirw iv. 2. 13, in the same manner (483, 467). (f5) Measure of dif-
ference : Qvp-oeidtarepoL bk iroXv, much more spirited (483), iv. 5. 36 ;
IIoXXw be iiarepov (468) ; Totrovrov i. 8. 13 ; TWovtw i. 5. 9. (y) Re-
spect : IIXfjGos ws 5i<rxiXioi, about 2,000 in number^ iv. 2. 2 ; Kvbvos
6vop.a (481) ; n\Yj0€i . . Xeupdtvres, Qa\pa.Kos 6v6|iaTi (467 b) ; Neciraros
. . 70V010 (446 b ; cf. 413). (8) Part affected : Tu> yj&ot bebe^vov
(481) ; ^aueiv x««f os, to take by the hand (426 a). («) Time : To Xoiirov
ii. 2. 5, Tov Xoiirov (433 a), afterwards ; Te'Xos, at last (483) ; Xpovw
irore ei7rev, [with time] at length he said, Hel. 4. 1. 34. (£) Cause':
Tovt' £(pii<6p.r)j>, on this account I came (483 b), Soph. O. T. 1005 ; Tovrov
ere . . frXw (429 a) ; Tw, wherefore (466).
486. The construction belonging to a word in its primary sense and
form (a) is extensively retained in figurative or secondary senses, and in
composition (414 c, 427, 432 g, &c.) ; but (b) is often changed to another
more appropriate. Thus, (c) many verbs become transitive through a sec-
ondary sense, or through composition with a preposition, even though the
preposition may not itself govern the Ace: Kivbvvov i!g&<rrr\<rav f tJiey
shrunk from danger, Dem. 460. 2. In the same way, (d) other verbs from
transitive become intransitive : Ottcry €v8»t€, you may [give in] yield to
pity, Th. 3. 37.
487. a. Most of the relations expressed by the cases may be more
definitely expressed by the aid of prepositions. This definiteness was
naturally more sought in prose than in poetry, and more in the later than
in the earlier Greek.
b. The use of a preposition, or of one case rather than another, often
avoids ambiguity, or distinguishes from other adjuncts, or gives emphasis,
■or favors the metre, or promotes euphony, &c.
III. USE OF THE NUMBERS, GENDERS, AND PERSONS.
488. Numbers. 1. The Singular is sometimes used for
the Plural in the Greek, as in other languages, to give to the
expression greater individuality or unity : Tov "EWqva, the Greek
(= the Greeks), Hdt. 1. 69. Tov 7ro\efxiov, the enemy, Th. 5. 9.
"Epnci baupvov dppdrav ano 3 the tear trickles from my eyes. Soph.
§ 491. NUMBERS AND GENDERS. 259
a. A chorus, from its tmity and the action of the coryphaeus as its rep-
resentative, is more frequently denoted by the singular (sometimes inter-
changed with the plural) : 'Hjnv fieu S}8t] irav TeTo&vTau /3e\os, \Uv<a de",
every shaft has now been shot by us, and I wait, iEsch. Eum. 676.
c. Some imperatives, used like interjections, are singular, though m,ore
than one are addressed : "A"y€ bq, aKovaare, Come now, hear, Apol. 14.
d. In Greek, as in Eng., some nouns related individually to more than
one, may be either singular or plural : Kpario-Toi . . rr)v ^\"fjv, strongest
in lieart, Th. 2. 40 (or rds xjru\ds, in their hearts; cf. Mem. 4. 1. 2).
489. 2. The use of the Plural for the Singular is particular-
ly frequent in Greek, especially in abstract nouns, in neuter ad-
jectives used substantively, in the names of things composed of
distinct parts, and in vague expressions for persons or things.
^v\r\ Kai OdAirTj kclI iroVovs tptpeiv, to endure cold, and heat, and labor
[in repeated instances], iii. 1. 23. Tot 8e£id rod /cfydros, the right [portions]
of tlie -wing, i. 8. 4. Td 'Lvevveinos Pao-iXeia, the palace [royal buildings]
of Syennesis, i. 2. 23. Rvv rotade Tof-ots, with this bow.
b. An individual sometimes speaks of himself in the plural (with which
the sing, may be combined), as if others were associated with him, especially
in poetry ; and (c) a woman speaking of herself in this indefinite way, uses
the masculine of the plur., as the generic gender (490 b) : (b) Al8ovp.e0a
yap ra XeXeyfieva (lot, I am ashamed of what I have said, Eur. Hipp. 244.
TaOra ireipao-ojieOa 8Lrry>)aaadai, these things we will endeavor to relate (the
author's plural), Cyr. 1. 1. 6. (c) 'Hfieis KTevovp.ev, ol'irtp i^e<pvo-afieu, I will
slay, ivho bore them, Id. Med. 1241.
d. The plural for the sing, in neuter adjectives used substantively is
especially frequent in their appositive use, in adjective pronouns, and in
verbals in -rios and -tos ' "Orav fi4v ti ayaQbv £xw<", irapaicaXovcri fie eirl
Tawa, whenever they have anything good, tliey invite me to [these things]
this, Symp. 4. 50. H&tpokXo j, os <tol irarpos fy to, ^CKrara, P. , who was
thy fat/ier's best-beloved, Soph. Ovs ov irapaSorca Tois'AdrjvaLois early Th.
490. Genders. 1. The Masculine is the generic gender
for persons as such ; and hence is not only used when males are
included, but even for females only in some indefinite or general
forms of expression (489 c). See Mem. 2. 7. 2 s.
a. Where there are different forms for the two sexes, the masc. is also
the form common to both : 01 KaXoi, the beautiful (whether men or women).
b. When the masc. is applied to a woman, the expression becomes still
more indefinite if the plural is used : EiV ots r ov XPW /"•' o/uuXQu, consort-
ing with those [= her] with whom I ought not, Soph. 0. T. 1184.
491. 2. The Neuter is the generic gender for objects of
thought considered without respect to personality (simply as
things) ; and hence may even apply to persons so considered.
a. Infinitives, clauses used substantively, and words or phrases spoken of
as such, are naturally regarded as neuter : Ov to £fjv irepi TrXeLarov iroit]-
tc'ov, d\Xd to €§ £fjv, not to live m to be valued most highly, but to live
well, PI. Crito 48 b. AfjXov fp 6'rt e?77<^ ttov fiaatXevs ty, it was evident
that the king was somewhere near, ii. 3. 6. To MH /cal to OT irpoTi0€-
p.eva, the not and the no prefixed, PI. Soph. 257 b.
260 SYNTAX. R. J. AGREEMENT. §491.
b. So clauses, phrases, or words, not used substantively, are accounted
as neuter in any reference that may be made to them : 'EvT]8pevcra(Mv,
Sircp i)p,as /cat avairvevacu iiroirjcre, we ambushed, which enabled us to take
breath, iv. 1. 22. <Ppovi|i<5s re /cat <rya0bs 6 a5i/cos, 6 5e Skatos oiScTcpa,
£Ae unjust man is both tvise and good, and the just man neither of these, PI.
c. As infinitives and clauses so often want strict singleness of concep-
tion and even of form, attributes and pronouns referring to them are often
plural (489 a) : 'ASvvara fjv eirixeipeTv, it was impossible to undertake, Th.
1. 125. 'Eporjdrjaav rrj Aa/ce5at/icwt, /cat ravra [sc. eiroiycrav] ddores, they
aided L., and that [they did] knowing, Ages. 1. 38.
Agreement in Number, Gender, &c.
492. The following table presents, for comparison, the gen-
eral rules of agreement :
An Appositive \ agrees ( Case.
An Adjective I with \ Gender, Number, and Case.
A Pronoun ( its sub- j Gender, Number, and Person.
A Verb ) ject in ( Number, - and Person.
a. These rules have the same general foundation, and to a great extent
the same modifications and exceptions.
b. The agreement of an attribute with its subject is far less strict than
that of an epithet ; and the agreement of the pronoun is still less strict.
c. The use of the masculine form as feminine in adjectives and pro-
nouns of three terminations (234 d, e) is not to be regarded as an excep-
tion to the laws of agreement.
493. Rule J. Agreement is commonly according to form,
but often rather according to sense. See 70 p.
494. 1. The Dual and Plural, as different modes of de-
noting two (178), very often agree with each other, or are
interchanged :
HatSes 8\jo two children, ra> iraXtie the two children, i. 1. 1. T<3p dvdpQv
vi. 6. 29, rd> &v8pe 30, rods &v8pas, . . rotiruv, . . t« &v8pe 31, &c. Upoa-
trpexov Svo veavicncw, two young men came running up, iv. 3. 10. 'Etye-
\aadr-qv odv &fi<pw pxtyaures els dXX^Xw, both laughed, looking, &c, PL
a. In the old poetic language, a few passages occur in which the Dual
appears to retain its application to more than two (186 g, 271 c) : Edvde re
/cat <x6, HbSapye, koX AWujv Adp-ire re Sie, vvv p.oi . . d,7roT^V€Tov G. 185.
495. 2. In compound construction, both syllepsis and
zeugma are common. See 68 f.
496. In syllepsis, (a) the combined number may be the
dual, if only two are spoken of; but is otherwise the plural
(with an exception in the verb, 569 b). — (b) F or persons of
both sexes, the combined gender is the masculine (490) ; (c) for
things, or persons and things* it is the neuter (though it may
* Classed together as objects of thought (491). Zeugma, however, is
here more common.
§ 499. COMPOUND CONSTRUCTION. SYNESIS. 261
be another gender, if all the subjects agree in that). — (d) The
combined person, as in Lat. and Eng., is the first, if that is in-
cluded in the subjects ; the second, if that is included and not
the first ; but otherwise the third. Thus,
(a) "ZwKpdrei 6}h\t]t& -ye/oi^'vo) Kptrias re ko! ' A\/a/3ia57?5 irXelo-ra /ca/ca
rr\v irokiv €iroir]<rdTT]v, C. and A., who had been associates of S., brought
very many evils upon the city, Mem. 1. 2. 12. 'AiroXeXofordxriv i]p.ds Sew'as
koX H.a<rlwv, X. and P. have left us, i. 4. 8. (b) Elde iraripa re Kai firjripa
Kai d5e\(povs Kai tx\v eavrou yvvcuKa alxH-aXwTOvs 7€7«vt]|X€VOvs, lie saw fa-
ther, and mother, and brotlters, and his own wife taken captive, Cyr. 3. 1. 6.
(c) UXivdoL Kai £6\a Kai Kepa[xos araKrus /xh IpptjxjjLt va ovSev xpTJ^ijid lariv,
bricks, wood, and tiles, thrown together in confusion, are of no use, Mem. 3.
1. 7. (d) *E7cb Kai <?<}>& . . ir6ir\TJ"Y|j.€0a, I and you both are smitten, Eur.
Ale. 404. Oi) ad fibvos ovdt ol col <f>L\oi . . 'io-yer* PI. Leg. 888 b.
e. Syllepsis is sometimes found, where the relation of the subjects to
each other is disjunctive : Et 8£ k "Apvs &px<o<ri /J.&XV* $ $ol(3os T. 138.
497. In zeugma, the agreement is sometimes with the most
prominent substantive, sometimes with the nearest : as,
Ba<ri\eus 5e Kai ol gvp curry Sicokwv clcnrCirra, the king and those toith
him, pursuing, attack, i. 10. 1 (cf. dtapTrdfovai 2). 'A7ra\\a7e>res iro\ifj.u)v
Kai KLvdxjvuv Kai rapaxys, efr ^v . . Kadecrra/jLev, delivered from the wars,
perils, and trouble, in which we are now involved, Isoc. 163 b.
a. Zeugma is the common construction of the adjective used as an
epithet. It is least frequent in the pronoun.
b. In the construction of the verb, zeugma is especially frequent when
the verb precedes or directly follows the first subject : Kdpov airoTCfivcTat
7? Ke<pa\rj Kai x ei P V 5e£td, the head of C. is cut off, and tJie right hand,
L 10. 1. 2tf re yap "EXKrjv tl Kai i]p.ets, for you arc a Greek, and we also.
498. 3. Synesis. The agreement is sometimes with a
subject implied in another word, especially a Genitive implied in
an adjective (commonly a possessive) :
Td abv [= <rov] \lovi\s Sdoprj/j-a, tuum solius donum, [your gift alone] the
9ift of you alone, Soph. Tr. 775. Tdfid [ = ifiov] §vcrrf\vov KaKd, tfu ills
of ivrctched me, Id. 0. C. 344. T??s ifirjs eweiabSov, 8v p-tjt oKvetre, of my
approach, whom do not fear, lb. 730. Tots iyxeTtpois [= ^Qv] avrwv <pi-
Xots, our own friends, vii. 1. 29.
499. 4. Words may also agree according to sense,
a.) With Collective Nouns, and other words used collectively : Td 7^77-
6os e\|/t]<j>£cravTO, the majority voted, Th. 1. 125. See f. .
b.) With the plural used as singular (especially fjpets for eyd) ; and
with the singular used as plural, or so modified as to render the idea plu-
ral : Jleirbvdajxev, $\ . . Kevqv Kartaxov iXirida, ive have suffered, [yes I] w/w
cherished a vain hope, Eur. Iph. A. 985 (see 489 b). Artfioadevrjs /j-era t&v
^vaTpaTrryuiv . . <nrev8ovTai, D. with his colleagues makes a truce, Th. 3. 109.
c.) Nouns figuratively used to denote persons, and others in which the
gender does not follow the sex : T65' Zpvos . . KarBavovTa, this scion [son]
slain, Eur. Bac. 1307. MeX^a ^xa, 8s . . ijo-dr) Soph. v ii c^X/rax', & irepia-
<ra ti|jit]8€Is t£kvov, O dearest, O most fondly cherished son, Eur. Tro. 735.
d.) With a noun forming a periphrasis with a genitive or adjective :
4>i\TaT* Alyiadov pia, dearest majesty of ^E., ^Esch. Ch. 893. 'EXOwv . .
ply 'HpaKXrjelr), the mighty Hercules coining, A. 690.
262 SYNTAX. R. XXVL, XXVII. ATTRACTION, &C. § 499.
e.) In general, with words for which others might have been used, or
with which others are implied (as inhabitants with places, crews with ves-
sels, troops with commanders, &c.) : Ilacra. 8e yewa [= Xaos] ^pvyQv . .
8wcra)v, the whole race of tlie Phrygians, about to offer, Eur. Tro. 531. <£etf-
yei . . es KtpKvpav, &v avrcSv evepyervs, he flees to Corcyra, being a benefactor
of theirs, Th. 1. 136. UevT-rjKovTa Tpir/peis . . ovk cISotes lb. 110*
f. A double construction sometimes occurs, chiefly with intervening
words. Thus, a collective noun may take a singular with reference to the
united whole, and then a plural with reference to the individuals compos-
ing that whole ; &c. : 'H 8e (lovXr) 7)crvxia.v &yj£V, opewra . ., ko! ovk a/yvo-
ouvTcs, the senate remained quiet, seeing . ., and not ignorant, Hel. 2. 3. 55.
500. 5. Attraction. An appositive often attracts from
the regular form of agreement :
Tb fieaov tw reix&v ?\<rav ordSioi rpeis, the distance bctiveen tlie walls
was three stadia, i. 4. 4. 'E7rt irvXas ■ . . fj<rav 8e ravra (for aSrat) 8vo Tti\i\,
to the gates ; now these were two walls, i. 4. 4.
a. This construction occurs chiefly where the true subject is more
remote or in a different clause ; and might be often referred to ellipsis or
inversion : 'E<rr£as, ov [sc. xuplov] oCre do-iwrepov ywpiov, the hearth, than
which [spot] there is no holier spot, Cyr. 7. 5. 56:
b. The attraction is sometimes from an appositive to its subject : "HXtos
. . iravruv Xap/n-poraTOS, the sun, tlie brightest [sc. thing'] of all things,
Mem. 4. 7. 8 (where the more regular Xap-irpoTarov, in the gender of the
Gen. partitive, might also have been used). Indus ftuminum maximus.
c. A word is sometimes attracted from its true subject by a noun gov-
erning the latter, chiefly in the poets : T65e ve?Kos dvSpQv £vvai|iov [for
j-waifiuv], this [kindred strife] strife of kindred men, Soph. Ant. 793.
501. 6. Change of Number. The number is often changed
for the sake of individualizing or generalizing the expression,
especially when a distributive or indefinite fironoun is used :
"AXXovs 8' €K€\ev€ Xeyeiv, 8ia rl idcao-ros iirX-rryr), he bade the rest say,
on what account each one liad been struck, v. 8. 12. "Hv 84 tis to6tojv tl
Trapafiaivei, ftfiiav avrots eirideaav, if any one transgresses any of tliese
laws, they liave set a penalty for [them] him, Cyr. 1. 2. 2.
a. When the subject is divided or distributed, the verb sometimes agrees
with the wlwle, and sometimes with one of tlie parts : "Ottt) ISwvavro e*a-
(Ttos, where tliey each could, iv. 2. 12. ' Aveiravovro 8k, birov crvyxavev
Zkckttos, they rested where each one happened to be, iii. 1. 3.
502. 7. Neuter adjectives are used in connection with
words of different gender and number (commonly as apposi-
tives ; cf. 489 d, 491) :
^optpwraTov 5' ip-rjfiia, solitude is the most terrible thing, ii. 5. 9 (cf.
Ev/j-PovXr) Upbv \pf\\i.a. PL Theag. 122 b). "Efioiye <|>CXTaTOV 7r6Xis, to me
tlie state is the dearest object, Eur. Med. 329. T£ odv Tavra iariv ; wliat
then [are these things] is this ? ii. 1. 22.
503. 8. A change of person sometimes takes place,
a.) From the union of direct and indirect modes of speaking, especially
in quotation : "Ayotr' av [laraiov &vSp' iniroSuv, 5s . . k6.kto.vov, take out of
tlie way a senseless man, me, who have slain, Soph. Ant. 1339.
b.) From a speaker's addressing a company, now as one with tliem, and
now as distinct from them : Aavdaveiv vjjtas els bo-qv rapax^v i) iroXis i\y.av
Kadio-T-qKtv • cotea/re yap . ., oirives TtGvKajMV Isoc. 141 d.
§ 506. " ADJECTIVE AND PRONOUN. 263
CHAPTEE II.
SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE AND PKONOUN.
I. AGREEMENT.
(See 492 s : for the union of the Dual and Plural, 494 ; for Compound
Construction, 495 s ; for Synesis, 498 s ; for Attraction, 500 ; for change
of Number and Person, 501 s.)
504. Kule XXVI. An Adjective agrees with
its subject in gender, number, and case.
a. The word adjective is here used in its largest sense (173) : Uapd8ei<ros
jxlvag (rypicov drjploiv irXifjp'ns, a large park full of wild beasts, i. 2. 7. IIoXu'
oIkovu,€vt)v, p.€-ydX.Tiv Kal evoaCpova, an inhabited city, large and flourishing ,
lb. To) iratde dpxporlpco, both tlie children, i. 1. 1. To£6ras KprjTas 8ta-
Koa-iovs, 200 Cretan archers, i. 2. 9. Tavrrjv t?|v ttoXcv lb. 24.
b. Anacoluthon. An adjective sometimes differs in case from its sub-
ject, through a cJiange of construction. This occurs chiefly in the participle,
as less closely joined to the subject, and especially with intervening
words : "Edo^ei/ avrots [= i\f/r)<pi<ravTo] . ., frriicaXowTCS, it seemed best to
them [they voted], alleging, Th. 3. 36. Aldus p.* £x 6t [ = atiov/xai] iu
T$8e ttot/ulw Tvyxavovo-a, / am ashamed, being in this state, Eur. Hec. 970.
505. Rule XXVII. A Pronoun agrees with
its subject in gender, number, and person.
a. By the subject of a pronoun is meant the substantive which it repre-
sents. The rule, therefore, has respect either to substantive pronouns, or to
adjective pronouns used substantively : Bao-iXevs rrjs y\hv irpbs kavrbv
[i. e. pacriXea] evi^ovXr/s ovk rjadavtro, the king did not perceive the plot
against himself, i. 1. 8. *A7r6 rijs dpx.fjs, *fc [sc. apxv*] a-vrbv aaTpainjv
iwoL7)<re, from the government, of which [government] he had made him
satrap, lb. 2. Ilpbs rbv &8e\<j>bv, u>s eirifiovXeijoi avT<3. 'O 5£ ireiderai, lb. 3.
b. A pronoun, for the sake of perspicuity or emphasis, is often used in
anticipation or repetition of its subject, or is itself repeated : Keivo kcLXXIov,
t£kvov, l<x6T7}Ta Tifxav, that is nobler, my son, to honor equality, Eur. Ph.
535. Bctcri\<?a . . del avrbv 6/x6<rai ii. 4. 7. Ol/ulcli 5d <rot . . 2x etv &" eiridel-
£cu <roi (Ec. 3. 16. (c) Intervening clauses often lead to this repetition.
d. Homer often uses the personal pron. otf, with its noun following :
"H piv tyeipev Navouicdav etiireirXov, who aroused [her] Hie well-clad N.
II. OBSERVATIONS ON THE ADJECTIVE.
506. 1. Ellipsis. The subject of the adjective is often
omitted, especially if it is a familiar word, or supplied by the
context. The words most frequently omitted are,
a.) Masculine, avrjp or &v0p«iros, man, xpovos time: 2wrd£cu 8t 'iKa-
(ttov tovs eavrou [sc. avdpas], that each one should arrange his own \men\,
i. 2. 15. Cf. h Tovrcp i. 10. 6, and ev tovtu) tu>xP°"V i v - 2 - 17.
b.) Feminine, yvvf\ woman, -yfj or x^P^ land, 68ds way, fipipa day,
\dp hand, "yvwp/q opinion, poipa portion, T{\vr\ art, wpa season : 'H Ki-
264 SYNTAX. ADJECTIVE. § 506.
\i<r<ra [sc. yw-r)] i. 2. 12. Trjv Xoiirty [sc. b8bv] iropevabueOa, we shall march
tlie rest of the way, iii. 4. 46. 'Ei/ 5e|t£ [sc. xeipi], o?i £A« rw/7i£, i. 5. 1.
c.) Neuter, irpaytJ.a or ypTjpa, affair, thing, pepos part, tr\i\Qo$ col-
lection, body, arpaTcupa military force, Ke'pas «;% o/ aw. army, \wpiov
pZacc, ground, -ye'vos or €i8os, cZass, sar£, nature : Td rjp.€T€pa, our affairs,
i. 3. 9 (cf. Ta'OdpvcrQv Trpdy/jLara vii. 2. 32). To /coijw [sc. ttX^^os], 2Ae
[public body] council, v. 6. 27. Td 5£ evwvvfiov, the left wing, i. 2. 15.
d. In cases of familiar ellipsis, the adjective is commonly said to be
used substantively.
e. The substantive omitted is sometimes contained or implied in an-
other word : ' Ap.vy SdXivov e/c tQv wucpuv [sc. dp-vySaXwu], of almonds (the
bitter kind), iv. 4. 13. Teupyeiv top fiev iroXX-qv [sc. yrjv] Ar. Eccl. 592.
f. Many words which are commonly employed as substantives are
properly adjectives, or may be used as such : 'Opbvrns 8e IleporTjs dvt]p,
Orontes, a Persian man, i. 6. 1. "EXAtjv Is oIkov, to a Greek Iwme, Eur.
'EXXdSos yrjs Soph. These words, as substantives, are commonly ap-
pellations of persons or countries, dv^jp, yvvf\, y% &c, being understood.
507. 2. Use op the Neuter. The substantive use of the
neuter adjective exhibits itself in a variety of forms :
a. In the sing., a neuter adjective with the article has often the force
of an abstract, or (b) collective noun ; while (c) the plur. rather denotes
particulars of the kind specified : (a) To 5' dirXovv kcu to dX^Ges evbfxifr
to avrb tw t]Xl0io) etvcu, but [the sincere and true thing] sincerity and truth
he thought to be the same with [the foolish] folly, ii. 6. 22. (b) Tb 'EXXt]-
vikov irdv, the whole Greek race, Hdt. 7. 139. Neuters in -iko*v are espe-
cially so used, (c) Td . . 'EXXrjviKd, the Affairs of Greece, Th. 1. 97.
d. Neuter adjectives (both with and without the article) are used with
prepositions to form many adverbial phrases : *Ej> ye ry (pavepq), openly, i.
3. 21. Aid ra-x^v, rapidly, i. 5. 9. Aid iravrbs, throughout, vii. 8. 11.
e. The neuters irXetov or irX^ov, pclov or 2Xo,ttov, oVov, p/qSev, and tI
are sometimes used as indeclinable adjectives or substantives ; and (f ) from
this, sometimes pass into an adverbial use : MvpidSas irXeiov r) 8w8ei<a,
myriads more than twelve in number, v. 6. 9 (cf. Kprjres irXeCovs ^ e^Kovra
iv. 8. 27). 'AXvv, ov peiov 8vo?j> araSioiu, the H., not less than two stadia in
breadth, v. 6. 9. ' Air okt€Ivov<ti rCiv dvSpQu ov fieiov TrevraKoaiovs, non minus
quingentos, vi. 4. 24. neXrao-rai oVov f = togovtoi ocoi) 8ia.Kbai.oi, targetccrs
as many as (or about) 200, vii. 2. 20. 'Att^x 01 g^ " ^o-paadyy-qv, l about a
parasang,' iv. 5. 10. Kpdao-w tGjv rb p.rj8ev, better than those that are noth-
ing, Eur. Aoko6vt(»)i> elvcu t£, appearing to be something, PI.
508. 3. An adjective (a) sometimes agrees with a substan-
tive, instead of governing it in the Genitive partitive ; and (b)
often so governs it, instead of agreeing with it. In the latter
construction, the adjective is either in the same gender with the
substantive, or else in the neuter (commonly the neut. sing.).
(a) Tiepl picas vvktiis, about midnight [the middle of the night], i. 7. 1
(cf. hp-fay vvkt&v Cyr. 5. 3. 52). Aid \Lt<ri\s 8e rrjs irbXews, per urbem me-
diam, i. 2. 23. Tb &XXo a-rpdrevfia, the rest of the army, lb. 25.
(b) M^ ra cnrovScua twv irpa-ypdTwv [for Trpdyfiara], p.t}8e robs ei3 <j>po-
vovvras twv avSptoirtov [for dvdp&irovs], neither virtuous actions [the virtu-
ous of actions], nor wise men [the wise of men], Isoc. 24 d. Aapirpo"-
ttitos ti., [something of distinction] some distinction, Th. 7. 69.
§ 511. USE OF DEGREES. 265
509. 4. Adjectives are often used for adverbs and adjuncts,
and, by the poets, even for appositives, and dependent clauses ;
to express,
a.) Time : UpoTcpa Kvpov . . d0t«:ero, she arrived^ before C, i. 2. 25.
b.) Place : ^K-qvovp-ev im-atdpioi [= inrb ttjs aWpias iv. 4. 14], we en-
camp in the open air, v. 5. 21. So demonstrative pronouns (especially 88«
in poetry) : LToXXa 5' bpQ ravra [ = tclijtt], 469 b], Tpoftara, I see here many
xep, iii. 5. 9. 'J3s a?/;/) 88e, as £/tc man is here, Soph. 0. C. 32.
c.) Manner : ^wepdWovTo . . 7r6A«s ckovotli, cities contributed will-
i. 1. 9. Wirovro da-acvoi, sequebantur laeti, vii. 2. 9.
d.) EFFECT : E&j>r|pov [— ware eii^>r)p.ov ewai] . . Koip\7jUov (Tropin, hush
your mouth to silence [so that it should be silent], JEsch. Ag. 1247.
e.) Various Relations and Circumstances : "AXXoi 5k %<yav e£a-
Kiayi\i.oi. lirireTs, 'besides,' i. 7. 11. QvXivcu xeraiyifrai, made of wood,
v. 2. 5. IIo\v8aKpvv adovau, the joy of many tears, Eur. El. 126.
f. This use of the adjective sometimes modiiies the sense. Compare
irpwTOv roi/s deovs ewawQ, primum deos laudo, first (before doing anything
else), I praise the gods, with irpwros tovs deovs hrcurta, primus deos laudo,
I first (before any one else) praise t/ie gods, and irpdrrovs robs deoi/s iircuvu,
primos deos laudo, I praise tlie gods first (before praising others).
III. USE OF THE DEGREES (256 s).
(The following observations apply both to adjectives and adverbs.)
510. 1. Words are compared not only by inflection, but
also by the use of adverbs denoting more and most : as,
MaWop <pi\ov, magis gratum, more agreeable, Soph. Ph. 886. Toi)s fia-
\ktto. <pi\ovs, the most friendly, vii. 8. 11. T fi irXdo-ra /xQpoi Soph. El. 1326.
a. The two methods are sometimes united for emphasis or perspicuity
(cf. 262 c, 512) : Bavuv 5' hv etrj paXXov cvrvxcorrepos ?) £G>v, dying he
would be happier, far happier than living, Eur. Hec. 377.
511. 2. The comparative is commonly construed with the
particle fj, than, or with the Genitive of distinction ; and the
superlative, with the Genitive partitive : as,
4>tXoi?<ra avrbv piaWov ^ . . ' Apra^ip^-qv, loving him more than A. (magis
quam), i. 1. 4. "Iirirov Oolttov (408). 'Apto-rots LTepo-wv (419 c).
a. The Comp. is sometimes construed with other particles, which com-
monly strengthen the expression through the union of two forms of con-
struction (cf. 510 a) : KdXXlov . . irp2> rod (petiyeiv, more honorable than to
flee [honorable in preference to fleeing], PI. Phsedo 99 a. Ile'pa rod Stov-
tos (Tocp&Tepoi, wiser than is proper [wise beyond what is proper], PL Gorg.
b. The construction of the Gen. with the Comp. is often elliptical :
AdXi&repov eaTL p^ vyiovs oriopa-ros p,r] vyiel \pvxy avvoiicelv, it is more
wretched to live ivith a diseased soul than [to live with] a diseased body.
By a mixture of the two methods of construction which belong to the
Comp., — (c) When a numeral, or other word of quantity, follows irXetov,
peipv, or gXcmrov, ^ is sometimes omitted, though the Gen. is not em-
ployed (the Comp. being now construed as an adverb) : ' kiroKTelvovci tCsv
avbpQv ov p\elov irevTaKoaiovs, ' not less than 500 ' (507 e). (d) To the Gen.
governed by the Comp., a specification is sometimes annexed with ¥\ : Ti
Todd' <Lv evprjjbL edpov evrvx^repou, t) iraida 7%«u /3a<rtXews ; wliat happier
fortune could I have found than this, [than] to wed tlie daughter of a king /
comp. gr. 12
266 SYNTAX. = USE OF DEGREES. §512.
512. 3. The positive is sometimes added to the superlative
for the sake of emphasis : as,
*fi kclkuv KCLKiare, vilest of tlve vile, Soph. 0. T. 334.
a. By doubling the Pos. or the Sup., we obtain similar forms of expres-
sion, the one less and the other even more emphatic than the above :
AetAcuct deiXalw (419 c). "E^ar £<rx*™ v Ka ^> Soph. Ph. 65 (cf. 262 c).
b. From the doubling of the Sup., as in the last example, appears to
have arisen the phrase ev rots, which is used to modify the Sup. ; and, as
an adverbial expression, without change of gender : 'Ev roTs [sc. icp&Tois]
irpCbroi, [among the lirst also first] among the very first, Th. 1. 6.
c. The numeral cts is sometimes used with the Sup., to render the idea
of individuality prominent : as, AtDpa be trXela-Ta . ., efs ye ibv avfy, iXdp.-
fiave, he received the most presents, [at least being one man] for a single in-
dividual, i. 9. 22. Urbem unam mihi amicissimam, Cic.
513. 4. Certain special forms of comparison deserve notice:
a.) The Comp., with a Gen. expressing hope, duty, power of description,
&c. : Mei^ov eXirlbos, majus spe, [greater than our hope] above hope, Msch.
b.) The Comp. followed by ^ Kara, or sometimes fj irpds • as, Mel fa, %
Kara d&icpva [sc. iartv], [greater than is in accordance with tears] too great
for tears, Th. 7. 75. (c) Sometimes with an Inf. added : Mel fa . . ij nwr
ipi kcu ae e£evpeiv, too great for me and you to discover, PI. Crat. 392 b.
d.) The Comp. followed by ^ ware (or «s) and the Inf. (sometimes an-
other mode) : Bpax^repa 7\kqvti^ov t) ws e^iKveladai, they sJwt [a shorter dis-
tance, than they must that they may reach] too short a distance to reach,
iii. 3. 7. Metfrv t) ware <pe"peiv Mem. 3. 5. 17. (e) We likewise find the
Inf. without wrre or «s, and also the Pos. for the Comp. ; To yap voatjpa
p.e'ifoi' ?) (f>epeiv, for the malady is too great to bear, Soph. Taireiv^ vp.Q)v ij
biavoia kyKaprepeiv, your mind is too weak to persevere, Th. 2. 61.
f. ) The Comp. and Sup. (for the most part joined with avnJs) followed
by a reflexive pronoun, to denote the comparison of an object with itself ;
the Comp. representing it as above what it has been or would be in other
circumstances, and the Sup. representing it as at its highest point : 'Av-
dpeibrepos ylyverai avrbs avrou, he becomes more manly [himself than him-
self] tJmn he was before, PI. Rep. 411 c. "Iv avrbs avrov rvyxdvv ^Xtl<xto$
&v, wliere he [happens to be the best specimen of himself] can do his best,
Eur. Ant. 20. (g) To the Comp. thus construed, a specification is some-
times annexed with ^ (511 d) : Auroi iavr&v [dappaXedbrepol el<nv\, ewei5a.it
fiaduxnv, ?} irplv paOew, tlvey have themselves more confidence ivhen they have
learned, than they had before learning, PI. Prot. 350 a.
h.) Two comparatives connected by fy to denote that the one property
exists in a higher degree than the other : lirparriyol irXeloves ij (HeXrlopes,
generals more numerous than good, Ar. Ach. 1078.
i. ) The omission of paWov before ^ : BovXo/x eyd) Xabv <rbov tycft&at [sc.
p.8XXoi>] ?) airoXtcrdai, I wish the people to be safe, rather than perish, A. 117.
514. 5. The comparative and superlative are often used
without an express object of comparison. In this case, the super-
lative increases the force of the positive, while the comparative
may either increase or diminish it, according to the object of
comparison which is implied. Thus,
"Q 6av|xao-i<&TaT€ avdpuire, most wonderful man, iii. 1. 27. Trjp ra\C-
o-rqv, immediately, iii. 3. 16. ILWa> [sc. rod diovros] XtXeKrai, [more
§ 517. USE OF THE ARTICLE. 267
than is proper] too much has been said, Eur. Ale. Maiq><5T€pov . . Siriyi^-
<raadat, it is [longer than it might be] rather long to relate, PL Conv. 203 a.
a. The Comp. and Sup., when used without direct comparison, are said
to be used absolutely ; otherwise, relatively. In the former use, the Comp.
is often translated into Eng. by the simple Pos., or by the Pos. with too
or rather ; and the Sup. (" Sup. of Eminence "), by the Pos. with very.
515. 6. The degrees are more freely interchanged and
mixed, than in English. It may be however remarked in gen-
eral, that the use of a higher degree for a lower renders the
discourse more emphatic, and the converse, less so. Thus,
TaOryv [idXicrra [for vroXv fxcLWov] rrjs Kopvs ao-rra^erai, this she chooses
far rat/ier than the virgin, Eur. Iph. A. 1594. 'AfjioXo-ywTaTOv tQv irpo-
yeyeprjuevw, [the most remarkable of those which had preceded it] more
remarkable tlvan any which liad preceded it, Th. 1. 1. 'ilKvjLopwTaros
aXXaw A. 505. 'Avenpayov Trdvres ws oXiyas [sc. 7r\?7Y&s] iralaeiev, they all
cried out that he had given him too few bloivs, v. 8. 12. 01 iroXXot, tJie
[many] most, Mem. IloXXa &v ov peXxtov aureus arepeadtu, * not well for
them,' Cyr. (so, especially in negation or interrogation, &p.eivov, x^P 0V > &c.).
IV. USE OF THE ARTICLE.
A. Broad Use.
516. 1. Epic. The article (6, 17, to) appears, in the Epic
language, as a general definitive, performing the office not
only of an article as usually understood, but still more frequently
of a demonstrative, personal, or relative pronoun (249 s) : as,
'O yepejp, the old man, A. 33 ; Td r airoiva, this ransom, 20 ; Tb gov p.i-
pos, that wrath of thine, 207 ; 'O yap ?}\de, for lie came, 12 ; Tdv, wlwm, 36.
Note. These uses are intimately allied, inasmuch as, — (a) The art., as
usually understood, is simply a less emp/iatic form of the demonstr. pron.;
and so, for the most part, the personal pron. of the 3 Pers. (but used as a
substantive). Cf. " That man whom you see," and " The man whom you
see"; " Those that love me," and " Them that love me," Prov. 8. 17, 21.
(P) The demonstr. pron. used connect ively becomes a relative : " Blessed
are th ey that m ourn . " ,
In Epic poetry, — (a) The article, in its proper use as such, is commonly
not expressed. The same omission prevails to a great extent in other
kinds of elevated poetry, (b) When used as a personal pronoun, it is most
frequently connected with the same particles as in Attic Greek (518) ; and
is not unfrequently followed in the same sentence by the substantive to
which it refers : 'H 5' e<nreTo IlaXXds, and she, Pallas, followed, a. 125.
At 5' €ir^p.v^av'AQr\vatr\ re Kat"HpTj A. 20. Cf. 505 d. (c) As a demon-
strative, it sometimes follows if-s substantive before a relative : 2w0ecridW
rdo>v, &s e-rrireWe, those instructions which he gave, E. 319. (d) The article
when used as a personal or demonst. pron. has sometimes, from its position
(518 f ), or for the sake of the metre, the same form in the Nom. with the
common relative : "Os yap detraros ^Xdev, for he returned last, a. 286.
517. 2. Ionic and Doric* In the later Ion. and in the
Dor. writers, this extended use of the article was, in great
268 SYNTAX. ARTICLE AS A PRONOUN. §517.
measure, retained. E. g. in Hdt., the relative has in the Nom.
sing, and pi. the forms 6s. rj, to, ot, at, ra • and has elsewhere the
t- forms of the article, except after prepositions which suffer
elision, in the phrases of time, iv a, 4g ov, es 6 (or ov), pexP 1 ( or
axpi) ov, and in some doub'tful readings.
518. 3. Attic. The use of the article as a demonstrative
and personal pronoun remained in Attic Greek, (a) in connec-
tion with ficv and de ; (b) in poetry with yap ; and (c) as the
subject of a verb, after Kal, and :
(a) 'O %\ [sc. ade\<pbs] rreiderai, and he [the brother] is persuaded, i. 1. 3.
'Ek tk twv (the common order after a prep.) fxdXicrT eyib, and of them I
most, Soph. 0. C. 741. (b) 'O -yap /xeyiaros avrots rvyxdvei dopv&pwp, for
he [Phanoteus] is tJie greatest of their allies, Soph. El. 45. ' (c) Kal t6v
airoKplvacrdai \eyerai, and it is said that he answered, Cyr. 4. 2. 13.
d. The article with uc'v and 8c is commonly used for contradistinction,
and we may translate 6 |Uv . ., 6 8c, this . ., that, tJie one . ., the other,
one . ., another, &c. : '0 p.kv fxalperai, 6 6k auxppovd, tlie one is mad, the other
is rational, PI. Ph<edr. 244 a. Oi ft/h 8iukopt€S . ., ol 5' apirdfapTes, these
pursuing . ., and those plundering, i. 10. 4. 'Ep fih &pa rots <rv/x<pu)Povp:ep,
ep 8k rots ov, in some things we agree, and in otJiers not, PL Phsedr. 263 b.
e. 'O $i, when used as a pronoun in the Nona, (even without 6 fUv pre-
ceding), commonly denotes a different subject from that of the preceding
sentence. The exceptions belong especially to the Epic and Ionic.
f. The proclitics in tlie nominative (6, tj, ot, al) require, from the very
laws of accent, that the particle, in connection with which they are used,
should follow them. If, therefore, it precedes, they become orthotone, or,
in other words, take the forms which commonly belong to the relative
pronoun (250). This change takes place with KtxL uniformly, and with 8e*
when it follows ^ for &prj (45 u) : Kal 8s edavixaae, and he wondered, i. 8.
16. Kal ol tlirop vii. 6. 4. *H 5' 5s, 6 YXolvkup, said lie, i. e. Glauco, PL
519. In its t- forms, this use of the article also occurs, (a)
before the relatives 6s, oaos, and olos ', (b) in some special forms
of expression ; and (c) sometimes, through poetic imitation of
the earlier Greek ; while (d) the tragedians even give these
forms to the relative pronoun :
(a) Tov 8 to-rip, of tlmt which is, PL Phjedo 92 d. Kal tov 8s ?<f>v, he
who said, Lys. 167. 15. Ilpoo-rjuei Kal puaelp tovs otdo-ircp oSros, it is proper
to hate [those such as] such men as this, Dem. 613. 9.
(b) IIp6 tov (also written trporov) before this ; T<ji tJierefore (cf. 466. 1) ;
t6 ye, followed by 8ti • the article doubled with koX or ^ : Ilpb tow irals
$)<r6a, you were once a child, PL Ale. 109 e. Oi irpb tov <pt\oi, former
friends, Eur. Med. 696. Tu» . . o-Keirrkop, tJierefore we must consider, PL
Theaet. 179 d. Td ye ev olda/Sri . ., this I well know, that . ., PL Euthyd.
291 a. Et to Kal to ewoirjaep &p9punros ovroal, ovk b\p dtriOapep, if this man
had done this and tlmt, he would not have died, Dem. 308. 3.
(c) Tbv . . <p$i<rop, him destroy, Soph. 0. T. 200. Taiv fioi fitXevdai,
take care of tliese for me, lb. 1466.
(d) T6p Oebp, tov pvp \ptyus, tlie god, whom you now blame, Eur. Bac.
712. (e) This substitution of the t- for the aspirated forms (250) in
tragedy, scarce occurs, except to avoid hiatus, or lengthen a short syllable.
§ 522. R. XXVIII. THE ARTICLE PROPER. 269
f. On the other hand, the aspirated forms are sometimes found with
y.lv and 84 for the r- forms (518 a, d) : II6Xets 'EW-qvidas, &s \iiv dvaipwv,
els &s 8£ rods <pvyd8as Kardyuv, ' some destroying, and to others,' Dem.
248. 18. So, 'Or£ n&v . ., ore Be", sometimes . ., at other times, Th. 7. 27.
B. The Article Proper.
520. Eule XXVIII. The Article is prefixed
to substantiyes, to mark them as definite.
a. The Greek article, in its specific and later developed use as an article
proper, corresponds in general to the definite article in our own and other
modern languages. It is often, however, when used substantively, and
sometimes when used adjectively, translated into Eng. by a demonstrative
pronoun (527). With a participle following, it is most frequently trans-
lated by a relative and verb, preceded, if no antecedent is expressed, by a
personal or demonstrative pronoun.
b. The article may be separated from its substantive by words modify-
ing the latter (523 a), by particles which cannot stand first in the clause
(as nev, 8c, *ydp, ye, re, 8^j), by the pronoun rls in Ionic, and sometimes
by other words : TQv rts llepatuv, one of the Persians, Hdt. 1. 85.
521. A substantive used definitely is either employed in
its full extent, to denote that which is known, or, if not employed
in its full extent, denotes a definite part.
a. Compare, " Man is mortal," where man is used in its full extent of
application, to denote every individual of a known race, and is therefore
definite ; " The man whom we saw," where man is not used in its full ex-
tent of application, but is yet definite as denoting a particular and known
individual ; and " If a man love me" (Jn. 14. 23), where man is indefi-
nite, simply denoting any one of the race.
b. The article, according as it is joined with the substantive in the first
or the second of these uses, is distinguished as the generic or the limiting
article.
1. Generic Article.
522. A substantive employed in its full extent, to
denote that ivhich is Mown, may be,
a.) A substantive used generically, i. e. denoting a whole class or kind;
as 17 yvvr}, woman (for the whole sex), oi dvdpwwoi, men (all men), oi 'kdrj-
vaioi, tlie Athenians (the whole nation) : '0 tivOpcoiros " dvdpwiros " uvojid-
cdt], man was named dvdpwiros PI. See 533 c. (b) To this head may be
referred substantives used distributively, which consequently take the
article : Kvpos viriaxve'tTac • • T P La T)P<i8a,peiKd rod p/rjvbs ry <npariayn[\, C.
'promises three lialf-darics [the month to the soldier] a month to each soldier,
i. 3. 21. If ?Ka<rTos, each, is expressed, the article may be used or omitted.
c.) A substantive expressing an abstract idea ; as rj apery, virtue.
d.) An infinitive or clause used substantively, or a word spoken of as
such : Aid to <j>op6i<r6ai, through fear, v. 1. 13. T6 6vop,a 6 ftvOpanros PI.
e.) The name of a monadw object (one which exists singly in nature, or
is so regarded ; fjLovadinds single) ; as 6 ijXios, the sun, ij (reX^vrj, the moon.
270 SYNTAX. GENERIC ARTICLE. §522.
f.) The name of an art or science: 'H lon-piK^ ical ?) xoXkcvtik^ /cai 17
T€KTOviierj, medicine and brasiery and carpentry, (Ec. 1. 1. See 533 c.
g.) A proper name., which has been before mentioned or implied, or
which is well known : Aid. Qpvyias • . . rrjs ^pv-ylas iroXiv, through Phrygia;
. . a city of said P., i. 2. 6, 7. ,r £irep rrjs 'EXXdSos, in behalf of Greece
(their native land), i. 3. 4. See 523 h,' 533 a.
h. Proper names appear the rather to take the article, from their being
so extensively, in their origin, either adjectives used substantively (506 f),
or common nouns used distinctively (530). Thus, 'H 'EXXds [sc. 777], [the
Greek land] Greece, (i) The adjective construction is frequent m the
names of rivers ; and is sometimes found in other names of places, where
the gender and number permit : '0 ~M.alav8pos irorap.6s i. 2. 7.
2. Limiting Article.
523. 1. A substantive not employed in its full ex-
tent may be rendered definite by a limiting word,
phrase, or clause.
a. (Order of Description.) A limiting word or phrase is usually-
placed, either (1) between the article and its substantive, or (2) after the sitb-
stantive with the article repeated, or (3) as in the second order, but with the
article omitted before tlie substantive ; while these different positions may-
be repeated or combined : '0 dcyadbs dvqp, or 6 durjp 6 dyados, or dvrjp 6 dya-
66s, the good man. Td (HaaLXuov aryietov (443 c). Toi>$ /xh yap Kvvas robs
XaXewovs, savage dogs, v. 8. 24. Xradp-Qu t&v iyyvrdru) ii. 2. 11. Td
ttjs rod frivovTos ri\vr\s ipyov, the work of the carder's art, PI. Pol. 281 a.
Tds peydXas i]8ovds kclI to dyadd rd fieydXa Cyr. 3. 3. 8.
b. (Order of Statement.) On the other hand, words and phrases
not belonging to the definition or description of the substantive, but to
that which is said about it in tlie sentence, regularly either (4) precede the
article, or (5) follow the substantive without a repetition of the article :
'Ay adds 6 dvrjp or 6 dvrjp dyados [sc. £<ttiv], the man is good. "Qti kcvos 6
tpb^os etv, Kai oi Apxovres <r<3oi, that the fear was groundless, and the gen-
erals safe, ii. 2. 21. ^tX^v £x w " 7 'V v mcpaX-qp, having the head bare, i. 8. 6.
'Ev 7-77 dyopq. (L€(txi, in the midst of the forum, Dem. 848. 13 (508 a ; but Td
ixiaov (xricpos, tlie centre division, i. 8. 13). To ntpas endrepov vii. 1. 23.
c. A modifying Genitive has, however, much freedom of position, and
other adjuncts are less strictly bound by these rules than adjectives or
appositives. A limiting Genitive not only takes the first three orders
according to the rule, but often the 5th order, and sometimes (chiefly for
emphasis) th,e ith ; while the Gen. partitive, which regularly takes the
order of statement, sometimes takes an order of description : Tod 8t kijkXov
77 irepioSos, the length of the circuit, iii. 4. 11. T77 reXevrrj rod fiiov i. 9. 30.
To?s 'EXXtjvov TrXovo-iurdTOLS Th. 1. 25. (d) A prepositional adjunct takes
the 5th order more freely after a verbal, or when another modifier has taken
the place between the article and substantive : 'H £vyKo/uu5rj 4k tujv dypQv is
to &<ttv, the crowding from the country into the city, Th. 2. 52.
e. Some modifiers may be placed in either of the two classes (b), accord-
ing to the view which is taken of them : IldVcu' Trjv 686v, all the way, i. 5.
9 (or tt)v irdcrav 686v, the whole way ; without the art., irdaa ftfr 686s, every
way, ii. 5. 9). Oi irdvres dvOpuiroi, Hdvres oi fodpuTroi, all men, v. 6. 7 ;
CEc. 17. 3 {wdvTas dvdpibn-ovs Cyr. 7. 5. 52). So #7ras, o-fyiras, 8Xos ivhole.
§ 526. LIMITING ARTICLE. 271
f. The use of the article with some adjectives, in representing a part as
definite, should be observed : ' \p.<pcKpaTrjs kcli ixXkoi, A. and others, iv. 2.
17. 'Eiropevdrjo-av, y ol &XXoi, ' the others,' 'the rest,' lb. 10. "AXXo 5£
a-rpdrevfia, and another army, i. 1. 9. Tb &XXo crrpdT€vp.a, the rest of the
army, i. 2. 25. IIoXv rod (TTpa.Ttvp.aTos, 'much of,' iv. 1. 11. Tb uhv
8)) iroXv toQ 'EWrjyiKou, 'the greater part,' i. 4. 13. IIoXXoC, many, iv.
6. 26. Ot iroXXof (515). So often with superlatives and ordinals. See 419.
g. A clause limiting a substantive commonly begins with the relative
pronoun ; and is usually placed according to order 5th, by which the im-
mediate junction of the article proper and the relative (originally one,
249 s) is avoided. If it precedes the substantive, it commonly excludes
the article. Thus, 'Aa-6 rrjs dpxvh fy avrbv aarpdinjv iirotrjae (505 a).
OStoi, ods bpdre, fidpfiapoi, these barbarians whom you see (524 b), i. 5. 16.
h. A proper name followed by an article in agreement with it, is rarely
preceded by another, except with special demonstrative force.
i. In the third order, the substantive is sometimes first introduced as
indefinite, and then defined ; and this subsequent definition sometimes
respects simply the kind or class. IloXXoi 5£ vrpovdol oi ueydXoi, and
many struthi, the large ones, i. e. ostriches, i. 5. 2.
j. When the substantive is preceded or followed by successive modifica-
tions, the article is sometimes repeated with each : Tct re reixv rd iavrwv
rd uaKpd direTt\e<rai>, tliey completed their own long walls, Th. 1. 108.
k. A modification is sometimes divided between two positions (oftenest
the 1st and 5th) : To?s <j>TJvo<ri deois rd tc oveipara, to the gods who liad
sent tlie dream, iv. 3. 13. IIcp<ra>v roi>s dpiarovs t»v ircpl avrbv eirrd i. 6. 4.
524. Remarks. 1. It is common to employ the article
even when the substantive is rendered definite (a) by a posses-
sive or (b) demonstrative pronoun :
(a) '0 ip.bs irariip, my father, i. 6. 6. T£ vbw r<£ b^rip^ vii. 3. 39.
(b) The pronouns o^tos and 88c, as themselves beginning with the
article (252), do not take it immediately before them, and ckcivos follows
their analogy. These pronouns are therefore placed according to 523 b,
except when separated from the article by another modifier : Tai/ras ras
7r6X«s, these cities, Tbvde rbv rpbirov, 'E/ceu^s r^s ijutpas, Tbv dvdpa tovtov,
L 1. 8, 9 ; 7. 18 ; 6. 9. 'H <rr€v)) avrrj bdbs, this narrow way, iv. 2. 6.
c. In prose, when the article is omitted with a demonstrative pronoun
and a common noun (except as in 533, and in some s]>ecial deictic uses,
543 s), the pronoun is regularly employed as a subject, and the noun as an
attribute : "Ean uh yap irevia avnj ca^-qs, this is manifest poverty, (Ec. 8.
525. 2. Upon the same principle, the article is prefixed
to words and phrases, which are joined with a proper name or a
personal pronoun to give dejiniteness or emphatic distinction :
Tbp PcuriXevovra 'Apra^ep^rjv, [the reigning Artaxerxes] Artaxerxes tJie
king, i. 1. 4. Mtvuv 6 OcttoXos i. 2. 6. 2i> . . 6 irpeo-pvra-ros Cyr. 4. 5.
a. If, on the other hand, no distinction is designed, the article is omitted:
Revocp&v 'A0r}vahs, X., an Athenian, i. 8. 15. Uarayvas dvnp U^po-qs lb. 1.
526. 3. An adverb preceded by an article has often the
force of an adjective. This construction may be explained by-
supposing the ellipsis of a participle, commonly &v or y^vo^vos :
Top vvv xP ovov i ttw [now time] present time, vi. 6. 13 (Tbv 6vra vvv x/>6-
vov Eur. Ion 1349). Toy t<Jtc pa<ri\4a)s, the then king, Cyr. 4. 6. 3.
272 SYNTAX. LIMITING ARTICLE. §526.
a. So uprep. with its case: Tov Iv Ae\<f>ots xPVVttjplov, the Delphic ora-
cle, Cyr. 7. 3. 15. 'Apuevla, . . 17 irpbs carrepav, Western Armenia, iv. 4. 4.
b. This adjective may again, like any other adjective, be used either
substantively or adverbially (527 s, 529).
527. 4. The substantive which is modified is often omitted,
as a familiar word or supplied by the context j and in the former
case, the article is commonly regarded as iised substantively with
the word or phrase following (506 d, 520 a) :
Twv wo/ad /ScunX^ws [sc. avdpwv], of those from (lie king, i. 1. 5. Td ir&pav
rod irora/xov, tlic opposite side of the river, iii. 5. 2. 'O firjdev &v (507 e).
a. The phrases ol dpxpC and ol irep*, followed by the name of a person,
commonly include the person himself, with his attendants or associates ;
and sometimes, by a species of vague periphrasis, denote little more than
the person merely : Ol 5e dpupi Ti<r<ra<fr{ppT}r, [those about T.] T. and those
with him, iii. 5. 1 (cf. Ticrcra<^/Di>77S' ko.1 ol <xvv atrip lb. 3). Ol irepl KiKpowa.
{i. e. K^po^] Mem. 3. 5. 10. So Ol p*rd 'Aptacov i. 10. I.
528. 5. When the neuter article is used substantively with
a word or phrase following, (a) the precise idea (as, in English,
of 'thing* or ' things') must be determined from the connection,
and (b) not unfrequently the whole expression may be regarded
as a periphrasis for an included substantive :
(a) To. tov Tnpm, the evils of old age, Apol. 6. Td irepl Upo^ivou, the
fate of Proxenus, ii. 5. 37. To, to/)' ip.ol eXicrdcu dvrl tGjv ot/cot, to prefer
remaining with me to returning home, i. 7. 4. Cf. 507.
(b) To t?i$ t&x.VS> M ie course of fortune, = r/ tijxv, fortune, Eur. Ale.
785. 'RTryvei to. /3a<Tt\^a>s, extolled the king, Hel. 7. 1. 38.
529. 6. The neuter accusative of the article is often used
in forming adverbial phrases, in connection with,
a.) Adjectives (483 a) : T6 wpOrov, at first, i. Td Trpbrepov, before, iv.
b.) Adverbs (526 b) : Td 7rd\cu [sc. 6V], [as to that which was of old]
anciently, PL To rpbaBev, before, i. 10. 10. To^xaXw, back, vi. 6. 38.
c. ) Prepositions followed by their cases : Td dird rovde, [as to that after
this] henceforth, Cyr. 5. 1. 6. T6 xpbs eo-rtpav, to the ivest, vi. 4. 4.
530. ii. A substantive not employed in its full
extent may also be definite (a) from previous men-
tion, mutual understanding, general notoriety, or emphatic
distinction; (b) from contrast ; and (c), in general,
from the connection in which it is employed : as 3
(a) 0opvf3ov iJKovae . ., ical ijpero ris 6 0<5pvpos etv, he heard a noise, and
inquired what the noise was, i. 8. 16. Tbv &v8pa 6pQ, I see the max,
i. 8. 26. 'AvaKaXovvres rbv irpoBornv, exclaiming, ' the traitor ! ' vi. 6. 7.
(b) Contrast may give a degree of definiteness to expressions which are
otherwise quite indefinite ; and may even lead to the employment of the
article with the indefinite pronoun rls : "Iinrovs . ., tovs piv nvas trap
ip-ol, tovs 8* rip KXedpxv KaraXeXeLfx-^vovs, horses, some with me, and others
left by C, iii. 3. 19. So with numerals denoting part of a whole : Td
8vo pJprj, [the two parts from three, 242 d] two thirds, Th. Cf. 518 a.
§ 533. PREVIOUS MENTION, CONNECTION, &C. 273
(c) 'EireiSq de eYeXetfrTjcre Aapeios, kclI Karearn els ri\v fiaciktiav 'Apr a-
£^/j£j?s, ' had succeeded to the throne [sc. of Persia],' i. 1. 3.
d. A substantive is often definite as denoting that which is natural,
usual, necessary, proper, &c, in the circumstances : 'E^ fiev rrj aparrepq.
%etpi to 8dpu ex^v, ev 8e rrj de£t<ji (3aKTt|piav, (Clearchus) having in the left
hand his spear, and in the right a staff (the spear a part of his regular
equipment, but not the staff), ii. 3. 11. See e.
e. With substantives which are rendered definite by the connection,
a possessive or genitive pronoun is often implied in the article : Turacupepvrjs
5ta/3dXXei tov KOpov irpbs tov a8eX<pdv, T. accuses C. to [the] his brother, i.
531. From a reference to something which precedes or is
mutually understood, or for emphasis, the article may be even
joined, (a) with an interrogative pronoun, (b) a personal pro-
noun, (c) a pronoun of quality or quantity :
(a) "AXXa . . 6<?Xa) <roi . . dnryricraadcu. . . Td irota; "I will relate to you
other things" "[The what ?] What are they ?" (Ec. 10. 1. (b) Tov epi,
the me, i. e. me, of whom you speak, PI. T6v kavrov, [the himself] his
great self, Id. (c) Td toiovtov 6vap, such a dream as this, iii. 1. 13.
d. The article is often joined with a round number used for comparison
or general statement (especially with dpcpO : El p,ev twv pvpicov eXirldcw
pXa ris vpuv ear i, if you have one chance in [the] ten tlwusand, ii. 1. 19.
JleXraa-Tal de d/xcpl tovs Sio^iXiovs, targetecrs about [the] two thousand, i.
532. Observations. 1. The article is sometimes found
without a substantive, through anacoluthon or aposiopesis :
'H t&v SXXwv 'EXXt/vojv , ei're XPV KaK^av *fr* &7VOiav . . elireiv, ilte
, whetlier I should say cowardice or folly of the otJier Greeks, Dem.
533. 2. Omission of the Article. With substantives
which will be readily recognized as definite without the article,
it is often omitted ; particularly with
a.) Proper names, and otlier names resembling these from their being fa-
miliar titles of persons or otherwise specially appropriated (522) : Ilpbs KO-
pov, Ilpbs rbv KOpov, '0 de KOpos, KOpos 8e, i. 1. 6, 7, 10 ; 2. 5. "Afw. tjXIw
dvvovTi, "Afia r£ yXly dvofifvip, ii. 2. 13, 16. (b) Hence paonXaJs, in its
familiar application to the King of Persia, commonly wants the article.
c.) Abstract nouns, names of arts and sciences, and nouns used gener-
ically (522) : ESpos . ., vv(/os de, Td eOpos . ., koI rb iixpos, in breadth . .,
and in height, ii. 4. 12 ; iii. 4. 10. Tewpylav re Kal rr)v iroXefj.iK7)v rkxjn\v
CEc. 4. 4. Qeoo-epio-Tarov . . l&ttv &v6pa>iros PI. Leg. 902 b. Distributively,
"Eva dirb tpyXijs, one from [a tribe] each tribe, Hel. 2. 4. 24.
d.) Familiar designations of place, time, and related persons or objects ;
Els rb do-Tv, Ets do-rv, into the city ["into town"], Hel. 2. 4. 1, 7. "E«s
(io-ircpa) eye'vero, it was morning (evening), ii. 4. 24 ; iv. 7. 27. So with
ttoXis city, dyp6s country, yrj land, oIkos house, vv% night, irar-Z/p father,
yvvrj wife, irais child, <riofxa body,irovs foot, 8bpv spear, do-irls shield,' kc.
e.) Ordinals and Superlatives (523 f) : Kal rpCrov fros rep iroXtny ere-
Xei/ra, ' the third year,' Th. Ets 'laaovs, rrjs KcXiKias i<rxdrr\v ttSXlv i. 4. 1.
f. The article is more freely omitted, as in Eng., when two or more
nouns are coupled together ; and also after a preposition or governing
adverb : 'RXlov re Kal (reXrjvws Kal ao-rpuv Kal yrjs Kal aldepos, of sun, moon,
stars, &c, PI. Crat. 408 d. Qavfidoiai rb /cdXXos Kal rb (xtyedos, wonderful
for beauty and size, ii. 3. 15. 'Twb KaXXovs Kal fieyidovs ddfnyrjTov Cyr.
COMP. GE. 12* R
274 SYNTAX.- — PRONOUNS. §534.
534. 3. The subject of the sentence, from its distinctive prominence,
has the article more frequently than an adjunct ; while a predicate ap-
posilivc commonly wants it, as simply denoting that the subject is one (or
more) of a class. Hence the article is often useful in distinguishing the
subject, and sometimes appears to be used especially for this purpose s M77
<pvyq eiv t] &<j>o8os, lest the departure should be a flight, vii. 8. 16. 'Ep,w6-
piov b' 9jv rb \wptov i. 4. 6. Td 81$ trivrt 56ca ecr'iv, twice jive is ten.
4. When words or phrases are coupled by conjunctions, they are more
closely united in conception, if only a single article is used ; less closely,
if the article is repeated : Toi)s iriarobs ko.1 eHvovs /ecu fiefiaxovs, the faithful,
friendly, and steadfast, i. 9. 30. Twv 'EWtjvuv /ecu tup fiapfidpuv, of tlie
Greeks and of the barbarians, i. 2. 14.
V. OBSERVATIONS ON THE PRONOUNS.
535. a. Of the observations which follow, many apply-
equally to pronouns and adverbs of the same classes.
b. In the use of pronouns, especially those first presented below, it is
important to distinguish between the stronger and weaker forms of ex-
pression ; that is, between those forms which are more distinctive, emphat-
ic, or prominent, and those which are less so.
A. Personal, Reflexive, and Possessive (27 s).
536. 1. The personal pronouns (a) are commonly omit-
ted in the Nom. (as implied in the affixes of the verb, 271),
except for emphasis or distinctness of reference, (b) If needed
in the Nom. of the 3d Pers., they are supplied by the article,
or, as a stronger form, by the demonstrative pronoun, (c) They
are also omitted in the other cases, when understood from the
connection, more freely than in English, (d) In the iveaker
form for these cases, they are enclitic in the 1st and 2d Per-
sons sing., and are commonly supplied in the 3d Person by
avros ', while (e), in the stronger form, they are orthotone
throughout, and are supplied in the 3d Pers. by the article or
still stronger demonstrative. Thus,
"AwaPTa o-wo air£8wK& crot, iirel icai <rt» 4p.ol awdbe^ai rbv &vbpa, I gave
you back everything safe, when you also had shown to me the man, y. 8. 7.
'O be ifnriirXas airavTwv rr)v yv&anv airiireaire [sc. atrofc], and lie dismissed
them, satisfying the wish of all, i. 7. 8. Otire <rv lK«£vas 0tXets, o&rehub-
vai a-4, neit/ier do you love them, nor they you, Mem. 2. 7. 9. "H8* odv
davelrat, she then will die, Soph. Ant. 751. *E*y«i> fiev, & avbpes, ijbv tyas
ktraivG) • 67rws be /ecu vpcis cp.^ eiraivtcreTe, Ijtol p.e\-q<rei, rj an^TLy.i KO/w
voulfrre i. 4. 16. Tovt<{> avyyevbuevos 6 Kvpos, rfy&adv re avrov i. 1. 9.
537. 2. In reflex reference, the distinctive and emphatic
forms are those of the so-called reflexives (244) ; while the
forms of the common personal pronouns and of avros are also
used as weaker forms, chiefly when the reference is both in-
direct and unempliatic.
§ 539. PERSONAL, REFLEXIVE, AND POSSESSIVE. 275
'EfiavTui 7e doKw awe&ivai, to myself at least I seem to be conscious, vii. 6.
11. AiVxw'eo'flcu' pot 8oku>, [I seem to myself to be] I feel ashamed, i. 7. 4.
'Opbvras, . . 6V faro iriarbv ol elvai, raxb avrbu evpe Kvpip (piKairepov, 77
4avTw, 0. soon found the man whom he believed to be faithful to him, more
a friend to C. than to himself (0.), i. 9. 29.
a. If a pronoun used, rcflexively and its subject are both related the most
closely to the same verb or participle, the former is termed a direct reflex-
ive ; (b) but otherwise, indirect : (a) OOs iyw . . Karedtw ipoi, which I
laid up for myself i. 3. 3. (b) UpdrreTe birotov dv tl t»(iiv oirjade p.d\i-
<rra avn<p£peiv, do whatever you think ivill most benefit yourselves, ii. 2. 2.
c. A common reflexive or personal pronoun is sometimes used for the
reciprocal pronoun : 'Hiuv avrois 8ia\e£6fjLeda, we will confer with each
other, Dem. 1169. 5. Eirpdt-afjLev . . 7rpds T|p.as elp^vrjv, we made peace
with each other, Dem. 30. 16. Qdovovvres «ivtois p.i<xo\}<nv dWrjXovs Mem.
538. 3. In the stronger form, (a) the Gen. possessive of the
personal pronoun is commonly supplied in the 1st and 2d Per-
sons, and sometimes in the 3d, by the possessive adjective
(252. 5) ; and (b) so, of the reflexive plural, with the addition
of adroit, while (c) a like substitution in the sing, is poetic :
(a) 'Eubs 5£ dbeXtpbs, frater meus, a brother of mine (cf. rbv dbe\<pbv,
fratrem, 530 e), i. 7. 9. Toi>s rjpercpovs <pi\ovs, our friends, lb. 7. TQv
<vv rtuvuv, his children, Soph. Tr. 266. (b) Tots T|U€Tepois avrwv 0i\ois
(498). (c) 'Ep,bv (kbv) avTov x/ 36 ' 05 * m V {his) own interest, /3. 45 ; a. 409.
d. This substitution is sometimes made for the Gen. in its other uses
with substantives, even the Gen. objective (444 g) : To <xbv \^x os > ^ ie mar-
riage you talk of, Soph. Ant. 573. <&i\lq. tt} <rrj, love to you, vii. 7. 29.
e. In Attic prose, the only possessive pronoun for the 3 Pers. is <r<j>€T€-
pos, which is used reflexively, and with no great frequency ; while the
poetic or dialectic 6s, 16s, and crxprfs (28 e, n) are very rarely used except
as reflexive.
f. The weaker form of the Gen., from its want of distinctive emphasis,
is rarely preceded by the article, and therefore follows the rule of position
in 524 b ; while the stronger form of the Gen., and the possessive adjective-
follow the rule in 523 a : T£ (rw/xari avrov, To p.h eavToi) (T&/j.a, his {own)
body, i. 9. 23. (g) The Gen. of avrds, however, in its stronger, and espe-
cially its reflexive uses, may take the position of eavTov.
539. 4. The third person being expressed demonstratively
in other ways, the pronoun ol became simply a retrospective
pronoun, i. e. a pronoun referring to a person or thing pre-
viously mentioned.
As such, it performed the office both (a) of an unemphatic reflexive, and
(b) of a simple personal pronoun ; rarely (c), in Epic, of a general reflexive,
without respect to person, (d) This last use appears oftener in its deriva-
tives (even in the Attic, in cavrov and o-<|>€Tepos). — (a) See 537. 2, a.
(b) 'Zvvecpaadv ol, they agreed with him, Cyr. 3. 2. 26. (c) Eto /xev ovb'
rj(3aibv &tv£oijlcu, I tremble not in tlie least for [one's self] myself Ap. Eh.
2. 635. (d) Adbpuxaiu oto-iv dvdaaois, may you rule [one's own] your own
house, a. 402. Ae? i)p.as aveptaOai lavTOvs, we ought to ask ourselves, PI.
Pha?do 78 b. Tow o-fytrlpav <ppovpiwv, our fortresses, Cyr. 6. 1. 10.
e. Some of the forms of ov are used with great latitude of number and
gender. Thus, (a) ^.iv and vtv commonly sing., but also plur. (P) o-<J>6
276 SYNTAX. PRONOUNS. AYTOS. § 539*.
properly plur., but also (especially in the tragic poets) sing, (y) <r<jnv
rarely sing. (8) '4 commonly sing. masc. and fern., but sing. neut. A. 23(5,
plur. Horn. Ven. 268. (e) So the derived possessi.ves : cos, their, Hes. ; &c.
f. The place of ov as a reflexive is commonly supplied in Attic prose by
lavrov, and as a simple personal pronoun, by avTo$.
B. AYT02 (251, 28 c).
540. The pronoun avros marks a return of the mind to the
same person or thing. This return takes place,
a.) In speaking of reflex action or relation. Hence avros
is used with the personal pronouns in forming the reflexives.
See 244.
b.) In designating a person or thing as the same which has
been previously mentioned or observed. When thus employed,
avros (like the corresponding same in English), being used for
distinction, is preceded by the article (523 a) \
'0 avrbs avf)p, rarely 6 dvr]p 6 avros or avrip 6 avrbs, idem vir, the same
man. Trj 8t avrrj i]pApa, aiid upon tlie same day, i. 5. 12. See 451.
c.) For the sake of emphasis, one of the most familiar modes
of expressing which is repetition. When avros is thus employed
in connection with the article, it is placed in the order of state-
ment (523 b) :
Avrbs 6 av-qp, less frequently 6 avrjp avros, vir ipse, the man himself.
Avra ra airb rQv oliauv £6\a, the very wood from the liouscs, ii. 2. 16.
d. The emphatic avros is joined with pronouns in both their stronger
and their weaker forms (commonly preceding them) ; and (e) is often used
in the Nom. with a pronoun understood, (d) Avrip uoi tower, Avrip «uol
. . 86%ei, it seems (shall seem) to myself PI. Phaedo 60 c, 91 a. Avrov tov-
tov 'ivexev, on this very account, iv. 1. 22. So in adverbs : Avrov ratirw,
in this very place, on the spot, Hdt. 1. 214. (e) Avros <rv ivaidevaas, Avros
iiraidevo-as, you yourself educated, (Ec. 7. 4, 7. Avrol Kalovaiv iii. 5. 5.
f. In like manner, avros is used without another pronoun expressed,
in the oblique cases of the third yerson : Awpa dyovres aww re nal rrj yv-
vaid, bringing presents both for himself and for his wife, vii. 3. 16.
(g) From the gradual extension of this use to cases in which there was no
special emphasis, appears to have arisen the familiar employment of avrr6s
in the oblique cases, as the common pronoun of the third person (536 d).
In this unemphatic use, avros must not begin a clause.
h. Sometimes (chiefly in the Epic), avros occurs in the oblique cases,
with the ellipsis of a pron. of the 1st or 2d Pers. : Avrwv yap airuXoneO'
&(ppadir]cnv, we were undone by our own folly, k. 27. Avrrjv [sc. o~£\ £. 27.
i. In the later Greek (e. g. the S. S.), avros sometimes appears in the
Nom., simply as a strong pronoun of the 3d Pers.: "On avrol irapaKXydrj-
covrai, for they shall be comforted, Mat. 5. 4.
j. The emphasis of avTo's sometimes lies in mere contradistinction.
541. The emphatic force of avros has led to some special
uses (see also 467 c) :
§ 544. DEMONSTRATIVE. 277
a.) Xdbpei avros, he goes [himself only] alone (solus), iv. 7. 11. (b) Au-
ToVEXXyves, ov /uuZofiapPapoi, ' pure Greeks, ' PL Menex. 245 d. (c) 'AAXd
rts avros lt(o, ' of his own accord,' sponte, P. 254. (d) Ovk avrb 8ikciio-
avvrjv iiraivovpres, not praising justice in and of itself, PI. Rep. 363 a. (e)
Ilpds airy tuj (TTpaTetifxxLTi, [by the army itself] close to the army, i. 8. 14.
(f ) Autos' 2<pa (Pythagorean), ipse dixit, [himself] the Master said it. (g)
After an ordinal : HepiKXeovs Sckcitov avrov aTparrryovuTos, P. command-
ing [himself the tenth] with nine colleagues (Fr. lui dixieme), Th. I. 116.
h.) A reflexive is frequently preceded by avr6s, agreeing with the same
subject ; and the two pronouns are often brought into close connection, in
disregard of the natural order : Ala-xvveis irbXiv ttjv airros avrov, you dis-
grace your own city (539 d), Soph. O. C. 929. See 513 f.
C. Demonstrative (28, 252).
542. i. Of the primary demonstratives, the more distant
and emphatic is cxeu»or, ille, that ; the nearer and more familiar
is ovtos or ode, hie, this :
'Ed? ckclvchs 8oK7J, kclI tovtovs KaK&s iroi-f}<rov<n, if those should wish it,
they will even injure these, PI. Phsedr. 231 c.
a. The two may be combined to mark the connection of the more
remote with the nearer ; as of the past with the present, of a saying with
its illustration, of that which has been mentioned with that which is pres-
ent before us, &c. : Tovr [sc. iari] Ikciv' ovy<b 'Xeyov, this is tliat which I
said, Ar. Ach. 41. Tovt ineivo, KracrQ' ercupovs, this [is] verifies tJiat pre-
cept, "Gain friends," Eur. Or. 804. Hsec ilia Charybdis, Virg.
b. Ovtos sometimes marks the ordinary or familiar, and Ixetvos the
extraordinary : "Ex ovTes tovtovs re tovs woXvTeXets x^rdivas, having on the
rich tunics which t/iey are in the habit of wearing, i. 5. 8. Tbv'Apio-Teidrjv
€K€tvov, that remarkable A., Dem. 34. 20. Ille Demosthenes, Cic.'
543. ii. The pronouns ovtos and 58e have in general the
same force, and the choice between them often depends upon
euphony or rhythm : Tovt<o cpiXelv xpht ™8* XP% iravras ae^eiv f
these we must love, these all must revere, Soph. El. 981. Yet
they are not without distinction.
a. Ovtos, as formed by composition with avros, is properly a pronoun
of identification or einphatic designation (it may be regarded as a weaker
form of 6 avros, the same, 540 b) ; while 88c, arising from composition
with 8e, is strictly a deictic pronoun (SeiKTucos, from hdKvvpx to point out),
pointing to an object as before us (see 252). Hence,
544. 1.) For reference to that which precedes or is con-
tained in a subordinate clause, ovtos is commonly used ; but for
reference to that which folloivs and is not contained in a sub-
ordinate clause, ode :
TeKfx-qptov bk tovtov /cat to8c, and of this (which has been stated), this
(which follows) is also a proof , i. 9. 29. Ovtoi, ovs bpare, fiapfiapoi (523 g).
To the retrospective character of ovtos may be referred,
a.) Its use preceded by KaC, in making an addition to a sentence, the
pronoun either serving as a repetition of a substantive in the sentence, or,
in the neuter Ace. or Norn, (commonly plur., 491 c), of the sentence itself :
278 SYNTAX. PRONOUNS. §544.
Bivovs irpoa^Kei col ttoWovs Six e<r ^ ai j K *A tovtovs [sc. dix e ^ aL ] fieyaKo-
irpeTTibs, it becomes you to entertain many guests, and these magnificently,
(Ec. 'Efto-qdricrai' ttj AaKe5alpLOi>i, ical Tavra [sc. eTroi^aav] eibbres (491 c).
b.) The use of tovto and Tavra in assent : Ael virapx^Lv fcal bwarovs.
. . "Eoti ravra. " They ought also to be competent." " This is so." PL
545. 2.) "Ode surpasses in demonstrative vivacity; but oItos
in emphatic force and in the extent of its substantive use :
*H tovSs (pp&fcis ; Tovtov, Svirep d<ropq.s. "Is this the man you speak
of?" "The very man, whom you behold." Soph. 0. T. 1120.
a. To the deictic power of 88« may be referred the very frequent use of
this pronoun by the Epic and Dramatic poets for an adverb of place (509 b),
especially by the latter, in bringing a new person upon the stage.
546. 3.) In the emphatic designation of the first and sec-
ond persons by a demonstrative, (a) the first person, as the nearer
object, is regularly denoted by o8e (the speaker pointing, as it
were, to himself, 543 a) ; and (b) the second, by ovros, which
expresses impatience, authority, contempt, familiarity, &c, and
(c) is used in address, both with and without <rv (401. 3) :
(a) Mfy 6vt)ox virkp tov8' dvSp&s, ov8' eyk irpb aov, do not you die for this
man [for me], nor yet I for you, Eur. Ale. 690. (b) Ovtoo-1 dvrjp ov irav-
cerai <t>\vdpwv, this man [you] will not cease trifling, PL Gorg. 489 b.
(c) Ovtos <rv, & irpiafiv, Heus tu, senex, [This you, or You there, 509 b],
Ho there ! old man 1 Soph. O. T. Ovtos, t'l aejxvbu . . pxtireis ; Eur. Ale.
547. in. Other compounds of avrdv and de (252) are dis-
tinguished in like manner with ovtos and ode :
'O Kvpos &Koij<ras rod Twfiptiov TOiavra, toioSc irpbs avrbv £\e£e Cyr.
D. Indefinite (28, 253 s).
548. Of the indefinite pronouns, the most extensive in its
use is rh, which is the simplest expression of indefiniteness or
general reference.
a. Tls is variously translated : any, some, certain, a, one, &c. ; Lat.
aliquis, &e. ; while it may be sometimes omitted in translation.
b. Tls more frequently follows the word with which it is most closely
joined ; but may also precede it, yet not so as to commence a sentence.
Sometimes, however, it begins a clause ; and sometimes separates closely
connected words : TL oiV, tls av diroi, ravra X^yets ; Why then, one might
say, do you mention these things ? Dem. 13. 6. See 520 b.
c. The singular tIs commonly refers to an individual (some one, a cer-
tain one) ; but sometimes to more than one (some, 488), or even to any
one concerned (every one). The extent of the reference is sometimes marked
by cts (ovdeis, fl'^ds), foao-TOS, iras, ^ ovSefe, fee. "Avdpcoirbs tis rjpioTrjcre,
a certain man asked, ii. 4. 15. 0ew tis, some one of the gods, v. 2. 24.
Mure? tis Zkclvov, there are those who hate him, Dem. 42. 17. Ed p.h tis
dbpv OrjZ&adw, let each one sharpen well his spear, B. 382. "EKatrrds tis
<poflovpLevos, each one fearing, Cyr. 6. 1. 42. Adverbially, ovbty tl (Mem.
1. 2. 42), fiydfr tl, not [as to any one thing] at all, ov irdvv tl vi. 1. 26, &c.
d. Tls often marks indefiniteness of nature, character, quality, quantity,
§ 550. INDEFINITE AND KELATIVE. 279
number, degree &c. '0 o-o^tffrrjs rvyxdvei &v ffnropbs tis ^ KdirrjXos, the
sophist is [a certain] a kind of trader or huckster, PL Prot. 313 c. 'E716
tis, us §<hk€, dvcrixadrjs, I am, mcthinks, somewhat stupid, PI. Rep. 358 a.
'B.fj.epas p.ep ip5o/JLr)Kovr& rivets, some (i. e. about) seventy (lays, Th. 7. 87.
e. Tis may be used to give a certain vagueness to a proper name, or a
noun having the article : llapa Xdpcovt tlvl, with a certain C/iarou, Hel.
f. Tis is sometimes emphatic, and may be then written as orthotone (yet
editors here differ) : H#x e ' s T ^s elvcu, you boasted that you were somebody.
g. An indefinite form of expression is sometimes employed for a definite :
Hoi tis rpexf/erai ; ivhitlier can one [ = 1] turn, Ar. Th. 603. (h) So a
definite for an indefinite, as iSois dp, you [= one] might see, PL Con v. 177 c.
E. Relative.
549. 1. Relatives refer to an antecedent either as definite
or as indefinite ; and are, hence, divided into the definite and
the INDEFINITE RELATIVES I
'HeXiov 8s ir&vr ecpopj., of the Sun, who seeth all things, X. 109. ' Rye fxbva
alrelv K.vpoi>, oo-tis . . dird^ei, to ask C. for some guide wlw would conduct
them, i. 3. 14.
a. Indefinite relatives are formed, either from the definite relatives
by adding tIs or a particle (commonly &v), or from the simple indefinites
by prefixing os (in the shortened form 6-) : bans or 5s dp loJwcver, biroios
of wlmt kind soever, birbaos how much soever, birbre wliensocver. See
254, 377, 389. (b) The use of an indefinite relative is sometimes explained
by resolving it into an indefinite pronoun and a relative, the indefinite
part seeming to belong more strictly to the antecedent clause : "Earip 6 ti
<re rjdiKrjcra ; is tliere aught in which I have wronged you ? i. 6. 7.
550. 11. For one relative, another is sometimes used as a
simpler, more familiar, or more expressive form. This use may
be sometimes explained by ellipsis. Thus,
a.) A definite for an indefinite relative : Ovs eupa edi\ovras KivSwev"-
eiv, tovtovs Kai dpxopras iiroiei, whomsoever lie saw willing to incur danger,
tJiesc he made rulers, i. 9. 14.
b.) An indefinite for a definite relative : 'Opare 8t tx\p Tio-o-cuj^pvous
diriariap, Soris \eywp . ., see the perfidy of T., [one] a man who saying . .,
iii. 2. 4. See 549 b. — The use of an indefinite relative referring to a
definite antecedent belongs particularly to those cases in which the relative
clause is added, not to distinguish, but to characterize, thus representing
the antecedent as one of a class.
c.) A simpler relative for one of quantity, quality, &c. : 'JZiridv/xew
ToiavT-qs obtjvs ^S [= o'ias] iroWol Tvyxdpovcnp,- to desire such glory [which]
as many obtain, Isoc. 408 d. "Ewo-irep b\i> 77s 8s [= toiovtos otos] el, as long
as you are what [= such, as] you are, PL Phsedr. 243 e.
d.) A relative of quantity, quality, &c, for a simpler relative:
TaOra . . XPV iroieiv, 8<ra [for a, or sc. roaavra] b deb? iictXevaev, you must
do these things, [as many as] which the god has commanded, iii. 1. 7.
e.) A relative adverb for a relative pronoun, chiefly in designations
of place, time, and manner : Els YOty&p, oGev 6\j/ovrai OdXarrav, to a place
[whence] from which tliey would behold the sea, iv. 7. 20.
f. After the plural of ttols all', Sorts and 8s &v are regularly used in the
singular, and ooroi, 6tr6<roi, and ol in the plural : 'Ao-n-dfeTcu trdvTas, <S dp
TtpiTvyxdvy, lie salutes all [whomsoever] whom he may meet, PL Rep.
566 d. Hd<rip, ots ertiyxwzv, ifiba, he shouted to all wliom he met, i. 8. 1.
280 SYNTAX. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. §551.
551. in. Ellipsis. A word which belongs both to the
antecedent and to the relative clause, is commonly expressed
in but one ; more frequently in the earlier clause, yet often in
the later ; while it may be omitted in both, if it is a word which
will be readily supplied : as,
a.) A Verb or Participle : "0 ri av 5irj [sc. irdfTxew], ireCo-ojicu, I will
suffer whatever I must [suffer], i. 3. 6.
b.) A Preposition : 'Ev rpial . . greo-iv, [sc. &S\ oh iiruroXafci, in three
years, in which he has tlie \ipper hand, Dem. 117. 16.
c.) The Subject of the Relative. Relative pronouns belong to the
class of adjectives (173), and, as such, agree with a substantive expressed
or understood ; while a form of this substantive, or of one corresponding
to it, is also the antecedent of the relative : Odros kariv 6 avrjp, 5? eTdes
dvSpa, this is the man [which man] whom you saw. But elliptic forms
are far more common : Odros kariv 6 avrjp, bv eldes, OdrSs ecrriv, bv eldes &v-
5pa, Odros tariv, 8v eldes • or, with the antecedent clause preceding (an
order more frequent in Greek than in Eng.), *Oi> ddes, odros kjriv, &c.
\\.Trb T7)S apX'MS, ^s [sc. apxys] avrbv aarpdir^v eiroirjo-e (505 a). 'Airo-
ir£p.-pai irpbs eavrbv [sc. rb arpdrevpux,] 5 etye <TTpdrtv|xa, to send back to
him the force which he had [what force he had], i. 2. 1. Kvpos 5e 2x wv °^ s
dp7)Ka, C. having tlie men wlwm I have mentioned, lb. 5.
d. If the relative and its subject are in the same clause, the latter is
commonly put at the end, as though the rest of the clause were regarded
as modifying it like an adjective. See 523 g. (e) The adjective character
of a relative clause is sometimes made more prominent by placing it be-
tween a substantive and its article : Toi>s biroiovcr$1\iroQ' t>|X€is ilerrefxireTC
o-rparrryovs, [the what sort you sent out generals] tlie generals such as
you sent out, Dem. 276. 10.
f. A demonstrative or indefinite pronoun or adverb is very often omitted
in the antecedent clause, as implied by the relative ; but the simple ellipsis
of the relative pronoun itself, which is so common in Eng., is not allowed
in the Greek. Compare the ellipses in, 2«V [sc. rotrrois] ols p-dXiara <pi-
Xels, with those [sc. whom] you love best (cum iis quos), i. 9. 25.
g. Indefinite relatives are often used elliptically in expressing a condi-
tion or circumstance : A66', i\ri<s ecrri, give it [to her, being whoever she is,
i. e. let her be whoever she may], whoever she may be, Soph. El. 1123.
(h) This has led to their use as mere indefinites (commonly with oSv or
tr\) : M?;5' ovnvaovv ixicrBbv [— fjuadov riva, oaris odv et'77] Trpocrcurricras, not
demanding any pay whatever [it might be], vii. 6. 27. "Otov 8f| -rrapey-
•yvqcravros, some one [whoever it might have been] having suggested it, iv. 7. 4.
i. Observe the ellipses in such expressions as (a) 8orai T||X€pai (united,
bcrrf/j.e'pai), quot diebus or quotidie, [on as many days as there are] daily,
80-01 jJ.fjv€S, quot mensibus, monthly. (|3) 'ClKvp-opos . . Zero-eat, ol' ayopeteis,
you will be short-lived, [according to such things as] from ivhat you say,
2, 95. (y) Olos etceivov 0u|xbs virepPios, ovk edeX-fjaei, ivith [such a spirit
as is] that violent spirit of his, he will not be willing, 2. 262.
552. iv. Attraction. The intimate relation of clauses
connected by a relative pronoun or a kindred particle, often pro-
duces an attraction, sometimes simply affecting the position or
form of particular words, and sometimes even uniting the two
clauses into one. Thus,
§ 554. ELLIPSIS, ATTRACTION. 281
553. 1.) Transfer. A word or phrase is often made a
part of the relative, instead of the antecedent, clause ; and some-
times the two clauses are blended in their arrangement :
"Ecttiv 8T(p dXXw [for &\\os 6Vy] . . TrXeiio eirirpe'Treis ; is there [to whom
else] any other to* whom you entrust more ? (Ec. 3. 12. A6yovs Hkovcov, otis
a oi §v<rrvyj&$ tf K<a fop 03 *, hear the sad tidings which I bring you, Eur.
Or. 853. OStoi, kirel evGe'ws rjcrdovro rb Trpcty/xa, direx^prjo-av, these, tvhen
they understood the matter, immediately withdrew, Hel. 3. 2. 4. "Op eyCj
aTT€Ke<pakL<ja. 'Iwdvvrjv, oSros ecmv Mk. 6. 16. See 554 s.
a. The superlative is often so placed, particularly in expressions of
(b) time and (c) possibility ; and with a frequent ellipsis of the word de-
noting possibility :
(a) AovXov, 6u elx* moTOTarov, girefxxf/eu (De servis, quern habuit fidelis-
simum, misit, Nep.), he sent the most faithful servant that he had. "Apx 6-
c6cll eirlo-Tap.au, <os rts nod &X\os {JLaXwrra avdpibww, I knoiv how to obey [as
even any other man knows at the best] as well as any other man, i. 3. 15.
(b) HeipacrbpjeOa irapeivat, 8t<xv ra^yrra. dunrpa£u)p:e$a [for ir. rdx^ra,
Stolv 5.], we shall endeavor to be present [most quickly when] as soon as we
have accomplished, Cyr. 4. 5. 33. 'Eircl fjXde TdxwrTa, direboro, as soon as
he had come, he sold, vii. 2. 6. 'i2s rdxia-ra ews vire'cpcuvev, edtiovro iv. 3. 9.
(c) "Ryayov . . 6iro<rovs ey<h irkdtrrovs ebwdpLnv, I have brought [the
most that] as many as I could, Cyr. 4. 5. 29. "Exow t7nr6xs «s b\v ddvvTai
irXcCcrrovs, bringing [horsemen so as he could the most] as many horse as
he could, i. 6. 3. Aap.pdveu> . . 8n irXeiorovs, to take as many as pos-
sible, i. 1. 6 (8ti the neut. of tfo-ris, according to whatever may be, or is
jwssible ; though words denoting possibility are not expressed with it).
'fls (idXiorra eduvaro iinKpvn-Tbpievos, [concealing it as he best could] as
secretly as lie could,, i. 1. 6. 'EXavvuv tcs bvvarbv fy tcLxioto, riding as
fast as was possible, Cyr. 5. 4. 3. 'Us p.dXi<rra Cyr. 1. 6. 19, quam maxime,
as much as possible. "On rdx^ra. vii. 2. 8, as quickly as possible.
d. In the more elliptic of these constructions, »s, 8n, #ir«s, &c, are
treated simply as adverbs strengthening the superlative.
554. 2.) Assimilation, a, b. The relative often takes the
case of its antecedent ; (c) far less frequently, the antecedent,
the case of a relative following.
Remark. The former, from its special frequency in Attic Greek, has
been distinguished as Attic, and the latter as Inverse Attraction.
(a) Attic Attraction. This is the common construction, when the rela-
tive clause limits or defines an antecedent in tJie Gen. or Dat., and the
relative would properly be an Ace. depending upon a verb : 'Arcb rdv irb-
Xewv, «v [for b\s] e'lreiae, from tJie cities which he persuaded, Th. 7. 1. 2i)i>
rots d-qaavpols, ots 6 7rarrjp KartXiTrev, with tlie treasures which my father
left, Cyr. 3. 1. 33. "Apxovras eiroiei ^s kolt ear peeper o xwpas i. 9. 14. Xet-
p,Q>vos ye fvros o'lov Xeyecs v. 8. 3. 'M.rjduv p.euroi, 8<ra>v ea>/)d/ca Cyr. 1. 3. 2.
Note. If this antecedent is a demonstrative prononn y it is commonly
omitted (551 f ) : Si^ [sc. toijtols] ols ix^* with those whom I have, vii. 3. 48.
(b) The Dot. and even Nom. are rarely attracted in like manner : T2v
[= iKeivwv, ols] -qiriareL, ttoXXoijs, many of those whom he distrusted, Cyr.
5. 4. 39. BXawrecrdaL d(p' <£v [= rotiruv, b\] ijpuv 7ra,oe07cet5cicrrcu, to be in-
jured by those things which have been ])repared by us [in respect to which
preparation has been made by us], Th. 7. 67. — When the subject of a
verb is attracted, the verb, if retained, becomes impersonal.
282 SYNTAX. — RELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 554.
(c) Inverse Attraction. The antecedent is here treated, except in position,
as if a part of the relative clause ; and sometimes omits an article, as if
supplied by the relative (cf. 523 g) : 'AvelXev atrip 6 'A-rrdWuiu Oeois ols
[= roi>y deoi/s, ols] ¥5ei 66eiv, Apollo made known to him [to what gods] the
gods to whom he must sacrifice, iii. 1. 6. TcurSe [= At5e] 5' ixo-xep d<ro-
pq.s, . . xvpov<n irpbs at, these whom you behold, come to you, Soph. Tr.
d. Assimilation appears also in adverbs: 'Ek 5£ yrjs, 60€v [= o5] itpov-
kcito, from tJie ground [whence] where it lay, Soph. Tr. Inverse, Brjvai.
K«£0€v [= Kelae], Sfav trep ijicei, to return thither, whence he came, Id. 0. C.
555. 3.) Condensation. The two clauses may be condensed
into one by the omission of a substantive verb either (a) from the
antecedent clause or (/3) from the relative clause.
(a) From the antecedent clause, a. After a demonstrative pro-
noun or article, the relative is also omitted, and the antecedent takes
its place in the construction. This form of condensation is particularly
frequent in questions, exclamations, and denials, especially with the poets :
Ti t65' avdqis [= Tl £<tti t65c, 5 avdq.s] ; what is this, which you say ? Eur.
Ale. 106. TL tovt &pxouov iwtireis icaicbv ; what is this old evil of which
you speak ? Soph. O. T. 1033. Tovro f*fr otdev davp-aarbv \eyeis PI. Prot.
b. An exclamation without a verb and a relative clause may be united
in like manner : Tovs ip.bs Ide irarrip 6avd<rovs aUets [= "O B6.vo.toi (Units,
oSj I8e irarrip ep.6s] ! the cruel death my father saw ! Soph. El. 205.
c. Expressions like the following are still more elliptical : "Evda rj Tpi-
irvpyia [= earl x^pLov, 8 T.] /caXetrcu, where there is a place, which is
called Tripyrgia, Hel. 5. 1. 10. 'Ev $ Ka\ovp.ev to £fjv PI. Phsedo 107 c
556. (p) From the relative clause, a. This occurs chiefly
with a relative of comparison (otos, 8<ros, or tjXlkos), which then, with
any substantive or adjective in agreement, is assimilated to the cor-
responding demonstrative (expressed, or understood) ; and the whole is
construed as an adjective, sometimes even taking the article before it :
Xapi£6fJL€Pov ot<£ <ro\ dv8p( [= avdpi Toiotrcp, otos o~i> el], obliging a man
such as you are [a such as you man], Mem. 2. 9. 3. Oi 8e oloi mp vjicts
&v8pes, but [the such as you men] men like you, Cyr. 6. 2. 2 (cL Tots olos
oCros avdpibirovs Dem. 421. 16). "Ovtos tov irayov otov Savora/rov [ = toi-
otirov, oli>s eo-ri deivbraros], tlic cold being [such as is most dreadful] of the
most intense kind, PI. Conv. 220 b. — But if a substantive following otos
as above is in a different number, it remains in the Nominative : Neavias
5* otovs [= toioijtovs, olos] <tv, young men such as you, Ar. Ach. 601.
b. Some constructions may be explained either by the ellipsis of a sub-
stantive verb, or by the change of a finite verb to an infinitive depending
upon this adjective : "07ro>s . . p.r} tolovtol Haovrai ol iroXiTai, oloi irovrjpou
tlvos f) alffxpov tpyov ecpLeadai, that the citizens should not be such as [they
would be] to desire any wrong or base act [or, such as would desire], Cyr.
"Oo-ov p,bvov yeijo-aadaL eavrip KaraXiirdv, leaving for himself only [so much
as] sufficient to taste, vii. 3. 22. "Oaa p.e'irroi f)5rj doiceiv aircp, but [according
to so much as now seemed to him,] so far as he could now judge, Th.
c. Through their frequent use as above, with the ellipsis of the cor-
responding demonstratives, otos and bVos (particularly the former with
T€, 389 j) came to be treated as mere adjectives of quality or quantity :
Oto£ t« Zceo-de tj/uuv avp-irpa^ai ; . . 'Ikcivoi kap.ev. " Shall you be [stich as
to] able to co-operate with, us ?" "We are able." v. 4. 9. Otic olov re fy . .
biwueiv, [the state of things was not such as it should be to pursue] it was
§559. CONDENSATION, COMBINATIONS. 283
not possible to pursue, iii. 3. 9. Abyovs oiovs eh ra diKaar^pia, spceclies
J such as for] adapted to courts of justice, PI. Euthyd. 272 a.
d. In this construction, 8<ros is especially used in the muter form 8<rov,
as indeclinable ; and often substantively or adverbially (507 e) : "Ocrov '6<rov
o-tLXtjv, a mere, mere bit, Ar. Vesp. 213. 'E\et7rero rr,s vvktos 6o~ou aKoral-
ovs dieXdeiv, enough of the night remained for them to cross in the dark, iv.
I. 5. "Oaou airoffiv, sufficiently for subsistence, Th. 1. 2.
557. 4.) A relative pronoun may take the place of
a definitive (personal or demonstrative pronoun, or article), and
a connective particle.
a.) When the definitive belongs to the first clause. In this kind of
attraction, the pronoun is commonly either governed by a preposition or ad-
verb, or is itself used adverbially : 'E<f £ [= eirl roOnp, ware] /xtj naieiv ras
Kdbfias, upon this condition, that they should not burn the villages, iv. 2. 19
(cf. 'E7ri Toicrde, ware Th. 3. 114). 'E<f> # re [ = ori roirry, (bare] irXola
o-vXXeyew, in order that we might collect transports, vi. 6. 22. M^x/h off
[= tov xpbvoV) ore] ddov, until [the time when] they saw, v. 4. 16 (cf. M^-
Xpt roaoijTov, £ws Th. 1. 90). M^XP' (&XP L ) off [= T0 " X w /°ioi;, &>0a], to the
region where, as far as, i. 7. 6. 'E£ otov (off, off re), ex quo, since, vii. 8. 4.
a. The Attic poets sometimes use ovveKa, and Hdt. pe'xpi ov (6to\i), as
compound adverbs governing the Gen. : TwaiKos oiW/ca, for tlie sake of a
woman, iEsch. Ag. 823. M<?x/h 6rev irXrjddpns dyoprjs, Hdt. 2. 173.
558. p.) "When the definitive belongs to the second clause : Th
ovtu: /xaiverai, 8o-ris [ = wore eKeivos] off fiouXeraL cot <pi\os elvai ; who is so
mad that he does not wish to be your friend? ii. 5. 12. 'Awopcov karl . .,
ofrrives £d£\ov<ri, it is the part of those without resource [that they should
wish] to wish, ii. 5. 21. Off/c Z<xtw ovtw /iwpos, 8s Bavdv epgl, Soph. Ant.
a. Akin to this construction is the extensive use of the relative in ex-
planation, or the assignment of reason or purpose : Qavfiacrrbv iroceh, 8s . .
5i5ws, you act strangely, [who give] that you give, or in giving (qui des),
Mem. 2. 7. 13. "OirXa kt&vtcii, ots afxvvovvTai tovs ddiKovm-as, they prepare
arms, [with which they will repel] that with these they may repel assailants,
lb. 1. 14. Kal iroXei ire'/xxf/ov tlv, 8<ttis anp^avd, send some one to the city,
to give notice, Eur. Iph. T. 1208. "AyyeXov fjnav, 8s ayyeiXeie yvvaid, they
sent a messenger to tell tlie woman (qui nunciaret), o. 458. Equitatum
praemittit, qui videant, Cozs.
b. Relative adverbs likewise exhibit this form of attraction : Evdai-
fjicjv . . <os [= otl ovtus] dffecDs Kal yewaiws kreXevra, happy that he died so
fearlessly and nobly, PI. Phaido 58 e.
559. 5.) This attraction so unites some words, that the
combinations are treated as complex pronouns or adverbs :
a.) "Eoti with a relative, the verb remaining unchanged, whatever
might be its appropriate number, tense, or mode : iariv of (at, a, &v, oh,
ah, ovs, as- in questions oiWes; &c), sunt qui, [there are who] some;
Zcttiv 6're or Zed' tire, est quando, [there is when] sometimes, ii. 6. 9 ; %<ttlv
ivQa, est ubi, in some places, Cyr. 7. 4. 15 ; 2<ttiv Sirov (ws, dVws, rj, 5dev,
&c). IlpoufiaXXovTO Kpto-fieis irpGxrov p.ev Xeiplo-o<pov . ., &jti 5' ot Kal £?e-
i>o<pQvTa, they proposed as ambassadors, first C, and some also [there were
also some who proposed] X., vi. 2. 6. "E<ttiv ovo-rivas avBp&iruv retfaff-
fiaKas ; are there any men whom you have admired ? Mem. I. 4. 2.
284 SYNTAX. R. K. PRONOUNS. RELATIVE. § 559.
b.) The relative followed by PovXci, and agreeing with the antecedent
in any case (cf. Lat. qui-vis, qui-libet) : Uepi UoXvyvurov, ?) &\\ov 6rov
[= 6vriva\ PovXet, respecting P., or any other one whom, you please, PI.
c.) "Ootis ov (sometimes 8s ov) after ovSeis or tis : OvScls 8<ttis ovk
dtpe^erai, there is no one, who will not refrain (nemo non), Ven. 12. 14 (cf.
Ovdels fju, 8(ttl$ ovk $ero Hel. 7. 5. 26). OvScls 8s ov\l t£ov& 6vei8ieX,
every one of these will reproach, Soph. 0. T. 373. Ovteva dvdvvop [= ov-
8els Kivdvvos ?ji>,] ovtlv oi>x virijieivav, tliere was no danger which they did
not meet, Dem. 295. 7. Ovdevbs orov ov, Ovdevl orip ov, PI. See also 556.
560. Remark. Forms of comparison are especially liable to
attraction and ellipsis (cf. 438 b, 511 b) : Movoi re 8i-res ttpoia ^irparrov,
iiirep [— eKeivois, &wep] av fier dXXiov fires, '[like things, which] things
like to those which ' (cf. idem qui) v. 4. 34.
561. v. A relative sometimes introduces a clause which
(a) has another connective or a participle absolute, or which (b)
is properly coordinate (as imperative, interrogative, <fec); and,
on the other hand, a coordinate clause sometimes (c) takes
the place of a relative clause, or (d) is used in continuation of it :
(a) IloXXd av elireiv e"x 0Lev OXvvdioi vvv, & t6t el trpoel8ovro, ovk av dirtb-
\ovto, the Olynthians could now mention many things, which had tliey tlien
foreseen, they vmdd not Jiave perislved, Dem. 128. 17.
(b) tyrjQov dp.(f) i}p.Qv. . . "H Kpivel ri xPVf 10 - >' "The vote concerning us. "
" f Which will decide what ?] And what will this decide ? " Eur. Or. Kd-
thtov . . <pv\&Kovs, ot Xeybvruv, station guards, and let them say , Hdt. 1. 89.
(c) 'E£eTd(reu . . 'Odvaae'a, r) 1<L<rv<pov, ?) &XXovs pbvplovs &v tis etiroi, to ex-
amine Ulysses, or Sisyj>hus, or [one might mention ten thousand others]
ten thousand others whom one might mention, PI. Apol. 41 b.
(d) Kvpov 8e fieraire purer at dirb ttjs dpxvs, fjs avrbv aaTpdir-qv eiroirjve, Kai
arparyfybv 8e avrbv aire'Sei^e i. 1. 2. This construction is adopted chiefly
to avoid the repetition of the relative, in accordance with Rule K.
562. Rule K. The repetition of the relative is commonly
avoided, either by ellipsis, or by the substitution of a jjersonal
pronoun or of a demonstrative : as,
'A/ncuos 8e, 8v ijfieTs ijde'Xofiev fiacrCXia Kadurrdvai, koX [sc. $\ £d<J}Kap,ev Kal
[sc. Trap' od] eXd@opi.ev irurrd, A., whom we wulied to make king, and to
whom we gave and from wlwm we received pledges, iii. 2. 5. '0 dvqp 8s
avvedripa rjpuv, Kal vti p.oi p,dXa edoKecs davp.d£eiv avrrfv, tlie man wlw hunted
with us, and whom, you seemed to me greatly to admire, Cyr. 3. 1. 38.
a. The relative is sometimes strengthened by a personal pronoun or a
demonstrative in the same clause ; especially, after a Hebrew idiom, in the
Hellenistic : "Hv XPW * eXavvetv -HjvSc, whom you ought to drive [her],
Eur. And. 650. Ots iSodij avrots dSt/ofa-cu, to whom it was given [to them]
to hurt, Rev. 7. 2. "Oirov rpitperat ckci Rev. 12. 14.
F. Complementary and Interrogative.
563. 1. From the connective, and, at the same time, in-
definite character of the complementary pronouns and adverbs,
their proper forms are such as belong to indefinite relatives
(549 a). But, when there is no danger of mistake, there is
§ 565. COMPLEMENTARY AND INTERROGATIVE. 285
often employed, for the greater brevity and vivacity, in place
of the full compound form, one or the other element, either the
relative or the indefinite. Of these, the latter is far the more
frequently used, but with this distinction from the indefinite in
its proper sense, that the accentuation of the compound form is
retained, as far as possible. Thus,
Sans, ris, 6s, quis, who, wluit ; birbaos, irbaos, Saos, quantus, how much;
6tt6t€, irore, ore, quando, when ; owoi, iroi, ol, quo, whitJier ; &c.
Uplv drjXov elvai, 6 ti ol a\\oi"EX\r]i>es airoKpivovvrai, Ilplv SrjXov elvai, tC
iroi7\aov<n.v ol &\\ol arpanQrat., before it is known what the other Greeks ivill
answer {soldiers will do), i. 4. 14, 13. 'fis brfKoi-q, ovs rt/i£ i. 9. 28.
564. 2. The indefinites thus employed and accented are
termed in Etymology, from the most prominent of their offices,
interrogatives (253. 2, 377). As complementary words, they
were employed in indirect question ; and hence appears to have
arisen their use as direct interrogatives, through an ellipsis.
Thus, from the indirect question, Eiirk, Tiva yvwin\v ^xets irepl rrjs iro-
pelas, say, what opinion yon have concerning the march (ii. 2. 10), by the
omission of drtl, comes the direct question, TCva yuupnjv £x eis **S^ T V S ir °-
peias; wliat opinion have you concerning the march ?
a. In other languages, as the Lat., with those derived from it, and the
Eng., the complementary use of the simple relatives has prevailed ; and
hence, in these languages, the general identity of the relatives and the inter-
rogatives (qui, quando, ubi, unde, who, which, when, wJiere, &c).
b. In direct question, the Greek employs only one of the two shorter
forms above mentioned, but in exclamation it employs both : Oi/xot, wa-
re p, tI 6i7ras / old p! elpyaaai ! my father, what have you said ! how you
treat mc / Soph. Tr. 1203. "0<ra irpdy/nara £x ets - r Cyr. 1. 3. 4.
c. The neuter ri unites with several particles to form elliptical ques-
tions ; which, with various specific offices, serve in general to promote the
vigor and vivacity of the discourse, commonly introducing other questions :
Tt yap [sc. e"anv, or Xiyere] ; . . ifiirodJjv eifU ; What, indeed ? Am I in the
way? v. 7. 10. Tt odv ; What then? v. 8. 11. T* 84; Ti dr/ ; Tt brjra ;
d. A complementary pronoun or adverb, used as an echo to an in-
terrogative, has, for distinction's sake, its full form : Tis yap el; [sc. 'Epoj-
t£s]"Octtis; IIoXittjs xPV (J " ro ^' ' ' Who are y ou ? " "[Do you ask] who ?
A good citizen." Ar. Ach. 594. OSros, ri iroiels ; "O ti iroiu> ; "Ho !
what are you doing?" "What am I doing?" Id. Ran. 198.
565. 3. Condensation, a. Expressions like Qavp\ao-r6v
iariv oa-os (oa-ov, <os, &c), it is wonderful how much, &c, may be
condensed into complex adjectives or adverbs : Bavnaarbs oaos,
6avixao~Tov ocrov, davpLacrrws cos, tfcC (cf. 555, 559):
@a-up.ao-TT|V oVijv irepl ae trpoQvpiav ^x e£ > it is wonderful how much re-
gard he has for you (mirum quantum stadium), PI. Ale. 151 a. Merd
IbpQros 0av(j.ao-Tov 8<rov Id. Rep. 350 d. 0avfj.ao-Ta>s «S iireiadrjv, I was
wonderfully convinced, Id. Phsedo 92 a. , A|A^x avov 8crov xpbvov, an in-
conceivably long time, lb. 80 c. 'Yir€p<j>v<»s a>s x a ^ w Id. Conv. 173 c.
b. A complementary word may take the place of a connective particle
and a demonstrative (cf. 558) : KaroiKreipwv rfy re yvvaina, o'iov avopbs
[ = Sn roiotirov avbpbs) arepolro, commiserating the wife [what a husband
she had lost] that she had lost such a husband. Cyr. 7. 3. 13.
286 SYNTAX. — V AAA02 AND "ETEP02. § 566.
566. The Greek idiom (a) admits a greater freedom than
the English, in the construction and position of both interroga-
tive and complementary words, especially in connecting them
with dependent words and clauses ; and even (b) allows the
use of more than one in the same clause :
(a) It . . t8uv irotovvra, ravra Kareyvwnas avrov ; [having seen him do-
ing what, do you] what have you seen him do, that you thus judge of him ?
Mem. 1. 3. 10. "Orav tC iroiyaojcn, vopuets avroi/s gov cppovri^eiv ; [when
they have done what, will you think] what must they do, before you will
think tlcat they care for you, lb. 4. 14. "Iva ti [sc. yiv-qrai] ravra \e~yeis ;
[that what may be] with what intent, or why, do you say this ? Id. Apol.
(b) T£s rlvos alribs i<rri, yevqGerai (pavepop, it will become evident who is
guilty (and) of wliat, Dem. 249. 8. T£s irdOtv eh ; who arc you (and)
whence ? a. 170. AevGGere, . . old wpbs oltav avop&v trdax 01 Soph. Ant. 940.
Gr. *AAA02 AND "ETEP02.
567. These pronouns are not only used retrospectively y but
also prospectively and distribntively : thatis, they may denote,
not only a different person or thing from one which has been
mentioned, but also, from one which is to be mentioned j or
they may, in general, denote a difference among the several
individuals or parties which compose the whole number spoken
of ; but jfrepos commonly with reference to two objects or sets
of objects only. Compare alius and alter.
For modes of translation, see the following examples of &XXos, tTcp o$,
and their derivatives, as used, (a) Retrospectively. 'iKavbv Zpyov kv\
%\f/eiv Kpia, &XX« oirrav, &XXa> si Ixdvv eij/eiv, &XXw oirrav, it is work enough
for one man to boil meat, for another to roast it, &c, Cyr. 8. 2. 6. Mei-
vavres dt Tavnjv ttjv yp.e'pav, rrj dXXrj eiropevovro, 'on the next," iii. 4. 1.
(b) Prospectively. Ov8ev &XXo irpd^avres ?) SrjivGavres, loaving done noth-
ing else than ravage, Hel. 7. 4. 17. (c) Prospectively and Retrospec-
tively. "AXXos &XXov el\K€, one drew up another (alius alium), v. 2. 15.
'O grepos top grcpov iratei, the one strikes the other (alter alteram), vi. 1. 5.
(d) Distributively. "AXXoi AXXoOcv, [different persons in different di-
rections] some in this direction, and others in that, i. 10. 13. Ofrroi . . &XXos
&XXa Xefyet, these s/iy, one one thing, and another another (393 d, 489 d).
EUa^ov 8t &XX01 dXXws, alii aliter, i. 6. 11.
e. The Greek idiom oddly permits these pronouns (esp. &Wos) to be
used with reference to a larger class than the grammatical subject ex-
presses : B6es . . teal irpbfiara &XXa, oxen and [other sheep ! i. e. other ani-
mals, viz. sheep] also sheep, vii. 3. 48. "Eicrodev &XXa>v fivijGrTjpwv, (Mi-
nerva was placed) apart from the rest, the suitors, a. 132. See 509 e, 515.
f. The neuter &XXo is often used prospectively with rC, r\ oiZiv, or
p.T]8lv, with the ellipsis of a verb, commonly iroiw, irpdcr<r«, trd<r\o}, dpi,
or -yL-yvop-ai ■ Ti &\\o o5roi [sc. eiroir)<rav] ?) iirefiovXevGav ; wliat else have
they done but plot against ws f Th. 3. 39. OvSev &\Xo ?) . . edearo, lie did
nothing but gaze, Cyr. 1. 4. 24. El . . fiijdev &X\o t) pLereveyaois lb. 6. 39.
g. Hence the phrase of confident interrogation, &XXo ti [sc. Zo-riv] fy or
the ft omitted, &XXo ti (also written &\\on), nonne, [is it any thing else
than] is it not certain tlmt : "AXXo ti ?) ovdev KuXtei ; is it not certain that
nothing forbids ? iv. 7. 5. "AXXo ti oftv o'l ye (piXotcepSeh <pi\ovGi rb Ke"p5o$;
do not then, surely, the covetous love gain ? PI. Hipparch. 226 e.
§571. SYNTAX. R. XXIX., L. — VERB. 287
CHAPTEE III.
SYNTAX OF THE VERB.
I. AGREEMENT OF THE VERB.
(See also 492s ; for the union of Dual and PL, 494 ; for Compound Con-
struction, 495 s ; for Synesis, 498 s ; for Attraction, 500 ; for change of Num-
ber and Person, 501, 503 ; for construction with the Gen. Partitive, 421.)
568. Eule XXIX. A Verb agrees with its
subject in number and person : as,
'E7<j X^o/xat, I shall take, i. 7. 9. 2i> 6p$s, tu vides, ii. 1. 12. 'H<r#-
vei Aapetos, D. was sick ; 'Tpecs 56£ere, you will seem ; Aietx^rrju tw <p&-
Xayye, the two Ivies were apart; i. 1. 1 ; 4. 15 ; 8. 17. But,
569. Rule L. The Neuter Plural has regularly its
verb in the singular : as,
Td evLT-qdeia lircXiirc, provisions failed, iv. 7. 1. nXoia 5* vpuv iraptoriv,
you have vessels, v. 6. 20.
a. Exceptions to Rule L not unfrequently occur ; chiefly, when things
that have life are denoted, or when the idea of plurality is prominent, or
in the non-Attic poets for the sake of the metre. 'Evravda ^trav tcl J,vep-
vtaios /3a<riXeta, here was the palace of S. (489), i. 2. 23 (BatriXeta fy 7).
'Tirofyyia v<e'|xoivto ii. 2. 15 (T. iXavvero iv. 7. 24). Td 7-A77 . . !£eir€p.\|/av,
the magistrates sent forth, Th. Qavepa -fjo-av kcll htHtap koX avdpwirwv txyi)
7roXXd i. 7. 17. *H<rav 8e ravra 8uo relx* i- 4. 4. "Epya -ycvovTO A. 310.
b. A compound subject with which a neut. pi. adjective agrees, is here
commonly treated as if itself a single neuter plural (see 496 c).
c. A few passages occur, in which this rule applies to the dual as a
form of the plural (494) : "Ocrtre daierai, the eyes burn, f. 131.
570. When the verb precedes, it is sometimes singular, as
if its subject were as yet undetermined, though a masc. or fern. -
plural follows. In Attic, this use is almost confined to can and
rju (cf. the use of il est and il y a in Fr., and of it is in Eng.).
"Eoti 5£ eirra ffrddtoi e£ 'Aj3d8ov is tt\v airavriov, it is seven stadia from
Abydos to the opposite shore, Hdt. 7. 34. "E<rri . . &pxovrh re /ecu dijfios ;
arc there both rulers and people ? PI. Rep. 462 e.
' a. A few other examples of the Nom. pi. masc. or fem. with a verb in
the sing, occur in the poets i "T/wot . . rAXerat, hymns become, Pind. 01.
571. Ellipsis, &c. 1. The subject of the verb is com-
monly omitted, (a) if it is sufficiently indicated by the affix of
the verb with the context, and is without emphasis ; or (b), if it
is a pronoun of the third person, referring to an agent implied
in the verb itself, or (c) to persons in general, or (d) vaguely to
some power, thing, or condition of things. In tjie last case,
the verb is commonly termed impersonal. Thus,
288 SYNTAX. R. XXIX. VERB. — ELLIPSIS. §571.
(a) 'Eirel dk -fjadhei Aapeios . ., 4|3ov\€to, when D. was sick, he tcished, i. 1. 1.
(b) 'E7rei l<rci\iriY^€ [sc. 6 caXiriyKT^s], [when the trumpeter blew] at the
sound of the trumpet, i. 2. 17 (cf. iv. 3. 32). 'Etdjpvge Tois"EXkri<ri [sc. 6
KVP V £]> proclamation was made to the Greeks, Hi. 4. 36.
(c) A^-yovo-iv, <}>a<riv, dicimt, aiunt, they (men, people) say. Tovtov
iradeiv &}>a<rav (of. To^evdrjvai tis eXiyeTo) i. 8. 20. "Oirep trd<r\ov<riv ev
Tofc fj.eya.Xon ayGxri, as men are affected in great crises, Th. 7. 69.
(d) "Yti, v£<J>€i, pluit, ningit, it rains, it snows. 'Eirel (rvvta-Koraa-i,
when it grew dark, Cyr. 4. 5. 5. Mdxvs 8«i, there is need of a battle, ii.
3. 5 (see 473 b). Me'Xei p.oi tovtwv, [there is to me a care] I take care of
these, CEc. 11. 9 (432 d, 457). Mera^Xci iwl, me pcenitet, I repent, Cyr.
e. An impersonal verb, from its very nature, is in the M pers. sing. ;
and an adjective joined with it is in the ncut. sing., or in the neat. plur.
for the sing. (489 d, 491c.) As it expresses an action or state without
predicating it of any particular person or thing, its force may be commonly
expressed by a kindred noun with a substantive (or ot/ier appropriate) verb:
A« [ = XP € ^ a co-riv] Xbyuiv, opus est verbis, there is need of words, Cyr. 6.
1. 7. . llapecrKevaaTo, preparation had been made, Th. 4. 67.
f. A verb is often introduced as impersonal, of which the subject is
afterwards expressed in an Inf. or distinct clause : 'ESoko. avry rfbrj irope6-
eadcu, it now seemed best to him to march, i. 2. 1. Ovk ?\v Xa}ie1v, [it was
not for any one to take them] it was not possible to take tJiem, i. 5. 2.
572. 2. The substantive verb is very often omitted, espe-
cially if it is merely a copula; most freely in the forms earl and
tlat. Its omission is particularly frequent with verbals in -t*o$,
in general remarks and relative clauses, and with such words as
dvayKTj, cikos, Bepis, Kaipos, &pa, S^Xos, dvvaros, olos re, padios, ^nXe7ro's :
ToOro ov iroi-qriov [sc. early], hoc non faciendum, this must not be done,
i. 3. 15. '0 fieyas 6Xj3os ov fiovipios, greed prosperity is not permanent, Eur.
Or. 340. Yi.OTap.bv, 6b to edpos arddiov (cf, o5 fy rb eftpos), a river, of which
tJie width teas a slade, i. 4. 1. "ttpa X^yeiv, it is time to say, i. 3. 12.
a. Other verbs may be omitted, if supplied by the context, or readily
understood from the connection ; especially in familiar expressions, and
familiar verbs, as of coming, going, doing, saying, giving, &c. : Ovre <ri>
ticelvas <f>iXeis, otire enelvai ae" [sc. <f>iXovcri, 536]. 'H ap.ai-a rbv fiovv [sc. £\-
' Ket], " The cart before the horse," Luc. *ft <piXe $>cu8pe, irol 8r) /ecu irbdev ;
Dear P., whitlier now (are you going) and whence (do you come) ? PI.
b. A verb expressed sometimes suggests a different, and even an oppo-
site verb : 'ApxXr)<Tas bvirep oi iroXXol [sc. iiritx^Xovrai], neglecting w/iat tJie
most seek, PI. Apol. 36 b.
573. 3. Personal for Impersonal Construction, a. A verb,
of which the proper subject is an Infinitive or distinct clause,
often takes for a Nom. the subject of that Inf. or clause. In
this case, (b) the Inf. sometimes becomes a Part. ; and (c) an
adjective may be sometimes translated by an adverb. Thus,
(a) A^erai ""ktroXXuv eKbeipai Mapcrbav, A. is said to have flayed M.,
= Xeyerai, 'AirbXXuua iKdelpai Map<r{/av, it is said, tliat A. flayed M., i. 2.
8 (cf. i. 8. 7). AtjXoi ^jo-av, 6'rt eircKeio-ovrat, it was evident that tliey would
attack, v. 2. 26. Aficaios cljit eyCo /eoAdfeiv, it is just that I punish, Ar. Nub.
1434. IIoXXoJ be iirl5o£oi . . ireLaeada^ many are likely to suffer, Hdt. 6.
12.
§ 576. PERSONAL CONSTRUCTION. VOICES. 289
(b) '0 fikv ofo irpeafifrrepos irapwv iT&yx a * € [ = &rtiyx av€ T0P irp^^vrepov
vapeivai], the elder happened [being] to be present, i. e. it happened tliat the
elder was present. 'Apjcfou &vf\<TKovcr eyd, it will be enough that I die.
(c) A-qXos fjv aindbpLevos, it was manifest that he was grieved, or, lie was
manifestly grieved. Xripyoju 8e (fxxvcpbs v v ovdeva, lie evidently loved no one.
d. This construction may occur in a dependent clause, and (e) is not
confined to the finite verb ; while (f) sometimes the two modes of con-
struction are combined : (d) ^Heav 8' adrai rerpaKbaiai, <bs kkiyovro, apa-
£cu, these wagons were 400, as [they were said to be] was said, i. 10. 18.
(e) Airrov oKlyov Sc^cravTOs KaTaXevadTjvau, wlien he had wanted little of
being stoned to death, i. 5. 14. (f) "E5o%ev curry, ftpovTrjs yevoiiivrjs, <ricn-
irrbs ireaelv els ttjv irarp^av oldav, ical etc toijtov \dp,ir€<rdai iraorav, 'a.
thunderbolt seemed to fall, and [it seemed] that the whole house blazed.'
574. 4. The verb tyr\ is often separated from its subject by some of
the words quoted ; and is often thrown in pleonastically : "E5 X^yeis," e<pri,
" 5> 2injda," 6 Ktfiys, "You, speak well, S.," said C, PI. Phsedo 77 c.
'ATTOKplverou 6 Xeiplaoipos • " BXtyov," €<pi], "irpbs t& 6pi}," iv. 1. 20.
II. USE OF THE VOICES.
(For a general view, see 30, 266.)
575. Rule M. The uses of the voices are sometimes
interclianged.
1. A transition of meaning sometimes gives to one voice the
force of another voice of a different verb. Thus we find,
a.) The active for the passive : Ed aicovco to hear agreeably, and hence,
from the bewitching sweetness of praise, to be spoken well of: e3 anov'et.v
virb . . . avdpwTTiav, to be praised by men (bene audire), vii. 7. 23. 'Air^-
0avev virb NiK&vBpov, he [died] was killed by N., v. 1. 15. Otfrws IdXco, it
was thus taken, iii. 4. 12. See ktcIvo), alptu), 50. 'AaefieLas <j>evyovTa (431 c).
b.) The middle for the active: Kbirru smite, Koirro|i<u smite one's self
through grief, hence bewail. Tlvu pay, rtvopai take payment, punish.
c.) The middle for the passive: 'AirwXovTO virb re rdv iroXefilwv, [per-
ished] were destroyed by the enemy. 'Aicov<ro[j.ai k<x/c6s, I shall be called vile.
d.) The passive for the middle: 'HlKTrkayexo-a <re, [struck out of my
wits by ie&x]fearing you, Soph. 'Oxf/iv arvxBcis, alarmed at tlie sight, Z. 468.
576. 2. As the middle and passive had at first the same
form throughout, and were afterwards separated in the Aor.
and Fut. only (scarcely in the latter till after the age of Homer),
it was but natural that the earlier freedom of use should some-
times prevail, especially in poetry, over the later distinction.
This occurs chiefly in the use of a shorter for a longer form :
a.) In the use of the Future middle for the Future passive (oftener
in pures than in mutes, rarely in the contract Fut., 305) : Ot 8e dyadol
Ti^<rovTai, the good will be Jwnored, Th. 2. 87 {rt-p.-qB-qcovrai 6. 80). 3>i-
X^o-eai, you will be kindly received, a. 123. Elp|6fx.€0a, we shall be ex-
cluded, vi. 6. 16. 'Ov€i8i€to-0€, you will be taunted, Soph. O. T. 1500.
b.) In the use of the Aorist passive for the Aorist middle. This
occurs chiefly in deponents (266 c), and in other verbs in which the proper
comp. gr. 13 s
290 SYNTAX. R. M. — VOICES. J 5 76.
passive is wanting or rare : as (m. marking verbs which have also an Aor.
mid., less common or differing in sense), (a) Deponents Passive, fryafiat m.
(rjydadT) re avrbv, he admired him, i. 1. 9, rbv 5' 6 yipcov r}yd<r<raTo, him
the old man admired, T. 181), PovXopxu will, Svvafixu M. be able, citio-tg-
fiat understand, oiofiai M. think ; (p) Other Verbs, §i<a (8eT}dr,vai . . Ktf-
pov, to have requested C, i. 2. 14), ficUvco M. madden, <rrpty<a m. turn.
c. A few verbs belonging under b, extend the middle force to a Fut.
pass.: SiaXc-yofxai (diaX^o/xai Isoc. 233 c, biaKexBr)(Top.ai Id. 195 c, I will
discourse), &x6ojmh m., -fj|8o> m. (Oik axQtvQMy p.ot; . . 'Iladrja-ofxau
'** Will you not be displeased with me?" "I shall be pleased." Cyr.).
d. The use of the Aor. mid. as passive (except through simple transi-
tion of meaning, 575 c) is rare. It scarcely occurs, except in the 2 Aor.
(originally the Impf. mid. and pass., 273 d) : Aovpl rv-wete t) pX%evo$ iy,
struck by a spear or sloot by an arrow, A. 191. Karto-xero epun Eur.
A. Active.
577. In many verbs, the active voice is both transitive,
and intransitive or reflexive, in its use ; or both causative and
immediate, (a) In some, the double use belongs to the same
tenses ; but (b) in others, to different tenses,, the intransitive
sense falling especially to the complete tenses and 2 Aor.
(c) In some verbs, the intransitive or reflexive use may' be
explained through the ellipsis of a noun or pronoun (476. 2);
(a) 2rp€\|/avT€S rb &.y-r)fxa, turning tJie corps, Lac. 11. 9. Srp^iJ/avTts
tcpevyov, turning they fled, iv. 3. 32 (cf. (TTpcupevTes t<pevyov iii. 5. 1).
(b) Tods \6xovs Ka0£o-raT«, station your companies, Cyr. 6. 3. 26. IIpo-
<pti\a.Kas KaTaar^oravrcs, having stationed sentinels, iii. 2. 1. KaTccm)
eis ttjv (3a<ri\eLai>, E/s rrjv (iaaiXeiav KaOco-rqKcv, was (is) established on the
throne, i. 1. 3, Cyr. 5. 2. 27. 'AiroXwXeKcv, has destroyed, iii. 1. 38.
'AiroXcoXev, has perished, Symp. 1. 15. See also, for in trans. 2 Aor. and
1 Pf., fialvu}, 56u>, ap4wvfii, ovcAXw, <p(xa, 50 ; and for intrans. 2 Pf., chiefly
preteritive, tiyvvpu, iyeipu, fxaivu, 8pvvjxi, irddo), irpdaau), ar/iru, ttjku}, 50.
(c) Tat/7-77 fitv ovk ^Y€v, he did not [lead his army] advance in this direc-
tion, i. 10. 6 (cf. Ayoifu rb o-rpdrevfia vii. 2. 25). Hdovfj Sous [sc. iavrbv],
giving [himself] up to pleasure, Eur. OCtw 8Z i\ti, thus [it has itself] the
matter stands, v. 6. 12. 'ES^Xoxrc, showed itself, ii. 2. 18.
d. "Ex** use, i reflexively with an adverb is commonly equivalent to dpi
with an adjective : ' Aflifytws exovres = "Adiifioi 6vres, being disheartened. The
poets even join ex<o with an adj.: "Ex' ijvvxos, [hold still] be quiet, Eur.
B. Middle.
578. The middle voice, like the active, may be either tran-
sitive or intransitive. Its reflexive sense is far from being uni-
form either in kind or force. It not only varies in different
verbs, but often in the same verb when used in different con-
nections ; and is extensively not expressed in translation, but
left to be understood. It is,
a.) Direct ; so that the middle is equivalent to the active with the
Ace. of a reflexive pronoun : Aovtcu [= Xotfei iavrbv], lavatur, lie is wash-
§ 583. ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. 291
ing himself, or bathing, Cyr. 1. 3. 11. Hdvres fih -t\KiC^>ovro, (hey all
anointed themselves, Hel. 4. 5. 4. Avop-qv, {nrc'Xvcra 5 eraipovs, t. 463.
579. b.) Indirect ; so that the middle is equivalent to the active
with the Dat. or Gen. of a reflexive pronoun : ^rparrryovs ph i\eo-0cw
[= e\eiv eavroh] SiWovs, ra 5' eiriTT}deia dyopaXfo-Qai, to [take for them-
selves] choose other generals, and buy (for themselves) provisions, i. 3. 14.
Ilcuda . . ae iroiovpcu, / make you my son, Cyr. 4. 6. 2. "On irepl ir\ei-
arov iroiotTO, that he [made it to himself] esteemed it of the utmost con-
sequence (582 "y), i. 9. 7. Tpirrjv ka-x]ydyiro yvvalica . . tt)p 8evTepr)i> diro-
Trcpxpdpcvos, he took to Jmnself a third wife, having [sent from himself]
divorced tJie second, Hdt. 6. 63. Kupov 8£ pcTairc'pircTai, he sends for
Cyrus (to come to himself), i. 1. 2. Tovrov <J>v\dTTccr0cu, to watch him
for your own safety, to be on your guard against him, i. 6. 9. 'AirodL-
8o/xai [give up for one's own profit], sell ; rCOcpai or -ypd<popai vofwv make
a law for one's self; PovX.evop.cu give counsel to ones self, deliberate; tijjlcd-
pc'opcu take vengeance for one's self, punish. See -xfidu 50.
580. c.) Reciprocal ; so that the middle is equivalent to the
.active with a reciprocal pronoun: Maxopcvoi koX fiaaiXevs nal Kvpos,
1 fighting with each other,' i. 8. 27. 'Afi<pi &v elxov Sicupcpopcvoi, ' quar-
relling,' iv. 5. 17. AtqXActf-avTO [rovs frnrous], exchanged, Cyr. 8. 3. 32.
— Hence the middle is extensively used in expressing actions which imply
mutual relation ; as those of agreement and contention, of greeting and
companionship, of intercourse and traffic, of question and answer, &c.
581. d.) Causative ; so that the middle denotes what a person
procures to be done for himself : 'E7W yap <xe ravra . . €8i8a|dp/r|v, i" had
you taught these things, Cyr. 1. 6. 2. Qdjpdna ciroi^jcraTO, she had a corse-
let made, lb. 6. 1. 51. Mtcrdoio let for hire, picr6oopcu [have let to one's
self] hire : ttXoTov fucrduxxd^evos vi. 4. 13. Airobuaovcriv ol 8avct.crdp.cvoi
rots SaveCcrdcn, the borrowers shall pay the lenders, Dem. 926. 13. — The
active is often so used, as in other languages, without the reflex reference.
582. e.) Subjective ; so that the middle represents the action as
more nearly concerning the subject, than the active (cf. 579). Thus,
(a) it may mark the close connection of the agent with that which is
acted on ; (P) if the active is a causative verb, the middle may form the
corresponding immediate ; (y) if the active expresses an external or phys-
ical action, the middle may express the analogous internal or mental action ;
(8) if the active represents a person as Ivaving a particular office, condi-
tion, or character, the middle may represent him as making it more his
own by acting in accordance with it.
(a) 'Exw have (in general), ^xopcu have hold of, cling to : e£6[ieda avrov,
we shall keep hold of him, vii. 6. 41. Aapfidpu) take, \apf3dvopcu take
hold of See 426. (P) Veta make anotJier taste, -ycvopai taste for one's
self (i?>2&). Tiatiu) cause to cease, iravcpcu cease: eiravae fnh ro&rwv toX-
\o6s Mem. 1. 2. 2 ; ravra ei7ruw eiravaaro i. 3. 12. ^o^cj frighten, 4>of3c-
opcu/ear; <paivu) slww, <pcuvopcu appear, (y) ^Koiriw view, o-KOircopai
consider (see v. 2. 20) ; dydXXw adorn, d-ydXAopax pride one's self; <f>pdfa
tell, <ppd£opcu tell one's self, reflect. (8) HoXiretw, Tapuevoj, be a citizen
(steward), iroXiTcuopcu, rapievopcu, act the citizen (steward), manage state
(or other) affairs: rafueveadai, to parcel out (as a steward)," ii. 5. 18.
583. Remarks. 1. If the reflex action is direct, it is oftener ex-
pressed by a reflexive pronoun with the active, or sometimes middle ; and
292 SYNTAX. — PASSIVE VOICE. § 583.
in other cases, the pronoun is often added to make the expression more
plain or emphatic : 'Ekccpos dirto-tpa&v eavrbv, lie slew himself , Dem. 127» 3.
Eavrbv i7ri<T<pd^aa0ai, that he slew himself, i. 8. 29. 'Ewi<T<paX€<TTtpav ai-
tt]v . . KaT€aKe6aKei> eavrtp, lie has rendered it less secure for himself, Dem.
584. 2. As the Future so extensively denotes purpose (what a per-
son will please himself by doing), it is the most subjective of the tenses ;
and henbe, in so many verbs (266 c), the middle here takes the place of
the active, (a) In some of these, the Fut. act. is not used at all ; and
(b) in others, only as a second, usually later or less common, form.
(c) In some, the action of the body is thus connected with the state of
the mind. E. g. (a) yiyi>u)o~Ku> and oI5a know, ivavdavu) learn, el/j.1 be, ird-
<r%w suffer, Qvi}GKia die, Xayxdvoi and rvyxdvw obtain ; (b) j3l6oj live, irviio
breathe, d/xaprdvu} err, deidufear, rXdw endure, 6a.vp.dfa wonder, p£w flow,
tIktuj bear ; (c) dxoijw hear, bpdu see, #oa> sing,- (3odu) shout, yeXdia laugh,
yodw wail, K\al<a weep, &jivvfu swear, £<t61u> and rpwyw eat. See 50.
585. 3. In many cases, the reflex reference is so obvious, or so in-
distinct, that it may be either expressed or omitted without affecting the
sense ; that is, the active or the middle may be employed at pleasure ;
IIoXv 4>€povT€s, Mucpbv <p€pop.cv<i>v, bringing much (little), Mem. 3. 14. 1.
*E<r<rya,Y6 yvvcuKa, ''E<rr\ydyeTo ywaiKa, take (took) a wife, Hdt. 5. 40,
6. 63. — In some verbs, the use of the mid. form is poetic, especially Epic.
C. Passive.
586. The passive voice has for its subject a complement
of the active, commonly (a) a direct, but sometimes (b) an in-
direct complement. (c) Any other word governed by the
active, and not in apposition with this, may remain unchanged
with the passive, (d) The subject of the active is expressed,
with the passive, by the Gen. with a preposition (commonly wo,
but sometimes ano, e£, rrapd, or irpos), or (e), less frequently, by
the simple Gen. or Dot., or (f) yet more rarely (chiefly in poetry,
especially Ep.), by the Dot. with lm6. Thus,
(a) Act. governing Ace. Hepieppeiro 5' avrrj virb rod MdaKa, it was
surrounded by the Mascas [= irepiippei d' a\rri\v 6 Mdo-icas, tlic M. sur-
rounded, it], i. 5. 4. (b) Act. governing Gen. Ka.Te<ppoi>r)dr)i> i-if avrolu,
I was despised by them [= KaTe^pov^ffdr-qv p.ov, they despised mc,~\ PI.
Act. governing Dat. Ovk£ti de direi.Xovp.ai, dXX' tfdw direiXQ fiAAois, lam
no longer threatened, bid I now threaten others (452 a), Symp. 4. 31.
(c) 'I-mre'ttv 6 \6<pos iveirXrio-dv, the height was filled with horsemen (414),
i. 10. 12. El 8a\dTTT]s etpyoivro (405). Aodrival ol ravras, that these
should be given to him (454 e), i. 1 . 8. Movctikt^v . . iraiSevBels, musieam
doctus, having been taught music (480 c), PI. But STparq-ybv M avrbv
dW5ei£e irdvTwv (480 a), becomes STpaTirybs bk irdvrwv direbeixOr], i- 9. 7.
(d) 'Yirb SojJaou Apxevdai, to be ruled [under] by a slave, PI. Lys. 208 c.
TvCoficu dwj>' eKdaTiov iXtyovro, opinions were expressed [from] by each, Th.
3. 36. 'Ek jSao-iX^ajs 5edop.frai, given [from] by the king, i. 1. 6. Ilapd
irdvTuv bp.oXoye?rai, 'OuoXoyelrai irpbs irdvrwv, it is conceded by all, i. 9. 1,
20. (e) See 434 b, 461. (f) 'Txb rip irarpl reOpa^vos, brought tip
[under] by his father, PI. Rep. 558 d. 'E<pbpr)dev ty'TStcropi O. 637.
§591. RULE XXX. — USE OF THE TENSES. 293
587. Remarks. 1. When the active has more than one com-
plement, it is commonly determined which shall be the subject of the
passive by one or the other of the following preferences : (a) The passive
prefers, as its subject, a direct to an indirect complement of the active.
(b) The passive prefers, as its subject, the name of a person to that of
a thing. If these preferences conflict, sometimes the one prevails, and
sometimes the other, (a) 0«pai«s avroh etropiadiqaav, they were furnislied
with breastplates (454 e). (b) 01 tu>u 'Adrjvalwv itriTeTpawtvot. tt)v <pv\a-
K-qv, tlwse of the Athenians who had been intrusted with the guard, Th. (cf.
rotcrt iTrer^TpaiTTO rj <pv\cucn, to whom the guard had been intrusted, Hdt.).
2. The latter preference often leads to the construction in § 481.
588. 3. The passive is sometimes the converse of the middle rather
than of the active ; and hence deponents may have a passive : Mia-ewOfjvai
5£ ovk eirl tovtw ^<paaav, 'that they had not been hired,' i. 3. 1 (581).
Qdbpdiaxs ed clp-yao-jj^vas, corselets well made, Mem. 3. 10. 9.
589. 4. If an active or middle which has no complement is changed
to a passive, it becomes, of course, impersonal (571 d) ; and it may be-
come so, with an indirect complement : ' YirfipKro 5' aurov, a beginning of
it had been made [= virripfrv avrov, they had begun it], Th. 1. 93. Mdrtju
ifxol K€K\av(T€Tai, / shall have wept in vain, Ar. Nub. 1436.
III. USE OF THE TENSES.
(For a general view, see 30 b, 267.)
590. Eule XXX. The definite tenses ex-
press the action as doing at the time ; the in-
definite, simply as performed in the time ; and
the complete, as complete at the time. In the In-
dicative, this time is marked as present or future
by the primary tenses, and as past by the secondary ;
in the other modes, it is not marked.
a. Hence the tense forms of the Indicative are distinguished, in gen-
eral, as chronic (xpovueds relating to time) ; and those of the other modes,
as achronic (a- not). The Ind. Pres. and Impf. (more fully named Pres-
ent Imperfect and Past Imperfect, since that which is doing is still unfin-
ished) unite, for the other modes, in a tense which is simply imperfect ;
and in like manner, the Ind. Perf. and PI up. (which might properly be
termed Present Perfect and Past Perfect) unite in a tense which is simply
perfect. Another tense is commonly a Past Aorist (Indefinite, 267 d) in
the Ind., but simply an Aorist tense in the other modes ; and there are
two Futures, a Future Aorist or Indefinite, and a Future Perfect, which,
in respect to absolute time (607), are achronic out of the Indicative.
A. Definite and Indefinite.
591. The indefinite tenses present a simple (as it were, a
momentary) view of the action as an undivided whole; the
294 SYNTAX. R. XXX. TENSES. §591.
definite tenses present a more extended view of it as in pro-
gress (begun, going on, possibly never completed).
a. The former are distinguished in general as narrative, and the latter
as descriptive tenses. If action is conceived of as motion in a straight line,
the definite tenses may be said to present a side view of this line, so that
it is seen in its full length ; but the indefinite tenses to present only an
end view of it, so that it appears as a mere point. Thus,
Definite View : 2ypa<f>e, Indefinite View : eypa\f/e,
( -) ( • )
scribebat, Tie was writing, scripsit, he wrote.
592. Hence the action is represented,
1.) By the definite tenses, as continued or prolonged ; but
by the Aorist, as momentary or transient : or by the former, as
a habit or continued course of conduct ; but by the latter, as a
single act : •
Toi>j fib otiv ireXraaras cS^avro ol pdppapot ml l^.&.\ovro • ^TreiSr? 8t £y-
yi/s 9jaap ol oTrXirai, crpdirovTO • /cttl ol pip ireXraaTal evdtis tXirovro 8iw-
kovtcs • tlie baifbariaiis received the targeteers (momentary) and fought xvith
them (continued) ; but when now the hoplites were near, they turned to
flight (momentary) ; and the targeteers immediately followed pursuing
them (continued) ; v. 4. 24. Aapt&v . ., i\otv, having taken (momentary),
having (continued), i. 1. 2. 'Eirel 5£ cISov avrbv, o'iwep irpdvdev irpc<r€Kv-
vow, kclI t6tc irpo<rcicuvT|<rav, when those saw him who previously used to
bow before him (habit), they bowed even then (single act), i. 6. 10.
a. Any dwelling of the mind upon the agent, mode, or circumstances of
an action, or any attempt at graphic description, inclines to the use of the
definite tenses : 'AireKplvavro (KXtapxos 5' 'iXeytv), tlicy answered (and Cle-
archus was the speaker), ii. 3. 21.
b. In the Imperative, the momentary character of the Aor. is peculi-
arly favorable to vivacity, energy, and earnestness of expression : Akov-
<ra.T€ odv'fiov irpbs 6eG)v, hear me, then, by the gods ! v. 7. 5.
c. The Aor. sometimes gives more vivacity or force to the sequel of an-
other tense : "Os re kclI &\Kip.op Apdpa 0o/3et ml cujxCXcro vIkt\v, who puts to
flight the valiant man, and snatches victory from his grasp, P. 177.
d. In verbs denoting state, the Aor. usually expresses entrance into the
state (becoming), and the definite tenses continuance in it (being) : Bacri-
Xcv<rai Avdpa Tv<f>\bv, . . ivl toijtov pacriXevovros, that a blind man became
king, and while he was reigning, Hdt. 2. 137. So fiovXetiu), irXovrtw, I am
senator, rich, £po6\evo-a, iirXo^rrjaa, I became senator, rich.
593. 2.) By the definite tenses, as doing at the time of, or
until another action ; but by the Aorist, simply as done in its
own time :
'EiropcvOTjo-av aradfiovs r^rrapas, fylm hk rbv ■k&pmtov erropcvovTO, ct8ov
(3ao-l\€i6v tl, tliey made four day 's-marches, and while they were making
tlie fifth, they saw a palace, iii. 4. 23.
594. 3.) By the definite tenses, as begun, attempted,
designed, or imminent (doing, not done) ; but by the Aorist, as
accomplished (done) :
§598. DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE.. 295
KXiapxos rods avfov (rTpaTiibras £p\d£?ro i£vai • oi 8e avr'ov re 2(3aXXov.
. . lAiKpbv itjtyvye rb pvi] KaTair€Tp»0t)vai, V&Tepov 8' eirei Zyvw, 8tl ov 8vvq-
cerai pido-a<r8cu. C. attempted to force his soldiers to proceed ; but they
began to stone him. He narrowly escaped being stoned to death (the com-
pletion of their act) ; and afterwards, when he saw- that he slwuld not be
able to prevail by force (to accomplish his attempt), i. 3. 1 s. "EireiOov
avrovs, Kai oOs frmcra, I tried to persuade them, and those ivJwm I succeeded
in persuading, Cyr. AQpa SCSoxri, lie (is for giving) offers gifts, I. 261.
a. Hence the definite tenses are often used with a negative to deny the
attempt as well as the accomplishment of an action : KXiapxos ovk dvej3t-
Pa£ev e7r2 rbv Xb^ov, O. did not undertake to march upon the hill, i. 10. 14.
b. A person is often spoken of as having done what he has attempted to
do : At/ccua yap t6v8' evrvxew KTcCvavrd fie ; ' having slain me/ Soph.
595. 4.) By the definite tenses, as introductory ; but by
the Aorist, as conclusive :
'Hpwrwv Kvpov, ..68' dircKpCvaro, they asked Cyrus, and he answered,
i. 3. 20. ' Ajcovcravres ravra kndQovTO Kal Sii^r\<rav i. 4. 16.
a. Verbs of asking, inquiring, commanding, forbidding, deliberating,
attempting, endeavoring, besieging, and some others, are introductory in
their very nature, and hence incline to the use of the definite tenses.
596. Future. The dim, shadowy future has little occasiou
for precise forms to mark the state of the action. It is com-
monly enough to mark the action simply as future,
a. Hence the inflection of most verbs has but a single Fut., the in-
definite ; leaving the definite and complete Futures, if they require to be
distinguished from this, to be expressed by a Participle and substantive
verb (267 e) : SicOpos c^apKovord fioi lorai to \oitt6v, Scyros shall hereafter
content me (continued, 592), Soph. "Av8pa KaTaxavovres &r«r0€, vii. 6. 36.
597. In Greek, as in other languages, the Fut. furnishes indirect
and variously expressive forms for the Imperative : (a) Affirmation, "fis
otV iroi^o-tT€, Kal irelOevde' fiot, thus [you will do] do, and listen to me, PI.
Prot. (b) Negation, Ov icX&j/eis, thou shall not steal, Rom. 13. 9. MijSev
rwvd' Ipets, not a word of this ! JLsch. Th. 250. (c) Question, "Af;€i rts . .
rbv poTTjpa; [will] let some one bring the herdman, Soph. 0. T. 1069.
(d) Negative Question, Ovk &£*Q' o>s t&xktto.; Kal . . &<pere pAvr/v, [will you
not] carry her away instantly, and leave her alone, Soph. Ant. 885.
(e) Doubly Negative Question, Oi) fir] XaXrjo-eis, dXX' aKoXovdrjaeis ifioL ;
[Won't you not talk] Don't talk, but follow me, Ar. Nub. 505.
598. a. A future action may be represented more expressly as close
at hand, or as connected with destiny, necessity, will, purpose, expectation,
&c, by the verbs p.eXXa>, lOlXw or OcXco, |3ovXop.<u, 8«i, \p^> &c., with the
Inf. This Inf. may be Pres., Aor. or Fut., according to the view taken
of the action in respect to definiteness and nearness : M^XXw yd.p vp,as Si-
8ai;eiv, I am about to teach you, PL 'O araOfibs e"vQa 'iueXXe KaraXtieiv,
tJie station where he was to halt, i. 8. 1. Ovk idtXa eXdeiv, I am not will-
ing to go, or I will not go, i. 3. 10. BovXeOeadai, 6 tl XPV iroieiu lb. 11.
b. The ideas of destiny, necessity, purpose, &c. are often expressed by
the simple Fut. Especially is the Fut. Fart., both with and without cos,
used continually to express purpose, particularly with verbs of motion :
T£ diafapovat . ., et ye ir&.vf\<rov<ri Kai 8i\J/^<rov<ri / what advantage have
they, if they must hunger and thirst ? Mem. Ol<rQ' odv 8 Spdcreis ; do you
296 SYNTAX. B. XXX. TENSES. COMPLETE. § 598.
know wTtat you must do ? Eur. ZvWapfi&vei Kvpov us diroKTEVwv, he ap-
prehends O. [as about to put him to death] with the design of putting him
to death, i. 1. 3. "Ewe/xxf/i nva epovvra, he sent one to say, ii. 5. 2.
c. Instead of the Fut. Part., the Pres. is sometimes employed to denote
purpose, according to 594, especially with verbs of motion : Taur ttcSiKa-
X/av 9p\dov, I went to avenge this wrong, Eur. Sup. 154.
B. Complete.
599. a. While the indefinite tenses represent the action
simply as performed in the time contemplated, the complete
tenses represent it as already finisJted (as having been already
performed) at the time contemplated. In the former, the view
is directed to the action simply ; in the latter, it is specially
directed to the completion of the action, and to the state conse-
quent upon its performance. Hence arise two special uses of
the complete tenses : (b) the one to mark emphatically the
entire (often immediate) completion or termination of an action ;
(c) the other, to express the continuance of the effects of an action.
(a) TotaOra p.h> ireirotTjia, such things has he done, i. 6. 9. (b) "H <[>e&-
yeiv . . fj raxv Karate ecavcrOai, eitfier to flee, or to be quickly and utterly
consumed, Cyr. (c) EItov ryv 6vpcw iceicXcio-Oai, they commanded the door
[to be closed and to remain so] to be kept closed, HeL "Op^pov Zywye /id-
AwTa rcOavuaica, Homer I have most admired (as I still do), Mem. 1. 4. 3.
d. The Perf. Imv. commands the completeness of the action ; and hence
may forbid its continuance, or may command emphatically its full (often
instant and final) performance : Taura . . ir€iraia-8a>, let [so much have been
played] Hie sport end here, PI. IleirapdaBw, let a full trial be made, Ar.
600. a. As the object of the complete tenses is to ascribe the conse-
quences of the action, rather than narrate it, the transition in § 268 is
natural and easy ; and we find verbs in different stages of the transition.
Compare the Pres., Aor., and Preteritive, in examples like the following:
Gv^jo-Kw, I am dying, Eur. Ale. 284 ; T«8va<nv oi 0avdvT€s, those who
have died (the past event) are dead (the state consequent upon the event),
lb. 541. (b) The preteritive use has a far wider extent than is commonly
recognized. In some verbs, however, it is dialectic or doubtful : /Sc/S^et,
she ascended, or had ascended, A. 221 ; {lep\r)Kei, he hit, or had hit, E. Q6.
601. Future Perfect, a. The Fut. Perf. expresses the
sense of the Perf. with a change of the time ; that is, it rep-
resents the state consequent upon the completion of an action
as future, (b) As it carries the mind at once over the act
itself to its completion and results, it is sometimes used to ex-
press a future action as immediate, rapid, or decisive, (c) In
some verbs these uses pass, more or less decidedly, into a pre-
teritive use (268).
(a) Ov fx-fjv rot yieAeos eip^jo-enu alvos, your praise (already spoken) shall
not have been spoken in vain, "ir. 795. Ovdeh . . fiereyy patprjaerai, dXX',
tienrep fy t6 vpGrrov, eyve-ypdil/eTai, no one shall be enrolled (the simple act)
§604. INTERCHANGE. GENERIC USE. 297
elsewhere, but shall remain enrolled (the state consequent upon the act of
enrolment) as he was at first, Id. Eq. 1370. (b) No^frre . . i/nt re Kara-
KCKo\j/£or0ai, Kal v/j.as ov iroXd ifjutv ticrrepov, be assured that I shall be im-
mediately cut down, and you not long after, i. 5. 16. (c) IIaj> clp^jcerai,
the whole [shall have been] shall be stated, Hdt. 4. 16 (cf. a above). Ileirpdr
<T€tcu, he slmll be sold, vii. 1. 36 (the classic Fut. pass, of irurpdcrKw, 50).
C. Interchange.
602. Rule N. The uses of the tenses are often inter-
changed.
a. This may be referred (i.) to generic use, especially where the forma-
tion is defective ; (n.) to gnomic use ; (in.) to varied use in respect to
relative and absolute time ; (iv.) to a conception of the mind varying from
the reality of things, or to the choice of a less direct form of expression.
b. From the order in which the Greek tenses were historically devel-
oped (271 s), the Pres., in its widest generic sense, includes all the tenses ;
the Impf., all the past tenses ; the Fut., all the future tenses ; the Aor.,
all the indefinite and complete tenses, except those that are future ; -and
the Perf, all the complete tenses.
c. The distinction of generic and specific belongs not merely to the
tense-forms, but also to the ideas which these forms represent. Thus the
idea of present time, which applies specifically only to the passing
moment, extends in its generic application to any period including this
moment ; and we speak of the present month, the present century, &c. In
its widest extent, therefore, it includes all time, (d) Hence general truths
or statements, existing states or habits, and oft-recurring facts, belong ap-
propriately to present time : TCktci tol icdpos vfipw, satiety begets insolence,
Theog. 153. A tense so employed to convey a general truth or state-
ment is termed gnomic (yviapaubs sententious).
603. i. Generic Use. 1. Existing tenses are used
generically to supply the places of those that are wanting.
a. The place of a Present Indefinite is commonly supplied by the Pres.
Definite, as the generic present tense ; but (b) sometimes, with stronger
expression, by the Aor., as the generic indefinite tense. The latter, as the
tense for the momentary, belongs especially to the vehement utterance of
lively feeling or quick thought (chiefly in 1 sing.). Thus, (a) Tdv dvdpa
6p», / see the man, i. 8. 26. (b) "HorGrjv d7ret\cus, kyikacra \f/o\oKOfnrious !
I smile at your threats, I laugh at your fury ! Ar. Eq. See 608 a.
c. In some verbs, (a) the Pres. supplies the place of a Fut. ; or (P) the
Impf, of an Aor.: (a) see 305 f, 326 c, 609 c ; and elfu, vio/xai, x^w, fiibu,
5i5d<TK(jj, Keipcu, in 50. (P) ^Hv teas, yew went, 2<prjv said (i^T/tra differing
in sense, 50), &c. : Hipcrys /xkv &}«] elvai, he said that he was a Persian, iv.
4. 17 (6 5t ctircv lb. 18). 'Air^ci and dirTjXGov, deserted, i. 9. 29.
604. 2. The definite tenses may express continuance (a) through
a period coming down to their proper time (where we use the Perf. or
Plup.) ; or (b) through a period extending on from this time (where the
Fut. might be used) : (a) 20^ £vvoik<3 ttoW £tt), /[am] have been living
with you many years, Ar. PI. 437. TaOr &p ajniXdrrov irdXai, this then
you had been guarding against so long, Ar. Eq. 125. (b) Mlvopcv £ws to
. . \r)<pdCop.€v * [do we wait] shall we wait until we have been taken ? Th.
COMP. GR. 13*
298 SYNTAX. R. N. INTERCHANGE OP TENSES. § G05.
605. 3. Unless the attention is specially directed to the
effect of an action, the generic Aor. more frequently supplies the
place of the specific Per/, and Plup. (602 b), as a more familiar,
more vivacious, and often a shorter or more euphonic form :
Hivvi 5£ QeTTokols . . i^or\Qr]<re, and now it has aided the Thessalians,
Dem. 22. 7. TaOrrjv tt\v ttoKlv cije'Xnrov ol ivoiKovvres, this city its inlvxb-
itants had left, i. 2. 24. Nvp 8' fj\0ov, I have now come, a. 194.
a. This use prevails most in the active, as the voice which gives most
prominence to the action itself (599 s) ; and is there especially frequent in
the participle : 2v\Xe'£as (rrpdrevpLa, iiroXtdpKei M.I\vtop, having collected
an army, he besieged M., i* 1. 7. Tovtov 8ia(3ds ££e\a6vei i. 2. 6.
b. The Aor. is so used in immediate connection with the Perf. or
Plup., especially as a sequel (cf. 592 c): 'AiroScSpaKOTCs 7rar<?pas kcu p.vri-
pas, ol 8£ Kal t&kvo. KaTaXiirovrss, having run away from fatJiers and moth-
ers, and others having even left children, vi. 4. 8.
c. The use of the Aor. rather than the Plup., especially prevails after
temporal and causal connectives, and in other dependent clauses : 'Evel
5£ <rvvfj\0ov, £\e£e, when tliey had assembled, he spake, Cyr. 6. 2. 13.
606. ii. Gnomic Use. Past and future tenses may be
used gnomically, as well as the Present (602 c).
a. If we can say " The wisest err " (the most general expression of the
truth), we can also say "The wisest have erred" (the lesson of experience),
or "The wisest will err "(a, forethought for the future). Thus, '0 iirteucljs
avrjp . . rb redvdvat ov 8eiv6v TJ-y^jo-ercu, the good man will not account death
an evil, PI. Rep. 387 d. KaT8av' dfi&s 8 r depybs dvqp 8 re 7ro\\d top-
7ws, the indolent and energetic [have died] die alike, I. 320.
b. Gnomic Aorist. Especial force, vividness, or actuality of expres-
sion is often given to a general statement by the use of the Aor. (cf. 592,
603 b, 605) : 'Avrjp 5' 8rav rots &8ov bv)(Bf\ra.i ^vvuv, Hi-w p.o\uv £irav<r€ icap-
Slav &o-rjs,when a man becomes weary of the society of those at lwme, going
abroad he [has relieved] relieves his heart at mice of its disgust, Eur. Med.
c. The general statements in similes are often expressed by the Aor.,
especially in Homer : "Hpure 8', ws 6're rts 8pvs ijpiircv, he fell, as when an
oak falls, II. 482. See T. 33; and for Aor. with Pres. or Perf., V. 23.
A. 62, H. 4. (d) A like use of the Fut. is doubtful or rare : 'fts 5' 8re
Kivfjo-ei Zi<pvpos, as when the west-wind shall stir, B. 147 v. I. (for kip-^tv).
607. ' in. Absolute and Relative Time. The time of an
action is absolute, as simply viewed from the time of speaking
or writing ; but relative, as not so viewed, but from the time
of another action.
a. The tense conforms to relative time far oftener in Greek than in
English : in "EXeyep 8rt t8 arpdrevfia diro8£8«<ri, he said that he [resigns]
resigned the army, vii. 6. 3, airoSLSuxri conforms to the relative time, as
the time of saying and resigning was the same, but resigned conforms to
the absolute time, as the action was past when the author was writing.
608. iv. Synesis, &c. The relations of time have nothing
sensible to fix the conceptions of the mind. It ranges there-
fore with freedom through all time, past, present, and future ;
and, at pleasure, transfers in thought the events of one period
to another.
§613. RULE XXXI. — USE OF THE MODES. 299
a. Even if the events are viewed in their proper time, a less direct
mode of stating them sometimes spares the feelings, or is deemed more
refined, courteous, or politic.
609. 1. Vision. That which is past or future is often
seen in the imagination as present, and is so expressed. This
figure of speech is called vision ; and the present tense so used
is termed (a) the historic or (b) the prophetic present,
according as it expresses the past or the future :
(a) T<£ Tp6w({) SidXXvrai ; how does (did) he perish ? Soph, (b) Mi£
H&XV T-^vSe re irpoo-Krao-0€, in one battle you (will) win this land, Th. 4. 95.
c. That which is to be may be viewed as already on the way : "Epx^Tcw
&pa, tJie hour is coming, Jn. 4. 21. Etpa ^Oirjvbe, I [am going] shall go to
Fhthia, A.' 169. — This became the regular use of the Ind.el/u. See 603 c.
610. 2. a. A present or even future action, in view of the
nearness or certainty of its completion, may be spoken of as
already accomplished ; and (b) that which is present or even
past is sometimes expressed by the Future, as though not yet
finished, or for the sake of less direct expression (608 a) :
(a) *Av tovto vLKutfiev, -rrdvd' rj/xiv ireiroC-qrai, if we conquer this, we have
accomplished all, i. 8. 12. (b) Tovfibv . . aire" pp.' Ibetv fiov\i\o-o\Lai, /[shall]
choose to learn my origin, Soph. AlTrja-ofmi, I [will] beseech, Eur. Ale.
611. 3. A past tense may be used, in speaking of that which is pres-
ent as related to some past opinion, feeling, remark, action, event, or obliga-
tion : Ku7iy)is ovk &p ?\v debs, Venus [was] is not then a goddess (as we sup-
posed), Eur. "E<j>w dyu.T7x a " 0S > I [ was born] am, by nature incapable,
Soph. (§ 50 <p6u>). "ftc{>e\e fikv KQpos ffiv, [C. ought to be living] Would
that Cyrus were living ! ii. 1. 5. Ovk iyjpr\v p.4vroL GKoirelv ; Apol. 3.
612. 4. The tense belonging to the effect of an action is sometimes
used for the tense of the action itself (Pres. and Impf. for Perf. and Plup.,
or Aor.). ISo commonly in ijKco and otxopMi (I am come, I am gone) ;
often, as in Eng., in verbs of hearing, learning, and saying ; and some-
. times in others : Ei's KaXbv {jkctc, you [are here, having come] have come
opportunely, iv. 7. 3. KOpos 5c otf-nru ^kcv, C. had not yet come, i. 5. 12.
'£2s r//ie?$ cucovepev (audimus), as we have heard [are informed], v. 5. 8.
IV. USE OF THE MODES.
(For a general view, see 30 c, 269.)
A. Intellective.
613. Eule XXXI. The Indicative expresses
fact ; the Subjunctive, present contingency; and
the Optative, past contingency.
a. The Ind. presents the action as decided in point of fact (it is
or is not, has been or has not been, xoill be or will not be, &c), whether this
decision is declared or asked about, is known or unknown, is according to
300 SYNTAX. R. XXXI. MODES. CONTINGENCY. § G13.
the terms of the statement or contrary to them ; but the Subj. and Opt.
present the action as undecided, and have respect to its contingency
or chance (i. e. whether the action may be or may not be, might be or
might not be, might have been or might not have been, &c).
b. The Subj. and Opt. are achronic with respect to the action itself
(590 a), but have a distinction of time with respect to its contingency.
The Subj. expresses present contingency, i. e. some chance at the present
time that the action will occur ; but the Opt., past contingency, i. e. some
chance at some past time that the action would subsequently occur.
614. a. If there will be some chance that an event will occur, there
is of course now some chance that it will occur ; and if there is now some
chance, then, whether recognized or not, there always has been. Future
contingency, therefore, is contained in present ; and. all contingency, in
past.
b. Hence, the past is the generic time for the contingent, as the pres-
ent for the actual (602 c) ; and whatever is contingent is referred to past
contingency, unless it is supposed with some degree of present expectation
or looking forward to a decision, in which case it is referred to present
contingency.
A. Present Contingency : I will go, if I can have leave (and I in-
tend to ask for it). I think, that I may go, if I can have leave. I wish,
that you may go. He reads, that he may learn.
B. Past Contingency. (1) Past supposition : / thought, that I might
go, if I could have leave. I wished, that you migM go. He read, that lie
might learn. (2) Present supposition not implying expectation or the
looking forward to a decision : I would go, if I should have leave (but I
have no thought of asking for it). I could go with perfect ease. I should
like to go. (3) Present supposition contrary to fact : (a. In regard to the
present.) I would go, if I Jutd leave (but I have none, and therefore do
not go), (p. In regard to the past.) / would Imve gone, if I had Jucd leave
(but I had none, and therefore did not go).
c. The range of past contingency is vast ; for there is nothing which it
is proper for us to suppose at all, of which we may not conceive that there
was some chance at some distant period in past eternity. .
615. That which is supposed contrary to fact is regularly
expressed in Greek by the Ind., as already decided (613 a) ;
while the very act of supposition presents it as having been
at some time contingent (614 c). It is therefore thrown back
into the past as the time of its contingency ; and to a time
prior to that of the opposing fact, as then only could there
have been a chance in its favor. It is therefore expressed by
what is termed a prior tense, i. e. a tense of the Ind. referring
to this prior time.
a. Supposition contrary to present fact (what now is) is regularly ex-
pressed by the Impf, i. e. the Pres. thrown back into the past ; and
(b) supposition contrary to past fact (what has been), by the Plup. (the
Perf. thrown back into the past), or (c) oftener by its equivalent Aor. :
Ei fxr) v/xeTs ^XOere, eiropevofxtOa &v, if you had not come, we should now be
marching, ii. 1. 4. Et d-rrcKpiva), ftrws Slv . . 4f«|xa0T|Kn, if yon had an-
swered, I should perhaps have learned, PI. (d) So, " If I had time to-day,
I would go "; " If I liad had time yesterday, I should have gone."
§619. RULE O. — LAW OF SEQUENCE. 301
e. Homer sometimes uses here the Opt. : Keu' p6 kcv h0' oitoXoito . ., el
/xrj dp 6£i> vbujae, lie would have pcrislted, had she not quick perceived, E. 311.
f. If there will be no mistake respecting the time, the Impf. may take
the place of the Aor. or Plup., to mark the act as continued or repeated
(592) : Oi)/c hv irpoe\€Y€V, el ur] eirkrreuev aXrjdefaeu', he would not have
predicted (thus often), had he not believed that his words would prove true.
616. That which is indefinite is so far undecided ; and
hence often employs the forms of contingent expression :
a.) The Subj. and Opt. are used in conditional, relative, and temporal
clauses referring to the indefinite. See 634, 641.
b.) The secondary tenses of the Ind. are used with &v to denote in-
definitely any one of a past series of acts, (c) This construction seems
especially appropriate to the Aor. as the general expression for a single
past act (592) : IIoMdfas . . ^KOii<rap.€V &v tl /ca/ews u/xas povXevaafievovs,
we would often hear of your planning amiss [used to hear], Ar. (d) The
Impf. is so used (even in its iterative form, 332) ; though oftener and more
appropriately without &v, as referring to the whole series (592, 632) : Atc-
pwTtov &v avToos tL \tyoiev, I would ask them what they meant, PI. Apol. 22 b.
617. Rule (Law of Sequence). The Subjunctive regu-
larly follows a tense referring to present or future time ; and
the Optative, a tense referring to past time.
a. In general, therefore, the primary tenses (269 c) and the Imv. are
followed by the Subj.; the secondary tenses, by the Opt.; and the Inf.
and Part., by either, according to the finite tenses whose places they
occupy, or usually, according to those upon which they depend.
b. In the Att., the Subj. is scarce used, except in dependent clauses
or those which can be so explained. In the Epic, it is sometimes in-
dependent, chiefly (with or without &v, 619 f) as a softer, or with a nega-
tive stronger, form for the Fut. : Kai irori ns eKirrjoa (epe'ei), some one may
hereafter say (will say), H. 87, 91. Ovk &v toi xpa>£<rp.Ti<rt j8t6s nought
can [will] your bow avail, A. 387.
c. The Greek Subj. is commonly translated by our Potential or Ind.,
rather than by our Subj., which, indeed, is now used far less than form-
erly, (d) In conditional and relative clauses, the Aor. subj. has often a
force like that of the Lat. and Eng. Fut. Perf.: 'EweLddv irdvra okovotjtc,
Kpivare, when you shall have Iieard (audiveritis), all, judge, Dem. 44. 2.
e. The Opt. is scarce used, except in dependent clauses and those
which can be so explained, or as a conclusion dependent on some premise.
618. Use of *av (Ep. *e, 163 a, Dor. ko). This particle,
which has no corresponding word in English, is a mark of con-
tingence, and has two chief uses :
1.) *Av is joined with (a) the secondary tenses of the Indica-
tive, (b) the Optative, (c) the Infinitive, and (d) the Participle,
to mark them as depending on some condition expressed or
implied.
(a, b) See 631 b, d. (c, d) The Inf. and Part, take &v, when it would
belong to the finite modes of which they supply the place. See 621.
619. 2.) ¥ Av is combined with various connectives before
the subjunctive, thus forming compound connectives, of which
the parts are sometimes distinct and sometimes united in form :
'302 SYNTAX. MODES. USE OF *AN. § 619.
a.) "With el if (not as whether), uniting to form lav, by contraction ^v
(so always in Horn., except as k£ is used for &v), and sometimes "av (dis-
tinguished by position, from simple &v, 621). See 631 c.
b.) With Relative Pronouns and Adverbs, and other Temporal Con-
nectives : 5s &v, 8<xtls &v • eus &v, (ore &v) tirav, (6tt6t€ &v) birorav, (eirel &v)
itr-qv or iirdv, (£?re4577 &v) iiretddv, efrr &v • irplv &v, fitxpi dv • &c. See 641.
c.) Sometimes with the final conjunctions Situs, «s, 6<}>pa (thus ex-
pressing more distinctly the idea of contingency). See 624 a, e.
d.) That &v was thus combined before the Subj. (which grammatically
it modifies), and not before the Opt., appears to have been due to the
later and less strongly marked separation of the Subj. from the Ind.
forms, (e) Dialectic, late, or rare exceptions, however, occur both ways
(especially in the early poets) : El fitya veiKos dprrrat, if a mighty contest
arise, w. 98. E? gov areprfdw, if I lose you, Soph, "fls K€ . . dotn 5' <5 k'
edeXoi, that he might give her to whom he pleased, /3. 53.
f. In the Epic, &v is sometimes joined more directly with the Subj.
620. a. In the Epic, &v is often used with the Fut. ind. as with
the Subj. (chiefly in the form k4) : Ef k«v . . «8tX^orci, if he shall wish, 0.
213. (b) Rare and disputed cases also occur in the Attic, in which &v
is used with the Fut.: lloiq. 8vvdfiet <rv/j.fx,&x<i) xP y l Cf < t -l** V0L l^oXKov &v KoXd-
<r«r8€, by using what auxiliary force you can better chastise them, ii. 5. 13.
c. Critics deny that &v ever properly belongs to the Imv., or to the
Pres. or Perf. ind. (d) Verbs with which &v is connected are commonly
translated into Eng. by the potential mode.
621. The place of Av is after the verb which it modifies ; or far
oftener, after some prominent or characteristic word which is earlier in
the sentence : as (a) a leading verb on which its own verb depends
(especially such a verb as oiojiai think, 8okw seem, ol8a know, $r\p.t say) ;
(b) a participle or other word expressing the condition ; (c) an interroga-
tive, negative, or connective ; (d) any emphatic word, (e) Hence it
often shows an emphasis upon the word to which it is attached (and from
which it is not regarded as parted by such particles as jw'v, 8*', ri, -yap,
&c, cf. 520 b). (f) Between av and its verb, even another verb some-
times intervenes. Thus,
(a) OtVai av vfids fi4ya 6vfj<rai, / think that you would greatly benefit,
iii. 1. 38. (b) htyovros av twos irurrevo-ai oUade ; if one had said it, do
you think they would have believed ? Bern. 71. 4. (c) II us av oZv eyu ?)
Piao-cUjuiv ; how could I compel ? v. 7. 8. (d) Evfievijs dv StKaLws 1) vpo-
86tt)s vouG;oito ; would he be justly considered a friend or a traitor ? Hel.
2. 3. 43. (e, f) ZiV v/juv /Uv &v olficu ctvai rlfiios, with you, I think I
should be honored, i. 3. 6. (d, f) Xpfcifioi av i86icovv ctvai v. 6. 1.
622. a. For perspicuity, emphasis, or euphony, av is often used
more than once for a single verb ; while (b) near verbs, similarly used,
do not commonly require its repetition : (a) 2-ras av wairep ovtos . ., \i-
■yoip.' av, standing as he does, I would say, Cyr. 1. 3. 11. See i. 3. 6.
(b) KaTaicdvoi &v . ., fi t&vras . . 2\oi, nal K«X.v<m€ . ., ko.1 iroi^crcwv,
he would slay, or take alive, &c, i. 6. 2. See ii. 5. 14 ; iv. 6. 13.
623. The general principles which govern the use of the intellective
modes will now be applied to particular kinds of sentences, which may be
termed, from their offices or connectives, final, conditional, relative, tem-
poral, and complementary. '
§ 627. RULE P. FINAL SENTENCES. 303
I. Final (after Iva, onas, a>s, pr) • o(f>pa poet).
624. Rule P. After a final conjunction, (a) an object of
present forethought is expressed by the /Subjunctive, or (b) in the
Futjiire, by the Indicative; but (c) an object of past forethought,
by the Optative, or (d), to mark it as now contrary to fact, by
a prior tense of the Indicative :
(a) rpd0w (yey pa<f>a, ypd\pu), 'iva p.d0r]s (p,av9dvT|s), scribo (scripsi,
scribam), ut discas, / write (have written, shall write), that you may learn
(be learning). 'E/xol 5ds avra, owcos . . 8ia8«, Cyr. 'Q,s 5' &v p-dGfls . .,
avraKovffov, listen in turn, that you may learn (if you will), ii. 5. 16 (619 c).
(b) Instead of the Subj., the Fut. ind. is here commonly used after
words of attention, care, or effort, and sometimes after others (regularly
joined by 8ir»s, sometimes by cos, 6d>pa, or pvrfj) : Uoi/x&a Set eTrip.eXe'iadai,
oVajj aval re gtrovTai al oles, a shepherd must take care, [how his flock
shall be safe] that his flock be safe, Mem. 3. 2. 1.
(c) "Eypaxpa (eypa<pov, eyey pdcpecv), iva pdGois (p-av8dvois), scripsi (scri-
bebam, scripseram), ut disceres, I wrote (was writing, had written) , that
you might learn (be learning). $i\wv $ero 8eca8ai, us avvepyous ^X 0l > ^
thought he needed friends, that he might have coworkers, i. 9. 21.
(d) "ExpW ae TlrTYdaov fcvt-ai irrepdv, oirws e<f>aivov, you ought (rather)
to have saddled the wing of Pegasus, that you might appear, Ar. Pax 135.
e. The final conjunctions «s, 6ira>s, Vva, and 6<|>pa are in their origin
relatives ; and p-^j seems to have become a connective through the ellipsis
of one of these, the fuller form being still often retained : Ovtw irotetv,
tfirws . . (pavel-r), to act [in that way in which] so that he might appear, Cyr.
625. a. To the English reader, the use of the connectives after
verbs of fearing often seems reversed, as in Latin, French, &c. ; apprehen-
sion for being indicated rather than apprehension against : "Oirias \dd(a,
MboLKa, metuo ut lateam, [I am apprehensive for this, how I may elude]
I fear I cannot elude, Eur. Atdoix 8irws fiij re^o/mt, vereor ne inveniam,
[I am concerned for this, how I may not find] I fear that I shall find, Ar.
b. Yet words of fear are sometimes followed by a complementary con-
struction, as in Eng., especially if themselves modified by p,^ : Mr) <po^ov,
ws dirop-qaeis, do not fear that you will want, Cyr. 5. 2. 12. Cf. 630.
626. Ellipsis. A word of attention, care, or fear is some-
times to be supplied before oiras or fxf] :
"07rws odv taeade AvSpes [sc. Spare], see then that you be men, i. 7. 3.
"07rws p.r] ov% olds t Zao/jLat [sc. Se'SoiKct], I fear that I shall not be able, PI.
Mr/ . . <rovs 8ia<f>delpri ydfiovs, ah, lest she prevent thy marriage! Eur.
627. This ellipsis appears to have introduced,
1.) The use of the Subjunctive or Future Indicative after ov
firj, as a future of strong denial :
Ov yap [sc. $6/3os icrri or Se'doiKa] <re pbrj . . yvwr' ou'5' viroTrrcvcrovo-iv,
[there is no danger that they may know or will suspect you] they surely
will not know or suspect you, Soph. 00 ere ur) irpoSw, Id. Ovdds fMVKen
p.€Cvx), no one will stay longer (cf. fio7)dri<Tei), iv. 8, 13.
304 SYNTAX. R. Q., R. MODES. § 628.
628. 2.) The use of the Subjunctive as Imperative.
This occurs chiefly (a, b) in the 1 Person Cwhere the Imv. is wanting,
270 a) ; and (c) in the Aorist with \ii\ (including its compounds), accord-
ing to this special rule for the 2 and 3 Persons : (Rule Q.) In prohibi-
tions with (Ji^j, the Pres. is put in the Imv., and the Aor. in the Subj.
(d) Exceptions to this rule are doubtful in the Pres.; in the Aor.,»they
are very rare in the 2 Person, but not in the 3d. Thus,
(a) M?/ dvapiva>fi€V . ., dXXa rjueis &p£a>|«v [sc. opare, or Spare forws],
[see that we do not wait] let us not wait, but ourselves begin, iii. 1. 24. (b)
This Subj. is often preceded by &ye, cp^pe, or some other Imv., after which
a connective might be supplied : 4^p', aKoiau), come, let me hear, Hdt. 1. 11.
(c) M77 iroiVj<rr]s ravra [sc. a-Kdirei], ne feceris hoc, [see that you do not
do this] beware of doing this, vii. 1. 8. M77 0avji.d|er6, do 'not be wonder-
ing (as you now are), i. 3. 3. Mt}6' 4ir£K€i»e«, M775' 6iriK€vcrT)s, do not con-
ceal, ir. 168, 0. 263. (d) M^Sels . . vopao-dTw, let no one think, Cyr.
629. a. Another form of ellipsis is found in such expressions as
'[2s 5e avvre'fKo, but to be concise [I add this only], Eur. Tro. 441.
b. A final clause may refer elliptically to the present or even past: ^o^et-
ade uy . . vvv 8idK€i|iat, you fear [lest it prove] tJuit J am now affected, PI.
630. The use of final clauses blends with that of infinitives and
complementary clauses ; and one construction is sometimes found where
another would rather have been expected ; as, (a) 6trtas, &c. (Ep. and
late, even iva), after words of entreating, exhorting, promising, command-
ing, forbidding, wishing, and the like ; (b) Inf. or Complementary Clause
after words of fear or care ; &c. : ©&.« ha /xoi 5£s Mk. 6. 25. See 625 b.
II. Conditional (after el, ai D. E.; el pr}).
631. Rule R. In the hypothetical period, (a, b) if the
premise is presented as already decided in point of fact, it takes
the Indicative ; (c) if it is presented as undecided, but with
present expectation of decision, it takes the Subjunctive ;
(d) otherwise, it takes the Optative. In the first case, the
conclusion is commonly in the Indicative or Imperative ; in
the second, in the Future Indicative or an equivalent ; and in
the third, in the Optative with av.
(a, b) If the premise is decided, the conclusion is also decided, so far as
depends upon the premise ; and is expressed accordingly, unless there is
some reason, aside from the premise, for a different expression. There
are here two constructions.
(Form a.) If the premise is presented as agreeing with fact, or without
indication on this point, any form of premise or conclusion consistent
with such an agreement may be used : Ef -ypd^et, KaXQs iroiei {KaXQs
?£et, ypa<p4ru}), if he is writing, lie is doing well (it tcill be well, let him
write). El £-ypa\}/€, KaXQs iiroLi\<re (KaXQs £x e ')> tf he wrote, lie did well {it
is well). Et 7pdx|/ci, KaXQs iroi-fjcm, if he will write, he will do well. EZ
8ok€i (rot, ot€iX€ (ir\i<a\i.ev), if it seems best to you, go (let us sail), Soph.
(Form b.) If the premise is presented as contrary to fact, it takes a
prior tense of the Indicative ; and the conclusion, a prior tense with &v
(615, 618 a): EZ £ypcuj>^ KaXQs &v eirofei, si scriberet, bene faceret, if he
§ 634. IN THE HYPOTHETICAL PERIOD. 305
were now writing, lie would he doing well. El £ypcu|r6, KaXcS? &v eirotr\<rtv
(/caAcDs dv elxev), if he had written (yesterday), lie would have done well (it
would now be well). Ovk &v 4-itoCtjo-cv 'A7acrias ravra, el pr) iyu avrbv ckc-
Xevo-a, A. would not have done this, if I had not commanded him, vi. 6. 15.
(Form c.) Here the conclusion, as depending upon a decision yet, to be
made, is properly expressed by the Put. ind., or some other form referring
to the future (as the Imv., Opt. of wish, &c.) : 'Ecw "ypa<j>n {ypd\pn), (ca\ws
iroi^jo-ei, si scribat (scribet), bene faciet, if he write, lie will do well. XpcS
avToh, edv 8ctj tl, use them, if you have any need, Cyr. *H.v . . a4>tX«-
p.cu . ., a-rroXoip/qv, may I perish, if I take, Ax. — For idv, &c, see 619 a.
(Form d. ) If the premise is undecided and witlwut present expectation
of decision, the conclusion must also be, so far as depends upon the pre-
mise ; and both are therefore appropriately expressed by the Optative,
with &v in the conclusion (618). Et -ypdcjioi (ypdxf/ai), Ka\u>s &v iroiofoj
(ironjaai), si scribat, bene faciat, if he slwuld write, he would do well.
Ovde yap &v MiySo/coj . . eirtuvoty, el e£eXcu>voipA rods evepyiras, M. would
not approve, if I should drive out our benefactors, vii. 7. 11.
e. In forms b and d, &v is regularly used in the conclusion, but not in
the premise, unless that is itself dependent upon some condition expressed
or implied (618) : Etirep dXXcp Tip avdpibirwv im0oip.T]v &v, iced vol ireLOofAcu,
if I loould trust any other man (should he so affirm), / trust you, PI.
f. In the conclusion, the omission of &v with a past tense of the Ind.
is chiefly for the sake of more decided expression ; (g) while its omission
with the Opt. is almost wholly poetic, and chiefly Epic. See 632.
632. A past tense of the Ind. (commonly the Impf.) without &v may
take the place of another form in the conclusion, to express more decidedly
a habit or series of acts, a continued, unfinished, or threatened act or state,
some property of an act (as possibility, propriety, necessity, &c), or some
feeling respecting an act, even though the particular acts themselves may
be indefinite, contingent, or unreal (cf. 611) : OvUv ijwov, ei fir] tov-
tovs irelo-cufxi, I effected nothing, unless I slwuld persuade these, Cyr. Ov5£
yb.p, el rrdvv irpodvfioiTo, paSiov ■fjv, nor, if he should greatly desire it, was
it easy (facile erat), iii. 4. 15. 'Hio-xwopiv fiivroi, el . . e^rprarijdTjv, I
should be ashamed indeed, if I had been deceived, vii. 6. 21. See 634.
633. a. If the conclusion is itself a dependent clause, its form is
commonly determined by this dependence, and the condition usually con-
forms (617) : 'Eiropevbfirjv, ha, et tl Scoito, axpeXotTjv avrbv, I went tliat I
might aid him, if he slwuld need, i. 3. 4 (624).
b. The conclusion has sometimes a second condition, expressed or
understood, to which its verb conforms : 'Eav 5' ifie 'eXrjade, ovk dv 0av|xd-
<rai|xi, et nva ciipoiTC, if you elect me, I should not wonder if you slwuld
find, vi. 1. 29. Et diiXOoiev . ., r)v fih povXcovTcu, 8iaP^<rovTai iv. 1. 3.
c. The true conclusion is sometimes implied, rather than expressed, in
the grammatical apodosis ; or (d) is elliptically contained in it : (c) 01 5*
wiempov, el dXdxroivro, others pitied them [for what they would sutler], in
case they should be taken, i. 4. 7. (d) Evp-rjp.a eiroLrjadfirjv, et ireos dvvaifirjv,
I accounted it a godsend [thought that it would be], if I could in any way.
634. Indefinite or General Premise. If the premise
refers indefinitely or generally to acts of a certain kind or
series, (a) it sometimes takes the Indicative, from the general
decision of the kind or series as a whole ; but oftener the Opta-
tive or Subjunctive, from the want of definiteness in respect to
COMP. gr. t
306 SYNTAX. R. R. HYPOTHETICAL PERIOD. 634.
particulars (616), — (b) the Opt. if the kind or series is now
past, (c) but otherwise the Subj. (d) The conclusion has
commonly the form appropriate to the kind or series as a
whole, but (e) sometimes that appropriate to a single act.
(f) Mixed constructions occur in both premise and conclusion,
(a, d) E? rt's ti eirrjpwra, dircicptvovTO, if any one put any question, they
replied, Th. 7. 10. (b, d) Et ti fir} <plpoip.6V, wrpvvcv (ptpeiv, if we sJwuld
fail to bring anything, he bade us bring it, Eur. Ale. (c, d) *H.v 5' 6771)5
IX0fl davaros, ovdels fSovXerai dvt)<riceiv, if death come near, no one is will-
ing to die, lb. (b, d, e) Ef rts airr£> 8oko(t] . . pXaiceveiv, . . frraurev &v,
Kal &/xa avrbs irpo<rc\dp.|3av€v, if any one seemed to him to shirk, lie would
give him a blow, and at the same time took hold himself t ii. 3. 11.
635. Incorporation. The condition, instead of being ex-
pressed in a distinct clause, is often incorporated in the con-
clusion, especially in a participial form :
Aeyois hv e5 <J>povwv [= el eS <f>povoLr}s], you would speak, if you were a
friend, Soph. 0. T. Ma6ov<r* £pu>, lb. "ilairep b.v dp&pwt rts irepl vCkt^s,
as one would run [if he were running] for victory, -i. 5. 8. "AXXa>s Se ovk
hv ToK/x^ev, they would not venture otherwise [if it were not so], v. 4. 34.
636. t Ellipsis. In a hypothetical period, the premise or
the conclusion is often omitted ; the other part retaining its
proper form (as also in 635) :
i. Premise omitted. Among the conditions most naturally
supplied, and therefore most frequently omitted, are those of
inclination with possibility and of possibility with inclination;
since these are the two great conditions of human conduct.
a. Hence the frequent use of the Opt. and past tenses of the Ind. with
&v (specially termed potential Opt. or Ind.), to denote one of these ideas,
the other being implied as a condition. Other familiar ideas are also im-
plied, as of effort, necessity, propriety, occasion, existence, actuality, &c. ;
and (b) the premise is often involved in an independent sentence, or
otherwise supplied by the context. Thus, (a) Avvauj &v . . tvpeip 8tu) hv
Xapto-cuo ; [would you be able if you tried] could you find one whom you
might oblige (if you should wish) ? Cyr. H5«rr &v dicovcrcHfu, / should
rnost gladly hear (if I might), ii. 5. 15. (b) Otfre ia0iov<n vXeLu rj bvvav-
tcu <pe"pecv, Siappoycicv ya,p &v, they eat no more than tJiey can bear, for they
would burst (if they did), Cyr. "En otiv &v yivoio . . <pi\os ; would you
yet become a friend (if I should now forgive you) ? i. 6. 8. See 637.
637. With the ellipsis of a premise, the Optative with &v
may supply the place (a) of the Imperative, or (b) of the In-
dicative, especially (c) of the Fut. ind. ; (d) or may express
wish in the form of a question :
(a) As Imv., it expresses permission, or command in the softened lan-
guage of permission, or prohibition in the strong form of denying permis-
sion : Kop-ftois &v ceavTbv, you may now betake yourself [might if you
should wish], Soph. Xcopots &v efcrw, go within, Id. Ovk &v paaiXrjas
avb. ardfi ty *" dvopevois, 'you must not harangue,' B. 250.
>■ (b) Airrb &v rb 84ov tfrj ■ OcLttop ykp &m\ibo-ov<n, this [would be, if we
§ 641 EULE S. RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL CLAUSES. 307
could have it] is the very thing we want; for they will sooner expend, iv. 7.
7. Hov 8t}t dv tUv oi &voi ; where then [might be] are the strangers ? Soph.
(c) Ovk4t dv Kpvt|/aifH, no longer [if I might, would I] will I conceal it,
Ar. KXvois dv rfSv, thou tvilt nbw hear, Soph. — So esp. in the 1 Pers.
(d) IIcDs dv 6Xo£p.av / [how might I die, if I should seek death ?] Would
that I might die ! Eur. T/s dv . . 8ofo] ; that one would give ! Soph.
633. it. Conclusion omitted. To this ellipsis may be
referred the common expression of wish (a) by the Optative, or
(b) as contrary to fact, by a prior tense of the Indicative (615):
(a) El fioL yivoiro (pdbyyos [sc. rj8oLp,T)v &v\, [if I might have a voice, I
should he glad] that I might Jiave a voice ! Eur. Hec. 836. El yap yivoiro
[sc. /caXws av ?x ot ]> [f° r ] if it might be [it would be well]! Cyr. 6. 1. 38.
(b) EW €l\€S . . fieXriovs (pptvas [scridofirju &v], if you b%d Imd a better
mind ! Eur. El yap roaairnv 86vapui> d\ov,would I had such power I Id.
c. From the great use of these elliptic forms, especially a, the connec-
tive el (commonly in the forms rfOe, el *ydp, or at'0e, at -yap d. e.) came to
be regarded as a particle of wishing, and the Opt. as the appropriate
mode for the expression of a wish (modus optativus, the wishing mode).
(d) Hence it was so used without the connective ; and (e) sometimes, as
a less direct form, took the place of the Imv., especially in the 3 Pers.
(the two modes being sometimes used together, and these again with the
Subj.) : (d). Oi deol dirorCo-aivTo, may the gods requite ! iii. 2. 6. (e) "H
rts . . 'AxtX^t irapoTaCrj, or [may] let one stand by A., T. 119.
f. "Av does not belong to this Opt. of direct wish, which is often thus
distinguished from the Opt. in its other uses.
g. A wish in opposition to fact is also expressed by the 2 Aor. , and
rarely by the Impf., of 6<pe£Xo> ought (50) ; the particles of wishing being
often prefixed, to add strength : 'OXtadat 8' &<peXov, [I ought to have per-
ished] Would that 1 had perished! Soph. 0. T. 1157. "tlfyeXe fih Kvpos
frjv (611). Etd' 6<peXes &yoi>5s t fyepai, Would you were unborn! T. 40.
'fts Trplv &<peXXov dXfodai, tliat I had sooner died! Q. 764 (648 d).
639. a. The conditional form often takes the place of other forms,
especially from Greek courtesy and moderation of speech (654 a) ; as, after
verbs of emotion ; in the frequent use of e£ tis for tforis, and like substi-
tutions, &c: T65e idafyacra, el [= 6Vt] . . rldijt, this I wonder at, [if]
that you place, PL Rep. 348 e. "Eicaiov icai x<-^° v Ka ^ & ti &XXo xpvcwov
9)v, they burned both fodder and [if anything] whatever else was of use, i.
ill. Relative or Temporal.
640. Rule S. A relative clause commonly uses the
modes like other sentences to which it is most nearly akin.
a. From such analogies, some relative clauses have been distinguished
as conditional relative, final relative, &c.
641. l. Conditional Relative Clauses, &c. A relative or
temporal clause referring to that which is indefinite or general or not yet
determined, may be viewed as contingent (616) ; and then has regularly
(a) the Subj., if it depends on a primary tense, but (b) the Opt., if it
depends on a secondary. For the form of the connective, see 619 d.
(c) Such a clause has commonly a form and force akin to those of an in-
definite premise (634) ; while its leading clause resembles in form the cor-
responding conclusion. Thus,
308 MODES. R. T. ORATIO OBLIQUA. OPT., &C. OF WISH. § 641.
(a) "O n &v [= i&p ti] 8£r|, irela-ofuti, whatever [if any] evil must be met,
I will suffer (.551 a), i. 3. 5. 'OiroTav Katpbs $, tj^w, when it is the proper
time, I will come, vii. 3. 36. 'EireiSdv iravra &kovo-t]T€, Kplvare Dem.
(b) 'E&r/pevev dirb 'Ittttov, oitotc [= et irjoTe] yv/xvaaai PovXoito, he hunted
on horseback, whenever [if at any time] he might wish to exercise, i. 2. 7.
$o(3oLnr}i> 8' av t$ rryefrfivi, & 8o£tj, frrecrflcu, I slwuld fear to follow the guide
whom he might give us, lb. 17. 'EircC rts Sicokoi, irpodpa/xdvres 'taraaav,
when any one gave chase, they would run before and stop, i. 5. 2.
d. Most temporal clauses are also relative (as above) ; and those which
are not, usually follow the same analogy (introduced by irp£v, («XP l > &XP»-,
&c.) : M77 GTtvafc, irplv (ictGTjs (619 e), do not groan, before you [may] have
learned, Soph. Ph. 917. llpiv fidOoipa lb. 961. 'Avtfxevev . ., tare ejMpd-
■yoiev, he waited until they [should have] liad eaten, Cyr. 8. 1. 44.
e. "Oo-ns, as requiring no additional mark of indeliniteness, is oftener
joined with the Ind., than 8s used indefinitely : "0<ttis 8' <x<Piki>€ito, i. 1, 5.
642. 2. Final Relative Clauses. A relative clause having the
force of a final clause (558 a) has commonly in Attic the Fut. (Ind., rare-
ly Opt. except in Indirect Discourse, 643) ; but oftener in Epic the Subj.
or Opt. (except Fut.) : "07rXa kt&vtcu, oh duvvovvTcu Mem., lltfixf/ov tlv,
6'o-rts <rr)p.av€i Eur. , "AyyeXov fjKav, ds dyycCActc 0. 458, § 558 a.
a. In such relative clauses in Attic, the Subj. occurs chiefly after i\<a
(commonly without Av) ; and the Opt. chiefly after another Opt.
iv. Complementary (Oratio Obliqua, &c).
643. Rule T. The Optative is the finite mode appropri-
ate to Indirect Discourse in past time. Thus,
a. Direct Discourse, A^yci (etirev), "6p<3" ("cT8ov," " #\|/ojmu "), he
says (said), "I see" ("I saw," "1 shall see"); Indirect Discourse in
present time, A^yet 8ti bpq. (etScv, #t|/€Tai), he says that he sees (saw, shall
see) ; Ind. Discourse in past time, Elirev tin 6p<*> (iSot, S\|/oito), he said
tliat he saw (had seen, should see). 'AvrjpwTa, ri (3ov\oivto, he asked,
what they wished (quid vellent), ii. 3. 4 (directly, tI fiotiXeade ;). "0 ti 8£
iroi^jcroi, oil heo-f^ix-qve, but what he would do, lie did not indicate, ii. 1. 23.
'Hyvbet 6 ti rb irddos €% he knew not what the matter zvas, iv. 5. 7.
b. In the change from Direct to Indirect Discourse, the tense is not
commonly changed, even though the mode may be. It continues to ex-
press relatively (i. e. with reference to the time of the leading verb), the
same time which it expressed absolutely in Direct Discourse ; while the
English idiom commonly requires us to translate it according to its abso-
lute time as now used. See 607, and bp$, tdoi, 8\j/oito, above ; and cf. 660.
c. The rule applies not only to leading verbs in the quotation, but to
others connected with them : - E\e7<»' . ., bri iravrbs ct£ca \4yoi Zevd-ris,
Xetp-uv yap dr\, they said, that the proposal of S. was worth everything, for
it was winter, Vii. 3. 13 (directly, \4yet 2., x- y. €<ttlv). 'AireKplvaro yap,
6'rt . . fiovkevaoiTo irepl avrQv 6 ti SvvaiTO, he answered that he rvould pro-
vide for them icJiat he could, vii. 1. 34 (directly, f3ovXe6(ro[iai 8 ti av bvvoo-
p:ai, § 641 a). Cf. 659 b. (d) But if a verb so connected expresses the
writer's own thought, it must retain the form of Direct Discourse.
e. The rule may extend to various dependent clauses, which are thus
referred to the speech or mind of another : "Etpevyov Zvda /jltjitot dvj/oip.T]v,
/ fled where (as I believed) / should never see, Soph. "QiKretpov. ei a\<6-
o-oivto (633 c). (f) So rarely even to clauses elliptically expressed as in-
dependent : 'tirio'x^TO . . dqXuaeiv &ywv, oioito fiku p.&Xiad' iKo6cnov. Soph-
§ 647. SUBJUNCTIVE OF DOUBT. 309
g. That which is presented in Indirect Discourse, is not presented as
fact, but as the statement, thought, or feeling of some person, and con-
sequently as having some degree of contingency.
644. The Greek has here an especial love of variety,
either for its own sake, or for euphony, or to express in various
degrees contingency or f)ositiveness of conception ; so that
1.) Indirect and Direct Discourse are freely blended; commonly by a
change to the latter, either (a) after the introductory particle 8ti, or (b)
in the body of the quotation, chiefly after a relative, a parenthetic clause,
or one of the larger pauses : (a) Elirov, 6'rt " iKavol ea/u.eu," they said, [that
they were able] " We are able," v. (b) 'EirideiKvus 5e, ws evwOes etrj, ijye-
fiova alrelv irapd toijtov, " 4> ^vfiaivdfieda tx\v irpd^iv," showing, that it was
folly to ask a guide from him, * ' whose plan (said he) we are frustrating" i.
645. 2.) Indirect Discourse (a) retains freely the modes and tenses
of Direct Discourse ; and often blends them with its own proper forms,
whether (b) in a leading and dependent verb, or (c) in verbs not so
related : (a) "EXeYev Sri airo8£8axri (607), he said that he [resigns] resigned
(a compromise between the regular airodidoiw and the direct " diro5L8w[XL ").
(b) "EXeyov, 8ti irepl airov8Q>v -fJKOiev, dvbpes ol rives licavoi &rovr<u, ' that
they had come respecting a truce, men who [will] would be competent,'
ii. 3. 4. (c) "EXeyov, 6tc Kvpos p.ev riQ\n\Kev, 'Apiouos Se . . \£yoi, they
stated that C. [is] was dead, and that A. said, ii. 1. 3. See 652 a.
646. In the change from Direct to Indirect Discourse, (a) the Impf.
and Plup. ind. are usually retained, lest, if changed to the Opt., they
might be confounded with the Pres. and Perf. ind. so changed ; and (b)
they are sometimes even used in Indirect Discourse, instead of these
tenses, (c) Prior tenses, expressing supposition contrary to fact (615),
require especially to be retained ; and (d) the Aor. Ind. is usually retained
in dependent clauses of the quotation, for distinction from the Aor. Subj.
(a) Etxe yap Xiyeiv, ko.1 6'rt . . crvv€p.dx<>VTO, for he could say that they
liad assisted (cf. o-Tpare^iadLVTo), Hel. 7. 1. 34. (b) 'Ev iroXXrj 5/j diropla
fjaav ol "EXXyves, hvooip.evoi p.ev, tin iirl reus /3a<rtA^ws dtipais ?\<rav, . .
irpovSeSt&Kco-av Se avrobs kclI ol . . fidpfiapoi, • reflecting that they were at
the gates of the kin£, and had been betrayed by the barbarians,' iii. 1. 2.
(c) Ilv6oip,T]v . ., riv dv wore yvibpLrjv irepl ifxou diytrt, ei . ., 'what opinion
you would have of me, if I had . .,' Dem. 1227. 2. (d) "EXeyov, u>s 6
Eevocp&v olxolto . . & vir£<r\ero clvt$ diroXv^/dfievos, ' had gone to receive
what he had promised him,' vii. 7. 55.
647. Subjunctive of Doubt (Conjunctivus deliberativus).
a. In complementary clauses, where doubt respecting the
future is expressed or implied, the Subjunctive is often used,
chiefly in the 1 pers. (cf. 628 a), (b) The connective is some-
times omitted J and (c) sometimes the leading verb itself.
(a) Ovk fx u T ' L X£y«, non habeo quid dicam, / know not what [I may
call] to call it, Dem. 124. 24. 'Epwrq. 8rj ttQs fie 8dirrg, he asks how he
sliall bury me, PI. Phsedo 115 d. (b) BotiXei [sc. u>s] XdJ3ojfiai; wilt thou
[that] I take ? Soph. Ph. 761. (c) il HapaivG> aoi (nuwdv." "[Sc. Hapat-
veis u>s] 'E7d> o-iwrrCo ;" " I advise you to be silent" " [Do you advise that]
I be silent?" Ar. Ran. 1132.
d. Hence the Subj. is used in asking ivhat one is to do, can do, &c,
chiefly in the 1st pers. and the indefinite 3d : [Sc. BoOXei ws] Etircopicv q
310 SYNTAX. R. U. INTERCHANGE OF MODES. §647.
<riyo>|i€V, -J) H 8pd<ro/j.ep,- shall we speak or be silent, or icliat shall we do ?
Eur. Ion 758. Ilot p<2 ; ira o-r<S ; rl \iyu> ; whither can I go ? where stop ?
what say ? [sc. diropQ, I am at a loss whither, &c] Eur. Ale. 864."
648. Optative of Doubt, a. Indirect Discourse in past time
may change this Subj. to an Opt. : 'E^ovXetfero . . ei ir^iroiev. he consulted
whetlier they should send, i. 10. 5. "Rrrbpei 6 tl xp^<rairo Hel. 7. 4. 39.
(b) The connection must distinguish this use of the Opt. for the Subj. of
present time, from its use in 643 a, for the Ind. of Direct Discourse.
c. Hence the Opt. is sometimes used without &v in questions, chiefly
in poetry : Ilot rts <f>fryoi ; whither could one fly ? [sc. dtropol-qp dp]. Ar.
d. A different ellipsis explains the poetic use of the Opt. with «s to
express wish : [Sc. BovXoifiTjp dp] 'fis SXoito irayKaKus, [1 should wish]
that slie might perish miserably ! Eur. Hipp. 407. 'fts m ddpoi o. 359.
v. Interchange.
649. Rule U. The uses of the finite modes are often
interchanged.
a. Especial freedom belongs here, as elsewhere, to the poets ; partic-
ularly to Homer, and others who sung before the use of the modes became
fixed.
b. The Greek has also great freedom here, as elsewhere, in combining
different forms of construction (392) ; and (c) one part of a sentence often
conforms to another, not as this is expressed, but as it might have been ex-
f)ressed : Et p.h €iraiv» [ = iwaipotpa] avrbp, Sinalus &v p-e ical alri<j>cr6c, if I
commend] should commend him, you would justly blame me, vii. 6. 15.
d. If the form of a leading verb does not agree with the time of its
action, a dependent verb sometimes conforms to the one, and sometimes to
the other: Hist. Pres., Tpd<pei . . on f]£oi (v. I. "fj&i), he writes that he
[would come] will come, i. 6. 3. Opt. of Wish, &c, Tedpai-qp . ., 'ipa p.7]
£p0d8e \Ltvta, let one die, that I may not remain here, PL WLp-qp-rj . . Zx ot
iroXip, 8(ppa p.er dWup K<i>|j.d£oi)U, may peace posscss^ the city, so that I may
be merry with others, Theog. IIoi^o-atTo (dp), 'ipa . . th) (v. I. ■$) ii. 4. 3.
650. i. Dependent sentences often conform to relative,
instead of absolute, time (607) :
KariKavvep, ha p-tj Kvpos 8iaf3fj, he had burned (the boats), that C.
[may] might not cross, i. 4. 18. "ETrpaavop 8ttws rts fiorideia fj^t, tltey
negotiated that some succor [shall] should come, Th. 3. 4. Cf. 653.
651. ii. Generic Use. This has a varied application to
the modes :
1. The Indicative is the generic mode ; and hence may be used for
the Subj. or Opt., if it is not deemed important to mark the contingency:
Xprjedwp 8 rt PovXovrai, let them use me as they [may] please, Ar.
a. As the Impf. and Plup. have no separate forms out of the Ind., they
often remain in this mode, for distinction from the Pres. and Perf., in
cases where other tenses would take the Opt. or Subj. ; especially the
Impf. expressing a repeated or continued act or state in past time : "EXe-
yep, 8tl opdws t|tk5vto, Kai avrb rb Zpyop avrols |iapTvpofo], he said that
they had blamed, him justly, and that the result sustained tliem, iii. 3. 12
(directly, yrida-de, vpup p-aprvpei). See 632, 634, 646.
652. 2. The Optative is the generic contingent mode, as the earlier
developed, and as expressing past contingency (614 b). It is, hence,
§ 657 RULE XXXII. THE IMPERATIVE. 311
often used for the Subj., especially to render the expression more general;
indefinite, vague, or doubtful, or from a reference in the mind to some-
thing past, distant, or contingent : ' AiroTeixtt €t > &s diropos dr\ i] 656s, he is
building a wall, so that the way might be impassable (for any one), ii. 4. 4.
a. We observe here, as elsewhere, the Greek love of variety, and the
tendency to drop into a more general form, after the use of one that is
more special or definite (cf. 592 c, 605 b) : Mertyxo/JLai, u>s vfipiv 8€i£cop.ev
Alyiadov deofc, yoovs r d^cC^v, / go, that I may show to the gods the inso-
lence of JE., and [might] utter waitings, Eur. El. 58.
653. in. The freedom of the mind in its conceptions of
time affects the modes, as well as the tenses (608 s).
a. Especially is the Subj. often used for the Opt., from a view of the
past as present (or sometimes, as extending to the present). Cf. 650.
654. iv. The contingent is often conceived or spoken of
as actual ; and the actual, as contingent ; especially from
strong assurance or vivid fancy in the former case, and from
courtesy or modesty in the latter. Cf. 608 a.
a. The taste, refinement, popular institutions, and civic life of the
Greeks fostered a spirit of mutual concession and respect, which often led
them, and especially the Athenians, to express even decided opinions and
well-known facts, not as if asserted, but as if modestly and courteously
suggested, and referred to others for a decision. Hence they often used
the contingent modes, especially the Opt., instead of the Ind. ; and the
Opt., as being still less direct, instead of the Subj. See 637, 639, 652.
B. Volitive.
655. Rule XXXII. The Imperative is the
most direct expression of an act of the will.
a. From the fondness of the Greeks for passing from indirect to direct
forms of expression (cf. 644), the Imperative is sometimes found in
dependent clauses : Qurfrbs 5' 'Ope" (Try? * (bare /jltj Xlau crre'vc, 0. was mortal;
so that [do not grieve] you should not grieve to excess, Soph. El. 1172.
656. a. In general but earnest address, the 2d Pers. of the Imv. is
sometimes used with iras, or tIs, or both, instead of the 3d : X&pet SeOpo
7ras vwnpirns ' rotjeve, irate • c<pev$6vqv ris pwi 56ra>. Come hither every
man of you/ Shoot, smite. Let some one give me a sling. Ar. Av. 1186.
b. Such familiar imperatives as &yc, type, l'0i, diri, and ISi may be
used in the singular, as interjections, though more than one are ad-
dressed ; and in the 2d Pers., though associated verbs are in the 3d :
"A7e 5t), aKofoare, come now, hear, Apol. 14. "Idi . . rts . . 56rw Ar.
C. Incorporated.
657. In dependent clauses, the Greek has great freedom
in the employment of either distinct or incorporated forms, ac-
cording as a more or less intimate union is desired ; and also
in respect to the manner of incorporation. Thus (a) a depend-
ent clause may be preserved entirely distinct; or (b) its subject
312 SYNTAX. — INCORPORATED MODES. §657.
or most prominent substantive may be incorporated in the lead-
ing clause, leaving it otherwise distinct ; or (c) its verb may be
also incorporated as an Infinitive, or (d) yet more closely as a
Participle. The union often becomes still closer by an attrac-
tion, through which (e) the leading verb adopts, for a subject
or object, the subject of the dependent clause ; or the Inf. or
Part, adopts, for its grammatical subject, either (f) the subject
or (g) an adjunct of the leading verb, (h) Different forms are
often combined or blended. E. g.,
(a, b) "Hiadero, 8ti to Me'vuvos orrpaTeupa rfdv ev KiXucla ■fjv (v. I. "H.
r6 re M. o-Tpa.T€vp.a, 8ti tfdr) iv K. fjv), lie perceived, that the army of Meno
was now in Cilicia (the army of M., that it was, <fcc), i. 2. 21. llapeo-Kev-
afyvTo, 8ir«s • • eo-paXovoriv, they prepared [how they should invade,
624 b] to invade, Th. 2. 99. See 474 b, 573 a. (c, d) IlapecKevdfrvTo . .
orpaTeuciv (iroXep-fjo-ovTes, or a>s irokefx-rjaovTes), they prepared to make
tear, Th. 1. 115 ; 2. 7. See 598 b. (e) See 573.
(f) 'EyofiL^ofiev &|ioi ttvcu [ = ■fyuas d£/ous elrai], we thought that we were
worthy, Cyr. 7. 5. 72 (cf. vopi^oifxi yap epxurrbv iocK&ai lb. 5. 1. 21). N6-
fiife . . avdpa dyadbv diroKTeivwv [= aeavrbv diroKTeivovra], consider your-
self putting to death a good man, vi. 6. 24. 01/mi tlvai tCjuos (621 ; cf.
oTp.ai ftb Xvjpeiv fxe PI. Charm. 173 a), (g) UpoaifiKei dpxovrc <j>povi'|xw ttveu,
it becomes a ruler to be prudent, Mag. Eq. 7. 1. See 667.
(h) "AXXcp re Tp6ir(p ireipdo-avTcs, Kal ixt)x av V v irpcor^-ya-yov, both at-
tempting in other ways, and [they brought up] bringing up an engine, Th.
i. The Inf. and Part, may also be used impersonally. See 432 d.
j. An especial variety of construction appears with <rvvci8a, o-vyyi-
2V(6o-ko), £oiKa, and some other words : "EoiKas Pa<ri\ti>s etvcu (f^c'peves,
«8ioti), you seem to be king (pleased, like one fearing), Cyr., Hel., PI.
So "O/xotoi Tjaav Oavpd^eiv (v. 1. 6avpd£ovT€S, = 6avp.d£ovai), they seemed
to be wondering, iii. 5. 13.
k. Some verbs may be followed either by the Inf. or the Part., with
scarcely any difference of meaning, as in some of the examples above ;
and others, with an obvious difference. In the latter case, the Part,
commonly denotes that which is Jess dependent on the action of the lead-
ing verb, or is a more immediate, positive, or personal object of percep-
tion : Touto p.ev ovk alax^opxti X£y«v ■ rb Se alaxwoip.r]v av \iy&.v ' I am
not ashamed [saying] to say this (which is said) } but I should be ashamed
to say that (which from the shame is not said) ; Cyr. 5. 1. 21. *Av &ira£
fj.d6wp.ev dpyoi £tjv, if we once learn to live in idleness, iii. 2. 25 ; 'Ira p,d6y
ao<pL(XTr]s cSv, that he may learn tlmt he is a schemer, jEsch. Pr. 61.
658. The use of both the incorporated modes is even more
extensive in Greek than in English.
1. Hence we often translate the Greek Inf. and Part, by finite verbs
with connectives (that, when, while, as, and, if, although,^ because, since,
in order that, &c). Sometimes, also, from a difference of idiom, the Inf.
and Part, are interchanged in translation : Tlap&v iT&YX aV€ M ( PP em(i to be
present, i. 1. 2. 'E/SotfXero iavrbv QiKeiadai, wished himself beloved, Cyr.
a. With &v, the Inf. or Part, commonly supplies the place of the cor-
responding tense of the Opt., or past tense of the Ind. (618) ; and is
usually translated by our potential mode : Kal 8' &v rois dWounv ^<pr\
irapap.vWjora<r0<u, he said he would advise the rest, I. 684 (directly, av . .
§661. INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE. 313
irapafji.v0ri<ralfjn)v I. 417). 'fls ovtu ir€pi , Y€V<$|i.6V0S &v, as though he would
thus prevail, i. 1. 10 (directly, irepiyevol^v &v).
659. 2. The use of the incorporated modes, particularly the Inf., is
very great in Indirect Discourse, sometimes (a) continuing through a
series of sentences, or (b) even extending to relative, and rarely to other
subsidiary clauses (cf. 661 a) ; and being interchanged and blended not
only (c) with other forms of Indirect Discourse, but also (d) with those of
Direct Discourse. For the use of the tenses here, see 660 b. E. g.,
(a) See Hdt. 1. 24 ; Cyr. 1. 3. 4 s. (b) "E<prj 8e, eireidr] o5 kpfjvcu Try
ipvxyv, vopevecrdat . . els tottov . ., iv c5 . . 5i/' clvai x& cr l xaT€ i he said that,
when his soul had left the body, it went to a place, in which were two open-
ings,PL (c) 'Qs fiAv <rrpaTt\yf\<rovra ip.i . . fxrjdeis v/xQv Xeyeru) . ., a>s 8e . .
ima-opai, let none of you speak of me as to take command, but (say rather)
that I will obey (680), i. 3. 15. (d) "E<p7i tf£\ciy iropetieffdat, . . "iyu
yap," £<pri, "oI5a," he said thai he wished to go, "for," said he, "I know,"
iv. 1. 27. See i. 3. 20, vii. 1. 39 ; and cf. § 644.
e. "On and «s are sometimes even followed, after intervening words,
by an Inf. or Part., instead of a finite verb : El7re 5e, ftn, iireidav rdxtcra
7] a-rpareia X'ffifo evdds d7roir^p,\|/€tv avrbv, he said that, as soon as the cam-
paign was ended, he would send him home, iii. 1. 9. Cf. 644 a.
f. The use of the Inf. in Indirect Discourse after verbs of saying, think-
ing, perceiving, and the like (verba sentiendi et declarandi), is not broadly
separated from its objective use after verbs of commanding, advising,
entreating, teaching, learning, wishing, intending, and the like, (g) After
verbs of promising, hoping, expecting, and the like, the Inf. is oftener in
the Fut., according to the rule for Indirect Discourse.
660. a. The Inf. and Part, are achronic in respect to absolute time
(590, 607). <b) But the Part., the Inf. Fut. and Fut. Perf., and the
Inf. in Indirect Discourse (cf. 643 b), commonly express the same time
relatively (L e. with reference to the verb on which they depend), which
the same tense of the lnd. would express absolutely, (c) For the use
here of the Pres. and Peif. as also Impf. and Plup., see 269 c. (d) Other-
wise the Inf., as in Eng., commonly expresses simply the relation of the
action to the time (267 c), leaving the time itself to' be inferred from the
connection. This time is often a relative future ; and then the less com-
mon Fut. Inf. might also be used, to give prominence to the time. E. g.,
(b) "Htei Xfywv (Xc'^as, Xe£a>v) he went saying (having said, to say).
A^yet opdv (IStiv, 8vj/€<r8ai), he says that he sees (saw, shall see). Cf. 643 a.
(c) 'Icur0<u avrbs to Tpavp.6. <prj<TL, he says that he himself licaled tlie wound,
i. 8. 26 (directly lu>fir)v). (d) Bov\6/ul€uol . . ^x €iv {d-iroKX-rjcraadai, v. I. diro-
KKfjaecrdai) , wishing to have (to intercept), Th. 8. 9 ; 6. 101. See 598.
e. The Aor. Part, sometimes agrees in time with the leading verb,
chiefly with another Aor. when both refer to a single act, and with such
verbs as XavOdvco, Tvyxdvco, <p9dv<o, and irepiopdco : Tl dv clirtov <t£ tls
dpdQs irpoo-eforoi ; what could one call you and call you rightly ? Dem.
232. 20. *I8wv ct8ov, [seeing] surely I saw, Luc. D. Mar. 4. A-/j<rop,€V
eiriirco-ovTcs, we shall attack by' surprise, vii. 3. 43. See § 677.
661. a. Clauses depending upon the Inf. and Part, have usually
the same form as if these were finite verbs : "Etoi/mos ty diroTlvtiv el icara-
•yvotcv, he ivas ready to pay, if they should condemn him, Isoc. 361 e.
b. From the familiar association of the Ace. with the Inf., and the
Gen. with the Part., words commonly governing other cases are often
followed by these in connection with an Inf. or Part.: 'Yp.ds irpo<Tt)Kei
comp. gr. 14
314 SYNTAX. R. XXXIII. INFINITIVE. §661.
Kal afxelvovai . . clvcu, it befits you to be [that you should he] braver, iii. 2.
15 (cf. vp.lv irpoGT)Kei lb. 11, § 450). "Epirovros dadpas ejxoi), you see me
going (432 h), Soph. Tr. 394. (c) Sometimes the Ace. occurs for another
ease with the Part., if its use is analogous to that of the Inf.
d. In the use of the incorporated modes with adjuncts, there is often
a union of two constructions : "A77eXXe 8' 8pjcw irpouTLdeh, announce [with
an oath, adding it], adding an oath, Soph. El. 47.
662. From the intimate union subsisting between the Inf. or Part.,
and the leading finite verb, a word properly modifying the one is some-
times placed in immediate connection with the other. Thus we find
(a) such adverbs as &p.a, civi-Cko,, cvOvs, fc£a£<j>vT]s, p.€Ta£v, Sjjlws, Kaiirep,
&c, joined with the Part, instead of the leading verb ; and sometimes
(b) a particle joined with the leading verb instead of the Inf. or Part.,
particularly dv (621), and ovk with <|>T]p.£ : (a) "A/m ravf eiiruv avearrj
[having said this, he at the same time rose], as soon as he had said this,
lie rose, iii. 1. 47. Mera£i> 7rcu'£a>j> titripxerat, [playing, meanwhile] he
enters in the midst of his play, PI. (b) Ovk Z<paaav ievcu, they said they
would not go, i. 3. 1.
I. The Infinitive (Verb-Noun, "*Ovopa tov 'Pharos").
663. Ktjle XXXIII. The Infinitive is con-
strued as a neater noun (491 a). Hence,
(a) The Inf. may be the subject of any word which would
agree with a noun, or (b) even of another Inf. ; (c) it may
itself agree as an appositive ; (d) it may depend upon any
word which would govern a noun; or (e) it may be used, like
a noun, to express a circumstance j particularly such as are
denoted by the Gen. of cause, the modal Bat. (466 s), the Ace.
of specification (481), and the adverbial Ace. (483). (f) The
article is often prefixed to the Inf. to give prominence to its
substantive character, or to define the relation which it sus-
tains as a substantive, by marking the case. If the Inf. is gov-
erned by a preposition, the insertion of the article is required.
(a) ^tvytiv avrois acr<pa\t(rT6p6v teriv, to fly is safer for them, iii. 2. 19.
(b) Aodrjvat avrip <rco£€iv roiis "EXX^as, that it should be granted to him to
save the Greeks, ii. 3. 25. (c) Td yap yv(ovat £iri<TTrip.7iv wov XafUiv ianv,
to learn is to acquire knowledge (534. 3), PI. Theset. 209 e. (d) Qepudrepov
iruiv, warmer for drinking, Mem. 3. 13. 3. MavGdveiv yap jjno/xev, we
have come to learn, Soph. 0. C. 12. (e) 'E£r)\6ev rod <rireipai (429 a).
'Opav o-Tvyvbs ijv, Kal r% <pu)uf) rpaxte, he was stern in aspect, and rough
invoice, ii. 6. 9. (f) At A tov 4iriopK€iv, through perjury, ii. 6. 22.
g. In Greek, as in Eng., the Inf. Act. (or Mid.) is often used, where
the Inf. Pass, might have been used with' reference to a nearer, more ex-
plicit, or more natural subject : "A£tos 6avp.d<rai, worthy to [admire] be
admired, Th. 1. 138 (cf. dav/idfrffdai, Id. 2. 40). OaOfia ISArOoi, E. 725.
h. The Inf. is often named from its special office : as, the Inf. of Direct
or Indirect Object, of Purpose, of Specification, the Adverbial Inf., &c.
664. Article with the Inf. a. The prevalent use of the Inf. as
a direct or indirect object of a verb or adjective, is not commonly dis-
§ 667. CASE OF ITS SUBJECT. RULE XXXIV. 315
tinguished by the article ; while its rarer subjective use as a Gen. is usu-
ally so distinguished. Hence it usually wants the article, where it would
be naturally translated by the Eng. Inf., and also in Indirect Discourse ;
but commonly takes it when it modifies a noun, unless the noun is so
joined with a verb, that the Inf. may seem related to them jointly (as
together equivalent to some verb, &c.) : See examples above. llpLfiaats
tov d0poi£eiv (444 b). "EXaj3ov irp6<pa<nv o-xpareijciv, they seized a pretext
for war, Hel. "Ira . . (pofios dn . . o-Tparetieiv, that they might fear, &c, ii.
b. In some cases it seems indifferent whether the Inf. is regarded as
the subject of a verb, or as depending upon the verb used impersonally.
See 571 f. In such cases, or when the Inf. is the subject of 4<ttC and an
adjective, it commonly wants the article.
c. The article is often prefixed, especially in the tragedians, where it
would not have been expected, and is often in the Ace. (of direct object,
effect, or specification), where another case might have been expected. It
is used the more freely, if some negation is expressed. Thus, T6 5pav ovk
■tjdeXrjaav, [willed not the doing] were not willing to do it, Soph. "Os <re
KuiXtiaei rb dpq.v, who will prevent thee [as to] from doing it (405), Id.
665. a. The Inf. of Specification and the Adverbial Inf. have
a large range, and are variously translated. In some of these uses, the
Inf. is often said, though not in the strict sense of the term (401 N.), to
be absolute. E. g., 'Ek dd/tards tov wtcripov, Soxeiv ifioi, from some nigM
vision, [according to the seeming] as it seems to me, or meihinks, Soph. El.
410. 'AM' clxdcrcu p.kv, ^Stis, but to guess, joyous, Id. 0. T. 82. 'OXiyov
Btlv 7rXelous aireKTovdaiv, lutve slain [to want little] almost a greater num~
ber, Hel. So fjuKpov 8e7v, oXiyov [sc. ddv], pinpov [sc. delv], almost.
b. The use of etvcu as the Inf. of specification, or the adverbial Inf.,
will be particularly remarked with 4k<ov, chiefly in negative sentences ;
and with some adverbs, or prepositions followed by their cases, chiefly pre-
ceded by to : Ovre avvBrjKas Siv xf/evdoiavv eic<bv dvat, nor would I break my
engagements willingly [to be willing], or, so far as depends on my will,
Cyr. T6 vvv etvai, [as to the being, or state of affaire, now] for tJie present,
iii. 2. 37. T6 /card tovtov dvai, so far as regards him, i. 6. 9.
666. Rule XXXIV. The Subject of the In-
finitive is put in the Accusative : as,
Oiofievoi . . Kvpov tov, supposing [C. to be] that Cyrus was alive, ii. 1.
1 (cf. the finite Kvpos #7, C. is alive, 400). 'H£Lov . . 8o0rjval oi ra&ras t&s
7r6\ets, lie requested, that these cities should be given to him, i. 1. 8.
a. The subject of the Inf. is very often, either properly or by attraction
(474, 657 e), the direct object of a preceding verb, and consequently in the
Ace. Hence has arisen an association between this case and the Inf.,
which has led to this rule, (b) The Inf., on the other hand, extensively
constitutes an indirect object of the verb or other word on which it
depends. From the prevalence of this use appears to have arisen the
resemblance in form of the Greek and Lat. Inf. to the Dat., and the use
of the prepositions to and zu before the Inf. in Eng. and German : II<?7ret/ce
tov fxdvriv Xtyeiv, had persuaded the prophet [to the saying] to say, vi. 4. 14.
667. a. This rule applies to the subject of the Inf. simply as such.
(b) Very often, this subject has a prior grammatical relation, which
determines its form ; (c) even if its two uses are not in immediate connec-
tion, (d) Still, it is sometimes repeated in the Ace. for more distinct ex-
pression ; and (e) is oftener so understood, (f ) For clearness, emphasis,
316 SYNTAX. R. V., W. INFINITIVE. §667.
or euphony, it is sometimes repeated in the same case, chiefly in the Kom.
(g) Attracted and mixed constructions also occur. Thus,
(b) Kvpov edt-ovro u>s trpoQv\iordrov . . yevtadai, they besought C. to be
as strenuous as possible, Hel. 1. 5. 2. See 657 f, g. 'laadai avrbs rb
rpav/j-d (prjai (660 c). (c) ToOro 5' ewoiei e/c rod xaikeirbs thai, he effected
this by being severe, ii. 6. 9. (d) OTp.ai be \ie dKVKoevai, I think that I have
heard, PI. Pep. 400 b. 'Evbuiae l<avrbv elvai Hdt. 1. 34. (e) Aeoue'vuv
|iov irpooTaTTiv [sc. /ne] yevijdai, entreating me [that I would become] to
become leader, Cyr. 7. 2. 23. (f) 'Eito/j.vijw aoi . . e-yw povXecrdai av, I
swear to you that I would choose, Cyr. 6. 4. 6. (g) 'EXirifav . . ovb" &p
avrbs, ovbe oi [for roOs, attracted by avrbs] £% avrov, Travcreadai, trusting
that neither himself , nor his descendants, would lose, Hdt. 1. 56. 'Ewe-iru
&k . . iuufreiv, . . ws ovti (as if col had preceded), Soph. 0. T. 350.
h. The subject of the Inf. is very often indefinite ; and is then com-
monly omitted, though words may be expressed agreeing with it : " Ovba-
fi&s &pa 5«? [sc. Tiva] dbiKeiv." " Oi' brjTa." " Ovbe d8iKOvp.tvov dpa dvra-
diKelv." " One ought thtn by no means to injure." " Surely not." "Not
then, wlien injured, to injure in turn." PI. Crito 49 b.
668. Pleonasm and Ellipsis, i. The Infinitive (a) is
sometimes redundant, and (b) is sometimes omitted:
(a) Xdpu> avribibuciv %X&.v, in return gives [to have] pleasure, Soph. 0.
C. 232. Alr-rjco/jiai be" c ov fiaKpbv yipas Xa\€iv Id. Aj. 825. (b) Ets rb
fiaKaveiov (3o6\oaai [sc. livai], I ivish to go to the bath, At. "E<pjj b 'Opbvrvs
[sc. ovtu) iroiyjcai], Orontes [said that he had so done] assented, i. 6. 7.
669. ii. The Infinitive often depends upon a word which
is omitted or implied in another word.
1. This often occurs in Indirect Discourse :
Ot 5£ c<pdrT€iv iK^Xevof • ov yap av btivacdai iropevdrjvai [sc. ttpacav] •
but they bade him kill tfiem; for [they said that] they were unable to pro-
ceed; iv. 5. 16. Karetppbvovv . ., fxwbe'va av eirixeiprjcai, they despised the
foe, (thinking that) no one would attack, Hel. 4. 5. 12.
670. 2. Rule V. The Inf. often forms an elliptical com-
mand, request, counsel, salutation, exclamation, or question :
2tf fioi <}>pdi;€iv [sc. £0c\e], do you [please to] tell me, PI. Soph. 262 e.
Ilalba 5' euol Xvcrai A. 20 (so esp. in Horn.). Zev irdrep, $ ktavra Xaxctv,
' [grant] that either Ajax may draw the lot,' H. 179 (cf. Zed dva, 80s
ricacdai, 'grant that I may punish,' T. 351). Tbv'Iwva XaCptiv [sc. Ke-
Aetfco], / bid Ion. hail, PI. Ion 530 a. 'E/^ irafieiv rdbe [sc. Seivbv ten],
<p€v ! that Ishotdd suffer such things [is horrible], alas! iEsch. Eum. 837.
"£l fiaciXeu, Kbrepov Xe-yeiv . . ?) ou-yav [sc. XPV> or «X«fc«]; Hdt. 1. 88.
a. So often in proclamations, laws, &c. : Tot>s Opticas airUvai [sc. Ke\e6e-
rcu or del], it is ordered that the Thracians depart, or tlie T. must d., Ar.
Ach. 172. (b) In exclamation, the article is usually prefixed : Tt?s rvxys ■'
rb ip.e vvv K\7jd4vra bevpo Tv X elv ! My ill-luck I That I should happen
now to have been summoned hither! Cyr. 2. 2. 3 (429 f). _ (c) In a few
poetic passages, the Inf. follows el ydp or effle, to express wish :^El ydp . .
ix^fiev [ac. &<pe\es, 638 g], would thou hadst, rj. 311. See w. 376.
671. 3. Rule W. Some connectives are followed by the
Infinitive ; especially as, Sxrre, oJos, and So-os.
a. This construction, like similar constructions in our own and other
languages, is plainly due to ellipsis, though it has extended to cases
§ 674. INF. WITH 'Q2, &C. PARTICIPLE. 317
where the ellipsis cannot be supplied without cumbering the discourse,
and has some irregular forms, (h) It sometimes occurs where a connective
seems needless ; and (c) is often parenthetic (chiefly with &s). E. g.,
(a) 'Etretbav 8t (TT)p.'qvn . ., us [sc. o-rjpuivot &v] avatravecrdai, wlien tlie
signal is given, as [it would be given] for resting, ii. 2. 4. 'TtreXdo-as a>s
(TvvavTTJaat, riding up [so as] to meet him, i. 8. 15. BovXerai iroveiv, uhttc
iroXejxtlv, chooses toil, so as to be [or that he may be] at war, ii. 6. 6. 'E^'
w fj.}] naleiv, *E<}>' <S re irXoTa avXXtyeiv (557). Otoi . . itpLecr6ai, "0<rov yev-
aairdai ■ see 556 b, c, d. (b) ^vxpbv were Xoijaaadai 4<ttiv, it is cold [so as
to bathe in] for bathing (cf. Xotfcracrtfcu \f/vxpbrepov) , Mem. 3. 13. 3. 'Eiroi-
7}<ra ware Sofcu, / Itad made [things so result that it should seem] it seem
(feceram ut), i. 6. 6. (c) 'fts 5£ cwrbpLus (or avveXbvri, or iv /3/mx«, sc.
Xbyy), direiv, ut breviter dicam, [I say this so as to speak] to speak briefly,
(Ee. 12. 19, Ages. 5. 3, 7. 1. 'fis tiros direiv PL, 'fis Xbyy elirat. Hdt, 'fts
etVeiv Th., [that I may speak the word, &c] so to speak, 'fts puKpbv p.e-
ydXw eiicdcrcu, to compare small with great, Th. 4. 36.
d. Other modes are also used after these connectives, for the sake of
greater precision, force, actuality, or independence of expression ; while it
is here the especial office of the Inf. to describe, characterize, or modify
something that precedes : Kari^aivov, u>s iirl rbv erepou dvafialvetv [v. I.
avaj3a~iev], they were descending, so as to ascend the second [that they might
ascend], iii. 4. 25. Kpavyrju ttoXXt]i> iiroiovv . ., wore /ecu tous TroXepuovs
dxoveiv • ware . . Ic{>\ryov • tliey made so much noise that even tlic enemy
heard (characterizing the noise by showing its effect) ; [so that] and there-
fore they fled (narrating the result as a fact in the history) ; ii. 2. 17.
e. 'fis and wcttc, originally relative adverbs of manner, often express
with the Inf. purpose or consequence ; ws esp. the former, wore the latter.
672. f. The Inf. is also used elliptically after % than : Melfrv t)
<p£pew, [greater than it should be for one to bear] too great to bear (513 e).
ii. The Participle (Verb-Adjective).
673. The Participle is either circumstantial, complementary,
definitive, or descriptive, that is, it either expresses some cir-
cumstance or complement of the leading verb, or defines or de-
scribes some associated person or thing.
674. 1. The Circumstantial Participle is distinguished
according to the circumstance denoted, as time, cause, means,
condition, purpose, &c. ; and also as (a) preliminary, (b) con-
temporary, or (c) prospective, according as its action precedes,
is simultaneous with, or follows, that of the leading verb.
d. It is often translated into Eng. by a finite verb with a connective,
an infinitive, a circumstantial adjunct, or an adverb (658). The Greek
usually prefers a participle and verb, where the Eng. uses two verbs
closely joined by 'and.' (e) As a preliminary part., the A or. is espe-
cially used ; for brevity, often translated by the Eng. Pres. The prospec-
tive part, is commonly in the Fut. ; often translated by the Eng. Infinitive.
E. g., (a) Mdvdav eXOwv, [having gone] go and learn, Ar. Nub. 89.
KG/jos viroXaPwv tovs cpevyovras, cruXXj|£as o-TpdrevpM,, eiroXibpKet MIXt)toi>,
C. received the exiles, and raising an army besieged M., i. 1. 7. (b) Of
Xtji^6|1€voi fwert, who live by plundering, Cyr. 3. 2. 25. r H/ce . . birXiras
*X«v xtXfoi/s, he came with 1000 hoplites, i. 2. 6 (so Xafitiv lb. 3, dyuv,
318 SYNTAX. R. XXXV. — PARTICIPLE. §074.
<pipwv, = with). TeXevT&v finally (509 a) ; dpxbp-evos, at first, Th. 4. 64;
iiriKpvwTbiievos (553 c), or \adwv (677 f), secretly. "O n Stoi iroioiivTas
<pi\ovs thai, ivhat they must [doing be] do to be friends, vi. 6. 4 (cf. iv.
2. 3). (c) "Eirefi\p£ riva epovvra, he sent one to say (598). See 635.
f. For participles expressing condition, see 635. Concession is some-
times expressed by a finite verb (commonly preceded by seal el or el ko.1) ;
bxit oftener by a participle with an appropriate particle, as icaiirep, icaL,
ire'p, KaiTOi, ov84, p.T]8e', &c. : UpoaeKvisTjcrav Kalirep dSbres, they did him
homage, even [knowing] though tliey knew, i. 6. 10. See 662 a.
g. "E\o>v, both with and without an Ace, is joined with some verbs,
chiefly of trifling or delay, to give the idea of persistency (cf. 679 b) :
Aripeis ^x 03V y V ou trifle [holding on] continually, PI. Gorg. 497 a. (h) Ma-
0a>v or iraOwv, with rl or 8 ti, sometimes forms a sarcastic or wondering
' why ' or ' because ' : Ti yap /xadbvT is rods deovs v(3pL&T7)v; [having learned
what new notions, &c] what possessed you to insult the gods] Ar. Nub.
1506. Ti Tradovaai . . et^dai yvvaiijiv ; [having met with what, &c] what
1ms happened to them tliat they resemble women ? lb. 340.
675. The Circumstantial Participle is often so loosely connected
with the leading verb, that it is said (though not in the strictest sense of
the term, 401 Nv) to be put absolute.
BlJLE XXXV. A PARTICIPLE AND SUBSTAN-
TIVE are put absolute in the Genitive ; an imper-
sonal participle, in the Accusative : as,
TovTwv Xex&VTwv, dvi/Brjcrav, these things having been said, they arose, iii.
3. 1. 'Avtp-r) iirl rd 8pr), ovhevbs kcdXvovtos, he ascended the heights [no
one opposing] without opposition, i. 2. 22. 2vv8d£av ry Trarpi . ., yafiet,
[it having seemed well to] with the approval of his father, he marries, Cyr.
8. 5. 28. "AStjXov 8v, birbre . . d<f>cupr)<reTcu, ' as it was uncertain,' Th. 1. 2.
a. The Gen. absolute may be referred to the general head of the Gen.
of Cause (often of time, 433 ; also of motive, reason, &c.). (b) The im-
personal participle absolute commonly retained the generic Ace, the only
form in which its proper gender, the neuter, could be distinguished
(571 e) ; perhaps the rather, because this participle was so often akin to
the Ace. of time or the adverbial Ace. (c) The Gen. is here more readily
admitted when the subject is afterwards expressed by a finite clause, than
when it is expressed by the Inf. (571 f ) : Ati\o)06VTOs, 8ti . , rd irpd-
yfmra iyiuero, it having been shown that affairs depended, Th. 1. 74.
ilpocrraxGe'v p.oi . . dyeiv, it Jiaving been charged me to convey, Dem.
d. The use of the neuter Ace. as absolute is sometimes extended,
chiefly to participles not agreeing with nouns, or such as are often used
impersonally : Kvpa>0ev 8k ovSiv, nothing having been fixed, Th. 4. 125.
IIpo<rT]Kov airy rod nX-qpov p.e'pos Isre. 51. 36. (e) Other genders some-
times appear as if in the Ace. absolute, after cos or wairep (680) ; a use
which seems due to a verb of thinking or speaking expressed or understood,
or to the influence of an associate construction : 'Us p.iv <rrpaTT|*y^<rovTa
ejxe . . , Xeyeru, let him speak [of me as to take], as if I toere to take com-
mand (659 c ; cf. 680 c). Etf%ero 8i irpbs rods deovs . ., <hs rovs Geotis (re-
peated) elSoras, he prayed to the gods, as knowing, Mem. 1. 3. 2.
676. a. In the absolute construction, the substantive is sometimes
omitted, and sometimes, though less- frequently, the Part, of the substan-
tive verb : EIttov, iporr-qo-avTos [sc. ai/rov], when he asked, they replied, iv.
§ G78. ABSOLUTE, COMPLEMENTARY, &C. 319
8. 5. Otfrw 5' ixovTuip [sc. irpay/j-drcov, 577 c], affairs standing thus, iii. 2.
10. "Akovtos PcktiX^ws [sc. &ros], tlte king [being] unwilling, ii. 1.19.
b. Absolute and connected constructions of the Part, are, in various
ways, interchanged and mixed ; the former giving more prominence to
the Part., and sometimes arising from a change of subject ; the latter
showing more clearly the relation of the Part, to the rest of the sentence:
At Tj|J.a,s, £v Tafci re Iovtcov [sc. tj-j.G>v], by us, while marching in order,
v. 8. 13. Hape<rKevafot>To, ws tcujttj irpo<ridvTOS Aral Se^ofievoi, they pre-
pared for his coming that way and for receiving him (680), i. 10. 6.
677. 2. The Complementary Participle is used with
verbs of sensation, of mental state and action, of shoiving and
informing, of appearance and discovery, of concealment and
chance, of conduct and success, of permission and endurance, of
commencement and continuance, of weariness and cessation, of
anticipation and omission, &c.
It may agree with (a) the subject or (b) an adjunct of the leading verb,
or (c) may be used impersonally ; and (d) is sometimes understood (chieiiy
ci'v). It is (e) variously translated, sometimes even by an independent
verb (as expressing the chief idea), while its leading verb is translated by
an adverb or circumstantial adjunct. E. g.,
(a) 'ETraOaavTo *iroX.€p,oi)vTcs, they ceased warring, vi. 1. 28. "Hdovrat
irpdrrovrts, delight in doing, Mem. 2. 1. 33. 'ExOpbs <av KvpeT, happens to
be a foe, Eur. Aeij-u) . . cro<pbs Yeyws, / will show tJmt I Jiave been wise,
Id. (b) "H«:oucre KOpov h KiXudq. Bvtcl, he heard [of C. being] tliat C. was
in C, i. 4. 5. (c) 'Eibpa irXdovos evSc'ov, lie saw [there being need] that
there was need of more, vi. 1. 31. (d) Sws fodt [sc. &p], know that you,
are safe, Soph, (e) See f.
f. A few verbs, as XavGdvw to escape notice, elude, <j>9dva> anticipate,
dvvoi despatch, SiaXefrrca leave an interval, may either take complementary
participles, or be themselves used as circumstantial participles ; and Xav-
0dva> may express concealment either from others or from one's self,
according to its object expressed or understood : Aadetp avrbv d-rreXdwv,
[to elude him departing] to depart without his knowledge, i. 3. 17. T/>e-
tpoixevov tXdvdavev, was secretly maintained, i. 1. 19. 'EXdvOave §6<xko)v, lie
was fostering unawares, Hdt. 1. 44. "Ottos p.r\ <pdd<Toxri . . oi KlXiices kclto.-
Xa/3<Wes, that the Cilicians might not anticipate them in taking possession,
i. 3. 14. Ovk a.v (pddvois . . Xtywv, you cannot tell me too soon, i. e. tell me
at once, Mem. 2. 3. 11. Ovk %<pdacrav irvdop-evoi . ., koX . . fJKov, they no
sooner heard than they came, Isoc. 58 b. KX£\f/ai . . Xadduras ko.1 dpirdcai
<pQ6.aa.vT as, to seize unobserved and take by surprise, iv. 6. 11.
g. The Complementary Part, sometimes occurs with an impersonal ex-
pression, or with an adjective and verb supplying the place of a simple
verb. When thus connected, the real subject of the sentence is some-
times implied in the Part. : IloXep-ouaiv afieivov &ttcu, it will be better for
them [warring] to go to war, Th. 1. 118. AfjXos i\v avubfievos (573 c).
678. 3. The Definitive Participle is equivalent to a
relative pronoun and finite verb, and is most frequently trans-
lated by these. It is often used substantively, and may not
unfrequently be translated by a noun, (a) It occurs chiefly
with the article (the proper sign of this use, 520) ; but (b)
sometimes without it, if the class only is defined. E. g.,
320 SYNTAX. PARTICIPLE. § 678.
(a) 'O ^JYTj<rofA€Vos ovSels tarai, there will be no one who will guide us,
ii. 4. 5. 01 avTOfioX^aavres, the deserters, i. 7.13. T&v dWwv rbv fiov\6-
fievov, of the rest [him that] any one that wished, i. 3. 9. (b) "Airavra yap
ToXjJLweri 5ecva (paiverai, ' appear fearful to the venturous/ Eur.
c. "flv or -Y€v6|X€vos definitive is often omitted. See 526. (d) The
Part, used substantively sometimes takes the Gen. or a possessive adjec-
tive, instead of the proper case of the verb (chiefly in poetry) : "0 r eK«C-
vov [= iKelvov] T€K(Jov, his father, Eur. Tr)s Ijtfjs K€KT7fpevrjs Ar.
e. A descriptive participle is sometimes joined with cifxC : ''Hi' . .
tpoaews i<rxbv STjXcocras, he was one who exhibited strength of genius, Th.
679. The Participle with such verbs as dpi, ylyvofuu, fyo,
cpxopai, otxofxai, &c, often takes the place of a simple verb,
either to supply some deficiency in inflection, or for the sake
of .more definite, emphatic, or metrical expression :
a.) With Substantive Verbs : *Hv . . tnrevStov [= torirevdev], he was
seeking, Eur. ZiiVra ep.k iav clvtu, to permit me to live, vii. 6. 30. M77
irpoSovs r)pJas "yevrj, do not abandon us, Soph, (a) The substantive verb
is sometimes omitted : AedoypJv [sc. iariv], . . rirjvde Ka.rQa.vdv, ' it is de-
cided,' Soph. (P) The Perf. Part, with eifu is especially common, either
to supply the deficiencies in the inflection of the complete tenses (300 b,
317 s), or to direct the attention more expressly to the state consequent
upon an action : *&<toj> iKweirT^Kdres, were fallen, ii. 3. 10.
b.) "Ex» commonly gives or strengthens the idea of possession, continu-
ance, or persistency (holding on ; cf. 674 g) ; and is most frequent with
the Aor. act. part., and in the dramatists : IloXXd. xp^ara gx t xev dvripTa-
Kores, we have [many things, having seized them] seized many things, i.
3. 14. 'ATip,a<ras e"x ei -> h e has persistently dishonored, Soph. Ant. 22.
c.) "Epxo(*at with the Fut. Part, forms a more immediate Future.
*EpXop.at aTro8avot)p.evos wvi, I am going to die now, PI. Theag. 129 a.
d.) The Part, of a verb of motion with ol'xoiwu is a stronger form of
expression for the simple verb. "Siixero a-n-iibv vvktos, he [departed going
off J went off in the night, iii. 3. 5. So Br) <pevywv, he fled, B. 665.
680. Rule X. A Participle is often preceded by a>s or
&a7T€p, chiefly to mark it as subjective;
That is, as expressing the view, opinion, feeling, intention, or statement
of some one, whether in accordance with or contrary to fact. The Part,
thus construed may be either (a) dependent or (b) absolute, (c) It often
supplies the place of a finite verb or Inf. ; and is sometimes complementary
in force, though circumstantial in form (with words of thinking, saying,
&c). E.g.,
(a) HepacXda iv alrig. elxov cos ird<ravra, they blamed P. as having per-
suaded [because, as they complained, he had persuaded], Th. 2. 59. 2i>\-
\ap.(3avei Kvpov cos diroKTevcov (598 b). (b) Uaprryyei^e . ., cos iiriPovXcv-
ovtos Ttercracpepvovs, he gave command, [as he would, T. plotting] as if T.
were plotting, i. e. on the ground alleged (whether truly or not), that T.
was plotting, i. 1. 6. Ka.TaKeLp.eea, coenrep efjov, we lie, as if it were per-
mitted, iii. 1. 14. (c) 'fls p-rjSev €t8oV tudt p.e, [know me as knowing] be
assured that I know nothing, Soph. Ph. 253. '&s iroX€[u>v flvros, , % .
dxayyeXQ, I shall report [as I should, war existing] that there is war, ii.
1. 21. 'Os ip:ov odv tdvros, . . ovtcj ttjv yvAp-wv £%ere [so have your opinion,
as if I were going] be assured that I shall go, i. 3. 6.
§ 685. VERBAL ADVERB. R. Y., XXXVI. 321
681. So the particles &t€, otov, ota, worre (Ion.), may precede the
Part., especially in presenting a cause or other circumstance as actual:
Kvpos, are ircus 8m . ., tfdero, C., as [he naturally would be] being a boy,
was pleased, Cyr. Ota 5r) irats cpiXoaTopyos ibv <f>foei, 7)<nra£eTo lb.
in. Verbal in -tcos (Lat. -ndus).
682. The passive verbal in -reos, expressing obligation or neces-
sity, is often used impersonally, in the neut. sing, or plur., with earl-
and from some verbs it can be only so used (571 e, 589 ; ef. Lat.
-dum est). In this use, it is equivalent to the Inf. act. or mid. with
del or xph '• ^KeTrreov ecrriv [= crKeTrreo-Bai Set], considerandum est, it is
to be considered [= ice ought to consider]. See i. 3. 11. Hence it imi-
tates this Inf. in two ways, as follows :
Eule Y. Impersonal verbals in -reov, or -rea, (a) govern the
same cases as the verbs from which they are derived ; and (b)
have sometimes the agent in the Ace, instead of the Bat. (458) :
(a) IlavTa iroiyre'ov, we must do all things (572), hi. 1. 18 (cf. irdvra
Tconp-e'a. § 458). Oi)s ov irapadoria rocs 'Afh\va.loi$ iarlv, whom we must
not give up to the Athenians, Th. 1. 86. (b) Kara/Bare" ov o$v iv /xtpei i-Ka-
ottov, each one there/ore must descend in turn, PI. Rep. 520 d.
683. Constructions are sometimes blended ; as, (a) The impersonal
with the personal construction of the verbal, (b) The Dat. of the agent
with the Ace. : *H|uv vevariov . . IXirC^ovras, we must swim, hoping, PL
CHAPTER IV.
SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLE.
684. The particle, in its full extent, includes the Adverb,
Preposition, Conjunction, and Interjection.
a. The name is specially given to short and familiar words of these
classes, chiefly cliaracleristic adverbs and conjunctions (66).
b. The Interjection is independent of grammatical construction.
But, as expressing pleasure or pain (and thus, indirectly, good or evil),
surprise, &c, or as a sign of address or exclamation (65 c), it may itself
be modified by a Gen. or Dat. (429 e, 453), or may introduce a Nom.,
Ace, or Yoc. (401b, 476 a, 484). Among the interjections, are &, &, 2,
e, S, &, <&, at, ot, fxv, 6d, lib, lav, loti, eta eja, <pev, &6t, evoi evoe, oval vse.
A. The Adverb.
685. Rule XXXVI. Adverbs modify sen-
tences, phrases, and words ; chiefly verbs, adjectives,
and other adverbs : as,
COMP. GR. 14* U
322 SYNTAX. ADVERBS. — NEGATIVE. §685.
IlaXiv T)p<bT7)<rev, again he ashed, i. 6. 8. 'OpOla lo-yvpais, very steep.
a. If an adverb proper modifies any other part of speech, it is through
the included idea of a verb, adjective, or adverb : Trjs . . irdX.iv Kara-
/3d<rews, tlie descent back, Th. 7. 44 (KaTafialvu), to descend).
b. An adverb modifying a sentence or phrase is usually parsed as
modifying the verb or leading word of the sentence or phrase ; while it
may also give a special emphasis or bear a special relation to some other
word (57 d, 59 d) : 'Hfiets ye viKUfiev, we at least are victorious, ii. 1. 4.
'Apiaios, . . Kal ovtos . . Treiparai, Ariozus, even HE attempts, iii. 2. 5.
c. Some classes of adverbs, specially termed particles, are chiefly char-
acteristic in their use (684 a) : as,
Negative ov, fir), not (regularly preceding the words which they modi-
fy) ; Interrogative, Direct <tpa, % ov, fir), fiQp, Indirect el, dpa, Ep. r), if,
wliethcr, fir) whether not, Alternative irorepov . . r) utrum . . an, el . . f),
elre . . etre, Ep. r) . . t), whether . .or; Contingent &v, k4 (618 s) ; Con-
firmative 8r) (389 d), drjra, 8rjdev, 8al, r), fir)v, rol (27 f), Ep. 6r)v, indeed,
truly, surely, forsooth, pal, vr), fid (476 d) ; Emphatic or Intensive 7^, yovv
(ye 1 ovv), irip (389), koX even, ov8e, fir)8{, not even; Additive Kal also, ri et
(389 j) ; Illative odv (389 g), &pa (Ep. pa, &p) accordingly, then, v6v, Ep. vt,
now, yap (ye" &p) ; Distinctive fUv on the one, hand, 8e" on tlie other hand.
686. Negative Particles. The general rule for the use
of ov and pi), whether simple or in composition, is this : —
Negation, as desired, feared, or assumed, uses fir) ; but other-
wise, ov. Hence,
a. The Subjunctive and Imperative take p^ ; but (b) the Indicative
and Optative, only in forms of wishing (638, 648 d), and in final and con-
ditional clauses (including those in 641, 642). (c) The Infinitive usually
takes pi], except in Indirect Discourse ; and (d) the Participle, ov, except
when it has the office of a conditional or indefinite relative clause (635, 641).
(e) So where a participial or infinitive idea is involved, (a) Mr) iroi^<rj|s,
Mr)8' €iriK€V0€ (628 c). (b) Ofrr av 8vvcup.uv, fi-rrr ^iriorTai(iT]V \eyeiv,
I could not, and may I never be able to say, Soph. Ant. 686. Ei fir) ravrd
[co-nv], ovSt rd8e, if that is not, neither is this, PI. See 624 s, 631 s.
(c) M77 kX£itt€iv, not. to steal, Cyr. 1. 2. 2. Ov pepvTjordaC at <pa<nv, they
say that you will not remember (609), i. 7. 5. (d) Mr) *yi-yvop.€v«v rwu
lepQp, if the sacrifices were adverse, vi. 4. 19. Ta fir) fivra cos ovk Bvra,
to represent] whatever is not as not existing, iv. 4. 15. (e) Ofiroi <pl\a tcL
|x9| <f>£Xa [sc. Bira], the displeasing cannot be pleasing, Eur. Tro. 466.
f. The Epic Subj. for the Fut. ind. naturally takes o* (617 b).
g. After et whether, and in dependent sentences of the form "whether
. . or not," or "what . . and whatnot," both ov and p,Vj are used.
h. After juL a second negation in the same clause is usually expressed
by ov ; and after ov, by u^j : AtSoiKa \ii\ ovk ?x w > I f ear ^ esi I ma V noi
Imve, i. 7. 7. Ov u^ \a\r)<r e is ; (597 e.) See 627. > .
i. Ov forms combinations with single words (akin to composition), in
which it may remain where general rules require \l4\. These often belong
to the figure Litotes, so prevalent in Greek (70 m, cf. 654). E. g., oH
(prjfiL /[do not say] deny (662 b), ovk edw I forbid, ov iroWolfew.
687. Interrogative Particles, a. The chief are &pa (Post-
Homeric, a stronger form of &pa, accordingly) and ^ (indeed), (b) These
do not themselves indicate the answer expected ; while dpa ov (or simply
ov) implies that an answer is expected in the affirmative, but dpa \i.-f\
§ G89 PREPOSITION. R. XXXVII. 323
(or ^ p^j, or simply jj^j, or |xcov contracted from pjj o$v), in the negative :
*A/)' oik Ap eirl trdv 2\doi ; would he not resort to every means? iii. 1. 18.
Mrj <xol 8oKoDfj.ev; [we do not seem to you, do we ?] do we seem to you?
B. The Preposition.
688. Rule XXXVII Prepositions govern
adjuncts, and mark their relations (58 c) : as,
'Qpfidro a-rrb I^dpSeuv, kclI ii-eXatvei Bid rijs Avdias . . €irl rbv MaiavSpov,
he set out from Sardis, and marches through L. to the Mceander, i. 2. 5.
a. More particularly, ami, and, c£, and 7rpo govern the Genitive ;
iv and ovv, the Dative ; ova and els, the Accusative ; dpcpi, did,
Kara, fierd, and imp, the Genitive and Accusative ; ini, napd,
wepi, 7rp6s, and vtto, the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative.
b. The Dat. sometimes follows apfyt, dvd, and perd in the poets ; and
d|A(f>t even in prose, chiefly Ion. : 'A/*0i re fiovaiKrj, about music, Hdt.
c. The eighteen words above mentioned are all which are commonly
termed prepositions in Greek (from the use in 387), though other words
may have a prepositional force (703 a), (d) 'Ev and trp6, by the addition
of s (expressing motion or action), become (evs, cf. 156, 154) «ls or 4s, and
irpos (689 a, i). Els prevails in Att. prose, except Thue ; but «s in Ion.
and Dor. ; while the poets may choose according to the metre.
e. To the prepositions governing the Ace, must be added the Ep. suffix
-8c, to (cf. 252, 382) : OtiXvfiirdvde, to Olympus, A. 425 (cf. irpb^OXvfnrov 420).
689. The prepositions have primary reference to the rela-
tions of place, and are used to express other relations by reason
of some analogy, either real or fancied (many similar extensions
of use appearing in our own and other languages). The use
of the different cases with prepositions may be commonly re-
ferred with ease to familiar principles in the doctrine of cases.
1. Place. Some prepositions merely show what place is referred to,
while the relation to this place is marked by the case employed ; so that
the same preposition may be used with different cases. From the place
is expressed by the Gen. ; into (or, with like sense, to) the place, by the
Ace; in or at the place by the Dat., or sometimes the Gen. ; through the
place, commonly by the Ace. Cf. 398, 433, 470 a, e. The following are
the chief distinctions of place denoted by the prepositions.
a. Within. 'Ev, Lat. in with Abl., [in the space within] in : iv M iXrp-cp,
in M., i. 1. 7. Els, Lat. in with Ace, [into the space within] into: els
ireSLov, into a plain, i. 2. 22. 'E£, ex, [from within] out of: e/c rrjs x^>-
pas, out of Die land, i. 2. 1. Aid, akin to hio and Lat. dis-, [through the
space within, dividing it in two] through: with Ace poet.; commonly
with Gen. : did $pvyias, [in a line dividing] through Phrygia, i. 2. 6.
b. With. Svv cum [in the place with] with : abv vpup, with you, i. 3. 6.
' Air<J ab, [from the place with] from : dir dWrjXcay, from, each other, i. 8.
e Amid, among, hence with: Merd, akin to fieaos medius, and Germ.
mit : veicp&v fierd, [in the midst of] among the dead, Eur. Hee 209 ; fierh.
T/owas, into the midst of the Trojans, A. 460. Mera irpdiroiai A. 64.
324 SYNTAX. R. XXXVII. PREPOSITION. § 689.
d. Beside. Ilapa ukv Kfyou, [from beside] from Cyrus, i. 9. 29 ; vecpa
Kvpw, [at the side of] with C, i. 4. 3 ; Trapa Kvpov, [to the side of] to C.
e. About. 'A\l$C, akin to &[i<p(o and Lat. amfto, am&-, on, both sides of,
hence, on different sides of, about : dp.<pl rd 8pia, [through the region on
both sides of] about the borders, Cyr. 2. 4. 16 ; dp.<pl . . irbXios, [in the
region] about the city, Hdt. 8. 104. See 527 a, 688 b.
f. Around. LTepC, akin to Lat. per : irepl rb aTparbirebov, [through
the circuit] around the camp, v. 1. 9 ; irepl rots aripvois, around the breast.
g. On, upon, or against (as in cases of resting, leaning, pressing, &c, on
or against). 'Eirl rod I'inrov, [in a position] on his horse, iii. 4. 49 ; iwi
rrj OaXdrrv, upon [by] the sea, i. 4. 1.; dva(3ds i<f> 'iirirov, mounting [to a
position] on horseback, iv. 7. 24 ; iirl ddXarrav, to the seaside, iv. 8. 22.
h. Over against. 'Avti, akin to Lat. ante, very rare in its local sense.
i. Before. Up6 prae, pro : irpb irobQv, [in the way] before the feet, iv.
6. 12. To mark more active relations, and the idea of fronting, $ is added
to irpb (688 d) : dyei irpbs fiaaCXe'a, he is leading [to a position fronting]
against the king, i. 3. 21 ; irpbs Neuias, [in the direction fronting] towards
Nemea, Th. 5. 59; irpbs Ba(3vXC>vi, in front of Babylon, Cyr. 7. 5. 1.
j. Over, above. 'Yirip super: virep . . irir pas, from above the rock, iv.
7. 4 ; virep KetpaXrjs, over head, Ages. 2. 20 ; pnrre'ovcn virep rbv &p.ov, they
throw it [to a place over and beyond] over the shoulder, Hdt. 4. 188.
k. Under, beneath. 'Yird sub : virb £fryov, virb dud^vs, from under the
yoke, 5. 39 ; vi. 4. 22 ; virb to?s 5i<f>pois, [in the space] under the seats, i.
8. 10 ; el/x virb yalav, I shall go [to the region] beneath the, earth, 2. 333.
1. Up. 'Ava. . . fitXadpov, up to the roof, x- 239 ; dvd t<x 6pv, up through
the mountains, iii. 5. 16 ; dvd (TK-qirrp^, on a sceptre, A. 15 (688 b).
m. Down. Kara rrjs irir pas, down from the rock, iv. 2. 17 ; /caret pbov,
down [along] stream ; Kara tt)v bbbv, along the way ; Kara yr\v, by land.
690. 2. Time. 'Ev rpuslv rjfiipais, in three days, iv. 8. 8. 'E<j>'
■fjjxuiv, in our time, i. 9. 12. Aid, wkt6s, through the night, iv. 6. 22. 'A|a<{>1
5elkr)i>, about eveni'ng, ii. 2. 14. Ilpb rrjs iidxns, before the battle, i. 7. 13.
MeTd rqv fidxyv, after the battle, lb. 'Airb yeveds, from birth, ii. 6. 30.
691. 3. State. 'Ev iroXi/icp, et$ ir6Xep.ov, Ik iroXi/xov, in (into, out
of) a state of war, vi. 1. 29 ; e£ taov, [from equal ground] on an equality,
iii. 4. 47. 'Eirl t£ d8eX<p$, dependent upon his brother, i. 1. 4 ; £<j> i)/juv,
in our power, v. 5. 20. 'YinJ <roi, under you^ power, vii. 7. 32.
692. 4. Comparison. Ilpd ye &XXwv, before [more than] others, PI.
'Yirip iXiriba, above hope, Soph. Ant. 366. Ilepl irdvruv, superior to all,
A. 287 (the greater surrounding the less). Ilapa rd &XXa f(pa, [by the
side of] in comparison with the other animals, Mem. 1. 4. 14.
5. Number, Addition, Distribution. 'Aiwpl rovs diaxiXiovs (531 d).
Els xiXtcws, to the number of 1,000, i. 8. 5. Xlpbs tovtols, in addition to
these, iii. 4. 13. 'Avd enarbv, [according to or by the hundred] a hundred
each., iii. 4. 21. KaT eviavrbv, [by the year] yearly, iii. 2. 12.
693. 6. Origin, Source, Material, &c. Teyov&s airfc Aa/napdrov,
sprung from D., ii. 1. 3. <Pu>s . . ck Ai6s, a light from Jove, iii. 1. 12 ; iK
%vXwv, [out of] of wood, Hdt. 1. 194. AtVeZV irapd roirroi;, to ask from him,
i. 3. 16. 'OXiyoi dirb itoXXCjv, few [from] of many, Th. 1. 110.
7. Protection (defenders stand before, over, around). Mdx^Oai . .
irpb yvpaiKwv, to fight [before] for their wives, 0. 56 ; irpb v/jlwv, in your
behalf, vii. 6. 27. Maxbp-evoi virfcp Ktipov, fighting [over] in defence of C,
i. 9. 31. 'AfiOvovrai irepl tIkvwv, figM for their young, M. 170.
§ G99. IN COMPOSITION. RULE z. 325
694. 8. Cause, Motive, End, Aim. 'Airb tovtov, [from] on ac-
count of this, Hilt. 2. 42. 'E£ viroxf/Las, [out of] /mw. suspicion, ii. 5. 5.
Aid irlo-Tews, through confidence, iii. 2. 8. Aid Kav/xa, [through] by rea-
son of t/ie heat, i. 7. 6. LTcpl yi/c^s, [ahout] for victory, i. 5. 8.
9. Action. This is commonly conceived of as proceeding out of the
agent, or from him, or from his spJiere, or from under his influence (ck,
dirp, irapd, irpcs, vird, 586, d, f).
695. 10. Means, Instrument, Manner. 'Airb Xrjareias, [from]
by means of robbery, vii. 7. 9. 2i>v alxp-v, w ^ ^ e spear, i&seh. ; criV r£
diKaicp, with justice, justly, ii. 6. 18. Mer* dSi/a'as, unjustly, lb. Aid
ra-X^v, [through quick measures] rapidly, i. 5. 9. 'Ara Kpdros, [up to
one's strength] a£ ,/wJI speed, i. 10. 15. Ilpbs piav, [resorting to] by
force, JEsch. Pr. 208. 'Yirb /tacrriywj/, ttiufer the lash, iii. 4. 25.
696. 11. Connection, Conformity, Separation, Opposition,
Substitution. Evv roh deois, with the help of tlie gods, ii. 3. 23. Ilpbs
rod Kvpov rpdirov, [looking towards] according to the character of C, i. 2.
11. Kard cirovdqp, [according to haste] Jiastily, vii. 6. 28; see 513 b.
ITapd (pvcriu, [beside] against nature, Th. 6. 17. Keywv ko.8' thjlCjv, speak-
ing against us, Soph. Ph. 64. 'Avrl rofrruv, [over against] in return for
this, vi. 6. 32 ; dvr iiceLvov, instead of him, i. 1. 4.
697. 12. Appeal, Theme, Reference, Specification, &c. Ilpbs
0euw, [before] by the gods, vii. 6. 33. 'Ap<pl <rrjs A^yw 7rcu56s, / speak
about your daughter, Eur. IIcpl ifxk &5ikos, unjust [about] towards me,
i. 6. 8. Kara yvufxyir, as to intellect, Soph. Ilpbs raOra, tft view; of this,
upon this, i. 6. 9. 'Es <pi\lav, in respect to friendship, ii. 6. 30.
698. a. In many connections the preposition may be either em-
ployed or omitted, at pleasure : Kpavyrj iroWr), Svv iroWrj Kpavyrj, with
great clamor, i. 7. 4 ; iv. 4. 14. (b) In Greek, as in other languages,
prepositions with their cases form many adverbial phrases. See 382 a.
c. In composition, a preposition usually shows its original meaning, or
one that is easily derived from it : dva(Kara, els, e/c) paitxa, to go up (down y
in, out) ; Karave^w I [nod down] consent, dvavevu, I [nod up] refuse.
699. Rule Z. A preposition in composition often gov-
erns the same case as when it stands by itself.
a. A preposition in composition often retains its distinct force and
government as such, according to this rule, (b) But oftener it seems
to be regarded as a mere adverb (cf. 703 b), and the compound is con-
strued just as a simple word wotild be of the same signification. See 486.
(c) Hence the preposition may be repeated, or a similar preposition in-
troduced, (d) This adverbial force is particularly obvious in tmesis, and
(e) when the preposition is used with an ellipsis of its verb (chiefly tori).
E. g., (a) 1,vv^Tr€fi\f/€v awTTj (TTpaTiurras, lie sent with Iter soldiers, i. 2. 20.
Hence compounds of Kara, against, often take the Gen. (cf. 689 m, 696) :
Ka.Ta8iKa.fa ep.avTov, I give judgment against myself, vi. 6. 15. (b) 'Eirt-
xAetVas avrw, sailing against him, Hel. 1. 6. 23 (cf. 7r\eii> €ir* awovs lb.
1. 11). (c) 'Evei.pQvro cl<r(3d\X.€iv cts tt\v KiXudav, they attempted to enter
[into] C., i. 2. 21. (d) 'Ek 8e Tr^o-as. See 388 c. (e) 'AW &va [for
dmiTTTidi] e£ ebpdvwv, but [rise] up from the scats, Soph. Aj. 194. EtVeX-
Oeiv irdpa [for Trdpeo-Tc], it is permitted to enter, Eur. Ale. 1114. Cf. 785.
f. The preposition, as such, and the general sense of the compound,
often require the same case, as, particularly, in compounds of o,vt£, diro,
326 SYNTAX. R. XXXVIII. CONJUNCTIONS. § G99.
!& cts, irp<5, and trvv : 'Airixovres aW^Xcov, distant from each oilier (405),
ii. 4. 10. (g) Verbs compounded with €ir£, irapd, or irpos, denoting ap-
proach, commonly take the Dat. (449), though the preposition by itself
would govern the Ace: Upoaipxerai t<£ ^€vo<pt5vTi, comes to X., iv. 8. 4.
h. Tmesis, so called, occurs chiefly in the earlier (especially the Epic)
Greek, when as yet the union of the preposition and verb had not become
firmly cemented ; and is here often to be regarded as the adverbial use of
the preposition (703 b), rather than the division of a word already com-
pounded, (i) In Att. prose it is very rare, and even. in Att. poetry
(where it is most frequent in the lyric portions), it seldom inserts any-
thing more than a mere particle or enclitic pronoun between the preposi-
tion and verb, (j) The preposition sometimes follows the verb ; and is
sometimes repeated without the verb. E. g., (h) *AirJ> \ocybv dpvvcu
(388 c) A. 67. (i) Aid p ftpOcipas, K<vrd 8' gicmvas, you have ruined and
slain me, Eur. Hipp. 1357. (j) Il€m|m,VTOS, & ytivai, yAra, 'having sent
me for you,' Eur. Hec. 504. *Airo\ci ttoKlv, dirb 8e irartpa, destroy the
city and his father, Id. Here. 1055. So, "flpvwo 5' . . ' Ayafitfivuv, dv
[sc. &pvvTo] 5' 'Odvcretis, tlien rose Agamemnon and [up] Ulysses, T. 267.
C. The Conjunction.
700. Eule XXXVIII. Conjunctions con-
nect sentences and like parts of a sentence : as,
'Hadfrei Aapdos Kal viruirreve, Darius was sick and apprehended, i. 1. 1.
a. By like parts of a sentence are meant those of like construction, or
performing like offices in the sentence, and which united by conjunctions
form compound or complex subjects, predicates, <fcc. (62 g). They are com-
monly, but not necessarily, of the same part of speech and of similar form.
701. The chief conjunctions are the following, in two great
classes according as they are used in coordination or subordi-
nation (62) :
1. Coordinate, (a) Copulative (simply coupling) ri (389 j), Kal (the
stronger and more emphatic), que, et, and; re . . ri, Kal . . Kal, and
closest re Kal, both . . and; compounds otire . . ovre, pLrp-e . . fi-qre, neque
. . neque, neither . . nor (686). (b) Adversative (denoting opposition)
dXXd, drdp, pcVroi, sed, at, but, yet. (c) Distinctive (weakly adversative,
often approaching the copulative) §4 but, and, to which piv corresponds ;
compounds -fide" poet., Ide" and -nptv Ep. ; ovM, p.r)8e, and not, but not,
neither, nor even, (d) Alternative % i}4 Ep., aut, vel, or; compounds tfre
Ep. (389 j), strengthened ifrot ; fj . . ij, frot . . ij, either . . or.
2. Subordinate, (e) Final (denoting purpose, or end) I'va, 8ir«s, «$,
6<ppa poet., ut, quo, in order that; pVj ne, lest. See 624. (f) Conditional
el si (cf. 141), at Dor. and Ep., iav, fo "riV, ef kc Ep., if; eijrtp siquidem,
if indeed; el firj, iav fx^, nisi, unless; etre . . etre, rarer efre . . ^, el . .
etre poet., sive . . sive, tvhetlier, or. See 631, 619 a. For k(f> & i<j> $re,
on condition that, see 557 a. (g) Concessive (denoting concession, or ad-
mission) ei Kal, icalct» etsi, even if, though; to which Spws tamen, yet,
corresponds. See 674 f. (h) Temporal (marking a relation of time) irpiv
before, akin to irp6 and Lat. prius ; irplv -fj priusquam ; pcypi, d\ps <&s>
&tt€ (es, ri, 389 j ; Post-Hom.), donee, until. Most temporal connectives are
relative adverbs (641 d). (i) Complementary (66 d) 6r\, 8 Ep., quod, that;
«s, tfirws chiefly poet., [how] that; d (f), 1\ Ep., num, whether; ir<$Tcpov
§ 703. INTERCHANGE OF PARTICLES. 327
(Trorepa) . . V\, el . . V\, rfre . . efrre, &pa . . 4), 4) . . 1) Ep., utrum . . an, whether
. . or. See 643, 639a. (j) Causal 8ti quod, quia, because; cos, as,
SMW0 ; 8tc, e'lrel', quando, swice ; Stdri (8t 8 Tt), ovvexa, oOovveica [on ac-
count of this that, 557 a] because ; "yap (7^ &pa, at least in accordance with
this, 685 c) nam, for, since, (k) Consecutive (denoting result, or conse-
quence) omttc, cos, ut, 50 that (671 d, e). (1) Comparative ij quam, than
(511, 513). (111) Exceptive irX^v, dXV ^ [o£/ier ffiattj 11], A pvtf| nisi, (irt
[ii\ (n ; after a negative), except, d /xij el (714. 2) nisi si, #eccp£ [if].
Note. In Greek, as in other languages, conjunctions have their origin,
for the most part at least, in other parts of speech used connectively.
E. g., (n) Neuter Puonouns, 8ti, 8, quod, that, as A^yei tin &£ei, he
says [what follows] that he will lead, iv. 7. 2Q ; 6n jx^ (m), as ov Sets . .
6Vt (xt) yvv-f), no one [that was not] except a woman, Hdt. 1. 181 ; 8ioti,
ovvexa (j) ; dXXd (from neut. pi. of ttMos, 483 a) otherwise, on the con-
trary, but ; dXX' V\ (m), as apytipiov p,eu ovk £x w > <*^X' V fUKpov re, / Imve
no money [other than] except a little, vii. 7. 53. See h, 624 e.
702. a. "On {that, the thing which) is stronger, more positive, di-
rect, or actual in expression than «s (how, the manner in which). Hence,
in indirect discourse, 8ti chiefly introduces what is simply said and not
questioned ; cos, what is described, or what is sate? but questioned, or what
is wo£ said, or what is presented as thought or wo£ thought : Ac-yei cos d,7re-
Kb-K-qvav . ., koX 8ti redi'SLai . . ctXXot, Ac spates how £Aey /tac£ foe?i beaten off,
and that otliers are dead, iv. 2. 17. 'EpckuXouv e/ioi, cos fiaWou fi^Xoi /not, tJiey
brought against me tlie charge (which I do not admit), tliat I cared more,
vii. 7. 44. Ov touto Xt'-yco, cos ov 5e?, / cfo ?io£ say this, tlvxt one ought not.
b. A conjunction often connects the sentence which it introduces, not
so much to the preceding sentence as a whole, as to some particular word
or phrase in it : Ylpoo-fiaXKovai. . . KaTaXiirovres &(f>oSov rots -rroXepiois, d
PovXoivto (fttv-yeiv, they attack, leaving a wa,y of escape for the enemy, if
they should wish to flee, iv. 2. 11.
c. In many connections, two forms of construction are equally admis-
sible, the one with, and the other without, a connective. The two forms
are sometimes blended. See 511, 644, 659 e, 671. A conjunction is
sometimes used in Greek, where none would be usual in English.
A twofold construction is sometimes admissible, according as a word is
regarded as belonging (d) to a compound part of a sentence, or (e) to a
new sentence : (d) II\ou<r{UTe/)tf> flip av . . ^ €|iol e8L8ovs, you would give
to a richer man than I [am], Cyr. (e) Tots . . fidWov aKfidfovariv, -j) ty<a
[sc. d/c/idfw], TrapcuvQ, I exhort those of greater vigor than myself, Isoc.
OBSERVATIONS.
703. 1. Interchange. In Greek, as in other languages,
the uses of the particles are often interchanged. Thus,
1.) a. Adverbs sometimes take a case, as prepositions;
(b) prepositions are sometimes used without a case, as ad-
verbs, especially in Horn, and Hdt. (7rpov even in Att. prose) ;
(c) the same particle is used both as an adverb and as a con-
junction, or as a connective and a non-connective adverb.
(a) See 405 s, 436 d, 445 c, 450. Horn, uses eftrco and &rto as protracted
forms for ds : 'Ay ay yeny 'i<r<a kXio-itju, 'into the tent'; "IXiov etVw, cf. ets
328 PARTICLES. INTERCHANGE. § 703.
"IXiov ' 0. 155, 145, 143. (b) Td8e X<fyw, dpdau re irp<$s [sc. Toirry], this
I say, and will do it [in addition to this] too, iEsch. Ilpbs 8' £ti iii. 2. 2.
Ilept, [above others] eminently, 0. 44. (c) Kvpov 8i (a?w?) pi.eTa7rep.ire-
rai ... /cat arpaTrfybv 8« (o?i 2/w: o^Aer Aa?ic?, afoo) ayroj' diredei£e i. 1. 2.
d. In the connection of sentences, irpiv is variously used : (a) as a con-
junction, with a finite mode, or (P) as a preposition, with the Inf. ; (y)
as an adverb with ^ and a finite mode or (8) even the Inf., or (c) in
Horn, with 6re ; or (£) as a correlative (and so irdpos, irpd<r0€v, irpoTtpov)
preceding another irp£v : (a) Ma? are'va^e irpiv pdSrjs (641 d). (P) 'Edijero
irpiv tlvi climv, lie sacrificed before speaking to any one, v. 6. 16. (y) llpiv
i) . . t-y^vovro, [sooner than] before tliey had come, Ages. 2. 4. (8) llpiv
•>) . . dcrcu, before lie satiates, E. 288. (t) llpiv y 8tc . . 8u>k€v, until [when]
he gave, M. 437. (t) O&Sc ris ItXt] irpiv irie'tv irpiv Xeltpai, nor did any
one dare to drink [previously] before offering, H. 480.
e. When two prepositions are combined, which occurs most frequently
in the Epic, either one or both of the prepositions are used adverbially,
or one of the prepositions with its substantive forms the complement of
the other : 'Ap.<pi irepi Kp-tynv, round about the fountain, B. 305. 'Airo-
irpo, far away, II. 669. 'T7r etc fieXtwv, from beneath the weapons, A. 465.
704. 2.) One preposition or adverb is often nsed for an-
other (or a preposition is used with one case for another), by
reason of something associated or implied. This construction
(especially frequent with iv, tls, and e/e, 689 a) is termed, from
its elliptic expressiveness, construct™ prcegnans. Thus,
A sign of motion for one of rest, (a) Preposition : Oi «k ttjs dyopas
. . 2<pvyov [e/c for ev, by reason of ?<pvyov following], t/iose in the market
fled [from it], i. 2. 18. 'E<pdvr) Xis . . cis bbbv, a lion appears [having come
into] in the way, 0. 275. Uaprjaav «ts Zdpdeis i. 2. 2. (b) Adverb : Tow
2v8o0€v [for Zvdov] tis eltreveyicdTU), let one of those within [coming from
within] carry in, Ar. PI. 228. (c) Case : Ilpbs to irvp Kadryxevos, going
to the fire and sitting by it, Ar. Vesp. 773.
A sign of rest for one of motion, (d) Preposition : 'Ev yovva<n
iriirre, fell [and rested] upon the knees, E. 370. (e) Adverb : "Oirov [for
otol] fiePyKev, where [for whither] lie lias gone, Soph. Tr. 40. (f ) Case :
llpds ircTpTjon fiaXwv, dashing upon the rocks, t. 284.
705. 3.) The Greeks, especially the earlier writers, often
employ the looser and more generic for the closer and more
specific connectives (63 g), or for other forms of expression :
"Hdrj r t)v ev rip rpircf} <rTadp.§, ical Xeipi<ro(f>os avrcp exaXeiravdrj, it was
now the third day, and C. was angry with him [= when it was now, &c],
iv. 6. 2. 'AireiprjKevav fiev, fyiws 8* eboicei, [they were weary indeed, but
yet] although they were weary, yet it seemed, vi. 5. 30.
The student will not fail to remark, — (a) The frequent use, in the "Epic,
of 8« for -yap, and in general of coordination or simple succession, in the
connection of sentences, for subordination (62) : Hide<r0\ dp.<pu 8£ vewTepw
icrrdv, be persuaded, [and] for ye are both younger, A. 259. (b) The Ire-
quent use of -yap in specification, where we should use that, namely, &c :
Tu>8e 8rjXov i)v • Tr} p.ev -yap irp6<r0ev i)piipa . . e/cAet/e, was plain from this,
that on the preceding day he commanded, (c) The use of *n£ after a word
of sameness, likeness, or anticipation (677 f ) : Tfl avrfj yXuxrar) xP^ 0VTaL
Kal TeXwvoi, they use the same language [and] as the Geloni, Hdt.
§ 709. ellipsis. 329
706. ii. a. Adverbs and prepositional adjuncts are often nsed sub-
stantively or adjectively, in any case required : Substantively, Nom. *Hj>
. . virlp -fjfuo-v . . 'A/a/fdSes, above half were Arcadians, vi. 2. 10. Ace.
Ets fxiv &ira£ Kal $paxi>v xpovov, for once and a short time, Dem. 21. 1.
Adjectively, UeXraffral 5£ d\L$\ tovs 8«rx».Xious, about 2,000 targeteers,
i. 2. 9. See 526 s. (b) An adverb and a preposition governing it are often
written together as a compound word : kaael forever, e/Mwpoadev.
707. in. In the doctrine of particles, especially connec-
tives, the figures of syntax hold an important place : thus,
a. Ellipsis.
Ellipsis here consists either (a) in the omission of the par-
ticles themselves, or (£), far more frequently, in that of words,
and even whole sentences, related to them.
a. A particle belonging alike to two parts of a sentence is either (a) ex-
pressed in both (the most distinct and emphatic form) ; or (b) in the first
only ; or (c) in the second only (more rarely and chiefly in poetry) ; or
(d) is sometimes even omitted in both, (e) A like variety obtains in
respect to other classes of words, and (f ) when more than two parts of the
sentence are affected, (a) 'Ev Alyrhrrip iced iv Si/ceXip, in E. and in S.,
Mem. 1. 4. 17. (b) IIpos re \p&xv Kai 0o.\ttj, to cold and heat, lb. 2. 1. 6.
(e) "H dXos •*) €irl 777s, either on sea or land, j*. 27. (d) *E7xos fipidv, fitya,
CTifiapbv, a spear, heavy, huge, stout, II. 801. (e) Ovdfr <ri> fiaWov ij rts
dXXos 2\€i, you have no more than any other one. PI. See g.
g. Copulative conjunctions are often omitted (especially if more than
two particulars are joined) ; (h) less frequently, those of other classes,
(i) When not joined by a connective, a clause is sometimes in parenthetic
or inverted order, or placed in apposition with another clause, (g) Ilddov
irarpiduv, yoviwv, yvvaucCbv, iralduw, from longing for country, parents,
wives, children, iii. 1. 3. (h) 'O^tta . . [sc. 8ri] €0v6firjp, I swear [that]
I sacrificed, vi. 1. 31. (i) Tavra, . . 6p.vvp.i . ., Zira&ov Cyr. v. 4. 31.
'A<pei\6p.r}v, ofioXoyQ, I rescued him, I confess, vi. 6. 17.
j. In annexing several particulars, the Eng. more frequently uses the
copulative with the last only ; but the Greek, with all or none : HKlvdot
Kai i-v\a Kal K^pafios (496 c). Cf. d, g.
k. A secondary connective is sometimes used without its primary (66) :
'Ofioiovs [ilv <pi\o<r6<pots, like philosophers indeed [but not philosophers], PL
708. j3. Connected sentences especially abound in ellipsis,
from the ease with which the omission can be supplied from
the connection. E. g., observe the frequent ellipses,
1.) In replies. These (a, b, c, d) have various forms. See 68 c.
e. In a dialogue or address, a speaker often commences with a connec-
tive (most frequently an adversative, distinctive, or causal conjunction^,
from reference to something which has been expressed or which is
mutually understood : 'AW bpare, but you see, iii. 2. 4. (f ) In like man-
ner, the Voc. is often followed by a connective : T yfoai, 6uofia Si <roi rl
ianv ; woman, but what is your name ? Mem. 2. 1. 26.
709. 2.) Between two connectives : 'AXXct [sc. iratouai] -ydp Kal
irepaiveu> ijdr) &pa, bid [no more, for] it is now quite time to stop (sed enim),
330 PARTICLES. ELLIPSIS. § 709.
iii. 2. 32. ITapa rty 6d\arrav rjet • Kal [sc. ravrig fjei] y&p ^8tj ii<T0£p€i, he
went by the sea; [and he so went,] for he was now sick, vi. 2. 18. —
(a) And yet, perhaps, in such examples as these, dXXd -yap or Kal -yap
may be regarded as forming but a single compound connective, or one of
the particles may be regarded as a mere adverb (703 c).
3.) With adversative and distinctive conjunctions, with which we must
sometimes supply the opposite of that which has preceded : Mrj /*' d-n.pi.op
tt)(t8' airoareLXriTe 777s, a\X' apx^Xovrop [sc. dii-affde], 'dismiss me not,
but receive me,' Soph. Cf. 572 b. — For ellipsis with ij, see 513, 567 f.
710* 4.) With conditional conjunctions : Et 5' [sc. fiodXeai] dye, if
you ivill, come, A. 302, and often in Horn. El 5' kdtXeis [sc. dye] «i>. 487.
El p.ep <t6 ti £x ets "7>ds vfids Xe"yeip [sc. X^ye 8if)] • cl 5e fxrj [sc. 2x ets ]> 7//*«s
irpbs <xk ^x°l J£V ' if U ou have anything to say to us, say it ; if not, we Ivave
to you; vii. 7. 15. *Av fifr 6 Kvpos potiXrp-ai [/caXws £x«] " et ' & f*V Cyr.
711. 5.) With »s, especially in expressing comparison, design, pre-
tence, possibility, &c. : QoLttop f) [sc. oirna raxv] &s tis up $ero, quicker than
[so quick as] one would have thought, i. 5. 8. 'fls eh fidxv TrapeaKevaapA-
pos, arrayed as [he would array] for battle, i. 8. 1. 'fis iwl rb iroXi, as
things are for the most part, commonly, iii. 1. 42. 'Us dXrjOQs, truly, PI.
a. 'fis, like our as, is remarkable for the variety of its use. It belongs
to four classes of conjunctions (701), and also performs various offices as a
connective adverb and as a modal sign (65 d). (b) It is often used to
render expressions of quantity less positive : "Exw [sc. ovtoj ttoXXoos] ws
irepTdKOffiovs, having such a number as 500, i. e. about 500, i. 2. 3.
(c) From its frequent use with the accusative after verbs of motion to ex-
press the purposed end of the motion (472 g), it came at last to be even
regarded as a preposition, supplying the place of irp<Js or els, but chiefly
before names of persons : nopefcrai cos /3aca\t*a, he goes [as] to the king, i.
2. 4. 'fts tcV 6p.01.op, to the like, p. 217.
712. y. Various ellipses occur with prepositions and adverbs : 'IXa-
pai de dvrl aKvdpwir&p [sc. yvvaiKtov, or = avrl too elpai o-KvOpwicoi] ij<rap, Kal
AptI ixpopiapApwp eouras ijdtus dXX-ZjXas iwpwp, they were cheerful instead of
[being] downcast, &c, Mem. 2. 7. 12. Efs [sc. rbp XP^ 0V ] # re > f or the
time when, /3. 99. 2iV ols fy" (554). See 557, 699 e, 703 b.
b. Pleonasm.
713. Under this head we remark,
1.) The redundant use of negatives. This appears chiefly,
a.) In connection with indefinites, which in a negative sentence are all
regularly combined with a negative : Oti-nroTe ipei ovdels, no one shall
[never] ever say, i. 3. 5. Ovdevl ov8ap,ij ovbafiQs ovdep.iap koivuvIclv ?x« PI.
b.) In divided construction, and (c) in the emphatic use of ovU and
p.T)84: Mrjdh reXelrw p,^JT€ ep.ol \l1\tc dXXy p.r)5epl, let him pay nothing
either to me or to any one else, vii. 1. 6. Ou p.ep 8r] ov8e tovt'&v tis enrol,
nor surely could any one say this, i. 9. 13. M77 toLpvp p.r}8£ vii. 6. 19.
d.') In the common (but not necessary) use of \ii\ with the Infinitive,
after words implying some negation : Nau/cX%ots dirctirc p-y Sidyeip, he
forbade tlie shipmasters to transport [saying that they should not trans-
port], vii. 2. 12. "E|«i too p.Tj KaraSvpat, will keep from sinking. ^ (e)^ Oi
is sometimes used in like manner, with a finite verb after 6ti or «s : Ap-
peladcu . ., 8ti ou Traprjp, to deny that he was present, Rep. A. 2. 17.
§ 716, PLEONASM. 331
f.) In the use of |x-f| ov for |i.4j } with the Infinitive (commonly) and Par-
ticiple (sometimes), after negative and interrogative clauses (sometimes after
expressions of shame, fear, and the like, from the negation implied). The
ov (as simply continuing the general negation of the sentence, cf. a, b, c)
may be here joined with \ki\, (g) even when this is redundant. E. g.,
(f) Ovdeis ye" p. dv ireiaeiev dvdpuirwv rb firj ovk e\6e?v, no one could per-
suade me not to go [no], Ar. Ran. 65. Ov yap dv p,aKpav txvevov avrbs, p.r)
ovk ^x o3V Tl vtiftpoXov, I could not trace it far of myself, [not having] with-
out some clew, Soph. 0. T. 220. "LVre irdo-w aicrx^W elvai, p.r) ov avairov-
bdfciv, so that all were aslvamed not to share his zeal, ii. 3. 11. (g) Ovk
€vavTiu>o~opLcu rb p.r} ov yeywvelv, I will not refuse to speak, iEsch. Pr. 787.
h.) In the occasional use of ov to strengthen the negative force of ij,
than : U6\u> oXrjv 5ia<p9eipai fjtdXXov f\ ov tovs airiovs, to destroy a wlwle
city, ratlier than [and not rather] the guilty ones, Th. 3. 36.
Two negatives in the same sentence have their distinct force, when one
applies to the whole sentence, and the other to a part only ; and so com-
monly (i) when the first is interrogative, or (j) the second is simple ov or
pf\ t after a negative of its own class (686), or (k) the two negatives are of
different classes : (i) Ov . . ov8i . . Bfoavrai ; are they not even unable ? iii.
1. 29. (j) Oi8els ovk eirao-xe, no one teas not affected, Symp. See 559 c.
(k) Ov . . dvvaficu p^ yeXav, I cannot help laughing, Ar. Ovre <riydv, ovre
|x-f| <Tiyav iEsch. See 597 e. For apparent exceptions, see f, g, 627.
714. 2.) The repetition of various particles for greater
clearness or strength of expression, particularly after interven-
ing clauses, in divided construction, and with important or em-
phatic words ; but sometimes, especially in poetry, for mere
euphony or rhythm :
"l&\eyev oti, el fir} . . irelaovTaL, 8ti KaraKao'crei, he said that, if they would
not obey, [that] he would burn, vii. 4. 5. Ovk &v Uavbs elvat. oX/mi, off b\v
<pi\ov d)<pe\r}o-ai, ovt b\v kx^pbv dXi^aadat, I do not think I should be able,
either to aid a friend, or to repel a foe, i. 3. 6. — And for like reasons,
3.) The addition of particles to words of similar meaning, and the use
of needless connectives : Olbdev otos, [solely] all alone, H. 226. 'Airb /8077s
£v€Ka, from shouting (so far as this was concerned), Th. 8. 92.
4.) Duplicate expressions with particles ; as (a) Positive and Nega-
tive : Ovk fyaffra, dWa p-dXio-ra, not the least, but (he most, Hdt. 2. 4.
(b) Whole and Part (for special distinction) : *£l Zcv koX deoj. PI.
c. Attraction and Anacoluthon.
715. The influence of attraction sometimes passes even
beyond a connective : as,
Ovde'v ye &\Xo early, ov epGxnv 61 dvOpwiroi, $i tov dyaBov [for rb dyadov,
through the attraction of ov], there is nothing else which men love, but the
good, PI. Conv. 205 e. IlaTpbs, eiirep nvbs [forns], crdivovTos, from a fa-
ttier powerful, if any one was, Soph. Aj. 487. See 667 g, 702 d.
716. a. Anacoluthon is frequent in the connection of
sentences, either from inadvertence or from preference (for the
sake of ease, emphasis, &c). The clause completing the con-
struction is often changed in form, or even omitted ; or (b) the
regular correspondence of particles may be neglected : as,
332 SYNTAX. PARTICLES. §716.
(a) 'fls . . ■fJKOvad rivos, 8ti KXiavSpos . . /xiWei rjj-eiv [for ws if/covcra, K.
pi.iX.Xei, or iJKOva-a, 6'ri K. /itWei], as I heard from some one, [that] C. is
about to come, vi. 4. 18. (b) Red ei . . 1} [for Kal el], both if . . [or] and if,
Th. 6. 64. Te . . eweira oV, both . . [but then] and, v. 5. 8.
c. After a connective, a distinct sentence often takes the place of a part
of a sentence, and (d) sometimes the reverse : (c) "AXXy re rpd-irip iretpd-
aavres, Kal firfxavrjv irpoo-fyyayov, both attempting in other ways, and [they
brought up] bringing up an engine, Th. 4. 100. See i. 10. 12 ; ii. 1. 7.
(d) Haprjp.iXovv . ., ovre yap . . 8i86vres [for eSLSocrap, as if yap had been
omitted], they slighted them, [not giving] for they did not give, Th. 1. 25.
717. iv. The Greek especially abounds in combinations of
particles, and in elliptical phrases having the power of particles.
The use of these sometimes extends farther than their origin
and structure would strictly warrant. E. g.,
a. &XXb>s tc kcxC, both otherwise and in particular, especially : OvSev vo~
fiifa dv8pl, &XXus re Kal dpxovri, KdXXlov etvai KTrjp.a vii. 7. 41.
b. 8fj\ov 8ti, it is evident that, evidently, ev 618' 8ti, 618' 8ti, <rd<p' tad'
8tl, and similar phrases, which are often inserted in sentences (quite like
adverbs), or annexed to them : To; p.kv 8rj Kvpov 8r}Xov 8tl oGtws e'xei i. 3. 9.
c. el Si \ii\, but if not, otherwise, used even after- negative sentences :
Mr) 77-01770-775 ravra • el 8e firj, alrlav e^eis, do not do this; otherwise [i. e. if
you do] you will have blame, vii. 1. 8. So cl 8^, as adversative, some-
times implies negation : El p.ev fiovXerai, exf/ira • el 8e, . . iroieirw, if he
wishes, let him boil ; if the contrary, let him do, PI. Euthyd. 285 c.
d. p/tf) t£ -yc, not to [say aught surely] mention, i. e. much less, nedum :
Ovk evi . . rots <piXois eiriTaTTetv . ., /at) tL ye Stj rois deois Dem. 24. 21.
e. ov -yap dXXct, for it is not otherwise, but, i. e. for indeed : Ov yap
aXX' 77 777 pia t-Xnei, for indeed the earth forcibly attracts, Ar. Nub. 232.
f. ov pivToi dXXa, oi> nty dXXd, yet no, but, i. e. nevertheless : '0 brros
. . pUKpov KaKeivov ei;eTpaxvXi<rev • ov pvi)v aXX' eire'p.eivev 6 Kvpo$ Cyr. 1. 4. 8.
g. ov\ 5n, /x.77 8ti, ov p.bvov 8ti, ovx 8aov, o\>x o'ttojs, p.rj Sttws, ovx 6lov,
I do not say that, not to say that, &c, i. e. not only, or not only not:
"Ax/o^o-toi ydp Kal yvvaitjlv . ., yu.77 8tl duSpdcri, useless even to women, not to
say men, PI. Ovx ^ 7rws Supa Sou's, not only bestowing no gifts, vii. 7. 8. .
CHAPTEE V.
ARRANGEMENT.
718. In the direct, or normal order of arrangement, which,
however, various influences are continually changing or modi-
fying,
a.) A general connective or interrogative leads in its sentence : and
(b) a compellative-part (60), as calling attention, is placed early, if not
first ; though, as independent, it may have any place which will not
interfere with the required connection of other words, (c) Of the remain-
der, the subject-part precedes the predicate-part, (d) Exponents precede
the words whose offices or relations they mark (65). E. g., 'AXX' eyco, &
$aXlv€, davp.dfa . ., but I, Phalinus, wonder, ii. 1. 10.
§ 719. DIRECT ORDER OP ARRANGEMENT. 333
Modifiers (except as above, a) are thus placed in respect to their
principals : (e) Adverbs and equivalent words or phrases precede them,
(f) Other modifiers follow substantives without the article, (g) adjectives,
and (h) adverbs ; and (i) may either follow or precede verbs, (j) For the
arrangement with the article, see 520, 523 s. (k) Of several modifiers of
the same word, the more closely related are placed nearer to it (a Bat. of
person, from more interest in the action, usually nearer than an Ace. of
thing). E. g., (e) 'Ev i'o-a> /cai PpaS&os irpoa-geaav, tliey advanced evenly
and slowly, i. 8. 11. See 510. (f, g) Kw|icu 7ro\Aa2, (Jtetrral crirov, many
villages, full of corn, i. 4. 19. (n) Xwpls r&v dXXojv (405 a), (i) KOpcp
Sovvcu xPVf ia ' ra , to give 0. money, i. 2. 12.' (k) AiafidWet. rbv KiSpov irpbs
rbv dbekipbv, traduces C. to his brother, i. 1. 3. Alboxnv avrw fivpiovs 5a-
peiKovs, gives him 10,000 darics, i. 1. 9.
1.) An infinitive follows the principal verb ; (m) a participle follows or
precedes it, according to the natural order of the thought, (n) Coordinate
sentences follow each other according to the order in which they lie in the
mind, (o) Substantive and adjective clauses, except the indefinite rela-
tive (641), follow the words upon which they depend, (p) Adverbial
clauses may follow or precede the principal clauses, according to the nat-
ural order of the thought ; and (q) are sometimes inserted in them, for
the sake of a closer connection. E. g., (1, m) SvWe£as crpdrevfia . .
iireipaTo KaTa-yeiv, having raised an army, he (then) endeavored to restore,
i. 1. 7. See 571 f. (n) 'O 5e it elder at re kclI <rvX\ap.pdvei, and he both be-
lieves and (as a result) apprehends, i. 1. 3. (o, p, q) 'EttciSt; 5e KO/oo?
£i<d\ei, \a/3u)v vp.ds eiropevbp.rfv, 'iva, et ti Moito, uxpeXolyv avrbv, dvd" &>v ed
iwadov vw enelvov i. 3. 4.
r. An order different from the preceding is termed, in general, indirect,
-varied, or abnormal ; or, more particularly, inverted, divided, parenthetic,
mixed, confused, &c, as the case may be. See 71.
t. If a complex or compound sentence is so arranged that there is no
complete sense without the final clause, the structure is often termed
periodic ; but otherwise, loose : Et donei vol, aretxe (631 a). XpQ avrois,
eav ben ti (631 c). The Greek well illustrates the progress, in advancing
civilization, from the looser to the closer connection of thought.
719. The order of the sentence is varied, chiefly,
a.) To render certain words more emphatic or prominent, or
(b) through the attraction or repulsion of other words.
(a) a. The beginning and close of the sentence have a special promi-
nence ; and of other places, the earlier are in general more favorable to
emphasis than the later. It is but natural, that a sentence should com-
mence with that which is most prominent or foremost in the mind, and
that it should then proceed with that which is closely related to this, or
next in prominence ; while the last word leaves the freshest impression.
E. g., M-qviv deide . . ov\o\l£vt\v, sing the fatal wrath, A. 1. Hepl 'Opbv-
tov Tovrovt i. 6. 6. (P) Any unusual order attracts attention ; and in
prose, commonly expresses emphasis or emotion : Otk dv6pa>7ra>v airop&v
pap(3dp<ov, not from want of mere men, — barbarians, i. 7. 3. Odirep
airbs frena i. 9. 21. (7) See 476 b. (8) See 708 f.
(b) c. The desire of connecting kindred or contrasted words as closely
as possible often varies the order ; while a connection is avoided that
would offend taste or might lead to mistake : Hapd <j>(\i]s <j>t\a> (ptpeiv
yvvaxKbs dvSpl, to bring from a dear wife to a dear husband, iEschlCh. 89.
Kai iiroiow ovtws oiStoi i. 1. 11. See 541 h, 567 d. (£) If a word modi-
334 SYNTAX. — ARRANGEMENT. §719.
fying the verb comes early in the sentence, it often attracts the verb to a
place before the subject : 'Evrav0a •fjerav Ktofiat, here were villages (6),
i. 4. 19. 'Eircl 8e T)o-0c'v€i AapeTos, and when D. was sick, i. 1. 1. (ij) A
particle is sometimes attracted from its proper place : Oik old' av el irel-
aaifxi, I know not whether I could persuade (ttcictcu/u &p, 621 a), Eur. Med.
941. Kai vvv 6ri iroXiopKovprai, and that they are now besieged, vi. 3. 11.
c.) In conformity to the natural order and connection of the
thoughts ; or (d) to present sooner an outline of these, some
details being deferred. Thus,
(c) Aapciov koL IlapvcrdTiSos ylypoprai ircuSes S6o (412 ; the well-known
parents being naturally mentioned before their children). See £. (6) A
word referring or corresponding to what is contained in the preceding sen-
tence, has commonly a leading place, as introducing the new thought and
connecting the thoughts : '0 pCep oOp Trpea^ihepos irapcop eTvyxo-ve ' Kvpov
(corresponding to ir pea fivr epos) 8e neTa.Tre'p.ireTcu dwb ttjs dpxv^ ^S (refer-
ring to apxys) a.vTov o-a.Tpairr)v eirol-qae • ical OTparr\ybv (corresponding to
aarpdjniv) 8e avrbv aire'8ei£e tt&vtwv, 8<roi (referring to irdvTuiv) els Kaaru)-
\ov ireSiop adpoifrvrai. 'Ava,pcuv€t (the result of fxeTairi/JLireTai) odi> 6 KO-
pos. i. 1. 2. (t) When a question is made without an interrogative ex-
ponent, the predicate, as in Eng., often leads, as the part on which the
force of the question most directly falls : T40vtjk€ $L\uriros ; is P. dead ?
Dem. 43. 10. (k) A word pointing to a following sentence has naturally
a late place : &iaf3aivovTes cMte, crossing as follows, i. 5. 10.
(d) 'EvTaGBa a<j>ucv€iTai 'Eirua|a, rj 'Lvevve'o'ios yvpq, tov KlXIkcop ^ao-ikicos,
vapa Kvpop, here comes E., the wife of S., king of the Cilicians, to C, i. 2.
12. An outline is here first presented in "Evravda (6) a<piKPe?rai (/) 'B. ;
then 'E. is defined by i] 2. yvp-fj, 2. by tov K. fiaaiXe'tos, and cupucpeiTai by
irapa K. The early presentation of the general idea is often aided, (X) by
placing first the shorter of two parts of the sentence ; (p.) by joining a
word with the first of two or more words to which it is alike related ;
(v) by dividing or separating a modifying part, &c. : 'E<pcUvero ?xwa far-
ira»v Kal Kbtrpos, there appeared the tracks and dung of horses. Hepau>p tovs
dpio-Tovs tup irepl avrbp lirrd, (lie, seven noblest of his Persian attendants.
e.) For the symmetry of the sentence ; or (f) that it may
close with a stronger or more important word. E. g.,
Otfre yh.p T)fxets ckcIpov <?rt a-TpaTiurrat . ., ofce iKetpos Zrt tj/jup /xkt8o86tt]S,
for neither are toe longer his soldiers, nor he longer our paymaster, i. 3. 9
(see e). Ii.oWd.KLS tj8ov^| /3pax«a paKpdp \vwt\v tIktcl, pleasure brief
long grief often brings (71 a). *Os /j.6pos fih -rrpbs OeCop do-ep^s, /j.6pos 8£
irpbs dpdpu)TrLop alcrxp<Js, which alone before the gods is impious, and before
men base, ii. 5. 20.
g.) For euphony or rhythm, especially in the poets ; (h) for
variety itself; or (i) for general rhetorical effect. E. g.,
Mctx'HV &> to battle (the metre forbidding ^s fjLdxv v )> 0- 59. — The in-
fluence of these three causes was very great, and is often quite obvious,
though its full extent and manner are now beyond our cognizance.
720. From their general want of emphasis, the following words can-
not stand first in the sentence ; and are therefore called post-positive : the
particles av (not for idp, 619 a; Ep. k4), &pa (not dpa, 685 c ; Ep. pd,
&p), al (poet, ai/re) and a$0is (Ep. and Ion. adris) again, yap, yi, -yovv,
8a£, $i, 8if) (exc. Ep. 5?? ydp } drj rdre), 8f)0ev, 8f]Ta, 0^v, pfr, pevroi, p^jv,
§ 723. PARTS OF COMPOUND WORDS. 335
vvv (not vvv * Ep. vv), odv, Trip, ri, rot, roiwv (see 685 c, 701) ; also tIs,
and the indefinites beginning with ir (the rather for distinction from the
interrogatives) : 'O 8t TrelderaL re, nal ov\\ap.fidvei (718 n). See 518, 548.
a. When these words naturally lead a sentence or part of a sentence,
they have commonly the second place or the earliest place allowable ;
and, from their frequent need of an early position and their lack of prom-
inence, they are often permitted to separate closely related words ; indeed
they are often so inserted to give strength or emphasis to such words.
Enclitic pronouns are sometimes placed in like manner. E. g., 'O p.kv odv
irpeo-pvTepos, the elder, then, i. 1. 1. Ilpbs 5e dpKTov, and to the north,
i. 7. 6. 'Ek 5£ twv (518 a). Ilpds ere 6«3v (476 b). See 520 b, 621 e.
721. a. Variation of place extends to clauses, as well as words and
phrases : "On 8t inl /3acri\6x &yoi, . . iJKOvaev ovdeis, but, that he was lead-
ing against the king, no one heard, i. 3. 21. fl O eWes, ovt6s iariv (551 c).
b. A subject common to a dependent and principal clause often pre-
cedes the connective : 01 5' dXXot iireidr) iJKov, . . bi-qp-K a<xav, but when
now tlie rest had come, they plundered, i. 2. 26.
722. Postscript to Syntax. Syntactic relations belong not
only to distinct words, but also to the parts of compound words
(383 s). They are here either internal, between the parts them-
selves ; or external, between these parts and other words.
1. Internal Relations. Of the two elements which commonly
unite in the compound, one may modify the other as an (a) adjec-
tive, (b) adverb, (c - g) adjunct, or sometimes (h) appositive ; or
(i) one may belong to the other as an exponent ; or (j) the two may
be coupled. The same relations appear in compounds of more than
two elements. E. g.,
(a) aKp6-iro\ts upper city (&Kpr)s ir6\cos Z. 257), citadel ; Kevo-rd<piov empty
tomb, cenotaph, vi. 4. 9. (b) diKv-irirTjs swiftly flying, d-yvibs unknown.
(c) Direct Object : 6ava.Tw-<pbpos death-bringing (ddvarov <pipun>), vofio-dtTTjs
legis-lator. (d) Indirect Object : l<r6-0€os god-like (Zeros defy, irod-ijpris
reaching the feet, i. 8. 9. (e) Agent : Aida-doros given by Zeus (virb Aids),
heaven-sent, (f ) Instrument : x ei P°-'"' ^V T0 ^ manu-factus, made by lmnd
(xetpO, iv. 3. 5. (g) Time, Place, Origin, &c. : pvkti-tt6\os nocti-vagus,
night-roaming, oiKo-yevrjs born in tlie house (iv ot/cy), di-i6-\oyos worthy of
mention (\6yov), irvpi-yev^s fire-born. (h) la.Tpb-pja.vr is physician-seer.
(i) Zi>-Soi-05 in repute (iv 86i-y), avd-Oiraros pro-consul, (j) Ka\o-K-dyadLa
honor and virtue, Mem. 1. 6. 14 ; $>-ya\a eggs and milk, Galen.
k. A modifier or exponent has commonly the first place in a compound,
except that the object of a verb often follows it : <pl\-iinros horse-loving,
<pep-acTin$ shield-bearing, pua-dvdpwiros misanthropic.
723. 2. External Relations. An element of a compound has
often the same relation to another word, expressed or implied, as if
it stood by itself.
a.) It may so govern or be modified (see 436 a, b, 699 a), (b) It may
so modify or be governed ; often as a Gen. of property or relation : fii^rvp
KaWl-ircus, a mother of beautiful children (icaXuiv iraLdwv), oud-Tpowos of
like character, wkv-ttovs celeri-pes, [of swift foot] swift-footed. In this usg
it often represents the object of an implied verb of possession : civets irodas
£x w "> having swift feet, (c) Each part of a compound may have an ex-
ternal relation : du<pi-idoi»> having pillars around it.
BOOK IV
PBOSODY.
JEschylus, Eumen.
CHAPTEE I.
QUANTITY AND VERSIFICATION.
725. In Greek all vowels and syllables are divided, in re-
spect to quantity (i. e. the time of their utterance according to
the ancient pronunciation), into long and short ; and the long
are regarded as having double the time of the short.
a. Hence the unit in measuring metrical quantity is the short syllable,
or the breve (brevis, short), and a long vowel or syllable is equal to two
breves. For the marks of quantity (— — ), see 96 c.
b. Quantity is of two kinds, natural and local. Natural quantity has
respect to the length of the vowel in its own nature ; but local quantity,
to the effect which is produced by the position of the vowel in connection
with other letters or syllables. In 8pru|, quail, both syllables are short
by nature, i. e. in the natural quantity of the vowels ; but both become
long by the position of these short vowels before two consonants (137 d).
c. The quantity of a syllable is always the natural quantity of the
vowel which it contains, unless some change is produced by position.
Hence it is usual, in prosody, to regard the vowel as the representative of
the syllable ; and language is often applied to the vowel which in strict
propriety belongs only to the syllable. Thus, in 6pru£, it is common to
say that the vowels are long by position ; while, in strict accuracy, the
quantity of the vowels themselves is not changed, but the syllables become
long from the time occupied in the utterance of the successive consonants.
I. NATUKAL QUANTITY.
726. Rule 1. «• and o are short : as in (pepopev.
Rule 2. rj and ©, diphthongs, and all vowels that are cir-
cumflexed, or result from contraction or crasis, are long : as in
Tjfiwc, 7rXe tovs, nas, rjfiiv, 7rvp' pis, bvs (156) ; kov (126).
Rule 3. Other vowels are commonly short : as in xkapubt.
§ 730. NATURAL QUANTITY. 337
a. All vowels which result from the union of two vowels have, from
their very nature, a double time. See 115 s. (b) To the general rule for
tlie doubtful vowels (Rule 3) there are many exceptions ; which renders it
necessary to observe the accent, the special laws of inflection and
derivation, the dialect, and authority, by which is here meant the
usage of the poets.
727. A. Accent. From the general rules of accent (770 s),
we learn, that in natural quantity,
a.) In proparoxytones and properispomes, the last vowel is short : as in
dpovpa, bivafus, viXetcwi ■ /3u)\a£, irpa£is, 8iu>pv%.
b. ) In paroxy tones, if the last vowel is short, the vowel of the penult is
also short , and, on the other hand, if the vowel of the penult is long, the
last vowel is also long : as in fjuxiv&dos, Kaptavos, xXa/iuSos ■ Arjdd, $oiVI£.
728. B. Inflection. In the common affixes of declension
and conjugation, the doubtful vowels are short, except cases of
contraction, -a in the Sing, of Dec. 1, and dat for vox in the
nude Present.
Thus, Dec. 1, Gen. sing, and Ace. pi. -as, Nom. du. -a (13, 122), Aor.
Pt. -eras, -<rd<ra (35 d), Pf. 3 pi. -kcuti (300 a). For special rules in regard
to the Sing, of Dec. 1, see 194 s, 232 s ; for -ia, -ids in Dec. 3, 220 ; for
nude Pres. forms in -dou, 35 a, 156; for the dialectic affixes, 20, 48 a.
729. Special Bules of Dec III. 1. The doubtful vowels are
long in the last syllable of the stem, — (a) If the stem-mark is v : as,
iraidv, -avos, 5e\<pis, -ivos, $5p/cvs, -wos (208) : except in the adjectives p.£-
Ad?, -duos, rdXds, -dvos (23 b, d), and the pronoun ris, riuos. (b) In most
palatals, if a long syllable precede : dupai;, -duos, p-darit,, -!yos, TripSii;,
-~lkos, K7jpv£, -vkos. (c) In words in -is, -i0os, and in some oxytones in
-is, t8os I 6pvLs, -10os, KVT]/xis, -i5oj, aeppayis, -cdos. (d) In a few other
words : as, K^pas, -dros • if/dp, \pdpbs • yp6\{/, ypviros.
2. Monosyllabic themes are long : kL j, kios • /j.vs, fivos • trup, irvpos.
Except the pronoun rts (208 d). — So the neuter irdv (23) is lengthened.
730. Special Rules of Conjugation. 1. Before the open af-
fixes (303), — (a) a is short ; except in IdopMi heal, add), K\du (309 b),
and sometimes in the Epic and lyric poets for the sake of the metre,
(b) i is commonly long : kovlu cover with dust, wpiu} to saw ; but diu (V),
ia&iw, Sedta, (hriop from irivu (50). (c) v is variable: dvvco, \<fw, 66w (v).
2. Before the regular close affixes, — (d) In lingual and liquid
verbs, the doubtful vowels are sliort : as, wfiiaa (39 d), KeKpina, eKXtdrjv
(304 a) ; except Ppidu weigh down, F. Ppi<ru. (e) In pure verbs, a is short,
except when the theme ends in -dco pure, or -pdo> ; i is commonly long ;
and v variable: goyd/ca, eautddo-a (310c, e), but etdaa, idvpdOrjv (310) ;
erlaa (310), but (pdtau, i<p0ip.7)v (50) ; dvvau, irtyvica, difa-io, r^dvKa (310).
3. Before the affixes of verbs in -ju, the doubtful vowels are short,
except in the Ind. sing, of the Pres. and Impf. act., and in the 2d Aor.
act.: SdKvvpu, delKvvfiev, ebpdv. See 313 s.
4. Before a consonant stem-mark, — (f) In the theme, a is common-
ly short, but t and v long : fxavdavia, k\\vo), 68upop.ai ; but ii<dvu, rtuoj,
<pd*vw (50). (g) In the liquid Put., and in the 2c? Aor. (340. 3), the
doubtful vowels are short, but in the liquid Aor., and in the 2d Perf,
they are long : Kpivd, eicpiva (152) ; l\d/3ov, irpl^rjv (347 g) ; K^Kpdya, /ce/cpi-
7a, p.4p.vKa (312 a) : except 2 A. kdyr\v (50, dyvvpu), iX-^Xvda, &c. (312 a).
comp. gr. 15 V
338 PROSODY. ~- QUANTITY. §731^
731. "C Derivation. Rule 4. Derivatives follow the
quantity of their primitives.
a. This rule applies to compounds, as well as to simple derivatives.
In applying the rule, observe 366 d. E. g., Onp&w, F. dnpdaw, Pf. P. re-
drjpdpxLL • 6-rjpdcnp.os, 6/]pdp.a, dvpdrrjs, dwpdrus ' tvTip.os (iv, Tip.'fj).
732. D. Dialect. The Doric a for r) is long ; and a, where
the Ionic uses rj, is commonly long (130 a). See also 134.
733. E. Authority. For doubtful vowels which are long,
and not determined by the rules already given, observe the
usage of the poets, and the marks of quantity in the lexicons.
a. Familiar examples are "art] destruction, c<ppdyis seal, rpdxfc rough,
funpos small, iAktj victory, 8pu\os crowd, cly-q silence, xaXwbs bridle, irvpos
wheat, <rii\d(d to plunder, "v\w forest, <pv\-q tribe, x/avcr6s gold, ^vx^i soul.
II. LOCAL QUANTITY.
734. Rule 5. A vowel before two consonants or a double
consonant is long (725 c, 137 d) : as in oprv£, e\ni£ovTes /xcty.
a. This ride of position holds, as in Latin, if the consonants are wholly
or partly in the same word with the vowel ; and commonly, also, if they
are wholly in the next word.
735. Exception. When the two consonants are a mute
followed by a liquid in the same simple word, the quantity of
the vowel is often not affected, especially in Attic verse.
Note. This exception results from the easy flowing together of the
mute and liquid, so as to produce the effect of a single consonant.
a. In the Attic, the quantity of the vowel is commonly not affected, if
the mute is smooth or rough, or, if middle, is followed by p ; hut is regu-
larly lengthened before a middle mute followed by |x, v, or X. Thus, the
penult is regularly short in tt£t\os, t£kvov, ttotplos, txvos, aypos, edpa ■ and
long in bby/xa, k'dva, <TTpe[3\6s, as well as in the compound eKpeiv.
736. A short vowel is sometimes lengthened before a single
consonant or another vowel, especially in Epic poetry. This
occurs chiefly in the following cases :
a.) When the consonant may be regarded as doubled in pronunciation.
This applies mostly to the liquids, and in the case of these (chiefly initial
p, cf. 146) sometimes extends even to Attic verse : AidXov [as if -o\X-] /c.
36, Se vtcpos A. 274, "tdeiaas X. 19, £/xe piirop Soph., p-eyd p&Kos iEsch.
b.) Where F has been dropped (138 s) : yap Wev [Yedev, 27 f] I. 419,
Kiv i rives X. 42, irpo's oIkov [folkov] I. 147. — Yet the Epic sometimes
gives the digamma, if indeed used, only the force of a breathing (98 e).
c.) Before a mascidine ccesura; and sometimes, without a cuesura, by
the force of the arsis (745 c, 741) : 6vo/xd ■ OStiv i. 366 ; awoiparj <£. 283.
d. In Hexameter verse, one of three successive short syllables, a short
between two long syllables, and a short syllable at the beginning of a line,
must of necessity be made long. The second case sometimes occurs in the
tliesis. E. g., 'dirouteadai S. 46 ; 'A<rK\r}irl.ov 5i/o B. 731 (cf. 'Ao-kXvttioQ
vlbv A. 194), "Ews '6 ravd' A. 193 ; 'Ettciot? (e) X. 379, *Apes, "Apes E. 31.
§ 741. VERSIFICATION. 339
737. Rule 6. A long vowel or diphthong at the end of a
word may be shortened, if the next word begins with a vowel.
a. In the thesis of Hexameter and Pentameter verse, this shortening is
the general rule : 'Rfxertpu) ivl oitc$ £v"Apyei' A. 30. Ties, 6 jxkv Kredrov,
6 5' dp Euptirov, ' kKTopiwves B. 621. (b) This rule does not apply to the
Iambic and Trochaic metres of the drama, as there the hiatus is scarce
allowed, (c) Rarely, a long vowel or diphthong is shortened before a
vowel in the same word : tp.irai.ov v. 379, olos (cm) N. 275, tClovtos Soj)h.
738. Rule 7. The last syllable of every verse is common.
a. That is, the metrical pause at the end of the verse renders the
quantity of the last syllable indifferent ; and it may be regarded as either
long or short according to the metre, (b) In some kinds of verse, how-
ever, the scansion is continuous ; i. e. the verses are formed into systems,
at the end of which only this freedom is allowed, the preceding syllables
being all subject to the rules of prosody, as if in a single verse.
739. a. In giving the rules of quantity, position should not be ad-
duced, unless some change has been made from the natural length of the
vowel. For convenient distinction in metrical analysis, a vowel whose
quantity is to be referred to Rules 1 and 2 may be said to be long or short
by nature ; to Rule 3, by ilve general rule (i. e. for the doubtful vowels) J
to Rule 4, by derivation ; to Rule 5, by position (i. e. before two con->
sonants, or a double consonant) ; to Rule 6, by position before a vowel ;
to Rule 7, at the end of the verse.
III. VERSIFICATION".
740. Greek verse is founded upon rhythm ; i. e. the regular
succession of long and short quantities.
a. Elementary combinations of syllables, showing the rhythm, are
termed feet (as if steps in the rhythmic movement) ; regular combina-
tions of feet, verses (versus, a, turn) ; and regular combinations of verses,
stanzas, strophes, or systems (744). For a table of feet, see 77.
b. A single foot, taken by itself, is called a monopody (wots, foot) ;
a combination of two feet, a dipody ; of three, four, five, six, &c, a tri-
pody, tetrapody, pentapody, hexapody, &c. ; of a foot and a half, a triemim
(Tpi7)p.Lfjt.€prj$, of three half-parts) ; of two and a half, three and a half, four
Wid a half, &c, penthemim, h-ephthemim, enneemim, &c. See 745 c.
,^^741. The long syllables are naturally pronounced with a
greater stress of the voice than the short. This stress is
termed arsis, (apo-ts, elevation), while the alternate weaker tone
is termed thesis (Oco-ls, depression). These terms are also ap-
plied to the parts of the rhythm which are thus pronounced.
a. The arsis (also termed metrical ictus or rhythmic accent) is here
marked thus ( ' , ', or to indicate greater force, ").
b. As one long syllable is equal to two short, the partial substitution
of J_ w for J_ in the arsis (resolution), and of — for ^ ^ in the thesis (con-
traction), may be made without affecting the rhythm.
c. In the common kinds of verse, the metrical ictus is determined by
the prevailing foot. Hence in Trochaic and Dactylic verse, every foot
340 PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION. § 741.
receives the ictus upon the first syllable , while, m'lambic and Anapsestie
Terse, every foot receives it upon the second, except the anapaest and pro*
celeusmatic, which receive it upon the third, (d) Iambic, Trochaic, and
Anapaestic verse has commonly a stronger ictus upon every other foot ; and
is hence measured, not by single feet, but by dipodies (740b).
742. The simplest and most familiar rhythms are those in
which a long syllable alternates with one, or with tivo short
syllables (iwi^i-, or I^wl^iJi), In the latter,
the thesis is equal in time to the arsis, and the rhythm is
termed equal or quadruple (— ~— = 4 breves, 725 a) ; but in
the former, the thesis is only half the arsis, and the rhythm is
termed triple (— -- = 3 breves).
a. Of these, the equal is the more stately in its movement, and the
more appropriate to those kinds of verse which are farthest removed from
common discourse ; while the triple has more nearly the movement of com-
mon conversation, and is hence better adapted to the more familiar kinds
of verse, and to dialogue.
b. Other rhythms are formed by doubling the arsis, by prolonging the
thesis, or by variously compounding simple rhythms.' (c) Verses, in which
the equal and triple rhythms are united, are termed logacedic (\6yos dis-
course, aoid-q song, see a).
743. Verses are named, — (a) From the prevailing foot : Iam-
bic, Dactylic, (b) From some poet who invented or used them, or
the species of composition in which they were employed: Alcaic,
from Alcaeus ; Sapphic, from Sappho ; Heroic, as used in singing the
deeds of heroes, (c) From the number of measures (i. e. feet, or
dipodies, 741 d) which they contain : monometer (ixovofierpos, of one
measure), dimeter, trimeter, tetrameter, pentameter, hexameter, (d) From
their degree of completeness ; thus a verse is termed catalectic (icara-
Xrjyco, to end abruptly), when its last foot is incomplete ; brachycata-
lectic, when it wants a whole foot at the end ; acatalectic, when it
has its just measure ; hyper catalectic, when it has one or two sylla-
bles beyond ; hypermeter, when it exceeds in any way its just meas-
ure ; acephalous (dice(pa\os, headless), when it wants a syllable at the
beginning; anacrusic, basic, or syncopated, when affected as below.
e. A long or short syllable or pyrrhic is sometimes prefixed to a lyric
rhythm beginning with the arsis. This is called an anacrusis (avdKpov<ns,
striking up). A similar prefix of greater length is called a basis (a term
sometimes applied to any monometer ; fidcris, step). (f) In the drama,
exclamations often occur extra metrum (i. e. not included in the metre) :
3>ev! Eur. Ale. 536. Tl <pQ; Soph. 0. C. 315. TdXaiva ! lb. 318.
g. Metrical syncope is the omission of a thesis in the middle of a
rhythm ; where we may suppose the time to have been supplied, as in
modern music, by a rest, or by dwelling longer upon an adjoining arsis.
744. Metrical composition is either in monostichs, systems, or
stanzas, (a) Monostichs (fiovoanxos, of a single line) consist of the
same verse repeated, as in Hexameter verse (748), Iambic Trimeter
(756), &c. (b) Systems are formed by the repetition of similar
rhythms, with continuous scansion (as if a single long line, 738 b)
§ 746. KINDS OF VERSE. OESURA. 341
and an appropriate close, (c) Stanzas (also called strophes) are
formed by the union of different kinds of verse. A stanza of two
lines is called a distich ; of three, a tristich , of four, a tetrastich.
d. The most common systems are easily arranged in dimeters, with
here and there a monometer ; and close with a dimeter catalectic.
e. The Greek choral odes were written in stanzas of very varied struct-
ure, but commonly arranged in duads or triads (sometimes in tetrads or
pentads). A duad consists of two stanzas, corresponding in metre through-
out. Of these, the first is termed the stropJie (<rTpo<pr}, turning round,
stanza), and the second the antistroplie {avTL<jTpo<pr}, counter-turn or -stanza).
A triad consists of a strophe and antistrophe, preceded, divided, or fol-
lowed by a third stanza of different metre, which according to its place is
termed proode (irp6 before, y5?/ ode), mesode (//.^cros middle), or epode (iiri
after). Of these, the epode is far the most common.
745. Caesura (csedo, to cut) is the cutting of the metre by
a division in the sense. It may be (a) of the foot, or (b) of the
verse. In the former, a foot is cut by the ending of a word ;
in the latter, a verse is cut by a pause permitted by the sense.
c. This pause, which is often slight, is called the cmsuraX pause ; and
the syllable preceding any caesura, the coesural syllable. When this syl-
lable is pronounced with the arsis, the caesura is termed masculine ; with
the thesis, feminine. A caesura in the second foot is named triemim, from
the portion of the verse which has preceded (740 b) ; in the third, pentlic-
mim; in the fourth, hephthemim; &c.
d. The caesura of the verse (often called simply the caesura) is more
frequently, but not necessarily, a caesura of the foot. A prominent ex-
ception is the caesura often occurring in Hexameter verse after the fourth
foot (which is then commonly a dactyl), named the bucolic or pastoral
caesura from its prevalence in pastoral poetry. See also 757, 761.
746. a. Hiatus between words was admitted the most freely in
Epic poetry, where however it may be often removed by the insertion of
the digamma (98 e, 99 b). It was the most studiously avoided in Attic
poetry, especially in the Tragic Trimeter (756).
Synizesis (117). b. In Epic poetry synizesis is very frequent, espe-
cially when the jirst vowel is 6 ; thus, «t, ep, ecu ; eo, eoi, eov ; ew, e<J> :
UriXrfidStu, XPvai^ djud, A.JU 15 ; see 27 f, 197 c, 222 b, 323 c. We find
more rarely ae ; ia, uxi, ir;, iy, to ; oo ; va, voi ; &c. Synizesis sometimes
occurs between two words, when the first is fj, ?\, S-rj, p.-^, hrtC, or a word
ending in the affix -r\ or -to : f)~bvx E - 349, 5rT6y5oov v. 261, eVei !>v.
c. In Attic poetry, synizesis occurs chiefly in the endings -ecus, -ecov, -ea
of Dec. 3 (220 d) ; in a few single words and forms (as dels Eur. Of. 399) ;
in the combinations ^ ov and jrij ov, regularly pronounced as one syllable ;
in some j)ther combinations in which the first word is % % \lt\, eircC, or
€-yw : tirfelSe'vai Eur. Hipp. 1335, i-rrtl ovdev, eyib ei/x Soph. Ph. 585.
d. In scanning, observe not only the division into dipodies and feet,
but also the arsis or metrical ictus (741), and the verse-caesura (745).
Unless these are carefully marked, the metrical character and expression
of the verse are, to a great extent, lost, (e) In the following exhibition of
metres, the division of feet will be marked by a single bar ( | ) ; the divis-
ion of dipodies by a double bar ( || ) ; the verse-caesura by an obelisk ( t ),
sometimes doubled ( f ) ; and sometimes the omission of a syllable by a
caret ( a ). An anacrusis will be denoted by A, and a basis by B ; and
of syllables metrically long or short (whether by nature or position), the
former will be printed in full-face, and the latter in common Greek type.
342 VERSIFICATION. DACTYLIC. §747.
A. Dactylic Verse.
747. The place of the fundamental dactyl is often supplied
by a spondee (X «- w == JL — .). See 741 b.
748. i. The common Hexameter or Heroic Verse consists
of six feet, of which the first four are either dactyls or spon-
dees, the fifth commonly a dactyl, and the sixth always a
spondee.
a. When the fifth is a spondee, the verse is termed spondaic, and has
commonly an expression of greater weight or dignity. This occurs most
frequently when the verse ends with a word of four syllables, (b) The
favorite caesura of the verse is the penthemim (the "heroic caesura"),
which is almost equally masculine anal feminine (745 c). After this, the
most frequent caesuras are the masculine hephthemim (often preceded by
a triemim), and the pastoral (745 d). (c) Even when the penthemim is
not the principal verse -caesura, it is yet seldom wanting as a foot -caesura.
d. Scheme and Examples.
I. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
twtw|jLtw~tjX. II--
'AXX& /ca|K(3s a(pi\t] } t K/>are|pbv 5' iirl j pvdov e'JTcXXcv. A. 25.
El' K€V I inas apjvwv kvi|<ttjs t al|"ya>v re re|\c£aiv. A. 66.
St^ucit e\\<av kv \ \ep<rlv \ e\Kr\J36\ov | 'Air<$\|\(ovos. A. 14.
749. ir. The Elegiac Pentameter consists of two dactylic pen-
themims (740 b), the first containing two dactyls or spondees with
a cassural syllable, and the second, two dactyls with a final syllable.
It commonly alternates with the Hexameter, forming what is termed,
from its early use in plaintive song, the Elegiac Metre.
Evx<W|vw jjloi | kKv0i, t /caJKas 5' curb | Ktjpas tf|X.a\K€' '
Sol |Uv | rovro, 0e|a, t | (rpucpdv, e|(j.ol 8e /xe|-ya. Theog. 13.
750. in. Other Dactylic Metres are, (a) Pure, consisting of
dactyls only; (b) Impure, consisting of dactyls and spondees;
(c) JEdic, containing, in place of the first foot, a basis or anacrusis
(743 e) ; (d) Logacedic (742 c), in which dactyls are united with
trochees. Thus,
1. Dimeter.
(a) Mva-rodo \ kos 86/xos. At. Nub. 303.
(b) Adonic (-L^*_ | _L— ). ILorvia, | Qvpov. Sapph. 1. 4.
2. Trimeter.
(b) HoWhyccp | axrr' clkA \ jicivtos. Soph. Tr. 112.
(c) Pherecratic (b. j _!__^| _L— ). "EXSejcu (pi\ov | fjrop. Pind. 0. 1. 6.
Vix dujrare cajrinae. Hor. Od. 1. 14.
Glyconic. Tbv <rbv | Bai/mopa, \ rbv a-bv, &
(b. |-L W _)J ) TXa/xou | Ol5t7r(i|8a, pporw. Soph. O.T. 1193.
§ 755. ANAPiESTIC. IAMBIC. 343
3. Tetrameter.
(a) Alcmanian. M<»<r, &ye, | KaXXtojira 6vya\rtp Atys. Alcm. 36 [4J.
(d) Greater Alcaic (a. |i w | jLi'ia'l -L~~ | -L^-J).
Kdp|Pa\\e I tov x*l\}u»v; €Trl | piv rtdeis. Ale. 34 [27].
Lesser Alcaic (i^^ | -Lw^ | -i-w | -Lw).
Xpv<ro/ct»J(ia Ze0y|pa» /xtj-ycicra. Ale. 5 [24].
4. Pentameter.
(b) 'ATp€C]8as jaax^ovs, t iSd\r\ Xa7o|8a£ras. Msch. Ag. 123.
(d) Sapphic (J_^ | -L- | -Lw~ 1 _i — | _J- — ->.
Al 8e | S»/>a | pf| 5^/cer, | #XAa | 8<»J-ei. Sapph. 1. 22.
B. Anapaestic Verse.
751. The place of the fundamental anapaest is often sup-
plied by a spondee or dactyl, and, very rarely, by a proceleu-
smatic (__j_ z= L = —S^. = ~ ^ ^ ~).
752. i. The Anapaestic, from its strong, even movement, was a
favorite metre for marching songs; and was greatly employed in
systems, by the dramatic poets, as intermediate between the Iambic
of the common dialogue, and the lyric metres of the choral odes.
a. These systems are scanned continuously (738 b), but are usually
arranged so far as convenient, in dimeters (whence the common name of
this species of verse, the ANAPJEstic Dimeter). They uniformly close
with the dimeter catalectic, called, from its use in proverbs (wapoijuai.) the
parosmiac verse (744 d). (b) This verse requires a ccesurcc after each
dipody, except in the parcemiac.
He\c£o-€i|e Sojxois, t II <»v r e7ri'|voiav
H-ttevScis | Arar^x^v t || irpa|€i|as, itreX
Tevvaijo? dvfjp,
At-ycv, | trap ip.o\ || 5e56tcT] | <rat. Eur. Med. 759.
. 753. n. The combination of the regular dimeter with the pa-
rcemiac (cf. 757, 761) forms the Anapaestic Tetrameter Catalectic
of comedy, also called the Arislophanic.
„i- | „JLf || ww-L | „ JLt II ~~-L | ~~ JL || _ J. | -: &c.
Tl ykp €*J',Scupov t II Kal fiaKa \ piarbv J || paXXov | vvv 4<r||ri 5tKa<r|ToO.
754. in. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of other kinds
of Anapaestic verse, both common and logaoedic (742 c) :
Dim. Hyperc. T6re piv | irepLo-aWfMdTaTos | Kal #picr||Tos. Eur. Here. 1018.
Logaoedic. 1 An.,'1 lam. Ne/«t<?a | 5£ rpts. Pind. K 6. 34.
1 An., 3 lam. Cat. Ma/cap{|fop€v | <re, rir\ ti%. Anacreontic.
3 An., 2 lam. AoXepfcv | ph> del | /caret, irdv| ra 8^ | rporrov. Ar. Av. 451.
C. Iambic Yerse.
755. The place of the fundamental iambus may be sup-
plied by a tribrach (~ ±- = ~ X ~), except at the end of a line.
To add dignity and variety to the verse, the first foot of a di-
344
VERSIFICATION. IAMBIC.
§755.
pody (where the arsis is less strong) is very often lengthened
to a spondee, and not unfrequently to a dactyl or anapaest.
a. Comedy admits the anapsest in every place except the last of a verse
or system ; and also tragedy, when it is wholly contained in a proper
756. i. The Iambic Trimeter Acatalectic (also called, from
the number of its feet, the Senarius) is the principal metre of
dramatic dialogue (752).
a. This verse has for its caesura the penthemim or, much less frequent-
ly, the hephthemim. The latter is sometimes anticipated by the elision
of the syllable after which it would properly fall, forming what has been
termed by Porson the qiiasi-cassura. lines occur, though rarely, which
have neither of these csesuras. '
b. The Tragic Trimeter admits the tribrach in every place but the last ;
the spondee in the 1st, 3d, and 5th places ; the dactyl in the 1st and 3d ;
and the anapsest in the 1st. The feet which are admitted only in proper
names or in comedy (755 a) are placed, below, in parentheses.
1.
Iambus. ^ J_
Tribrach. ^ S ^
2.
ii
3.
wt JL
~tJ,~
4.
. 5.
1
6.
Spondee. -
Dactyl. -±~
Anapsest. ^ ^ JL
( JL
-t JL
_t^~
^ ^ JL
( :~lj
'E^cb ( 5' &ro\\\fi6s tl]fii t <nry||7evfj | 0e6v. Msch. Pr. U.
6op0$<o | re 7rt(ri;||vos t Kaj/uaOci || irajSpr) I a-tqi,
Hidcwds I er av[|Tovis t Trepi\pdk&v || icaKto \ rtvi. Eur. Or. 905.
757. n. The Iambic Tetrameter Catalecttc is peculiar to com-
edy. It consists of two dimeters, the second catalectic (cf. 753, 761) ;
and has commonly a caesura after the first.
"Otov I x<*p«-v || ft 6 8co-[7r6rt]s t II 6 <rbs | *AcXi|||Ke &iv\po. Ar. PL 260.
758. in. The Iambic verse sometimes occurs in systems of the
common form (744 d).
759. iv. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of other kinds
of Iambic verse (for logacedic examples, see 754) :
Tripody. "Tirco-lrt pot | 0pd<ros. Soph. El. 479.
Dim. Cat. 0A.« | A^yciv \\'ArptC\das. Anacreontic.
Dim. Hyperc. Si; rot, | <ru toi || KaTT]|£ia>U<ras. Soph. Ph. 1095.
D. Trochaic Yerse.
760. The place of the fundamental trochee may be sup-
plied in any part of the verse by a tribrach (-! — = ± ~ ~).
The last foot of a dipody (where the ictus is less strong) is
often lengthened to a spondee or anapsest. In proper names,
the dactyl is admitted in some places.
§766. TROCHAIC, &C. — ACCENT. 345
761. i. The Trochaic Tetrameter Catalectic occurs in both
tragedy and comedy. It consists of two dimeters, the second cata-
lectic (753, 757) ; and has commonly a caesura after the first.
IIo\\a|xov (TKollirovvres | T|p.&s t II els #|irav0' €t>!|p^cre|T€. Ar.Vesp. 1101.
762. ii. The Trochaic verse sometimes occurs in systems of
the common form (744 d).
763. hi. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of other
kinds of Trochaic verse (for logacedic examples, see 750) :
Tripody (Ithyphallic). ILdvTpo\<\>os 7re|\€icts. Msch. Th. 294.
Trim. A<api\<a <j>co||vdv eV|app.<S(-||ai 7re|8£\a>. Pind. O. 3. 9.
Trim. Cat. Tlv ybp \ kv ttovIItw /cu|p€pvtov||T<u 6o\ai. lb. 12. 4.
Tetram. "Eari | p.oi 0e||<Sv 'e\Kari \\ \ivpi\a irav|JT& Kt\\evdos. Pind. I. 4. 1.
a. Syncope sometimes explains a seeming interchange of Iambic and
Trochaic rhythm (743 g) : Boav ta>, a icXder ApoXoardTai. Ar. Nub. 1155.
E. Other Metres.
764. The metres which remain are Lyric, and for the most part
admit with great freedom isochronous feet, or the substitution of
two short syllables for one long, or of one long for two short :
a. Cretic (_L^_!_). #p<$vr«rov | ical 7evov. ^Esch. Sup. 418.
b. Bacchic (^,-L-L). Ti'sdx», | rts 68p.a | irpoffiirro. \ ft dcpcyyrjs. ^Isch.
c. Choriambic (±^,^±). Tv\ivaalov \ \eyew tl wS, At. Vesp. 527.
d. Rising Ionic (^ LJ-). Ile-WpaKcv | fiiv 6 irip<ri\irT o\is ^8tj. ^Esch.
e. Pseonic (JL „_, _w}. ''ClfiaK&pi \ Avrbfieves, t j «s ere fxa.Ka\pifr/j,ev. Ar.
765. f. An Antispast, combining an iambic with a trochaic rhythm,
admits in the first part any foot which is admitted into Iambic verse, and
in the second any foot which is admitted into Trochaic, each with the ap-
propriate ictus. The addition of a long syllable (which may be resolved
into two short) forms the Dochmius ; which has consequently a triple ic-
tus, with great variety of structure (thirty-two forms having been counted) :
Dochmiac (wi.1 w-L). MeOetrai crrparbs | cn7>crrc)7re8ov Xiirwv. iEsch,
CHAPTER II.
ACCENT.
766. In every Greek word, one of the three last syllables
was distinguished by a special tone of the voice.
1. This tone is commonly spoken of simply as the tone, or the accent.
2. The versification of the ancient Greeks was founded upon quantity
without regard to accent ; that of the modern Greeks is founded upon ac-
cent without regard to quantity.
3. The accent, even if not regarded in pronunciation, is still useful, as
serving, — (a) To distinguish different words, or different senses of the
same word : dpi to be, etfu to go ; 6 tlic, 6 which (249 c) ; irdre ; when ?
COMP. GR. 15*
346 PROSODY. — ACCENT. § 766.
Ttor£ once ; #XAa oilier things, d\\d but ; Ai0o/36Xos throwing stones, \i65-
(3o\os stoned (386. 1). (b) To distinguish different forms of the same
word : Opt. in-Xfoai, Inf. £K-X0<rai, Imv. ex-Xvaai, (37 f, h). (c) To aid
in ascertaining quantity (727). (d) To show the original form of a
word : thus the circumflex over ti/j.u>, 0iAw, 5t?AcD, marks them as contract
forms of TLfido), 0iA^o>, drjXou. (e) To show how a word is employed in
the sentence ; as in cases of anastrophe, and where the accent is retained
by a proclitic or enclitic (785 s).
767. a. In a final or initial, and often in an intermediate
syllable, a long vowel is treated in accentuation as consisting
of two vowels (108, 115), and thus forming two tone-places
(i. e. places in respect to accent), (b) But final -at and -oi in
affixes are regarded in accentuation as short vowels, except in
the Optative.
c. By long voioels, in accentuation, are meant those that are long by
nature, including diphthongs ; and by slwrt vowels, those that are short
in natural quantity, without regard to their position (725).
d. It is not strange that this treatment of final -<u and -oi should have
at length resulted from the natural hurrying of the voice over such familiar
endings. For the exception in the Opt., see 272 d.
e. The Greek grammarians adopted an ascending line (') as the mark
of an accented place, and a descending line ( * ) as the mark of an unac-
cented place. A syllable in which an unaccented followed an accented
place was entitled, of course, to a double mark ( ,x ).
f. In counting tone-places, the ultima is counted as the first place if
its vowel is, short, but as the first and second if its vowel is long. If the
ultima forms two places, the penult makes the third, and completes the
number allowed. If the ultima forms only a single place, then a short
vowel in the penult forms the second ; and a long vowel, the second and
third. One of these, however, a long penult often gives up to the ante-
penult, contenting itself with a single place. Thus the antepenult forms
the third place, if the ultima and penult are both short by nature ; and
often also, if the ultima is short and the penult long. Lap account is
taken of any place beyond the third, or beyond the accent if this is sooner
reached. In the following words, which are all accented on the highest
place, the several places would be thus numbered and marked :
1 21 2 1 3 21 2 1 3 21 32 1 32 1 3 21 32 1
64s, irdls, SoAbs, 86\bv, 86\ol, ravpbv, rdvpbs, Tavpol, €Kovo-dls, €Kov<rd\
32 1 3 21 321 321 3 21 3 2 13 2 1
Covered, iroXifibiis, iroX^bs, ir6Aip,ol, dvGpt&irbls, dvOpwirbs, &v0pa>irol.
g. It is evidently needless, except for grammatical illustration, to mark
unaccented syllables, and when the two marks (") fall upon the same
syllable, it is more convenient in writing to unite them into one ( A , or, as
rounded for greater ease, * or ~). Dropping, therefore, the marks over
the unaccented syllables, and uniting the double marks, we write thus :
Qte, irats, S6\os, 8d\ov, SdXoi, ravpov, Tavpos, ravpot, ckovctcus, cKovo-a,
€KoC<rat, iroXc'p-ovs, irdXcp-os, irdXep-oi, dvOpwirois, dvGpwiros, dvGpwiroi.
768. A syllable or vowel is termed grave, if it has no ac-
cent ; circumjfexed, if it forms an accented followed by an un-
accented place ; acute, if it forms an accented place not so f&l-
§ 772. GENERAL LAWS. IN VOWEL CHANGES. 347
lowed : as the final syllables and vowels in \vpa, vrjo-os, \va>- fiva,
rrjs, 6ea, atov, yvncbv, npco • cpdrj, to, toov, cu£, alyos, ifioi.
' Oxytone, ) ( Acute.
Perispome, V if its Ultima is < Circnmflexed.
A word is J Barytone, ) ( Grave,
termed * Paroxytone, 1 -f •+ p u • / Acute.
Properispome, J \ Circumflexed.
Proparoxytone, if its Antepenult is Acute.
a. The terms ahove, and those applied to the marks of accent (94), are
formed from the Greek and Latin words rbvos accentus, tone, <J|i/s aciitus,
sharp, Trepi<nrd)fxepos circumflexus, bent round, papfc gravis, heavy, irapa
beside, and irp6 before, (h) The paroxytones, propcrispomes, and propar-
oxy tones are all included in the general class of barytones. See § 5.
769. The accent is termed final, when it falls upon the
ultima. According as it goes back from this, or forward to-
wards it, it is said to recede or advance. When it recedes as
far as the general laws permit, it is termed recessive. When it
retains the same place as in the theme, so far as these laws
permit, it is termed retentive.
I. General Laws of Accent.
770. Law I. The acute accent cannot recede beyond
the antepenult ; and can fall upon this, only when the ultima
is short.
a. Hence the accent of Svopa name, rpdirefa, &yye\os (15 s), must ad-
vance in the Gen. to the second syllable: 6v5paros, Tpairtfos, ayytXov.
b. In accentuation, c before w in the endings of the Gen. and of the
Attic Dec. 2 is not regarded as forming a distinct syllable (120 i, 200,
220 c) : hence, 'Arpddeu), 7r6Xews, 7r6Xewi' • etiyeios. So, in some compound
adjectives, even with an intervening liquid : as, <pi\6ye\u)s (237 b).
c. Final £ and \|/, making position after a short vowel (734), forbid the
acute on the antepenult, though not the circumflex on the penult : hence
lpi(3a>\a£, -a/cos, though iplfiuXos, fertile.
771. Law II. a. The circumflex can only fall upon a
long vowel, (b) It cannot recede beyond the penult ; and can
fall upon this, only when the last vowel is short, — (c) being
the only accent which a penult long by nature can then receive.
Hence, (a) /SoOj, ^Os, 7ras (19, 23), become in the Nom. pi. /3<5es, pves,
iravres : (b) povaa, prjaos (15 s), in the Gen. potio-ws, vrjcrov : (c) af£, d-qp
(17 s), 'Arpei5??s (15), in the Nom. pi. afyes, 0%>es, 'ArpetSat (767 b).
II. Accent in Yowel Changes.
772. a. Contraction. Law III. In contraction, the
acute folloived by the grave produces the circumflex : voos vovs,
ooTtov dorovv (16),ri/ia&> TipLco, (jitXeeiir (friKeiv (42).
348 ACCENT. IN DECLENSION. §'772.
1. Otherwise the accent is not affected by contraction, except as the
general laws may require : rl/me tI\lci, ti/j,cl£tu> Tipdro), Tt/xaoi^TjyTifttojtqv •
io-Tadros €o-t<Stos (26 i, 771 c). See 120 s.
2. Some contract forms are accented as though made by inflection
without contraction ; or fall into the analogy of other words. Thus,
In contracts of Dec. 2, — (a) The accent remains throughout upon the
same syllable as in the theme : etivoos, evvbov, cont. etfvovs, ctfvov (Nom. pi.
efVot or efivoi, 767 b), kind, (b) The Nom. dual, if accented upon the
ultima, is always oxytone : vco, 6<rr<a (16). (c) Except in the Nom. dual,
all simple contracts in -ovs or -ow are perispome : xpt/creos \pvo-ovs (23),
K&veov tcavovv, basket. — (d) Oxytones of the Attic Dec. retain throughout
the accent of the theme : veds, vew, w<^(16) ; dy/jpco (22). Cf. 120 e.
In contracts of Dec. 3, — (e) The Ace. of nouns in -<o is oxytone : vx6a
4\\<a (19 a). So Dat. xporrl XP<? perispome (207 a). These cases follow
the analogy of 775. (f) The contract Gen. pi. of rpufip-qi (213 c) and some
like compounds is made by some paroxytone : as, rpi-qptwv TpiVjpwv.
g.) The Subj. and Opt. pass, of verbs in -p* and preteritives are accented
by some without regard to their contraction : thus, ridw/xai, rWn, rldrfTai,
5l8olto (45 c) ; k£kto>p.cu, p.ip,jnjro (317 c). (h) This is usual in the depo-
nents Mvaiitu, €TrL<TTap.ai, Kpt/xapixti, and the 2 aorists 6va<jQai, irpia(r6ai (50).
3. In the resolution or extension of a vowel, a circumflex is resolved
into its acute and grave (767 g) : reus ircus, 0ws <p6«s (105 a, 103 b).
773. b. Crasis. In crasis, the accent of the first word is lost ;
while that of the second remaps without change, except as required
by 771 c : ravro for to clvto, kuv for tcai av, raXXa for to. aWa.
774. c. Apostrophe. The accent of an elided vowel is thrown
back upon the penult, except in prepositions and conjunctions : SeiV
Zirn for dciva cirrj, kot e'/xe (fcara), dkX iydt (aXAa). See 128.
III. Accent in Inflection.
775. Law IV. A long affix of declension can only take the
acute in the direct, and the circumflex in the indirect cases.
a. Hence, y5^, -rjs, -77, -fy (15) ; x°P°v> _< 5> -&v, -°' ? > -°fc (16) ; yvirCbv y
-dip (17). (b) Except in the datives £p.ol, fwl, <roi (27 a). See also 772 d.
776. Law V. The accent is retentive in declension ; but
recessive in comparison and conjugation: <bov, wov, ad (16);
Kakos, Kaicfov, KciKicrTos (260 a); Xvw, fXvov, \e\vKa (37).
777. A. Declension. 1. In Dec 1, the affix- a>v of the Gen.pl.
is circumflexed, as contracted from -dcov (197 c) : Tpdncfc, rpane^Suf.
2. In adjectives in -os, the feminine is accented throughout, so far as
the general laws permit, upon the same syllable as the masc. : thus, <pi-
\ios, <pi\ld, friendly, PI. <pi\<.oi, <pl\iai, Gen. masc. and fern. (pikLuv ; while,
from the noun t) <(>i\la, friendship, <pi\iat, <pi\iwv. (a) In most other
adjectives, the fern, retains the accent of the theme, but subject to the same
changes as in nouns of Dec. 1 : p.£\as, p.£Xaiva, pLeXaiv-qs, p,e\aipQv (22).
778. 3. In Dec 3, dissyllabic Genitives and Datives throw the
accent upon the affix.
a. Hence, from 71^, &c. (17 s), yviros, alyl, irarpts, av8pQi>, aval, apvi.
§ 783.]
IN CONJUGATION. 349
"b. Except those which have become dissyllabic by contraction, participles,
and the Gen. pi. and dual of these ten nouns, das, fytws, d&s, icdpa, oOs,
irais, o-qs, Tpcis, 0ys, <f>Qs (light), and of the adjective irds (also Dat. iraai,
23) : 7r6\ei' irdXct (19), eapos fjpos (209 a) ; dovros, Qhn, dvci (26) ; traldwv,
<P&twv, &Toiv (17). (c) The contraction is not regarded in accenting the
Gen. and .Dat. of oh (19 d), ods, arkap, <pp£ap (207 ; yet see b), and 6/3p£
(G. -k6s). (d) Observe the accentuation of of/dels (25), tLs, tIs (28), yvrfj
(203 a), dvydrrfp (210 b) ; and of datives in -curt, from liquids (145 a).
779. 4. The natural tone of frequent address gives kecessive
Accent to the Voc. in a few familiar Avords : as, Dec. 1, decnrorvs, master;
Dec. 2, ddeXcpos, brother; Dec. 3, yvv-q (203a), 'A7r6\Xaw, &c. (208 f);
Voc. 8£<nroTa, &8eX<pe, ytvai, "AttoXXov. So V. dtjcrfirrrep \p. 97.
. a. In the Voc. sing., -€« and -oi iinal are always circumflexed : i-mrev.
5. From the tendency to recessive accent in comparatives and com-
pounds (795), the Voc. and Neut. sing, forms are so accented — (b) In
most compound paroxytones in -«v and -tjs, except those in -<ppwv, -db&rjs,
-diXys, -ypvs, -(bp-qs, and -irrjs : evdai/nuv fortunate, Neut. and Voc. etfScu-
fiov • V. 2u>/c/>ares, 'Hpd/cXees (19). So a few other neuter adjectives, when
used adverbially : dXuOes ; really ? (c) In comparatives in -<ov : rjbiuiu, yolof.
d. Recessive accent appears also in some Nom. forms in -a for -i\s
(197 b) : evptioira. (e) Observe the accentuation of psr\Tt\p, dvydr-qp, Atj/jlt)-
ttjp (210 b). (f) In the forms in ~4>i, -0i, -8ev (190 s), the accent usually
falls upon a short vowel in the penult, but is otherwise retentive, (g) For
peculiarities in the accentuation of the numerals and pronouns, see 25, 27 s.
780. B. Conjugation has exceptions to the law of reces-
sive accent ; chiefly in the Infinitive and Participle.
1. These forms are accented upon the penult: — (a) All Infinitives
in -ai not preceded by -a-0- or -fxcv- : Xwat, XeXvicfrcu, Xvdijuai, ridivai • but
Xtf<raa-0cu, rideadai (37, 45), dt/xeuai (333). (b) The 2 Aor. mid. Inf. : Xt-
irio-daL (38), diro-doadai (45 i) ; but irpiaadai., 6va<x6ai. (50; as if pres.).
(c) The Perf. pass. Inf. and Part. : XeXvadat, XeXvpJi>os ; except a few pre-
teritive participles, and Epic infinitives, as -ftueros, d/cdx^tfcu T. 335.
781. 2. These forms are oxytone : — (a) Participles in -s, Gen.
-tos, except in the 1st Aor. act. : XeXvKws, Xvdeis, fords, dots • but Xvcras
(37, 45). (b) The 2 Aor. act. Part. : XiwAv (38). (c) The Pres. partici-
ples (as if 2 Aor.) Idv (45 m), tcubv (fr. kIw go, poet., II. 263), l<Jtv e. i. (50
elpU a), (d) The 2 Aor. Imv. forms eure say, iXde" come, evpi find ; and in
Attic, ite see, and Xafie" take ; except in composition, as e£-e\0e, efo-i8e.
782. 3. These forms are perispome : — (a) The 2 Aor. Inf. in -civ :
Xnrelv (38). (b) The 2 Pers. in -ov, of the 2 Aor. Imv.: Xiirov (38), 6od,
dov (45 i) ; except in compounds of more than two syllables from verbs in
-|ii, as dir68ov, but irpodov.
Notes, c. That the final accent in the preceding forms should be
acute on the theme of the Part., and circumflex on the Inf. (considered as
a Dat., 666 b), is in accordance with Law IV. (775). (d) The circumflex
in XvdQ, lcttQ, TidGifmi, 5w, Xvdelev, rideio (37, 45), and like Subj. and Opt.
forms, is due to contraction (772). (e) Monosyllabic forms long by nature,
except Participles, are generally circumflexed : el, 9jv, %, &v (45 1).
783. a. The accent of a verb in composition can never recede
beyond a prefix (277) ; or beyond the nearest syllable of the preposition :
thus, iirexo) (iiri, ££«, 50), iirelxov, iiriaxov, imax^s. (b) The preteri-
350 ' ACCENT. GRAVE, PROCLITICS, ENCLITICS. § 783.
tive otSa (46) is treated as without reduplication : aiv-oida. (c) The
accent of d\il recedes in composition only in the Pres. Ind. and Imv.
d. For the accent in elp.i and <J>T]p.£, see 45, 787 c ; for KeijJtai, 50.
Other examples of irregular or various accentuation are %P^ &XPW (50
Xpdud) ; 1 Aor. Imv. elirov or dirbv (50 <p7]filc) ; eh or ets (50, elfiL 1), 1806
as exclam. (50 op&w) ; forms noticed in 316 c ; &c.
IV. Accent in Construction.
784. A. Grave Accent. Law VI. Oxytones, followed by
other words in closely connected discourse, soften their tone,
and are then marked with the grave accent ( N ) : 2rpaTTjy6v Se
avrov a7T€8ei^€ (480). 'E7ri ra KaXa nai dyada.
a. Except the interrogative tCs (253 a), and words followed hy enclitics.
h. The terms acute and oxytone are still applied to the syllable and
word, although the tone is softened. Syllables strictly grave are never
marked, except for grammatical illustration, as in 767.
785. B. Anastrophe. In prepositions of two short sylla-
bles, the accent commonly recedes to the penult, when they
follow the words which they would regularly precede, or take
the place of compound verbs : thus,
Sottas ire'pt, about wisdom, PL (the like placing of other prepositions is
poetic) ; dXtaas &iro for awoXiaas, having lost, t. 534 (§ 699 j); &va, irdpa,
Ivi (699 e). This recession is termed ava<rrpo<pij, turning back.
a. Some so write ircpC and diro when used adverbially.
786. C. Proclitics. Ten monosyllables, beginning with
a vowel, are called proclitics (npoKk'ivco, to lean forward), because
they commonly so lean upon the following word as to lose their
proper accent. They are the aspirated forms of the art., 6, fj,
ol, ai, and the particles ov not, els into, iv in, e£ out of « if, cos as.
a. These forms of the article are written with the accent, when used in
Epic as relative, and by some, when used as personal pronouns : 8 . . ijXv-
0es, who earnest, |3. 262 ; 6 ydp, but 8 ydp Bek., for he, A. 9. (b) The
proclitics retain their accent when they close a sentence, or in poetry
follow a word whose relation they denote (718 d), or are followed by an
enclitic : ov drjra, no, indeed, but irm yap oH; how not? ws j3oes, but /36es
ois x- 299, as kine; ck KaKwv, but KaKQv 2fj, from the base ; el' irore, if ever.
787. D. Enclitics. Law VII. The accent of an enclitic
falls, as acute, upon the ultima of the preceding word, or upon
its penult if it is a paroxytone, uniting with any accent already
upon the syllable : as,
"AvdpwwoL T€, homines-que, and men, Set^bv pot, shdw me; d ttot€
(786 b) : dur)p ns (784 a) ; <piXos p.ov, my friend ; ^ pet vu poi ti ttIOolo
(705 a ; each enclitic throwing its accent back). — But see 788 d.
Enclitics are so named as leaning in pronunciation upon the preceding
word (iytcXipw, to lean upon). They are these familiar words of one or
two syllables : (a) These oblique cases of the personal pronouns : 1 Pers.
|iov, \t.oi, p4 • 2 P. <rov, <ro£, <r«* • 3 P. ov, ol, t • vtv, <r<J>£<ri, <r<p€. For
§ 790. IN FORMATION. 351
other enclitic forms of the personal pronouns, see 27 f, g. (h) The in-
definite pronoun tIs, through all its cases (but not drra) ; and the in-
definite adverbs irifj, iroi, irov, irw, irws, iro0£, iroGev, itot€ (53). (c) The
Pres. ind. of dpi to be, and <j>T]fj.£ to say, except the 2d Pers. sing. ; and
even here in the Ep. form els : vrjinjs els, stultus es, t. 273. (d) The
particles -ye, vvv (vi), ire'p, tc, toi, with the poetic Qi\v, k(, pa., and -B4 (688 e).
e. Some familiar combinations of this kind are commonly, and others
sometimes, joined in writing, and viewed as compounds : eire, iJTot, /jltjtls,
Saris (observe the accent, 28 h), ovUiroTe, &<rirep, (bare, (f) The prep-
osition -8c*, to (688 e), is always so attached : "OXvpnrovde, So/uovde. (g) In
pronouns and adverbs compounded with -8^ (252, 53 ix. ), the syllable
preceding -8£ always takes the accent, which is acute or circumflex accord-
ing to the law in 775. (h) In e-yw, ijioi, and k\ii, the accent is drawn
back when yi is affixed (389 c) : fywye, 2p.oiye, fyeye. (i) El'Ge arid vai\t
are accented as ending in enclitics ; and oinade (225 i) as a single word.
788. An enclitic retains its accent, (a) At the beginning of a clause
or verse, or after a parenthetic insertion : <j>rj{xl ydp, for I say. (b) After
the apostroplie : iroXXol 5' do-Lv, Met tliey are many, (c) If it is emphatic
or strongly reflexive : ov Kvpov, &\\cl <r4, not C, but YOU. (d) If it is a
dissyllable, preceded by a paroxytone, or by a properispome in -£ or -\|/
(770 c) : dvdpes nve's, some m,en. (e) If it is a personal pronoun, preceded
by an orthotone preposition which governs it and is not itself more em-
phatic : irapa croi, irepl <rov, irpbs <r( ■ but eirC ae ?} <rt>v coi, against you
rather titan with you, vii. 7. 32. Yet irpbs fie (sometimes <re) iii. 2. 2 ;
and some exceptions occur, chiefly in the poets, with other prepositions.
f. When ia-ri is prominent in the sentence, it becomes a paroxytone
(as at the beginning, or when it expresses existence or possibility, and com-
monly after such words as ou, jr/j, aWd, el, Ka£, 8ti, a>s, tovto) : *E<ttiv ol
(559 a) ; eVri \afifiaveiv, one can take, i. 5. 3 ; tout' tcTiv, it is so.
g. A word which neither leans upon the following nor upon the pre-
ceding word, but stands, as it were, erect, is called, in distinction from
the proclitics and enclitics, an orthotone (opdorovos, erect in tone).
V. Accent in Formation.
789. General Principle. In each word, the accent be-
longs to that syllable upon which the attention is most strongly
fixed. — If, from some law of language, this syllable cannot
receive the accent, it draws it as near to itself as possible.
1. In the origin of language, the attention is absorbed by the greater
distinctions of thought ; but, as these become familiar to the mind, it
passes to the less, and then to those that are still subordinate. In the
Greek, as in other languages, the accent originally belonged to the sylla-
bles containing the essential ideas of words, i. e. to their radical syllables.
But, in proportion as these became familiar, there was a tendency to
throw the accent upon those syllables by which these ideas were modified,
either through inflection, derivation, or composition. Compare ypd^u /
write, with 'iypa<pov I was writing, yiypcupa I have written, ypa<pi\ the
act of writing, ypafavs the person who writes, ypa<piK6$ suited to writing.
790. a. The Doric was characterized by its adherence to general rules
and old usage ; (b) the Lesbian ^Eolic, by its tendency to throw the ac-
cent as far back as possible ; (c) the Attic (which the Ionic appears to have
more nearly approached), by an expressive variety of accent.
352 ACCENT. IN SIMPLE WORDS. § 791.
791. The accent of the theme in declension, and of un-
inflected words must be learned from special rules and from
observation.
Note. For derivatives, trie marks of accent in § 363 - 382 should be
carefully noticed. The rules below are not intended for proper names.
A. Special Rules for Simple Words.
1.) Or Dec. I. All contracts are perispome : 'Ep/xrjs, /xva. Of other
words, — (a) Those in -as are paroxytone : rapdas. (b) Most in -tjs are
paroxytone, except verbals in -rr\s from mute and pure stems of verbs in
-a), which are commonly oxytone : ' Arpdb-rjs (so all patronymics in -8tjs),
vcujtvs, \f/d\TT]$, Trpo<pr)Tr}$, Trpoa-Tdrvs • biKaarr/s, ttoitjttjs. (c) Nouns in
-a short (194) have recessive accent: /met, fj.ov<ra, rpdvefd, dXifieid.
(d) Most abstracts in -ia, those in -<tvvtj, and those in -eia from verbs in
-€v» (363, 367), are paroxytone : <ro<f>id, crwcppoavvv, iraideld. (e) Most
other verbals in -a long or -tj are oxytone : <pvyr), tpdopd, <pvXai<r).
792. 2.) Of Dec. II. (a) Adjectives in -os preceded by a mute are
commonly oxytone, especially those in -kos, verbals in -tos, and ordinals
in -oros : kclkos, dpx<-Kbs, bpdrbs, duoarbs, x a ^ e7r ^s, <ro<pbs, boXixbs, dyaOos.
So verbal nouns in -os denoting the agent : dpxbs, Tpo<j>bs. (b) On the
contrary, in primitive nouns with a mute stem, the accent is more frequent-
ly recessive : kjjttos, /c/>6kos, ttXovtos, \pdp.ados. (c) All ordinals not end-
ing in -o-tos have recessive accent : cVkxitos. (d) Adjectives in -Xos, -pos,
and -vos (except those in -ivos denoting material or country, 375 c, e) are
commonly oxytone : \pCXbs, <po(3epbs, aep-vbs, 7re8t.vb$ • ZtiXivos, Tapavrlvos.
(e) Nouns in -uos with a long penult are commonly oxytone ; while in
adjectives in -jaos the accent is commonly recessive : 65vpp.bs, fiup-os • XPV-
aip.o$. (f) Nouns in -os pure are more frequently oxytone : vaos, 6e6s,
vlus, vvbs. (g) Verbals in -tcos (374 f), numerals in -aios and -irXoos
(240), and most adjectives in -aios from nouns of Dec. 1, in -otos, and in
<oos, are accented upon the penult : Tronrreos, 8iir\6os, dyopdios, biroios,
eyos. (h) Adjectives in -€ios, in -ios preceded by a consonant, and in -eos
joined immediately to the root, have commonly recessive accent : drjpeios,
ovpdpios, xpfotos. (i) Very few neuters are oxytone ; and in most neuters
the accent is recessive : fibpiov, ttott/piov, opveov, ZXaiov. But a diminu-
tive in -toy, forming a dactyl, is commonly paroxytone : iraidLop.
793. 3. ) Of Dec. III. (a) Nouns in -av, -ojs, -«, -cos -oos, -as
-a8os, -is -i8os, masculines in -t)p, and almost all nouns in which the
stem-mark is v preceded by a, €, tj, or I, are oxytone : iraidv, iirweOs, t)xu,
alddbs, Xa/x-rrds, -d8os, irar-qp, Xip.r)v, -tvos. (b) Nouns in -ecov, names of
months in -cov, and most feminines and augmentatives in -av, are oxytone ;
other words in -tov are more frequently paroxytone : nvKtibv, xeXibibv, du-
ireXuv • kXvSuv. (c) Monosyllabic nouns which have the Ace. in -a are
commonly oxytone ; those which are neuter (see d), and most which have
the Ace. in -v, perispome : ai'£, Trots, 6i)p, Odbs ■ to <pQs, rb irvp (so 7ras,
irav, 23) ; (3ovs, vavs. (d) In neuter nouns, in words in -| and -\j/, in
verbals in -T«p, and in nouns in -is or -vs with the Gen. in -ecus, the ac-
cent is recessive: K^pas, fiovXevpia • Kbpatj ; Stim/us, TriXeKvs. (e) Female
appellatives in -is (365 c, 368 s) have the accent upon the same syllable
as the masculine, except when this is a proparoxytone or dissyllabic bary-
tone (in which case the feminine commonly becomes oxytone) : woX^rris,
§797.
IN COMPOUNDS. — INDEX I.
353
iroXiTis ' HpiafjLtSrjs, Xipiapls • alxp-dXorros, at'xAWtXwris • Tl{p<n}S, Hepais.
(f ) Simple adjectives are commonly oxytone, if the stem-mark is a vowel ;
paroxytone, if it is a consonant : <ra<pr}$, i)86s • /xiXas, x a P^ € ^ (22 s).
794. 4.) Adverbs, (a) Adverbs in -ws derived from adjectives
are, with very few exceptions, accented like the Gen. pi. of then* primi-
tives (381a) : <ro<t>Qs, raxtws. (b) Derivative adverbs in -8ov, -8a, -t, -€i,
and -£ are commonly oxytone ; those* in -8ir)v, -axis and -co, paroxytone
(381 s) : irXivdrjSou, M^Surri, dpuxxei, irapaW&i- • ffiropddrjv, woXX&kis, ^w.
5.) Prepositions. The eighteen prepositions proper (688 c) are all
oxytone : d7r6, /card. For the removal or loss of the accent, see 785, 786.
B. Rules for Compound Words.
795. In composition, there is a general tendency to recessive accent.
But, — (a) Compound adjectives in -tjs are more frequently oxytone : as,
evTrpeirris. (b) Compounds in which -os is affixed to the stem of a verb
united with a noun are commonly oxytone, if the penult is long ; but if the
penult is short, they are commonly paroxytone when active in sense, and
proparoxytone when passive (386b) : ctltottolos (387 a) ; XtdofioXos and Xido-
fioXos (386. 1). (c) Compound adjectives of Dec. 3, with a palatal or lin-
gual stem-mark, in which the latter part is a monosyllable derived from a
verb, are commonly oxytone : awoppwi;, rjfiidvrjs. (d) Words derived
from compound words are commonly not accented as though themselves
compounded ; but their compounds again follow the general rule : thus,
KaTOLcrnevafa, Ka.Tcw/ceucwT6s (792 a), d-/caTa<TKei5a(rros.
797. INDEX I. -GREEK.
The references are here made, as in other parts of the Grammar, to sections
and their parts. The letter s (from the Lat. sequens) is often added, as else-
where, to signify and the following ; but is often omitted as needless, where it
might have been added. The signs < and "> represent the forms at the angle
as arising by contraction or some other change, chiefly euphonic, from the
forms at the opening, or as used in their stead. The sign x denotes opposition
or distinction. Dialectic use is marked by an older style of figures in the ref-
erences (as, 329). For abbreviations, see 798. To increase the practical value
of the Index, the form or construction of a word is sometimes referred to the
appropriate rule or remark, although the particular word may not have been
cited as an example in the present edition, perhaps not even in the larger Gram-
mar. In the latter case, the reference is marked with an accent ( ' ). The
index for the conjugation of verbs is contained in § 50.
A 4, 106 ;<> 138, 142.
d- cop. 385 : priv. 385,
compounds w. gen. 436.
a 109s, 118 d, 7, lis.
ayaQos cp. 262 b, 260 a,
261 a, b ; w. ace. 481'.
dydWw mid. 5827.
a-yaucu w. ace, gen., 429 a,
443 b, 432 f.
COMP. GR.
dvavaKTc'co w. dat. 456,
w. pt. 677'. [pt. 677'.
dycurdu w. dat. 456, w.
AyyeXos dec. 16.
&yt imv. 656 b.
d\T|paos, -ws, dec. 22.
dyvdts 386, w. gen. 432 b.
&7XS -° c j cp. 262 d,
263 d ; w. gen. 445 c.
dSe\<f>os w. gen. 442 a,
w w. dat. 451; &5eX<f>e779.
"AiSns dec. 225 b ; 'Ai-
86a8e 688 e ; 483 a.
dSiic&o w. 2 acq. 480 b,
w. pt. 677 a ; pres. as
dStKos dec. 22. [pf. 612.
-a0- in 2 aor. 353 a.
"A0»s, -o> ace. 199. 3.
w
354
INDEX I.
yiyvofiat § 797.
ttt 108 ; in accent. 767.
ctl, d., e., for el if, 701 f.
alStis 219 b, 214, 215 c.
ai| dec. 17.
alpcoj w. 2 ace. 480 a ;
mid. 579, pass. 588'.
-awri old dat. pi. 198. 3.
alo-0dvofj.aiw.gen. 432 b,
h,w. dep. verb 657, 677.
aUrxpos, -pQs, cp. 260,
261 e, 263.
alo-x^voixai w. ace. 472 f,
w. inf. x pt. 657 k.
airita w. 2 ace. 480 c.
afrios, -dofiai, w. gen.
444 f, 431 c, dat. 454 d.
aKoXovQos w. gen. 442 a,
w. dat. 450.
dxovw w. gen. and ace.
432g, h, 434a; as pass.
575 a ; pres. as pf. 612 ;
\v. inf. orpt. 657 k, 677.
aicpos, use 508 a.
d\-yeivds cp. 260, 261 e.
a\is w. gen. 414 a.
dXio-Kopai w. gen. 431 c,
w. pt. 677'.
dXXd 701 b, n, x dXXa
766 a ; introd. 708 e
&\\d ydp 709, dXX' 1j
700 m, n.
aX\da-<r<a w. gen. 429 a
dXX^Xwv 27, 244. 3.
dXXotos w. gen. 406 a.
aXXosdec.28l;use567;
w. gen. 406 a ; as adv.
509 e, 567 e ; x 6 &\\os
523 f; tf\XoTt(^)567g.
aXX*>s re kclI 717 a.
aXs dec. 208.
a\&Tn\l dec. 203 b.
aXtasdec. 225 j. [662.
&pa w. dat. 450 ; w. pt.
dpapxdvw w. gen. 405.
duetvwv compt. 261 a, f,
262 b.
ap/TT6x<i> w. 2 ace. 480 c.
du<f>£688, 689 e; oi dfupi
527 a. [480 c'.
dp<pi€vvvpt w. 2 ace.
dpcptt dec. 25, 240 c.
dvconting. w. ind., opt.,
• inf.,pt., 618, 658a; w.
sub. 619 ; w. fut. ind.
620 ; pos. 621, 662 b ;
repeated 622, omitted
631 e - g ; w. pot. opt.
or ind. 636 s ; w. ind.
of habit 616 b ; not w.
opt. of wish 638 f.
dvconj., <edv, 619a.
dvd 688, 6891; sc. (tttjOl
699 e, 785 ; w. num.
f 239 f, 692. 5.
dvapipv^o-K(o const. 473.
dv€\opai w. gen. 432 f.
dv^jp dec. 18, 210, 208 f ;
in address 484 g ; dvrjp,
Covqp, 125.
dvr£688, 689 h; dp$' Sv,
because, 557 ; derivat.
w. gen. 445, w. dat. 455.
dvniroieopai w.gen. 430.
avrpov dec. 16.
dvv» const. 677 f.
dv» cp. 262 d, 263.
a£ios, &c, w. gen. 431 b ;
w. dat. 454 d.
dirio-T^to w. dat. 456.
dirXoos, -ovs, dec. 23 ;
cp. 257 c, d.
diro" 688, 689 b ; form
136 b ; cp. 263' ; w.
pass. 586 d. [gen. 431 a.
diro8i8op.ai sell, 579, w.
diroSiSpdo-Kco 472 f.
diroXavco w. gen. 412.
'AiroXXwv dec. 208 f,
211 a. [w. dat. 456.
diropeo) w. gen. 414 b;
diroo-rep&o w.gen. 41 4 b' ;
w. 2 ace. 480 c.
dirrto, mid. w. gen. 426.
dpa (pd, dp) 685 c ; pos.
720 ; Ijv as pres. 611.
dpa {<*,p4)j 687. [262b.
dpctwv, &pi<TTos, cp. 261 a,
dpeo-KM w. dat. 457.
'Aprjs 21, 216 c, 220 a.
dpi- in compos. 385 d.
dpurrcuci) w. gen. 419 c.
dpKe'o) w. dat. 453 ; per-
sonally 573.
d P Kt>s dec. 219 f.
dpveopai 6V1 oil 713 d.
dpvos dec. 18, 210.
dpirail 230 a ; cp. 259.
dppTjv dec. 22, 208 a.
dp\w w. gen. 407, 425 ;
pt. as adv. 674 b.
clo-o-a, &a<ra (-rra), 253 a,
4 254b, 28. [226 g.
dorfjp, -rpdai 145 a ;
do-TV dec. 19, 215 b.
-aTai, -aTO < -vtcu, -vto
158, 300 b, 329.
aTap conj. 701 b.
&T€ as, w. pt. 681.
&T€pos = eVepos 125 b.
'Atp«£8t]s 369', dec. 15.
aTuxeo) w. gen. 405, 427.
av 4, 108 ; < aF 142.
aS, addis, pos. 720.
av-rfoa w. pt. 662.
avTdsdec. 28,251, 255b;
cp. 262 d ; use 540 s ;
w. dat. of assoc. obj.
467 c ; w. compt. and
sup. 513 f ; as pers.
pron. 540 g ; 6 avrds
540 b, w. dat. 451.
aviTOv < iavTov 244.
dcpaipeopai const. 485 d.
d<pei8€w w. gen. 405 b.
axQopcu w. dat. 456 ;
w. pt. 661 b, 677'.
d\pi(s) 164 ; w. gen.
445 c ; &xP L °^ 557 a.
B4, 137; <tt, 0, 147.
(3ao-tXev«; (sc. 6) 533 b ;
cp. 262 d.
(3ao-kXeva> w. gen. 407 ;
aor. x pres. 592 d.
PcXtCwv, &c, 260, 261 e.
po^0€a),&c., w. dat. 453.
(Sopeas, -/Spas dec. 15,
196, 198. 1.
(3ouXeva>, mid. 579.
povXopat, /3otfXei 559 c,
647 b ; povXofLfrij) 455 n.
Govs dec. 19, 214 s, 217.
T 4, 137 c; <k, x , 147.
-yap 701 j ; in specif.
705 b ; anacol. 716 a ;
pos. 720 ; 6 ydp 518 b.
y£ 389 c, 685 b, c ; pos.
720 ; encl. 787 d, h.
ydra>v const. 442, 450.
Y^Xws dec. 207 c ; com-
pounds 237 b.
-ye'vos, "y^pas, dec. 19,
216 s. [473.
•yevtt w. gen., ace, 432 a,
•ytyas dec. 17, 205.
-y£-yvopai w. gen. 412,
§797. yiyvofxai
GREEK.
'Eppeas
355
437 a' ; w. dat. 449 ;
w. pt. 679. [657 k.
yiyvJiVKV w. inf. x pt.
TXovs dec. 21, 227 b.
y6vv dec. 224 c.
7pacpa>, mid. 579, 581, w.
gen., ace, 431 c, 480 c.
YvWj dec. 203, 779.
yity dec. 17, 203.
rwppvasdec. 15, 198.1.
A 4, 137 ; in dec. 217.
SaCptov dec. 18, 208.
§a.Kpvov,-pv dec. 14, 225 f.
Sdpap dec. 17, 153 a.
8av€^ w , mid. 581.
84 685 c, 701 c ; for ydp
705 a ; introd. 708 e j
pos. 720 : 6 84 518.
-8c local 688 e, 382, 252;
enclit. 787 d, f, g.
Setva dec. 27, 245.
Se'vSpov, -eov, dec. 225 f.
ScViroTa voc. 779.
hi<a need, w. gen. 414 b ;
w. num. 242 c : Set w.
ace. 473b; w. inf. 598 a;
fuicpov [Sew], &c, 665 :
Se'opai w. gen. 414 c,
434 a.
8^|, Srjdev, drJTa, Sal,6$5c,
389 ; pos. 673.
SfiXos elfju 573, 677 g ;
drjXov 6tl 717 b.
8T)\da> w. pt. 677. [208 f.
AimTJTTip dec. 210 b,
8ia 688, 689 a.
SiaXi-yopai 580, w. dat.
452 a. [677 f.
8iaXeiTr<«>, pt. or w. pt.
8iaTpij3to w. pt. 677 a.
Siatpe'pco (-(popos) w. gen.
406 ; mid. w. dat. 455'.
SiSdcrxco w. 2 ace. 480 c ;
mid. 581.
8iSa)p.i, pres. x aor. 594.
Staaids etju w. inf. 573.
Sijcqv \v. gen. 436 d.
Sidn conj. 701 j.
8iirXdcrios W. gen. 409.
8tirovs dec. 22, 231 c.
SokIco personally 573 ;
(ws) Soicetv epcol 665,
671 c' ; pt. abs. 675 c, d.
SdXos dec. 14, 11 s.
Srfpv dec. 21, 224 c.
Sous dec. 26, 205, 233.
Svvapxu w. ace. 472 f ;
or -ros, w. rel. 553 c.
Svo, Svu, dec. 25, 240 c.
8vs dec. 26, 205, 233.
Svcr- 385 c ; ang. 283.
Scopedv adv. ace. 380 a.
Swpov dec. 14, lis.
,l E xJ/iXdv 4, 98 b, 106 ;
< a 138, 142, 152 s;
ins. in cont. 120 i.
-€a- in plup. 291 c : -ca,
-id's, in ace. 220.
edv (el 6m) 701 f, 619 a.
lavTov > auroO dec. 27,
244, 248 ; use 537 s ;
as gen. refl. 539 d.
Idco w. ov, forbid, 686 i.
lyyvs cp. 263 d ; w. gen.
445 c ; w. dat. 450.
iy& dec. 27, 243, 246 ;
use, 536 s; £7076 78 7 h.
m V for od 27 f, 247 f.
€i, e'Cirep, el p\i\, etre, el
/ecu, el p.7] el, 701 f, g, i,
m, 631 s, 639 a, 643 s,
674 f; el ydp, etOe, el,
in wish 638 ; el tls 639 ;
ell. w. el 84, el Se p.-q, &c,
710,717 c; eiprocl.786.
-€ia- in opt. 293 d, e.
«l8»s dec. 26, 233 c.
€i'Koo-i(v) 52, 163 a.
el'icco w. dat., gen., 455 g,
cIkwv dec. 224a. [405 b.
elpC be x eluu go 766. 3 ;
enclit. 787 c : w. gen.
421 s, 437 ; w. dat.
459 ; w. pt. 679 ; %<ttlv
oi, &c.,559; <e<tti, ?jv, w.
pi. nom. 570 ; fjv as aor.
603 b, as pr. 611.
tWi, -bv, ace. 781, 783 e ;
a'p-yco w. gen. 405. [656.
-€is adj., 155 ; cp. 258.
€?s dec. 24, 240 b ; w.
dat. 451, sup. 512 c.
els, is, 688, 689 a; w.
num. 239 f, 692. 5;
proclit. 786 ; els 6're
712. [480 c'.
6ls(eK)irpdTTco w. 2 ace.
eKao-Tos 376 d ; const.
501, 548 c.
ckSvw w. 2 ace. 480 c.
€K€ivos 28 1, 252 ; ii<ei-
vo<rl 252 c ; use 542 ;
w. art. 524.
Ikwv elvai 665 b.
ika.crcrotVf-TTOJi', cp. 261 b,
262 b; eXarrou as indec.,
adv., 507 e, f, 511 c.
IXavvco as intrans. 577 c.
'EXXdSj-^asadj.SOef.
IXms dec. 17, 204.
€uavrov dec. 27, 244,
248 ; use 537 s.
cuds 252. 5 ; use 538.
6p.ov, ifxol, ep,4 X p.ou, p.oi,
/ii, 246 c, 536 s, 787 s.
-€v, inf. in, 309 c, 326.
Iv (id) 688, 689 a; proclit.
786 ; in compos. 166,
698 c ; as adv. 703 b ;
for els 704 d : iv rots
w. sup. 512 b ; evi for
heart 699 e, 785.
IvSiScopi intrans. 486 d.
eVSov, -odev, -061, w. gen.
445 c ; interch. 704.
^vcica, -nev, w. gen. 436 d.
evoxos w. gen. 431 c, d.
eg, e/c, 688, 689 a, 165 ;
proclit. 786; cp. 262 d;
w. pass. 586 ; for ev
^704: ef 6Voi;,&c.,557a.
igatcpvns w. part. 662.
e|dpxo> in hypall. 474.
e'fapvos w. ace. 472 j.
if-qs w. gen. 445 c, w.
dat. 450 a. [426.
4£(€<p)iKv4op«at W. gen.
e£dv absolute 675'.
'l\t» cp. 262 d, 263.
eoiica const. 657 j.
eiraiveco w. gen. 429 a,
443 b; w. 2 ace. 480 b'.
kird( Stj) w. aor. 605 c,
617 d ; w. evde"us, rd-
Xicrra, &c., 553. 1, b.
em 688, 689 g; w. num.,
240 f, 692. 5 ; in compos.
699 g: icf> cp(re) 557a,
w. inf. 671 ; eiri 785.
emxwpios w. gen. 437 b.
€pT]uos, -6oj, w.gen. 41 4 b.
ept- in compos. 385 d.
epis, -ifw, w - dat. 455 ;
dec. 17, 204.
'Epp^as,-7)y> dec. 15,196.
356
Zppcopevos
INDEX I.
§707.
€ppw|X€vos cp. 257 d.
^pXO|4.at w. pt. 598 b,
c ; pr. for fut. 609 c :
i\04 oxyt. 781 d.
IpJJvdec. 26, 152, 121.
epwrda) w. 2 ace. 480 c.
?<tt€ (is, ri) conj. 701 h.
€<ttws dec. 26, 233 a.
ftrxa-ros cp. 262 d, c.
cTcupos cp. 262 d.
ih-epos 376 c ; use 567 ;
w. gen. 406.
«v <eF 142, 217b ;<eo,
&c, 131 b, 323 c, f.
efryews dec. 200 b.
€vW(s) 164 ; w. gen.
430 ; w. part. 662.
ctfvoos accent. 772 a.
evpCo-K<a w. pt. 677 ; evpi,
oxyt. 781.
tvs, T|iSs, dec. 237 d.
ttfxofs dec. 22, 204.
c<j>£\kvo-tik<£v (v) 163 c.
«x9pos cp. 260, 261 e.
'dX<a reflex. 577 c, d, w.
gen. 420 b; w. pt. 679;
Xvpds tx^v 674 g ; mid.
w. gen. 426.
-€d>s, -e«v, Att. gen. 220.
&0S dec. 225 j, 199.
F 4, 98 e, 100, 138 s ;
in dec. 217; incj. 345;
in pron. 27 f, g, 246 s ;
in pros. 736 b.
Z4, 137 d; <mute&I
143 c, 261b, 349.
£<x-, 8a-, insep. 385 d.
£da> w. ace, dat. 485 d :
$auv, {Qv, dec. 26.
Zevs, Zap, dec. 21, 224 f.
-t«, verbs in, 349, 378 s.
H 4, 106 ; ins. 311.
XI 109 s, 118 d, 7, lis.
*) or, than, 701 d, i, 1 ;
w. compt. 511, 513, om.
511 c ; 7/ Kara, ?) ws,
&c, 513 ; 1) ov 713 b.
fj indeed, 685 c, 687.
fj 8' 8s 518 f. [553 c.
■ft as adv. 380 c' ; w. sup.
•f|8€ (184 e.) conj. 701 c.
■rj8op.ai w. dat. 456 ; in
dat. 459 N. ; w. pt. 677.
TJSiJsdec. 23, 213 s, 217,
233 ; cp. 260.
fJKKTTos sup. 262 b : ijiu-
<rra no, 708 b.
fJK« w. adv. and gen.
420 b ; as perf. 612.
tjXikos 53 ; in condens.,
556, 565'.
ir|p.€pa, gen. 433, dat.
469 a, ace. 482 ; wt.
art. 533 d; om. 507 b.
f|piv, %as, &c, 247 g, i.
fj|ii<rus dec. 220 g ; com-
pounds 242 e.
ijv< ear 619 a, 631s,
qirap dec. 17, 206.
tjp < eaprfpos, 209, 778 b.
'HpaK\€T]sdec. 19, 219 c,
779 f, 222 d.
fjpws dec. 19, 216.
-ijs <-<?es nom. 121 e
-T|S> "Tl " 1 * dat. pl- 198.
-t)s in form. 386. 2 ; cp.
258. [262 b.
■fjo-o-ttv, -TTU3V, compt.
fjorvyos cp. 257 d, 259 a.
fjrc, ijroi, 701 d. [779 a.
f|X«dec. 19, 214 s, 772 e,
Acjs, dec. 225 j, 219 b.
4,137; changes 147 s.
Oavd-rov, use 431 d.
8a<ro-wv (raxvs) 261 b.
8&T€pov, -ov, 125 b.
6aup.d£<i> w. ace. & uen.
432 f, 472 e ; w. el 639.
Gavjicurrbv 6<rov, &c, 565.
0cd dec. 15, 194 s.
Qds dec. 26, 205, 233.
6e|xis dec, use, 224 g.
-6ev, gen. in, 192, 380 b.
Qi\v 685 c ; pos. 720 ;
encl. 787 d.
Qi\p dec. 18, 208.
-0i, dat. in, 191. 2.
Qvf]a-K<a, tenses, 600 a.
0p££ dec. 17, 203 b.
0vYdTT)pdec. 210 b, 208 f.
0vpa£€, dvpao-i, 382,380 c.
14, 106; 1 subs. 109.
1 consonant 138 s, 143.
I8€,r0 t ,imv.656b;781d.
I'Sios w. gen. 437 b.
1'cp.cu w. gen. 430 b.
Upds w. gen. 437 b.
-it]- in opt. 293. [566 a.
tva 701 e, 624 e ; LVa tl ;
Uirevs dec. 19,21, 213 s.
Lo-dp.01.pos w. gen. or dat
442 a.
I'o-os & der. w. dat. 451.
iX0vs dec. 19, 217, 219 f.
-t<av, -kttos, in cp. 260 s.
K 4, 137 ; tense-s. 288.
Ka£ 701 a, 685 c ; crasis
126 ; w. num. 242 ; w.
ovtos 544 a ; w. pt.
674 f ; for other con-
nectives, 705 : Kal t6v
(6s) 518 c, f; Kal el
701 g; ttoXvs Kal 702 c;
Kal yap 709 ; Kaiirep
674 f, 662. [262 b.
tcaicds cp. 260 s, 261 e,
KaXt'co w. 2 ace. 480 a.
KaXo's cp. 260 [dec. 226.
Kapa in periphr. 437 c ;
Kara. 688, 689 m ; in
cp. 513 b ; compounds
w. gen. 699a: k&t 136.
KaTa.vep.co w. 2 ace. 480 a.
k((v), Kd, 1 63 a; = av 6 1 8 ;
pos. 720 ; encl. 787 d.
Kttvos 28 1, 255 c.
Kt'pas dec. 17, 207, 222 e ;
compounds 237 b.
KepSaXe'os cp. 260.
KE<j>aXf]s const. 426 b.
K-npijo-irei (6 KT)pv£) 571 b.
KivSuveuco w. gen. 446 d.
K^sdec. 19, 216b, 217c.
kXcCs dec. 17, 207, 222 a.
KX£rm]s cp. 262 d.
kXvw w. gen. 432 a,
434 a', 413 ; as pass.
575 a ; as perf. 612'.
Koivds & der., w. gen.
& dat. 424, 437 b, 450.
KdirTop.cu as act. 575 b.
Kopafj dec. 17, 203.
Kdpvs dec. 17, 204.
Kop^vvvp.i w. gen. 414 a.
KpdTos & der.w.gen. 407.
Kpeio-crcov, kpoltlcttos, cp.
261b, 262 b.
KpvirT<o w. 2 acc. 480 c.
Kpv4>a w. gen. 444 a.
Kvpo), -4u, w. gen. or dat.
427, 450'; w. pt. 677 a.
Kvtov dec. 18, 210.
A 4, 137 ; XX < v\, XI,
150,143a,349l;changes
of Xcr 152.
§797
\ayxava
GREEK.
OfXOV
357
Xa-yyo-vw w. gen. 427.
Xd0pa w. gen. 444 a.
XdXos cp. 257 d.
Xap|3dva> w. gen. 423,
426 ; Xa/S<? oxyt. 781.
Xav0dv« const. 677 f.
Xaos, Xedjs, dec. 200'.
Xe-yww. 2 ace. 480 b; Xe*-
yovcrip 571 c.
Xeiirw w. gen. 405', 406 b.
XeW dec. 17, 205.
Xipnv dec. 18, 208.
Xiirciv dec. 26, 781.
Xovb>, mid. 578.
\vy£ dec. 17, 203.
Xvpa dec. 14, 194 s.
Xvo) w. gen. 405 : XiW,
X6cras, dec. 26.
XuW,X£cttos, 261 a, 262b.
M 4, 137 ; changes of
&w. 148, 150, 152, 160.
pd x V7} w. ace. 476 d,
685 c ; fia rbv — 532.
pdicap, -aipa, 235 d.
paitpds cp. 261b, e; /xa-
tcpy, by far, 468.
pdXa cp. 263 a ; llcLXXov,
fidXicTTa, in cp. 510 ;
/xaWov om. 513 i.
pdX-ijs, virb, 228 c.
pav0dvo> w. gen. 434 a,
413; w.inf. xpt. 657 k;
rl /xaOujv ; 674 h.
McwTKds dec. 227 b.
pfyas dec. 24, 236 ; cp.,
261 b ; ivelfau dec. 22,
211.
-p.€0a, -^60-0(1,299: -jxedov
299 b, 9 c, page 7.
peiwv cp. 261 a ; fielov as
indecl. 507 e. [cp. 259.
p&a$dec.23, 208 c, 233;
pe'XXw w. inf. 598 a.
p€X«i&der.w.gen.432d ;
w. dat. 457 : 571 d.
piv, fxivroi, 685 c, 701b,
c; pos. 720: 6 fiiv 518 ;
As Hiv 519 f.
pg'o-os cp. 257 d, e ; use
508 : -oo) w. gen. 425 a.
peo-Tds, -6w,w.gen.414a.
pcrd 688, 689 c ; com-
pounds w. gen. 424.
peTairepiro), mid. 579.
ptTaijv w. part. 662.
p^rccm w. gen., dat.,
421, 459.
H^XP l (s) 164 ; w. gen.
445 c ; w. oO, &c, 557 ;
conj. 701 h, 703 c.
\lj\ adv. x ov, 686 s ;
redund. 713 ; m^
emph., fiTj ov, 713 c, f ;
ix-f) ri ye, p.r) 8ti (oirus),
717 d, g : conj. 701 e,
624 s : LLvbe", firire, conj.
701 c, a.
\ir\Sels dec. 25, 240 b;
p.-qd£v as indecl. 507 e.
p.T}K€Tl < fMT] €Tl 165 c.
pijXov dec. 16, 11 s, 771.
p^v 685 c ; pos. 720.
p^JTTjp dec. 210 b.
-pi form 45, 313 s, 335.
piKp<Jscp.261a,e,262b;
fUKpov (8e?v) 665.
pipvTJcrKw w. gen., ace,
432 c, 473.
pfv ace. 27 i ; use 539 e.
ptcrGow, mid. hire 581.
pvda, fiva, dec. 15, 196.
pdpiov dec. 16, 770.
p<$<r<rvv dec. 225 f.
poi), fioi, fit, encl. 787 ;
X€fxou,kc, 246 c, 536 s;
ixol ethical 462 e.
povo-a, pvia, dec. 15.
pwpos dec. 23, 232.
N 4, 137 ;' corresp. to a
138,142,156, changes 8,
150 s, ofvs 152 s, iv OI
142 a ; v final 160 ;
movable 162 s.
vat x fxd w. ace. 476 d.
vads, vetbs, dec. 16, 200.
vavs dec. 19, 21, 216 s,
222 f ; vav<pL 190 a.
vavnjs dec. 14, 194 s.
v4aTos sup. 257 e.
vct&sdec. 16, 200, 772 d.
vi\ x/xdw.acc. 476, 685c.
vt]- privative 385 b.
VTi<ros dec. 16, 771.
vlv ace. 27 g ; use 539 e.
vopt£o> w. dat. 466 c.
vdos, vovs, dec. 16, 225 g.
vv(v) 163 a, 685 c ; pos.
720 ; encl. 787 d.
vv£ 17 f ; gen., dat, ace,
433, 469, 482.
H4, 137; <K<r,7<r,x<r,
151.
£vv = civ 170, 688 s.
"O pticpoV 4, 98 c, 106 ;
^kind.w. a, e,114, 312b.
6 art. 28, 249 s ; accent.
786 ; in crasis 125 ; t(o
for rd 234 e ; in form
6's 518 e: use as pron.
516 s ; as art. 520 s,
generic 522, limiting
523 s; w. inf. 663 f,
664 ; arrangement 523 ;
ellipsis 527 s, 532 s :
6 fiiv (5V, ydp), Kctl rbv
(6s) 518; ev Toh 512 b.
88€dec.28,252;use542s;
x oSros 543 s ; = adv.
545 a ; = eyeb 546 ; w.
art. 524 : 651 252 c.
68ovs dec. 17, 205 a.
'OSvo^o-Jcvs dec. 2 1, 222.
6%<a w. gen. 412, 436 c.
-o0€V, -o0i, 191 s, 380.
60otfv€Ka 1 26 5 ; use 701 j.
ot 4 ; in accent. 767.
ot8a w. pt. 677 ; oI5' on
717 b; olad' 6 5pa<roi>
655.
Ol8£irovs dec. 21, 214 s.
o'lkcios w. gen. 437 b ;
w. dat. 450.
o!kos om. w. gen. 438.
olKTpds cp. 260.
ol'poi 453 ; w. gen. 429 e.
-010 Thessal. gen. 201.
otopca > olp.a.1 parenth.
313 e ; w. gen. 413.
o!os53; use 549 s, 563 s;
in condens. 555 s, 565 ;
in exclam. 564 b ; w.
inf. 671 : olds re 556 c ;
olov, ota, w. pt. 681.
o'Cs, oh, dec. 19, 21.
-ouridat.pl. 201 d. [679.
OL\opaL as pf. 612 ; w. pt.
oXLyos cp. 261 b, 262 b ;
w. art. 523 f : oXiyov
(delv) 665 ; dXiycp 486.
6Xos w. & wt. art, 523 e.
opvupi w. ace. 472 f.
opov & der. w. dat. 450 s,
w. gen. 442 a ; w. ical
705 c ; 6p.ot.bs eip.i const.
657 j ; S/xus w. pt. 662.
358
ovojia
INDEX I.
vp* § 797.
Svop.a in periphr. 437 c ;
ace, dat., 485 y.
6ir- in pron. & adv. 377.
8irov, oitol • ttou, iroi •
o5, of, 53 ; w. gen. 420 ;
interchanged 704.
'Oirovs dec. 17, 207 c.
Sirws adv. 53, 559 a,
624 e ; conj. 701 e,
624 s ; in ell. 626.
opdeo w. oVws, fxr), 626 ;
w. pt. 677.
ope'-yop-ai w. gen. 430 b.
6pvis dec. 224 e.
6p\eo(JLai w. ace. 477 b.
5s rel., dec. 28, 250 :
u,se as rel. 549 s, as
complem. 563 s ; attr.
552 s, Att. 554 a, in-
verse 554 c ; w. modes
640 s : 6? povXei 559 b :
8s as demonst. 518 f,
519 f : 8s possess. 252.
5 ; use 538 s.
8(ros53; use 549 s, 563 s;
in condens. 556, 565 ;
in exclam. 564 b ; w.
inf.671: oVovasindecl.
or adv. 507 e, f, 556 d ;
6'<ry 468 : 6<rr)fie'pai 551 i.
6<tt£ov, -ovv, dec. 16, 772.
8<rTis,6rts, 8tov, &c.,dec.
28, 254, 255 e : use as
rel. 549 s, as complem.
563 s ; x 8s 549 s; w.
modes 640 s : 8 ti fia-
66v (iradibv) 674 h.
8t« (brav 619 b) w. modes
640 s' ; w. sup., aor.,
553 b, 605.
6ti 701 i, j, n, 643 s ;
x ws 702 ; not elided
129 a ; redund. 644,
659 e ; repeated 714 ;
in anacol. 716 ; pos.
719 77 : w. sup. 553 c ;
6V1 fi-q 701 m .
ov4, 115 a; < of 217 b.
ov, of, i, dec. 27, 246 ;
encl. 787 ; use 539.
ov> ovk, o\>x, oi>xh 165,
685 c ; x fi-q 686 ;
interrog. 687 ; redund.
713 ; wt. fid 476 d :
ov fir} w. subj. or fut.
597,627; oti <pr}[ii, kc,
686 i ; otire, ov84, 701 a,
c, 713 b, c ; ov yap dX-
Xd, ov fxevroL (firjv) dX\d,
oi>x 6't 1 (8a ov,8ir as), "< '17 '.
ov8€ls(oiWefs240b)24:
ovdels 8ans ov 559.
ovkovv therefore 687 c.
oSv < ibv (&v d., 1.) 389 g,
685 c ; pos. 720.
oi!v€Ka 126, 557a, 701 j.
o«s dec. 17, 207, 778 c.
oi»Tos dec. 28, 252 : use
542 s; x6'5e543s; in
repetition, assent, 544;
in address 401. 3, 546 ;
pi. for sing. 489 d ; w.
art. 524 : ovroal, 252c.
oi»TO)(s) 164 ; x &Se 547.
6<J>€t\« in wish 638 g.
6<j>pa 701 e, 624, 53 v.
6tyi cp. 263 a ; w. gen.
420 ; w. ijv 571 d.
II 4, 137 ; changes 147 s.
iraidv dec. 18, 208.
irats dec. 17, 204,778 b.
iraXatds cp. 257 d.
irdXiv in compos. 166.
irapd (irapai 134, irdp
136) 686, 689 d ; in
cp. 511 a ; w. pass.
586 d; in compos. 699 g:
wdpa 699 e, 785.
IIapdprnp.a, App., 80.
iras dec. 23,729.2,778b,
793c ; w. gen. 416b ; w.
art. 523 e; w.rts548c;
w. rel. 550 f ; w. imv.
656 : trdv in compos.
166. [674 h.
irdo-x«575a'; TLiradwv;
irar^p dec. 18, 210,
208 f. [222 d.
IlaTpoicXos dec. 21,
iravw w. gen. 405 ; mid.
582 /3 ; w. pt. 677.
irelOw w. 2 ace. 480 c ;
w. dat. 455 g, 456.
IIcipaLcvs dec. 220 e.
ir&.as & der. w. gen.
445 c ; w. dat. 450.
irtp/n-tt w. dat. 450 b ;
w. 2 ace. 472g. [414b.
Wvtjs cp. 258 ; w. gen.
ircvOtKciis w. gen. 429 c.
ir£p 389 h, 685 c ; w. pt.
674 f; pos. 720: end.
787 d.
ir € pt (7r^ t £) 688, 689 f ;
not elided 129; as adv.
703 b: 7rept785; oiwepi
ir€pvo-i(v) 163 a. [527 a.
irqvtKa ; w. gen. 420 a.
•n-TJX^S dec. 19, 213 s.
irXetojv, -£uv, -eiaros, -elv,
261 a, d ; ir\elov as
indecl. 507 e, 511 c ;
TrXeZo^-eio-rajin cp.510.
irX£ov€KTT]s cp. 258 a.
irXe'ws dec. 236 b ; &
der. w. gen. 414 a.
ttXt]0os ace, dat., 485 7 ;
w. pi. 499 a.
ttXtjv w. gen. 406 ; conj.
701 m : ttXV el 710.
irXovo-ios, -Tt<a, w. gen.,
• 414 a. [ace. 479.
irve'o) w. gen. 436 c, w.
-irv^ dec. 224 h.
iroOev, iroi, ttov, ttus, 53 ;
w. gen. 420.
irotto) w. dat., 2 ace., 460,
480 b ; mid. 579, 581,
585; w.gen. 430,431b;
in periph. 475.
iroitrW|sl5, 366 d, 791b.
ir<5Xts dec. 19, 21, 217 g,
h, 222 c.
iroXiT€vo>, mid. 582 5.
iroXvs dec. 24, 236 ; w.
art. 523 f ; cp. 261 ;
w. ml 702 c : iroWov
431 a, 7roXX£ 468.
-rroppo), Trpdo-ft), w. gen.
405, 420 a.
iropepvpeos cp. 257 c
IIocr€i8<»v dec. 208 f,
211a.
trorifiroifiraSfkc, Xir6-
re; &c, 53, 563 s ; pos.
720; enel. 787 b: ttot<?
w. interrog. 389 i. [n.
irdrepos 376 s : -ov 701 i,
iroTvia, -va, fern. 238 b.
irovsdec. 17, 214 s, 231c.
irpaos dec. 24, 236 c.
irpiv const. 703 d.
irpd 688, 689 i ; in crasis
126:cp.262d;w.comp.
511 a ; irpb rod 519 b.
§797.
trpos
GREEK.
-tf)iv
359
irpds (irporl, ttotI, tt6t,
136) 688, 689 i ; in cp.
511 a ; w. pass. 586 d ;
as adv. 703 b ; in compos.
699 g; in accent. 788 e.
•irpocrjj dXXto w.gen. 436 c.
irpoo-T|K€i w. gen., dat.,
421,450; -ovabs. 675 d.
7rp6<r0e(i> 164 a), irpore-
pov, w. irplv 703 d.
irpoTgpos cp. 262 c, d.
<irpovpyov382 ; cp. 262 d.
irpcoros cp. 262 c, d.
irup dec. 14, 225 f.
-irois &v in wish 637 d.
P 4, 137 ; aspirated,
donbl., 93 d, 146,1 59 e;
changes of per 152 s.
pclSios cp. 261.
p^T«p dec. 18, 153.
pis dec. 18, 208.
2, o- or s, 4, 90. 1, 137 ;
corresp. to e 138, 142,
152s; final 160, 164 ;cr,
cri,<rcr<mute& 1 143.
craXirl£ei (sc. 6 a.) 571b.
cracks dec. 22, 213 ;
-17s, -cDs, cp. 258.
creavroi), aavTov, dec. 27,
244, 248 ; use 537.
-<r8a in 2 pers. 297 b.
-ctkov, -aicbfirjv, iter. 332,
a-Koiriia, mid. 5827 ; w -
6TTCOS, rf, 624, 626.
cros 252. 5 ; use 538.
<rotj>6s dec. 23, 232 ; -6s,
-fit, cp. 257, 263.
crir€os dec. 21, 222 d.
o-to%6s dec. 226 b.
c-Tox,d£o|i.cu w. gen. 430.
crii dec. 27, 246 s ; use
536 s; aov, croi, at, encl.
787 s ; aol ethical 462 e :
<ri57e389c. [442 a.
cruyy€VT|S w. gen., dat.,
o-u-yyi-yvticrKto const.657j.
a-vv (£w 170) 688, 689 b;
in compos. 166 ; w.
num. 240 f: compounds
w. dat. 451, 699 f $ w.
gen. 424.
crwcXovTi 671 c.
crvvoiSa const. 657 j.
crOs, ffr, dec. 14, 141
246 d, 247; use
encl. 787 s.
<rc}>€T€pos 252. 5, 538 s.
crooSpos cp. 257 a.
crcj>w,cr<j> W €,&c., 27,246 s.
"Si\r\[ia A\KfmvLKovi97 c;
'Attuc&v, lliv8apu<6v(Bot.-
ibrtou), 569 d.
crw^w w. gen. 405 a.
SwKpdrqs dec. 19, 213s.
<r«pa dec. 17, 206.
<r<os, crwos, dec. 236 d.
cr«TT|p dec. 208 f.
cra>cj>p to V cp. 259.
T4, 137; changes 147 s.
TcLXas cp. 259.
Tap.d = iyd) 428 b.
Taptasdec. 15, 195.
TavTTj adv. 380 c.
TavTov, tclvtS, 199 a.
Ta\vs, -€ws, cp. 261 b, e,
263 : T)}VTaxi-o-T7)v 483 d ;
ws Taxi-crra, &c, 553 b,c.
t« 389 C, 685 c, 701 a ;
pos. 720 ; encl. 787 d.
TcXevTao) w, gen. 405 ;
pt. as adv. 674 b.
tc'Xos adv. ace. 483.
-T€'os,verb.in, 269d, 374f;
w. dat. 458; const. 682,
572. [257 s.
-T€pos, -raros, cp. in,
TcVcrapes dec. 25, 240 e.
ttjXIkos, -ovros, -6o~de,
53, 252, 547'.
rffniU) mid. 579.
Tip. aw w. gen. 431 b.
Tipa>p60), mid. 579.
tIs indef. dec. 28, 253,
255 e ; pos. 548 b, 720,
520 b; encl. 787 b;
affixed 389 a : use 548 ;
w. pi. 489 d, 501; rlas
indecl. 507 e, g.
tIs interrog. dec. 28,
253,255 e ; use 563 s; w.
art. 531 a; in condens.
555 : ri yap, ri St, &c,
564 c ; tva rl 566 a.
Ticnra<j>6pvr)sdec. 225 d.
t6 -ye, rb xal rb, irpb tov,
519 b ; rb vvv elvai
665 b: Tol, ral, = oi, al,
28 j. [pos. 720.
cj>€, o <ptcri, <r<J>(v, 27, Tot encl. 685 c, 787 d ;
;' toios, -ovros, -babe, 53,
252, 199 a, 547.
to£€v« w. gen. 430.
-tos, verbal in, 374 e,
w. dat. 458.
toctos, -ovtos, -babe, 53,
252, 199 a, 547. [253.
TOV =S TWOS, &c, 28 f, g,
Tpdire^a dec. 15, 791 c.
Tpets dec. 25, 240 e.
TpiT|pT]s dec. 213 c, 219 a,
Tpta-ov Tj^iirdXavTov 242 e.
Tpoira), -ov, -ovs, 485 a.
rvyx&vo* w. gen. 426 s,
434 ; w. part. 677.
tvvvos, -ovTos, 53, 252 a.
t<3 th(wh)erefore 519 b.
*Y i|/iXdv 4, 98 b, 106 ;
v- 93 c, v- 93 c ; v < F,
eF, 138, 142, 217 b, c.
vPpicrr^s cp. 259 a.
tryi^S cont. 120 f.
v'8a>p dec. 206.
vlds dec. 21 ; om. 438.
-vpi, less Att. -vio, 315 a.
vpiv, 3pas, &c, 247 g, i.
im-dya) dav&Tov 431 d.
{rcraKov6>, -T//COOS, w. gen.,
dat, 432 g, 455 g.
vir&pyja w. gen. 425 ; w.
dat. 459 ; w. pt. 677'.
tnrep {vireip 134') 688,
689 j ; cp. 262 d.
•utto {viral, vir, 136) 688,
689 k ; cp. 262 d ; w.
pass. 586.
-■us adj. 213 c ; cp. 258.
vcrrcpeo), -ifw> -cubs, w.
gen. 408.
■iitrT€pos,-Taros, cp. 262 d.
#4, 137; 147 s, 159, 167.
<{>alvco, mid. 582/3.
oavepos elfxi 573 c.
cj>€pTcpos, -tcrros, &c,
cp. 262 b.
<p<?pft>, mid. 578 a, 585 :
<ptpe 656 b.
<j>€v684b; w.gen. 429 e.
oevryw as pass. 575 a.
oTjpl, (f>aalv 571 c ; t<f>rj
574 ; ov <py,ui 686 i.
cpOdvco, p. or w. pt. 677 f ;
w. Kal 705 c. [432 f.
<{>6ovc&> w. gen., dat.,
-cpi(v) old dat. 190, 163.
360
(fiikos
GREEK INDEX.
&4*\m> § 797.
IXos cp. 257 d, 261 e.
Xex|/ dec. 17, 151, 778.
op€«, mid. 582 £ ; or
0j/?OS, W. 07TCOS, fli],
624 s ; om. 626 s.
<J>povTi<rTT^s const. 472 j.
<j>v\ao-<ra>, mid. 579.
<J>v|t}jLos w. ace. 472 j.
<j>vo> w. gen. 412.
<J>»s dec. 17, 206, 224 f.
X 4, 137; 147 s, 159.
Xatpo) w. dat. 456.
XapUis dec. 23 ; cp. 258.
XaX*Jra(va> w. dat. 456.
Xopis dec. 203 a ; x*P LV
380 a, w. gen. 436 d.
Xelpdec. 18, 224 f: x ^-
pwv, -lo-tos, 261, 262 b.
Xoprfs dec. 16, 775.
Xpdop.ai w. dat, ace,
466 b, 478.
XP^ w. gen., ace, 473 b ;
W. inf. 595 : ipf. 611.
XPu£ w w - gen. 414 c.
XP'np-a in periph. 446 a ;
tL xpwa why 483 c.
Xpovos, gen. ' 433, dat.
469, 485 e, ace. 482.
XpvVeos dec. 23, 772 c.
Xp«s dec. 224 e, 207 a.
^4,137; < 7nr, pa, <p<r,
x|/av« \v. gen. 426. [151.
r ft piya 4, 98 c, 106 :
-» & -ju forms 270 c.
a> 109 s, in cont. 7, 118 d,
11$ 8 j in dec. lis.
<3, <o, 684 b : & in address
484,401.3; crasisl26.
w8c x oOtojs 547, 53.
ftSMj dec. 15, 195, 775.
wov dec. 16, 775.
ft)sproclit.786;use7lla,
53, 701 e, i, j, k ; w.
gen. 420 b ; w. dat.
462 d ; w. sup. 553 ; in
condens.558 b, 565 ; w.
pt. 598 b, 680, 675 e; fin-
al 624 s; complem.643s,
x#ri 702 a, om. 647 b;
in wish 648 d ; w. inf.
671, 513 d; w. adv.
711 ; w. num. 711b ;
as prep. 711 c ; in ell.
711 : eaTLv cos 559 a.
wo-irep 389 li ; w. pt. 680,
( 675e; in ell. 711.
»<rT€389j,787e; consec.
701 k, 671 d ; w. imv.
655; w. inf. 671, 513 d.
ft)v Ion. 131 e.
oxpcXeft) w. dat. 453 ; w.
ace. 472 b. [638 g.
»<{k\ov in wish, 611,
798. INDEX IL- LATIN AND ENGLISH.
This Index is designed, not only for prominent subjects and words, but also
for the authors most cited, and for abbreviations. The writings of Xenophon
are commonly cited without naming the author, and the Anabasis without
even naming the work (by book, chapter, and section, according to the usual
division: as, iv. 3. 12). 'The Iliad and Odyssey are cited by book-letter and
verse as numbered by Wolf, Bekker, &c. ; a capital referring to the Iliad, and
a small letter to the Odyssey (a. 25, for U. iv. 25; S. 134, for Od. iv. 134). In
Pindar, the references are made to the verses of Heyne; and in the Drama-
tists, to those ofDindorf. The Historians are commonly cited by book and
chapter, according to the usual division ; Demosthenes, by the pages and lines
of Reiske; the other Orators and Plato (including Timaeus Locrus), by the
pages and lines or division-letters of Stephens; &c. Figures indicating the
times at or about which the authors flourished are here subjoined to their
names, from the latest edition of Liddell & Scott's excellent Lexicon. It will be
understood that the year before Christ is denoted, unless the number is followed
by " A. D." In most cases, the meaning of the abbreviations used in this
work will be plain from their familiar use, or from the connection and the fol-
lowing list of words ; in other cases, special aid will be given below. For some
explanations applying to the Index itself, see § 797.
Absolute nom. 401 ; compt. & sup.
514; time 607; inf. 665, gen., ace.
Absorption of vowels 118. [(pt.) 675.
Acatalectic verse 743.
Accent 766 s ; final, recessive, reten-
tive, 769: rhythmic 741. See page 12.
Accusative 10, 186 d, 398, 485 d ;
local idea 470 : in appos. w. sent. 396 ;
of rel. attracted 554 a; subj. of inf.
666 ; abs. 675 ; w. verbal in riov 682 s ;
w. prep. 688 s. See page 12.
Achronic forms 590 a, 613 b, 660.
Active Voice 30, 271 e ; for pass. 575 ;
trans, and intrans., = mid., 577, 585:
Verbals w. gen. 444; w. ace. 472 j.
Actual sentence 61 f : mode 30 c, 613 ;
interch. w. contingent 654.
Acute accent 94, 767 e ; > grave 784 :
Additive particle 685 c. [syll. 768.
Address 57 ; voc. 484, nom. 401. 3.
Adjective 55, 173; dec. 22 s, 229 s;
num. 25, 239 ; pron. 28, 249 : compar.
§ 798. adju
LATIN & ENGLISH.
ATTR
361
256 : der. 373 ; compos. 385 s : synt.
492 s, 506 s: pos. 718 f, s: Adj. Clause
62 h; pos. 718 o. [circumst., 58.
Adjunct, prepos. x nude, complem. x
Adopted stems 358.
Adverb 55,685 ; num.52,241,pronom.
53, 377, charact., neg., interrog., &c,
685 s : cp. 263, 262 d ; der. 380 : synt.
685, 703 s • w. art. = adj. 526 ; attracted
554 d, 558 b; as prep'., as conn, and
non-conn., 703; used subst. 706: pos.
18 e, s.
Adverbial clause 62 h, pos. 718 p ;
ace. 483, 380, gen., dat., 380; phrases
529, 698; inf. 655; pt. 674 d.
Adversative conjunctions 701 b.
^olic dialect (Mol., M.) 82, 84, 87 a ;
opt. 293 e ; verse 750. [tor, § 85.
iEschines (iEschin.) fl. 345, Att. ora-
jEschylus (iEsch.) fl. 484, Att. tra-
gedian, § 85 : Agamemnon, Choephori,
Eumenides, Persae, Prometheus, Sep-
tem contra Thebas (Th.), Supplices.
Affixes, open x close, 172 c; nude x
euph. 183, 303: of dec. 11, 180 s, 20,
analyzed and compared 12 s : of pers.
pron. 27 e : of 9., subjective x obj., pri-
mary x sec.,imv., inf., partic, 32,35 s,
285 s, 4.8, 321 s; nude 290 a, 313, 320;
regular 303 ; union w. s. 304 s.
Afformatives 360, 32 f.
Agent, suff. of, 365 ; w. pass., gen.
586, 434, dat. 586, 461, 458, ace. 682 b.
Agesilaus, see Xenophon.
Agreement 63 a, 492s ; ace. to form x
sense 493 s ; of subst. 393, adj. 504,
pron. 505, verb 568.
Alcseus (Ale.) fl. 606, Mol. lyrist.
Alpha privative 385, 436.
Alphabet 1 s, 90 s ; hist. 97.
Alternative adv. 685 c ; conj. 701 d.
Anabasis, see Xenophon.
Anacoluthon 70 1 ; in synt. of appos.
396 c, nom. 402, adj. and pt. 504 b,
compt. 511, art. 532, fin. verb 644 s,
649 s, 655, inf. and pt. 659, 667 g, ver-
bal 683, particle 716.
Anacreon fl. 540, Ion. lyrist : poems
in imitation of, Anacreontica ( Anact.).
Analysis of sentences 57 s, 72 s, words
75 e, cp. 29, verb 32, affixes 12 s, 27 e.
32, 35 s, metres 78. [verse 751.
Anapaest 77 : anapaestic rhythm 742,
Anastrophe 71 a ; of accent 785.
Antecedent, def. or indef., 549 ; in
clause w. rel. or om. 551; attracted
553 s : clause un. w. rel. clause 555 s.
Antepenult 111, 767 f, 770.
Antistrophe 744 e.
COMP. GR. 16
Antithesis 6, 104 ; or contrast, 71 a.
Aorist 30 b, 267 c, 273 s ; w. <x changed
or om. 152, 306 : second 289, in pures
313 b ; stem 47, 336, 340 ; accent 780 s ;
redupl. 284 e; intrans. 338 b : synt.,
x def. and compl. tenses, 590 s ; as se-
quel 592 c, 605 b ; generic use 602 b,
603,605 ; gnomic 606 ; x ipf. as conting.
or indef. 615 s ; x pres. w. m>j 628 ; inf.
660, 598; pt. 674 e, 660 e; pass, and
mid. interch. 576; aor. sub. = fut. pf.
Aphaeresis 6, 103 c, 124 b. [617 c.
Apocope 6, 103 c ; in particles 136.
Apodosis 62 j ; see Conclusion.
Apollonius Ehodius fl. 200, Epic poet.
Apologia (Apol.), see Xenophon.
Aposiopesis 68 e, 532.
Apostrophe 6, 103 d, 127, 135 b ;
accent 774, 788 b: rhetor. 70 g.
Apposition, -tive, 58 ; dir., pred.,
modal, &c, 393; partitive 395, 417:
synt. 393 s ; w. sentence 396, w. voc.
485 a, by synesis 394 c : appositional
verb 59 a, 437.
Apud (ap.) = quoted in.
Aristophanes (Ar.) fl. 427, Att. come-
dian, § 85 : Acharnenses, Aves, Eccle-
siazusae, Equites, Lysistrata, Nubes,
Pax, Plutus, Ranae, Thesmophoria-
ztisae, Vespae : Aristophanic verse 753.
Aristoteles (Aristl.) fl. 347, philos-
opher (§ 85 b) : Rhetorica, &c.
Arrangement, log., rhet., rhythm.,
64; hyperb. 71 ; dir. or normal x indir.
or varied, periodic x loose, 718; why
varied 719 s.
Arsis 741 ; affecting quant. 736 c.
Article, prepos. x postpos., 28, 249 s ;
incrasisl25; proclit. 786: synt., use
as ffen.defin.518 s : as art. proper 520 s ;
generic, 522 : limiting 523 s ; order of
description x statement 523 ; w. avrdc
540 b ; w. an<f>i, ntpi, 527 a ; in contrast,
&c, = poss. pron., 530 : repeated 523 b,
j, 534.4; omitted 533 s.
Aspirate mute 4, 137 : breathing 93 :
aspiration om. 159, 343, 167 ; trans-
ferred 159 g, 167. [554.
Assimilation 104 ; of rel. or antec.
Asyndeton 68 d, 707; Eng. x Gr.707j.
Attenuation of vowels 107, 114 : at-
tenuated stems 341.
Athenaeus fl. 228 A. D., scholar.
Attic dialect 82, 85 ; old, mid., new,
> Common, 85 a, b : dec. 200 ; gen.
220 f; redupl. 281 d, 357.2; opt. 293 c;
imv. 300 d; fut. 305; accent 790.
Attraction 70 q : in synt. of appos.
396 b, ace, &c, 474, agreement 500,
362
ATTR
INDEX II.
DAOT
§798.
adj. 508 s, pron. 552 s, 565, verb 573,
649 d, inf. and pt. 65V, 666 s, particle
715, 702 d; affecting pos. 719, 553, 662.
Attribute 60 b, 492 b.
Augment, syll. x temp., 277 ; rules
278 s; in dial. 284; in accent 783.
Authority in prosody 726 b, 733.
Auxiliary verbs 274, 285 a, 317, 679.
Base in cp. 29, 256 a ; in cj. 289 e.
Bekker's Edition of Homer, 1858
Bceotic (Bceot., b.) dialect 82. [(Bek.).
Breathings 4, 93 ; < f, 2, 141 ; in
dial. 167 c: marks 98 b.
Breve (short syllable) 725 a.
Cesura, of foot, verse, masc, fem.,
&c, ca?sUral pause, syll., 745; affect-
ing quantity 736 c.
Cases, dir. or indir., right or oblique,
subjective, obj., or resid , 10, 179,
397s; affixes lis, 180s; hist. 186s:
use 397 s, generic 485, in denoting
place or time 470, 482 e, absolute 675,
w. prep. 689 : Latin 399 b, c.
Catalectic verse 743.
Causal conjunctions 701 j.
Causative verbs 379, 473, 577, 581.
Cf. = confer, compare, consult.
Characteristic 172 d : exponents 66.
Chief = principal clauses 626 : chief
= primary tenses 267 b : -ly (ch.).
Choral odes 744 e.
Chorus using sing. 488 a.
Chronic x achronic forms 590 a.
Circumflex accent 94, 767 e, g; 771 :
-flexed syll. or vow. 768 ; long 771, 726.
Circumstantial adjunct, or circum-
Cj. as conjugation, [stance, 58 d, s.
Clauses 57 ; kinds 62, 58 h ; pos.
718 o, s, 721. [compos. 388 b.
Close vowels 107 a : affixes 172 c :
Cognate vowels 4, 110 b : consonants
4, 137 b, 167 : themes 338 d.
Collectives 55 ; w. pi. 499.
Comedy, comic (com.), 85 s.
Common dialect 85 a : gend. 174 :
commonly (comm.).
Comparison (cp.) 29 (anal.), 256 s ;
by use of adv. 510 ; accent 776 : see p.
11: Comparative (compt., comp.) w.
gen., w. v, &c, 408, 511 s; w. dat. of
measure 468; abs.,*oo, as pos., 514 s:
Comp. conjunction >? 701 1.
Compilative 57, 484 s : -part 60.
Complementary adjunct, or comple-
ment, 58 d, e, 63 f : pron., adv., 66 d,
563 s : conjunction 701 i : clause 643 s.
Complete tenses 30 b, 267 c ; redupl.
280; auxil.and nude forms 317 s, 679 a:
x def. and indef. 590, 599: special
uses 599; preter. 268, 600; as pres. or
fut. 610. [and parts 62 b, g.
Complex modification 59 : sentence
Composition 359, 383 s ; dir. x indir.
loose x close,double, &c, 387 s ; vowel
383 a ; elision 128 a, 282 a ; augm., &c ,
282; synt. relations 722; accent 783.
Compound word 359 b ; verb 387,
699: sentence 62 c: vowel (diphthong)
108 : system 267 f : constr. 68 f, 495.
Concession expr. by pt. or w. conj.
674 f, 701 g. [631 s ; omitted 638.
Conclusion x premise 62 j ; forms of,
Condensation, 555, 565.
Condition 62 j ; see Premise: Con-
ditional conj. 701 f ; sentences, forms
of, 631 s, rel. 641 ; for oth. forms, 639.
Conjugation (cj.), distinctions 30,
265 s ; hist. 271 s ; anal. 32, 35 s, 277 s ;
paradigms 37 s, 48 b; prefixes 277,
284; affixes 285, 48, 321 ; stem 47,
49, 336: quant. 728 s; accent 776, 780.
Conjunctions (conj.) 55, 65 s, 700,
classes, origin, 701 ; om. 707 ; repeat-
ed 714; pos. 718 a, 720.
Connecting vowels, or connectives,
of dec. 12 s, 183, cp. 29, 256 s, cj. 32 h,
35 s, 290 s, 326, compos. 383.
Connective exponents, conj. x conn,
pron. or adv., primary x sec, 66 : pos.
718 a, 720.
Consecutive conj. 701 k, 671 d, e.
Consonants 4, 137 s ; in Gr. alph.
98; old 138; changes 139 s; final 160;
movable 162 ; dial, and poet. var. 167 s ;
added or om. in s. 217, 344 s, 348.
Construction, personal for impers.
573 : Construct™ prcegnans 704.
Contingent sentence 61 f ; modes 30 c ;
613 s; particle 618,685 c: Contingen-
cy, pres. x past, fut., 613 s.
Contraction (cont, ct.) 7, 117 s, 131;
quant. 726; accent. 772: in versif.
741 b : Contr. verbs 42, 309, in Lat. 43.
Coordinate vowels 110 b ; consonants
137 b, 168; sentences 62 c ; conjunc-
tions 701: Coordination 62c ; for subord.
Copula 60 b ; omitted 572. [705.
Copulative conjunctions 701 a.
Correlatives, pronominal, 53, 377.
Corresponding vowels and conso-
nants 138 ; connectives 66 f.
Cp., in § 50 = compounded ; in the
Indexes = comparison, [accent 773.
Crasis 117, 124, 133; quant. 726;
Ct. = contracted.
Cyropsedia, see Xenophon.
Dactyl 77 : -ic verse 742, 747.
798.
DAT!
LATIN & ENGLISH.
FLUE
363
Dative 10, 186 f, 190, 398, double
office 399 : w. prep. 688 s, w. comp.
verbs 699 f, g. See page 12.
Declarative sentence 61.
Declension 10 s, 173 s; distinctions
173; three methods 180; gen. rules
181; affixes lis, 183; hist. 186; par-
adigms compared w. Lat. 14, &c. :
Dec. I. 14 8, 189, 193; Dec. n. 14, 16,
187, 199; Dec. in. 14, 17, 186, 202;
dial. 20 s; irreg. 21, 223; def. 227:
adj. 22, 229; num. 25, 240 s; pt. 26,
234; pron. 27, 239: quant. 728, ac-
cent 775 s. [verbs 337.
Defective nouns 227 ; adj. 238 ;
Definite tenses 30 b, 267 c ; x indef.
590 s ; for oth. tenses 602 s : article 520 :
relatives 549. [479.
Definitive, old, 249, 516 : noun (ace.)
Degrees of compar. 256 ; use 510 ;
interch. 515 : Degree-sign 256 a, 29.
Demonstrative pron. and adv. 28,
53, 252, 377 ; synt. 542 ; om. bef. rel.
551 f; in attr. 552 s; for rel. 562.
Demosthenes fl. 355, Att. orator, § 85.
Dependent sentences 62 b, 58. 3, h.
Deponent, mid. x pass., 266 c, 576 b.
Derivation, -tive, 54, 359 s ; euph.
changes 361; quant. 731; accent 789 s.
Diaeresis 6, 105 ; accent 772. 3 ;
mark 96 b, 110 a: in versif. 745 h.
Dialects 81 s : variations in orthog.
and orthoepy 130, 167, dec 20 s, &c,
cj. 48, 284, 321, accent 790 ; Dia-
lectic Forms {D. F.).
Digamma = Vau ; see F, before Z,
in Greek Index: verbs 345.
Diminutives, gend. 175 ; der. 371.
Diphthongs 4, 106 ; prop, x improp.
108 ; corresp. 115 a; resolved 105, 132 ;
quant. 526, 737 ; in accent. 767.
Direct cases 10, 179, 397, 186 c, in
accent. 775: complement, obj., 58 e:
discourse, quot., 62 k, 643, w. indir.
644, 659: compounds 388 : order 718.
Distinct sentence, verb, mode, 62 a,
30 c; in depend, clauses, x incorp.,657.
Distinctive adv. 685 c : conj. 701 c.
Distributive pronouns 55, 501.
Division of syllables 111.
Doric dialect (Dor., d.) 82, 86 s : fu-
ture 305 d, 325 b : accent. 790.
Double accusative 480 : consonants 4,
137 a, d, 1 70; affecting quant. 725,
734: d. cons, verbs 41, 270 c, 311.
Doubtful vowels 4, 106, 726. 3.
Dual number 178 ; old plur. 186 g,
271 c; in cj. 299: used w. pi. 494.
Elegiac poets 83 : verse 749.
Elements of the sentence 57 : of the
word 172; in dec. 183, cp. 256, cj. 32,
der. 359 s, compos. 383 s.
Elision, see Apostrophe.
Ellipsis 68 ; in synt. of appos. 394 s,
gen. 418 b, 438, dat. 450 d, 462, ace.
476, adj. 506, 511b, art. 527, 533,
pron. 536, 551, 555, 562, 565, verb 571,
626, 636, 647, inf. 668, pt. 676, 678 c,
particle 707.
Emphatic changes in s. 346 : parti-
cles 685 c : repetition 69 b : position
Enclitics 787 ; accent. 788. [719 a.
Ending, see Flexible.
Epenthesis 6, 103 ; see Insertion.
Epic, or Homeric, language (Ep., e.)
Episema 1, 91, 98 d. [83.
Epithet x predicate adj. 59 a, 492 b.
Equestri, De Ee, see Xenophon.
Equal, or quadruple, rhythm 742.
Essential x inflective 172 a, c.
Ethical dative 462 e.
Etymology 172 s ; tables 9 s.
Euphonic changes 99 ; of vowels 7,
113 s, of consonants 8 , 139 s, 147 s:
affixes, dec, cj., 183, 187, 303, 271 f.
Euripides fl. 441, Att. tragedian,
§ 85 : Alcestis, Andromache, Bacchae,
Cyclops, Electra, Hecuba, Helena,
Heraclidae, Hercules Furens, Hippo-
lytus, Ion, Iphigenla in Aulide, Iphi-
genlain Tauris, Medea, Orestes, Phoe-
nissae, Khesus, Supplices, Troades.
Exclamation, nom. in, 401 b, gen.
429 f, dat. 453, ace. 476 a, pron. or
adv. 564 b, inf. 670, interj. 684 b : ex-
clamatory sentence 61 d.
Exempli gratia (e. g.), for example.
Exponents for words 65, sentences
66; pos. 718 d, 720: exponential ad-
junct 58 c. [3 2 4c, 48 c.
Extension of vowels 103 b, 135,322c,
Feet 77, 740 ; interch. 741 b, 747,
751, 755; ictus 741c; caesura 745.
Feminine gender 174 s ; in adj. 232 ;
w. masc. form 234 : cassura 745 c.
Figures affecting letters and sounds
6, 99: of syntax, of rhetoric, 67 s.
Final consonants 160, movable 162 :
conjunctions 701 e : clauses, modes in,
624 : syll. of verse 738 : accent 769.
Finite modes, sentences 62 a ; synt.
of, 568 s; interch. w. incorporated
657, 659, 671.
Flexible endings, or flexives, of dec.
12, 183 ; of cj. 32 i, 295, 328.
Flourished (of authors ; fl.).
Fluents (X, P ) 4, 137.
364
FORM
INDEX II.
INFL
§798.
Formation 172, 359 ; of simple words
362, compound 383; quant. 731; ac-
cent 789: formative * radical 172 b.
Fractional numbers 242 d, e.
Fragment (Fr.). —French (Fr.).
Future indef. 30 b, 266 s, 273 s ;
subjective tense 584; wants sub. and
imv. 269 b; liquid 152; Att., Dor.,
305, 325 b: second 289: synt. 596 s;
for imv. 597 ; gnomic 606 ; for pres. or
past 610 ; in final clause 624 b ; inf.
598, 660 ; pt.674 e, expr.purpose 598 b ;
mid. for act. 584, for pass., v. v., 576 a,
c : def. and complete 596 a : Contin-
gency 614.
Future Perfect 30 b, 267 e, 273 e,
319: use 601. [490 s.
Gender 174 ; rules 175 s : in synt.
General or indef. premise, 634, 641.
Generic use 63 g, 392 a ; of cases,
485, tenses 602 s, modes 651, connec-
tives 705: time for fact 602 c, con-
tingency 614 b : article 522.
Genitive 10, 186 e, 398, 485 b: w.
art. 523 c; in pron. 538; abs. 675; w.
prep. 688 s. See page 12.
Gentile x patrial noun or adj. 368 c.
Gnomic use of pres. 602 d, aor., &c,
Government, or regimen, 63. [606.
Grammatical x logical parts 60. [768.
Grave accent 94, 767 e, 784 : syllable
Hdt. = Herodotus.
Hellenica (Hel.), or Historia Grseca,
see Xenophon. [pated 756 a
Hephthemim 740 b, 745 c ; antici-
Herodotus (Hdt.) fl. 443, Ion. his-
torian, § 83. [748.
Heroic (Epic) poetry 83 : verse 743,
Hesiodus (Hes.) fl. 800 ?, poet (Ep.):
Opera et Dies, Scutum Herculis, The-
Heteroclites 223, 225. [ogonia.
Heterogeneous nouns 223, 226.
Hexameter 743, 748 : -pody 740 b.
Hiatus, how avoided, 99 s, 117 s,
162, 217 ; 190; in poetry, 746 a, 737 s.
Hiero, see Xenophon.
Hippocrates fl. 430, medical writer
in Ion., § 83. [ondary tenses 267 b.
Historic present 609 : historical = sec-
History of Greek lang. 81, 359,
orthog. 97, dec 187, pron. 246, 249 s,
cp. 264, Cl. 271, 336, accent 789.
Homerus fl. 900 ?, Ep. poet, § 83 :
Ilias, Odyssea, Hymni (in Apollinem,
Bacchum, Cererem, Martem,Mercuri-
unij Venerem), Batrachomyomachia.
Hypallage 70 r, 474 a.
Hyperbaton 71, 719 s.
Hypercatalectic verse 743.
Hypothetical period 62 j, 631 s.
Iambus, Iamb, 77 : Iambic rhythm
742, verse 755. [part of a work.
Ibidem (lb.) = in the same work or
Ictus in pronunc. 79 c : metrical 741.
Id est (i. e.) = that is.
Idem (Id.) = the same author.
Illative, or inferential, adverbs 685 c.
Imitative verbs 378 c.
Immediate = nude adjunct 58 c : im-
mediate, or included, x causative
verbs 473, 582 /3.
Imperative (imv.) 30 c, 269 s, 272 e,
655; in perf. 318, 599 d; x sub. w.
nrj 628 : sentence 61 c.
Imperfect (impf.,ipf.) 30 b, 267, 271 d ;
x aor. 591 s ; x aor. and plup. as
conting. or indef. 615 a, 616 b, in wish
638 b, g; for aor. or plup. 603 c, 604,
612, pres. 611.
Impersonal verbs 571, pass. 589 ; inf.
and pt. 657 i ;' pt. abs. in ace. 675 :
verbal 682.
Improper diph. 4, 108 : redupl.357.3.
Impure vowel, affix, stem, word, 112.
Imv. = Imperative.
Inceptive verbs 350, 379 a.
Incorporation, -ated sentence, verb,
mode, x distinct or finite, 62 a, 30 c,
657. See Infinitive, Participle.
Indeclinable (aptote) 227 a.
Indefinite (indef.) pron. andaefa. 27 s,
53, 245, 253, 548 : rel. 549 : subject of
verb 571, inf. 667 h : tenses 30 b, 267 c ;
x def. 590 s, complete 599 ; how sup-
plied 603: action 616: premise 634.
Independent sentence 62 e : elements
57 f : nominative 401.
Indicative (ind.) 30 c, 269, 271 s :
synt., x sub. and opt. 613; expr.
suppos. contrary to fact 615, habit w.
av 616, purpose 624, wish 638; in
hypoth. period 631 s, 634 s ; in indir.
disc. 643 s; generic use 651.
Indirect cases 10, 179, 186 c, 397 s :
complement, obj. 58 e: compounds
388: disc, or qubt 62 k: order 718 r.
Infinitive 30 c, 269, 272 : synt. 657 s ;
x pt. 657 d, k ; in indir. disc. 659 ; re-
lation to time 660 ; as neut. noun, w.
orwt. art., 663 s; of specif, adv., abs.,
665; w. ace. 666, other cases 667;
redund. or om. 668 ; as imv., &c, 670 ;
w. connectives 671 : pos. 718 1 ; accent
780 s.
Inferential, or illative, adverbs 685 c.
Inflection 172 ; three periods 276.
Inflective x essential 172 a, c.
§798.
INSE
LATIN & ENGLISH.
OBJE
365
Inseparable particles 385, 252, 688 e.
Insertion of cons, to prevent hiatus
99 s, 217, 190; of e in contr. 120 i; of
P, mid. mute, 146 ; for metre 171 ; of
<r, 17, &c, in cj. 307, 311; of v in s.
351. 1 ; of vowel and cr in compos. 383.
Intellective sentence 61 : modes 30 c,
613 s.
Intensive verbs 379 b : adv. 685 c.
Interchange, -ed (interch.).
Interjection 55, 684b.
Interrogative pron. or adv. 28 g, 53,
253, 564; w. art. 531; doubled 566 b;
pos. 718, 720: particles, dir., indir.,
altern., 685 c, 687 : sentence 61, ex-
pressing wish 597.
Intransitive use of act, esp. in sec-
ond and complete tenses, 577 b, 338 b.
Inversion 71 a : inverse attr. 554.
Ionic dialect (Ion., 1.), old, mid.,
new, 82 s: forms in 3 pi. 300 d, 329:
feet and verse 77, 764: accent. 790.
Iota subscript 109 : form of verbs 349.
Ipf., impf., = Imperfect.
Irregular nouns 223 : adj. 236 : cp.
262 : verbs 50, 336 s.
Isocrates ft. 380, Att. orator, § 85 b.
Iterative pron., see avr6$ : form in cj.
Kindred vowels 114 b. [332.
Labials 4, 137 ; changes 147 s : in
Dec. in. 17, 203: 1. verbs 38 s, 270 c.
Lacedaemonioruni Respublica (Lac),
see Xenophon.
Laconic dialect 82, 141 a.
Language, significant elements 55,
gen. synt. 56 s; Indo-European 81.
Last syllable of verse common 738.
Late (1.), i. e. during the long period
of decline which followed the loss of
freedom.
Lesbian dialect 82, 84, 87 a, 790 b.
Letters, Gr., Heb., Lat., 1 s, 90, 98-
Limiting article 523 s.
Linguals 4, 137 ; changes of and w.,
147 s; in Dec. in. 17, 204, contr. 207:
lingual verbs 39, 270 c.
Liquids 4, 137 ; changes of and w.,
144 s, 168 s; Dec. in. 18, 208: liquid
verbs 40, 152, 311 b, 342. 3, 347.
Local quantity 725, 734 s.
Logical parts 60 : order 64.
Long vowel 4, 106 ; = 2 short 115,
725 ; shortened bef. vowel 737 ; form-
ing 2 tone-places 767 : syll., by nature
or pos, 725 s. [718 t.
Loose compounds 388 b : structure
Lucianus n. 160 ? A. D., essayist and
wit: De Historia Scribenda, Deorum
Concilium, Dialogi Deorum (D. D.),
Deorum Marinorum (D. Mar.), Mor-
tuorum (D. M.), Parasitus.
Lysias fl. 411, Att. orator, § 85.
Magister Equitum, see Xenophon.
Masculine 174 ; form as fem., esp. in
du. and pi., 234 d, e, 489 c, 490 : cce-
Megarian dialect 82. [sura, 745 c.
Memorabilia Socratis, see Xenophon.
Metaplasm, -asts, 223 s.
Metathesis 6, 104, 145 ; in cj. 308,
342; inder. 361 d.
Metre 740 s : metrical ictus 741.
Middle Mutes 4, 137; ins. 146b;
changes 146 s ; see /3, y, 6 : Stem 47,
386 : Voice 30, 266 ; synt. 575s, 578.
Modal sign 65 : appos. 393 c, 394 b.
Modern Greek pronunc. 79. 2.
Modes 30 c, 265, 269 s ; hist. 272 ;
affixes 286 s ; conn, vowels 290, 326 ;
flex, endings 295, 328: synt. 613 s.
See page 12.
Modi lied stems 49, 339 a.
Modifiers 57 g, 58 ; pos. 718 s.
Monosyllables, roots 340. 3, 359 f;
quant. 729. 2 ; accent 782 e, 786, 793 c.
Movable consonants 162.
Mutes 4, 137 ; changes of and w.,
147 s, 167 s; m. and liquid as affect-
ing quant. 735 : in Dec. m. 17, 203 :
in cj. 38 s, 270 c, 347.
Nasals 4, 137 ; changes of and w.,
139 s: nasal form in cj. 351.
Nature, long or short by, 725 s.
Negative pron. and adv., object, x
subj., 53, 686; as interrog. or affirm.
687'; redund. w. indef, inf., &c, 713;
ov jat? W. sub. or fut. 627 : sentence 61 e.
Neuter (neut, n.) 174 ; dec. 188 ; in
adj. 231: as generic gend. 491, 496 c,
502; pi. w. sing, verb 569; impers.
571 e : as adv. or ace. of effect 380 a,
New stem in cj. 47, 336. [483, 478.
Nominative (nom., n.) 10, 186 d, 398 s,
485; for voc. 182, 401 c; in appos. w.
sent. 396 : as subject 400,' 568 ; am. 571 ;
by attr. 573, 657: independ. 401.
Noun 55 ; dec. 14 s, 193 s ; deriv.
363 ; compos. 386 ; synt. 393 s ; quant.
728 s; accent 775 s, 791.
Nude affixes, dec, 183, 187, cj. 303,
313, 320, 326 e, 335 : adjunct 58 c.
Number 178, 270 ; signs 12, 33 a;
use and interch. 488 s, 494 s.
Numerals 25, 52, 239 s ; how com-
bined 242 ; letters as, 1, 91.
Obelisk ( t ) 96 c. [448, 470 s.
Object -58 e, 63 f; dir. x indir. 397 s,
366
OBJE
INDEX II.
PRES
§798.
Objective affixes 36, 285 : voice 271 e,
274: cases 10, 397 s; gen., adj., 444g;
dat. 448 s : negative 686, 53 in.
Oblique cases 179 b ; as adv. 380.
Odes, choral, 744 e.
(Economicus, see Xenophon.
Old stem 47, 386. [rhet. 68. 2.
Omitted fom.) : omission as fig. of
Open vowels 107 a : affixes 172 c.
Optative 30 c, 269, 272 d, Att., JEol.,
293 c, e; conn. vow. 293: synt., x
ind., sub., 613; law of sequence 617;
in final clauses 624, the hypoth. per.
631,' rel. and temp, clauses 640,
complem., indir. disc, 643; potential
636; for imv. or ind., esp. fut., 637,
654 a; of wish 638, 637 d, 648 d; of
doubt 648 ; generic conting. mode, for
sub., 652, 654 a. [blended 644.
O ratio recta x obliqua 62 k, 643 ;
Order, direct or normal x indirect
or varied 718; why varied 719.
Orthotone 5, 788 g.
Other Examples (O. E.).
Oxytone 768 ; w. grave mark 784.
Palatals 4, 137 ; changes of and w.,
147 s, 169 s: in Dec. in. 17, 203: in
cj. 39, 270 c, 349 s. [162 s j 1 252 d.
Paragoge 6, 103 : paragogic cons.
Parenthesis, -thetic, 71 c.
Paroxytone 768.
Participle 30 c, 269 s, 272 b, c ; dec. 26,
205, 234: synt., 657 s, 673 s; as adj.,
w. anacol., 504; x inf. 657 d, k; rela-
tion to time 660; circumst., as adv.,
674 s, w. dat. 462, expr. purpose 598 b,
674 e, condition 635, concession 674 f,
abs., impers., 675; complem. 677:
dejin., desc, 678 ; w. aux. verb 679 ; w.
is, &c, 680: pos. 718 m; accent 780 s.
Particles elided 128 ; in compos.
384 s, 389 : synt., classes, 684 s ;
interch. 703; ellips. 707; pleon. 713;
attr. 715; anacol. 716; combin. 717:
pos. 718, 720; accent 785 s, 794.
Partitive appos. 393 d, 395 : gen.
415 s: adj. 419 f.
Parts of sentences 56 s.
Passive Voice SO; synt. 575s, 586s;
w.gen , dat, 586, 434 b, 461; impers.
589: Verbals 364, 374; w. dat. 458.
Pastoral, or bucolic, caesura 745 d.
Patrials x gentiles, der., 368, 375 e.
Patronymics, der. 369.
Pause ciesural 745 c : final 738.
Pentameter 743, 749.
Penthemim 740 b, 745 c.
Penult Ilia; in accent. 768 s.
Perfect (perf., pf.) ; see Complete.
Period, hypothetical, 62 j, 631 s.
Periphrasis 69 d ; in synt. of gen.
and adj. 437 c, 499 d, ace. 475, art
527 s, verb 598, 637.
Perispome 768 : verbs 309.
Person 246, 270 ; signs 246, 249 ; in
cj. 33 a, 271: agreement 492, 496;
change 503, 539 c, 644.
Personal Pronouns 27, 243, 247 ;
hist. 246; end. 787: synt., 536 s; eth.
dat. 462 e : Construction for impers.
Pf., perf., = Perfect. [573.
Phrases x clauses 56 a.
Pindarus fl. 490, lyric poet, § 84 :
Isthmia, Nemea, Olvmpia, Pythia.
Plato fl. 399, Att. philosopher, § 85 :
Apologia, de Republica, &c.
Pleonasm 69 ; in synt. of gen. 446,
dat. 462 e, ace. 477, pron. 505 b, cp.
510 s, art. 523 j, verb 574, inf. 668,
prep. 699, neg., &c, 713.
Pluperfect (plup., pip.), aug. 280 s ; ea
>i7, ei, 291 c ; cont. 615 : see Complete.
Plural (plur., pi., p.) 178, 186, 271 ;
signs 12, 33 a: interch. or joined w.
sing, or dual 488 s, 494 s, 499 s, 569.
Plutarchus fl. 80 A. D., biographer
and philosopher: Pompeius, &c.
Poetic (poet., po., p.), poetry, 83 s.
Polysyndeton 69 f.
Position of words and clauses 718 s,
721 e : in prosody 725, 734 s.
Positive degree 256 ; joined or interch.
w. sup. or compt. 512, 515 : sent. 61 e.
Possessive pronoun 28, 252. 5, 538 ;
w. or implied in art. 524, 530 e: geni-
tive 443. [cles, &c, 720.
Postpositive article 249 b, 250 : parti-
Potential opt., ind., 636 a.
Precession of vowels 107, 114 s, 130 ;
in contr. 115 s; in aflix 195; in s.
of dec. 114 d, 217, of cj. 341; &c.
Predicate 57 ; -part, log. x gram., 60 ;
pos. 718 c, s: adj., &c, 59 a.
Prefixes 172 c; of verbs 32, 277 s,
Preformatives 32 c, 356. [284.
Premise 62 j ; forms 631 ; indef. or
gen. 634 ; om. 636.
Preposition 55 ; elided 128 ; apoc.
136; w. and wt. case as adv. 382,
703: synt. 688 s, 487; in compos.,
tmesis, 699, 486; constr. prseg. 704;
pos., accent, 718 d, 785 s, 794. 5.
Prepositional adjunct 58 c, 706.
Prepositive vowel 106 : article 249 b.
Present definite 30 b, 267 : generic
tense, gnomic, 602 s; historic, pro-
§798.
PRET
LATIN & ENGLISH.
SUBJ
367
phetic, 609 ; for perf. 612 ; x aor. w.
ixr, 628 : contingency 613 s. [600.
Preteritive use, verbs, &c, 46, 268,
Primary tenses 30 b, 267 b, 271 s ;
followed by sub. 617 : affixes 32 i, 35 s,
286 : elements of sent. 67.
Primitive x derivative 350.
Principal word 57 h : sentence 62 b.
Prior tense (impf., aor., plup.) 615.
Proclitics, or atona, 786.
Prohibition w. /aiJ 628.
Prolepsis 71 b, 474 b, 657. [377.
Pronominal correlatives 53, 362 e,
Pronoun 55, 27 s, 243 s, 509, 535 s.
See Article; Substantive, Personal,
Adjective, Indefinite, Relative, &c.
Pronunciation, four methods, 79.
Proparoxytone 768, 770.
Proper diphthong 4, 108 : redupl.
357 : name w. or wt. art. 522 g, 533 a.
Properispome 768, 771.
Protracted Stems 346 s.
Protasis = premise 62 j.
Pt., part., = participle.
Pure vowel, affix, stem, word, 112 :
nouns in Dec in. 19, 212 s; verbs
42 s, 270 c, 309, 313.
Q. v. = quod vide, which see.
Quadruple, or equal, rhythm 742.
Quantity, natural x local, 725 s ; in
dec. 728 s, cj. 728, 730, der. 731.
Quotation or disc, dir. x indir., 62k.
Radical x formative 172 b, 359.
Rare (r.). [769.
Recessive x retentive or final accent
Reciprocal pronoun 27, 244. 3.
Redundant nouns 233 b : verbs 338.
Reduplication 280, 273 e, 284 ; Att.,
281 d ; in compos. 282 ; in 2 aor. and
fut. 284 e, s: in s., proper, &c, 357.
Reflexive pronoun 27, 244, 248 ; use,
dir. x indir., 537 s, 513 f, 541 h. .
Regular affixes of verb 303, 35 s.
Relative Pronoun and Adverb 28, 53,
250, 254 s, 377: synt. 549 s; attr.
522 s ; condens. 555 ; rel. for defin. and
conn, particle 557: w. another conn.,
&c , 561 : Clauses 640 s. [Xenophon.
Republica Atheniensium, De, see
Residual cases, 10, 397 s : dat. 465 s.
Retention, fig. of synt., 70 v. [769.
Retentive x recessive or final accent
Rhythm 740 s ; affecting pos. 718 g.
Root 172 b, 340. 3, 359.
Rough breathing 93 ; w. init. v and p
93 c, d ; < F, 2, 141, 345 ; mutes 4, 137 ;
changes of and w., 147 s, 159, i67«
Sappho fl. 611, iEol. lyrist : Sapphic
verse 750. 4. [738 b, 744 b.
Scanning 746 d : continuous scansion
Scholia, notes of Greek grammarians.
Scilicet (sc) = namely.
Scripta Sacra (S. S.) : Septuagint
(Lxx.), Psalms, Proverbs, &c; New
Testament, Matthew (Mat., Mt.), Mark
(Mk.), Luke (Lk.), John (Jn.), &c.
Second tenses and systems 289 ; rel. to
stem 47, 336 b, 340. 4; use 338 b.
Secondary tenses 30 b, 267 b, 271 d, s;
conting. and indef. 615 s ? w. opt. 617 ;
w. av 618 ; in hypoth. per. 631 s ; expr.
wish 638 : affixes 32 i, 35 s, 286.
Semivowels 4, 137 ; four old, 138 ;
changes of and w., 139 s, 147 s, 1 68 s.
Sentence 56 ; parts 57 s ; kinds, con-
nection, 61s; condensed 555, 565 ; pos.
718 n, s, 721 : words in appos. w., 396 :
sentential analysis hi s, 72 s ; exponents
Sequence of modes, law of, 615. [p^.
Sequens (s) = following.
Short vow. and syll. 4, 106, 725 s ;
elided 127; >long in dec 194, 213 s,
cp. 257, cj. 275 d, 288 a, 310, 314, 347,
compos. 386 c [139 s, 151 s, 169 s.
Sibilants 4, 137 s ; changes of or w.,
Signs of relation or case, number,
and gender, in dec, 12 ; of degree, in
cp., 29; of person, number, voice,
mode, and relation, in cj., 32 i, 33; of
tense 32 g, 35 s.
Simple sentence 62 e : vowels x diph-
thongs 4, 106: words 359: der. 362 s;
accent 791s: succession 62 d, 705 a.
Singular (sing., s.) 178 ; interch. or
joined w. pi. 488 s, 499 s, 569.
Smooth, or soft, breathiw) 93; for
rough 93 c, 167 c ; < f 141 : mutes 4,
137 ; changes of and w., 147 s, 1 67 s.
Sophocles 11. 468, Att. tragedian,
§ 85 : Ajax, Antigone, Electra, (Ecli-
pus Coloneus, (Edipus Tyrannu*, Phi-
Ipctetes, Trachinise ; Fragmenta.
Specification, ace. of, 481 : nom. in,
Spirants 4, 137s. See 2, F, I. [402b.
Stanza x system 740 a, 744.
Stem (s) x root 172 ; of noun 180b:
ofuer6 270b, 32, 47, 336 s.
Stem-mark, or characteristic, 172 d.
Subject of sentence 57 ; -part, log. x
gram. 60 ; pos. 718 c, s : of zoord 63 a,
492, finite verb 400, pass. 586, inf. 666;
ora., subj. of appos. 394, adj. 506, art.
527, rel. 551, verb 571, pt. 676.
Subjective cases 10, 397 s : gen., adj.,
444 g: affixes 285, 32 i, 35: sense of
middle 582: neg. 686, 53 IV.
3,68
SUBJ
INDEX II.
ZEUG
§798.
Subjunctive (sub.) vowel 108 : mode
30 c, 269, 272 d; x ind., opt., 613,
269c, 617 g; w.prim. tenses 617; w.ok
combined 619; in final clauses 624.
as fut. 627, as imv. 628 ; in hypothi
per. 631 s, as indef. prem. 634 ; "in rel
and temp, clauses 640 s ; of doubt 647 :
for opt. 560, 653, fut. 617 b.
Subordination, -ate clause, 62 b, h ;
see Dependent: conjunctions 701. 2.
Subscript, see I in Greek Index.
Substantive 55, 57 s; dec. 173 ; cp.
262 d; der. 362 s; synt. 393 s: pron.
27, 243; synt. 536: verb w. gen. 437;
w. dat. 459 ; om. 572, 676, 678 c, in
conden. 555,565 : clause 62 h, 66 d, 643.
Succession, Simple, 68 d ; early use
Suffixes in der. 360. [705 a.
Superlative 256 s, 510 s ; w. gen.
419 c ; w. dat. 468 ; w. positive, iv toIs,
el?, doubled, 512; w. reflex. 513 f;
abs., " of eminence," interch., 514 s.
Syllables, division 111 ; union 117 ;
quant. 725 c; accent 766 s: syllabic
augment 277 : syllabication 111.
Syllepsis x zeugma 68 f, g, 495 s.
Symposium, or Convivium, - see Xen-
Synseresis 6, 105. [ophon.
Syncope 6, 103, 140, 144 ; in Dec. in.
207, 210, 217 ; in fut. 305 b ; in s. 342 j
in der. 361 d: metrical 743 g, 763 a.
Synecdoche 70 j, 481, 587. 2.
Synesis 70 p ; in appos. 394 c, adj.,
pron., verb, 498 s, 569, tense 608 s,
mode 653 s.
Synizesis, or Synecphonesis, 117 b,
220 d, 222 b, 323 c, 746 b, c. [744.
System in cj. 267 f ; in versif. 740 a,
Tau form in cj. 352.
Temporal numbers 52, 243 : augment
277 s : conjunctions 701 h : clauses 641.
Tenses 30 b, 265, 267 ; systems 267 f,
289 b ; formation 31 ; hist. 271 s ; signs
32 g, 288, changed 152, 305 s, 325;
base, or tense-stem, 289 e; first x sec-
ond 289, 336, 338 b, 340: synt. 590 s.
Tense-sign, -stem, -system, see Tenses.
Tetrameter 743. [cj. 270 b.
Theme 172 e; in Dec. 111. 202 ; in
Theocritus fl. 280, Dor. poet, § 86.
Theognis fl. 544, Ion. elegiac poet.
Thesis 741 ; quant, in, 736 d, 737.
Theta form in cj. 353.
Third future, see Fut. Perf. [§ 85.
Thucydides fl. 423, Att. historian,
Time of verb 267 ; absolute x relative,
607 ; generic 602 c, 614 b : of vow. and3 :
syll. 725 : cases expr , 482 e* 485 e.
Tmesis 388 c, 699 d, h, s.
Tone, or accent, 766 s : places 767.
Transitive verb 55, 486 c ; or intrans.
577 : sense 70 c. [740 b, 745 c.
Trimeter 743 ; Iambic 756 : triemim
Trochee 77 : -aic verse 742, 760.
Ultima 111 a ; in accent. 767 s.
Union of syllables 117 s ; accent, in,
Usually (usu.). [722 s: vow. 383 a.
V. I. = varia lectio, various reading :
v. v., vice versa = and the converse.
Variable stems 49, 336 s : varied or-
der 719.
Vectigalia, Venatio, see Xenophon.
Verb 55, 57 c ; cj., distinctions 30,
265 s; classes, in -w x - M i, 270 c, de-
ponent 266, irregular, &c, 336 s, 378 s,
appositional 59 a; hist. 271 ; forms ana-
lyzed 32, translated 34 ; prefixes 277 ;
affixes 35 s, 285, 48, 325 s ; generai par-
adigm 37, 48 b ; mute, liquid, &c, 38 s,
304 s; contract 42, 309. 48 c, 321s; in
-yu 45, 313, 335 ; preteritive 46, 268,
317s; stem-49, 336; catalogue 50: der.
378; compos; 387: synt , agreement
568 s, 492 s, w. subj. om., impers., 571 ;
om. 572; pers. for impers. 573: use
of voices 575, tenses 590. modes 613 :
quant. 728, 730; accent 776, 780.
Verbal 362 e ; noun 363, adj. 269 d,
374, adv. 381 : w. gen. 444, dat. 458,
ace. 472 j; impers. 682.
Verse, versification, 740 s, 766. 2 ;
kinds 742 s ; caesura 745 ; dact. 747,
anap. 751, iamb. 755, troch. 760.
Vision, fig. of, 70 u, 609.
Vocal elements 4, 106 s.
Vocative 10, 179, 186 g ; same w.
nom. 181 s, 203, 208 f; in Dec. 1. 194. 2:
synt. 484 s : accent 775, 779.
Voices 30, 265 s ; hist. 271 e, 274 :
synt. 575 s. [655. See Imperative.
Volitive sentence 61 : mode 30 c,
Vowels 4, 106 s ; open x close 107 s ;
pure x impure 112; precession, kin-
dred, 114; union 117 s; dial. var. 130:
connect, of dec. 12, 183 s, of cj. 32 h,
35 s, 290, 326, of compos. 383 ; v. form
in cj. 355 : quant. 725 s ; accent 767 s.
With (w.). —Without (wt.).
Xenophon fl. 401, historian, biogra-
f)her, and essayist (Att., § 85): Agesi-
aus, Anabasis, Apologia Socratis,
Cyropaedia, De Re Equestri (Eq.),
Hellenica (Hel.), or Historia Graeca,
Hiero, Lacedaemoniorum Rcspublica,
Magister Equitum, Memorabilia So-
cratis, (Economicus, De Republica
Atheniensium, Symposium, Vectiga-
lia, Venatio.
Zeugma x syllepsis 68 f, g, 495 s.
799. TABLE OF SECTIONS.
In each division below, the numbers in the first column indicate paragraphs or sections
In former editions of the Grammar ; while those in the second refer to corresponding sec-
tions in the Revised and Compendious Editions. A small s signifies and the following.
Old.
New.
Old.
New.
Old.
New.
Old.
New.
Old.
New.
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
14 8
94s
83 s
186
153
254 s
217
304
306
364s
16
96
86
187
154
249 c
V
148 a
307
366
17 s
79
87
188
155 s
256 s
218 s
310
308
367
21
2
88
189
157
258
220
345
309
368
97
89
190
158
259
221
307
310
369
22s
98
90
191
159
260 s
222
311
311
370
24
106 s
91
192
160 s
262
223
308
312
371
25
108 s
92
194
162 s
263
224
313 s
313
372
26
110
93
195
164
265
225 s
315 s
314
373 s
27
113
94
196
165 s
30a
227
313 b
315
375
28
114
95 s
197 s
266
P
340
316
376
29
115
97
199
167 s
267
228 s
50
317
377
30
117
98
200
169
269
233
268
318
378
31
118
99
201
170
270
234
317
319
379
32
119
100
202
171s
271
235
318
320
380
33s
120 s
101
203
176 s
272
236
312
321
381
38
124
102
204
178 s
273
237 s
320
322
382
39
125
103
206
180
274
239
319
323
722 k
40
126
104
207
181
275
240
317
324
383
41
127 s
105
208
tf
328
241
321
325
384 s
42
129
106
210
297 c
242
322
326
386
43 s
130
107
211
182
297
243
323
327
387 s
45
131
108
209
183
275 d
244
324
328
389
46
132 s
109
204 s
N.
326 a
245
325
329
391
47
134
110
212
184
293
246
326
56 s
48
135 s
Ills
213 s
185
276 a
247 s
328 s
330
392
49
137
113
215
313 s
249
332
331s
393 s
50
138 s
114
216
S
326 e
250
333s
333s
395 s
61
151
115
219
*,S
327
251
335
335
488
N.
137 d
116
220
186
276 b
252
50
336
489
52
147
117 s
217
187
277
253.1
325 d
337
494
53
148
119
218
188
278
2
338
397
54
150
120
221
189
279
254s
47
339
398
55
151
121
222
190
280
336
340s
399
56
152
122
223
191
281
340
342
400
57
153 s
123
224
192
282
257.2
337
343
401
58
156
124
225
193
283
3
338
344
402
59.7
145 a
125
226
194
284
258
339
345
403
8
157
126
227
195
285
259
341
346
404
60
158
127
228
196
286
260 s
342
347 s
405
61
149
128
229
197
287
263
343 s
349
406
62
159
129
230
198
288
264
345
350
407
63
160
130
231
199
289
265
346
425
64
145 s
131
232
200
305
266 s
347
351
408
65
161
132
233
201
306
271
348
352
409
66
162 s
133
234
202
290
272
352
353
410
67
164
134
235
289 e
273 s
349
354
411
68
165 s
135
236
203
291
277 s
351
355
412
69
167 s
136
237 s
204
292
3491
356
413
70
169 s
137 s
239 s
205
293
279 s
350
357
414
71
171
139
241
206 s
294
282
353 s
358
415
72
172
140
242
208.1
290a
283 s
357
359
416
73
173
141
243
2
313
287 s
355
360
417
74
174
142
247
3
320
289 s
351
361
418
75
175
143
246
209
295 s
296
350
362
419
76
176 s
144 s
244
210
297
297
349 y
363
420
77
178
248
211
298
298
352 s
364
421
78
10
146
245
N.
163 b
299
353a
365
422
179
147
249
212
299
300
345
366
423
79
180
148
250
213
300
301
358
367
424
80
181
149
251
214
301s
302 s
359 s
368 s
426
81
182
150 s
252
215
303
304
362
370
427
82
183 s
152
253
216
309
305
363
371
428
370
SECTIONS COMPARED.
§800.
Old.
New.
Old.
New.
Old.
New.
Old.
New.
Old.
New.
372
429
437 s
481
515
646
570 s
592
627
667
373
430
439
482
516
547
572
593
628 s
671s
374
431
440 s
483
517 s
548
573
594
629.1
656 c
375 s
432
442 s
484
519
549
574
595
630
673
378 s
433
444
504
520 s
550
575
603
631s
674
380 s
434
492
522 s
551
606
633s
677
382
435
445
491
524
552
576
609
634/3
657 k
383 s
436 s
446
495 s
525
553
603
635
674
386
439
447 s
506
526 s
554
577 s
599 s
636
678
387
440
449
507
y
559 b
580
605
637
679
388
441
450 v
502
528
555
581
596
638 s
675 s
389
442
507 e
2
559 c
582
601
640
680
390
443
451
489
529
556
583
598
641a
504 b
391a
437 b
491
530
557
584 s
610
657 h
P
443 b
452
508
531
558
586 s
613 s
642 s
682
I
438 b
453
499
532
560
588
618 s
644
683
436 c
454
498
it.
556 d
589 s
614 s
645
684
392 s
444
455
500
533
561
591s
269
646
685
394
445
456
508
534
562
617
647
686 s
395
446
457 s
509
535
563
593
615
648
688
396
447
459
504 b
536 s
564
V
620
649 s
689 s
397
448
460
510
537 3
551 g
594
616
707
398
449
461
611
538
565
595 a
637 b
712
399
450
462
512
539
564
(3
637 c
652 s
699
400
451
463 s
513
539.2
566
i
647 d
654 s
700 s
401s
452
465
514
540 s
567
627
656
705
403
453
466
515
543
568
596
623-
657
703
404
454
467 s
516 s
544
495 s
597 a
597
658
706
405
455
469
520
a
501a
598
628
659
704
406
456
470 s
521s
545 s
571
599 s
638
660
707
407
457 s
472
523
547
672
648 d
661
708 s
408
459
473
624
548
499
601
624
662
711
409
460
474
625
549
569 s
602.1
650 s
663
709 s
410
462
475
526
550
500
2
625
664 s
713
411
463
476
527
551
573
3
626
667
714
412
464
477
528
552
674
603
631
668
715
413
395 b
478
529
553 s
575 s
604
635 s
669 s
716
414
465
479
530
555
677
605
632 s
671
717
415 s
466
480
531
556
575 a
605.5
639
672
718 d
417
461
481s
530
557
578
606
640 s
N.
719 e
418
467
.484
532
558
579
607 s
643
673.2
718 a
419.4
468
485 s
533 s
559
580 s
609
644
a
720
5
466 b
490 s
518
560
582
610
645
/3
719 r,
420 s
469
492 s
519
561
583 s
611
643
y
708 f
422
470 s
494
505
562
586
•647
674.4
621 f
423 s
472
495 s
489 s
563
587
612
655
5
484
425
474 s
499
505 b
564
588 s
613
656
675 s
725
426 s
476
500
503
565
590
614 s
657 s
678 s
726
428
472 f
501s
535s
566
602
616 s
661s
681
727
429
472 g
503 s
537 s
567
608 s
617.5
657 i
682
728
i
506 s
539
/3
606
618 s
658 s
683
729
430
473
507.7
537 c
7
611
620 s
663
684
730
431
477
508 s
540 s
568
607
623
665
685
731
432
478
512
542
643 b
624
668 s
686
732
433
479
513
543 s
660
625
670
687
733
434 s
480
614
545
569
591
626
666
688
734
800. "Let me repeat, that so far from dissuading from the study of
Greek as a branch of general education, I do but echo the universal opin-
ion of all persons competent to pronounce on the subject, in expressing my
own conviction that the language and literature of ancient Greece constitute
the most efficient instrument of mental training ever enjoyed by man ; and
that a familiarity with that wonderful speech, its poetry, its philosophy,
its eloquence, and the history it embalms, is incomparably the most val-
uable or intellectual possessions." — Marsh's Lectures on tJic Eng-
lish Language.
the end.
AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS
W1U1 . BE ^r^/oTTE CUE ^hTpENALTV
THIS BOOK ON THE DATE THg pouRTH
^rN C O R TO^ O 0O S °o" N THE SEVENTH OAV
OVERDUE.
OCT 17 1939
l&
|^&V9-Z9»-
m
■
\\? ; '-C$
'/